Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Changes In Branch core-8-6-branch Excluding Merge-Ins
This is equivalent to a diff from 32a9cba038 to 9986fdc267
|
2025-03-17
| ||
| 10:12 | Add [91d0e9d8] to changes Leaf check-in: 9986fdc267 user: oehhar tags: core-8-6-branch | |
| 10:04 | Ticket [91d0e9d8] MS-Win: Withdrawn Tk transient windows can reappear in Windows taskbar preview check-in: eff58ccd7f user: oehhar tags: core-8-6-branch | |
|
2020-10-27
| ||
| 07:08 | Rename "trunk" to "main". Add "trunk" propagating tag for backwards compatibility check-in: 0f77b70d50 user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk, main | |
| 01:25 | Merge 8.6 Closed-Leaf check-in: 32a9cba038 user: marc_culler tags: trunk | |
|
2020-10-26
| ||
| 08:58 | Merge 8.6 check-in: 88e0ce578b user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk | |
|
2020-10-25
| ||
| 20:11 | Adjustment for Sierra. Closed-Leaf check-in: 77a51c320b user: culler tags: bug-5cc72e002c | |
Changes to .fossil-settings/encoding-glob.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | win/buildall.vc.bat win/makefile.vc win/rules-ext.vc win/rules.vc win/targets.vc win/rc/*.bmp win/rc/*.cur win/rc/*.ico win/rc/*.rc | > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | win/buildall.vc.bat win/makefile.vc win/mkd.bat win/rmd.bat win/rules-ext.vc win/rules.vc win/targets.vc win/rc/*.bmp win/rc/*.cur win/rc/*.ico win/rc/*.rc |
Changes to .fossil-settings/ignore-glob.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | */Makefile */autom4te.cache */config.cache */config.log */config.status */tkConfig.sh */wish* | | | > > > | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | */Makefile */autom4te.cache */config.cache */config.log */config.status */tkConfig.sh */wish* */tktest */versions.vc */version.vc */libtk.vfs */libtk*.zip */tkUuid.h doc/man.macros html macosx/configure win/Debug* win/Release* win/*.manifest win/nmhlp-out.txt win/nmakehlp.out unix/tk.pc unix/Tk-Info.plist unix/Wish-Info.plist unix/Credits.html |
Added .github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE.md.
> > > | 1 2 3 | Important Note ========== Please do not file issues with Tk on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tk issues are hosted in the [tk fossil repository on core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/tktnew); please post them there. |
Added .github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md.
> > > | 1 2 3 | Important Note ========== Please do not file pull requests with Tk on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tk issues (including patches) are hosted in the [tk fossil repository on core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/tktnew); please post them there. |
Added .github/workflows/linux-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 |
name: Linux
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/unix
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
build:
runs-on: ubuntu-22.04
strategy:
matrix:
compiler:
- "gcc"
- "clang"
config:
- ""
- "--disable-shared"
- "--disable-xft"
- "--disable-xss"
- "--enable-symbols"
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl 8.6
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }})
run: |
sudo apt-get install tcl8.6-dev libxss-dev libxft-dev
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT --with-tcl=/usr/lib/tcl8.6" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "TOOL_DIR=$(cd tcl/tools;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "BUILD_CONFIG_ID=$OPTS" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: "."
env:
CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.config }}
COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }}
OPTS: ${{ matrix.compiler }}${{ matrix.config }}
- name: Configure (opts=${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Build Test Harness
run: |
make tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Test-Drive Installation
run: |
make install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Install"
exit 1
}
- name: Create Distribution Package
run: |
make dist || {
echo "::error::Failure during Distribute"
exit 1
}
- name: Convert Documentation to HTML
run: |
make html-tk TOOL_DIR=$TOOL_DIR || {
echo "::error::Failure during Distribute"
exit 1
}
- name: Discover Version ID
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc' }}
run: |
cd /tmp/dist
echo "VERSION=`ls -d tk* | sed 's/tk//'`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Upload Source Distribution
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc' }}
uses: actions/upload-artifact@v4
with:
name: Tk ${{ env.VERSION }} Source distribution (snapshot)
path: |
/tmp/dist/tk*
!/tmp/dist/tk*/html/**
- name: Upload Documentation Distribution
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc' }}
uses: actions/upload-artifact@v4
with:
name: Tk ${{ env.VERSION }} HTML documentation (snapshot)
path: /tmp/dist/tk*/html
test:
runs-on: ubuntu-20.04
strategy:
matrix:
compiler:
- "gcc"
config:
- ""
- "--disable-xft"
- "--enable-symbols"
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }})
run: |
sudo apt-get install tcl8.6-dev libxss-dev libxft-dev xvfb
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT --with-tcl=/usr/lib/tcl8.6" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: "."
env:
CFGOPT: ${{ matrix.config }}
COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }}
- name: Configure ${{ matrix.config }}
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt
xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 10
|
Added .github/workflows/mac-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 |
name: macOS
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
xcode:
runs-on: macos-15
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/macosx
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare checked out repositories
run: |
touch tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
mkdir build
echo "BUILD_DIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "DESTDIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: .
- name: Build Tcl
run: |
make all
working-directory: tcl/macosx
- name: Build
run: |
make all install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
make TK_NO_STDERR=1 test | tee out.txt
nmatches=$( grep -c "Failed 0" out.txt )
if [ $nmatches -lt 4 ]
then
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
fi
timeout-minutes: 30
clang:
runs-on: macos-15
strategy:
matrix:
symbols:
- 'no'
- 'mem'
options:
- '--enable-aqua'
- '--disable-aqua'
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/unix
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare checked out repositories
env:
SET_DISPLAY: ${{ contains(matrix.options, '--disable-aqua') }}
run: |
touch ../generic/tkStubInit.c ../doc/man.macros
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
echo "USE_XVFB=$SET_DISPLAY" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Add X11 (if required)
if: ${{ env.USE_XVFB == 'true' }}
run: |
brew install --cask xquartz
sudo /opt/X11/libexec/privileged_startx || true
working-directory: .
- name: Build Tcl
# Note that macOS is always a 64 bit platform
run: |
./configure --enable-64bit $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Configure"
exit 1
}
make all || {
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Build"
exit 1
}
make install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Install"
exit 1
}
working-directory: tcl/unix
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }}
- name: Configure (symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} ${{matrix.options }})
# Note that macOS is always a 64 bit platform
run: |
./configure --enable-64bit $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" --disable-xft || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} ${{matrix.options }}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
if [ $USE_XVFB == true ]; then
function runXvfb {
PATH=$PATH:/opt/X11/bin
Xvfb $1 &
XVFB_PID=$!
echo Launched Xvfb $1 as process $XVFB_PID >&2
trap "echo killing process $XVFB_PID... >&2; kill $XVFB_PID" 0
export DISPLAY=$1
sleep 2
}
else
function runXvfb {
echo Xvfb not used, this is a --enable-aqua build
export TK_NO_STDERR=1
}
fi
( runXvfb :0; make test-classic; exit $? ) | tee out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test (classic)"
exit 1
}
( runXvfb :0; make test-ttk; exit $? ) | tee out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test (ttk)"
exit 1
}
cat out-classic.txt | grep -q "Failed 0" || {
echo "::error::Failure in classic test results"
exit 1
}
cat out-ttk.txt | grep -q "Failed 0" || {
echo "::error::Failure in ttk test results"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 20
- name: Carry out trial installation
run: |
make install || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Install"
exit 1
}
|
Added .github/workflows/win-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 |
name: Windows
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
msvc:
runs-on: windows-2022
defaults:
run:
shell: powershell
working-directory: tk/win
# Using powershell means we need to explicitly stop on failure
strategy:
matrix:
config:
- ""
- "OPTS=symbols"
- "OPTS=static"
- "OPTS=static,staticpkg"
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl 8.6
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Init MSVC
uses: ilammy/msvc-dev-cmd@v1
- name: Make Install Location
working-directory: tcl
run: |
echo "TCLDIR=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
cd ..
mkdir install
cd install
echo "INSTALLDIR=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Build Tcl (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc release install ${{ matrix.config }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
working-directory: tcl/win
- name: Build Tk (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc all ${{ matrix.config }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Build Test Harness (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc tktest ${{ matrix.config }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Run Tk Tests (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
nmake -f makefile.vc test-classic ${{ matrix.config }} | tee out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
nmake -f makefile.vc test-ttk ${{ matrix.config }} | tee out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
env:
CI_BUILD_WITH_MSVC: 1
shell: bash
timeout-minutes: 10
- name: Build Help (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc htmlhelp ${{ matrix.config }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Install (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc install ${{ matrix.config }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
gcc:
runs-on: windows-2019
defaults:
run:
shell: msys2 {0}
working-directory: win
strategy:
matrix:
config:
- ""
- "--enable-symbols=mem"
- "--enable-symbols=all"
- "--disable-shared"
steps:
- name: Install MSYS2
uses: msys2/setup-msys2@v2
with:
msystem: MINGW64
install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
- name: Checkout Tcl 8.6
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare
run: |
touch tkStubInit.c
touch "${HOME}/forWinDialog-5.12.7"
mkdir "${HOME}/install_dir"
echo "INSTALL_DIR=${HOME}/install_dir" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: generic
- name: Configure and Build Tcl (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$INSTALL_DIR" || {
cat config.log
echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure"
exit 1
}
make all install || {
echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build"
exit 1
}
echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-64bit ${{ matrix.config }}
working-directory: tcl/win
- name: Configure Tk (${{ matrix.config }})
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/INSTALL_DIR" "--with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-64bit ${{ matrix.config }}
- name: Build Tk
run: |
make all tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tk Tests
run: |
make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt
make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 10
|
Changes to .gitignore.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | *.res *.sl *.so .fslckout Makefile Tk-Info.plist Wish-Info.plist autom4te.cache config.cache config.log config.status config.status.lineno html manifest.uuid _FOSSIL_ */tkConfig.sh */wish* | > > | | | > | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | *.res *.sl *.so .fslckout Makefile Tk-Info.plist Wish-Info.plist Credits.html autom4te.cache config.cache config.log config.status config.status.lineno doc/man.macros html manifest.uuid _FOSSIL_ */tkConfig.sh */wish* */tktest */versions.vc */version.vc */libtk.vfs */libtk*.zip */tkUuid.h libtommath/bn.ilg libtommath/bn.ind libtommath/pretty.build libtommath/tommath.src libtommath/*.log libtommath/*.pdf libtommath/*.pl |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to .project.
1 2 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> <name>tk8.6</name> <comment></comment> <projects> </projects> <buildSpec> </buildSpec> <natures> </natures> |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted .travis.yml.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to ChangeLog.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | * generic/tkObj.c (GetPixelsFromObjEx): [Bug 3431491]: Use a bit of type hackery to allow numbers to be interpreted as coordinates (most notably on a canvas) without reinterpreting via a string. 2011-10-27 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org> * generic/tkInt.h: [Bug 3410609]: Change the event mechanism | | | 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 | * generic/tkObj.c (GetPixelsFromObjEx): [Bug 3431491]: Use a bit of type hackery to allow numbers to be interpreted as coordinates (most notably on a canvas) without reinterpreting via a string. 2011-10-27 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org> * generic/tkInt.h: [Bug 3410609]: Change the event mechanism * unix/tkUnixEvent.c: for <KeyPress> events to use the keysym * unix/tkUnixKey.c: returned by XLookupString in preference to the one that appears in the raw X event at any level. This change allows binding to ISO_Level3_Shift-ed characters, composed characters, and similar beasts. KeyRelease events still work as they did before, as does Tk with input methods disabled. 2011-10-13 Jan Nijtmans <nijtmans@users.sf.net> |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 | * library/demos/mclist.tcl: Added support for arrow indicators to show which way a column is being sorted. Corrected determination of which fonts to use for measurements. 2009-03-25 Jan Nijtmans <nijtmans@users.sf.net> * doc/wish.1: Bring doc and demos in line with | | | 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 | * library/demos/mclist.tcl: Added support for arrow indicators to show which way a column is being sorted. Corrected determination of which fonts to use for measurements. 2009-03-25 Jan Nijtmans <nijtmans@users.sf.net> * doc/wish.1: Bring doc and demos in line with * library/demos/hello: https://wiki.tcl-lang.org/page/exec+magic * library/demos/rmt * library/demos/square * library/demos/tcolor * library/demos/timer * library/demos/widget * win/tkWinMenu.c: Eliminate a few compiler warnings on mingw * win/ttkWinXPTheme.c: Spacing |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 | 2008-01-30 Donal K. Fellows <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk> * doc/canvas.n, doc/listbox.n, doc/message.n: [Bug 1882495]: Fix erroneous listing of "standard" options. 2008-01-29 Joe English <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net> | | | 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219 5220 5221 5222 5223 | 2008-01-30 Donal K. Fellows <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk> * doc/canvas.n, doc/listbox.n, doc/message.n: [Bug 1882495]: Fix erroneous listing of "standard" options. 2008-01-29 Joe English <jenglish@users.sourceforge.net> * library/treeview.tcl: Fix bug in Shift-ButtonPress-1 binding (error if no current focus item; reported on c.l.t.) 2008-01-29 Donal K. Fellows <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk> * doc/ttk_*.n: [Bug 1876493]: Adjusted handling of the standard options part of the Ttk manual pages so that they are documented in the correct location. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2002.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 | Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it was redundant. * unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of inputContext to null. * win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build | | | 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 | Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it was redundant. * unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of inputContext to null. * win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build all binaries before running (otherwise an error often occured). 2002-03-28 David Gravereaux <davygrvy@pobox.com> * win/.cvsignore (new): * win/lamp.bmp (new): * win/makefile.vc: * win/nmakehlp.c (new): |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2004.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
807 808 809 810 811 812 813 | * doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the default canvas origin. [Bug 956681] 2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <GeorgePS@XMission.com> * generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified | | | 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 | * doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the default canvas origin. [Bug 956681] 2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <GeorgePS@XMission.com> * generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified slightly to fix a bug that occured when TK_XIM_SPOT was defined as 0. Thanks to Joe Mistachkin for reporting this bug. 2004-07-05 Donal K. Fellows <donal.k.fellows@man.ac.uk> TIP#158 IMPLEMENTATION * tests/bind.test: Allow Win apps to distinguish keys |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 | * win/configure.in: * unix/tcl.m4: correct HP-UX ia64 --enable-64bit build flags 2003-02-13 Kevin Kenny <kennykb@users.sourceforge.net> * doc/wish.n: Added language to describe the handling of the | | | 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 |
* win/configure.in:
* unix/tcl.m4: correct HP-UX ia64 --enable-64bit build flags
2003-02-13 Kevin Kenny <kennykb@users.sourceforge.net>
* doc/wish.n: Added language to describe the handling of the
end-of-file character \u001a in script files. [Bug 685505]
2003-02-10 Jim Ingham <jingham@apple.com>
* macosx/tkMacOSXCursor.c (TkMacOSXInstallCursor): Set all theme
cursors using SetThemeCursor or SetAnimatedThemeCursors.
(TkGetCursorByName): Use the theme cursors for arrow, ibeam, etc. Allow
animatedCursor{NUM} form for an animated cursor with count.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to README.md.
1 2 | # README: Tk | | > > > > > > > > > | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | # README: Tk This is the **Tk 8.6.17** source distribution. You can get any source release of Tk from [our distribution site](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/). 9.0 (production release, daily build) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml?query=branch%3Amain) <br> 8.6 (this release, daily build) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/linux-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/win-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions/workflows/mac-build.yml?query=branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) ## <a id="intro">1.</a> Introduction This directory contains the sources and documentation for Tk, a cross-platform GUI toolkit implemented with the Tcl scripting language. For details on features, incompatibilities, and potential problems with this release, see [the Tcl/Tk 8.6 Web page](https://www.tcl-lang.org/software/tcltk/8.6.html) or refer to the "changes" file in this directory, which contains a historical record of all changes to Tk. Tk is maintained, enhanced, and distributed freely by the Tcl community. Source code development and tracking of bug reports and feature requests take place at [core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/). Tcl/Tk release and mailing list services are [hosted by SourceForge](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/) with the Tcl Developer Xchange hosted at [www.tcl-lang.org](https://www.tcl-lang.org). Tk is a freely available open-source package. You can do virtually anything you like with it, such as modifying it, redistributing it, and selling it either in whole or in part. See the file `license.terms` for complete information. ## <a id="tcl">2.</a> See Tcl README.md Please see the README.md file that comes with the associated Tcl release |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to changes.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 | 10/18/96 (new features) A -menu option has been added to the toplevel widget command, which allows a menu to operate as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the menubar is displayed accross the top of the main monitor, just like with other applications. Under Windows and Unix, the menu is attached to the toplevel window. Also, changed some semantics. Tearoff menus will now reflect changes to the menu it was | | | 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 | 10/18/96 (new features) A -menu option has been added to the toplevel widget command, which allows a menu to operate as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the menubar is displayed accross the top of the main monitor, just like with other applications. Under Windows and Unix, the menu is attached to the toplevel window. Also, changed some semantics. Tearoff menus will now reflect changes to the menu it was torn off from, and are deleted when the master menu is deleted. Tearoffs also reflect more look-and-feel of the platforms they are running on. (SRP) 10/31/96 (bug fix) Under Windows, missing system cursors would generate an error instead of falling through to the Tk cursor of the same name. (SS) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 | 2017-08-08 (bug)[28d0b8] Follow ICCCM advice on X selection protocol (donchenko) 2017-08-08 (bug)[4966ca] Scidb race in notebook tab selection (cramer) --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 | 2017-08-08 (bug)[28d0b8] Follow ICCCM advice on X selection protocol (donchenko) 2017-08-08 (bug)[4966ca] Scidb race in notebook tab selection (cramer) --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details 2017-08-24 (bug)[f1a3ca] Memory leak in [text] B-tree (edhume3) 2017-08-24 (bug)[ee40fd] Report [console] init errors (the) 2017-08-24 (bug)[3295446] Improve history visibility in [console] (goth) 2017-08-24 (bug) canvas closed polylines fully honor -joinstyle (vogel) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 | 2019-11-17 [90d555] workaround NSFontManager bad selections (culler) 2019-11-19 (new) Partial Emoji support in text displays (nijtmans,culler) - Released 8.6.10, Nov 21, 2019 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details | > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > > > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > | > > > | > > > > | > > > > | > > > | > > > > | > > > | > > > > > > > > | 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 7766 7767 7768 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 7775 7776 7777 7778 7779 7780 7781 7782 7783 7784 7785 7786 7787 7788 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 7795 7796 7797 7798 7799 7800 7801 7802 7803 7804 7805 7806 7807 7808 7809 7810 7811 7812 7813 7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 7841 7842 7843 7844 7845 7846 7847 7848 7849 7850 7851 7852 7853 7854 7855 7856 7857 7858 7859 7860 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7868 7869 7870 7871 7872 7873 7874 7875 7876 7877 7878 7879 7880 7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 7897 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 7962 7963 7964 7965 7966 7967 7968 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 7975 7976 7977 7978 7979 7980 7981 7982 7983 7984 7985 7986 7987 7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 7995 7996 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 8012 8013 8014 8015 8016 8017 8018 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 8048 8049 8050 8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 8059 8060 8061 8062 8063 8064 8065 8066 8067 8068 8069 8070 8071 8072 8073 8074 8075 8076 8077 8078 8079 8080 8081 8082 8083 8084 8085 8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 8092 8093 8094 8095 8096 8097 8098 8099 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 8112 8113 8114 8115 8116 8117 8118 8119 8120 8121 8122 8123 8124 8125 8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 8133 8134 8135 8136 8137 8138 8139 8140 8141 8142 8143 8144 8145 8146 8147 8148 8149 8150 8151 8152 8153 8154 8155 8156 8157 8158 8159 8160 8161 8162 8163 8164 8165 8166 8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 8172 8173 8174 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 8182 8183 8184 8185 8186 8187 8188 8189 8190 8191 8192 8193 8194 8195 8196 8197 8198 8199 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215 8216 8217 8218 8219 8220 8221 8222 8223 8224 8225 8226 8227 8228 8229 8230 8231 8232 8233 8234 8235 8236 8237 8238 8239 8240 8241 8242 8243 8244 8245 8246 8247 8248 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 |
2019-11-17 [90d555] workaround NSFontManager bad selections (culler)
2019-11-19 (new) Partial Emoji support in text displays (nijtmans,culler)
- Released 8.6.10, Nov 21, 2019 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2019-11-25 (bug)[a95373] TkKeyEvent platform variations (werner)
2019-11-26 (bug) workaround Win bug so test bind-34.3 passes (nijtmans)
2019-12-03 Aqua: white cursors in dark mode (culler)
2019-12-04 (bug)[749bd9] Aqua: systemControlAccentColor (bll,culler)
2019-12-14 (bug)[b3b56a] ttk respect -cursor option (vogel)
2019-12-14 (bug)[b094cb] Win: $tv -show grows widget width 1 pixel (vogel)
2019-12-14 (bug)[02a694] spinbox options used wrong db names (vogel)
2020-01-11 (bug)[2b8fa6] MouseWheel for ttk::scrollbar (oehlmann)
2020-01-18 (bug)[1771594] icursor and scrollregion, canvText-14.7 (vogel)
2020-01-18 (bug)[587937] tag list ops preserve list order (vogel)
2020-01-18 (bug)[2830360] lose invalid state at focus event, entry-10.1 (vogel)
2020-01-18 (bug)[077d49] string table options support null ok (vogel)
2020-01-18 (bug)[bf93d0] Aqua: unresponsive menubar (culler)
2020-01-31 (bug)[a196fb] restore support for unthreaded Tcl (porter,sebres)
2020-02-09 (bug)[90a4d7] fontconfig crash when no font installed (vogel)
2020-02-24 (bug) Aqua: incomplete floating window display (walzer)
2020-03-11 (bug)[fb2ec3] OSX 10.15+: full screen options (nicolas,walzer)
2020-03-12 (bug)[08e2f8] focus on unmapped windows, focus-7.1 (vogel)
2020-03-12 (bug)[2edd84] [$c postscript] result management (gavilan)
2020-03-22 (bug)[98662d] restore TK_MAC_DEBUG_DRAWING build (chavez)
2020-03-29 (bug)[655fe2] tearoff menu redraw artifacts (vogel)
2020-04-03 (bug)[efbedd] Aqua: compund button-like widget appearance (chavez)
2020-04-14 (bug)[87bade] Aqua: improved dealing with PressAndHold (culler)
2020-04-14 (bug)[376788] X: stop crash w/Noto Color Emoji font (nijtmans)
2020-04-15 (bug)[89354d] Aqua: text color w/o clipping (culler)
2020-04-15 (new) Aqua: assign Button 3 to the middle button (chavez)
2020-04-25 (bug)[3519111] treeview horizontal scroll, entry-2.1.1 (vogel)
2020-04-25 (bug)[141881] treeview vertical scroll, treeview-9.2 (vogel)
2020-05-01 (bug)[2712f4] X: crash angled text w/o Xft, canvText-20.2 (vogel)
2020-05-01 (bug)[cd8714] Win: long angled text (chavez)
2020-05-09 (bug)[88c9e0] treeview -selectmode none focus ring (gavilan)
2020-05-12 (new) Aqua: Rewrite of the Key event system (culler)
2020-05-12 (bug)[411359] Aqua: stop crashes/zombies related to TouchBar (culler)
2020-05-12 (new) Aqua: systemLinkColor (chavez)
2020-05-16 (bug)[40ada9] crash when active button is destroyed (chavez)
2020-05-28 (bug)[3c6660,601cea,4b50b7] Win10: ttk scale (nemethi,lanam)
2020-06-08 (bug)[2790615] Some callbacks not eval'd in global scope (nijtmans)
2020-06-25 Aqua: Update OSX version tests to support Big Sur (culler)
2020-06-27 (bug)[6920b2] dup in spinbox -values causes trouble (lanam)
2020-06-27 (bug)[5c51be] invalid mem read buffer in Tk_PhotoPut* (chavez)
2020-06-27 (bug)[16ef16] restore bind sequence support, bind-33.(16-21) (vogel)
2020-07-02 (bug)[2d2459] default style for combobox (bll)
2020-07-06 (bug)[40e4bf] double free, entry-19.21 (vogel)
2020-07-06 (bug)[e3888d] grab & warp, bind-36.1 (vogel)
2020-07-12 (bug)[2442314] fontchooser i18n (nijtmans)
2020-07-13 (bug)[7655f6] [*entry]: selected text drawing reform (chavez)
2020-07-14 (bug)[09abd7] workaround invalid key codes from Debian 10 (vogel)
2020-07-20 (bug)[cf3853] Aqua: improve bounds on non-Retina displays (chavez)
2020-08-01 Aqua: [winfo rgb] light and dark mode support (culler)
2020-08-15 (bug)[315104] Aqua: appearance change virtual events (culler)
2020-08-21 (bug)[291699] mouse binding for scrollbar grip (bll)
2020-09-08 (bug)[6c2425] buffer bounds violation (chavez)
2020-09-08 (bug)[2a6d63] OSX 10.6 crash (hellstrom,culler)
2020-09-08 (bug)[420feb] undefined behavior due to alignment (chavez,nijtmans)
2020-09-10 (bug)[ab1fea] Aqua init issues (culler)
2020-09-14 (bug)[71e18c] Aqua: crash in full screen toggle (culler)
2020-09-18 (bug)[4f4f03] Aqua: mouse drags across title bar (nab,culler)
2020-09-21 (bug)[d91e05] select/copy in disabled text (bll)
2020-09-27 (TIP #581) disfavor Master/Slave terminology (nijtmans)
2020-09-30 (bug)[59cba3] win: improve theme detection (bll,nijtmans)
2020-10-06 (bug)[175a6e] Aqua: support tiled windows (culler)
2020-10-07 (bug)[1fa8c3] Aqua: crash on resize during display (nab,culler)
2020-10-16 (bug)[c2483b] Aqua: consistent finalization (culler,nijtmans)
2020-11-06 (bug)[c9ebac] Aqua: use standard about dialog (culler)
2020-11-07 (bug)[4ebcc0] sticky fontchooser options (roseman,vogel)
2020-11-10 (bug)[f9fa92] Aqua: crash in color caching scheme (culler)
2020-11-20 (bug)[7185d2] Aqua: fixes to special menu support (culler)
2020-11-24 (bug)[4a40c6] Aqua: [wm manage] frame offset (chavez)
2020-12-04 (bug)[3ef77f] Aqua dark mode combobox focus ring (walzer,culler)
2020-12-15 (bug)[80e4c6] Aqua: progressbar animation (nab,culler)
2020-12-24 (bug)[6157a8] Aqua: file dialog -filetypes (davis,culler)
- Released 8.6.11, Dec 31, 2020 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2021-01-04 (bug)[19fb7a] Mac: [tk_messageBox] use proper icons (ericwb,culler)
2021-01-11 (bug)[7beaed] ttk::bindMouseWheel syntax error (nemethi)
2021-01-15 (new) support 4 new keycodes: CodeInput, SingleCandidate,
MultipleCandidate, PreviousCandidate (nijtmans)
2021-01-18 (new) Portable keycodes: OE, oe, Ydiaeresis (nijtmans)
2021-01-27 (bug)[bdcab8] Mac crash on non-BMP menu label (nab,culler)
2021-02-07 (bug)[9e1312] <Enter> to parent after child destroyed (leunissen)
2021-02-10 (bug)[d3cd4c] more robust notebook processing (nemethi)
2021-02-25 (bug)[234ee4] crash in [clipboard get] invalid encoding (nijtmans)
2021-02-25 (bug)[be9cad] Poor trace housekeeping -> tkwait segfault (michael)
2021-03-02 (bug)[1626ed] Mac: crash with dead key as menu accelerator (culler)
2021-03-22 (bug)[9b6065] restore Tcl [update], see window-2.12 (leunissen)
2021-04-07 (bug)[58222c] Mac: entry and spinbox bg colors (chavez,culler)
2021-04-18 (bug)[34db75,ea876b] cursor motion in peer text (vogel)
2021-04-26 (bug)[c97464] memleak in TkpDrawAngledChars (nab,culler)
2021-04-29 Mac: explicit backing CALayer to fix rendering issues (culler)
2021-05-02 Mac: respect key repeat system setting (culler)
2021-05-10 (bug)[171ba7] crash when grab and focus are not coordinated (culler)
2021-05-24 crash due to failed transient record housekeeping (culler)
2021-05-25 (bug)[7bda98] Mac: <Double-1> bindings fire twice on app activation
2021-06-03 (bug)[4401d3] Mac: improved support of pixel formats (chavez,culler)
2021-06-03 (bug)[8ecc3e] Mac: window exposed by Mission Control (chavez,culler)
2021-06-04 (bug)[099109] segfault reusing a container toplevel (culler)
2021-06-22 (bug)[4efbfe] static package init order in wish (werner)
2021-09-21 (bug)[033886] Win: hang in font loading (e-paine,vogel)
2021-10-14 (bug)[8ebed3] multi-thread safety in Xft use (werner)
2021-10-22 (new)[TIP 608] New virtual event <<TkWorldChanged>> (griffin)
2021-10-27 (bug) file dialog compatibility with Mac OS 12 (culler)
2021-10-29 (bug) Mac: stop crash when non-Tk windows go full screen (werner)
2021-10-30 (bug)[6ea0b3] Mac: grab from menu makes dead window (culler)
- Released 8.6.12, Nov 5, 2021 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2021-11-09 (bug)[e699a7] Fix build on macOS < 10.12 (culler)
2021-11-10 (bug)[8aebca,ce5d98] Mac: fix minimize button details (culler)
2021-11-24 (bug)[18682c,733dae] Mac: Enter/Leave events for toplevels (culler)
2021-11-29 (bug)[4ac9d2] Mac: canvas screenshot with Img package position
correction (chavez)
2021-11-30 (documentation cleanup) [bad305] improve wm protocol
WM_DELETE_WINDOW documentation (culler)
2021-11-30 (new) Mac: new color index "SelectedMenuItemTextColor".
2021-12-01 (new)[TIP 599] Extended build information (nijtmans)
2021-12-04 (bug)[440c52] fix PPM/PGM read with graylevel > 255 (vogel)
2021-12-04 (bug)[5fb814] canvas redraw region for lines/polygones (vogel)
2021-12-04 (new)[631a0b] text widget: direct mouse events to insert mark, not
current (vogel)
2021-12-06 (bug)[b164ef] fix mouse events for multiple toplevels (culler)
2021-12-07 (bug)[be8f5b] crash setting -type empty for a menu (vogel)
2021-12-10 (bug)[50fc02,50fc02,25894d,156e58] ImgPhoto pointer issues (chavez)
2021-12-20 (bug)[617861] -justify/-anchor defaults for ttk::label (nijtmans)
2021-12-20 (bug)[6be8b0] Mac: crash on drag and Cmd-w (culler)
2021-12-22 (bug)[a132b5] Mac: esc on combobox menu influences click reopening
(culler)
2021-12-24 (bug)[915316] Mac: drag events not to initial widget (culler)
2021-12-27 (bug)[eb26d4] Mac: wrong beep when clicking outside a combobox
(culler)
2021-12-30 (bug)[822450] Mac: crash on exit (culler)
2022-01-06 (bug)[b7d851] Mac: crash on tkdnd drop and window close (culler)
2022-01-09 (bug)[40bc81] embedding error test failure (vogel)
2022-01-16 (bug)[b1d115] No <Enter> event on new toplevel on current toplevel
destruction (vogel)
2022-02-03 (bug)[3fefb3] crash in empty ttk::combobox when end index requested
(vogel)
2022-02-07 (new)[247d80] Chinese message file (NewbieXvwu)
2022-02-07 (new) Support Windows ARM platform (nijtmans)
2022-02-11 (bug)[e331bc] NULL to memset in photo blank (chavez)
2022-02-12 (bug)[fc5073] Mac: crash on native file dialog and tooltip (walzer)
2022-02-17 (bug)[864b06] PNG photo image color numeric issue (chavez)
2022-02-24 (bug)[141a11] Mac: dialog box with global grab inresponsive on
click in other toplevel (walzer)
2022-02-25 (bug)[f75190] tk_fontchooser: multiple font families, locale
change, button activation (holger,vogel)
2022-02-25 (bug)[ce6b42] (in TCL bug tracker) ttk::spinbox increment event
endless invokation (vogel)
2022-02-26 (bug)[c7052d] Win: middle mouse click blocks system clipbord
(vogel)
2022-02-27 (bug)[292598,01acde,e02fc96,0c3dbe,ee49f3,d175bb] Mac: memory leaks
(images, focus ring) (chavez)
2022-03-07 (bug)[2a6c62] Avoid invalid <<TreeviewSelect>> events
(vogel,spjuth)
2022-03-16 (new)[f47920] Updates to Finnish message catalog (hippelainen)
2022-03-16 (bug)[424773] crash in test canvPs-5.1 (chavez,vogel)
2022-03-19 (bug)[5412c6] crash in test canvWind-2.1 (SVID,vogel,griffin)
2022-03-19 (bug)[54fe7a] crash in test textWind-18.3 (akuli,vogel)
2022-04-04 (bug)[29b5c2] error in tk_popup with separator entry selected
(griffin)
2022-04-07 (bug)[415415] scale advances multiple steps on single click (vogel)
2022-04-10 (bug)[dc4c55] tk_popup entry index (mcdonald)
2022-04-15 (bug)[c0bf1b] XVirtualEvent buffer overflows (chavez)
2022-04-19 (new)[8dd3d5] Mac : use Fn + e to access Emoji (nijtmans)
2022-05-11 (bug)[88cfdc] Mac: dialog memory, avoid use after free (chavez)
2022-04-21 (new)[bf0f48] Mac: Optimization for compilation is now -O2
(nijtmans)
2022-05-08 (bug)[eedd79] potential crashes in option parsing when sizeof(enum)
not equal to int (nijtmans)
2022-05-08 (bug)[0ce975] panedwindow calls memcpy with NULL pointer (chavez)
2022-05-22 (bug)[bee96b] Win: cursor warp, [tk busy] (mcdonald)
2022-06-07 (bug) GIF with multiple images may reuse transparent color (oehhar)
2022-06-12 (bug)[e4a051] Mac: map embedded window immediately (vogel)
2022-06-15 (bug)[b18434] cygwin path compiling issues (fassel)
2022-06-27 [aefdb8,be29f7] Updates to Russian message catalog (pylypenko)
2022-07-04 Updates to Esperanto message catalog (ender)
2022-07-19 (bug)[91ca77] Mac: map event handling (rosenburger,culler,landers)
2022-07-20 (bug)[40bc81,17f44d,150174,61e0bb] embedding error test failures
(vogel)
2022-07-25 (bug)[a3b03f] Linux, Windows: improve (ttk) menubutton menu
position (danckaert,vogel)
2022-07-29 Update keysym tables to latest X11R6 (nijtmans)
2022-08-22 [f6e4d4] consistent cross-platform polygon fill (akuli,chavez)
2022-09-04 (bug)[bc6020] test treeview-bc602049ab (bende,spjuth)
2022-09-08 (bug)[e17b6f] Mac: crash in test unixW-50.4 (chavez)
2022-09-20 [33de84] Mac: handle Apple deprecation of OSTypes (culler)
2022-09-20 (bug)[412b80] Mac menu: arrow key and menu selection (nab,culler)
2022-09-22 (bug)[1a46d8,1fa325] Mac: memleak, crash safety in color (chavez)
2022-10-17 [d93c81] Workaround faulty compiler optimization in VS 2022 (vogel)
2022-10-26 (bug)[435739] crash in test bind-37.1 (csok,vogel)
2022-10-28 (bug)[5e4e44] ttk::panedwindow drag robust wrt orientation variants
(xolodho,vogel)
- Released 8.6.13, Nov 22, 2022 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2022-12-12 Windows binaries licence metadata changed to University of
California to match licence (nadkarni)
2022-12-12 (bug)[6ee162] crash in [ttk::style configure] (vogel)
2022-12-14 Permit [tk scaling] to return scale factor in safe interp (nijtmans)
2023-01-05 Correct rounding of [nsFont pointSize] (nijtmans)
2023-01-08 (bug)[cee095] X error handler management in Tk_MeasureChars (kechel)
2023-01-18 macOS 13 SDK deprecates sprintf() (vogel)
2023-02-12 (bug)[170551] crash in [tk busy forget]
2023-02-27 (bug)[6cd476] crash using [tk busy hold] (vogel)
2023-03-04 (bug)[93fe36] Fix <<MenuSelect>> with -tearoff (mcdonald)
2023-03-30 (bug)[15c685] menu clones, tests menu-20.1[2-6] (bron)
2023-04-10 (bug)[f4d9d7] canvas items ignored -disabledwidth (chavez,vogel)
2023-04-30 (bug)[a9cf21] Text selection omits first character (moosems)
2023-05-03 (bug)[310c74] No theme change attempts after Tk finalize (chavez)
2023-05-13 (bug)[3414695] Dialogs robust against parent destruction (vogel)
2023-05-23 (bug)[ab9581] Guard against use-after-free crashes (chavez)
2023-05-23 (bug)[f40d9d] Aqua: FourCC bitmaps (chavez)
2023-05-25 (bug)[7447ed] [tk_chooseColor] handle grab fail (leunissen)
2023-05-31 (bug)[4666f2] Protect aganst NULL windows (nab,vogel)
2023-06-06 (bug)[a418aa] bogus @x,y menu entry indices, menu-22.[6-9] (vogel)
2023-06-11 (bug)[578441] memleak in TkScrollWindow (chavez)
2023-06-13 (bug)[228476] link wish to correct libtk (root)
2023-07-09 (bug)[a526d4] Aqua: memleak in TkpOpenDisplay (chavez)
2023-07-10 (bug)[fa4694,0502c1] Aqua: memleaks in TkpConfigureMenuEntry (chavez)
2023-07-17 (bug)[f9eddb] region clip & copy better OS implementations (chavez)
2023-07-18 (bug)[2cb602] Aqua: memleak in TkCreateRegion (chavez)
2023-07-19 (bug)[edb769] Aqua: memleak in XGetImage (chavez)
2023-07-19 (bug)[c35c34] memleak in Initialize (chavez)
2023-07-20 (bug)[deca94] memleak in TkpMakeMenuWindow (chavez)
2023-07-23 (bug)[f24725] crash using Aqua pre-defined bitmap names (chavez)
2023-07-24 (feature) better solve Y2038 on most systems (chavez,nijtmans)
2023-07-26 (bug)[ed9b28] Aqua: memleak in GetWidgetDemoPath (chavez)
2023-08-02 (bug)[2a3222] navigation exposed clues about masked entry
2023-08-04 Update [trace] subcommands for Tcl 9 compat
2023-08-29 (bug)[e42eef] memory issues interfacing with XIM (goodward)
2023-08-30 (bug)[ef5d3e] Aqua: crash after first toplevel destroyed (chavez)
2023-09-01 (bug)[6cc800] Harmonize number parsing with Tcl (nijtmans)
*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
2023-09-03 (bug)[4468ed] Iconlist no fg text color from options db (chavez)
*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
2023-09-04 (bug)[d2396a] error reporting from [send -option] (emanuele,nijtmans)
2023-10-11 (bug)[9675dd] wrong free() call from Tk_ConfigureValue (nijtmans)
2023-10 (bug) Many revisions to satisfy -fsanitize=function (chavez)
[d96974,04d3e5,84fe25,bb8041]
2023-10-16 (bug)[22eefb] unixWm-45.[24] (vogel)
2023-10-18 (bug)[10b38a] Silence macOS 14 warning about secure restorable state
2023-10-28 (bug)[198376] move notebook tabs to position s (rozenberg,vogel)
2023-11-06 (bug)[499f8e] eliminate undefined realloc() calls (chavez)
2023-11-07 (bug)[09a11f] crash menu-40.[12] (chavez,culler)
2023-11-13 (bug)[eedd2e] ttk::notebook looks bad when tabs are positioned on
edges other than the top (nemethi,werner)
2023-11-15 (bug)[61550f] font-44.1 with Xft (vogel)
2023-11-22 (bug)[22a4ad] Aqua: CoreGraphics manages memory for pixmaps (chavez)
2023-11-28 (bug)[900f23] PNG encoder missed 0xFF entry (obermeier)
2023-12-03 Aqua: Update handling of Apple FourCC creator codes (chavez)
2023-12-03 (bug)[fe9423] Aqua: XPutImage() swap red and blue (chavez)
*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
2023-12-09 (bug)[1d8b71] X: Photo color drawing for 32-bit visuals (warnholz)
2023-12-12 Update to latest X11 headers
2023-12-22 (bug)[9c5742] Fix handling of abbreviated -relief args (nijtmans)
2024-01-03 (bug)[52df66] nonXft: [font measure] results inconsistent (vogel)
2024-01-05 (bug)[a9e637] treeview display partial final line (bron)
2024-01-09 (bug)[b7abf0] treeview destruction from O(N^2) to O(N) (emiliano)
2024-01-12 (bug)[737abf] text image insertion from O(N^2) to O(N)
2024-01-27 (bug)[8da7af] font caching performance issues (thraen,vogel)
2024-02-08 (bug)[57b821] see test textIndex-22.16 (vogel)
- Released 8.6.14, Feb 28, 2024 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2024-03-15 (bug)[47d4f2] Invoke binding scripts for events with detail field
NotifyInferior (leunissen, vogel)
*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
2024-03-19 (bug) [fdc0ed] Fix segfault on [focus -force] with xvfb (vogel)
2024-04-21 (bug) [ab839e] Fix [text undo] clearingdata
2024-05-01 (change) [e30699] Fix appearence of arrows in ttk widgets
(nemethi)
2024-05-03 (change) Add keycodes ISO_Group_Shift and dead_hamza (nijtmans)
2024-05-10 (change) Improve look of the classic theme (gavilan)
2024-05-11 (change) Improved focus ring for ttk (nemethi)
2024-05-13 (bug) [treeview identify] now point aware (vogel)
2024-05-29 (bug) Fix default font detection for high DPI (vogel,nemethi)
2024-06-02 (bug) Fix [ttk::combobox] covering down arrow (vogel,gavilan)
2024-06-09 (bug) [a0241c] Fix performance of image copy (vogel)
2024-06-11 (bug) [157652] Fix image read with -from option for gif/png
(vogel)
2024-06-18 (bug) [865af0] Throw error message on corrupt gif file
(obermeier)
2024-07-06 (bug) [51ece3] Fix crash on [canvas dchars] (vogel)
2024-07-22 (bug)[2d3a81] fix segfault on menubutton destroy (MS-Win only)
(oehlmann)
2024-07-31 (bug) [0d4879,089da4,f569b9] Improve focus ring for ttk widgets
(nemethi)
2024-08-28 (bug) [d82fa2] [ttk::treview] painting/clipping/scrolling of last
item (bron,nemethi,werner)
- Released 8.6.15, Sep 13, 2024 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2024-09-19 (bug) [18e984] Assignment of invalid symbolic constant
NotifyNormal (vogel)
2024-09-20 (bug) [398109] Segmentation fault with bogus resource value
(X11) (emiliano)
2024-09-21 [ttk] Improved the appearance of the Treeitem.indicator element
(nemethi)
2024-09-27 (bug) [265d4e] macOS Sequoia: warning: 'setShowsResizeIndicator:'
is deprecated (vogel)
2024-10-09 (bug) [eb3328] [grid] and [pack] with half-dead argument can cause
hangup or even crash (vogel)
2024-10-11 (bug) [f52986] SIGABRT from Tk_DeleteErrorHandler() (vogel)
2024-11-13 (bug) [36e379] [macOS Ventura] Workaround for X11 build with
XQuartz: crash in XLoadQueryFont (vogel)
2024-11-25 (bug) [bcbf4c] Tk intialization overwrites thread specific data
(emiliano)
- Released 8.6.16, Dec 11, 2024 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details
2024-12-19 (bug) [844c0b] Menu entry underline does not consider
activeborderwidth (vogel)
2025-01-03 (bug) [13ac26] wm iconbitmap does not correctly set the icon
pixmap hint on macOS (serhiy.storchaka)
2025-03-17 (bug) [159aa5] MS-Win: Incorrect system menu entries for transient
toplevels (cjmcdonald)
2025-03-17 (bug) [91d0e9] MS-Win: Withdrawn Tk transient windows can reappear in
Windows taskbar preview (cjmcdonald)
|
Deleted compat/stdbool.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Deleted compat/stdint.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Added compat/stdlib.h.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | /* * stdlib.h -- * * Declares facilities exported by the "stdlib" portion of the C library. * This file isn't complete in the ANSI-C sense; it only declares things * that are needed by Tcl. This file is needed even on many systems with * their own stdlib.h (e.g. SunOS) because not all stdlib.h files declare * all the procedures needed here (such as strtol/strtoul). * * Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _STDLIB #define _STDLIB extern void abort(void); extern double atof(const char *string); extern int atoi(const char *string); extern long atol(const char *string); extern void * calloc(unsigned long numElements, unsigned long size); extern void exit(int status); extern void free(void *blockPtr); extern char * getenv(const char *name); extern void * malloc(unsigned long numBytes); extern void qsort(void *base, unsigned long n, unsigned long size, int (*compar)( const void *element1, const void *element2)); extern void * realloc(void *ptr, unsigned long numBytes); extern char * realpath(const char *path, char *resolved_path); extern int mkstemps(char *templ, int suffixlen); extern int mkstemp(char *templ); extern char * mkdtemp(char *templ); extern long strtol(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base); extern unsigned long strtoul(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base); #endif /* _STDLIB */ |
Added compat/unistd.h.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 | /* * unistd.h -- * * Macros, constants and prototypes for Posix conformance. * * Copyright 1989 Regents of the University of California Permission to use, * copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any * purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above * copyright notice appear in all copies. The University of California makes * no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. * It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. */ #ifndef _UNISTD #define _UNISTD #include <sys/types.h> #ifndef NULL # define NULL 0 #endif /* * Strict POSIX stuff goes here. Extensions go down below, in the ifndef * _POSIX_SOURCE section. */ extern void _exit(int status); extern int access(const char *path, int mode); extern int chdir(const char *path); extern int chown(const char *path, uid_t owner, gid_t group); extern int close(int fd); extern int dup(int oldfd); extern int dup2(int oldfd, int newfd); extern int execl(const char *path, ...); extern int execle(const char *path, ...); extern int execlp(const char *file, ...); extern int execv(const char *path, char *const argv[]); extern int execve(const char *path, char *const argv[], char *const *envp); extern int execvp(const char *file, char *const argv[]); extern pid_t fork(void); extern char * getcwd(char *buf, size_t size); extern gid_t getegid(void); extern uid_t geteuid(void); extern gid_t getgid(void); extern int getgroups(int bufSize, int *buffer); extern pid_t getpid(void); extern uid_t getuid(void); extern int isatty(int fd); extern long lseek(int fd, long offset, int whence); extern int pipe(int *fildes); extern int read(int fd, char *buf, size_t size); extern int setgid(gid_t group); extern int setuid(uid_t user); extern unsigned sleep(unsigned seconds); extern char * ttyname(int fd); extern int unlink(const char *path); extern int write(int fd, const char *buf, size_t size); #ifndef _POSIX_SOURCE extern char * crypt(const char *, const char *); extern int fchown(int fd, uid_t owner, gid_t group); extern int flock(int fd, int operation); extern int ftruncate(int fd, unsigned long length); extern int ioctl(int fd, int request, ...); extern int readlink(const char *path, char *buf, int bufsize); extern int setegid(gid_t group); extern int seteuid(uid_t user); extern int setreuid(int ruid, int euid); extern int symlink(const char *, const char *); extern int ttyslot(void); extern int truncate(const char *path, unsigned long length); extern int vfork(void); #endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */ #endif /* _UNISTD */ |
Changes to doc/3DBorder.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR | | | | | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | | | | | | > | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, colorName\fR) .sp Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fR) .sp \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fR) .sp \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fR) .sp \fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fR) .sp \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftBevel, relief\fR) .sp \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder\fR(\fItkwin, border\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOf3DBorder\fR(\fIborder\fR) .sp XColor * \fBTk_3DBorderColor\fR(\fIborder\fR) .sp GC * \fBTk_3DBorderGC\fR(\fItkwin, border, which\fR) .sp \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR(\fIborder\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_3DBorder" borderWidth .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window (for all procedures except \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR, must be the window for which the border was allocated). .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in Pointer to value whose value describes color corresponding to background (flat areas). Illuminated edges will be brighter than this and shadowed edges will be darker than this. .AP "const char" *colorName in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except value is supplied as a string rather than a value. .AP Drawable drawable in X token for window or pixmap; indicates where graphics are to be drawn. Must either be the X window for \fItkwin\fR or a pixmap with the same screen and depth as \fItkwin\fR. .AP Tk_3DBorder border in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and \fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually occupied by the border. The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates which of several three-dimensional effects is desired: \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed. | | | | 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 | \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and \fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually occupied by the border. The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates which of several three-dimensional effects is desired: \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed. \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean that there should appear to be a groove or ridge around the exterior of the rectangle. .PP \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is somewhat like \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR except that it first fills the rectangular area with the background color (one corresponding to the color used to create \fIborder\fR). Then it calls \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR to draw a border just inside the outer edge of the rectangular area. The argument \fIrelief\fR indicates the desired |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | with the window and color name used to create the border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. .SH KEYWORDS | | > | 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 | with the window and color name used to create the border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. .SH KEYWORDS 3D, background, border, color, depressed, illumination, value, polygon, raised, shadow, three-dimensional effect |
Changes to doc/AddOption.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 | associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. \fIName\fR contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR; this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR. \fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority | | | | | | | | 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. \fIName\fR contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR; this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR. \fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority is returned. \fIPriority\fR must be between 0 and \fBTK_MAX_PRIO\fR (100). Some common priority values are: .IP \fBTK_WIDGET_DEFAULT_PRIO\fR (20) Used for default values hard-coded into widgets. .IP \fBTK_STARTUP_FILE_PRIO\fR (40) Used for options specified in application-specific startup files. .IP \fBTK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO\fR (60) Used for options specified in user-specific defaults files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into the X server, or user-specific startup files. .IP \fBTK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO\fR (80) Used for options specified interactively after the application starts running. .SH KEYWORDS class, name, option, add |
Changes to doc/ConfigWidg.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | | > | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS char *widgRec in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for returning error messages. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources). .AP "const Tk_ConfigSpec" *specs in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | options. .AP Display *display in Display containing widget whose record is being freed; needed in order to free up resources. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP | | | | 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | options. .AP Display *display in Display containing widget whose record is being freed; needed in order to free up resources. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Note that \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR should be replaced with the new \fBTcl_Obj\fR based API, \fBTk_SetOptions\fR. The old interface is retained for backward compatibility. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is called to configure various aspects of a widget, such as colors, fonts, border width, etc. It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount of code that must be written in individual widget managers to handle configuration information. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 |
.CS
typedef struct {
int \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIargvName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
| | | 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 |
.CS
typedef struct {
int \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIargvName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIoffset\fR;
int \fIspecFlags\fR;
const Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR;
} \fBTk_ConfigSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for
an integer value). The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store the information about this configuration option. You should use the | | > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > < > | > > > | 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 | form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store the information about this configuration option. You should use the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values (see below for a description of \fBTk_Offset\fR). The location indicated by \fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the .QW target in the descriptions below. .PP The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what to do with the string value of that configuration option. The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are: .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a cursor in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The value is converted to a \fBTk_Cursor\fR by calling \fBTk_GetCursor\fR and the result is stored in the target. In addition, the resulting cursor is made the active cursor for \fItkwin\fR by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target and \fItkwin\fR's active cursor will be set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_ANCHOR\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying an anchor point in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. The string is converted to a \fBTk_Anchor\fR by calling \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BITMAP\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a bitmap in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. The value is converted to a \fBPixmap\fR by calling \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target is set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN\fR . The value must be an ASCII string specifying a boolean value. Any of the values .QW true , .QW yes , .QW on , or .QW 1 , or an abbreviation of one of these values, means true; any of the values .QW false , .QW no , .QW off , or .QW 0 , or an abbreviation of one of these values, means false. The target is expected to be an integer; for true values it will be set to 1 and for false values it will be set to 0. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a border color in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. The value is converted to a (\fBTk_3DBorder *\fR) by calling \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a cap style in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR. The string is converted to an integer value corresponding to the cap style by calling \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a color in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. The value is converted to an (\fBXColor *\fR) by calling \fBTk_GetColor\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeColor\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CURSOR\fR . This option is identical to \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR except that the new cursor is not made the active one for \fItkwin\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR . This option allows applications to define new option types. The \fIcustomPtr\fR field of the entry points to a structure defining the new option type. See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_DOUBLE\fR . The value must be an ASCII floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. The string is converted to a \fBdouble\fR value, and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_END\fR . Marks the end of the table. The last entry in \fIspecs\fR must have this type; all of its other fields are ignored and it will never match any arguments. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_FONT\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a font in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. The value is converted to a \fBTk_Font\fR by calling \fBTk_GetFont\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeFont\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR . The value must be an ASCII integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. .QW 0 and .QW 0x prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). The string is converted to an integer value and the integer is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a join style in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR. The string is converted to an integer value corresponding to the join style by calling \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a justification method in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJustify\fR. The string is converted to a \fBTk_Justify\fR by calling \fBTk_GetJustify\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_MM\fR . The value must specify a screen distance in one of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR. The string is converted to double-precision floating-point distance in millimeters and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_PIXELS\fR . The value must specify screen units in one of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. The string is converted to an integer distance in pixels and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_RELIEF\fR . The value must be an ASCII string identifying a relief in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. The value is converted to an integer relief value by calling \fBTk_GetRelief\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_STRING\fR . A copy of the value is made by allocating memory space with \fBTcl_Alloc\fR and copying the value into the dynamically-allocated space. A pointer to the new string is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR . This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that are synonyms for other entries. If an \fIargv\fR value matches the \fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry; this new entry is used just as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value. The synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for a single configuration option, such as .QW \-background and .QW \-bg . .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR . The value is translated to a \fBTk_Uid\fR (by passing it to \fBTk_GetUid\fR). The resulting value is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR and the value is an empty string then the target will be set to NULL. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_WINDOW\fR . The value must be a window path name. It is translated to a \fBTk_Window\fR token and the token is stored in the target. .SH "GROUPED ENTRIES" .PP In some cases it is useful to generate multiple resources from a single configuration value. For example, a color name might be used both to generate the background color for a widget (using |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
377 378 379 380 381 382 383 | The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR to provide additional control over the processing of configuration options. These values are used in three different ways as described below. .PP First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has | | > > > > > | 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 | The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR to provide additional control over the processing of configuration options. These values are used in three different ways as described below. .PP First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0), then the option database and \fIdefValue\fR fields are not used. In this case, if an entry in \fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens: the corresponding target is not modified. This feature is useful when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR widget command is being processed. .PP Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used to control the processing of that entry. Each \fIspecFlags\fR field may consists of an OR-ed combination of the following values: .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR . If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the display for \fItkwin\fR has more than one bit plane. If the display is monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR . If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the display for \fItkwin\fR has exactly one bit plane. If the display is not monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR . This bit is only relevant for some types of entries (see the descriptions of the various entry types above). If this bit is set, it indicates that an empty string value for the field is acceptable and if it occurs then the target should be set to NULL or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the target. This flag is typically used to allow a feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to \fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor. If this bit is not set then empty strings are processed as strings, which generally results in an error. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR . If this bit is one, it means that the \fIdefValue\fR field of the entry should only be used for returning the default value in \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR. In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied for entries with this flag set; it is assumed that the caller has already supplied a default value in the target location. This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 | for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR, \fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of this feature, see the code in tkButton.c. .SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO .PP The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain information about one or all of the options for a given widget. Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a pointer to a widget record containing the current information for | > > > > > > > | 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 | for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR, \fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of this feature, see the code in tkButton.c. .SH TK_OFFSET .PP The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the \fIoffset\fR values for entries in Tk_ConfigSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte offset of the named field in records of the given type. .SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO .PP The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain information about one or all of the options for a given widget. Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a pointer to a widget record containing the current information for |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
539 540 541 542 543 544 545 |
ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
} \fBTk_CustomOption\fR;
typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
| | | 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 |
ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
} \fBTk_CustomOption\fR;
typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
const char *\fIvalue\fR,
char *\fIwidgRec\fR,
int \fIoffset\fR);
typedef const char *\fBTk_OptionPrintProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
char *\fIwidgRec\fR,
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageMasterData, Tk_GetImageModelData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp ClientData \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .sp .VS "TIP 581" ClientData \fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .VE "TIP 581" .sp \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr .AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of image. For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 |
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
const char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIobjc\fR,
Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
const Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
| | | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 |
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
const char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIobjc\fR,
Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
const Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
Tk_ImageMaster \fImodel\fR,
ClientData *\fImodelDataPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the \fBimage\fR
command was invoked, and \fIname\fR is the name for the new image,
which was either specified explicitly in the \fBimage\fR command
or generated automatically by the \fBimage\fR command.
The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all the configuration
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | The \fImodelData\fR argument will be the same as the value stored in \fI*modelDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. \fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with the image. .SH TK_GETIMAGEMODELDATA .PP | | > > > > | > > > > | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 |
The \fImodelData\fR argument will be the same as the value
stored in \fI*modelDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the
image was created.
\fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with
the image.
.SH TK_GETIMAGEMODELDATA
.PP
The procedure \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR may be invoked to retrieve
information about an image. For example, an image manager can use this
procedure to locate its image model data for an image.
If there exists an image named \fIname\fR
in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is
filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value
passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered)
and the return value is the ClientData value returned by the
\fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a
pointer to the image model data structure). If no such image exists
then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR.
.PP
.VS "TIP 581"
\fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR is synonym for \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR
.VE "TIP 581"
.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
.PP
In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR
was incompatibly different, with the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIargc\fR,
char **\fIargv\fR,
Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
Tk_ImageMaster \fImodel\fR,
ClientData *\fImodelDataPtr\fR);
.CE
Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still
contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old
interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy
interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR
defined.
.PP
.VS "TIP 581"
\fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR
.VE "TIP 581"
.PP
When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may
see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use. This was a migration
tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded
into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later. Tk 8.5 no longer
provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted
calls of this routine into an empty comment. Any stub-enabled
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 |
The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
information such as the name of the type and pointers to
the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
const char *\fIname\fR;
| | < < < | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 |
The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
information such as the name of the type and pointers to
the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
const char *\fIname\fR;
int \fIitemSize\fR;
Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR;
Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
.CE
.PP
The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail
later in this manual entry.
When \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is called, its \fItypePtr\fR
argument must point to a structure with all of the fields initialized
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 | .CE .PP The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning, and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be added to each x and y coordinate within the item. The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and update the bounding box in the item's header. | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | .CE .PP The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning, and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be added to each x and y coordinate within the item. The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and update the bounding box in the item's header. .SS INDEXPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a string index specification into a numerical index, for example during the \fBindex\fR widget command. It is only relevant for item types that support indexable text or coordinates; \fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < < < < < < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateEventHandler, Tk_DeleteEventHandler \- associate procedure callback with an X event .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which events may occur. .AP "unsigned long" mask in Bit-mask of events (such as \fBButtonPressMask\fR) for which \fIproc\fR should be called. .AP Tk_EventProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever an event in \fImask\fR occurs |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted automatically; in this case there is no need to call \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR. .PP If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the order they were created. | < < < < < | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted automatically; in this case there is no need to call \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR. .PP If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the order they were created. .SH KEYWORDS bind, callback, event, handler |
Changes to doc/FindPhoto.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
260 261 262 263 264 265 266 | .SH BUGS The \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure used to provide image data to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR promises great flexibility in the layout of the data (e.g. separate planes for the red, green, blue and alpha channels). Unfortunately, the implementation fails to hold this promise. The problem is that the \fIpixelSize\fR field is (incorrectly) used to determine whether the image has an alpha channel. | | | 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | .SH BUGS The \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure used to provide image data to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR promises great flexibility in the layout of the data (e.g. separate planes for the red, green, blue and alpha channels). Unfortunately, the implementation fails to hold this promise. The problem is that the \fIpixelSize\fR field is (incorrectly) used to determine whether the image has an alpha channel. Currently, if the offset for the alpha channel is greater than or equal to \fIpixelSize\fR, \fBtk_PhotoPutblock\fR assumes no alpha data is present and makes the image fully opaque. This means that for layouts where the channels are separate (or any other exotic layout where \fIpixelSize\fR has to be smaller than the alpha offset), the alpha channel will not be read correctly. In order to be on the safe side if this issue will be corrected in a future release, it is strongly recommended you always provide alpha data - even if the image has no |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/FreeXId.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The default allocator for resource identifiers provided by Xlib is very simple-minded and does not allow resource identifiers to be re-used. If a long-running application reaches the end of the resource id space, it will generate an X protocol error and crash. Tk replaces the default id allocator with its own allocator, which allows identifiers to be reused. In order for this to work, \fBTk_FreeXId\fR must be called to tell the allocator about resources that have been freed. Tk automatically calls \fBTk_FreeXId\fR whenever it frees a resource, so if you use procedures like \fBTk_GetFont\fR, \fBTk_GetGC\fR, and \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR then you need not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR. However, if you allocate resources directly from Xlib, for example by calling \fBXCreatePixmap\fR, then you should call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR when you call the corresponding Xlib free procedure, such as \fBXFreePixmap\fR. If you do not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR then the resource identifier will be lost, which could cause problems if the application runs long enough to lose all of the available identifiers. .SH KEYWORDS resource identifier |
Changes to doc/GetColor.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp XColor * | | | | | | | | | > | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColor\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fR) .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR(\fItkwin, prefPtr\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr\fR) .sp GC \fBTk_GCForColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr, drawable\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeColor\fR(\fIcolorPtr\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *colorPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which color will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value describes desired color; internal rep will be modified to cache pointer to corresponding (XColor *). .AP "const char" *name in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of color is passed as a string and resulting (XColor *) is not cached. .AP XColor *prefPtr in Indicates red, green, and blue intensities of desired color. .AP XColor *colorPtr in Pointer to X color information. Must have been allocated by previous |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | .PP Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color in a particular window. The desired color is specified with a value whose string value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fIcolorname\fR Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR. .TP 20 \fB#\fIRGB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities to use to display the color. Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR represents a single hexadecimal digit. The four forms permit colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values. When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent the most significant bits of the color, while the lower unfilled bits will be repeatedly replicated from the available higher bits. | > > | 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | .PP Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color in a particular window. The desired color is specified with a value whose string value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fIcolorname\fR . Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR. .TP 20 \fB#\fIRGB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR . A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities to use to display the color. Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR represents a single hexadecimal digit. The four forms permit colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values. When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent the most significant bits of the color, while the lower unfilled bits will be repeatedly replicated from the available higher bits. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetCursor.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Cursor | | | | | | | | > | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | .SH NAME Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursor\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fR) .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot, fg, bg\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR(\fIdisplay, cursor\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR(\fItkwin, objPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR(\fIdisplay, cursor\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the cursor will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out Description of cursor; see below for possible values. Internal rep will be modified to cache pointer to corresponding Tk_Cursor. .AP "const char" *name in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of cursor is passed as a string and resulting Tk_Cursor is not cached. .AP "const char" *source in Data for cursor cursor, in standard cursor format. .AP "const char" *mask in Data for mask cursor, in standard cursor format. .AP "int" width in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 | \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl list with one of the following forms: .TP \fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]] \fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor, i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without the \fBXC_\fR. Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR, or \fBleft_ptr\fR. Appendix B of .QW "The X Window System" by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these cursors looks like. If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both | > | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl list with one of the following forms: .TP \fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]] . \fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor, i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without the \fBXC_\fR. Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR, or \fBleft_ptr\fR. Appendix B of .QW "The X Window System" by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these cursors looks like. If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 | name of the resource. The application and all its open dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named cursor. If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded in preference to black and white cursors. .RE .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask. Each file must be in standard X11 cursor format. \fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR indicate the colors to use for the cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is used as mask also. This means that the cursor's background is transparent. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\fR This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in \fIsourceName\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the | > > > | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 | name of the resource. The application and all its open dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named cursor. If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded in preference to black and white cursors. .RE .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR . In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask. Each file must be in standard X11 cursor format. \fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR indicate the colors to use for the cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR . This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is used as mask also. This means that the cursor's background is transparent. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\fR . This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in \fIsourceName\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the cursor. If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR, or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string giving the X identifier for the cursor. | | | 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 | The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the cursor. If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR, or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string giving the X identifier for the cursor. Note that the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the next call to \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR. Also, this call is not portable except for cursors returned by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. .PP When a cursor returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR or |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetFont.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp void |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP | < < < | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetFont\fR. Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by \fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is the \fIstring\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font. The string returned by \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR is deleted. The caller must not modify this string. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM \- translate between strings and screen units .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR .sp int |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 | by a character that is not one of the ones above) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP | < < < | 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | by a character that is not one of the ones above) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR except that the screen distance is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetPixels\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetMMFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR are similar to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetPixels\fR (respectively) except that they convert the screen distance to millimeters and store a double-precision floating-point result at \fI*doublePtr\fR. .SH KEYWORDS centimeters, convert, inches, millimeters, pixels, points, screen units |
Changes to doc/GetRelief.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | .SH NAME Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int | | | | > | < < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | .SH NAME Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, reliefPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_GetRelief\fR(\fIinterp, name, reliefPtr\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfRelief\fR(\fIrelief\fR) .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *reliefPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of relief, one of .QW \fBflat\fR , .QW \fBgroove\fR , .QW \fBraised\fR , .QW \fBridge\fR , .QW \fBsolid\fR , or .QW \fBsunken\fR (or any unique abbreviation thereof on input); the internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding relief value. .AP "const char" *name in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of relief is passed as a string. .AP int *reliefPtr out Pointer to location in which to store relief value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIname\fR. .AP int relief in Relief value (one of \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR. It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2]. The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms: .CS \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR | | | | | | | < | 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 | \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR. It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2]. The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms: .CS \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR .CE .LP Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBunits\fR, and \fBpages\fR keywords may be abbreviated. If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBmoveto\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_MOVETO\fR is returned as result and \fI*fractionPtr\fR is filled in with the \fIfraction\fR argument to the command, which must be a proper real value. If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR or \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR is returned and \fI*stepsPtr\fR is filled in with the \fInumber\fR value, which must be a proper integer. If an error occurs in parsing the arguments, \fBTK_SCROLL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR is identical in function to \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR. However, \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR accepts string arguments, making it more appropriate for use with legacy |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS | | | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster imageHeight .AP Tk_ImageMaster model in Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .AP int x in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upper-left corner of image). .AP int y in Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves appropriately. The \fImodel\fR argument identifies the image, and \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to be redrawn. \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size. .PP An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image. If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on, \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels | > > > > | 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves appropriately. The \fImodel\fR argument identifies the image, and \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to be redrawn. \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size. .PP .VS "TIP 581" \fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR .VE "TIP 581" .PP An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image. If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on, \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 |
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about
the geometry manager:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIname\fR;
Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR;
| | | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 |
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about
the geometry manager:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIname\fR;
Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR;
Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *\fIlostSlaveProc\fR;
} \fBTk_GeomMgr\fR;
.CE
The \fIname\fR field is the textual name for the geometry manager,
such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR; this value will be returned
by the command \fBwinfo manager\fR.
.PP
\fIrequestProc\fR is a procedure in the geometry manager that
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | .CE The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR. \fIclientData\fR usually points to a data structure containing application-specific information about how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry. .PP | | | | | | | | 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 |
.CE
The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the
corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
\fIclientData\fR usually points to a data
structure containing application-specific information about
how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry.
.PP
The \fIlostSlaveProc\fR field of \fImgrPtr\fR points to another
procedure in the geometry manager.
Tk will invoke \fIlostSlaveProc\fR if some other manager
calls \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR to claim
\fItkwin\fR away from the current geometry manager.
\fIlostSlaveProc\fR is not invoked if \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR is
called with a NULL value for \fImgrPtr\fR (presumably the current
geometry manager has made this call, so it already knows that the
window is no longer managed), nor is it called if \fImgrPtr\fR
is the same as the window's current geometry manager.
\fIlostSlaveProc\fR should have
arguments and results that match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef void \fBTk_GeomLostSlaveProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR);
.CE
The parameters to \fIlostSlaveProc\fR will be identical to the
corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
callback, geometry, managed, request, unmanaged
|
Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * | | | | > > > > | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH NAME Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageMaster\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster .AP Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster in Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is invoked by image managers to find out the name of an image. Given the token for the image, it returns the string name for the image. .PP .VS "TIP 581" \fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR .VE "TIP 581" .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image name |
Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 |
.PP
The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
expected; each of its entries has the following structure:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIkey\fR;
int \fItype\fR;
| | | | 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
.PP
The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
expected; each of its entries has the following structure:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIkey\fR;
int \fItype\fR;
char *\fIsrc\fR;
char *\fIdst\fR;
const char *\fIhelp\fR;
} \fBTk_ArgvInfo\fR;
.CE
The \fIkey\fR field is a string such as
.QW \-display
or
.QW \-bg
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 |
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;
/*
* Define option descriptions.
*/
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
| | | | | | 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 |
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;
/*
* Define option descriptions.
*/
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
{"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &debugFlag,
"Turn on debugging printfs"},
{"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, (char *) &numReps,
"Number of repetitions"},
{"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &fileName,
"Name of file for output"},
{"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, (char *) &exec,
"File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
{NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL,
NULL}
};
main(argc, argv)
int argc;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 |
.PP
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
are used as callbacks in different places.
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
| | | 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 |
.PP
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
are used as callbacks in different places.
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
unsigned int \fIsize\fR;
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR;
Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR;
} \fBTk_ClassProcs\fR;
.CE
The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the
structure. It should always be set to (literally) \fBsizeof(Tk_ClassProcs)\fR.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue, Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions, Tk_Offset \- process configuration options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_OptionTable \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR(\fIoptionTable\fR) .sp int \fBTk_InitOptions\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_SetOptions\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr, maskPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_Offset(\fItype, field\fB)\fR .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in A Tcl interpreter. Most procedures use this only for returning error messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned. For \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the interpreter in which the option table will be used. .AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable. .AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. .AP char *recordPtr in/out Points to structure in which values of configuration options are stored; fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | .QW widget will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in practice the object may not actually be a widget. The term .QW "widget record" is used to refer to the C-level structure in which information about a particular widget or object is stored. .PP | | | 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | .QW widget will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in practice the object may not actually be a widget. The term .QW "widget record" is used to refer to the C-level structure in which information about a particular widget or object is stored. .PP Note that the easiest way to learn how to use these procedures is to look at a working example. In Tk, the simplest example is the code that implements the button family of widgets, which is in \fBtkButton.c\fR. Other examples are in \fBtkSquare.c\fR and \fBtkMenu.c\fR. .PP In order to use these procedures, the code that implements the widget must contain a static array of Tk_OptionSpec structures. This is a template that describes the various options supported by that class of |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | class. A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. When an option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be called to free all of its resources. All of the option tables for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted. .PP \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the | | < | < | > > | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 | class. A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. When an option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be called to free all of its resources. All of the option tables for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted. .PP \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the default values. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is passed a token for an option table (\fIoptionTable\fR) and a pointer to a widget record (\fIrecordPtr\fR), which is the C structure that holds information about this widget. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR uses the information in the option table to choose an appropriate default for each option, then it stores the default value directly into the widget record, overwriting any information that was already present in the widget record. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurred while setting the default values (e.g., because a default value was erroneous) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. For any widget's configuration option that has \fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR set in its \fIflags\fR field, the above initialization is fully skipped, see below. .PP \fBTk_SetOptions\fR is invoked to modify configuration options based on information specified in a Tcl command. The command might be one that creates a new widget, or a command that modifies options on an existing widget. The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe the values of the arguments from the Tcl command. \fIObjv\fR must contain an even number of objects: the first object of each pair gives the name of |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 |
(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
.PP
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
.SH "TEMPLATES"
.PP
The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies
one configuration option and has the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
| > > > > > > | | | 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 |
(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
.PP
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
.PP
The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the
\fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR values for entries in
Tk_OptionSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type
of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte
offset of the named field in records of the given type.
.SH "TEMPLATES"
.PP
The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies
one configuration option and has the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIobjOffset\fR;
int \fIinternalOffset\fR;
int \fIflags\fR;
const void *\fIclientData\fR;
int \fItypeMask\fR;
} \fBTk_OptionSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what kind of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR for
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | \fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the | | | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 | \fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro. The \fIflags\fR field contains additional information to control the processing of this configuration option (see below for details). \fIClientData\fR provides additional type-specific data needed by certain types. For instance, for \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR types, \fIclientData\fR is a string giving the default value to use on monochrome displays. See the descriptions of the different types |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
297 298 299 300 301 302 303 | \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer. If the \fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the value is not stored in that form. At least one of the offsets must be greater than or equal to zero. .PP The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. The following flags are supported: | < | < | > | | < | < | | < > > | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | | | < | < | | | | < | | | < | < | < | < | | 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer. If the \fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the value is not stored in that form. At least one of the offsets must be greater than or equal to zero. .PP The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. The following flags are supported: .IP \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR If this bit is set for an option then an empty string will be accepted as the value for the option and the resulting internal form will be a NULL pointer, a zero value, or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the option. If the flag is not set then empty strings will result in errors. \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR is typically used to allow a feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to \fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor. Not all option types support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; for those that do, there is an explicit indication of that fact in the descriptions below. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR If this bit is set for an option then no default value will be set in \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. Neither the option database, nor any system default value, nor \fIoptionTable\fR are used to give a default value to this option. Instead it is assumed that the caller has already supplied a default value in the widget code. .RS .PP The \fItype\fR field of each Tk_OptionSpec structure determines how to parse the value of that configuration option. The legal value for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are described below. If the type requires a \fItkwin\fR value to be passed into procedures like \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, or if it uses the \fIclientData\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec, then it is indicated explicitly; if not mentioned, the type requires neither \fItkwin\fR nor \fIclientData\fR. .RE .IP \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR The value must be a standard anchor position such as \fBne\fR or \fBcenter\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Anchor value like the ones returned by \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_BITMAP\fR The value must be a standard Tk bitmap name. The internal form is a Pixmap token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR The value must be a standard boolean value such as \fBtrue\fR or \fBno\fR. The internal form is an integer with value 0 or 1. Note that if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not used, information about the original value of this option will be lost. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_BORDER\fR The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR. The internal form is a Tk_3DBorder token like the ones returned by \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR. The internal form is an (XColor *) token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_CURSOR\fR The value must be a standard cursor name such as \fBcross\fR or \fB@foo\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Cursor token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and when the option is set the cursor for the window is changed by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR. This option type also supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_CUSTOM\fR This option allows applications to define new option types. The clientData field of the entry points to a structure defining the new option type. See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_DOUBLE\fR The string value must be a floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. The internal form is a C \fBdouble\fR value. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR Marks the end of the template. There must be a Tk_OptionSpec structure with \fItype\fR \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR at the end of each template. If the \fIclientData\fR field of this structure is not NULL, then it points to an additional array of Tk_OptionSpec's, which is itself terminated by another \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR entry. Templates may be chained arbitrarily deeply. This feature allows common options to be shared by several widget classes. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR The value must be a standard font name such as \fBTimes 16\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Font handle like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR The string value must be an integer in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. \fB0\fR and \fB0x\fR prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). The internal form is a C \fBint\fR value. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR The value must be a standard justification value such as \fBleft\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Justify like the values returned by \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR The value must specify a screen distance such as \fB2i\fR or \fB6.4\fR. The internal form is an integer value giving a distance in pixels, like the values returned by \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR. Note that if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not used, information about the original value of this option will be lost. See \fBOBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET\fR below for details. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to INT_MIN. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR. The internal form is an integer relief value such as \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to \fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR The value may be any string. The internal form is a (char *) pointer that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR For this type, \fIclientData\fR is a pointer to an array of strings suitable for passing to \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR. The value must be one of the strings in the table, or a unique abbreviation of one of the strings. The internal form is an integer giving the index into the table of the matching string, like the return value from \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to -1. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_SYNONYM\fR This type is used to provide alternative names for an option (for example, \fB\-bg\fR is often used as a synonym for \fB\-background\fR). The \fBclientData\fR field is a string that gives the name of another option in the same table. Whenever the synonym option is used, the information from the other option will be used instead. .IP \fBTK_OPTION_WINDOW\fR The value must be a window path name. The internal form is a \fBTk_Window\fR token for the window. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (in order to identify the application), and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT ISSUES" .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
491 492 493 494 495 496 497 | the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field. In this case the original value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when the option is retrieved. In most cases it is convenient to use the \fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively, \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from | | | > > > > | | 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 |
the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options
it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field. In this case the original
value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when
the option is retrieved. In most cases it is convenient to use the
\fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is
immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively,
\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from
the object whenever it is needed). Note that the problem of losing
information on retrievals exists only for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options.
.PP
The second reason to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field is in order to
implement new types of options not supported by these procedures.
To implement a new type of option, you can use \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR as
the type in the Tk_OptionSpec structure and set the \fIobjOffset\fR field
but not the \fIinternalOffset\fR field. Then, after calling
\fBTk_SetOptions\fR, convert the object to internal form yourself.
.PP
Ttk widgets do not support the \fIinternalOffset\fR machinery.
Option values of Ttk widgets are always stored as (Tcl_Obj *), meaning that
the \fIobjOffset\fR field must be used.
.SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES"
.PP
Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with
additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse, print,
free, and restore saved copies of the type and creating a structure
pointing to those procedures:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption {
const char *\fIname\fR;
Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *\fIsetProc\fR;
Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR;
Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *\fIrestoreProc\fR;
Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
} \fBTk_ObjCustomOption\fR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
557 558 559 560 561 562 563 | may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those operations. .PP The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the resulting value in the widget record. The arguments are: .RS | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | | 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 | may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those operations. .PP The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the resulting value in the widget record. The arguments are: .RS .IP \fIclientData\fR A copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption structure. .IP \fIinterp\fR A pointer to a Tcl interpreter, used for error reporting. .IP \fITkwin\fR A copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR .IP \fIvaluePtr\fR A pointer to a reference to a Tcl_Obj describing the new value for the option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR or it could come from the option database or a default. If the objOffset for the option is non-negative (the option value is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) in the widget record), the Tcl_Obj pointer referenced by \fIvaluePtr\fR is the pointer that will be stored at the objOffset for the option. \fISetProc\fR may modify the value if necessary; for example, \fIsetProc\fR may change the value to NULL to support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .IP \fIrecordPtr\fR A pointer to the start of the widget record to modify. .IP \fIinternalOffset\fR Offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location where the internal representation of the option value is to be placed. .IP \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR A pointer to storage allocated in a Tk_SavedOptions structure for the internal representation of the original option value. Before setting the option to its new value, \fIsetProc\fR should set the value referenced by \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to the original value of the option in order to support \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR. .IP \fIflags\fR A copy of the \fIflags\fR field in the Tk_OptionSpec structure for the option .RE .PP \fISetProc\fR returns a standard Tcl result: \fBTCL_OK\fR to indicate successful processing, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate a failure of any kind. An error message may be left in the Tcl interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR in |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/WindowId.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_WindowId, Tk_Parent, Tk_Display, Tk_DisplayName, Tk_ScreenNumber, Tk_Screen, Tk_X, Tk_Y, Tk_Width, Tk_Height, Tk_Changes, Tk_Attributes, Tk_IsContainer, Tk_IsEmbedded, Tk_IsMapped, Tk_IsTopLevel, Tk_ReqWidth, Tk_ReqHeight, Tk_MinReqWidth, Tk_MinReqHeight, Tk_InternalBorderLeft, Tk_InternalBorderRight, Tk_InternalBorderTop, Tk_InternalBorderBottom, Tk_Visual, Tk_Depth, Tk_Colormap, Tk_Interp \- retrieve information from Tk's local data structure .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Window \fBTk_WindowId\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_Parent\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Display * \fBTk_Display\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_DisplayName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Screen * \fBTk_Screen\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_X\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | \fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Colormap \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < < < | 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 | \fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Colormap \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | .PP \fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens of \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen. | < < | 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 | .PP \fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens of \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen. .PP \fBTk_X\fR, \fBTk_Y\fR, \fBTk_Width\fR, and \fBTk_Height\fR return information about \fItkwin's\fR location within its parent and its size. The location information refers to the upper-left pixel in the window, or its border if there is one. The width and height information refers to the interior size of the window, not including any border. \fBTk_Changes\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | information about the visual characteristics of a window. \fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current colormap for the window. The visual characteristics are normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR. | < < | 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 | information about the visual characteristics of a window. \fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current colormap for the window. The visual characteristics are normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR. .SH KEYWORDS attributes, colormap, depth, display, height, geometry manager, identifier, mapped, requested size, screen, top-level, visual, width, window, x, y |
Changes to doc/bind.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | the window. Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding tags provide the following behavior: .IP \(bu 3 If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies to that window. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies to the toplevel window and all its internal windows. .IP \(bu 3 | > > > < < < | | 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | the window. Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding tags provide the following behavior: .IP \(bu 3 If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies to that window. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a class of widgets, such as \fBButton\fR, the binding applies to all widgets in that class. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies to the toplevel window and all its internal windows. .IP \(bu 3 If \fItag\fR has the value \fBall\fR, the binding applies to all windows in the application. .SH "EVENT PATTERNS" .PP The \fIsequence\fR argument specifies a sequence of one or more event patterns, with optional white space between the patterns. Each event pattern may take one of three forms. In the simplest case it is a single printing ASCII character, such as \fBa\fR or \fB[\fR. The character may not be a space character or the character \fB<\fR. This form of pattern matches a \fBKeyPress\fR event for the particular character. The second form of pattern is longer but more general. It has the following syntax: .CS \fB<\fImodifier\-modifier\-type\-detail\fB>\fR .CE The entire event pattern is surrounded by angle brackets. Inside the angle brackets are zero or more modifiers, an event |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | .PP The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a few extra abbreviations. The \fItype\fR field will also accept a couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support the Macintosh and Windows platforms. Below is a list of all the valid types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms. .DS | | | | | 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 | .PP The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a few extra abbreviations. The \fItype\fR field will also accept a couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support the Macintosh and Windows platforms. Below is a list of all the valid types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms. .DS .ta \w'\fBButtonPress, Button\0\0\0\fR'u +\w'\fBKeyPress, Key\0\0\0\fR'u \fBActivate\fR \fBDestroy\fR \fBMap\fR \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButton\fR \fBEnter\fR \fBMapRequest\fR \fBButtonRelease\fR \fBExpose\fR \fBMotion\fR \fBCirculate\fR \fBFocusIn\fR \fBMouseWheel\fR \fBCirculateRequest\fR \fBFocusOut\fR \fBProperty\fR \fBColormap\fR \fBGravity\fR \fBReparent\fR \fBConfigure\fR \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKey\fR \fBResizeRequest\fR \fBConfigureRequest\fR \fBKeyRelease\fR \fBUnmap\fR \fBCreate\fR \fBLeave\fR \fBVisibility\fR \fBDeactivate\fR .DE Most of the above events have the same fields and behaviors as events in the X Windowing system. You can find more detailed descriptions of these events in any X window programming book. A couple of the events |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 | value determines which direction your widget should scroll. Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down. .RS .PP Horizontal scrolling uses \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events, with positive \fB%D\fR \fIdelta\fR substitution indicating left scrolling and negative right scrolling. | > > > > | < < < | | | | | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | value determines which direction your widget should scroll. Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down. .RS .PP Horizontal scrolling uses \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events, with positive \fB%D\fR \fIdelta\fR substitution indicating left scrolling and negative right scrolling. Only Windows and macOS Aqua typically fire \fBMouseWheel\fR and \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events. On X11 vertical scrolling is rather supported through \fBButton-4\fR and \fBButton-5\fR events, and horizontal scrolling through \fBShift-Button-4\fR and \fBShift-Button-5\fR events. Horizontal scrolling events may fire from many different hardware units such as tilt wheels or touchpads. Horizontal scrolling can also be emulated by holding Shift and scrolling vertically. .RE .IP "\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR" 5 The \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are generated whenever a key is pressed or released. \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are sent to the window which currently has the keyboard focus. .IP "\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR" 5 The \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events are generated when the user presses or releases a mouse button. \fBMotion\fR events are generated whenever the pointer is moved. \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events are normally sent to the window containing the pointer. .RS .PP When a mouse button is pressed, the window containing the pointer automatically obtains a temporary pointer grab. Subsequent \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events will be sent to that window, regardless of which window contains the pointer, until all buttons have been released. .RE .IP \fBConfigure\fR 5 A \fBConfigure\fR event is sent to a window whenever its size, position, or border width changes, and sometimes |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | This event type is included only for completeness; there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the | | | | | | | | | 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 | This event type is included only for completeness; there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the number of a button (1\-5). If a button number is given, then only an event on that particular button will match; if no button number is given, then an event on any button will match. Note: giving a specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier; in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released, while in the second it refers to some other button that is already depressed when the matching event occurs. If a button number is given then \fItype\fR may be omitted: if will default to \fBButtonPress\fR. For example, the specifier \fB<1>\fR is equivalent to \fB<ButtonPress\-1>\fR. .PP If the event type is \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBKeyRelease\fR, then \fIdetail\fR may be specified in the form of an X keysym. Keysyms are textual specifications for particular keys on the keyboard; they include all the alphanumeric ASCII characters (e.g. .QW a is the keysym for the ASCII character .QW a ), plus descriptions for non-alphanumeric characters .PQ comma "is the keysym for the comma character" , plus descriptions for all the non-ASCII keys on the keyboard (e.g. .QW Shift_L is the keysym for the left shift key, and .QW F1 is the keysym for the F1 function key, if it exists). The complete list of keysyms is not presented here; it is available in other X documentation and may vary from system to system. If necessary, you can use the \fB%K\fR notation described below to print out the keysym name for a particular key. If a keysym \fIdetail\fR is given, then the \fItype\fR field may be omitted; it will default to \fBKeyPress\fR. For example, \fB<Control\-comma>\fR is equivalent to \fB<Control\-KeyPress\-comma>\fR. .SH "BINDING SCRIPTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS" .PP The \fIscript\fR argument to \fBbind\fR is a Tcl script, called the .QW "binding script", which will be executed whenever the given event sequence occurs. \fICommand\fR will be executed in the same interpreter that the \fBbind\fR command was executed in, and it will run at global |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
430 431 432 433 434 435 436 | formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events. Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the bottom. .IP \fB%b\fR 5 The number of the button that was pressed or released. Valid only | | | 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 | formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events. Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the bottom. .IP \fB%b\fR 5 The number of the button that was pressed or released. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%c\fR 5 The \fIcount\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates that there are \fIcount\fR pending \fBExpose\fR events which have not yet been delivered to the window. .IP \fB%d\fR 5 The \fIdetail\fR or \fIuser_data\fR field from the event. The \fB%d\fR is replaced by |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
477 478 479 480 481 482 483 | \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates the new or requested height of the window. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal integer. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%k\fR 5 | | | | | 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 | \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates the new or requested height of the window. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal integer. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%k\fR 5 The \fIkeycode\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%m\fR 5 The \fImode\fR field from the event. The substituted string is one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid only for \fBEnter\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR, and \fBLeave\fR events. .IP \fB%o\fR 5 The \fIoverride_redirect\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events. .IP \fB%p\fR 5 The \fIplace\fR field from the event, substituted as one of the strings \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid only for \fBCirculate\fR and \fBCirculateRequest\fR events. .IP \fB%s\fR 5 The \fIstate\fR field from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events, a decimal string is substituted. For \fBVisibility\fR, one of the strings \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, and \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR is substituted. For \fBProperty\fR events, substituted with either the string \fBNewValue\fR (indicating that the property has been created or modified) or \fBDelete\fR (indicating that |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
515 516 517 518 519 520 521 | The \fIwidth\fR field from the event. Indicates the new or requested width of the window. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. .IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5 The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event. | | | | | | | | 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 | The \fIwidth\fR field from the event. Indicates the new or requested width of the window. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. .IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5 The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, and \fBMouseWheel\fR events, \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR indicate the position of the mouse pointer relative to the receiving window. For key events on the Macintosh these are the coordinates of the mouse at the moment when an X11 KeyEvent is sent to Tk, which could be slightly later than the time of the physical press or release. For \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events, the position where the mouse pointer crossed the window, relative to the receiving window. For \fBConfigure\fR and \fBCreate\fR requests, the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates of the window relative to its parent window. .IP \fB%A\fR 5 Substitutes the UNICODE character corresponding to the event, or the empty string if the event does not correspond to a UNICODE character (e.g. the shift key was pressed). On X11, \fBXmbLookupString\fR (or \fBXLookupString\fR when input method support is turned off) does all the work of translating from the event to a UNICODE character. On X11, valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR event. On Windows and macOS/aqua, valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%B\fR 5 The \fIborder_width\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, and \fBCreate\fR events. .IP \fB%D\fR 5 This reports the \fIdelta\fR value of a \fBMouseWheel\fR event. The \fIdelta\fR value represents the rotation units the mouse wheel has been moved. The sign of the value represents the direction the mouse wheel was scrolled. .IP \fB%E\fR 5 The \fIsend_event\fR field from the event. Valid for all event types. \fB0\fR indicates that this is a .QW normal event, \fB1\fR indicates that it is a .QW synthetic event generated by \fBSendEvent\fR. .IP \fB%K\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a textual string. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%M\fR 5 The number of script-based binding patterns matched so far for the event. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%N\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a decimal number. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%P\fR 5 The name of the property being updated or deleted (which may be converted to an XAtom using \fBwinfo atom\fR.) Valid only for \fBProperty\fR events. .IP \fB%R\fR 5 The \fIroot\fR window identifier from the event. Valid only for events containing a \fIroot\fR field. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
579 580 581 582 583 584 585 | The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the \fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5 The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event. If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root. Valid only for | | | 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 | The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the \fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5 The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event. If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR and \fBMotion\fR events. Same meaning as \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR, except relative to the (virtual) root window. .LP The replacement string for a %-replacement is formatted as a proper Tcl list element. This means that spaces or special characters such as \fB$\fR and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
646 647 648 649 650 651 652 | The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: .RS .IP (a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific than one that does not; .IP (b) | | | < | 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 | The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: .RS .IP (a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific than one that does not; .IP (b) a longer sequence (in terms of number of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence; .IP (c) if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers is more specific; .IP (d) a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
692 693 694 695 696 697 698 | An unbound event is not considered to be an error. .SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS" .PP When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever the recent events (leading up to and including the current event) match the given sequence. This means, for example, that if button 1 is | | | | | | | | 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | An unbound event is not considered to be an error. .SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS" .PP When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever the recent events (leading up to and including the current event) match the given sequence. This means, for example, that if button 1 is clicked repeatedly the sequence \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match each button press but the first. If extraneous events that would prevent a match occur in the middle of an event sequence then the extraneous events are ignored unless they are \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBButtonPress\fR events. For example, \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match a sequence of presses of button 1, even though there will be \fBButtonRelease\fR events (and possibly \fBMotion\fR events) between the \fBButtonPress\fR events. Furthermore, a \fBKeyPress\fR event may be preceded by any number of other \fBKeyPress\fR events for modifier keys without the modifier keys preventing a match. For example, the event sequence \fBaB\fR will match a press of the \fBa\fR key, a release of the \fBa\fR key, a press of the \fBShift\fR key, and a press of the \fBb\fR key: the press of \fBShift\fR is ignored because it is a modifier key. Finally, if several \fBMotion\fR events occur in a row, only the last one is used for purposes of matching binding sequences. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/bitmap.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | .PP When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | .PP When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS \fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for bitmap images: .TP \fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/busy.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | .TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME busy \- Make Tk widgets busy, temporarily blocking user interactions .SH SYNOPSIS | > | < < < | < < | < < > | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | .TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME busy \- Make Tk widgets busy, temporarily blocking user interactions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBtk busy\fI window \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk busy hold\fI window \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... \fBtk busy forget\fI window \fR?\fIwindow \fR?... \fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR? \fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block mouse pointer events from Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to the widgets made busy. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 | \fBtk busy\fR forget .top .CE .PP The busy window has a configurable cursor. You can change the busy cursor using the \fBconfigure\fR operation. .PP .CS | | < < | < < < | > | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | \fBtk busy\fR forget .top .CE .PP The busy window has a configurable cursor. You can change the busy cursor using the \fBconfigure\fR operation. .PP .CS \fBtk busy\fR configure .top -cursor "watch" .CE .PP Destroying the widget will also clean up any resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command. .PP .SH OPERATIONS .PP The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command: .TP \fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command. .\" METHOD: cget .TP \fBtk busy cget \fIwindow option\fR . Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the \fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBhold\fR operation. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Queries or modifies the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the \fBhold\fR operation. If no options are specified, a list describing all of the available options for \fIwindow\fR (see |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 | specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command: .PP .CS option add *frame.busyCursor gumby option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby .CE .RE .TP \fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR? . Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a \fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching \fIpattern\fR are returned. .TP \fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?... . Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR, including the transparent window. User events will again be received by \fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed. \fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR operation, otherwise an error is reported. .TP \fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget. A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally \fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The | > > > < < | > > | > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 |
specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command:
.PP
.CS
option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
.CE
.RE
.\" METHOD: current
.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.
.\" METHOD: forget
.TP
\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
.
Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
operation, otherwise an error is reported.
.\" METHOD: hold
.TP
\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
.
Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
following configuration options are valid:
.RS
.\" OPTION: -cursor
.TP
\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
.
Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
.RE
.\" METHOD: status
.TP
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
.SS BINDINGS
.PP
The event blocking feature is implemented by creating and mapping a
transparent window that completely covers the widget. When the busy window is
mapped, it invisibly shields the widget and its hierarchy from all events that
may be sent. Like Tk widgets, busy windows have widget names in the Tk window
hierarchy. This means that you can use the \fBbind\fR command to handle
events in the busy window:
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame.canvas
bind .frame.canvas_Busy <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.PP
Normally the busy window is a sibling of the widget. The name of the busy
window is
.QW \fIwidget\fB_Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the widget to be made busy. In the previous
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB.frame.canvas_Busy\fR .
The exception is when the widget is a toplevel widget (such as
.QW . )
where the busy window can't be made a sibling. The busy window is then a child
of the widget named
.QW \fIwidget\fB._Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the toplevel widget. In the following
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB._Busy\fR .
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .
bind ._Busy <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.SS "ENTER/LEAVE EVENTS"
.PP
Mapping and unmapping busy windows generates Enter/Leave events for all
widgets they cover. Please note this if you are tracking Enter/Leave events in
widgets.
.SS "KEYBOARD EVENTS"
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 | .PP The above example moves the focus from .frame immediately after invoking the \fBhold\fR so that no keyboard events will be sent to \fB.frame\fR or any of its descendants. It also makes sure it's not possible to leave button \fB.cancel\fR using the keyboard. .SH PORTABILITY .PP | | | 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 | .PP The above example moves the focus from .frame immediately after invoking the \fBhold\fR so that no keyboard events will be sent to \fB.frame\fR or any of its descendants. It also makes sure it's not possible to leave button \fB.cancel\fR using the keyboard. .SH PORTABILITY .PP Note that the \fBtk busy\fR command does not currently have any effect on macOS when Tk is built using Aqua support. .SH "SEE ALSO" grab(n) .SH KEYWORDS busy, keyboard events, pointer events, window '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/button.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME button \- Create and manipulate 'button' action widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME button \- Create and manipulate 'button' action widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBbutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-font \-relief \-activeforeground \-foreground \-repeatdelay \-anchor \-highlightbackground \-repeatinterval \-background \-highlightcolor \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightthickness \-text \-borderwidth \-image \-textvariable |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for button widgets: .TP | > | > > > > > > > | 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for button widgets: .\" METHOD: cget .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fI option\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR command. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR command. .\" METHOD: flash .TP \fIpathName \fBflash\fR . Flash the button. This is accomplished by redisplaying the button several times, alternating between the configured activebackground and background colors. At the end of the flash the button is left in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked. This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .\" METHOD: invoke .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR . Invoke the Tcl command associated with the button, if there is one. The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an empty string if there is no command associated with the button. This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | If the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the button is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of buttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "PLATFORM NOTES" .PP | | | | | | | | 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 |
If the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
actions occur: the button is completely non-responsive.
.PP
The behavior of buttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
.SH "PLATFORM NOTES"
.PP
On Aqua/macOS, some configuration options are ignored for the purpose of
drawing of the widget because they would otherwise conflict with platform
guidelines. The \fBconfigure\fR and \fBcget\fR subcommands can still
manipulate the values, but do not cause any variation to the look of the
widget. The options affected notably include \fB\-background\fR and
\fB\-relief\fR.
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This is the classic Tk
.QW "Hello, World!"
demonstration:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b -text "Hello, World!" -command exit
pack .b
.CE
.PP
This example demonstrates how to handle button accelerators:
.PP
.CS
\fBbutton\fR .b1 -text Hello -underline 0
\fBbutton\fR .b2 -text World -underline 0
bind . <Key-h> {.b1 flash; .b1 invoke}
bind . <Key-w> {.b2 flash; .b2 invoke}
pack .b1 .b2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::button(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
button, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/canvas.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 | It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used for scrolling. Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate system relative to the window coordinate system. .PP | | < < < < | | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 | It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used for scrolling. Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate system relative to the window coordinate system. .PP Individual items may be moved or scaled using widget commands described below, but they may not be rotated. .PP Note that the default origin of the canvas's visible area is coincident with the origin for the whole window as that makes bindings using the mouse position easier to work with; you only need to use the \fBcanvasx\fR and \fBcanvasy\fR widget commands if you adjust the origin of the visible area. However, this also means that any focus ring (as controlled by the \fB\-highlightthickness\fR option) and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
313 314 315 316 317 318 319 | .PP The second possible syntax is a character list containing only 5 possible characters .QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" . The space can be used to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot occur as the first position in the string. Some examples: | < | 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 |
.PP
The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
5 possible characters
.QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" .
The space can be used
to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot
occur as the first position in the string. Some examples:
.CS
\-dash . \(-> \-dash {2 4}
\-dash - \(-> \-dash {6 4}
\-dash -. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4}
\-dash -.. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4}
\-dash {. } \(-> \-dash {2 8}
\-dash , \(-> \-dash {4 4}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | | 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . For each item that meets the constraints specified by \fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add \fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it is not already present on that list. It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagOrId\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, | | | 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 | If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagOrId\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. The handling of events in canvases uses the current item defined in \fBITEM IDS AND TAGS\fR above. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events trigger for an item when it becomes the current item or ceases to be the current item; note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse-related events are directed to the current item, if any. Keyboard-related events are directed to the focus item, if |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP | | | 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 | tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command returns a list consisting of all the items that meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and \fIarg\fR's. \fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command. The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
659 660 661 662 663 664 665 | legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | > | 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 | legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR .VS 8.6 This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR). Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR . This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position as described in \fBINDICES\fR above. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR | | > | 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR .VS 8.6 Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space so that the first coordinate pair (the upper-left corner of the bounding box) of the first item (the lowest in the display list) with tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate will be unchanged. All items matching \fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other. This command returns an empty string. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas. If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
960 961 962 963 964 965 966 | Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 | Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR .VS 8.6 This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by \fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR . Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas coordinate space. \fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 | total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > > < < < | 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 | total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise. If \fIwhat is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width. If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right becomes visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview ?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 | \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. | | > > > < < < | 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 | \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height. If \fInumber\fR is negative then higher information becomes visible; if it is positive then lower information becomes visible. .RE .SH "OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES" .PP The sections below describe the various types of items supported by canvas widgets. Each item type is characterized by two things: first, the form of the \fBcreate\fR command used to create instances of the type; and second, a set of configuration options |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR . Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. | | > | 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 | \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR . Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. in its normal, active, and disabled states. The even-odd fill rule is used. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn. For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text. If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default for all canvas items except line and text), then the item will not be filled. .TP \fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 | For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES" .SS "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified | | | | < < | 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 | For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES" .SS "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified by the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options) and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option). Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. An arc item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 | modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 | modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. .TP \fB\-style \fItype\fR Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR (the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center of the oval and each end of the perimeter section. If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 | and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight | | | 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control points (the associated knot point will be the first control point). .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 | \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR | | > | 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 | \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR .VS 8.6 \fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top. This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR. .VE 8.6 .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR Specifies the font to use for the text item. \fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent font. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/checkbutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for checkbutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/chooseDirectory.n.
1 | '\" | | > | > | > | > > | > | > | > > | > | > | > | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation.
'\" All rights reserved.
'\"
.TH tk_chooseDirectory n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tk_chooseDirectory \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory.
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBtk_chooseDirectory \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the
user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
possible as command line arguments:
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on macOS.
.\" OPTION: -initialdir
.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fI dirname\fR
.
Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.
.\" OPTION: -message
.TP
\fB\-message\fI string\fR
.
Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on macOS.
.\" OPTION: -mustexist
.TP
\fB\-mustexist\fI boolean\fR
.
Specifies whether the user may specify non-existent directories. If
this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
already exist. The default value is \fIfalse\fR.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
is displayed on top of its parent window. On macOS, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
set dir [\fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR \e
-initialdir ~ -title "Choose a directory"]
if {$dir eq ""} {
label .l -text "No directory selected"
} else {
label .l -text "Selected $dir"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_getOpenFile(n), tk_getSaveFile(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
directory, selection, dialog, platform-specific
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/clipboard.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS \fBclipboard \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command provides a Tcl interface to the Tk clipboard, which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism (via the \fB\-selection CLIPBOARD\fR option). In order to copy data into the clipboard, \fBclipboard clear\fR must |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/colors.n.
1 | '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" Copyright (c) 2003 ActiveState Corporation. '\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net> '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Donal K. Fellows '\" .TH colors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
778 779 780 781 782 783 784 | yellow2 238 238 0 yellow3 205 205 0 yellow4 139 139 0 YellowGreen 154 205 50 .DE .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP | | | 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 | yellow2 238 238 0 yellow3 205 205 0 yellow4 139 139 0 YellowGreen 154 205 50 .DE .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP \fBmacOS\fR . On macOS, the following additional system colors are available. This first group contains all of the HIBrush colors available in the HIToolbox library. Note that on macOS 10.14 (Mojave) and later these colors are unlikely to match the color actually used for the purpose suggested by the color name. .RS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
866 867 868 869 870 871 872 | systemWhite systemWindowBody .DE .RE . Tk supports all of the NSColors in the macOS System ColorList. The convention for naming these colors is that the Tk name is generated by | | | 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 | systemWhite systemWindowBody .DE .RE . Tk supports all of the NSColors in the macOS System ColorList. The convention for naming these colors is that the Tk name is generated by capitalizing the macOS name and adding the prefix "system". On macOS 10.14 (Mojave) and later many of these "semantic" colors will appear differently depending on whether the NSWindow in which they are used has the Aqua or DarkAqua appearance. The System ColorList differs between releases of macOS and some colors, such as systemLinkColor and systemControlAccentColor, are simulated on older systems which did not provide them. All of the colors below are available on all supported macOS releases, but newer systems will support additional colors. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
892 893 894 895 896 897 898 | systemTextBackgroundColor systemTextColor .DE .RE . The numbered systemWindowBackgroundColors below are used in the \fBttk::notebook\fR and \fBttk::labelframe\fR widgets | | < | | | | | | | | | < | 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 | systemTextBackgroundColor systemTextColor .DE .RE . The numbered systemWindowBackgroundColors below are used in the \fBttk::notebook\fR and \fBttk::labelframe\fR widgets to provide a contrasting background. Each numbered color contrasts with its predecessor. .RS .DS systemWindowBackgroundColor systemWindowBackgroundColor1 systemWindowBackgroundColor2 systemWindowBackgroundColor3 systemWindowBackgroundColor4 systemWindowBackgroundColor5 systemWindowBackgroundColor6 systemWindowBackgroundColor7 .DE .RE .TP \fBWindows\fR . On Windows, the following additional system colors are available (note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme): .RS .DS .ta 6c system3dDarkShadow systemHighlight system3dLight systemHighlightText systemActiveBorder systemInactiveBorder systemActiveCaption systemInactiveCaption systemAppWorkspace systemInactiveCaptionText systemBackground systemInfoBackground systemButtonFace systemInfoText systemButtonHighlight systemMenu systemButtonShadow systemMenuText systemButtonText systemScrollbar systemCaptionText systemWindow systemDisabledText systemWindowFrame systemGrayText systemWindowText .DE .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" options(n), Tk_GetColor(3) .SH KEYWORDS color, option '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/cursors.n.
1 | '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net> '\" .TH cursors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | xterm .CE .PP The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor. .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP \fBWindows\fR On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors: .RS .CS arrow center_ptr crosshair fleur | > | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | xterm .CE .PP The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor. .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP \fBWindows\fR . On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors: .RS .CS arrow center_ptr crosshair fleur |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | size_nw_se size_we uparrow wait .CE .RE .TP | | > | | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | size_nw_se size_we uparrow wait .CE .RE .TP \fBmacOS\fR . On macOS, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors: .RS .CS arrow top_left_arrow left_ptr cross crosshair |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/entry.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-justify \-highlightcolor \-relief | < | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-justify \-highlightcolor \-relief .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled. If this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used. .OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled. If |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 | entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName subcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fISubcommand\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | | | < < | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/event.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH event n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME event \- Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH event n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME event \- Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events .SH SYNOPSIS \fBevent\fI option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing events. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIborder_width\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-button\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIborder_width\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-button\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding any button number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-count\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIcount\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBExpose\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIheight\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keycode\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR field for the event. | | | | 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIheight\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keycode\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keysym\fI name\fR \fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR, \fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR; its corresponding keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-mode\fI notify\fR \fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-root\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window identifier; it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event. | | | | | | | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-root\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window identifier; it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-serial\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIserial\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-state\fI state\fR \fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event. For \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events it must be an integer value. For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR. This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR specified in the base \fIevent\fR. Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-time\fI integer\fR \fIInteger\fR must be an integer value; it specifies the \fItime\fR field for the event. Additonally the special value \fBcurrent\fR is allowed, this value will be substituted by the current event time. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBProperty\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR \fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies whether the screen pointer should be warped as well. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. The pointer will only warp to a window if it is mapped. .TP \fB\-width\fI size\fR \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 | This option is useful when generating a series of events that should be processed in order but at the front of the queue. .RE .TP \fB\-x\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx\fR field for the event. | | | | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | This option is useful when generating a series of events that should be processed in order but at the front of the queue. .RE .TP \fB\-x\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-y\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 | This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires. The legacy widgets ignore this event. .TP \fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP | > > > > > > > > > | 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires. The legacy widgets ignore this event. .TP \fB<<TkWorldChanged>>\fR . This event is sent to all widgets when a font is changed, for example, by the use of [font configure]. The user_data field (%d) will have the value "FontChanged". For other system wide changes, this event will be sent to all widgets, and the user_data field will indicate the cause of the change. NOTE: all tk and ttk widgets already handle this event internally. .TP \fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
564 565 566 567 568 569 570 |
.PP
When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
will respond immediately to the new definition.
Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
.PP
.CS
bind Entry <Control-y> {}
| | | 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 |
.PP
When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
will respond immediately to the new definition.
Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
.PP
.CS
bind Entry <Control-y> {}
\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Key-F6>
.CE
.PP
the behavior will change such in two ways. First, the shadowed
\fB<<Paste>>\fR binding will emerge.
Typing Control-y will no longer invoke the \fB<Control-y>\fR binding,
but instead invoke the virtual event \fB<<Paste>>\fR. Second,
pressing the F6 key will now also invoke the \fB<<Paste>>\fR binding.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/focus.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME focus \- Manage the input focus .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBfocus\fR \fBfocus \fIwindow\fR | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME focus \- Manage the input focus .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBfocus\fR \fBfocus \fIwindow\fR \fBfocus \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBfocus\fR command is used to manage the Tk input focus. At any given time, one window on each display is designated as the \fIfocus window\fR; any key press or key release events for the |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/font.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of a font. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: .TP \fBfont actual \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIchar\fR? . Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when \fIfont\fR is used on \fIwindow\fR's display; the actual attributes obtained may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependent limitations, such as the availability of font families and point sizes. \fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. If \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values. See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes. If the \fIchar\fR argument is supplied, it must be a single character. The font attributes returned will be those of the specific font used to render that character, which will be different from the base font if the base font does not contain the given character. If \fIchar\fR may be a hyphen, it should be preceded by \fB\-\|\-\fR to distinguish it from a misspelled \fIoption\fR. .TP \fBfont configure \fIfontname\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the desired attributes for the named font called \fIfontname\fR. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all the options and their values for \fIfontname\fR. If a single \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then returns the current value of that attribute. If one or more \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given named font to have the given values; in this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the new attributes for the font. See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes. .RS .PP | > > | > > | > > > > > | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of a font. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: .\" METHOD: actual .TP \fBfont actual \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIchar\fR? . Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when \fIfont\fR is used on \fIwindow\fR's display; the actual attributes obtained may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependent limitations, such as the availability of font families and point sizes. \fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. If \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values. See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes. If the \fIchar\fR argument is supplied, it must be a single character. The font attributes returned will be those of the specific font used to render that character, which will be different from the base font if the base font does not contain the given character. If \fIchar\fR may be a hyphen, it should be preceded by \fB\-\|\-\fR to distinguish it from a misspelled \fIoption\fR. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fBfont configure \fIfontname\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the desired attributes for the named font called \fIfontname\fR. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all the options and their values for \fIfontname\fR. If a single \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then returns the current value of that attribute. If one or more \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given named font to have the given values; in this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the new attributes for the font. See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes. .RS .PP Note that on Aqua/macOS, the system fonts (see \fBPLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS\fR below) may not be actually altered because they are implemented by the system theme. To achieve the effect of modification, use \fBfont actual\fR to get their configuration and \fBfont create\fR to synthesize a copy of the font which can be modified. .RE .\" METHOD: create .TP \fBfont create\fR ?\fIfontname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Creates a new named font and returns its name. \fIfontname\fR specifies the name for the font; if it is omitted, then Tk generates a new name of the form \fBfont\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer. There may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, which provide the desired attributes for the new named font. See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes. .\" METHOD: delete .TP \fBfont delete\fI fontname\fR ?\fIfontname ...\fR? . Delete the specified named fonts. If there are widgets using the named font, the named font will not actually be deleted until all the instances are released. Those widgets will continue to display using the last known values for the named font. If a deleted named font is subsequently recreated with another call to \fBfont create\fR, the widgets will use the new named font and redisplay themselves using the new attributes of that font. .\" METHOD: families .TP \fBfont families\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? . The return value is a list of the case-insensitive names of all font families that exist on \fIwindow\fR's display. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. .\" METHOD: measure .TP \fBfont measure \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fItext\fR . Measures the amount of space the string \fItext\fR would use in the given \fIfont\fR when displayed in \fIwindow\fR. \fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. The return value is the total width in pixels of \fItext\fR, not including the extra pixels used by highly exaggerated characters such as cursive .QW f . If the string contains newlines or tabs, those characters are not expanded or treated specially when measuring the string. .\" METHOD: metrics .TP \fBfont metrics \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? . Returns information about the metrics (the font-specific data), for \fIfont\fR when it is used on \fIwindow\fR's display. \fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. If \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that metric; if it is omitted, the return value is a list of all the metrics and their values. See \fBFONT METRICS\fR below for a list of the possible metrics. .\" METHOD: names .TP \fBfont names\fR . The return value is a list of all the named fonts that are currently defined. .SH "FONT DESCRIPTIONS" .PP The following formats are accepted as a font description anywhere \fIfont\fR is specified as an argument above; these same forms are also permitted when specifying the \fB\-font\fR option for widgets. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 | font. In the following definitions, the .QW baseline of a font is the horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters, such as lower-case .QW g stick below the baseline. .TP | > | > | > > | > > > > > > > > > < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < > > | > | 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 | font. In the following definitions, the .QW baseline of a font is the horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters, such as lower-case .QW g stick below the baseline. .\" OPTION: -ascent .TP \fB\-ascent\fR . The amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font. .\" OPTION: -descent .TP \fB\-descent\fR . The largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks down below the baseline of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font. .\" OPTION: -linespace .TP \fB\-linespace\fR . Returns how far apart vertically in pixels two lines of text using the same font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any of the characters in the other line. This is generally the sum of the ascent above the baseline line plus the descent below the baseline. .\" OPTION: -fixed .TP \fB\-fixed\fR . Returns a boolean flag that is .QW \fB1\fR if this is a fixed-width font, where each normal character is the same width as all the other characters, or is .QW \fB0\fR if this is a proportionally-spaced font, where individual characters have different widths. The widths of control characters, tab characters, and other non-printing characters are not included when calculating this value. .SH "FONT OPTIONS" .PP The following options are supported on all platforms, and are used when constructing a named font or when specifying a font using style [5] as above: .\" OPTION: -family .TP \fB\-family \fIname\fR . The case-insensitive font family name. Tk guarantees to support the font families named \fBCourier\fR (a monospaced .QW typewriter font), \fBTimes\fR (a serifed .QW newspaper font), and \fBHelvetica\fR (a sans-serif .QW European font). The most closely matching native font family will automatically be substituted when one of the above font families is used. The \fIname\fR may also be the name of a native, platform-specific font family; in that case it will work as desired on one platform but may not display correctly on other platforms. If the family is unspecified or unrecognized, a platform-specific default font will be chosen. .\" OPTION: -size .TP \fB\-size \fIsize\fR . The desired size of the font. If the \fIsize\fR argument is a positive number, it is interpreted as a size in points. If \fIsize\fR is a negative number, its absolute value is interpreted as a size in pixels. If a font cannot be displayed at the specified size, a nearby size will be chosen. If \fIsize\fR is unspecified or zero, a platform-dependent default size will be chosen. .RS .PP Sizes should normally be specified in points so the application will remain the same ruler size on the screen, even when changing screen resolutions or moving scripts across platforms. However, specifying pixels is useful in certain circumstances such as when a piece of text must line up with respect to a fixed-size bitmap. The mapping between points and pixels is set when the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it can be overridden by calling the \fBtk scaling\fR command. .RE .\" OPTION: -weight .TP \fB\-weight \fIweight\fR . The nominal thickness of the characters in the font. The value \fBnormal\fR specifies a normal weight font, while \fBbold\fR specifies a bold font. The closest available weight to the one specified will be chosen. The default weight is \fBnormal\fR. .\" OPTION: -slant .TP \fB\-slant \fIslant\fR . The amount the characters in the font are slanted away from the vertical. Valid values for slant are \fBroman\fR and \fBitalic\fR. A roman font is the normal, upright appearance of a font, while an italic font is one that is tilted some number of degrees from upright. The closest available slant to the one specified will be chosen. The default slant is \fBroman\fR. .\" OPTION: -underline .TP \fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR . The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether characters in this font should be underlined. The default value for underline is \fBfalse\fR. .\" OPTION: -overstrike .TP \fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR . The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether a horizontal line should be drawn through the middle of characters in this font. The default value for overstrike is \fBfalse\fR. .SH "STANDARD FONTS" .PP The following named fonts are supported on all systems, and default to values that match appropriate system defaults. .IP \fBTkDefaultFont\fR This font is the default for all GUI items not otherwise specified. .IP \fBTkTextFont\fR This font should be used for user text in entry widgets, listboxes etc. .IP \fBTkFixedFont\fR This font is the standard fixed-width font. .IP \fBTkMenuFont\fR This font is used for menu items. .IP \fBTkHeadingFont\fR This font should be used for column headings in lists and tables. .IP \fBTkCaptionFont\fR This font should be used for window and dialog caption bars. .IP \fBTkSmallCaptionFont\fR This font should be used for captions on contained windows or tool dialogs. .IP \fBTkIconFont\fR This font should be used for icon captions. .IP \fBTkTooltipFont\fR This font should be used for tooltip windows (transient information windows). .LP It is \fInot\fR advised to change these fonts, as they may be modified by Tk itself in response to system changes. Instead, make a copy of the font and modify that. .SH "PLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS" .PP The following system fonts are supported: .TP \fBX Windows\fR . All valid X font names, including those listed by xlsfonts(1), are available. .TP \fBMS Windows\fR . The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's style defaults. .RS .DS .ta 3c 6c \fBsystem\fR \fBansi\fR \fBdevice\fR \fBsystemfixed\fR \fBansifixed\fR \fBoemfixed\fR .DE .RE .TP \fBmacOS\fR . The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's style defaults. .RS .DS .ta 3c 6c \fBsystem\fR \fBapplication\fR \fBmenu\fR .DE |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
382 383 384 385 386 387 388 | .DE .RE .SH EXAMPLE .PP Fill a text widget with lots of font demonstrators, one for every font family installed on your system: .CS | | | | | | | | | | 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 |
.DE
.RE
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Fill a text widget with lots of font demonstrators, one for every font
family installed on your system:
.CS
pack [text .t -wrap none] -fill both -expand 1
set count 0
set tabwidth 0
foreach family [lsort -dictionary [\fBfont families\fR]] {
.t tag configure f[incr count] -font [list $family 10]
.t insert end ${family}:\et {} \e
"This is a simple sampler\en" f$count
set w [\fBfont measure\fR [.t cget -font] ${family}:]
if {$w + 5 > $tabwidth} {
set tabwidth [expr {$w + 5}]
.t configure -tabs $tabwidth
}
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
options(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
font
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/fontchooser.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net> '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME fontchooser \- control font selection dialog .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR? | > < < > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
fontchooser \- control font selection dialog
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command controls the Tk font selection dialog. It uses
the native platform font selection dialog where available, or a dialog
implemented in Tcl otherwise.
.PP
Unlike most of the other Tk dialog commands, \fBtk fontchooser\fR does not
return an immediate result, as on some platforms (macOS) the standard font
dialog is modeless while on others (Windows) it is modal. To accommodate this
difference, all user interaction with the dialog will be communicated to the
caller via callbacks or virtual events.
.PP
The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command can have one of the following forms:
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure \fR?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
.
Set or query one or more of the configurations options below (analogous to Tk
widget configuration).
.\" METHOD: show
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
.
Show the font selection dialog. Depending on the platform, may return
immediately or only once the dialog has been withdrawn.
.\" METHOD: hide
.TP
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
.
Hide the font selection dialog if it is visible and cause any pending
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR command to return.
.PP
.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fR
.
Specifies/returns the logical parent window of the font selection dialog
(similar to the \fB\-parent\fR option to other dialogs). The font selection
dialog is hidden if it is visible when the parent window is destroyed.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fR
.
Specifies/returns the title of the dialog. Has no effect on platforms where the
font selection dialog does not support titles.
.\" OPTION: -font
.TP
\fB\-font\fR
.
Specifies/returns the font that is currently selected in the dialog if it is
visible, or that will be initially selected when the dialog is shown (if
supported by the platform). Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no
font should be selected. Fonts can be specified in any form given by the "FONT
DESCRIPTION" section in the \fBfont\fR manual page.
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fR
.
Specifies/returns the command prefix to be called when a font selection has
been made by the user. The command prefix is evaluated at the global level
after having the specification of the selected font appended. On platforms
where the font selection dialog offers the user control of further font
attributes (such as color), additional key/value pairs may be appended before
evaluation. Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no callback should
be invoked. Fonts are specified by a list of form [3] of the "FONT DESCRIPTION"
section in the \fBfont\fR manual page (i.e. a list of the form
\fI{family size style ?style ...?}\fR).
.\" OPTION: -visible
.TP
\fB\-visible\fR
.
Read-only option that returns a boolean indicating whether the font selection
dialog is currently visible. Attempting to set this option results in an error.
.PP
.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR
.
Sent to the dialog parent whenever the visibility of the font selection dialog
changes, both as a result of user action (e.g. disposing of the dialog via
OK/Cancel button or close box) and of the \fBtk fontchooser\fR
\fBshow\fR/\fBhide\fR commands being called. Binding scripts can determine the
current visibility of the dialog by querying the \fB\-visible\fR configuration
option.
.TP
\fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR
.
Sent to the dialog parent whenever the font selection dialog is visible and the
selected font changes, both as a result of user action and of the \fB\-font\fR
configuration option being set. Binding scripts can determine the currently
selected font by querying the \fB\-font\fR configuration option.
.PP
.SH NOTES
.PP
Callers should not expect a result from \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR and may
not assume that the dialog has been withdrawn or closed when the command
returns. All user interaction with the dialog is communicated to the caller via
the \fB\-command\fR callback and the \fB<<TkFontchooser*>>\fR virtual events.
It is implementation dependent which exact user actions result in the callback
being called resp. the virtual events being sent. Where an Apply or OK button
is present in the dialog, that button will trigger the \fB\-command\fR callback
and \fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR virtual event. On some implementations
other user actions may also have that effect; on macOS for instance, the
standard font selection dialog immediately reflects all user choices to the
caller.
.PP
In the presence of multiple widgets intended to be influenced by the font
selection dialog, care needs to be taken to correctly handle focus changes: the
font selected in the dialog should always match the current font of the widget
with the focus, and the \fB\-command\fR callback should only act on the widget
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
135 136 137 138 139 140 141 |
to ensure its selected font matches the new value of the named font.
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
proc fontchooserDemo {} {
wm title . "Font Chooser Demo"
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 |
to ensure its selected font matches the new value of the named font.
.PP
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
.CS
proc fontchooserDemo {} {
wm title . "Font Chooser Demo"
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -parent .
button .b -command fontchooserToggle -takefocus 0
fontchooserVisibility .b
bind . \fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR \e
[list fontchooserVisibility .b]
foreach w {.t1 .t2} {
text $w -width 20 -height 4 -borderwidth 1 -relief solid
bind $w <FocusIn> [list fontchooserFocus $w]
$w insert end "Text Widget $w"
}
.t1 configure -font {Courier 14}
.t2 configure -font {Times 16}
pack .b .t1 .t2; focus .t1
}
proc fontchooserToggle {} {
\fBtk fontchooser\fR [expr {
[\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -visible] ?
"\fBhide\fR" : "\fBshow\fR"}]
}
proc fontchooserVisibility {w} {
$w configure -text [expr {
[\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -visible] ?
"Hide Font Dialog" : "Show Font Dialog"}]
}
proc fontchooserFocus {w} {
\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR -font [$w cget -font] \e
-command [list fontchooserFontSelection $w]
}
proc fontchooserFontSelection {w font args} {
$w configure -font [font actual $font]
}
fontchooserDemo
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
font(n), tk(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
dialog, font, font selection, font chooser, font panel
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/frame.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. | < < < < < < < < < < | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. .OP \-class class Class Specifies a class for the window. This class will be used when querying the option database for the window's other options, and it will also be used later for other purposes such as bindings. The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will not request any size at all. Note that this sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is not added. Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame. | < < < < < < < < < | 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will not request any size at all. Note that this sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is not added. Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame. .OP \-visual visual Visual Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR. If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same visual as its parent. The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | or in the option database to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color and relief. The \fBframe\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A frame is a simple widget. Its primary purpose is to act as a spacer or container for complex window layouts. The only features | | | | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | or in the option database to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color and relief. The \fBframe\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A frame is a simple widget. Its primary purpose is to act as a spacer or container for complex window layouts. The only features of a frame are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the frame appear raised or sunken. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the frame's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .PP .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the frame widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/getOpenFile.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | The \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBSave as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation whether the existing file should be overwritten or not. .PP The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments to these two commands: .TP | > | > | > | > > | | > | > | > | > | | > | > | | > | > | | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 |
The \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBSave
as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that
already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation
whether the existing file should be overwritten or not.
.PP
The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line
arguments to these two commands:
.\" OPTION: -command
.TP
\fB\-command\fI string\fR
.
Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the
dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the
user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR
followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This
is only available on macOS.
.\" OPTION: -confirmoverwrite
.TP
\fB\-confirmoverwrite\fI boolean\fR
.
Configures how the Save dialog reacts when the selected file already
exists, and saving would overwrite it. A true value requests a
confirmation dialog be presented to the user. A false value requests
that the overwrite take place without confirmation. Default value is true.
.\" OPTION: -defaultextension
.TP
\fB\-defaultextension\fI extension\fR
.
Specifies a string that will be appended to the filename if the user
enters a filename without an extension. The default value is the empty
string, which means no extension will be appended to the filename in
any case. This option is ignored on macOS, which
does not require extensions to filenames,
and the UNIX implementation guesses reasonable values for this from
the \fB\-filetypes\fR option when this is not supplied.
.\" OPTION: -filetypes
.TP
\fB\-filetypes\fI filePatternList\fR
.
If a \fBFile types\fR listbox exists in the file dialog on the particular
platform, this option gives the \fIfiletype\fRs in this listbox. When
the user choose a filetype in the listbox, only the files of that type
are listed. If this option is unspecified, or if it is set to the
empty list, or if the \fBFile types\fR listbox is not supported by the
particular platform then all files are listed regardless of their
types. See the section \fBSPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS\fR below for a
discussion on the contents of \fIfilePatternList\fR.
.\" OPTION: -initialdir
.TP
\fB\-initialdir\fI directory\fR
.
Specifies that the files in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
user-selected directory for the application. If the
parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
relative path to an absolute path.
.\" OPTION: -initialfile
.TP
\fB\-initialfile\fI filename\fR
.
Specifies a filename to be displayed in the dialog when it pops up.
.\" OPTION: -message
.TP
\fB\-message\fI string\fR
.
Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
This is only available on macOS.
.\" OPTION: -multiple
.TP
\fB\-multiple\fI boolean\fR
.
Allows the user to choose multiple files from the Open dialog.
.\" OPTION: -parent
.TP
\fB\-parent\fI window\fR
.
Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the file dialog. The file
dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. On macOS, this
turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
.\" OPTION: -title
.TP
\fB\-title\fI titleString\fR
.
Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
option is not specified, then a default title is displayed.
.\" OPTION: -typevariable
.TP
\fB\-typevariable\fI variableName\fR
.
The global variable \fIvariableName\fR is used to preselect which filter is
used from \fIfilterList\fR when the dialog box is opened and is
updated when the dialog box is closed, to the last selected
filter. The variable is read once at the beginning to select the
appropriate filter. If the variable does not exist, or its value does
not match any filter typename, or is empty (\fB{}\fR), the dialog box
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 |
{{Text Files} {.txt} }
{{TCL Scripts} {.tcl} }
{{C Source Files} {.c} TEXT}
{{GIF Files} {.gif} }
{{GIF Files} {} GIFF}
{{All Files} * }
}
| | | 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 |
{{Text Files} {.txt} }
{{TCL Scripts} {.tcl} }
{{C Source Files} {.c} TEXT}
{{GIF Files} {.gif} }
{{GIF Files} {} GIFF}
{{All Files} * }
}
set filename [\fBtk_getOpenFile\fR -filetypes $types]
if {$filename ne ""} {
# Open the file ...
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tk_chooseDirectory
.SH KEYWORDS
file selection dialog
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/grab.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg \fR...? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk. Tk's grabs are different than the grabs described in the Xlib documentation. When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/grid.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. | | | 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. The string can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the content will .QW stick to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are specified, the content will be stretched to fill the entire height (or width) of its cavity. The \fB\-sticky\fR option subsumes the combination of \fB\-anchor\fR and \fB\-fill\fR that is used by \fBpack\fR. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. | < < < < < < < < | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. .TP \fBgrid info \fIwindow\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the content given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIwindow\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the | | | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIwindow\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the geometry window, \fIwindow\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on. Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR the options apply to all rows currently occupied by content windows. For a window name, that window must be a content window of this container and the options |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. | < < < < < < < < | | > | | > | 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. .TP \fBgrid size \fIcontainer\fR . Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fIcontainer\fR. The size is determined either by the \fIcontent\fR occupying the largest row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero. .TP \fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . If no options are supplied, a list of all of the content in \fIwindow\fR are returned, most recently managed first. \fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which causes only the content in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR to be returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . Synonym for \fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?. .VE "TIP 581" .SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT" .PP The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column information for each content. This permits content to be rearranged, added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and column information. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/image.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS \fBimage\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images. It can take several different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/keysyms.n.
1 | '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" .TH keysyms n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | currency 164 0xA4 yen 165 0xA5 brokenbar 166 0xA6 section 167 0xA7 diaeresis 168 0xA8 copyright 169 0xA9 ordfeminine 170 0xAA | | | | | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | currency 164 0xA4 yen 165 0xA5 brokenbar 166 0xA6 section 167 0xA7 diaeresis 168 0xA8 copyright 169 0xA9 ordfeminine 170 0xAA guillemetleft 171 0xAB notsign 172 0xAC hyphen 173 0xAD registered 174 0xAE macron 175 0xAF degree 176 0xB0 plusminus 177 0xB1 twosuperior 178 0xB2 threesuperior 179 0xB3 acute 180 0xB4 mu 181 0xB5 paragraph 182 0xB6 periodcentered 183 0xB7 cedilla 184 0xB8 onesuperior 185 0xB9 ordmasculine 186 0xBA guillemetright 187 0xBB onequarter 188 0xBC onehalf 189 0xBD threequarters 190 0xBE questiondown 191 0xBF Agrave 192 0xC0 Aacute 193 0xC1 Acircumflex 194 0xC2 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | ugrave 249 0xF9 uacute 250 0xFA ucircumflex 251 0xFB udiaeresis 252 0xFC yacute 253 0xFD thorn 254 0xFE ydiaeresis 255 0xFF Aogonek 417 0x1A1 breve 418 0x1A2 Lstroke 419 0x1A3 Lcaron 421 0x1A5 Sacute 422 0x1A6 Scaron 425 0x1A9 Scedilla 426 0x1AA Tcaron 427 0x1AB Zacute 428 0x1AC | > > < < > > < < > > > > < < > > | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 | ugrave 249 0xF9 uacute 250 0xFA ucircumflex 251 0xFB udiaeresis 252 0xFC yacute 253 0xFD thorn 254 0xFE ydiaeresis 255 0xFF .CE .CS Aogonek 417 0x1A1 breve 418 0x1A2 Lstroke 419 0x1A3 Lcaron 421 0x1A5 Sacute 422 0x1A6 Scaron 425 0x1A9 Scedilla 426 0x1AA Tcaron 427 0x1AB Zacute 428 0x1AC Zcaron 430 0x1AE Zabovedot 431 0x1AF aogonek 433 0x1B1 ogonek 434 0x1B2 lstroke 435 0x1B3 lcaron 437 0x1B5 sacute 438 0x1B6 caron 439 0x1B7 scaron 441 0x1B9 scedilla 442 0x1BA tcaron 443 0x1BB zacute 444 0x1BC doubleacute 445 0x1BD zcaron 446 0x1BE zabovedot 447 0x1BF Racute 448 0x1C0 Abreve 451 0x1C3 Lacute 453 0x1C5 Cacute 454 0x1C6 Ccaron 456 0x1C8 Eogonek 458 0x1CA Ecaron 460 0x1CC Dcaron 463 0x1CF Dstroke 464 0x1D0 Nacute 465 0x1D1 Ncaron 466 0x1D2 Odoubleacute 469 0x1D5 Rcaron 472 0x1D8 Uring 473 0x1D9 Udoubleacute 475 0x1DB Tcedilla 478 0x1DE racute 480 0x1E0 abreve 483 0x1E3 lacute 485 0x1E5 cacute 486 0x1E6 ccaron 488 0x1E8 eogonek 490 0x1EA ecaron 492 0x1EC dcaron 495 0x1EF dstroke 496 0x1F0 nacute 497 0x1F1 ncaron 498 0x1F2 odoubleacute 501 0x1F5 rcaron 504 0x1F8 uring 505 0x1F9 udoubleacute 507 0x1FB tcedilla 510 0x1FE abovedot 511 0x1FF Hstroke 673 0x2A1 Hcircumflex 678 0x2A6 Iabovedot 681 0x2A9 Gbreve 683 0x2AB Jcircumflex 684 0x2AC hstroke 689 0x2B1 hcircumflex 694 0x2B6 idotless 697 0x2B9 gbreve 699 0x2BB jcircumflex 700 0x2BC Cabovedot 709 0x2C5 Ccircumflex 710 0x2C6 Gabovedot 725 0x2D5 Gcircumflex 728 0x2D8 Ubreve 733 0x2DD Scircumflex 734 0x2DE cabovedot 741 0x2E5 ccircumflex 742 0x2E6 gabovedot 757 0x2F5 gcircumflex 760 0x2F8 ubreve 765 0x2FD scircumflex 766 0x2FE kra 930 0x3A2 Rcedilla 931 0x3A3 Itilde 933 0x3A5 Lcedilla 934 0x3A6 Emacron 938 0x3AA Gcedilla 939 0x3AB Tslash 940 0x3AC rcedilla 947 0x3B3 itilde 949 0x3B5 lcedilla 950 0x3B6 emacron 954 0x3BA gcedilla 955 0x3BB tslash 956 0x3BC ENG 957 0x3BD eng 959 0x3BF Amacron 960 0x3C0 Iogonek 967 0x3C7 Eabovedot 972 0x3CC Imacron 975 0x3CF Ncedilla 977 0x3D1 Omacron 978 0x3D2 Kcedilla 979 0x3D3 Uogonek 985 0x3D9 Utilde 989 0x3DD Umacron 990 0x3DE amacron 992 0x3E0 iogonek 999 0x3E7 eabovedot 1004 0x3EC imacron 1007 0x3EF ncedilla 1009 0x3F1 omacron 1010 0x3F2 kcedilla 1011 0x3F3 uogonek 1017 0x3F9 utilde 1021 0x3FD umacron 1022 0x3FE overline 1150 0x47E kana_fullstop 1185 0x4A1 kana_openingbracket 1186 0x4A2 kana_closingbracket 1187 0x4A3 kana_comma 1188 0x4A4 kana_conjunctive 1189 0x4A5 kana_WO 1190 0x4A6 kana_a 1191 0x4A7 kana_i 1192 0x4A8 kana_u 1193 0x4A9 kana_e 1194 0x4AA kana_o 1195 0x4AB kana_ya 1196 0x4AC kana_yu 1197 0x4AD kana_yo 1198 0x4AE kana_tsu 1199 0x4AF prolongedsound 1200 0x4B0 kana_A 1201 0x4B1 kana_I 1202 0x4B2 kana_U 1203 0x4B3 kana_E 1204 0x4B4 kana_O 1205 0x4B5 kana_KA 1206 0x4B6 kana_KI 1207 0x4B7 kana_KU 1208 0x4B8 kana_KE 1209 0x4B9 kana_KO 1210 0x4BA kana_SA 1211 0x4BB kana_SHI 1212 0x4BC kana_SU 1213 0x4BD kana_SE 1214 0x4BE kana_SO 1215 0x4BF kana_TA 1216 0x4C0 kana_CHI 1217 0x4C1 kana_TSU 1218 0x4C2 kana_TE 1219 0x4C3 kana_TO 1220 0x4C4 kana_NA 1221 0x4C5 kana_NI 1222 0x4C6 kana_NU 1223 0x4C7 kana_NE 1224 0x4C8 kana_NO 1225 0x4C9 kana_HA 1226 0x4CA kana_HI 1227 0x4CB kana_FU 1228 0x4CC kana_HE 1229 0x4CD kana_HO 1230 0x4CE kana_MA 1231 0x4CF kana_MI 1232 0x4D0 kana_MU 1233 0x4D1 kana_ME 1234 0x4D2 kana_MO 1235 0x4D3 kana_YA 1236 0x4D4 kana_YU 1237 0x4D5 kana_YO 1238 0x4D6 kana_RA 1239 0x4D7 kana_RI 1240 0x4D8 kana_RU 1241 0x4D9 kana_RE 1242 0x4DA kana_RO 1243 0x4DB kana_WA 1244 0x4DC kana_N 1245 0x4DD voicedsound 1246 0x4DE semivoicedsound 1247 0x4DF .CE .CS Arabic_comma 1452 0x5AC Arabic_semicolon 1467 0x5BB Arabic_question_mark 1471 0x5BF Arabic_hamza 1473 0x5C1 Arabic_maddaonalef 1474 0x5C2 Arabic_hamzaonalef 1475 0x5C3 Arabic_hamzaonwaw 1476 0x5C4 Arabic_hamzaunderalef 1477 0x5C5 Arabic_hamzaonyeh 1478 0x5C6 Arabic_alef 1479 0x5C7 Arabic_beh 1480 0x5C8 Arabic_tehmarbuta 1481 0x5C9 Arabic_teh 1482 0x5CA Arabic_theh 1483 0x5CB Arabic_jeem 1484 0x5CC Arabic_hah 1485 0x5CD Arabic_khah 1486 0x5CE Arabic_dal 1487 0x5CF Arabic_thal 1488 0x5D0 Arabic_ra 1489 0x5D1 Arabic_zain 1490 0x5D2 Arabic_seen 1491 0x5D3 Arabic_sheen 1492 0x5D4 Arabic_sad 1493 0x5D5 Arabic_dad 1494 0x5D6 Arabic_tah 1495 0x5D7 Arabic_zah 1496 0x5D8 Arabic_ain 1497 0x5D9 Arabic_ghain 1498 0x5DA Arabic_tatweel 1504 0x5E0 Arabic_feh 1505 0x5E1 Arabic_qaf 1506 0x5E2 Arabic_kaf 1507 0x5E3 Arabic_lam 1508 0x5E4 Arabic_meem 1509 0x5E5 Arabic_noon 1510 0x5E6 Arabic_ha 1511 0x5E7 Arabic_waw 1512 0x5E8 Arabic_alefmaksura 1513 0x5E9 Arabic_yeh 1514 0x5EA Arabic_fathatan 1515 0x5EB Arabic_dammatan 1516 0x5EC Arabic_kasratan 1517 0x5ED Arabic_fatha 1518 0x5EE Arabic_damma 1519 0x5EF Arabic_kasra 1520 0x5F0 Arabic_shadda 1521 0x5F1 Arabic_sukun 1522 0x5F2 Serbian_dje 1697 0x6A1 Macedonia_gje 1698 0x6A2 Cyrillic_io 1699 0x6A3 Ukrainian_ie 1700 0x6A4 Macedonia_dse 1701 0x6A5 Ukrainian_i 1702 0x6A6 Ukrainian_yi 1703 0x6A7 Cyrillic_je 1704 0x6A8 Cyrillic_lje 1705 0x6A9 Cyrillic_nje 1706 0x6AA Serbian_tshe 1707 0x6AB Macedonia_kje 1708 0x6AC Ukrainian_ghe_with_upturn 1709 0x6AD Byelorussian_shortu 1710 0x6AE Cyrillic_dzhe 1711 0x6AF numerosign 1712 0x6B0 Serbian_DJE 1713 0x6B1 Macedonia_GJE 1714 0x6B2 Cyrillic_IO 1715 0x6B3 Ukrainian_IE 1716 0x6B4 Macedonia_DSE 1717 0x6B5 Ukrainian_I 1718 0x6B6 Ukrainian_YI 1719 0x6B7 Cyrillic_JE 1720 0x6B8 Cyrillic_LJE 1721 0x6B9 Cyrillic_NJE 1722 0x6BA Serbian_TSHE 1723 0x6BB Macedonia_KJE 1724 0x6BC Ukrainian_GHE_WITH_UPTURN 1725 0x6BD Byelorussian_SHORTU 1726 0x6BE Cyrillic_DZHE 1727 0x6BF Cyrillic_yu 1728 0x6C0 Cyrillic_a 1729 0x6C1 Cyrillic_be 1730 0x6C2 Cyrillic_tse 1731 0x6C3 Cyrillic_de 1732 0x6C4 Cyrillic_ie 1733 0x6C5 Cyrillic_ef 1734 0x6C6 Cyrillic_ghe 1735 0x6C7 Cyrillic_ha 1736 0x6C8 Cyrillic_i 1737 0x6C9 Cyrillic_shorti 1738 0x6CA Cyrillic_ka 1739 0x6CB Cyrillic_el 1740 0x6CC Cyrillic_em 1741 0x6CD Cyrillic_en 1742 0x6CE Cyrillic_o 1743 0x6CF Cyrillic_pe 1744 0x6D0 Cyrillic_ya 1745 0x6D1 Cyrillic_er 1746 0x6D2 Cyrillic_es 1747 0x6D3 Cyrillic_te 1748 0x6D4 Cyrillic_u 1749 0x6D5 Cyrillic_zhe 1750 0x6D6 Cyrillic_ve 1751 0x6D7 Cyrillic_softsign 1752 0x6D8 Cyrillic_yeru 1753 0x6D9 Cyrillic_ze 1754 0x6DA Cyrillic_sha 1755 0x6DB Cyrillic_e 1756 0x6DC Cyrillic_shcha 1757 0x6DD Cyrillic_che 1758 0x6DE Cyrillic_hardsign 1759 0x6DF Cyrillic_YU 1760 0x6E0 Cyrillic_A 1761 0x6E1 Cyrillic_BE 1762 0x6E2 Cyrillic_TSE 1763 0x6E3 Cyrillic_DE 1764 0x6E4 Cyrillic_IE 1765 0x6E5 Cyrillic_EF 1766 0x6E6 Cyrillic_GHE 1767 0x6E7 Cyrillic_HA 1768 0x6E8 Cyrillic_I 1769 0x6E9 Cyrillic_SHORTI 1770 0x6EA Cyrillic_KA 1771 0x6EB Cyrillic_EL 1772 0x6EC Cyrillic_EM 1773 0x6ED Cyrillic_EN 1774 0x6EE Cyrillic_O 1775 0x6EF Cyrillic_PE 1776 0x6F0 Cyrillic_YA 1777 0x6F1 Cyrillic_ER 1778 0x6F2 Cyrillic_ES 1779 0x6F3 Cyrillic_TE 1780 0x6F4 Cyrillic_U 1781 0x6F5 Cyrillic_ZHE 1782 0x6F6 Cyrillic_VE 1783 0x6F7 Cyrillic_SOFTSIGN 1784 0x6F8 Cyrillic_YERU 1785 0x6F9 Cyrillic_ZE 1786 0x6FA Cyrillic_SHA 1787 0x6FB Cyrillic_E 1788 0x6FC Cyrillic_SHCHA 1789 0x6FD Cyrillic_CHE 1790 0x6FE Cyrillic_HARDSIGN 1791 0x6FF Greek_ALPHAaccent 1953 0x7A1 Greek_EPSILONaccent 1954 0x7A2 Greek_ETAaccent 1955 0x7A3 Greek_IOTAaccent 1956 0x7A4 Greek_IOTAdieresis 1957 0x7A5 Greek_IOTAaccentdiaeresis 1958 0x7A6 Greek_OMICRONaccent 1959 0x7A7 Greek_UPSILONaccent 1960 0x7A8 Greek_UPSILONdieresis 1961 0x7A9 Greek_UPSILONaccentdieresis 1962 0x7AA Greek_OMEGAaccent 1963 0x7AB Greek_accentdieresis 1966 0x7AE Greek_horizbar 1967 0x7AF Greek_alphaaccent 1969 0x7B1 Greek_epsilonaccent 1970 0x7B2 Greek_etaaccent 1971 0x7B3 Greek_iotaaccent 1972 0x7B4 Greek_iotadieresis 1973 0x7B5 Greek_iotaaccentdieresis 1974 0x7B6 Greek_omicronaccent 1975 0x7B7 Greek_upsilonaccent 1976 0x7B8 Greek_upsilondieresis 1977 0x7B9 Greek_upsilonaccentdieresis 1978 0x7BA Greek_omegaaccent 1979 0x7BB Greek_ALPHA 1985 0x7C1 Greek_BETA 1986 0x7C2 Greek_GAMMA 1987 0x7C3 Greek_DELTA 1988 0x7C4 Greek_EPSILON 1989 0x7C5 Greek_ZETA 1990 0x7C6 Greek_ETA 1991 0x7C7 Greek_THETA 1992 0x7C8 Greek_IOTA 1993 0x7C9 Greek_KAPPA 1994 0x7CA Greek_LAMDA 1995 0x7CB Greek_MU 1996 0x7CC Greek_NU 1997 0x7CD Greek_XI 1998 0x7CE Greek_OMICRON 1999 0x7CF Greek_PI 2000 0x7D0 Greek_RHO 2001 0x7D1 Greek_SIGMA 2002 0x7D2 Greek_TAU 2004 0x7D4 Greek_UPSILON 2005 0x7D5 Greek_PHI 2006 0x7D6 Greek_CHI 2007 0x7D7 Greek_PSI 2008 0x7D8 Greek_OMEGA 2009 0x7D9 Greek_alpha 2017 0x7E1 Greek_beta 2018 0x7E2 Greek_gamma 2019 0x7E3 Greek_delta 2020 0x7E4 Greek_epsilon 2021 0x7E5 Greek_zeta 2022 0x7E6 Greek_eta 2023 0x7E7 Greek_theta 2024 0x7E8 Greek_iota 2025 0x7E9 Greek_kappa 2026 0x7EA Greek_lamda 2027 0x7EB Greek_mu 2028 0x7EC Greek_nu 2029 0x7ED Greek_xi 2030 0x7EE Greek_omicron 2031 0x7EF Greek_pi 2032 0x7F0 Greek_rho 2033 0x7F1 Greek_sigma 2034 0x7F2 Greek_finalsmallsigma 2035 0x7F3 Greek_tau 2036 0x7F4 Greek_upsilon 2037 0x7F5 Greek_phi 2038 0x7F6 Greek_chi 2039 0x7F7 Greek_psi 2040 0x7F8 Greek_omega 2041 0x7F9 .CE .CS leftradical 2209 0x8A1 topleftradical 2210 0x8A2 horizconnector 2211 0x8A3 topintegral 2212 0x8A4 botintegral 2213 0x8A5 vertconnector 2214 0x8A6 topleftsqbracket 2215 0x8A7 botleftsqbracket 2216 0x8A8 toprightsqbracket 2217 0x8A9 botrightsqbracket 2218 0x8AA topleftparens 2219 0x8AB botleftparens 2220 0x8AC toprightparens 2221 0x8AD botrightparens 2222 0x8AE leftmiddlecurlybrace 2223 0x8AF rightmiddlecurlybrace 2224 0x8B0 topleftsummation 2225 0x8B1 botleftsummation 2226 0x8B2 topvertsummationconnector 2227 0x8B3 botvertsummationconnector 2228 0x8B4 toprightsummation 2229 0x8B5 botrightsummation 2230 0x8B6 rightmiddlesummation 2231 0x8B7 lessthanequal 2236 0x8BC notequal 2237 0x8BD greaterthanequal 2238 0x8BE integral 2239 0x8BF therefore 2240 0x8C0 variation 2241 0x8C1 infinity 2242 0x8C2 nabla 2245 0x8C5 approximate 2248 0x8C8 similarequal 2249 0x8C9 ifonlyif 2253 0x8CD implies 2254 0x8CE identical 2255 0x8CF radical 2262 0x8D6 includedin 2266 0x8DA includes 2267 0x8DB intersection 2268 0x8DC union 2269 0x8DD logicaland 2270 0x8DE logicalor 2271 0x8DF partialderivative 2287 0x8EF function 2294 0x8F6 leftarrow 2299 0x8FB uparrow 2300 0x8FC rightarrow 2301 0x8FD downarrow 2302 0x8FE blank 2527 0x9DF soliddiamond 2528 0x9E0 checkerboard 2529 0x9E1 ht 2530 0x9E2 ff 2531 0x9E3 cr 2532 0x9E4 lf 2533 0x9E5 nl 2536 0x9E8 vt 2537 0x9E9 lowrightcorner 2538 0x9EA uprightcorner 2539 0x9EB upleftcorner 2540 0x9EC lowleftcorner 2541 0x9ED crossinglines 2542 0x9EE horizlinescan1 2543 0x9EF horizlinescan3 2544 0x9F0 horizlinescan5 2545 0x9F1 horizlinescan7 2546 0x9F2 horizlinescan9 2547 0x9F3 leftt 2548 0x9F4 rightt 2549 0x9F5 bott 2550 0x9F6 topt 2551 0x9F7 vertbar 2552 0x9F8 emspace 2721 0xAA1 enspace 2722 0xAA2 em3space 2723 0xAA3 em4space 2724 0xAA4 digitspace 2725 0xAA5 punctspace 2726 0xAA6 thinspace 2727 0xAA7 hairspace 2728 0xAA8 emdash 2729 0xAA9 endash 2730 0xAAA signifblank 2732 0xAAC ellipsis 2734 0xAAE doubbaselinedot 2735 0xAAF onethird 2736 0xAB0 twothirds 2737 0xAB1 onefifth 2738 0xAB2 twofifths 2739 0xAB3 threefifths 2740 0xAB4 fourfifths 2741 0xAB5 onesixth 2742 0xAB6 fivesixths 2743 0xAB7 careof 2744 0xAB8 figdash 2747 0xABB leftanglebracket 2748 0xABC decimalpoint 2749 0xABD rightanglebracket 2750 0xABE marker 2751 0xABF oneeighth 2755 0xAC3 threeeighths 2756 0xAC4 fiveeighths 2757 0xAC5 seveneighths 2758 0xAC6 trademark 2761 0xAC9 signaturemark 2762 0xACA trademarkincircle 2763 0xACB leftopentriangle 2764 0xACC rightopentriangle 2765 0xACD emopencircle 2766 0xACE emopenrectangle 2767 0xACF leftsinglequotemark 2768 0xAD0 rightsinglequotemark 2769 0xAD1 leftdoublequotemark 2770 0xAD2 rightdoublequotemark 2771 0xAD3 prescription 2772 0xAD4 permille 2773 0xAD5 minutes 2774 0xAD6 seconds 2775 0xAD7 latincross 2777 0xAD9 hexagram 2778 0xADA filledrectbullet 2779 0xADB filledlefttribullet 2780 0xADC filledrighttribullet 2781 0xADD emfilledcircle 2782 0xADE emfilledrect 2783 0xADF enopencircbullet 2784 0xAE0 enopensquarebullet 2785 0xAE1 openrectbullet 2786 0xAE2 opentribulletup 2787 0xAE3 opentribulletdown 2788 0xAE4 openstar 2789 0xAE5 enfilledcircbullet 2790 0xAE6 enfilledsqbullet 2791 0xAE7 filledtribulletup 2792 0xAE8 filledtribulletdown 2793 0xAE9 leftpointer 2794 0xAEA rightpointer 2795 0xAEB club 2796 0xAEC diamond 2797 0xAED heart 2798 0xAEE maltesecross 2800 0xAF0 dagger 2801 0xAF1 doubledagger 2802 0xAF2 checkmark 2803 0xAF3 ballotcross 2804 0xAF4 musicalsharp 2805 0xAF5 musicalflat 2806 0xAF6 malesymbol 2807 0xAF7 femalesymbol 2808 0xAF8 telephone 2809 0xAF9 telephonerecorder 2810 0xAFA phonographcopyright 2811 0xAFB caret 2812 0xAFC singlelowquotemark 2813 0xAFD doublelowquotemark 2814 0xAFE cursor 2815 0xAFF leftcaret 2979 0xBA3 rightcaret 2982 0xBA6 downcaret 2984 0xBA8 upcaret 2985 0xBA9 overbar 3008 0xBC0 downtack 3010 0xBC2 upshoe 3011 0xBC3 downstile 3012 0xBC4 underbar 3014 0xBC6 jot 3018 0xBCA quad 3020 0xBCC uptack 3022 0xBCE circle 3023 0xBCF upstile 3027 0xBD3 downshoe 3030 0xBD6 rightshoe 3032 0xBD8 leftshoe 3034 0xBDA lefttack 3036 0xBDC righttack 3068 0xBFC hebrew_doublelowline 3295 0xCDF hebrew_aleph 3296 0xCE0 hebrew_bet 3297 0xCE1 hebrew_gimel 3298 0xCE2 hebrew_dalet 3299 0xCE3 hebrew_he 3300 0xCE4 hebrew_waw 3301 0xCE5 hebrew_zain 3302 0xCE6 hebrew_chet 3303 0xCE7 hebrew_tet 3304 0xCE8 hebrew_yod 3305 0xCE9 hebrew_finalkaph 3306 0xCEA hebrew_kaph 3307 0xCEB hebrew_lamed 3308 0xCEC hebrew_finalmem 3309 0xCED hebrew_mem 3310 0xCEE hebrew_finalnun 3311 0xCEF hebrew_nun 3312 0xCF0 hebrew_samech 3313 0xCF1 hebrew_ayin 3314 0xCF2 hebrew_finalpe 3315 0xCF3 hebrew_pe 3316 0xCF4 hebrew_finalzade 3317 0xCF5 hebrew_zade 3318 0xCF6 hebrew_qoph 3319 0xCF7 hebrew_resh 3320 0xCF8 hebrew_shin 3321 0xCF9 hebrew_taw 3322 0xCFA .CE .CS Thai_kokai 3489 0xDA1 Thai_khokhai 3490 0xDA2 Thai_khokhuat 3491 0xDA3 Thai_khokhwai 3492 0xDA4 Thai_khokhon 3493 0xDA5 Thai_khorakhang 3494 0xDA6 Thai_ngongu 3495 0xDA7 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
990 991 992 993 994 995 996 | Hangul_J_PanSios 3832 0xEF8 Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung 3833 0xEF9 Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh 3834 0xEFA Korean_Won 3839 0xEFF OE 5052 0x13BC oe 5053 0x13BD Ydiaeresis 5054 0x13BE | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 | Hangul_J_PanSios 3832 0xEF8 Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung 3833 0xEF9 Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh 3834 0xEFA Korean_Won 3839 0xEFF OE 5052 0x13BC oe 5053 0x13BD Ydiaeresis 5054 0x13BE .CE .CS ISO_Lock 65025 0xFE01 ISO_Level2_Latch 65026 0xFE02 ISO_Level3_Shift 65027 0xFE03 ISO_Level3_Latch 65028 0xFE04 ISO_Level3_Lock 65029 0xFE05 ISO_Group_Latch 65030 0xFE06 ISO_Group_Lock 65031 0xFE07 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 | dead_E 65155 0xFE83 dead_i 65156 0xFE84 dead_I 65157 0xFE85 dead_o 65158 0xFE86 dead_O 65159 0xFE87 dead_u 65160 0xFE88 dead_U 65161 0xFE89 | | | > | 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 | dead_E 65155 0xFE83 dead_i 65156 0xFE84 dead_I 65157 0xFE85 dead_o 65158 0xFE86 dead_O 65159 0xFE87 dead_u 65160 0xFE88 dead_U 65161 0xFE89 dead_schwa 65162 0xFE8A dead_SCHWA 65163 0xFE8B dead_greek 65164 0xFE8C dead_hamza 65165 0xFE8D dead_lowline 65168 0xFE90 dead_aboveverticalline 65169 0xFE91 dead_belowverticalline 65170 0xFE92 dead_longsolidusoverlay 65171 0xFE93 ch 65184 0xFEA0 Ch 65185 0xFEA1 CH 65186 0xFEA2 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 | Pointer_Drag3 65271 0xFEF7 Pointer_Drag4 65272 0xFEF8 Pointer_EnableKeys 65273 0xFEF9 Pointer_Accelerate 65274 0xFEFA Pointer_DfltBtnNext 65275 0xFEFB Pointer_DfltBtnPrev 65276 0xFEFC Pointer_Drag5 65277 0xFEFD BackSpace 65288 0xFF08 Tab 65289 0xFF09 Linefeed 65290 0xFF0A Clear 65291 0xFF0B Return 65293 0xFF0D Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 | > > | 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 | Pointer_Drag3 65271 0xFEF7 Pointer_Drag4 65272 0xFEF8 Pointer_EnableKeys 65273 0xFEF9 Pointer_Accelerate 65274 0xFEFA Pointer_DfltBtnNext 65275 0xFEFB Pointer_DfltBtnPrev 65276 0xFEFC Pointer_Drag5 65277 0xFEFD .CE .CS BackSpace 65288 0xFF08 Tab 65289 0xFF09 Linefeed 65290 0xFF0A Clear 65291 0xFF0B Return 65293 0xFF0D Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 | Down 65364 0xFF54 Prior 65365 0xFF55 Next 65366 0xFF56 End 65367 0xFF57 Begin 65368 0xFF58 Win_L 65371 0xFF5B Win_R 65372 0xFF5C | < < | 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 | Down 65364 0xFF54 Prior 65365 0xFF55 Next 65366 0xFF56 End 65367 0xFF57 Begin 65368 0xFF58 Win_L 65371 0xFF5B Win_R 65372 0xFF5C App 65373 0xFF5D Select 65376 0xFF60 Print 65377 0xFF61 Execute 65378 0xFF62 Insert 65379 0xFF63 Undo 65381 0xFF65 Redo 65382 0xFF66 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 | braille_dot_5 65525 0xFFF5 braille_dot_6 65526 0xFFF6 braille_dot_7 65527 0xFFF7 braille_dot_8 65528 0xFFF8 braille_dot_9 65529 0xFFF9 braille_dot_10 65530 0xFFFA Delete 65535 0xFFFF | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 | braille_dot_5 65525 0xFFF5 braille_dot_6 65526 0xFFF6 braille_dot_7 65527 0xFFF7 braille_dot_8 65528 0xFFF8 braille_dot_9 65529 0xFFF9 braille_dot_10 65530 0xFFFA Delete 65535 0xFFFF .CE .CS SunFA_Grave 268828416 0x1005FF00 SunFA_Circum 268828417 0x1005FF01 SunFA_Tilde 268828418 0x1005FF02 SunFA_Acute 268828419 0x1005FF03 SunFA_Diaeresis 268828420 0x1005FF04 SunFA_Cedilla 268828421 0x1005FF05 SunF36 268828432 0x1005FF10 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 | SunAudioLowerVolume 268828535 0x1005FF77 SunAudioMute 268828536 0x1005FF78 SunAudioRaiseVolume 268828537 0x1005FF79 SunVideoDegauss 268828538 0x1005FF7A SunVideoLowerBrightness 268828539 0x1005FF7B SunVideoRaiseBrightness 268828540 0x1005FF7C SunPowerSwitchShift 268828541 0x1005FF7D XF86Switch_VT_1 269024769 0x1008FE01 XF86Switch_VT_2 269024770 0x1008FE02 XF86Switch_VT_3 269024771 0x1008FE03 XF86Switch_VT_4 269024772 0x1008FE04 XF86Switch_VT_5 269024773 0x1008FE05 XF86Switch_VT_6 269024774 0x1008FE06 XF86Switch_VT_7 269024775 0x1008FE07 XF86Switch_VT_8 269024776 0x1008FE08 XF86Switch_VT_9 269024777 0x1008FE09 XF86Switch_VT_10 269024778 0x1008FE0A XF86Switch_VT_11 269024779 0x1008FE0B XF86Switch_VT_12 269024780 0x1008FE0C XF86Ungrab 269024800 0x1008FE20 XF86ClearGrab 269024801 0x1008FE21 XF86Next_VMode 269024802 0x1008FE22 XF86Prev_VMode 269024803 0x1008FE23 XF86LogWindowTree 269024804 0x1008FE24 XF86LogGrabInfo 269024805 0x1008FE25 XF86ModeLock 269025025 0x1008FF01 | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 | SunAudioLowerVolume 268828535 0x1005FF77 SunAudioMute 268828536 0x1005FF78 SunAudioRaiseVolume 268828537 0x1005FF79 SunVideoDegauss 268828538 0x1005FF7A SunVideoLowerBrightness 268828539 0x1005FF7B SunVideoRaiseBrightness 268828540 0x1005FF7C SunPowerSwitchShift 268828541 0x1005FF7D XF86BrightnessAuto 268964084 0x100810F4 XF86DisplayOff 268964085 0x100810F5 XF86Info 268964198 0x10081166 XF86AspectRatio 268964215 0x10081177 XF86DVD 268964229 0x10081185 XF86Audio 268964232 0x10081188 XF86ChannelUp 268964242 0x10081192 XF86ChannelDown 268964243 0x10081193 XF86Break 268964251 0x1008119B XF86VideoPhone 268964256 0x100811A0 XF86ZoomReset 268964260 0x100811A4 XF86Editor 268964262 0x100811A6 XF86GraphicsEditor 268964264 0x100811A8 XF86Presentation 268964265 0x100811A9 XF86Database 268964266 0x100811AA XF86Voicemail 268964268 0x100811AC XF86Addressbook 268964269 0x100811AD XF86DisplayToggle 268964271 0x100811AF XF86SpellCheck 268964272 0x100811B0 XF86ContextMenu 268964278 0x100811B6 XF86MediaRepeat 268964279 0x100811B7 XF8610ChannelsUp 268964280 0x100811B8 XF8610ChannelsDown 268964281 0x100811B9 XF86Images 268964282 0x100811BA XF86NotificationCenter 268964284 0x100811BC XF86PickupPhone 268964285 0x100811BD XF86HangupPhone 268964286 0x100811BE XF86Fn 268964304 0x100811D0 XF86Fn_Esc 268964305 0x100811D1 XF86FnRightShift 268964325 0x100811E5 XF86Numeric0 268964352 0x10081200 XF86Numeric1 268964353 0x10081201 XF86Numeric2 268964354 0x10081202 XF86Numeric3 268964355 0x10081203 XF86Numeric4 268964356 0x10081204 XF86Numeric5 268964357 0x10081205 XF86Numeric6 268964358 0x10081206 XF86Numeric7 268964359 0x10081207 XF86Numeric8 268964360 0x10081208 XF86Numeric9 268964361 0x10081209 XF86NumericStar 268964362 0x1008120A XF86NumericPound 268964363 0x1008120B XF86NumericA 268964364 0x1008120C XF86NumericB 268964365 0x1008120D XF86NumericC 268964366 0x1008120E XF86NumericD 268964367 0x1008120F XF86CameraFocus 268964368 0x10081210 XF86WPSButton 268964369 0x10081211 XF86CameraZoomIn 268964373 0x10081215 XF86CameraZoomOut 268964374 0x10081216 XF86CameraUp 268964375 0x10081217 XF86CameraDown 268964376 0x10081218 XF86CameraLeft 268964377 0x10081219 XF86CameraRight 268964378 0x1008121A XF86AttendantOn 268964379 0x1008121B XF86AttendantOff 268964380 0x1008121C XF86AttendantToggle 268964381 0x1008121D XF86LightsToggle 268964382 0x1008121E XF86ALSToggle 268964400 0x10081230 XF86Buttonconfig 268964416 0x10081240 XF86Taskmanager 268964417 0x10081241 XF86Journal 268964418 0x10081242 XF86ControlPanel 268964419 0x10081243 XF86AppSelect 268964420 0x10081244 XF86Screensaver 268964421 0x10081245 XF86VoiceCommand 268964422 0x10081246 XF86Assistant 268964423 0x10081247 XF86EmojiPicker 268964425 0x10081249 XF86Dictate 268964426 0x1008124A XF86BrightnessMin 268964432 0x10081250 XF86BrightnessMax 268964433 0x10081251 XF86KbdInputAssistPrev 268964448 0x10081260 XF86KbdInputAssistNext 268964449 0x10081261 XF86KbdInputAssistPrevgroup 268964450 0x10081262 XF86KbdInputAssistNextgroup 268964451 0x10081263 XF86KbdInputAssistAccept 268964452 0x10081264 XF86KbdInputAssistCancel 268964453 0x10081265 XF86RightUp 268964454 0x10081266 XF86RightDown 268964455 0x10081267 XF86LeftUp 268964456 0x10081268 XF86LeftDown 268964457 0x10081269 XF86RootMenu 268964458 0x1008126A XF86MediaTopMenu 268964459 0x1008126B XF86Numeric11 268964460 0x1008126C XF86Numeric12 268964461 0x1008126D XF86AudioDesc 268964462 0x1008126E XF863DMode 268964463 0x1008126F XF86NextFavorite 268964464 0x10081270 XF86StopRecord 268964465 0x10081271 XF86PauseRecord 268964466 0x10081272 XF86VOD 268964467 0x10081273 XF86Unmute 268964468 0x10081274 XF86FastReverse 268964469 0x10081275 XF86SlowReverse 268964470 0x10081276 XF86Data 268964471 0x10081277 XF86OnScreenKeyboard 268964472 0x10081278 XF86PrivacyScreenToggle 268964473 0x10081279 XF86SelectiveScreenshot 268964474 0x1008127A XF86Macro1 268964496 0x10081290 XF86Macro2 268964497 0x10081291 XF86Macro3 268964498 0x10081292 XF86Macro4 268964499 0x10081293 XF86Macro5 268964500 0x10081294 XF86Macro6 268964501 0x10081295 XF86Macro7 268964502 0x10081296 XF86Macro8 268964503 0x10081297 XF86Macro9 268964504 0x10081298 XF86Macro10 268964505 0x10081299 XF86Macro11 268964506 0x1008129A XF86Macro12 268964507 0x1008129B XF86Macro13 268964508 0x1008129C XF86Macro14 268964509 0x1008129D XF86Macro15 268964510 0x1008129E XF86Macro16 268964511 0x1008129F XF86Macro17 268964512 0x100812A0 XF86Macro18 268964513 0x100812A1 XF86Macro19 268964514 0x100812A2 XF86Macro20 268964515 0x100812A3 XF86Macro21 268964516 0x100812A4 XF86Macro22 268964517 0x100812A5 XF86Macro23 268964518 0x100812A6 XF86Macro24 268964519 0x100812A7 XF86Macro25 268964520 0x100812A8 XF86Macro26 268964521 0x100812A9 XF86Macro27 268964522 0x100812AA XF86Macro28 268964523 0x100812AB XF86Macro29 268964524 0x100812AC XF86Macro30 268964525 0x100812AD XF86MacroRecordStart 268964528 0x100812B0 XF86MacroRecordStop 268964529 0x100812B1 XF86MacroPresetCycle 268964530 0x100812B2 XF86MacroPreset1 268964531 0x100812B3 XF86MacroPreset2 268964532 0x100812B4 XF86MacroPreset3 268964533 0x100812B5 XF86KbdLcdMenu1 268964536 0x100812B8 XF86KbdLcdMenu2 268964537 0x100812B9 XF86KbdLcdMenu3 268964538 0x100812BA XF86KbdLcdMenu4 268964539 0x100812BB XF86KbdLcdMenu5 268964540 0x100812BC XF86Switch_VT_1 269024769 0x1008FE01 XF86Switch_VT_2 269024770 0x1008FE02 XF86Switch_VT_3 269024771 0x1008FE03 XF86Switch_VT_4 269024772 0x1008FE04 XF86Switch_VT_5 269024773 0x1008FE05 XF86Switch_VT_6 269024774 0x1008FE06 XF86Switch_VT_7 269024775 0x1008FE07 XF86Switch_VT_8 269024776 0x1008FE08 XF86Switch_VT_9 269024777 0x1008FE09 XF86Switch_VT_10 269024778 0x1008FE0A XF86Switch_VT_11 269024779 0x1008FE0B XF86Switch_VT_12 269024780 0x1008FE0C .CE .CS XF86Ungrab 269024800 0x1008FE20 XF86ClearGrab 269024801 0x1008FE21 XF86Next_VMode 269024802 0x1008FE22 XF86Prev_VMode 269024803 0x1008FE23 XF86LogWindowTree 269024804 0x1008FE24 XF86LogGrabInfo 269024805 0x1008FE25 XF86ModeLock 269025025 0x1008FF01 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 | XF86TouchpadOff 269025201 0x1008FFB1 XF86AudioMicMute 269025202 0x1008FFB2 XF86Keyboard 269025203 0x1008FFB3 XF86WWAN 269025204 0x1008FFB4 XF86RFKill 269025205 0x1008FFB5 XF86AudioPreset 269025206 0x1008FFB6 XF86RotationLockToggle 269025207 0x1008FFB7 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), event(n) .SH KEYWORDS bind, binding, event, keysym '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: | > | 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 | XF86TouchpadOff 269025201 0x1008FFB1 XF86AudioMicMute 269025202 0x1008FFB2 XF86Keyboard 269025203 0x1008FFB3 XF86WWAN 269025204 0x1008FFB4 XF86RFKill 269025205 0x1008FFB5 XF86AudioPreset 269025206 0x1008FFB6 XF86RotationLockToggle 269025207 0x1008FFB7 XF86FullScreen 269025208 0x1008FFB8 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), event(n) .SH KEYWORDS bind, binding, event, keysym '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/label.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for label widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/labelframe.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the labelframe's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the labelframe's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the labelframe widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/listbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for listbox widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
379 380 381 382 383 384 385 | total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left. \fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | < < < | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 | total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left. \fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character) on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
429 430 431 432 433 434 435 | way through the listbox, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. | | | > < < | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | way through the listbox, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR lines; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier elements become visible; if it is positive then later elements become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them Motif-like behavior. Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined by its \fB\-selectmode\fR option, which selects one of four ways of dealing with the selection. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted doc/man.macros.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to doc/menu.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME menu, tk_menuSetFocus \- Create and manipulate 'menu' widgets and menubars .SH SYNOPSIS .nf | | | > | | | | | | | | | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME menu, tk_menuSetFocus \- Create and manipulate 'menu' widgets and menubars .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBmenu\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_menuSetFocus\fI pathName\fR .fi .SO \-activebackground \-borderwidth \-foreground \-activeborderwidth \-cursor \-relief \-activeforeground \-disabledforeground \-takefocus \-background \-font .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-postcommand postCommand Command If this option is specified then it provides a Tcl command to execute each time the menu is posted. The command is invoked by the \fBpost\fR widget command before posting the menu. Note that in Tk 8.0 on Macintosh and Windows, all post-commands in a system of menus are executed before any of those menus are posted. This is due to the limitations in the individual platforms' menu managers. .OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background For menu entries that are check buttons or radio buttons, this option specifies the color to display in the indicator when the check button or radio button is selected. .OP \-tearoff tearOff TearOff This option must have a proper boolean value, which specifies whether or not the menu should include a tear-off entry at the top. If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and the other entries will number starting at 1. The default menu bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off entry is invoked. This option is ignored under Aqua/macOS, where menus cannot be torn off. .OP \-tearoffcommand tearOffCommand TearOffCommand If this option has a non-empty value, then it specifies a Tcl command to invoke whenever the menu is torn off. The actual command will consist of the value of this option, followed by a space, followed by the name of the menu window, followed by a space, followed by the name of the name of the torn off menu window. For example, if the option's value is .QW "\fBa b\fR" and menu \fB.x.y\fR is torn off to create a new menu \fB.x.tearoff1\fR, then the command .QW "\fBa b .x.y .x.tearoff1\fR" will be invoked. This option is ignored under Aqua/macOS, where menus cannot be torn off. .OP \-title title Title The string will be used to title the window created when this menu is torn off. If the title is NULL, then the window will have the title of the menubutton or the text of the cascade item from which this menu was invoked. .OP \-type type Type |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
258 259 260 261 262 263 264 | (hidden from Tk) will be inserted into the menubar at that time and subsequent addition of a .apple menu will no longer result in it becoming the Application menu. .PP When Tk sees a .menubar.window menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents are inserted into the standard Window menu of the user's menubar whenever the window's menubar is in front. The first items in | | | | 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | (hidden from Tk) will be inserted into the menubar at that time and subsequent addition of a .apple menu will no longer result in it becoming the Application menu. .PP When Tk sees a .menubar.window menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents are inserted into the standard Window menu of the user's menubar whenever the window's menubar is in front. The first items in the menu are provided by macOS, and the names of the current toplevels are automatically appended after all the Tk-defined items and a separator. The Window menu on the Mac also allows toggling the window into a fullscreen state, and managing a tabbed window interface (multiple windows grouped into a single window) if supported by that version of the operating system. .PP When Tk sees a .menubar.help menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents are appended to the standard Help menu of the user's menubar whenever the window's menubar is in front. The first items in the menu are provided by macOS. .PP When Tk sees a System menu on Windows, its items are appended to the system menu that the menubar is attached to. This menu is tied to the application icon and can be invoked with the mouse or by typing Alt+Spacebar. Due to limitations in the Windows API, any font changes, colors, images, bitmaps, or tearoff images will not appear in the system menu. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < | | < > | < < | < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | > | > > > | > > | > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .PP Many of the widget commands for a menu take as one argument an indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on. These indicators are called \fIindex\fRes and may be specified in any of the following forms: .IP \fBactive\fR 12 Indicates the entry that is currently active. If no entry is active then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR. This form may not be abbreviated. .IP \fBend\fR 12 Indicates the bottommost entry in the menu. If there are no entries in the menu then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR. This form may not be abbreviated. .IP \fBlast\fR 12 Same as \fBend\fR. .IP \fBnone\fR 12 Indicates .QW "no entry at all" ; this is used most commonly with the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the menu. In most cases the specification of \fBnone\fR causes nothing to happen in the widget command. This form may not be abbreviated. .IP \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR 12 Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR. If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate. .IP \fInumber\fR 12 Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and so on. .IP \fIpattern\fR 12 If the index does not satisfy one of the above forms then this form is used. \fIPattern\fR is pattern-matched against the label of each entry in the menu, in order from the top down, until a matching entry is found. The rules of \fBstring match\fR are used. .PP If the index could match more than one of the above forms, then the form earlier in the above list takes precedence. .PP The following widget commands are possible for menu widgets: .\" METHOD: activate .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR . Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR and redisplay it using its active colors. Any previously-active entry is deactivated. If \fIindex\fR is specified as \fBnone\fR, or if the specified entry is disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry. Returns an empty string. .\" METHOD: add .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fItype \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu. The new entry's type is given by \fItype\fR and must be one of \fBcascade\fR, \fBcheckbutton\fR, \fBcommand\fR, \fBradiobutton\fR, or \fBseparator\fR, or a unique abbreviation of one of the above. If additional arguments are present, they specify the options listed in the \fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below. The \fBadd\fR widget command returns an empty string. .\" METHOD: cget .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR command. .\" METHOD: clone .TP \fIpathName \fBclone \fInewPathname\fR ?\fIcloneType\fR? . Makes a clone of the current menu named \fInewPathName\fR. This clone is a menu in its own right, but any changes to the clone are propagated to the original menu and vice versa. \fIcloneType\fR can be \fBnormal\fR, \fBmenubar\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR. Should not normally be called outside of the Tk library. See the \fBCLONES\fR section for more information. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR command. .\" METHOD: delete .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2\fR? . Delete all of the menu entries between \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR inclusive. If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fIindex1\fR. Attempts to delete a tear-off menu entry are ignored (instead, you should change the \fB\-tearoff\fR option to remove the tear-off entry). .\" METHOD: entrycget .TP \fIpathName \fBentrycget \fIindex option\fR . Returns the current value of a configuration option for the entry given by \fIindex\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the names described in the \fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below. .\" METHOD: entryconfigure .TP \fIpathName \fBentryconfigure \fIindex \fR?\fIoptions...\fR? . This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR command, except that it applies to the options for an individual entry, whereas \fBconfigure\fR applies to the options for the menu as a whole. \fIOptions\fR may have any of the values described in the \fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below. If \fIoptions\fR are specified, options are modified as indicated in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no \fIoptions\fR are specified, returns a list describing the current options for entry \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). .\" METHOD: index .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR . Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or \fBnone\fR if \fIindex\fR was specified as \fBnone\fR. .\" METHOD: insert .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex type \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Same as the \fBadd\fR widget command except that it inserts the new entry just before the entry given by \fIindex\fR, instead of appending to the end of the menu. The \fItype\fR, \fIoption\fR, and \fIvalue\fR arguments have the same interpretation as for the \fBadd\fR widget command. It is not possible to insert new menu entries before the tear-off entry, if the menu has one. .\" METHOD: invoke .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke \fIindex\fR . Invoke the action of the menu entry. See the sections on the individual entries above for details on what happens. If the menu entry is disabled then nothing happens. If the entry has a command associated with it then the result of that command is returned as the result of the \fBinvoke\fR widget command. Otherwise the result is an empty string. Note: invoking a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu; the default bindings normally take care of this before invoking the \fBinvoke\fR widget command. .\" METHOD: post .TP \fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR ?\fIindex\fR? . Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. If an index is specified the menu will be located so that the entry with that index is displayed at the point. These coordinates are adjusted if necessary to guarantee that the entire menu is visible on the screen. This command normally returns an empty string. If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option has been specified, then its value is executed as a Tcl script before posting the menu and the result of that script is returned as the result of the \fBpost\fR widget command. If an error returns while executing the command, then the error is returned without posting the menu. .\" METHOD: postcascade .TP \fIpathName \fBpostcascade \fIindex\fR . Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by \fIindex\fR, and unposts any previously posted submenu. If \fIindex\fR does not correspond to a cascade entry, or if \fIpathName\fR is not posted, the command has no effect except to unpost any currently posted submenu. .\" METHOD: type .TP \fIpathName \fBtype \fIindex\fR . Returns the type of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR. This is the \fItype\fR argument passed to the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget command when the entry was created, such as \fBcommand\fR or \fBseparator\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR for a tear-off entry. .\" METHOD: unpost .TP \fIpathName \fBunpost\fR . Unmap the window so that it is no longer displayed. If a lower-level cascaded menu is posted, unpost that menu. Returns an empty string. This subcommand does not work on Windows and the Macintosh, as those platforms have their own way of unposting menus. .\" METHOD: xposition .TP \fIpathName \fBxposition \fIindex\fR . Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate within the menu window of the leftmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR. .\" METHOD: yposition .TP \fIpathName \fByposition \fIindex\fR . Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate within the menu window of the topmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR. .SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS" The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not supported by all entry types. .\" OPTION: -activebackground .TP \fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activebackground\fR option for the overall menu is used. If the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable has been set to request strict Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the \fB\-background\fR option is used in its place. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -activeforeground .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -accelerator .TP \fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry. Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display option, it does not actually set the corresponding binding (which can be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command). This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -background .TP \fB\-background \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled). This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-background\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -bitmap .TP \fB\-bitmap \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual label, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR option (as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option) but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed. If a \fB\-image\fR option has been specified, it overrides \fB\-bitmap\fR. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -columnbreak .TP \fB\-columnbreak \fIvalue\fR . When this option is zero, the entry appears below the previous entry. When this option is one, the entry appears at the top of a new column in the menu. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS, where menus are always a single column. .\" OPTION: -command .TP \fB\-command \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a Tcl command to execute when the menu entry is invoked. Not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -compound .TP \fB\-compound \fIvalue\fR . Specifies whether the menu entry should display both an image and text, and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text. Valid values for this option are \fBbottom\fR, \fBcenter\fR, \fBleft\fR, \fBnone\fR, \fBright\fR and \fBtop\fR. The default value is \fBnone\fR, meaning that the button will display either an image or text, depending on the values of the \fB\-image\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR options. .\" OPTION: -font .TP \fB\-font \fIvalue\fR . Specifies the font to use when drawing the label or accelerator string in this entry. If this option is specified as an empty string (the default) then the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -foreground .TP \fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled). This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-foreground\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -hidemargin .TP \fB\-hidemargin \fIvalue\fR . Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e., color palettes, pattern palettes, etc. 1 indicates that the margin for the entry is hidden; 0 means that the margin is used. .\" OPTION: -image .TP \fB\-image \fIvalue\fR . Specifies an image to display in the menu instead of a text string or bitmap. The image must have been created by some previous invocation of \fBimage create\fR. This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR options (as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option) but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual or bitmap label to be displayed. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -indicatoron .TP \fB\-indicatoron \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries. \fIValue\fR is a boolean that determines whether or not the indicator should be displayed. .\" OPTION: -label .TP \fB\-label \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a string to display as an identifying label in the menu entry. Not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -menu .TP \fB\-menu \fIvalue\fR . Available only for cascade entries. Specifies the path name of the submenu associated with this entry. The submenu must be a child of the menu. .\" OPTION: -offvalue .TP \fB\-offvalue \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton entries. Specifies the value to store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is deselected. .\" OPTION: -onvalue .TP \fB\-onvalue \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton entries. Specifies the value to store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected. .\" OPTION: -selectcolor .TP \fB\-selectcolor \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries. Specifies the color to display in the indicator when the entry is selected. If the value is an empty string (the default) then the \fB\-selectcolor\fR option for the menu determines the indicator color. .\" OPTION: -selectimage .TP \fB\-selectimage \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries. Specifies an image to display in the entry (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option) when it is selected. \fIValue\fR is the name of an image, which must have been created by some previous invocation of \fBimage create\fR. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been specified. .\" OPTION: -state .TP \fB\-state \fIvalue\fR . Specifies one of three states for the entry: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In normal state the entry is displayed using the \fB\-foreground\fR option for the menu and the \fB\-background\fR option from the entry or the menu. The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the entry. In active state the entry is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the menu along with the \fB\-activebackground\fR option from the entry. Disabled state means that the entry should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate or invoke the entry. In this state the entry is displayed according to the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR option for the menu and the \fB\-background\fR option from the entry. This option is not available for separator entries. .\" OPTION: -underline .TP \fB\-underline \fIvalue\fR . Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the entry. This option is also queried by the default bindings and used to implement keyboard traversal. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the entry, 1 to the next character, and so on. If a bitmap or image is displayed in the entry then this option is ignored. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .\" OPTION: -value .TP \fB\-value \fIvalue\fR . Available only for radiobutton entries. Specifies the value to store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected. If an empty string is specified, then the \fB\-label\fR option for the entry as the value to store in the variable. .\" OPTION: -variable .TP \fB\-variable \fIvalue\fR . Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries. Specifies the name of a global variable to set when the entry is selected. For checkbutton entries the variable is also set when the entry is deselected. For radiobutton entries, changing the variable |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/menubar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_menuBar \fIframe \fR?\fImenu menu ...\fR? .sp | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_menuBar \fIframe \fR?\fImenu menu ...\fR? .sp \fBtk_bindForTraversal \fIarg arg ... \fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures were used in Tk 3.6 and earlier releases to help manage pulldown menus and to implement keyboard traversal of menus. In Tk 4.0 and later releases they are no longer needed. Stubs for these procedures have been retained for |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/menubutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBmenubutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-cursor \-image \-underline \-compound \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-direction direction Direction Specifies where the menu is going to be popup up. \fBabove\fR tries to pop the menu above the menubutton. \fBbelow\fR tries to pop the menu below the menubutton. \fBleft\fR tries to pop the menu to the left of the menubutton. \fBright\fR tries to pop the menu to the right of the menu button. \fBflush\fR pops the menu directly over the menubutton. In the case of \fBabove\fR or \fBbelow\fR, the direction will be reversed if the menu would show offscreen. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | be posted just underneath the menubutton. If the mouse is moved over the menu before releasing the mouse button, the button release causes the underlying menu entry to be invoked. When the button is released, the menu is unposted. .PP Menubuttons are used to construct a \fBtk_optionMenu\fR, which is the preferred mechanism for allowing a user to select one item from a list | | | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | be posted just underneath the menubutton. If the mouse is moved over the menu before releasing the mouse button, the button release causes the underlying menu entry to be invoked. When the button is released, the menu is unposted. .PP Menubuttons are used to construct a \fBtk_optionMenu\fR, which is the preferred mechanism for allowing a user to select one item from a list on macOS. .PP Menubuttons were also typically organized into groups called menu bars that allow scanning: if the mouse button is pressed over one menubutton (causing it to post its menu) and the mouse is moved over another menubutton in the same menu bar without releasing the mouse button, then the menu of the first menubutton is unposted and the menu of the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for menubutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified | > > | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for menubutton widgets: .\" METHOD: cget .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR command. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/message.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for message widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/messageBox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | .PP The following option-value pairs are supported: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This | | | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | .PP The following option-value pairs are supported: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This is only available on macOS. .TP \fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR . \fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for this message window ( .QW ok , .QW cancel , |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR . Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message box is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR . | | < | | | 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR . Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message box is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR . Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The default value is an empty string. .TP \fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR . Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR: .RS .TP 18 \fBabortretryignore\fR . Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR, \fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR. .TP 18 \fBok\fR . Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR. This is the default. .TP 18 \fBokcancel\fR . Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR. .TP 18 \fBretrycancel\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/options.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. | < < < | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap) is to be displayed in the widget. Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | all the time. .OP \-insertontime insertOnTime OnTime Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain .QW on in each blink cycle. .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth | | | 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | all the time. .OP \-insertontime insertOnTime OnTime Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain .QW on in each blink cycle. .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth Specifies a non-negative value indicating the total width of the insertion cursor. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If a border has been specified for the insertion cursor (using the \fB\-insertborderwidth\fR option), the border will be drawn inside the width specified by the \fB\-insertwidth\fR option. .OP \-jump jump Jump For widgets with a slider that can be dragged to adjust a value, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. | < < < < < < < | 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. .OP \-relief relief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR. The value indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative to its exterior; for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/pack.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the packer. | < < < < < < < < | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the packer. .TP \fBpack info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the window given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | disabled for \fIcontainer\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIcontainer\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP | | > | | > | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | disabled for \fIcontainer\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIcontainer\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all of the content windows in the packing order for \fIwindow\fR. The order of the content windows in the list is the same as their order in the packing order. If \fIwindow\fR has no content then an empty string is returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR. .VE "TIP 581" .SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM" .PP For each container the packer maintains an ordered list of content windows called the \fIpacking list\fR. The \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR, and \fB\-before\fR configuration options are used to specify the container for each content and the content's position in the packing list. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the panedwindow widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for panedwindow widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/photo.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | \fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIimageName \fBblank\fR \fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? | | | | | | | | | > | | < | | | | < < < < | > | | | | | | < < < | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | \fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIimageName \fBblank\fR \fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBget \fIx y\fR \fIimageName \fBput \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBread \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBredither\fR \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color or be transparent. A photo image is stored internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a procedural interface. At present, only .VS 8.6 PNG, .VE 8.6 GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional image file formats to be added easily. A photo image is transparent in regions where no image data has been supplied or where it has been set transparent by the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand. .SH "CREATING PHOTOS" .PP Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR command. Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR: .TP \fB\-data \fIstring\fR . Specifies the contents of the image as a string. The string should contain binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that will accept string data. If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR option takes precedence. .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the \fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option. .TP \fB\-file \fIname\fR . \fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data for the photo image. The file format must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that can read data. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | .PP When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | .PP When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS \fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .PP Those options that write data to the image generally expand the size of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . | | < < < < < < | | | | | | | < | | | | < < < < > < | | < < < < < | > | | > > > | | | < < < < < < | | | < < < < | 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 | is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Returns image data in the form of a string. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fI format-name\fR . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write a string containing this image data. If this option is not given, this subcommand uses a format that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element per pixel/column) of colors in .QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR format (where \fIrr\fR is a pair of hexadecimal digits for the red channel, \fIgg\fR for green, and \fIbb\fR for blue). .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1 and excluding x2,y2. The default, if this option is not given, is the whole image. .TP \fB\-grayscale\fR . If this options is specified, the data will not contain color information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR . Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the red, green and blue components respectively. .TP \fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR. This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). If \fIdata\fR does not match any known format, an attempt to interpret it as a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines is made, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel colors (see \fBTk_GetColor\fR for a description of valid colors.) Every scan-line must be of the same length. Note that when \fIdata\fR is a single color name, you are instructing Tk to fill a rectangular region with that color. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. .TP \fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR? . Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be copied. The default position is (0,0). If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the entire destination rectangle. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image. This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied to the destination image. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right corner of the image in the image file. If all four coordinates are |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
390 391 392 393 394 395 396 | quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors. If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the dithered image may not be exactly correct. Normally the difference is not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is displayed. .TP | | < | | < < < | < | | < < | < < < | < | | | | | | < < < | 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors. If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the dithered image may not be exactly correct. Normally the difference is not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is displayed. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in the photo image. Several subcommands are available: .RS .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR . Returns a boolean indicating if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is transparent. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y boolean\fR . Makes the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) transparent if \fIboolean\fR is true, and makes that pixel opaque otherwise. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fI format-name\fR . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to write the data to the file. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write an image file. If this option is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has the capability to write an image file. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the image file. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 | .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF | < < < < < | | | > | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | < | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF formats, which are automatically registered on initialization. .PP When reading an image file or processing string data specified with the \fB\-data\fR configuration option, the photo image code invokes each handler in turn until one is found that claims to be able to read the data in the file or string. Usually this will find the correct handler, but if it does not, the user may give a format name with the \fB\-format\fR option to specify which handler to use. In fact the photo image code will try those handlers whose names begin with the string specified for the \fB\-format\fR option (the comparison is case-insensitive). For example, if the user specifies \fB\-format gif\fR, then a handler named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a handler named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been registered). .PP When writing image data to a file, the processing of the \fB\-format\fR option is slightly different: the string value given for the \fB\-format\fR option must begin with the complete name of the requested handler, and may contain additional information following that, which the handler can use, for example, to specify which variant to use of the formats supported by the handler. Note that not all image handlers may support writing transparency data to a file, even where the target image format does. .SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS" .PP .VS 8.6 Some image formats support sub-options, which are specified at the time that the image is loaded using additional words in the \fB\-format\fR option. At the time of writing, the following are supported: .TP \fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR . When parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data. .TP \fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR . An additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the background on which the image is displayed to show through. This usually also has the effect of desaturating the image. The \fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0. .VE 8.6 .SH "COLOR ALLOCATION" .PP When a photo image is displayed in a window, the photo image code allocates colors to use to display the image and dithers the image, if necessary, to display a reasonable approximation to the image using the colors that are available. The colors are allocated as a color cube, that is, the number of colors allocated is the product of the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
712 713 714 715 716 717 718 |
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
\-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 |
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
\-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
.SH "SEE ALSO"
image(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
photo, image, color
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/place.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | .TP \fBplace info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR. The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP | | > | | > | 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | .TP \fBplace info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR. The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP \fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all the content windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the container. If there is no content for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string is returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR. .VE "TIP 581" .PP If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with \fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by first using \fBplace forget\fR to erase any existing information for the window and then invoking \fBplace configure\fR with the saved information. .SH "FINE POINTS" |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/popup.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | $m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell $m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell # Create something to attach it to pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"] # Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 |
$m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell
$m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell
# Create something to attach it to
pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"]
# Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked
bind .l <1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
menu, popup
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/radiobutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for radiobutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scale.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscale\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscale\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scale widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBscrollbar\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay \-background \-highlightthickness \-repeatinterval \-borderwidth \-jump \-takefocus \-cursor \-orient \-troughcolor \-highlightbackground \-relief .SE |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window by clicking or dragging with the mouse. See the \fBBINDINGS\fR section below for details. .SH "ELEMENTS" .PP A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the widget commands for the scrollbar: | < | < | < | < | < | > > > > > > > > | 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window by clicking or dragging with the mouse. See the \fBBINDINGS\fR section below for details. .SH "ELEMENTS" .PP A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the widget commands for the scrollbar: .IP \fBarrow1\fR 10 The top or left arrow in the scrollbar. .IP \fBtrough1\fR 10 The region between the slider and \fBarrow1\fR. .IP \fBslider\fR 10 The rectangle that indicates what is visible in the associated widget. .IP \fBtrough2\fR 10 The region between the slider and \fBarrow2\fR. .IP \fBarrow2\fR 10 The bottom or right arrow in the scrollbar. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scrollbar widgets: .\" METHOD: activate .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate \fR?\fIelement\fR? . Marks the element indicated by \fIelement\fR as active, which causes it to be displayed as specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR and \fB\-activerelief\fR options. The only element values understood by this command are \fBarrow1\fR, \fBslider\fR, or \fBarrow2\fR. If any other value is specified then no element of the scrollbar will be active. If \fIelement\fR is not specified, the command returns the name of the element that is currently active, or an empty string if no element is active. .\" METHOD: cget .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR command. .\" METHOD: configure .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? . Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR command. .\" METHOD: delta .TP \fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR . Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change in slider position. For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal, the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change to move the slider \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is ignored in this case). If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change to move the slider \fIdeltaY\fR pixels down. The arguments and the result may be zero or negative. .\" METHOD: fraction .TP \fIpathName \fBfraction \fIx y\fR . Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lies in the trough area of the scrollbar. The value 0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough, the value 1 corresponds to the bottom or right, 0.5 corresponds to the middle, and so on. \fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar widget. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR refer to a point outside the trough, the closest point in the trough is used. .\" METHOD: get .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR . Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose elements are the arguments to the most recent \fBset\fR widget command. .\" METHOD: identify .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR . Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (such as \fBarrow1\fR), or an empty string if the point does not lie in any element of the scrollbar. \fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar widget. .\" METHOD: set .TP \fIpathName \fBset \fIfirst last\fR . This command is invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget to tell the scrollbar about the current view in the widget. The command takes two arguments, each of which is a real fraction between 0 and 1. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
199 200 201 202 203 204 205 | the slider, the scrollbar notifies the associated widget that it must change its view. The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option. The command may take any of the following forms. In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the \fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like | | > > > > > > > > > > > | < < < < < < < < < < < < | 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | the slider, the scrollbar notifies the associated widget that it must change its view. The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option. The command may take any of the following forms. In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the \fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like .QW "\fB.t yview\fR" . .\" METHOD: moveto .TP \fIprefix \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR . \fIFraction\fR is a real number between 0 and 1. The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .\" METHOD: scroll .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR . The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units. The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget, such as characters or lines in a text widget. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit should scroll off the bottom or right of the window. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR . The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. .SH "OLD COMMAND SYNTAX" .PP In versions of Tk before 4.0, the \fBset\fR and \fBget\fR widget commands used a different form. This form is still supported for backward compatibility, but it is deprecated. In the old command syntax, the \fBset\fR widget command has the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | .IP [14] The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Create a window with a scrollable \fBtext\fR widget: .CS toplevel .tl | | | | | | | | 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 |
.IP [14]
The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
Create a window with a scrollable \fBtext\fR widget:
.CS
toplevel .tl
text .tl.t -yscrollcommand {.tl.s set}
\fBscrollbar\fR .tl.s -command {.tl.t yview}
grid .tl.t .tl.s -sticky nsew
grid columnconfigure .tl 0 -weight 1
grid rowconfigure .tl 0 -weight 1
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::scrollbar(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
scrollbar, widget
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/selection.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME selection \- Manipulate the X selection .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME selection \- Manipulate the X selection .SH SYNOPSIS \fBselection \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command provides a Tcl interface to the X selection mechanism and implements the full selection functionality described in the X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM). .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/send.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME send \- Execute a command in a different application .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME send \- Execute a command in a different application .SH SYNOPSIS \fBsend ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIapp cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command arranges for \fIcmd\fR (and \fIarg\fRs) to be executed in the application named by \fIapp\fR. It returns the result or error from that command execution. \fIApp\fR may be the name of any application whose main window is |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/spinbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable \-foreground \-justify \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-relief \-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay | < | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | \-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable \-foreground \-justify \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-relief \-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-buttonbackground buttonBackground Background The background color to be used for the spin buttons. .OP \-buttoncursor buttonCursor Cursor The cursor to be used when over the spin buttons. If this is empty (the default), a default cursor will be used. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range. This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR, as it will format a floating-point number. .OP \-from from From A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its | | < | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range. This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR, as it will format a floating-point number. .OP \-from from From A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its contents. This value must be less than the \fB\-to\fR option. If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option. .OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand Specifies a script to eval when \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0. Setting it to an empty string disables this feature (the default). The best use of this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information. .OP \-increment increment Increment |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-to to To A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control | | < | 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-to to To A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its contents. This value must be greater than the \fB\-from\fR option. If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option. .OP \-validate validate Validate Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR. It defaults to \fBnone\fR. When you want validation, you must explicitly state which mode you wish to use. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more. .OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | | < < | 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for spinboxes that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/text.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
225 226 227 228 229 230 231 | .TP 12 \fBend\fR . Indicates the end of the text (the character just after the last newline). .TP 12 \fImark\fR . | | > | 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 | .TP 12 \fBend\fR . Indicates the end of the text (the character just after the last newline). .TP 12 \fImark\fR . Indicates the character just after the mark whose name is \fImark\fR (see \fBMARKS\fR for details). .TP 12 \fItag\fB.first\fR . Indicates the first character in the text that has been tagged with \fItag\fR. This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged with \fItag\fR. .TP 12 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 | .IP [3] If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another window within this application, then the \fBsel\fR tag will be removed from all characters in the text. .IP [4] Whenever the \fBsel\fR tag range changes a virtual event \fB<<Selection>>\fR is generated. .PP The \fBsel\fR tag is automatically defined when a text widget is created, and it may not be deleted with the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR" widget command. Furthermore, the \fB\-selectbackground\fR, \fB\-selectborderwidth\fR, and \fB\-selectforeground\fR options for the text widget are tied to the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-borderwidth\fR, and | > > > | 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 | .IP [3] If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another window within this application, then the \fBsel\fR tag will be removed from all characters in the text. .IP [4] Whenever the \fBsel\fR tag range changes a virtual event \fB<<Selection>>\fR is generated. It might also be generated when selection is affected but not actually changed. Further, multiple selection changes could happen before events can be processed leading to multiple events with the same visible selection. .PP The \fBsel\fR tag is automatically defined when a text widget is created, and it may not be deleted with the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR" widget command. Furthermore, the \fB\-selectbackground\fR, \fB\-selectborderwidth\fR, and \fB\-selectforeground\fR options for the text widget are tied to the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-borderwidth\fR, and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 | .CE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtext\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the text's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 | .CE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtext\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the text's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 | . Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the window by its index position to get more information. .RE .TP | | | 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 | . Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the window by its index position to get more information. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 | The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag of the widget to \fIboolean\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR . When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided | | < | | < | | | 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 | The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag of the widget to \fIboolean\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR . When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided no other edits were done since then. Generates an error when the redo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit reset\fR . Clears the undo and redo stacks. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit separator\fR . Inserts a separator (boundary) on the undo stack. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit undo\fR . Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. An edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR? . Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 | ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges are empty strings. .TP | | | | 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 | ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges are empty strings. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBimage\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBimage cget \fIindex option\fR . Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded image. \fIIndex\fR identifies the embedded image, and \fIoption\fR specifies a particular |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 | characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple \fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be omitted. .TP | | | 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 | characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple \fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be omitted. .TP \fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBmark gravity \fImarkName\fR ?\fIdirection\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 | \fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure. .RE .TP | | | 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 | \fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBtag add \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2 index1 index2 ...\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 | the command returns the \fIscript\fR associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both \fIscript\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the | | | > | | > | | 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 | the command returns the \fIscript\fR associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both \fIscript\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. Mouse and keyboard event bindings for a text widget respectively use the \fBcurrent\fR and \fBinsert\fR marks described under \fBMARKS\fR above. An \fBEnter\fR event triggers for a tag when the tag first becomes present on the current character, and a \fBLeave\fR event triggers for a tag when it ceases to be present on the current character. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events can happen either because the \fBcurrent\fR mark moved or because the character at that position changed. Note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse events are directed to the current character, while keyboard events are directed to the insert character. If a virtual event is used in a binding, that binding can trigger only if the virtual event is defined by an underlying mouse-related or keyboard-related event. .PP It is possible for the current character to have multiple tags, and for each of them to have a binding for a particular event sequence. When this occurs, one binding is invoked for each tag, in order from lowest-priority to highest priority. If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, then the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 | \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP | | | 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 | \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow cget \fIindex option\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 | Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to | | | | | | < < | > > | 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 | Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or \fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i (the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given, pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 | the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to | | | | | | 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 | the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or \fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i (the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given, pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR lines on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 | Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word is dependent on the value of the \fBtcl_wordchars\fR variable. See \fBtclvars\fR(n). .IP [1] | | | 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 | Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word is dependent on the value of the \fBtcl_wordchars\fR variable. See \fBtclvars\fR(n). .IP [1] Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor at the closest edge of the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget. Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse. .IP [2] Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse and positions the insertion cursor at the start of the word. Dragging after a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 | .IP [28] Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor. .IP [29] Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [30] | < < < > > > | 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 | .IP [28] Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor. .IP [29] Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [30] Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget after copying it to the clipboard. .IP [31] Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [32] Control-z undoes the last edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise. .IP [33] Control-Z (or Control-y on Windows) reapplies the last undone edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise. .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tk.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state .SH SYNOPSIS | | > | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | .TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk\fI option \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous elements of Tk's internal state. Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a particular window. The command can take any of a number of different forms depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .\" METHOD: appname .TP \fBtk appname \fR?\fInewName\fR? . If \fInewName\fR is not specified, this command returns the name of the application (the name that may be used in \fBsend\fR commands to communicate with the application). If \fInewName\fR is specified, then the name of the application |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | \fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter. This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with capitals are assumed to be classes; as a result, Tk may not be able to find some options for the application. If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command, this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR command. .TP \fBtk busy \fIsubcommand\fR ... . This command controls the marking of window hierarchies as .QW busy , rendering them non-interactive while some other operation is proceeding. For more details see the \fBbusy\fR manual page. .TP \fBtk caret \fIwindow \fR?\fB\-x \fIx\fR? ?\fB\-y \fIy\fR? ?\fB\-height \fIheight\fR? . Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified Tk window \fIwindow\fR. The caret is the per-display cursor location used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows. If no options are specified, the last values used for setting the caret are return in option-value pair format. \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR represent window-relative coordinates, and \fB\-height\fR is the height of the current cursor location, or the height of the specified \fIwindow\fR if none is given. .TP \fBtk inactive \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fBreset\fR? . Returns a positive integer, the number of milliseconds since the last time the user interacted with the system. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers to the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's main window. .RS .PP \fBtk inactive\fR will return \-1, if querying the user inactive time is not supported by the system, and in safe interpreters. .PP If the literal string \fBreset\fR is given as an additional argument, the timer is reset and an empty string is returned. Resetting the inactivity time is forbidden in safe interpreters and will throw an error if tried. .RE .TP \fBtk fontchooser \fIsubcommand\fR ... Controls the Tk font selection dialog. For more details see the \fBfontchooser\fR manual page. .TP \fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR? . Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels. The \fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is | > > > > > > | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | \fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter. This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with capitals are assumed to be classes; as a result, Tk may not be able to find some options for the application. If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command, this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR command. .\" METHOD: busy .TP \fBtk busy \fIsubcommand\fR ... . This command controls the marking of window hierarchies as .QW busy , rendering them non-interactive while some other operation is proceeding. For more details see the \fBbusy\fR manual page. .\" METHOD: caret .TP \fBtk caret \fIwindow \fR?\fB\-x \fIx\fR? ?\fB\-y \fIy\fR? ?\fB\-height \fIheight\fR? . Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified Tk window \fIwindow\fR. The caret is the per-display cursor location used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows. If no options are specified, the last values used for setting the caret are return in option-value pair format. \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR represent window-relative coordinates, and \fB\-height\fR is the height of the current cursor location, or the height of the specified \fIwindow\fR if none is given. .\" METHOD: inactive .TP \fBtk inactive \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fBreset\fR? . Returns a positive integer, the number of milliseconds since the last time the user interacted with the system. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers to the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's main window. .RS .PP \fBtk inactive\fR will return \-1, if querying the user inactive time is not supported by the system, and in safe interpreters. .PP If the literal string \fBreset\fR is given as an additional argument, the timer is reset and an empty string is returned. Resetting the inactivity time is forbidden in safe interpreters and will throw an error if tried. .RE .\" METHOD: fontchooser .TP \fBtk fontchooser \fIsubcommand\fR ... . Controls the Tk font selection dialog. For more details see the \fBfontchooser\fR manual page. .\" METHOD: scaling .TP \fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR? . Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels. The \fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | displayed 1.25 times as large as normal. The initial value for the scaling factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time. Measurements made after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to accommodate the new scaling factor. .RE .TP \fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR? . Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods) for filtering events. The resulting state is returned. XIM is used in some locales (i.e., Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This feature is only significant on X. If XIM support is not available, this will always return 0. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current state is returned. This is turned on by default for the main display. .TP \fBtk windowingsystem\fR . Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of \fBx11\fR (X11-based), \fBwin32\fR (MS Windows), | > > | | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 | displayed 1.25 times as large as normal. The initial value for the scaling factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time. Measurements made after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to accommodate the new scaling factor. .RE .\" METHOD: useinputmethods .TP \fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR? . Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods) for filtering events. The resulting state is returned. XIM is used in some locales (i.e., Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This feature is only significant on X. If XIM support is not available, this will always return 0. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window. If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current state is returned. This is turned on by default for the main display. .\" METHOD: windowingsystem .TP \fBtk windowingsystem\fR . Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of \fBx11\fR (X11-based), \fBwin32\fR (MS Windows), or \fBaqua\fR (macOS Aqua). .SH "SEE ALSO" busy(n), fontchooser(n), send(n), winfo(n) .SH KEYWORDS application name, send '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/tk4.0.ps.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | % FrameMaker. % NOTE % This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output. % Any questions should be sent to mickey@magickingdom.eng.sun.com % % Known Problems: % Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1 | | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 |
% FrameMaker.
% NOTE
% This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output.
% Any questions should be sent to mickey@magickingdom.eng.sun.com
%
% Known Problems:
% Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1
/FMversion (3.0) def
% Set up Color vs. Black-and-White
/FMPrintInColor { % once-thru loop gimmick
% See if we're a NeWSprint printer
/currentcanvas where {
pop systemdict /separationdict known
exit
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 |
% } if
systemdict /colorimage known
systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and
exit } loop def
% Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer
% /FMPrintInColor false def
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 |
% } if
systemdict /colorimage known
systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and
exit } loop def
% Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer
% /FMPrintInColor false def
/FrameDict 195 dict def
systemdict /errordict known not {/errordict 10 dict def
errordict /rangecheck {stop} put} if
% The readline in 23.0 doesn't recognize cr's as nl's on AppleTalk
FrameDict /tmprangecheck errordict /rangecheck get put
errordict /rangecheck {FrameDict /bug true put} put
FrameDict /bug false put
mark
% Some PS machines read past the CR, so keep the following 3 lines together!
currentfile 5 string readline
00
0000000000
cleartomark
errordict /rangecheck FrameDict /tmprangecheck get put
FrameDict /bug get {
/readline {
/gstring exch def
/gfile exch def
/gindex 0 def
{
gfile read pop
dup 10 eq {exit} if
dup 13 eq {exit} if
gstring exch gindex exch put
/gindex gindex 1 add def
} loop
pop
gstring 0 gindex getinterval true
} def
} if
/FMVERSION {
FMversion ne {
/Times-Roman findfont 18 scalefont setfont
100 100 moveto
(FrameMaker version does not match postscript_prolog!)
dup =
show showpage
} if
} def
/FMLOCAL {
FrameDict begin
0 def
end
} def
/gstring FMLOCAL
/gfile FMLOCAL
/gindex FMLOCAL
/orgxfer FMLOCAL
/orgproc FMLOCAL
/organgle FMLOCAL
/orgfreq FMLOCAL
/yscale FMLOCAL
/xscale FMLOCAL
/manualfeed FMLOCAL
/paperheight FMLOCAL
/paperwidth FMLOCAL
/FMDOCUMENT {
array /FMfonts exch def
/#copies exch def
FrameDict begin
0 ne dup {setmanualfeed} if
/manualfeed exch def
/paperheight exch def
/paperwidth exch def
/yscale exch def
/xscale exch def
currenttransfer cvlit /orgxfer exch def
currentscreen cvlit /orgproc exch def
/organgle exch def /orgfreq exch def
setpapername
manualfeed {true} {papersize} ifelse
{manualpapersize} {false} ifelse
{desperatepapersize} if
end
} def
/pagesave FMLOCAL
/orgmatrix FMLOCAL
/landscape FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINPAGE {
FrameDict begin
/pagesave save def
3.86 setmiterlimit
/landscape exch 0 ne def
landscape {
90 rotate 0 exch neg translate pop
}
{pop pop}
ifelse
xscale yscale scale
/orgmatrix matrix def
gsave
} def
/FMENDPAGE {
grestore
pagesave restore
end
showpage
} def
/FMFONTDEFINE {
FrameDict begin
findfont
ReEncode
1 index exch
definefont
FMfonts 3 1 roll
put
end
} def
/FMFILLS {
FrameDict begin
array /fillvals exch def
end
} def
/FMFILL {
FrameDict begin
fillvals 3 1 roll put
end
} def
/FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS {
newpath
0.0 0.0 moveto
1 setlinewidth
0 setlinecap
0 0 0 sethsbcolor
0 setgray
} bind def
/fx FMLOCAL
/fy FMLOCAL
/fh FMLOCAL
/fw FMLOCAL
/llx FMLOCAL
/lly FMLOCAL
/urx FMLOCAL
/ury FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINEPSF {
end
/FMEPSF save def
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
[/fy /fx /fh /fw /ury /urx /lly /llx] {exch def} forall
fx fy translate
rotate
fw urx llx sub div fh ury lly sub div scale
llx neg lly neg translate
} bind def
/FMENDEPSF {
FMEPSF restore
FrameDict begin
} bind def
FrameDict begin
/setmanualfeed {
%%BeginFeature *ManualFeed True
statusdict /manualfeed true put
%%EndFeature
} def
/max {2 copy lt {exch} if pop} bind def
/min {2 copy gt {exch} if pop} bind def
/inch {72 mul} def
/pagedimen {
paperheight sub abs 16 lt exch
paperwidth sub abs 16 lt and
{/papername exch def} {pop} ifelse
} def
/papersizedict FMLOCAL
/setpapername {
/papersizedict 14 dict def
papersizedict begin
/papername /unknown def
/Letter 8.5 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/LetterSmall 7.68 inch 10.16 inch pagedimen
/Tabloid 11.0 inch 17.0 inch pagedimen
/Ledger 17.0 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/Legal 8.5 inch 14.0 inch pagedimen
/Statement 5.5 inch 8.5 inch pagedimen
/Executive 7.5 inch 10.0 inch pagedimen
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
233 234 235 236 237 238 239 |
/A4 {a4tray a4} def
/A4Small {a4tray a4small} def
/B4 {b4tray b4} def
/B5 {b5tray b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
| | | | | | | | 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 |
/A4 {a4tray a4} def
/A4Small {a4tray a4small} def
/B4 {b4tray b4} def
/B5 {b5tray b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
statusdict begin stopped end
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
} def
/manualpapersize {
papersizedict begin
/Letter {letter} def
/LetterSmall {lettersmall} def
/Tabloid {11x17} def
/Ledger {ledger} def
/Legal {legal} def
/Statement {statement} def
/Executive {executive} def
/A3 {a3} def
/A4 {a4} def
/A4Small {a4small} def
/B4 {b4} def
/B5 {b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
stopped
} def
/desperatepapersize {
statusdict /setpageparams known
{
paperwidth paperheight 0 1
statusdict begin
{setpageparams} stopped pop
end
} if
} def
/savematrix {
orgmatrix currentmatrix pop
} bind def
/restorematrix {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 | /fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl /periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand /Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute /Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron ] def | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 |
/fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl
/periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand
/Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute
/Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve
/Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron
/breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron
] def
/ReEncode {
dup
length
dict begin
{
1 index /FID ne
{def}
{pop pop} ifelse
} forall
0 eq {/Encoding DiacriticEncoding def} if
currentdict
end
} bind def
/graymode true def
/bwidth FMLOCAL
/bpside FMLOCAL
/bstring FMLOCAL
/onbits FMLOCAL
/offbits FMLOCAL
/xindex FMLOCAL
/yindex FMLOCAL
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/setpattern {
/bwidth exch def
/bpside exch def
/bstring exch def
/onbits 0 def /offbits 0 def
freq sangle landscape {90 add} if
{/y exch def
/x exch def
/xindex x 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
/yindex y 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
bstring yindex bwidth mul xindex 8 idiv add get
1 7 xindex 8 mod sub bitshift and 0 ne
{/onbits onbits 1 add def 1}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
366 367 368 369 370 371 372 | orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen } if } bind def /HUE FMLOCAL /SAT FMLOCAL /BRIGHT FMLOCAL /Colors FMLOCAL | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen
} if
} bind def
/HUE FMLOCAL
/SAT FMLOCAL
/BRIGHT FMLOCAL
/Colors FMLOCAL
FMPrintInColor
{
/HUE 0 def
/SAT 0 def
/BRIGHT 0 def
% array of arrays Hue and Sat values for the separations [HUE BRIGHT]
/Colors
[[0 0 ] % black
[0 0 ] % white
[0.00 1.0] % red
[0.37 1.0] % green
[0.60 1.0] % blue
[0.50 1.0] % cyan
[0.83 1.0] % magenta
[0.16 1.0] % comment / yellow
] def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPCOLOR} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPCOLORc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUECOLOR } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUECOLORc } def
/K {
Colors exch get dup
0 get /HUE exch store
1 get /BRIGHT exch store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} def
/FMsetgray {
/SAT exch 1.0 exch sub store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} bind def
}
{
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPGRAY} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPGRAYc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUEGRAY } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUEGRAYc } def
/FMsetgray {setgray} bind def
/K {
pop
} def
}
ifelse
/normalize {
transform round exch round exch itransform
} bind def
/dnormalize {
dtransform round exch round exch idtransform
} bind def
/lnormalize {
0 dtransform exch cvi 2 idiv 2 mul 1 add exch idtransform pop
} bind def
/H {
lnormalize setlinewidth
} bind def
/Z {
setlinecap
} bind def
/fillvals FMLOCAL
/X {
fillvals exch get
dup type /stringtype eq
{8 1 setpattern}
{grayness}
ifelse
} bind def
/V {
gsave eofill grestore
} bind def
/N {
stroke
} bind def
/M {newpath moveto} bind def
/E {lineto} bind def
/D {curveto} bind def
/O {closepath} bind def
/n FMLOCAL
/L {
/n exch def
newpath
normalize
moveto
2 1 n {pop normalize lineto} for
} bind def
/Y {
L
closepath
} bind def
/x1 FMLOCAL
/x2 FMLOCAL
/y1 FMLOCAL
/y2 FMLOCAL
/rad FMLOCAL
/R {
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
x1 y1
x2 y1
x2 y2
x1 y2
4 Y
} bind def
/RR {
/rad exch def
normalize
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
normalize
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
newpath
x1 y1 rad add moveto
x1 y2 x2 y2 rad arcto
x2 y2 x2 y1 rad arcto
x2 y1 x1 y1 rad arcto
x1 y1 x1 y2 rad arcto
closepath
16 {pop} repeat
} bind def
/C {
grestore
gsave
R
clip
} bind def
/FMpointsize FMLOCAL
/F {
FMfonts exch get
FMpointsize scalefont
setfont
} bind def
/Q {
/FMpointsize exch def
F
} bind def
/T {
moveto show
} bind def
/RF {
rotate
0 ne {-1 1 scale} if
} bind def
/TF {
gsave
moveto
RF
show
grestore
} bind def
/P {
moveto
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
} bind def
/PF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
grestore
} bind def
/S {
moveto
0 exch ashow
} bind def
/SF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 exch ashow
grestore
} bind def
/B {
moveto
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
} bind def
/BF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
grestore
} bind def
/G {
gsave
newpath
normalize translate 0.0 0.0 moveto
dnormalize scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
closepath fill
grestore
} bind def
/A {
gsave
savematrix
newpath
2 index 2 div add exch 3 index 2 div sub exch
normalize 2 index 2 div sub exch 3 index 2 div add exch
translate
scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
restorematrix
stroke
grestore
} bind def
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/h FMLOCAL
/xx FMLOCAL
/yy FMLOCAL
/ww FMLOCAL
/hh FMLOCAL
/FMsaveobject FMLOCAL
/FMoptop FMLOCAL
/FMdicttop FMLOCAL
/BEGINPRINTCODE {
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
/FMoptop count 4 sub def
/FMsaveobject save def
userdict begin
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
3 index neg 3 index neg translate
} bind def
/ENDPRINTCODE {
count -1 FMoptop {pop pop} for
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
FMsaveobject restore
} bind def
/gn {
0
{ 46 mul
cf read pop
32 sub
dup 46 lt {exit} if
46 sub add
} loop
add
} bind def
/str FMLOCAL
/cfs {
/str sl string def
0 1 sl 1 sub {str exch val put} for
str def
} bind def
/ic [
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0
{0 hx} {1 hx} {2 hx} {3 hx} {4 hx} {5 hx} {6 hx} {7 hx} {8 hx} {9 hx}
{10 hx} {11 hx} {12 hx} {13 hx} {14 hx} {15 hx} {16 hx} {17 hx} {18 hx}
{19 hx} {gn hx} {0} {1} {2} {3} {4} {5} {6} {7} {8} {9} {10} {11} {12}
{13} {14} {15} {16} {17} {18} {19} {gn} {0 wh} {1 wh} {2 wh} {3 wh}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 | /val FMLOCAL /ws FMLOCAL /im FMLOCAL /bs FMLOCAL /cs FMLOCAL /len FMLOCAL /pos FMLOCAL | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
/val FMLOCAL
/ws FMLOCAL
/im FMLOCAL
/bs FMLOCAL
/cs FMLOCAL
/len FMLOCAL
/pos FMLOCAL
/ms {
/sl exch def
/val 255 def
/ws cfs
/im cfs
/val 0 def
/bs cfs
/cs cfs
} bind def
400 ms
/ip {
is
0
cf cs readline pop
{ ic exch get exec
add
} forall
pop
} bind def
/wh {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
ws 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
} bind def
/bl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
bs 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
} bind def
/s1 1 string def
/fl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/val cf s1 readhexstring pop 0 get def
pos 1 pos len add 1 sub {im exch val put} for
pos len
} bind def
/hx {
3 copy getinterval
cf exch readhexstring pop pop
} bind def
/h FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/d FMLOCAL
/lb FMLOCAL
/bitmapsave FMLOCAL
/is FMLOCAL
/cf FMLOCAL
/wbytes {
dup
8 eq {pop} {1 eq {7 add 8 idiv} {3 add 4 idiv} ifelse} ifelse
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBWc {
1 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAYc {
8 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BITc {
2 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAPc {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBW {
1 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAY {
8 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BIT {
2 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAP {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/proc1 FMLOCAL
/proc2 FMLOCAL
/newproc FMLOCAL
/Fmcc {
/proc2 exch cvlit def
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
809 810 811 812 813 814 815 |
setcolortransfer
{pop 0} setundercolorremoval
{} setblackgeneration
} bind def
/tran FMLOCAL
/fakecolorsetup {
/tran 256 string def
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 |
setcolortransfer
{pop 0} setundercolorremoval
{} setblackgeneration
} bind def
/tran FMLOCAL
/fakecolorsetup {
/tran 256 string def
0 1 255 {/indx exch def
tran indx
red indx get 77 mul
green indx get 151 mul
blue indx get 28 mul
add add 256 idiv put} for
currenttransfer
{255 mul cvi tran exch get 255.0 div}
exch Fmcc settransfer
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLOR {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLORc {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLORc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {gip} {bip} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLOR {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop }
{ cf gis readhexstring pop }
{ cf bis readhexstring pop }
true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAYc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip gip bip w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/ww FMLOCAL
/r FMLOCAL
/g FMLOCAL
/b FMLOCAL
/i FMLOCAL
/gray {
/ww exch def
/b exch def
/g exch def
/r exch def
0 1 ww 1 sub { /i exch def r i get .299 mul g i get .587 mul
b i get .114 mul add add r i 3 -1 roll floor cvi put } for
r
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAY {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop
cf gis readhexstring pop
cf bis readhexstring pop w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAY {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAYc {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/ENDBITMAP {
} bind def
end
/ALDsave FMLOCAL
/ALDmatrix matrix def ALDmatrix currentmatrix pop
/StartALD {
/ALDsave save def
savematrix
ALDmatrix setmatrix
} bind def
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 | -0.27 ( binding, and) 457.95 580 P (a binding on) 152.1 567.89 T 5 F (<Control-a>) 204.57 567.89 T 3 F ( takes precedence over a binding on) 270.54 567.89 T 5 F | | | 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 | -0.27 ( binding, and) 457.95 580 P (a binding on) 152.1 567.89 T 5 F (<Control-a>) 204.57 567.89 T 3 F ( takes precedence over a binding on) 270.54 567.89 T 5 F (<KeyPress>.) 416.24 567.89 T 3 F -0.26 (The mechanism for con\337ict resolution is similar in Tk 4.0 except that one binding can) 170.1 555.89 P -0.35 (trigger for) 152.1 543.78 P 2 F -0.35 (each) 194.7 543.78 P 3 F -0.35 ( binding tag on the window where the event occurs. The bindings trigger in) 213.57 543.78 P |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 | 5 F (Control) 391.17 608.33 T 3 F (, or any combina-) 433.15 608.33 T (tion of them. If you wish for a binding not to trigger when a modi\336er is present, you can) 152.1 596.33 T (just de\336ne an empty binding for that modi\336er combination. For example,) 152.1 584.33 T 5 9 Q | | | | 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 |
5 F
(Control) 391.17 608.33 T
3 F
(, or any combina-) 433.15 608.33 T
(tion of them. If you wish for a binding not to trigger when a modi\336er is present, you can) 152.1 596.33 T
(just de\336ne an empty binding for that modi\336er combination. For example,) 152.1 584.33 T
5 9 Q
(bind .b <Control-ButtonPress-1> {# this script is a no-op}) 179.1 570 T
3 10 Q
(creates a binding that will trigger on mouse button presses when the) 152.1 556.33 T
5 F
(Control) 426.36 556.33 T
3 F
( key is) 468.34 556.33 T
-0.22 (down. If there is also a) 152.1 544.33 P
5 F
-0.52 (<ButtonPress-1>) 244.35 544.33 P
3 F
-0.22 ( binding for) 334.3 544.33 P
5 F
-0.52 (.b) 383.35 544.33 P
3 F
-0.22 (, it will no longer be invoked) 395.34 544.33 P
-0.02 (if the) 152.1 532.33 P
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tk_mac.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Kevin Walzer. '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Donal K. Fellows. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk::mac n 8.6 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Kevin Walzer. '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Donal K. Fellows. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH tk::mac n 8.6 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk::mac \- Access Mac-Specific Functionality on macOS from Tk .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR \fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR \fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR \fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR \fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | \fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR \fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR \fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR \fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR \fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR | < | > > > > > | 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 |
\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH "EVENT HANDLER CALLBACKS"
.PP
The Aqua/macOS application environment defines a number of additional
events that applications should respond to. These events are mapped by Tk to
calls to commands in the \fB::tk::mac\fR namespace; unless otherwise noted, if
the command is absent, no action will be taken.
.\" COMMAND: DoScriptFile
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptFile\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes a Tcl file when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with a file path as a parameter.
.\" COMMAND: DoScriptText
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::DoScriptText\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for AEDoScriptHandler. This command
executes Tcl code when an AppleScript sends a
.QW "do script"
command to Wish with Tcl code or a Tcl procedure as a parameter.
.\" COMMAND: ShowPreferences
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
.
The default Apple Event handler for kAEShowPreferences,
.QW pref .
The application menu
.QW "Preferences"
menu item is only enabled when this proc is defined. Typically this command is
used to wrap a specific own preferences command, which pops up a preferences
window. Something like:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::ShowPreferences {} {
setPref
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: OpenApplication
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined, this proc fill fire when your application
is initially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenApplication,
.QW oapp .
.\" COMMAND: ReopenApplication
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEReopenApplication,
.QW rapp ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is opened when it is already
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 |
} else {
wm deiconify .
}
raise .
}
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenDocuments,
.QW odoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to open one or more
documents (e.g., by drag & drop onto the app or by opening a document of a
type associated to the app). The proc should take as arguments paths to the
files to be opened, like so:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::OpenDocument {args} {
foreach f $args {my_open_document $f}
}
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEPrintDocuments,
.QW pdoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print a
document. It takes a single absolute file path as an argument.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEQuitApplication,
.QW quit ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
quit menu item in the application menu, the quit menu item in the Dock menu,
or during a logout/restart/shutdown etc. If this is not defined, \fBexit\fR is
called instead.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppHidden
event, e.g. via the hide menu item in the application or Dock menus.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppShown
event, e.g. via the show all menu item in the application menu, or by clicking
the Dock icon of a hidden application.
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
.
Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
platform-specific standard Help menu item
.QW "YourApp Help"
performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is
set).
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
.
Executes a Tcl procedure called from the macOS
.QW Services
menu in the Application menu item. The
.QW Services
| > > > > > > > | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 |
} else {
wm deiconify .
}
raise .
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: OpenDocument
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEOpenDocuments,
.QW odoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to open one or more
documents (e.g., by drag & drop onto the app or by opening a document of a
type associated to the app). The proc should take as arguments paths to the
files to be opened, like so:
.RS
.PP
.CS
proc ::tk::mac::OpenDocument {args} {
foreach f $args {my_open_document $f}
}
.CE
.RE
.\" COMMAND: PrintDocument
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEPrintDocuments,
.QW pdoc ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print a
document. It takes a single absolute file path as an argument.
.\" COMMAND: Quit
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
.
If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
kAEQuitApplication,
.QW quit ,
the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
quit menu item in the application menu, the quit menu item in the Dock menu,
or during a logout/restart/shutdown etc. If this is not defined, \fBexit\fR is
called instead.
.\" COMMAND: OnHide
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppHidden
event, e.g. via the hide menu item in the application or Dock menus.
.\" COMMAND: OnShow
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
.
If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppShown
event, e.g. via the show all menu item in the application menu, or by clicking
the Dock icon of a hidden application.
.\" COMMAND: ShowHelp
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
.
Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
platform-specific standard Help menu item
.QW "YourApp Help"
performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is
set).
.\" COMMAND: PerformService
.TP
\fB::tk::mac::PerformService\fR
.
Executes a Tcl procedure called from the macOS
.QW Services
menu in the Application menu item. The
.QW Services
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | the application's Info.plist file. The underlying code supporting this command also allows the text, entry and ttk::entry widgets to access services from other applications via the Services menu. The NSPortName key in Wish's Info.plist file is currently set as .QW "Wish" ; if a developer changes the name of the Wish executable to something else, this key should be modified with the same name. .TP \fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR . If defined, launches a URL within Tk. This would be used if a Tk application wants to handle a URL itself, such as displaying data from an RSS feed, rather than launching a default application to handle the URL, although it can defined as such. Wish includes a stub URL scheme of .QW foo:// | > | | | < < | > | | | > > > > | < > > > > > > > > | 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 | the application's Info.plist file. The underlying code supporting this command also allows the text, entry and ttk::entry widgets to access services from other applications via the Services menu. The NSPortName key in Wish's Info.plist file is currently set as .QW "Wish" ; if a developer changes the name of the Wish executable to something else, this key should be modified with the same name. .\" COMMAND: LaunchURL .TP \fB::tk::mac::LaunchURL \fIURL...\fR . If defined, launches a URL within Tk. This would be used if a Tk application wants to handle a URL itself, such as displaying data from an RSS feed, rather than launching a default application to handle the URL, although it can defined as such. Wish includes a stub URL scheme of .QW foo:// in the CFBundleURLSchemes key of its Info.plist file; this should be customized for the specific URL scheme the developer wants to support. .TP \fB::tk::mac::GetAppPath\fR . Returns the current applications's file path. .PP .SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS" .PP Aqua/macOS defines additional dialogs that applications should support. .\" COMMAND: standardAboutPanel .TP \fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR . Brings the standard Cocoa about panel to the front with information filled in from the application bundle files. The panel displays the application icon and the values associated to the info.plist keys named CFBundleName, CFBundleShortVersionString, NSAboutPanelOptionVersion and NSHumanReadableCopyright. If a file named \fICredits.html\fR or \fICredits.rtf\fR exists in the bundle's Resources directory then its contents will be displayed in a scrolling text box at the bottom of the dialog. See the documentation for -[NSApplication orderFrontStandardAboutPanelWithOptions:] for more details. A hook is also provided for a custom About dialog. If a Tcl proc named tkAboutDialog is defined in the main interpreter then that procedure will be called instead of opening the standardAboutPanel. .SH "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" .PP There are a number of additional global configuration options that control the details of how Tk renders by default. .\" COMMAND: useCompatibilityMetrics .TP \fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR . Preserves compatibility with older Tk/Aqua metrics; set to \fBfalse\fR for more native spacing. .\" COMMAND: CGAntialiasLimit .TP \fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR . Sets the antialiasing limit; lines thinner that \fIlimit\fR pixels will not be antialiased. Integer, set to 0 by default, making all lines be antialiased. .\" COMMAND: antialiasedtext .TP \fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR . Sets anti-aliased text. Controls text antialiasing, possible values for \fInumber\fR are -1 (default, use system default for text AA), 0 (no text AA), 1 (use text AA). .\" COMMAND: useThemedToplevel .TP \fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR . Sets toplevel windows to draw with the modern grayish/ pinstripe Mac background. Equivalent to configuring the toplevel with .QW "\fB\-background systemWindowHeaderBackground\fR" , or to using a \fBttk::frame\fR. .SH "SUPPORT COMMANDS" .\" COMMAND: iconBitmap .TP \fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR . Renders native icons and bitmaps in Tk applications (including any image file readable by NSImage). A native bitmap name is interpreted as follows (in order): .RS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 | .IP \(bu 3 NSImage url string .IP \(bu 3 4-char OSType of IconServices icon .PP The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR arguments to \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR define the dimensions of the image to create, and \fI\-kind\fR must be one of: .TP \fB\-file\fR . icon of file at given path .TP \fB\-fileType\fR . icon of given file type .TP \fB\-osType\fR . icon of given 4-char OSType file type .TP \fB\-systemType\fR . icon for given IconServices 4-char OSType .TP \fB\-namedImage\fR . named NSImage for given name .TP \fB\-imageFile\fR . image at given path .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), wm(n) .SH KEYWORDS about dialog, antialiasing, Apple event, icon, NSImage '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: | > > > > > > | 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | .IP \(bu 3 NSImage url string .IP \(bu 3 4-char OSType of IconServices icon .PP The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR arguments to \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR define the dimensions of the image to create, and \fI\-kind\fR must be one of: .\" OPTION: -file .TP \fB\-file\fR . icon of file at given path .\" OPTION: -fileType .TP \fB\-fileType\fR . icon of given file type .\" OPTION: -osType .TP \fB\-osType\fR . icon of given 4-char OSType file type .\" OPTION: -systemType .TP \fB\-systemType\fR . icon for given IconServices 4-char OSType .\" OPTION: -namedImage .TP \fB\-namedImage\fR . named NSImage for given name .\" OPTION: -imageFile .TP \fB\-imageFile\fR . image at given path .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), wm(n) .SH KEYWORDS about dialog, antialiasing, Apple event, icon, NSImage '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/tkvars.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors for widgets. .RS .PP | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors for widgets. .RS .PP The initial value of \fBtk_library\fR is set when Tk is added to an interpreter; this is done by searching several different directories until one is found that contains an appropriate Tk startup script. If the \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then the directory it names is checked first. If \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR is not set or does not refer to an appropriate directory, then Tk checks several other directories based on a compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory, |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/toplevel.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. | < < < < < < < < < < < | > > | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. .OP \-class class Class Specifies a class for the window. This class will be used when querying the option database for the window's other options, and it will also be used later for other purposes such as bindings. Some window managers display the class name for windows in their dock while some others display the window title. The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. .OP \-colormap colormap Colormap Specifies a colormap to use for the window. The value may be either \fBnew\fR, in which case a new colormap is created for the window and its children, or the name of another window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | Specifies the screen on which to place the new window. Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a different display. Defaults to the same screen as its parent. This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. | < < < < < < < < < | 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | Specifies the screen on which to place the new window. Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a different display. Defaults to the same screen as its parent. This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. .OP \-use use Use This option is used for embedding. If the value is not an empty string, it must be the window identifier of a container window, specified as a hexadecimal string like the ones returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command. The toplevel widget will be created as a child of the given container instead of the root window for the screen. If the container window is in a Tk application, it must be a frame or toplevel widget for |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | path name of the new window. .PP A toplevel is similar to a \fBframe\fR except that it is created as a top-level window: its X parent is the root window of a screen rather than the logical parent from its Tk path name. The primary purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes and other collections of widgets. The only visible features | | | | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | path name of the new window. .PP A toplevel is similar to a \fBframe\fR except that it is created as a top-level window: its X parent is the root window of a screen rather than the logical parent from its Tk path name. The primary purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes and other collections of widgets. The only visible features of a toplevel are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the toplevel appear raised or sunken. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtoplevel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the toplevel's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .PP .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the toplevel widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for toplevel widgets: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_button.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command A script to evaluate when the widget is invoked. .OP \-default default Default |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_combobox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values; the user may select the value of the text field from among the values in the list. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus | | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values; the user may select the value of the text field from among the values in the list. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .\" ALSO: Other entry widget options .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection Boolean value. If set, the widget selection is linked to the X selection. .OP \-justify justify Justify |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-postoffset\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Text entry select background. .RE \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_entry.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-style | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-style \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection A boolean value specifying whether or not a selection in the widget should be linked to the X selection. If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-selectborderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_frame.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | \fBttk::frame\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::frame\fR widget is a container, used to group other widgets together. .SO ttk_widget | | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | \fBttk::frame\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::frame\fR widget is a container, used to group other widgets together. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-padding \-style \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-borderwidth borderWidth BorderWidth The desired width of the widget border. Defaults to 0. May be ignored depending on the theme used. .OP \-relief relief Relief One of the standard Tk border styles: |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_image.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | or vertically (\fB\-sticky ns\fR), subregions of the image are replicated to fill the parcel based on the \fB\-border\fR option. The \fB\-border\fR divides the image into 9 regions: four fixed corners, top and left edges (which may be tiled horizontally), left and right edges (which may be tiled vertically), and the central area (which may be tiled in both directions). .SH "EXAMPLE" .PP .CS set img1 [image create photo \-file button.png] set img2 [image create photo \-file button-pressed.png] set img3 [image create photo \-file button-active.png] | > > > | | 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 |
or vertically (\fB\-sticky ns\fR),
subregions of the image are replicated to fill the parcel
based on the \fB\-border\fR option.
The \fB\-border\fR divides the image into 9 regions:
four fixed corners, top and left edges (which may be tiled horizontally),
left and right edges (which may be tiled vertically),
and the central area (which may be tiled in both directions).
.PP
An image element that is not meant to claim any space (for example when used
as a background image) should use \fB\-width 0\fR and \fB\-height 0\fR.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
.CS
set img1 [image create photo \-file button.png]
set img2 [image create photo \-file button-pressed.png]
set img3 [image create photo \-file button-active.png]
ttk::style element create Button.button image \e
[list $img1 pressed $img2 active $img3] \e
\-border {2 4} \-sticky we
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::intro(n), ttk::style(n), ttk_vsapi(n), image(n), photo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
style, theme, appearance, pixmap theme, image
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_intro.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
117 118 119 120 121 122 123 |
.PP
For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR
widget are:
.PP
.CS
bind TButton <Enter> { %W state active }
bind TButton <Leave> { %W state !active }
| | | 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
.PP
For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR
widget are:
.PP
.CS
bind TButton <Enter> { %W state active }
bind TButton <Leave> { %W state !active }
bind TButton <ButtonPress-1> { %W state pressed }
bind TButton <Button1-Leave> { %W state !pressed }
bind TButton <Button1-Enter> { %W state pressed }
bind TButton <ButtonRelease-1> \e
{ %W instate {pressed} { %W state !pressed ; %W invoke } }
.CE
.PP
This specifies that the widget becomes \fBactive\fR when
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_label.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image. The label may be linked to a Tcl variable to automatically change the displayed text. .SO ttk_widget | | | | | < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image. The label may be linked to a Tcl variable to automatically change the displayed text. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-padding \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in the widget is positioned relative to the inner margins. Legal values are \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, and \fBcenter\fR. See also \fB\-justify\fR. .OP \-background frameColor FrameColor The widget's background color. If unspecified, the theme default is used. .OP \-font font Font Font to use for label text. .OP \-foreground textColor TextColor The widget's foreground color. If unspecified, the theme default is used. .OP \-justify justify Justify If there are multiple lines of text, specifies how the lines are laid out relative to one another. One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR. See also \fB\-anchor\fR. .OP \-relief relief Relief .\" Rewrite this: Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget border. Valid values are \fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBsunken\fR. .OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_labelframe.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget is a container used to group other widgets together. It has an optional label, which may be a plain text string or another widget. .SO ttk_widget | | | | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget is a container used to group other widgets together. It has an optional label, which may be a plain text string or another widget. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-padding \-style \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .\" XXX: Currently included, but may go away: .\" XXX: .OP -borderwidth borderWidth BorderWidth .\" XXX: The desired width of the widget border. Default is theme-dependent. .\" XXX: .OP -relief relief Relief .\" XXX: One of the standard Tk border styles: |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_notebook.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-tabmargins\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 |
.br
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP
.br
\fB\-tabmargins\fP \fIpadding\fP
.br
\fB\-tabposition\fP \fIposition\fP
.RS
Specifies the position of the tab row or column as a string of length
1 or 2. The first character indicates the side as \fBn\fP, \fBs\fP,
\fBw\fP, or \fBe\fP, while the second character (if present) is the
sticky bit (specified as \fBw\fP, \fBe\fP, \fBn\fP, or \fBs\fP) within
the tab position. The default position is \fBn\fP for the \fBaqua\fP
theme and \fBnw\fP for all the other built-in themes.
.RE
.br
.PP
\fBTNotebook.Tab\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
.PP
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-compound\fP \fIcompound\fP
.br
\fB\-expand\fP \fIpadding\fP
.RS
Defines how much the tab grows in size. Usually used with the
\fBselected\fP dynamic state. \fB\-tabmargins\fP should be
set appropriately so that there is room for the tab growth.
For example, the Ttk library file \fBvistaTheme.tcl\fP contains
the lines
.CS
ttk::style configure TNotebook -tabmargins {2 2 2 0}
ttk::style map TNotebook.Tab -expand {selected {2 2 2 2}}
.CE
which are valid for the default value \fBnw\fP of the \fB\-tabposition\fP
style option. For a \fBttk::notebook\fP style \fBnbStyle\fP defined by
.CS
set nbStyle SW.TNotebook
ttk::style configure $nbStyle -tabposition sw
.CE
you will have to adapt the above settings as follows:
.CS
ttk::style configure $nbStyle -tabmargins {2 0 2 2}
ttk::style map $nbStyle.Tab -expand {selected {2 2 2 2}}
.CE
The easiest way to do this is to invoke the library procedure
\fBttk::configureNotebookStyle\fP with \fB$nbStyle\fP as argument, after
setting the style's \fB\-tabposition\fP option.
.RE
\fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP
.br
\fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP
.RS
Some themes use a different \fIpadding\fP for the selected tab. For example,
the Ttk library file \fBclamTheme.tcl\fP contains the lines
.CS
ttk::style configure TNotebook.Tab -padding {6 2 6 2}
ttk::style map TNotebook.Tab -padding {selected {6 4 6 2}}
.CE
which are valid for the default value \fBnw\fP of the \fB\-tabposition\fP
style option. For a \fBttk::notebook\fP style having a different tab position
you will have to adapt the above settings accordingly. Again, the easiest way
to do this is to invoke the library procedure \fBttk::configureNotebookStyle\fP
with the style name as argument, after setting the style's \fB\-tabposition\fP
option.
.RE
.PP
Some options are only available for specific themes.
.PP
See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure
ttk styles.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::widget(n), grid(n)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
pane, tab
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/ttk_panedwindow.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | .ta 5.5c 11c \fBcget\fR \fBconfigure\fR \fBinstate\fR \fBstate\fR .DE .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The panedwindow widget generates an \fB<<EnteredChild>>\fR virtual event on | | < < | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | .ta 5.5c 11c \fBcget\fR \fBconfigure\fR \fBinstate\fR \fBstate\fR .DE .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The panedwindow widget generates an \fB<<EnteredChild>>\fR virtual event on LeaveNotify/NotifyInferior events. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::panedwindow\fP is \fBTPanedwindow\fP. The sash has a class name of \fBSash\fP. .PP \fBTPanedwindow\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_progressbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and \fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know that something is happening. | < < < < < < | | < | < | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and \fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know that something is happening. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-length length Length Specifies the length of the long axis of the progress bar (width if horizontal, height if vertical). .OP \-maximum maximum Maximum A floating point number specifying the maximum \fB\-value\fR. Defaults to 100. .OP \-mode mode Mode One of \fBdeterminate\fR or \fBindeterminate\fR. .OP \-orient orient Orient One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scale.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | is omitted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTScale\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP. .PP | | | 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | is omitted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTScale\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP. .PP \fBTScale\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-borderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scrollbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. | > > > > > > > > < < < < < < < < | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units. The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget, such as characters or lines in a text widget. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit should scroll off the bottom or right of the window. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. .SH "WIDGET STATES" .PP The scrollbar automatically sets the \fBdisabled\fR state bit. when the entire range is visible (range is 0.0 to 1.0), and clears it otherwise. It also sets the \fBactive\fR and \fBpressed\fR state flags of individual elements, based on the position and state of the mouse pointer. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_sizegrip.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP Sizegrip widgets support the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR methods. No other widget methods are used. .SH "PLATFORM-SPECIFIC NOTES" .PP | | | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP Sizegrip widgets support the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR methods. No other widget methods are used. .SH "PLATFORM-SPECIFIC NOTES" .PP On macOS, toplevel windows automatically include a built-in size grip by default. Adding a \fBttk::sizegrip\fR there is harmless, since the built-in grip will just mask the widget. .SH EXAMPLES .PP Using pack: .CS |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_spinbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | A \fBttk::spinbox\fR widget is a \fBttk::entry\fR widget with built-in up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the \fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget to a Tcl variable. .SO ttk_widget | | | | 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | A \fBttk::spinbox\fR widget is a \fBttk::entry\fR widget with built-in up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the \fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget to a Tcl variable. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-state \-style \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand .SE .SO ttk_entry \-validate \-validatecommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked whenever a spinbutton is invoked. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_treeview.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | Returns the bounding box (relative to the treeview widget's window) of the specified \fIitem\fR in the form \fIx y width height\fR. If \fIcolumn\fR is specified, returns the bounding box of that cell. If the \fIitem\fR is not visible (i.e., if it is a descendant of a closed item or is scrolled offscreen), returns the empty list. .TP \fIpathname \fBcget \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBchildren \fIitem\fR ?\fInewchildren\fR? If \fInewchildren\fR is not specified, returns the list of children belonging to \fIitem\fR. | > > | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | Returns the bounding box (relative to the treeview widget's window) of the specified \fIitem\fR in the form \fIx y width height\fR. If \fIcolumn\fR is specified, returns the bounding box of that cell. If the \fIitem\fR is not visible (i.e., if it is a descendant of a closed item or is scrolled offscreen), returns the empty list. If the element is partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element, including any parts that are not visible. .TP \fIpathname \fBcget \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBchildren \fIitem\fR ?\fInewchildren\fR? If \fInewchildren\fR is not specified, returns the list of children belonging to \fIitem\fR. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 | Use \fIpathname heading #0\fR to configure the tree column heading. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position. The following subcommands are supported: .RS .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify region \fIx y\fR .RS Returns one of: .IP heading | > > | 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | Use \fIpathname heading #0\fR to configure the tree column heading. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position. The values \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. The following subcommands are supported: .RS .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify region \fIx y\fR .RS Returns one of: .IP heading |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
340 341 342 343 344 345 346 | .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR .RS .TP | < < < < < | | < < < < < < > > > > > | 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 | .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBtag bind \fItagName \fR?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIscript\fR? Add a Tk binding script for the event sequence \fIsequence\fR to the tag \fItagName\fR. When an X event is delivered to an item, binding scripts for each of the item's \fB\-tags\fR are evaluated in order as per \fIbindtags(n)\fR. .RS .PP \fB<KeyPress>\fR, \fB<KeyRelease>\fR, and virtual events are sent to the focus item. \fB<ButtonPress>\fR, \fB<ButtonRelease>\fR, and \fB<Motion>\fR events are sent to the item under the mouse pointer. No other event types are supported. .PP The binding \fIscript\fR undergoes \fB%\fR-substitutions before evaluation; see \fBbind(n)\fR for details. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag configure \fItagName\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value...\fR? Query or modify the options for the specified \fItagName\fR. If one or more \fIoption/value\fR pairs are specified, sets the value of those options for the specified tag. If a single \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that option (or the empty string if the option has not been specified for \fItagName\fR). With no additional arguments, returns a dictionary of the option settings for \fItagName\fR. See \fBTAG OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag has \fItagName\fR ?\fIitem\fR? If \fIitem\fR is specified, returns 1 or 0 depending on whether the specified item has the named tag. Otherwise, returns a list of all items which have the specified tag. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag names\fR Returns a list of all tags used by the widget. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag add \fItag items\fR Adds the specified \fItag\fR to each of the listed \fIitems\fR. If \fItag\fR is already present for a particular item, then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag remove \fItag\fR ?\fIitems\fR? Removes the specified \fItag\fR from each of the listed \fIitems\fR. If \fIitems\fR is omitted, removes \fItag\fR from each item in the tree. If \fItag\fR is not present for a particular item, then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged. .RE .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 | then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR. Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The treeview widget generates the following virtual events. .IP <<TreeviewSelect>> Generated whenever the selection changes. .IP <<TreeviewOpen>> Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR. .IP <<TreeviewClose>> Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. | > > > | 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR. Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The treeview widget generates the following virtual events. .IP <<TreeviewSelect>> Generated whenever the selection changes. It might also be generated when selection is affected but not actually changed. Further, multiple selection changes could happen before events can be processed leading to multiple events with the same visible selection. .IP <<TreeviewOpen>> Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR. .IP <<TreeviewClose>> Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 | \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIamount\fP .RS | > > > > > > > > | > | > > | | 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 | \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indent\fP \fIamount\fP .RS Specifies how far items are indented from their parents. Defaults to 20 pixels. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .RE .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIamount\fP .RS This is the standard height for an item. Defaults to 20 pixels. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If \fB\-rowheight\fP is not set by the style, it is set by measuring an item and a cell layout with the style's settings. This thus picks up the font and any focus ring or padding from the theme's layout. The \fB\-rowheight\fP may need to be set to make sure that a row is large enough to contain any images. .PP To adjust the \fB\-rowheight\fP for the Treeview style, use the following code after \fBtk scaling\fP has been applied. Note that even if you do not support or change \fBtk scaling\fP in your program, your users may have it set in their .wishrc. .RE .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_widget.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | .RE .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details. .SH "LABEL OPTIONS" The following options are supported by labels, buttons, and other button-like widgets: | < < < < < < | | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | .RE .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details. .SH "LABEL OPTIONS" The following options are supported by labels, buttons, and other button-like widgets: .OP \-compound compound Compound Specifies how to display the image relative to the text, in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present. If set to the empty string (the default), the rules described in the "Elements" section of \fIttk::intro(n)\fR explain which value is actually used. The other valid values are: .RS .IP text Display text only. .IP image Display image only. .IP center Display text centered on top of image. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | Specifies an image to display. This is a list of 1 or more elements. The first element is the default image name. The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when the widget is in a particular state or combination of states. All images in the list should have the same size. | < < < < < | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > | > > > > > > | > > > | < | | > < < > > > | > > > | | > < < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < > > | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 |
Specifies an image to display.
This is a list of 1 or more elements.
The first element is the default image name.
The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs
as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when
the widget is in a particular state or combination of states.
All images in the list should have the same size.
.OP \-padding padding Padding
Specifies the internal padding for the widget.
The padding is a list of up to four length specifications
\fIleft top right bottom\fR.
If fewer than four elements are specified,
\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right
padding; a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
.OP \-text text Text
Specifies a text string to be displayed inside the widget (unless overridden
by \fB\-textvariable\fR for the widgets supporting this option).
.OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable
Specifies the name of a global variable whose value will be used
in place of the \fB\-text\fR resource.
.OP \-underline underline Underline
If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline
in the text string.
The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation.
.OP \-width width Width
If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths,
to allocate for the text label.
If less than zero, specifies a minimum width.
If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used.
.SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS"
This option is only available for themed widgets that have
.QW corresponding
traditional Tk widgets.
.OP \-state state State
May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR
to control the \fBdisabled\fR state bit.
This is a write-only option:
setting it changes the widget state,
but the \fBstate\fR widget command
does not affect the \fB\-state\fR option.
.SH COMMANDS
.\" METHOD: cget
.TP
\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
.
Returns the current value of the configuration option given
by \fIoption\fR.
.\" METHOD: configure
.TP
\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
.
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified,
then the command modifies the given widget option(s)
to have the given value(s);
in this case the command returns an empty string.
If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR,
then the command returns a list describing the named option:
the elements of the list are the
option name, database name, database class, default value,
and current value.
.\" Note: Ttk widgets don't use TK_OPTION_SYNONYM.
If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
the available options for \fIpathName\fR.
.\" METHOD: identify
.TP
\fIpathName \fBidentify element \fIx y\fR
.
Returns the name of the element under the point given
by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or an empty string if the point does
not lie within any element.
\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are pixel coordinates relative to the widget.
Some widgets accept other \fBidentify\fR subcommands described
in these widgets documentation.
.\" METHOD: instate
.TP
\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
.
Test the widget's state.
If \fIscript\fR is not specified, returns 1 if
the widget state matches \fIstatespec\fR and 0 otherwise.
If \fIscript\fR is specified, equivalent to
.CS
if {[\fIpathName\fR instate \fIstateSpec\fR]} \fIscript\fR
.CE
.\" METHOD: state
.TP
\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
.
Modify or inquire widget state.
If \fIstateSpec\fR is present, sets the widget state:
for each flag in \fIstateSpec\fR, sets the corresponding flag
or clears it if prefixed by an exclamation point.
.RS
Returns a new state spec indicating which flags were changed:
.CS
set changes [\fIpathName \fRstate \fIspec\fR]
\fIpathName \fRstate $changes
.CE
will restore \fIpathName\fR to the original state.
If \fIstateSpec\fR is not specified,
returns a list of the currently-enabled state flags.
.RE
.\" METHOD: xview
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
content in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
.
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the widget's content is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the content is off-screen to the right.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview\fI index\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the content given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the left edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the content appears at the left edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right
become visible.
.RE
.\" METHOD: yview
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR
.
This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
content in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
forms:
.RS
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fR
.
Returns a list containing two elements.
Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
the vertical span that is visible in the window.
For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
20% of the widget's content is off-screen to the top, the middle 40% is visible
in the window, and 40% of the content is off-screen to the bottom.
These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR
option.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview\fI index\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the content given by \fIindex\fR
is displayed at the top edge of the window.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR
.
Adjusts the view in the window so that the item \fIfraction\fR of the
way through the content appears at the top edge of the window.
\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
.TP
\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
.
This command shifts the view in the window up or down according to
\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by
\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
If \fInumber\fR is negative then items farther to the top
become visible; if it is positive then items farther to the bottom
become visible.
.RE
.SH "WIDGET STATES"
The widget state is a bitmap of independent state flags.
Widget state flags include:
.IP \fBactive\fR
The mouse cursor is over the widget
and pressing a mouse button will cause some action to occur. (aka
.QW prelight
(Gnome),
.QW hot
(Windows),
.QW hover ).
.IP \fBdisabled\fR
Widget is disabled under program control (aka
.QW unavailable ,
.QW inactive ).
.IP \fBfocus\fR
Widget has keyboard focus.
.IP \fBpressed\fR
Widget is being pressed (aka
.QW armed
in Motif).
.IP \fBselected\fR
.QW On ,
.QW true ,
or
.QW current
for things like checkbuttons and radiobuttons.
.IP \fBbackground\fR
Windows and the Mac have a notion of an
.QW active
or foreground window.
The \fBbackground\fR state is set for widgets in a background window,
and cleared for those in the foreground window.
.IP \fBreadonly\fR
Widget should not allow user modification.
.IP \fBalternate\fR
A widget-specific alternate display format.
For example, used for checkbuttons and radiobuttons in the
.QW tristate
or
.QW mixed
state, and for buttons with \fB\-default active\fR.
.IP \fBinvalid\fR
The widget's value is invalid.
(Potential uses: scale widget value out of bounds,
entry widget value failed validation.)
.IP \fBhover\fR
The mouse cursor is within the widget.
This is similar to the \fBactive\fP state;
it is used in some themes for widgets that
provide distinct visual feedback for
the active widget in addition to the active element
within the widget.
.IP \fBuser1\fR-\fBuser3\fR
Freely usable for other purposes
.PP
A \fIstate specification\fR or \fIstateSpec\fR is a list
of state names, optionally prefixed with an exclamation point (!)
indicating that the bit is off.
.SH EXAMPLES
.CS
set b [ttk::button .b]
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/winfo.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows managed by Tk. It can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/wish.1.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS | | > > > > > > > > > | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 | .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fBoptions\fR? ?\fIfileName arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS .\" OPTION: -encoding .IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20 Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR. This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument. .\" OPTION: -colormap .IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20 Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of using the default colormap for the screen. .\" OPTION: -display .IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20 Display (and screen) on which to display window. .\" OPTION: -geometry .IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20 Initial geometry to use for window. If this option is specified, its value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's Tcl interpreter. .\" OPTION: -name .IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20 Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands. .\" OPTION: -sync .IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20 Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors are reported immediately. This will result in much slower execution, but it is useful for debugging. .\" OPTION: -use .IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20 Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an independent toplevel window. \fIId\fR must be specified in the same way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e. it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command). .RS Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its \fB\-container\fR option enabled. .RE .\" OPTION: -visual .IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20 Specifies the visual to use for the window. \fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR procedure. .\" OPTION: -- .IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20 Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR variable without interpreting them. This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP | | > > > > > > > > > > | 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 | .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP \fBWish\fR sets the following global Tcl variables: .\" VARIABLE: argc .TP 15 \fBargc\fR . Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none), not including the options described above. .\" VARIABLE: argv .TP 15 \fBargv\fR . Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string if there are no such arguments. .\" VARIABLE: argv0 .TP 15 \fBargv0\fR . Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified. Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. .\" VARIABLE: geometry .TP 15 \fBgeometry\fR . If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its value into this variable. If the variable still exists after \fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main window's geometry. .\" VARIABLE: tcl_interactive .TP 15 \fBtcl_interactive\fR . Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like device), 0 otherwise. .SH "SCRIPT FILES" .PP If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is .CS |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/wm.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wm \- Communicate with window manager .SH SYNOPSIS | | > > > > | > > > > | > > > | | > | > < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < > | > > | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 |
.TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
wm \- Communicate with window manager
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBwm\fI option window \fR?\fIargs\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBwm\fR command is used to interact with window managers in
order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry,
or the increments in terms of which it may be resized. The \fBwm\fR
command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on
the \fIoption\fR argument. All of the forms expect at least one
additional argument, \fIwindow\fR, which must be the path name of a
top-level window.
.PP
The legal forms for the \fBwm\fR command are:
.\" METHOD: aspect
.TP
\fBwm aspect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIminNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom\fR?
.
If \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager
and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of
acceptable aspect ratios for \fIwindow\fR. The aspect ratio of
\fIwindow\fR (width/length) will be constrained to lie
between \fIminNumer\fR/\fIminDenom\fR and \fImaxNumer\fR/\fImaxDenom\fR.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed.
If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are specified, then the command returns an
empty string. Otherwise, it returns
a Tcl list containing four elements, which are the current values
of \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
(if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is
returned).
.\" METHOD: attributes
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
.TP
\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
.
This subcommand returns or sets platform specific attributes associated
with a window. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
values are as follows:
.RS
.PP
All platforms support the following attributes (though X11 users
should see the notes below):
.\" OPTION: -alpha
.TP
\fB\-alpha\fR
.
Specifies the alpha transparency level of the toplevel. It accepts a value
from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque). Values outside that
range will be constrained. Where not supported, the \fB\-alpha\fR value
remains at \fB1.0\fR.
.\" OPTION: -fullscreen
.TP
\fB\-fullscreen\fR
.
Places the window in a mode that takes up the entire screen, has no
borders, and covers the general use area (i.e. Start menu and taskbar on
Windows, dock and menubar on macOS, general window decorations on X11).
.\" OPTION: -topmost
.TP
\fB\-topmost\fR
.
Specifies whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows).
.PP
On Windows, the following attributes may be set.
.\" OPTION: -disabled
.TP
\fB\-disabled\fR
.
Specifies whether the window is in a disabled state.
.\" OPTION: -toolwindow
.TP
\fB\-toolwindow\fR
.
Specifies a toolwindow style window (as defined in the MSDN).
.\" OPTION: -transparentcolor
.TP
\fB\-transparentcolor\fR
.
Specifies the transparent color index of the toplevel. It takes any color
value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If the empty string is specified
(default), no transparent color is used. This is supported on Windows
2000/XP+. Where not supported, the \fB\-transparentcolor\fR value remains
at \fB{}\fR.
.PP
On macOS, the following attributes may be set.
.\" OPTION: -modified
.TP
\fB\-modified\fR
.
Specifies the modification state of the window (determines whether the
window close widget contains the modification indicator and whether the
proxy icon is draggable).
.\" OPTION: -notify
.TP
\fB\-notify\fR
.
Specifies process notification state (bouncing of the application dock icon).
.\" OPTION: -titlepath
.TP
\fB\-titlepath\fR
.
Specifies the path of the file referenced as the window proxy icon
(which can be dragged and dropped in lieu of the file's finder icon).
.\" OPTION: -transparent
.TP
\fB\-transparent\fR
.
Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For
the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a
color with some alpha, e.g.
.QW systemTransparent .
.PP
On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all
window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs.
.\" See https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/wm-spec/
.\" OPTION: -type
.TP
\fB\-type\fR
.VS 8.6
Requests that the window should be interpreted by the window manager as being
of the specified type(s). This may cause the window to be decorated in a
different way or otherwise managed differently, though exactly what happens is
entirely up to the window manager. A list of types may be used, in order of
preference. The following values are mapped to constants defined in the EWMH
specification (using others is possible, but not advised):
.RS
.IP \fBdesktop\fR
indicates a desktop feature,
.IP \fBdock\fR
indicates a dock/panel feature,
.IP \fBtoolbar\fR
indicates a toolbar window that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.IP \fBmenu\fR
indicates a torn-off menu that should be acting on behalf of another window,
as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.IP \fButility\fR
indicates a utility window (e.g., palette or toolbox) that should be acting on
behalf of another window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.IP \fBsplash\fR
indicates a splash screen, displayed during application start up,
.IP \fBdialog\fR
indicates a general dialog window, that should be acting on behalf of another
window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
.IP \fBdropdown_menu\fR
indicates a menu summoned from a menu bar, which should usually also be set to
be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBpopup_menu\fR
indicates a popup menu, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBtooltip\fR
indicates a tooltip window, which should usually also be set to be
override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBnotification\fR
indicates a window that provides a background notification of some event,
which should usually also be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm
overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBcombo\fR
indicates the drop-down list of a combobox widget, which should usually also
be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBdnd\fR
indicates a window that represents something being dragged, which should
usually also be set to be override-redirected (with
\fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
.IP \fBnormal\fR
indicates a window that has no special interpretation.
.RE
.VE 8.6
.\" OPTION: -zoomed
.TP
\fB\-zoomed\fR
.
Requests that the window should be maximized. This is the same as \fBwm state
zoomed\fR on Windows and macOS.
.PP
On X11, changes to window attributes are performed asynchronously. Querying
the value of an attribute returns the current state, which will not be the
same as the value most recently set if the window manager has not yet
processed the request or if it does not support the attribute.
.RE
.\" METHOD: client
.TP
\fBwm client \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR?
.
If \fIname\fR is specified, this command stores \fIname\fR (which
should be the name of
the host on which the application is executing) in \fIwindow\fR's
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property for use by the window manager or
session manager.
The command returns an empty string in this case.
If \fIname\fR is not specified, the command returns the last name
set in a \fBwm client\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
If \fIname\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the
\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.
.\" METHOD: colormapwindows
.TP
\fBwm colormapwindows \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindowList\fR?
.
This command is used to manipulate the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
property, which provides information to the window managers about
windows that have private colormaps.
.RS
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 | If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level itself; the order of the internal windows is undefined. See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property. .RE .TP \fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR? . If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or session manager and returns an empty string. \fIValue\fR must have proper list structure; the elements should contain the words of the command used to invoke the application. If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR. If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR . Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form. This is done by mapping the window. If the window has never been mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed in de-iconified form. On Windows, a deiconified window will also be raised and be given the focus (made the active window). Returns an empty string. .TP \fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR? . If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the command returns an empty string. If no additional argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus model for \fIwindow\fR. .RS .PP An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when the focus is currently in some other application. \fBPassive\fR means that \fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself: the window manager should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times. However, once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants, the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants. The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command assumes a passive model of focusing. .RE .TP \fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR . The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer be managed by \fBwm\fR. Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again. .TP \fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR . If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the window whose parent is the root or virtual root). If \fIwindow\fR has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR? . If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR is changed and an empty string is returned. Otherwise the current geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent geometry specified either by manual resizing or | > > > > > > | 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 | If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level itself; the order of the internal windows is undefined. See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property. .RE .\" METHOD: command .TP \fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR? . If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or session manager and returns an empty string. \fIValue\fR must have proper list structure; the elements should contain the words of the command used to invoke the application. If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR. If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR. .\" METHOD: deiconify .TP \fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR . Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form. This is done by mapping the window. If the window has never been mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed in de-iconified form. On Windows, a deiconified window will also be raised and be given the focus (made the active window). Returns an empty string. .\" METHOD: focusmodel .TP \fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR? . If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the command returns an empty string. If no additional argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus model for \fIwindow\fR. .RS .PP An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when the focus is currently in some other application. \fBPassive\fR means that \fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself: the window manager should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times. However, once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants, the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants. The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command assumes a passive model of focusing. .RE .\" METHOD: forget .TP \fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR . The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer be managed by \fBwm\fR. Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again. .\" METHOD: frame .TP \fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR . If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the window whose parent is the root or virtual root). If \fIwindow\fR has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR. .\" METHOD: geometry .TP \fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR? . If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR is changed and an empty string is returned. Otherwise the current geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent geometry specified either by manual resizing or |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 | actual size and location of \fIwindow\fR, whereas \fBwm geometry\fR allows both setting and querying of the \fIwindow manager\fR's understanding of the size and location of the window. This can vary significantly, for example to reflect the addition of decorative elements to \fIwindow\fR such as title bars, and window managers are not required to precisely follow the requests made through this command. .RE .TP \fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR? . This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a gridded window. It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units. \fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid | > | 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 | actual size and location of \fIwindow\fR, whereas \fBwm geometry\fR allows both setting and querying of the \fIwindow manager\fR's understanding of the size and location of the window. This can vary significantly, for example to reflect the addition of decorative elements to \fIwindow\fR such as title bars, and window managers are not required to precisely follow the requests made through this command. .RE .\" METHOD: grid .TP \fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR? . This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a gridded window. It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units. \fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
387 388 389 390 391 392 393 | .PP Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR, \fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR; if \fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string is returned. .PP | | > > | 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 | .PP Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR, \fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR; if \fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string is returned. .PP Note that this command should not be needed very often, since the \fBTk_SetGrid\fR library procedure and the \fBsetGrid\fR option provide easier access to the same functionality. .RE .\" METHOD: group .TP \fBwm group \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR? . If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it gives the path name for the leader of a group of related windows. The window manager may use this information, for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's leader is iconified. \fIPathName\fR may be specified as an empty string to remove \fIwindow\fR from any group association. If \fIpathName\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string; otherwise it returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current group leader, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not part of any group. .\" METHOD: iconbitmap .TP \fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR? . If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details). This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed in \fIwindow\fR's icon, and the command returns an empty string. If |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 | any file which contains a valid Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any file for which the shell has assigned an icon. Tcl will first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned icon, and finally, if that fails, test for a bitmap. .RE .TP \fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR . Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified. It \fIwindow\fR has not yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped. .TP \fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR? . If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details). This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option: where the mask has zeroes no icon will be displayed; where it has ones, the bits from the icon bitmap will be displayed. If an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying a bitmap of all ones). If \fIbitmap\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns the name of the current icon mask associated with \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect. .TP \fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR? . If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window manager; the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR. In this case an empty string is returned as result. If \fInewName\fR is not specified then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this case the window manager will normally display the window's title, as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command). .TP \fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR? . Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images. If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created toplevels as well. The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the time of invocation. If the images are later changed, this is not | > > > > | 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 | any file which contains a valid Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any file for which the shell has assigned an icon. Tcl will first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned icon, and finally, if that fails, test for a bitmap. .RE .\" METHOD: iconify .TP \fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR . Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified. It \fIwindow\fR has not yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped. .\" METHOD: iconmask .TP \fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR? . If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details). This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option: where the mask has zeroes no icon will be displayed; where it has ones, the bits from the icon bitmap will be displayed. If an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying a bitmap of all ones). If \fIbitmap\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns the name of the current icon mask associated with \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect. .\" METHOD: iconname .TP \fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR? . If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window manager; the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR. In this case an empty string is returned as result. If \fInewName\fR is not specified then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this case the window manager will normally display the window's title, as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command). .\" METHOD: iconphoto .TP \fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR? . Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images. If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created toplevels as well. The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the time of invocation. If the images are later changed, this is not |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | vice versa. .PP On X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property, which most modern window managers support. A \fBwm iconbitmap\fR may exist simultaneously. It is recommended to use not more than 2 icons, placing the larger icon first. .PP | | > > | > > > > > > | 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 | vice versa. .PP On X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property, which most modern window managers support. A \fBwm iconbitmap\fR may exist simultaneously. It is recommended to use not more than 2 icons, placing the larger icon first. .PP On Macintosh, the first image called is loaded into an OS-native icon format, and becomes the application icon in dialogs, the Dock, and other contexts. At the script level the command will accept only the first image passed in the parameters as support for multiple sizes/resolutions on macOS is outside Tk's scope. Developers should use the largest icon they can support (preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac. .RE .\" METHOD: iconposition .TP \fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR? . If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR. In this case an empty string is returned. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled. If neither \fIx\fR nor \fIy\fR is specified, then the command returns a Tcl list containing two values, which are the current icon position hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned). .\" METHOD: iconwindow .TP \fBwm iconwindow \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR? . If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it is the path name for a window to use as icon for \fIwindow\fR: when \fIwindow\fR is iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be mapped to serve as icon, and when \fIwindow\fR is de-iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be unmapped again. If \fIpathName\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing icon window association for \fIwindow\fR will be cancelled. If the \fIpathName\fR argument is specified then an empty string is returned. Otherwise the command returns the path name of the current icon window for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if there is no icon window currently specified for \fIwindow\fR. Button press events are disabled for \fIwindow\fR as long as it is an icon window; this is needed in order to allow window managers to .QW own those events. Note that not all window managers support the notion of an icon window, and the concept is entirely meaningless on non-X11 platforms. .\" METHOD: manage .TP \fBwm manage \fIwidget\fR . The \fIwidget\fR specified will become a stand alone top-level window. The window will be decorated with the window managers title bar, etc. Only \fIframe\fR, \fIlabelframe\fR and \fItoplevel\fR widgets can be used with this command. Attempting to pass any other widget type will raise an error. Attempting to manage a \fItoplevel\fR widget is benign and achieves nothing. See also \fBGEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR. .\" METHOD: maxsize .TP \fBwm maxsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? . If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the maximum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR. For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in grid units; otherwise they are specified in pixel units. The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be less than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the maximum width and height currently in effect. The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen. See the sections on geometry management below for more information. .\" METHOD: minsize .TP \fBwm minsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? . If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the minimum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR. For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in grid units; otherwise they are specified in pixel units. The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be greater than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the minimum width and height currently in effect. The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension. See the sections on geometry management below for more information. .\" METHOD: overrideredirect .TP \fBwm overrideredirect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR? . If \fIboolean\fR is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and the override-redirect flag for \fIwindow\fR is set to that value. If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then \fB1\fR or \fB0\fR is returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag is currently set for \fIwindow\fR. Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes it to be ignored by the window manager; among other things, this means that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the window using the normal window manager mechanisms. .RS .PP Note that the override-redirect flag is only guaranteed to be taken notice of when the window is first mapped or when mapped after the state is changed from withdrawn to normal. Some, but not all, platforms will take notice at additional times. .RE .\" METHOD: positionfrom .TP \fBwm positionfrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR? . If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or \fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two. It indicates whether \fIwindow\fR's current position was requested by the program or by the user. Many window managers ignore program-requested |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 | source of the window's current position, or an empty string if no source has been specified yet. Most window managers interpret .QW "no source" as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR. .TP \fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? . | > | < | | | | | | | | > | | | < | | | | | | < > | > > | > > | > > > > | > > | > > | > | > > > > > | | > > > | | 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 | source of the window's current position, or an empty string if no source has been specified yet. Most window managers interpret .QW "no source" as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR. .\" METHOD: protocol .TP \fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? . This command is used to manage window manager protocols. The \fIname\fR argument in the \fBwm protocol\fR command is the name of an atom corresponding to a window manager protocol. Examples include \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR. .RS .PP A \fIwindow manager protocol\fR is a class of messages sent from a window manager to a Tk application outside of the normal event processing system. The main example is the \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR protocol; these messages are sent when the user clicks the close widget in the title bar of a window. Handlers for window manager protocols are installed with the \fBwm protocol\fR command. As a rule, if no handler has been installed for a protocol by the \fBwm protocol\fR command then all messages of that protocol are ignored. The \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR protocol is an exception to this rule. At start-up Tk installs a handler for this protocol, which responds by destroying the window. The \fBwm protocol\fR command can be used to replace this default handler by one which responds differently. .RE .RS .PP The list of available window manager protocols depends on the window manager, but all window managers supported by Tk provide \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR. On the Windows platform, a \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR message is sent on user logout or system restart. .RE .RS .PP If both \fIname\fR and \fIcommand\fR are specified, then \fIcommand\fR becomes the handler for the protocol specified by \fIname\fR. The atom for \fIname\fR will be added to \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property to tell the window manager that the application has a handler for the protocol specified by \fIname\fR, and \fIcommand\fR will be invoked in the future whenever the window manager sends a message of that protocol to the Tk application. In this case the \fBwm protocol\fR command returns an empty string. If \fIname\fR is specified but \fIcommand\fR is not, then the current handler for \fIname\fR is returned, or an empty string if there is no handler defined for \fIname\fR (as a special case, the default handler for \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR is not returned). If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the atom for \fIname\fR is removed from the \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property of \fIwindow\fR and the handler is destroyed; an empty string is returned. Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the \fBwm protocol\fR command returns a list of all of the protocols for which handlers are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR. .RE .\" METHOD: resizable .TP \fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? . This command controls whether or not the user may interactively resize a top-level window. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the width and height of \fIwindow\fR may be modified by the user. In this case the command returns an empty string. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are omitted then the command returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the width and height of \fIwindow\fR are currently resizable. By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions. If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size from the most recent interactive resize or \fBwm geometry\fR command. If there has been no such operation then the window's natural size will be used. .\" METHOD: sizefrom .TP \fBwm sizefrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR? . If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or \fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two. It indicates whether \fIwindow\fR's current size was requested by the program or by the user. Some window managers ignore program-requested sizes and ask the user to manually size the window; if \fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should give the window its specified size without asking the user for assistance. If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current size source is cancelled. If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBwindow\fR to indicate the source of the window's current size, or an empty string if no source has been specified yet. Most window managers interpret .QW "no source" as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. .\" METHOD: stackorder .TP \fBwm stackorder \fIwindow\fR ?\fBisabove\fR|\fBisbelow \fIwindow\fR? . The \fBstackorder\fR command returns a list of toplevel windows in stacking order, from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all of the window's children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels that are currently mapped to the screen are returned. The \fBstackorder\fR command can also be used to determine if one toplevel is positioned above or below a second toplevel. When two window arguments separated by either \fBisabove\fR or \fBisbelow\fR are passed, a boolean result indicates whether or not the first window is currently above or below the second window in the stacking order. .\" METHOD: state .TP \fBwm state \fIwindow\fR ?newstate? . If \fInewstate\fR is specified, the window will be set to the new state, otherwise it returns the current state of \fIwindow\fR: either \fBnormal\fR, \fBiconic\fR, \fBwithdrawn\fR, \fBicon\fR, or (Windows and macOS only) \fBzoomed\fR. The difference between \fBiconic\fR and \fBicon\fR is that \fBiconic\fR refers to a window that has been iconified (e.g., with the \fBwm iconify\fR command) while \fBicon\fR refers to a window whose only purpose is to serve as the icon for some other window (via the \fBwm iconwindow\fR command). The \fBicon\fR state cannot be set. .\" METHOD: title .TP \fBwm title \fIwindow\fR ?\fIstring\fR? . If \fIstring\fR is specified, then it will be passed to the window manager for use as the title for \fIwindow\fR (the window manager should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar). In this case the command returns an empty string. If \fIstring\fR is not specified then the command returns the current title for the \fIwindow\fR. The title for a window defaults to its name. .\" METHOD: transient .TP \fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fIcontainer\fR? . If \fIcontainer\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed that \fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working on behalf of \fIcontainer\fR (where \fIcontainer\fR is the path name for a top-level window). If \fIcontainer\fR is specified as an empty string then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not being a transient window any more. Otherwise the command returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current container, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a transient window. A transient window will mirror state changes in the container and inherit the state of the container when initially mapped. The directed graph with an edge from each transient to its container must be acyclic. In particular, it is an error to attempt to make a window a transient of itself. The window manager may also decorate a transient window differently, removing some features normally present (e.g., minimize and maximize buttons) though this is entirely at the discretion of the window manager. .\" METHOD: widthdraw .TP \fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR . Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen. This causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window manager. If the window has never been mapped, then this command causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state. Not all window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are mapped in the withdrawn state. Note that it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a window and then re-map it (e.g. with \fBwm deiconify\fR) to get some window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes such as group. .SH "GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT" .PP By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its \fInatural size\fR, which is the one determined internally by its |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | \fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0 .CE .PP A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen: .CS # Create and arrange the dialog contents. toplevel .msg | | | | | | | | > | 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 |
\fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0
.CE
.PP
A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen:
.CS
# Create and arrange the dialog contents.
toplevel .msg
label .msg.l -text "This is a very simple dialog demo."
button .msg.ok -text OK -default active -command {destroy .msg}
pack .msg.ok -side bottom -fill x
pack .msg.l -expand 1 -fill both
# Now set the widget up as a centred dialog.
# But first, we need the geometry managers to finish setting
# up the interior of the dialog, for which we need to run the
# event loop with the widget hidden completely...
\fBwm withdraw\fR .msg
update
set x [expr {([winfo screenwidth .] - [winfo width .msg]) / 2}]
set y [expr {([winfo screenheight .] - [winfo height .msg]) / 2}]
\fBwm geometry\fR .msg +$x+$y
\fBwm transient\fR .msg .
\fBwm title\fR .msg "Dialog demo"
\fBwm deiconify\fR .msg
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
toplevel(n), winfo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify,
increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to generic/ks_names.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
{ "Linefeed", 0xFF0A },
{ "Clear", 0xFF0B },
{ "Return", 0xFF0D },
{ "Pause", 0xFF13 },
{ "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 },
{ "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 },
{ "Escape", 0xFF1B },
| < < < < < > > > > > > | > > > > > | | > | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 |
{ "Linefeed", 0xFF0A },
{ "Clear", 0xFF0B },
{ "Return", 0xFF0D },
{ "Pause", 0xFF13 },
{ "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 },
{ "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 },
{ "Escape", 0xFF1B },
{ "Multi_key", 0xFF20 },
{ "Kanji", 0xFF21 },
{ "Muhenkan", 0xFF22 },
{ "Henkan_Mode", 0xFF23 },
{ "Henkan", 0xFF23 },
{ "Romaji", 0xFF24 },
{ "Hiragana", 0xFF25 },
{ "Katakana", 0xFF26 },
{ "Hiragana_Katakana", 0xFF27 },
{ "Zenkaku", 0xFF28 },
{ "Hankaku", 0xFF29 },
{ "Zenkaku_Hankaku", 0xFF2A },
{ "Touroku", 0xFF2B },
{ "Massyo", 0xFF2C },
{ "Kana_Lock", 0xFF2D },
{ "Kana_Shift", 0xFF2E },
{ "Eisu_Shift", 0xFF2F },
{ "Eisu_toggle", 0xFF30 },
{ "Hangul", 0xFF31 },
{ "Hangul_Start", 0xFF32 },
{ "Hangul_End", 0xFF33 },
{ "Hangul_Hanja", 0xFF34 },
{ "Hangul_Jamo", 0xFF35 },
{ "Hangul_Romaja", 0xFF36 },
{ "Codeinput", 0xFF37 },
{ "Hangul_Jeonja", 0xFF38 },
{ "Hangul_Banja", 0xFF39 },
{ "Hangul_PreHanja", 0xFF3A },
{ "Hangul_PostHanja", 0xFF3B },
{ "SingleCandidate", 0xFF3C },
{ "MultipleCandidate", 0xFF3D },
{ "PreviousCandidate", 0xFF3E },
{ "Hangul_Special", 0xFF3F },
{ "Home", 0xFF50 },
{ "Left", 0xFF51 },
{ "Up", 0xFF52 },
{ "Right", 0xFF53 },
{ "Down", 0xFF54 },
{ "Prior", 0xFF55 },
{ "Page_Up", 0xFF55 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 |
{ "Menu", 0xFF67 },
{ "Find", 0xFF68 },
{ "Cancel", 0xFF69 },
{ "Help", 0xFF6A },
{ "Break", 0xFF6B },
{ "Mode_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "script_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Num_Lock", 0xFF7F },
{ "KP_Space", 0xFF80 },
{ "KP_Tab", 0xFF89 },
{ "KP_Enter", 0xFF8D },
{ "KP_F1", 0xFF91 },
{ "KP_F2", 0xFF92 },
{ "KP_F3", 0xFF93 },
| > > > > | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 |
{ "Menu", 0xFF67 },
{ "Find", 0xFF68 },
{ "Cancel", 0xFF69 },
{ "Help", 0xFF6A },
{ "Break", 0xFF6B },
{ "Mode_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "script_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "kana_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Arabic_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Greek_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Hebrew_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Num_Lock", 0xFF7F },
{ "KP_Space", 0xFF80 },
{ "KP_Tab", 0xFF89 },
{ "KP_Enter", 0xFF8D },
{ "KP_F1", 0xFF91 },
{ "KP_F2", 0xFF92 },
{ "KP_F3", 0xFF93 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 |
{ "KP_Page_Up", 0xFF9A },
{ "KP_Next", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_Page_Down", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_End", 0xFF9C },
{ "KP_Begin", 0xFF9D },
{ "KP_Insert", 0xFF9E },
{ "KP_Delete", 0xFF9F },
| < > | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
{ "KP_Page_Up", 0xFF9A },
{ "KP_Next", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_Page_Down", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_End", 0xFF9C },
{ "KP_Begin", 0xFF9D },
{ "KP_Insert", 0xFF9E },
{ "KP_Delete", 0xFF9F },
{ "KP_Multiply", 0xFFAA },
{ "KP_Add", 0xFFAB },
{ "KP_Separator", 0xFFAC },
{ "KP_Subtract", 0xFFAD },
{ "KP_Decimal", 0xFFAE },
{ "KP_Divide", 0xFFAF },
{ "KP_0", 0xFFB0 },
{ "KP_1", 0xFFB1 },
{ "KP_2", 0xFFB2 },
{ "KP_3", 0xFFB3 },
{ "KP_4", 0xFFB4 },
{ "KP_5", 0xFFB5 },
{ "KP_6", 0xFFB6 },
{ "KP_7", 0xFFB7 },
{ "KP_8", 0xFFB8 },
{ "KP_9", 0xFFB9 },
{ "KP_Equal", 0xFFBD },
{ "F1", 0xFFBE },
{ "F2", 0xFFBF },
{ "F3", 0xFFC0 },
{ "F4", 0xFFC1 },
{ "F5", 0xFFC2 },
{ "F6", 0xFFC3 },
{ "F7", 0xFFC4 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 |
{ "Meta_R", 0xFFE8 },
{ "Alt_L", 0xFFE9 },
{ "Alt_R", 0xFFEA },
{ "Super_L", 0xFFEB },
{ "Super_R", 0xFFEC },
{ "Hyper_L", 0xFFED },
{ "Hyper_R", 0xFFEE },
{ "ISO_Lock", 0xFE01 },
{ "ISO_Level2_Latch", 0xFE02 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Shift", 0xFE03 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Latch", 0xFE04 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Lock", 0xFE05 },
| > > > > > > > > > > > < < < > > > | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 |
{ "Meta_R", 0xFFE8 },
{ "Alt_L", 0xFFE9 },
{ "Alt_R", 0xFFEA },
{ "Super_L", 0xFFEB },
{ "Super_R", 0xFFEC },
{ "Hyper_L", 0xFFED },
{ "Hyper_R", 0xFFEE },
{ "braille_dot_1", 0xFFF1 },
{ "braille_dot_2", 0xFFF2 },
{ "braille_dot_3", 0xFFF3 },
{ "braille_dot_4", 0xFFF4 },
{ "braille_dot_5", 0xFFF5 },
{ "braille_dot_6", 0xFFF6 },
{ "braille_dot_7", 0xFFF7 },
{ "braille_dot_8", 0xFFF8 },
{ "braille_dot_9", 0xFFF9 },
{ "braille_dot_10", 0xFFFA },
{ "Delete", 0xFFFF },
{ "ISO_Lock", 0xFE01 },
{ "ISO_Level2_Latch", 0xFE02 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Shift", 0xFE03 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Latch", 0xFE04 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Lock", 0xFE05 },
{ "ISO_Group_Shift", 0xFF7E },
{ "ISO_Group_Latch", 0xFE06 },
{ "ISO_Group_Lock", 0xFE07 },
{ "ISO_Next_Group", 0xFE08 },
{ "ISO_Next_Group_Lock", 0xFE09 },
{ "ISO_Prev_Group", 0xFE0A },
{ "ISO_Prev_Group_Lock", 0xFE0B },
{ "ISO_First_Group", 0xFE0C },
{ "ISO_First_Group_Lock", 0xFE0D },
{ "ISO_Last_Group", 0xFE0E },
{ "ISO_Last_Group_Lock", 0xFE0F },
{ "ISO_Level5_Shift", 0xFE11 },
{ "ISO_Level5_Latch", 0xFE12 },
{ "ISO_Level5_Lock", 0xFE13 },
{ "ISO_Left_Tab", 0xFE20 },
{ "ISO_Move_Line_Up", 0xFE21 },
{ "ISO_Move_Line_Down", 0xFE22 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Line_Up", 0xFE23 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Line_Down", 0xFE24 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Space_Left", 0xFE25 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Space_Right", 0xFE26 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 |
{ "dead_belowcircumflex", 0xFE69 },
{ "dead_belowtilde", 0xFE6A },
{ "dead_belowbreve", 0xFE6B },
{ "dead_belowdiaeresis", 0xFE6C },
{ "dead_invertedbreve", 0xFE6D },
{ "dead_belowcomma", 0xFE6E },
{ "dead_currency", 0xFE6F },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 |
{ "dead_belowcircumflex", 0xFE69 },
{ "dead_belowtilde", 0xFE6A },
{ "dead_belowbreve", 0xFE6B },
{ "dead_belowdiaeresis", 0xFE6C },
{ "dead_invertedbreve", 0xFE6D },
{ "dead_belowcomma", 0xFE6E },
{ "dead_currency", 0xFE6F },
{ "AccessX_Enable", 0xFE70 },
{ "AccessX_Feedback_Enable", 0xFE71 },
{ "RepeatKeys_Enable", 0xFE72 },
{ "SlowKeys_Enable", 0xFE73 },
{ "BounceKeys_Enable", 0xFE74 },
{ "StickyKeys_Enable", 0xFE75 },
{ "MouseKeys_Enable", 0xFE76 },
{ "MouseKeys_Accel_Enable", 0xFE77 },
{ "Overlay1_Enable", 0xFE78 },
{ "Overlay2_Enable", 0xFE79 },
{ "AudibleBell_Enable", 0xFE7A },
{ "dead_a", 0xFE80 },
{ "dead_A", 0xFE81 },
{ "dead_e", 0xFE82 },
{ "dead_E", 0xFE83 },
{ "dead_i", 0xFE84 },
{ "dead_I", 0xFE85 },
{ "dead_o", 0xFE86 },
{ "dead_O", 0xFE87 },
{ "dead_u", 0xFE88 },
{ "dead_U", 0xFE89 },
{ "dead_schwa", 0xFE8A },
{ "dead_small_schwa", 0xFE8A },
{ "dead_SCHWA", 0xFE8B },
{ "dead_capital_schwa", 0xFE8B },
{ "dead_greek", 0xFE8C },
{ "dead_hamza", 0xFE8D },
{ "dead_lowline", 0xFE90 },
{ "dead_aboveverticalline", 0xFE91 },
{ "dead_belowverticalline", 0xFE92 },
{ "dead_longsolidusoverlay", 0xFE93 },
{ "ch", 0xFEA0 },
{ "Ch", 0xFEA1 },
{ "CH", 0xFEA2 },
{ "c_h", 0xFEA3 },
{ "C_h", 0xFEA4 },
{ "C_H", 0xFEA5 },
{ "First_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED0 },
{ "Prev_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED1 },
{ "Next_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED2 },
{ "Last_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED4 },
{ "Terminate_Server", 0xFED5 },
{ "Pointer_Left", 0xFEE0 },
{ "Pointer_Right", 0xFEE1 },
{ "Pointer_Up", 0xFEE2 },
{ "Pointer_Down", 0xFEE3 },
{ "Pointer_UpLeft", 0xFEE4 },
{ "Pointer_UpRight", 0xFEE5 },
{ "Pointer_DownLeft", 0xFEE6 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
314 315 316 317 318 319 320 |
{ "Pointer_DblClick4", 0xFEF2 },
{ "Pointer_DblClick5", 0xFEF3 },
{ "Pointer_Drag_Dflt", 0xFEF4 },
{ "Pointer_Drag1", 0xFEF5 },
{ "Pointer_Drag2", 0xFEF6 },
{ "Pointer_Drag3", 0xFEF7 },
{ "Pointer_Drag4", 0xFEF8 },
| < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 |
{ "Pointer_DblClick4", 0xFEF2 },
{ "Pointer_DblClick5", 0xFEF3 },
{ "Pointer_Drag_Dflt", 0xFEF4 },
{ "Pointer_Drag1", 0xFEF5 },
{ "Pointer_Drag2", 0xFEF6 },
{ "Pointer_Drag3", 0xFEF7 },
{ "Pointer_Drag4", 0xFEF8 },
{ "Pointer_EnableKeys", 0xFEF9 },
{ "Pointer_Accelerate", 0xFEFA },
{ "Pointer_DfltBtnNext", 0xFEFB },
{ "Pointer_DfltBtnPrev", 0xFEFC },
{ "Pointer_Drag5", 0xFEFD },
{ "space", 0x20 },
{ "exclam", 0x21 },
{ "quotedbl", 0x22 },
{ "numbersign", 0x23 },
{ "dollar", 0x24 },
{ "percent", 0x25 },
{ "ampersand", 0x26 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 |
{ "currency", 0xA4 },
{ "yen", 0xA5 },
{ "brokenbar", 0xA6 },
{ "section", 0xA7 },
{ "diaeresis", 0xA8 },
{ "copyright", 0xA9 },
{ "ordfeminine", 0xAA },
{ "guillemotleft", 0xAB },
{ "notsign", 0xAC },
{ "hyphen", 0xAD },
{ "registered", 0xAE },
{ "macron", 0xAF },
{ "degree", 0xB0 },
{ "plusminus", 0xB1 },
{ "twosuperior", 0xB2 },
{ "threesuperior", 0xB3 },
{ "acute", 0xB4 },
{ "mu", 0xB5 },
{ "paragraph", 0xB6 },
{ "periodcentered", 0xB7 },
{ "cedilla", 0xB8 },
{ "onesuperior", 0xB9 },
{ "masculine", 0xBA },
{ "guillemotright", 0xBB },
{ "onequarter", 0xBC },
{ "onehalf", 0xBD },
{ "threequarters", 0xBE },
{ "questiondown", 0xBF },
{ "Agrave", 0xC0 },
{ "Aacute", 0xC1 },
| > > > | 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 |
{ "currency", 0xA4 },
{ "yen", 0xA5 },
{ "brokenbar", 0xA6 },
{ "section", 0xA7 },
{ "diaeresis", 0xA8 },
{ "copyright", 0xA9 },
{ "ordfeminine", 0xAA },
{ "guillemetleft", 0xAB },
{ "guillemotleft", 0xAB },
{ "notsign", 0xAC },
{ "hyphen", 0xAD },
{ "registered", 0xAE },
{ "macron", 0xAF },
{ "degree", 0xB0 },
{ "plusminus", 0xB1 },
{ "twosuperior", 0xB2 },
{ "threesuperior", 0xB3 },
{ "acute", 0xB4 },
{ "mu", 0xB5 },
{ "paragraph", 0xB6 },
{ "periodcentered", 0xB7 },
{ "cedilla", 0xB8 },
{ "onesuperior", 0xB9 },
{ "ordmasculine", 0xBA },
{ "masculine", 0xBA },
{ "guillemetright", 0xBB },
{ "guillemotright", 0xBB },
{ "onequarter", 0xBC },
{ "onehalf", 0xBD },
{ "threequarters", 0xBE },
{ "questiondown", 0xBF },
{ "Agrave", 0xC0 },
{ "Aacute", 0xC1 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
510 511 512 513 514 515 516 |
{ "Ograve", 0xD2 },
{ "Oacute", 0xD3 },
{ "Ocircumflex", 0xD4 },
{ "Otilde", 0xD5 },
{ "Odiaeresis", 0xD6 },
{ "multiply", 0xD7 },
{ "Oslash", 0xD8 },
| < < | 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 |
{ "Ograve", 0xD2 },
{ "Oacute", 0xD3 },
{ "Ocircumflex", 0xD4 },
{ "Otilde", 0xD5 },
{ "Odiaeresis", 0xD6 },
{ "multiply", 0xD7 },
{ "Oslash", 0xD8 },
{ "Ooblique", 0xD8 },
{ "Ugrave", 0xD9 },
{ "Uacute", 0xDA },
{ "Ucircumflex", 0xDB },
{ "Udiaeresis", 0xDC },
{ "Yacute", 0xDD },
{ "THORN", 0xDE },
{ "Thorn", 0xDE },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
546 547 548 549 550 551 552 |
{ "ograve", 0xF2 },
{ "oacute", 0xF3 },
{ "ocircumflex", 0xF4 },
{ "otilde", 0xF5 },
{ "odiaeresis", 0xF6 },
{ "division", 0xF7 },
{ "oslash", 0xF8 },
| < < | 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 |
{ "ograve", 0xF2 },
{ "oacute", 0xF3 },
{ "ocircumflex", 0xF4 },
{ "otilde", 0xF5 },
{ "odiaeresis", 0xF6 },
{ "division", 0xF7 },
{ "oslash", 0xF8 },
{ "ooblique", 0xF8 },
{ "ugrave", 0xF9 },
{ "uacute", 0xFA },
{ "ucircumflex", 0xFB },
{ "udiaeresis", 0xFC },
{ "yacute", 0xFD },
{ "thorn", 0xFE },
{ "ydiaeresis", 0xFF },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
636 637 638 639 640 641 642 |
{ "cabovedot", 0x2E5 },
{ "ccircumflex", 0x2E6 },
{ "gabovedot", 0x2F5 },
{ "gcircumflex", 0x2F8 },
{ "ubreve", 0x2FD },
{ "scircumflex", 0x2FE },
{ "kra", 0x3A2 },
| < < < < | 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 |
{ "cabovedot", 0x2E5 },
{ "ccircumflex", 0x2E6 },
{ "gabovedot", 0x2F5 },
{ "gcircumflex", 0x2F8 },
{ "ubreve", 0x2FD },
{ "scircumflex", 0x2FE },
{ "kra", 0x3A2 },
{ "kappa", 0x3A2 },
{ "Rcedilla", 0x3A3 },
{ "Itilde", 0x3A5 },
{ "Lcedilla", 0x3A6 },
{ "Emacron", 0x3AA },
{ "Gcedilla", 0x3AB },
{ "Tslash", 0x3AC },
{ "rcedilla", 0x3B3 },
{ "itilde", 0x3B5 },
{ "lcedilla", 0x3B6 },
{ "emacron", 0x3BA },
{ "gcedilla", 0x3BB },
{ "gacute", 0x3BB },
{ "tslash", 0x3BC },
{ "ENG", 0x3BD },
{ "eng", 0x3BF },
{ "Amacron", 0x3C0 },
{ "Iogonek", 0x3C7 },
{ "Eabovedot", 0x3CC },
{ "Imacron", 0x3CF },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
676 677 678 679 680 681 682 |
{ "imacron", 0x3EF },
{ "ncedilla", 0x3F1 },
{ "omacron", 0x3F2 },
{ "kcedilla", 0x3F3 },
{ "uogonek", 0x3F9 },
{ "utilde", 0x3FD },
{ "umacron", 0x3FE },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 |
{ "imacron", 0x3EF },
{ "ncedilla", 0x3F1 },
{ "omacron", 0x3F2 },
{ "kcedilla", 0x3F3 },
{ "uogonek", 0x3F9 },
{ "utilde", 0x3FD },
{ "umacron", 0x3FE },
{ "OE", 0x13BC },
{ "oe", 0x13BD },
{ "Ydiaeresis", 0x13BE },
{ "overline", 0x47E },
{ "kana_fullstop", 0x4A1 },
{ "kana_openingbracket", 0x4A2 },
{ "kana_closingbracket", 0x4A3 },
{ "kana_comma", 0x4A4 },
{ "kana_conjunctive", 0x4A5 },
{ "kana_middledot", 0x4A5 },
{ "kana_WO", 0x4A6 },
{ "kana_a", 0x4A7 },
{ "kana_i", 0x4A8 },
{ "kana_u", 0x4A9 },
{ "kana_e", 0x4AA },
{ "kana_o", 0x4AB },
{ "kana_ya", 0x4AC },
{ "kana_yu", 0x4AD },
{ "kana_yo", 0x4AE },
{ "kana_tsu", 0x4AF },
{ "kana_tu", 0x4AF },
{ "prolongedsound", 0x4B0 },
{ "kana_A", 0x4B1 },
{ "kana_I", 0x4B2 },
{ "kana_U", 0x4B3 },
{ "kana_E", 0x4B4 },
{ "kana_O", 0x4B5 },
{ "kana_KA", 0x4B6 },
{ "kana_KI", 0x4B7 },
{ "kana_KU", 0x4B8 },
{ "kana_KE", 0x4B9 },
{ "kana_KO", 0x4BA },
{ "kana_SA", 0x4BB },
{ "kana_SHI", 0x4BC },
{ "kana_SU", 0x4BD },
{ "kana_SE", 0x4BE },
{ "kana_SO", 0x4BF },
{ "kana_TA", 0x4C0 },
{ "kana_CHI", 0x4C1 },
{ "kana_TI", 0x4C1 },
{ "kana_TSU", 0x4C2 },
{ "kana_TU", 0x4C2 },
{ "kana_TE", 0x4C3 },
{ "kana_TO", 0x4C4 },
{ "kana_NA", 0x4C5 },
{ "kana_NI", 0x4C6 },
{ "kana_NU", 0x4C7 },
{ "kana_NE", 0x4C8 },
{ "kana_NO", 0x4C9 },
{ "kana_HA", 0x4CA },
{ "kana_HI", 0x4CB },
{ "kana_FU", 0x4CC },
{ "kana_HU", 0x4CC },
{ "kana_HE", 0x4CD },
{ "kana_HO", 0x4CE },
{ "kana_MA", 0x4CF },
{ "kana_MI", 0x4D0 },
{ "kana_MU", 0x4D1 },
{ "kana_ME", 0x4D2 },
{ "kana_MO", 0x4D3 },
{ "kana_YA", 0x4D4 },
{ "kana_YU", 0x4D5 },
{ "kana_YO", 0x4D6 },
{ "kana_RA", 0x4D7 },
{ "kana_RI", 0x4D8 },
{ "kana_RU", 0x4D9 },
{ "kana_RE", 0x4DA },
{ "kana_RO", 0x4DB },
{ "kana_WA", 0x4DC },
{ "kana_N", 0x4DD },
{ "voicedsound", 0x4DE },
{ "semivoicedsound", 0x4DF },
{ "Arabic_comma", 0x5AC },
{ "Arabic_semicolon", 0x5BB },
{ "Arabic_question_mark", 0x5BF },
{ "Arabic_hamza", 0x5C1 },
{ "Arabic_maddaonalef", 0x5C2 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaonalef", 0x5C3 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaonwaw", 0x5C4 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaunderalef", 0x5C5 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
850 851 852 853 854 855 856 |
{ "Arabic_feh", 0x5E1 },
{ "Arabic_qaf", 0x5E2 },
{ "Arabic_kaf", 0x5E3 },
{ "Arabic_lam", 0x5E4 },
{ "Arabic_meem", 0x5E5 },
{ "Arabic_noon", 0x5E6 },
{ "Arabic_ha", 0x5E7 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 |
{ "Arabic_feh", 0x5E1 },
{ "Arabic_qaf", 0x5E2 },
{ "Arabic_kaf", 0x5E3 },
{ "Arabic_lam", 0x5E4 },
{ "Arabic_meem", 0x5E5 },
{ "Arabic_noon", 0x5E6 },
{ "Arabic_ha", 0x5E7 },
{ "Arabic_heh", 0x5E7 },
{ "Arabic_waw", 0x5E8 },
{ "Arabic_alefmaksura", 0x5E9 },
{ "Arabic_yeh", 0x5EA },
{ "Arabic_fathatan", 0x5EB },
{ "Arabic_dammatan", 0x5EC },
{ "Arabic_kasratan", 0x5ED },
{ "Arabic_fatha", 0x5EE },
{ "Arabic_damma", 0x5EF },
{ "Arabic_kasra", 0x5F0 },
{ "Arabic_shadda", 0x5F1 },
{ "Arabic_sukun", 0x5F2 },
{ "Serbian_dje", 0x6A1 },
{ "Macedonia_gje", 0x6A2 },
{ "Cyrillic_io", 0x6A3 },
{ "Ukrainian_ie", 0x6A4 },
{ "Ukranian_je", 0x6A4 },
{ "Macedonia_dse", 0x6A5 },
{ "Ukrainian_i", 0x6A6 },
{ "Ukranian_i", 0x6A6 },
{ "Ukrainian_yi", 0x6A7 },
{ "Ukranian_yi", 0x6A7 },
{ "Cyrillic_je", 0x6A8 },
{ "Serbian_je", 0x6A8 },
{ "Cyrillic_lje", 0x6A9 },
{ "Serbian_lje", 0x6A9 },
{ "Cyrillic_nje", 0x6AA },
{ "Serbian_nje", 0x6AA },
{ "Serbian_tshe", 0x6AB },
{ "Macedonia_kje", 0x6AC },
{ "Ukrainian_ghe_with_upturn", 0x6AD },
{ "Byelorussian_shortu", 0x6AE },
{ "Cyrillic_dzhe", 0x6AF },
{ "Serbian_dze", 0x6AF },
{ "numerosign", 0x6B0 },
{ "Serbian_DJE", 0x6B1 },
{ "Macedonia_GJE", 0x6B2 },
{ "Cyrillic_IO", 0x6B3 },
{ "Ukrainian_IE", 0x6B4 },
{ "Ukranian_JE", 0x6B4 },
{ "Macedonia_DSE", 0x6B5 },
{ "Ukrainian_I", 0x6B6 },
{ "Ukranian_I", 0x6B6 },
{ "Ukrainian_YI", 0x6B7 },
{ "Ukranian_YI", 0x6B7 },
{ "Cyrillic_JE", 0x6B8 },
{ "Serbian_JE", 0x6B8 },
{ "Cyrillic_LJE", 0x6B9 },
{ "Serbian_LJE", 0x6B9 },
{ "Cyrillic_NJE", 0x6BA },
{ "Serbian_NJE", 0x6BA },
{ "Serbian_TSHE", 0x6BB },
{ "Macedonia_KJE", 0x6BC },
{ "Ukrainian_GHE_WITH_UPTURN", 0x6BD },
{ "Byelorussian_SHORTU", 0x6BE },
{ "Cyrillic_DZHE", 0x6BF },
{ "Serbian_DZE", 0x6BF },
{ "Cyrillic_yu", 0x6C0 },
{ "Cyrillic_a", 0x6C1 },
{ "Cyrillic_be", 0x6C2 },
{ "Cyrillic_tse", 0x6C3 },
{ "Cyrillic_de", 0x6C4 },
{ "Cyrillic_ie", 0x6C5 },
{ "Cyrillic_ef", 0x6C6 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 |
{ "Greek_finalsmallsigma", 0x7F3 },
{ "Greek_tau", 0x7F4 },
{ "Greek_upsilon", 0x7F5 },
{ "Greek_phi", 0x7F6 },
{ "Greek_chi", 0x7F7 },
{ "Greek_psi", 0x7F8 },
{ "Greek_omega", 0x7F9 },
| < | 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 |
{ "Greek_finalsmallsigma", 0x7F3 },
{ "Greek_tau", 0x7F4 },
{ "Greek_upsilon", 0x7F5 },
{ "Greek_phi", 0x7F6 },
{ "Greek_chi", 0x7F7 },
{ "Greek_psi", 0x7F8 },
{ "Greek_omega", 0x7F9 },
{ "leftradical", 0x8A1 },
{ "topleftradical", 0x8A2 },
{ "horizconnector", 0x8A3 },
{ "topintegral", 0x8A4 },
{ "botintegral", 0x8A5 },
{ "vertconnector", 0x8A6 },
{ "topleftsqbracket", 0x8A7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 |
{ "rightshoe", 0xBD8 },
{ "leftshoe", 0xBDA },
{ "lefttack", 0xBDC },
{ "righttack", 0xBFC },
{ "hebrew_doublelowline", 0xCDF },
{ "hebrew_aleph", 0xCE0 },
{ "hebrew_bet", 0xCE1 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 |
{ "rightshoe", 0xBD8 },
{ "leftshoe", 0xBDA },
{ "lefttack", 0xBDC },
{ "righttack", 0xBFC },
{ "hebrew_doublelowline", 0xCDF },
{ "hebrew_aleph", 0xCE0 },
{ "hebrew_bet", 0xCE1 },
{ "hebrew_beth", 0xCE1 },
{ "hebrew_gimel", 0xCE2 },
{ "hebrew_gimmel", 0xCE2 },
{ "hebrew_dalet", 0xCE3 },
{ "hebrew_daleth", 0xCE3 },
{ "hebrew_he", 0xCE4 },
{ "hebrew_waw", 0xCE5 },
{ "hebrew_zain", 0xCE6 },
{ "hebrew_zayin", 0xCE6 },
{ "hebrew_chet", 0xCE7 },
{ "hebrew_het", 0xCE7 },
{ "hebrew_tet", 0xCE8 },
{ "hebrew_teth", 0xCE8 },
{ "hebrew_yod", 0xCE9 },
{ "hebrew_finalkaph", 0xCEA },
{ "hebrew_kaph", 0xCEB },
{ "hebrew_lamed", 0xCEC },
{ "hebrew_finalmem", 0xCED },
{ "hebrew_mem", 0xCEE },
{ "hebrew_finalnun", 0xCEF },
{ "hebrew_nun", 0xCF0 },
{ "hebrew_samech", 0xCF1 },
{ "hebrew_samekh", 0xCF1 },
{ "hebrew_ayin", 0xCF2 },
{ "hebrew_finalpe", 0xCF3 },
{ "hebrew_pe", 0xCF4 },
{ "hebrew_finalzade", 0xCF5 },
{ "hebrew_finalzadi", 0xCF5 },
{ "hebrew_zade", 0xCF6 },
{ "hebrew_zadi", 0xCF6 },
{ "hebrew_qoph", 0xCF7 },
{ "hebrew_kuf", 0xCF7 },
{ "hebrew_resh", 0xCF8 },
{ "hebrew_shin", 0xCF9 },
{ "hebrew_taw", 0xCFA },
{ "hebrew_taf", 0xCFA },
{ "Thai_kokai", 0xDA1 },
{ "Thai_khokhai", 0xDA2 },
{ "Thai_khokhuat", 0xDA3 },
{ "Thai_khokhwai", 0xDA4 },
{ "Thai_khokhon", 0xDA5 },
{ "Thai_khorakhang", 0xDA6 },
{ "Thai_ngongu", 0xDA7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 |
{ "Thai_leksam", 0xDF3 },
{ "Thai_leksi", 0xDF4 },
{ "Thai_lekha", 0xDF5 },
{ "Thai_lekhok", 0xDF6 },
{ "Thai_lekchet", 0xDF7 },
{ "Thai_lekpaet", 0xDF8 },
{ "Thai_lekkao", 0xDF9 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 |
{ "Thai_leksam", 0xDF3 },
{ "Thai_leksi", 0xDF4 },
{ "Thai_lekha", 0xDF5 },
{ "Thai_lekhok", 0xDF6 },
{ "Thai_lekchet", 0xDF7 },
{ "Thai_lekpaet", 0xDF8 },
{ "Thai_lekkao", 0xDF9 },
{ "Hangul_Kiyeog", 0xEA1 },
{ "Hangul_SsangKiyeog", 0xEA2 },
{ "Hangul_KiyeogSios", 0xEA3 },
{ "Hangul_Nieun", 0xEA4 },
{ "Hangul_NieunJieuj", 0xEA5 },
{ "Hangul_NieunHieuh", 0xEA6 },
{ "Hangul_Dikeud", 0xEA7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 |
{ "Hangul_YeorinHieuh", 0xEF5 },
{ "Hangul_AraeA", 0xEF6 },
{ "Hangul_AraeAE", 0xEF7 },
{ "Hangul_J_PanSios", 0xEF8 },
{ "Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung", 0xEF9 },
{ "Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh", 0xEFA },
{ "Korean_Won", 0xEFF },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 |
{ "Hangul_YeorinHieuh", 0xEF5 },
{ "Hangul_AraeA", 0xEF6 },
{ "Hangul_AraeAE", 0xEF7 },
{ "Hangul_J_PanSios", 0xEF8 },
{ "Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung", 0xEF9 },
{ "Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh", 0xEFA },
{ "Korean_Won", 0xEFF },
{ "XF86ModeLock", 0x1008FF01 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessUp", 0x1008FF02 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessDown", 0x1008FF03 },
{ "XF86KbdLightOnOff", 0x1008FF04 },
{ "XF86KbdBrightnessUp", 0x1008FF05 },
{ "XF86KbdBrightnessDown", 0x1008FF06 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessCycle", 0x1008FF07 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 |
{ "XF86TouchpadOff", 0x1008FFB1 },
{ "XF86AudioMicMute", 0x1008FFB2 },
{ "XF86Keyboard", 0x1008FFB3 },
{ "XF86WWAN", 0x1008FFB4 },
{ "XF86RFKill", 0x1008FFB5 },
{ "XF86AudioPreset", 0x1008FFB6 },
{ "XF86RotationLockToggle", 0x1008FFB7 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_1", 0x1008FE01 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_2", 0x1008FE02 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_3", 0x1008FE03 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_4", 0x1008FE04 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_5", 0x1008FE05 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_6", 0x1008FE06 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_7", 0x1008FE07 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_8", 0x1008FE08 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_9", 0x1008FE09 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_10", 0x1008FE0A },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_11", 0x1008FE0B },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_12", 0x1008FE0C },
{ "XF86Ungrab", 0x1008FE20 },
{ "XF86ClearGrab", 0x1008FE21 },
{ "XF86Next_VMode", 0x1008FE22 },
{ "XF86Prev_VMode", 0x1008FE23 },
{ "XF86LogWindowTree", 0x1008FE24 },
{ "XF86LogGrabInfo", 0x1008FE25 },
{ "SunFA_Grave", 0x1005FF00 },
{ "SunFA_Circum", 0x1005FF01 },
{ "SunFA_Tilde", 0x1005FF02 },
{ "SunFA_Acute", 0x1005FF03 },
{ "SunFA_Diaeresis", 0x1005FF04 },
{ "SunFA_Cedilla", 0x1005FF05 },
{ "SunF36", 0x1005FF10 },
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 |
{ "XF86TouchpadOff", 0x1008FFB1 },
{ "XF86AudioMicMute", 0x1008FFB2 },
{ "XF86Keyboard", 0x1008FFB3 },
{ "XF86WWAN", 0x1008FFB4 },
{ "XF86RFKill", 0x1008FFB5 },
{ "XF86AudioPreset", 0x1008FFB6 },
{ "XF86RotationLockToggle", 0x1008FFB7 },
{ "XF86FullScreen", 0x1008FFB8 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_1", 0x1008FE01 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_2", 0x1008FE02 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_3", 0x1008FE03 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_4", 0x1008FE04 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_5", 0x1008FE05 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_6", 0x1008FE06 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_7", 0x1008FE07 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_8", 0x1008FE08 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_9", 0x1008FE09 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_10", 0x1008FE0A },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_11", 0x1008FE0B },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_12", 0x1008FE0C },
{ "XF86Ungrab", 0x1008FE20 },
{ "XF86ClearGrab", 0x1008FE21 },
{ "XF86Next_VMode", 0x1008FE22 },
{ "XF86Prev_VMode", 0x1008FE23 },
{ "XF86LogWindowTree", 0x1008FE24 },
{ "XF86LogGrabInfo", 0x1008FE25 },
{ "XF86BrightnessAuto", 0x100810F4 },
{ "XF86DisplayOff", 0x100810F5 },
{ "XF86Info", 0x10081166 },
{ "XF86AspectRatio", 0x10081177 },
{ "XF86DVD", 0x10081185 },
{ "XF86Audio", 0x10081188 },
{ "XF86ChannelUp", 0x10081192 },
{ "XF86ChannelDown", 0x10081193 },
{ "XF86Break", 0x1008119B },
{ "XF86VideoPhone", 0x100811A0 },
{ "XF86ZoomReset", 0x100811A4 },
{ "XF86Editor", 0x100811A6 },
{ "XF86GraphicsEditor", 0x100811A8 },
{ "XF86Presentation", 0x100811A9 },
{ "XF86Database", 0x100811AA },
{ "XF86Voicemail", 0x100811AC },
{ "XF86Addressbook", 0x100811AD },
{ "XF86DisplayToggle", 0x100811AF },
{ "XF86SpellCheck", 0x100811B0 },
{ "XF86ContextMenu", 0x100811B6 },
{ "XF86MediaRepeat", 0x100811B7 },
{ "XF8610ChannelsUp", 0x100811B8 },
{ "XF8610ChannelsDown", 0x100811B9 },
{ "XF86Images", 0x100811BA },
{ "XF86NotificationCenter", 0x100811BC },
{ "XF86PickupPhone", 0x100811BD },
{ "XF86HangupPhone", 0x100811BE },
{ "XF86Fn", 0x100811D0 },
{ "XF86Fn_Esc", 0x100811D1 },
{ "XF86FnRightShift", 0x100811E5 },
{ "XF86Numeric0", 0x10081200 },
{ "XF86Numeric1", 0x10081201 },
{ "XF86Numeric2", 0x10081202 },
{ "XF86Numeric3", 0x10081203 },
{ "XF86Numeric4", 0x10081204 },
{ "XF86Numeric5", 0x10081205 },
{ "XF86Numeric6", 0x10081206 },
{ "XF86Numeric7", 0x10081207 },
{ "XF86Numeric8", 0x10081208 },
{ "XF86Numeric9", 0x10081209 },
{ "XF86NumericStar", 0x1008120A },
{ "XF86NumericPound", 0x1008120B },
{ "XF86NumericA", 0x1008120C },
{ "XF86NumericB", 0x1008120D },
{ "XF86NumericC", 0x1008120E },
{ "XF86NumericD", 0x1008120F },
{ "XF86CameraFocus", 0x10081210 },
{ "XF86WPSButton", 0x10081211 },
{ "XF86CameraZoomIn", 0x10081215 },
{ "XF86CameraZoomOut", 0x10081216 },
{ "XF86CameraUp", 0x10081217 },
{ "XF86CameraDown", 0x10081218 },
{ "XF86CameraLeft", 0x10081219 },
{ "XF86CameraRight", 0x1008121A },
{ "XF86AttendantOn", 0x1008121B },
{ "XF86AttendantOff", 0x1008121C },
{ "XF86AttendantToggle", 0x1008121D },
{ "XF86LightsToggle", 0x1008121E },
{ "XF86ALSToggle", 0x10081230 },
{ "XF86Buttonconfig", 0x10081240 },
{ "XF86Taskmanager", 0x10081241 },
{ "XF86Journal", 0x10081242 },
{ "XF86ControlPanel", 0x10081243 },
{ "XF86AppSelect", 0x10081244 },
{ "XF86Screensaver", 0x10081245 },
{ "XF86VoiceCommand", 0x10081246 },
{ "XF86Assistant", 0x10081247 },
{ "XF86EmojiPicker", 0x10081249 },
{ "XF86Dictate", 0x1008124A },
{ "XF86BrightnessMin", 0x10081250 },
{ "XF86BrightnessMax", 0x10081251 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistPrev", 0x10081260 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistNext", 0x10081261 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistPrevgroup", 0x10081262 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistNextgroup", 0x10081263 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistAccept", 0x10081264 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistCancel", 0x10081265 },
{ "XF86RightUp", 0x10081266 },
{ "XF86RightDown", 0x10081267 },
{ "XF86LeftUp", 0x10081268 },
{ "XF86LeftDown", 0x10081269 },
{ "XF86RootMenu", 0x1008126A },
{ "XF86MediaTopMenu", 0x1008126B },
{ "XF86Numeric11", 0x1008126C },
{ "XF86Numeric12", 0x1008126D },
{ "XF86AudioDesc", 0x1008126E },
{ "XF863DMode", 0x1008126F },
{ "XF86NextFavorite", 0x10081270 },
{ "XF86StopRecord", 0x10081271 },
{ "XF86PauseRecord", 0x10081272 },
{ "XF86VOD", 0x10081273 },
{ "XF86Unmute", 0x10081274 },
{ "XF86FastReverse", 0x10081275 },
{ "XF86SlowReverse", 0x10081276 },
{ "XF86Data", 0x10081277 },
{ "XF86OnScreenKeyboard", 0x10081278 },
{ "XF86PrivacyScreenToggle", 0x10081279 },
{ "XF86SelectiveScreenshot", 0x1008127A },
{ "XF86Macro1", 0x10081290 },
{ "XF86Macro2", 0x10081291 },
{ "XF86Macro3", 0x10081292 },
{ "XF86Macro4", 0x10081293 },
{ "XF86Macro5", 0x10081294 },
{ "XF86Macro6", 0x10081295 },
{ "XF86Macro7", 0x10081296 },
{ "XF86Macro8", 0x10081297 },
{ "XF86Macro9", 0x10081298 },
{ "XF86Macro10", 0x10081299 },
{ "XF86Macro11", 0x1008129A },
{ "XF86Macro12", 0x1008129B },
{ "XF86Macro13", 0x1008129C },
{ "XF86Macro14", 0x1008129D },
{ "XF86Macro15", 0x1008129E },
{ "XF86Macro16", 0x1008129F },
{ "XF86Macro17", 0x100812A0 },
{ "XF86Macro18", 0x100812A1 },
{ "XF86Macro19", 0x100812A2 },
{ "XF86Macro20", 0x100812A3 },
{ "XF86Macro21", 0x100812A4 },
{ "XF86Macro22", 0x100812A5 },
{ "XF86Macro23", 0x100812A6 },
{ "XF86Macro24", 0x100812A7 },
{ "XF86Macro25", 0x100812A8 },
{ "XF86Macro26", 0x100812A9 },
{ "XF86Macro27", 0x100812AA },
{ "XF86Macro28", 0x100812AB },
{ "XF86Macro29", 0x100812AC },
{ "XF86Macro30", 0x100812AD },
{ "XF86MacroRecordStart", 0x100812B0 },
{ "XF86MacroRecordStop", 0x100812B1 },
{ "XF86MacroPresetCycle", 0x100812B2 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset1", 0x100812B3 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset2", 0x100812B4 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset3", 0x100812B5 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu1", 0x100812B8 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu2", 0x100812B9 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu3", 0x100812BA },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu4", 0x100812BB },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu5", 0x100812BC },
{ "SunFA_Grave", 0x1005FF00 },
{ "SunFA_Circum", 0x1005FF01 },
{ "SunFA_Tilde", 0x1005FF02 },
{ "SunFA_Acute", 0x1005FF03 },
{ "SunFA_Diaeresis", 0x1005FF04 },
{ "SunFA_Cedilla", 0x1005FF05 },
{ "SunF36", 0x1005FF10 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted generic/nanosvg.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Deleted generic/nanosvgrast.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to generic/tk.decls.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 |
void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc)
}
declare 18 {
int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 19 {
| | | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 |
void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc)
}
declare 18 {
int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 19 {
CONST86 char *Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 20 {
Tk_Window Tk_CanvasTkwin(Tk_Canvas canvas)
}
declare 21 {
void Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 |
int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags)
}
declare 29 {
int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
| | | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 |
int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags)
}
declare 29 {
int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec,
int flags)
}
declare 30 {
void Tk_ConfigureWindow(Tk_Window tkwin,
unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr)
}
declare 31 {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
241 242 243 244 245 246 247 |
declare 53 {
void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target)
}
declare 54 {
void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 55 {
| | | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 |
declare 53 {
void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target)
}
declare 54 {
void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 55 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_DisplayName(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 56 {
int Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y)
}
declare 57 {
void Tk_Draw3DPolygon(Tk_Window tkwin,
Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
322 323 324 325 326 327 328 |
}
declare 75 {
void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap)
}
declare 76 {
void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout)
}
| | | 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 |
}
declare 75 {
void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap)
}
declare 76 {
void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout)
}
declare 77 {
void Tk_FreeXId(Display *display, XID xid)
}
declare 78 {
GC Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable)
}
declare 79 {
void Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 |
Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object)
}
declare 82 {
int Tk_GetAnchor(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)
}
declare 83 {
| | | | 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 |
Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object)
}
declare 82 {
int Tk_GetAnchor(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)
}
declare 83 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_GetAtomName(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom)
}
declare 84 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_GetBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object,
const char *eventStr)
}
declare 85 {
Pixmap Tk_GetBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str)
}
declare 86 {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 |
GC Tk_GetGC(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr)
}
declare 97 {
Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name,
Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 98 {
| | | | 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 |
GC Tk_GetGC(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr)
}
declare 97 {
Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name,
Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 98 {
ClientData Tk_GetImageMasterData(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *name, CONST86 Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr)
}
declare 99 {
Tk_ItemType *Tk_GetItemTypes(void)
}
declare 100 {
int Tk_GetJoinStyle(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, int *joinPtr)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
435 436 437 438 439 440 441 |
int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr)
}
declare 107 {
void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr)
}
declare 108 {
int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp,
| | | 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 |
int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr)
}
declare 107 {
void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr)
}
declare 108 {
int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp,
int argc, CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr, int *intPtr)
}
declare 109 {
int Tk_GetScreenMM(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, double *doublePtr)
}
declare 110 {
int Tk_GetSelection(Tcl_Interp *interp,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 |
declare 115 {
void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr)
}
declare 116 {
Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window)
}
declare 117 {
| | | 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 |
declare 115 {
void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr)
}
declare 116 {
Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window)
}
declare 117 {
void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageMaster model, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
}
declare 118 {
int Tk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 119 {
Atom Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
514 515 516 517 518 519 520 |
declare 128 {
void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)
}
declare 129 {
void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)
}
declare 130 {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 |
declare 128 {
void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)
}
declare 129 {
void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)
}
declare 130 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOf3DBorder(Tk_3DBorder border)
}
declare 131 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfAnchor(Tk_Anchor anchor)
}
declare 132 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfBitmap(Display *display, Pixmap bitmap)
}
declare 133 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfCapStyle(int cap)
}
declare 134 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfColor(XColor *colorPtr)
}
declare 135 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfCursor(Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor)
}
declare 136 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfFont(Tk_Font font)
}
declare 137 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfImage(Tk_ImageMaster model)
}
declare 138 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(int join)
}
declare 139 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfJustify(Tk_Justify justify)
}
declare 140 {
CONST84_RETURN char *Tk_NameOfRelief(int relief)
}
declare 141 {
Tk_Window Tk_NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 142 {
void Tk_OwnSelection(Tk_Window tkwin,
Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc,
ClientData clientData)
}
declare 143 {
int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv,
const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags)
}
declare 144 {
void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
int width, int height)
}
declare 145 {
void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
int subsampleX, int subsampleY)
}
declare 146 {
int Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
}
declare 147 {
void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle)
}
declare 148 {
void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height )
}
declare 149 {
void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
}
declare 150 {
void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height)
}
declare 151 {
int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y)
}
declare 152 {
int Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 |
declare 193 {
void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 194 {
void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 195 {
| | | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 |
declare 193 {
void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 194 {
void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 195 {
void Tk_FreeConfigOptions(char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken,
Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 196 {
void Tk_FreeSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)
}
declare 197 {
void Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
770 771 772 773 774 775 776 |
XColor *Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 203 {
Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 204 {
Tcl_Obj *Tk_GetOptionInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp,
| | | | 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 |
XColor *Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 203 {
Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 204 {
Tcl_Obj *Tk_GetOptionInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp,
char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 205 {
Tcl_Obj *Tk_GetOptionValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 206 {
int Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr)
}
declare 207 {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr)
}
declare 210 {
int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr)
}
declare 211 {
| | | | | 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr)
}
declare 210 {
int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr)
}
declare 211 {
int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 212 {
void Tk_MainEx(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc,
Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 213 {
void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)
}
declare 214 {
int Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin,
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr)
}
declare 215 {
void Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
939 940 941 942 943 944 945 |
}
# New in 8.4a5
#
declare 245 {
void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
}
| | | | 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 |
}
# New in 8.4a5
#
declare 245 {
void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
}
declare 246 {
void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int compRule)
}
declare 247 {
void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule)
}
declare 248 {
int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display, int collapse)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 |
}
declare 260 {
Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId,
Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
}
declare 261 {
void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element,
| | | | | | 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 |
}
declare 260 {
Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId,
Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
}
declare 261 {
void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element,
char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height,
int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
}
declare 262 {
void Tk_GetElementBox(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element,
char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width,
int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
int *heightPtr)
}
declare 263 {
int Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element,
char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 264 {
void Tk_DrawElement(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element,
char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int state)
}
# TIP#116
declare 265 {
int Tk_PhotoExpand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
int width, int height)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 |
# build against legacy sources.
declare 272 {
void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr)
}
declare 273 {
void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
}
| < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < | 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 |
# build against legacy sources.
declare 272 {
void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr)
}
declare 273 {
void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
}
declare 290 {
void TkUnusedStubEntry(void)
}
# Define the platform specific public Tk interface. These functions are
# only available on the designated platform.
interface tkPlat
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 |
declare 5 win {
int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd,
UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result)
}
################################
# Aqua specific functions
| | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | < > | < | | < > | | 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 |
declare 5 win {
int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd,
UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result)
}
################################
# Aqua specific functions
declare 0 aqua {
void Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler(
Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc)
}
declare 1 aqua {
void Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus(void)
}
declare 2 aqua {
void Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor(int tkOwnsIt)
}
declare 3 aqua {
void TkMacOSXInitMenus(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 4 aqua {
void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 5 aqua {
void TkGenWMConfigureEvent(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width,
int height, int flags)
}
declare 6 aqua {
void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 7 aqua {
void *TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable)
}
declare 8 aqua {
void *TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable)
}
declare 9 aqua {
void Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier(void)
}
declare 10 aqua {
int Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront(void)
}
declare 11 aqua {
Tk_Window Tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow(void *w)
}
declare 12 aqua {
void *Tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable(Drawable drawable)
}
# Replaces TkMacOSXDrawable
declare 13 aqua {
void *Tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable(Drawable drawable)
}
declare 16 aqua {
void TkGenWMConfigureEvent_(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width,
int height, int flags)
}
##############################################################################
# Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tk.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include <tcl.h> | | | > > > > > > > | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include <tcl.h> #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION != 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 6) # error Tk 8.6 must be compiled with tcl.h from Tcl 8.6 or better #endif #ifndef CONST84 # define CONST84 const # define CONST84_RETURN const #endif #ifndef CONST86 # define CONST86 CONST84 #endif #ifndef EXTERN # define EXTERN extern TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #endif /* * Utility macros: STRINGIFY takes an argument and wraps it in "" (double * quotation marks), JOIN joins two arguments. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | #endif /* * When version numbers change here, you must also go into the following files * and update the version numbers: * * library/tk.tcl (1 LOC patch) | | | | | | | | | 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 | #endif /* * When version numbers change here, you must also go into the following files * and update the version numbers: * * library/tk.tcl (1 LOC patch) * unix/configure.in (2 LOC Major, 2 LOC minor, 1 LOC patch) * win/configure.in (as above) * README (sections 0 and 1) * macosx/Tk-Common.xcconfig (not patchlevel) 1 LOC * win/README (not patchlevel) * unix/README (not patchlevel) * unix/tk.spec (1 LOC patch) * win/tcl.m4 (not patchlevel) * * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change for * the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against. */ #define TK_MAJOR_VERSION 8 #define TK_MINOR_VERSION 6 #define TK_RELEASE_LEVEL TCL_FINAL_RELEASE #define TK_RELEASE_SERIAL 17 #define TK_VERSION "8.6" #define TK_PATCH_LEVEL "8.6.17" /* * A special definition used to allow this header file to be included from * windows or mac resource files so that they can obtain version information. * RC_INVOKED is defined by default by the windows RC tool and manually set * for macintosh. * |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 |
|| defined(__cplusplus) || defined(_MSC_VER) || defined(__ICC)
# include <stddef.h>
#endif
#ifdef BUILD_tk
#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
| < < < < | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 |
|| defined(__cplusplus) || defined(_MSC_VER) || defined(__ICC)
# include <stddef.h>
#endif
#ifdef BUILD_tk
#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
#endif
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Decide whether or not to use input methods.
*/
#if defined(XNQueryInputStyle) && !defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
#define TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
#endif
/*
* Dummy types that are used by clients:
*/
#define Tk_ImageModel Tk_ImageMaster
typedef struct Tk_BindingTable_ *Tk_BindingTable;
typedef struct Tk_Canvas_ *Tk_Canvas;
typedef struct Tk_Cursor_ *Tk_Cursor;
typedef struct Tk_ErrorHandler_ *Tk_ErrorHandler;
typedef struct Tk_Font_ *Tk_Font;
typedef struct Tk_Image__ *Tk_Image;
typedef struct Tk_ImageMaster_ *Tk_ImageMaster;
typedef struct Tk_OptionTable_ *Tk_OptionTable;
typedef struct Tk_PostscriptInfo_ *Tk_PostscriptInfo;
typedef struct Tk_TextLayout_ *Tk_TextLayout;
typedef struct Tk_Window_ *Tk_Window;
typedef struct Tk_3DBorder_ *Tk_3DBorder;
typedef struct Tk_Style_ *Tk_Style;
typedef struct Tk_StyleEngine_ *Tk_StyleEngine;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 |
const char *optionName; /* Name used to specify option in Tcl
* commands. */
const char *dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */
const char *dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */
const char *defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified
* in command line, the option database, or
* the system. */
| < | | | | | | | | | < < < < | 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 |
const char *optionName; /* Name used to specify option in Tcl
* commands. */
const char *dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */
const char *dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */
const char *defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified
* in command line, the option database, or
* the system. */
int objOffset; /* Where in record to store a Tcl_Obj * that
* holds the value of this option, specified
* as an offset in bytes from the start of the
* record. Use the Tk_Offset macro to generate
* values for this. -1 means don't store the
* Tcl_Obj in the record. */
int internalOffset; /* Where in record to store the internal
* representation of the value of this option,
* such as an int or XColor *. This field is
* specified as an offset in bytes from the
* start of the record. Use the Tk_Offset
* macro to generate values for it. -1 means
* don't store the internal representation in
* the record. */
int flags; /* Any combination of the values defined
* below. */
const void *clientData; /* An alternate place to put option-specific
* data. Used for the monochrome default value
* for colors, etc. */
int typeMask; /* An arbitrary bit mask defined by the class
* manager; typically bits correspond to
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | /* * The following structure and function types are used by TK_OPTION_CUSTOM * options; the structure holds pointers to the functions needed by the Tk * option config code to handle a custom option. */ | < < < < < < < < | 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 |
/*
* The following structure and function types are used by TK_OPTION_CUSTOM
* options; the structure holds pointers to the functions needed by the Tk
* option config code to handle a custom option.
*/
typedef int (Tk_CustomOptionSetProc) (ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *widgRec,
int offset, char *saveInternalPtr, int flags);
typedef Tcl_Obj *(Tk_CustomOptionGetProc) (ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset);
typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc) (ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr, char *saveInternalPtr);
typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *internalPtr);
typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption {
const char *name; /* Name of the custom option. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | } Tk_ObjCustomOption; /* * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec structure. * Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure to a given field. */ | < | < | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | } Tk_ObjCustomOption; /* * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec structure. * Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure to a given field. */ #define Tk_Offset(type, field) ((int) offsetof(type, field)) /* Workaround for platforms missing offsetof(), e.g. VC++ 6.0 */ #ifndef offsetof # define offsetof(type, field) ((size_t) ((char *) &((type *) 0)->field)) #endif /* * The following two structures are used for error handling. When config |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 |
* option. */
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of
* a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was
* not saved as an object. */
double internalForm; /* The old value of the option, in some
* internal representation such as an int or
* (XColor *). Valid only if the field
| | | < | < < < | 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 |
* option. */
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of
* a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was
* not saved as an object. */
double internalForm; /* The old value of the option, in some
* internal representation such as an int or
* (XColor *). Valid only if the field
* optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset is < 0. The
* space must be large enough to accommodate a
* double, a long, or a pointer; right now it
* looks like a double (i.e., 8 bytes) is big
* enough. Also, using a double guarantees
* that the field is properly aligned for
* storing large values. */
} Tk_SavedOption;
#ifdef TCL_MEM_DEBUG
# define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 2
#else
# define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 20
#endif
typedef struct Tk_SavedOptions {
char *recordPtr; /* The data structure in which to restore
* configuration options. */
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to
* restore certain options. */
int numItems; /* The number of valid items in items field. */
Tk_SavedOption items[TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS];
/* Items used to hold old values. */
struct Tk_SavedOptions *nextPtr;
/* Points to next structure in list; needed if
* too many options changed to hold all the
* old values in a single structure. NULL
* means no more structures. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
351 352 353 354 355 356 357 | /* * This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets are in * development. */ #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG | < < < < < < | | < | 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 |
/*
* This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets are in
* development.
*/
#ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG
typedef int (Tk_OptionParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, CONST84 char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
typedef CONST86 char *(Tk_OptionPrintProc) (ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
typedef struct Tk_CustomOption {
Tk_OptionParseProc *parseProc;
/* Procedure to call to parse an option and
* store it in converted form. */
Tk_OptionPrintProc *printProc;
/* Procedure to return a printable string
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
386 387 388 389 390 391 392 |
* database, etc.
*/
typedef struct Tk_ConfigSpec {
int type; /* Type of option, such as TK_CONFIG_COLOR;
* see definitions below. Last option in table
* must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */
| | < | | < < < | | 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 |
* database, etc.
*/
typedef struct Tk_ConfigSpec {
int type; /* Type of option, such as TK_CONFIG_COLOR;
* see definitions below. Last option in table
* must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */
CONST86 char *argvName; /* Switch used to specify option in argv. NULL
* means this spec is part of a group. */
Tk_Uid dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */
Tk_Uid dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */
Tk_Uid defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified
* in command line or database. */
int offset; /* Where in widget record to store value; use
* Tk_Offset macro to generate values for
* this. */
int specFlags; /* Any combination of the values defined
* below; other bits are used internally by
* tkConfig.c. */
CONST86 Tk_CustomOption *customPtr;
/* If type is TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM then this is a
* pointer to info about how to parse and
* print the option. Otherwise it is
* irrelevant. */
} Tk_ConfigSpec;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
442 443 444 445 446 447 448 | * (internal-use-only flags are defined there). */ #define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1) #define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2) #define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) | < | < | | | | | 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 |
* (internal-use-only flags are defined there).
*/
#define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0)
#define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1)
#define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2)
#define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3)
#define TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED (1 << 4)
#define TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT 0x100
#endif /* __NO_OLD_CONFIG */
/*
* Structure used to specify how to handle argv options.
*/
typedef struct {
CONST86 char *key; /* The key string that flags the option in the
* argv array. */
int type; /* Indicates option type; see below. */
char *src; /* Value to be used in setting dst; usage
* depends on type. */
char *dst; /* Address of value to be modified; usage
* depends on type. */
CONST86 char *help; /* Documentation message describing this
* option. */
} Tk_ArgvInfo;
/*
* Legal values for the type field of a Tk_ArgvInfo: see the user
* documentation for details.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
605 606 607 608 609 610 611 |
typedef Window (Tk_ClassCreateProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent,
ClientData instanceData);
typedef void (Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc) (ClientData instanceData);
typedef void (Tk_ClassModalProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
| < < < < | 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 |
typedef Window (Tk_ClassCreateProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent,
ClientData instanceData);
typedef void (Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc) (ClientData instanceData);
typedef void (Tk_ClassModalProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
unsigned int size;
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *worldChangedProc;
/* Procedure to invoke when the widget needs
* to respond in some way to a change in the
* world (font changes, etc.) */
Tk_ClassCreateProc *createProc;
/* Procedure to invoke when the platform-
* dependent window needs to be created. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
634 635 636 637 638 639 640 | * (or NULL if the structure is NULL). * * A more general version of this function may be useful if other * size-versioned structure pop up in the future: * * #define Tk_GetField(name, who, which) \ * (((who) == NULL) ? NULL : | | | | | | 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 |
* (or NULL if the structure is NULL).
*
* A more general version of this function may be useful if other
* size-versioned structure pop up in the future:
*
* #define Tk_GetField(name, who, which) \
* (((who) == NULL) ? NULL :
* (((who)->size <= Tk_Offset(name, which)) ? NULL :(name)->which))
*/
#define Tk_GetClassProc(procs, which) \
(((procs) == NULL) ? NULL : \
(((procs)->size <= Tk_Offset(Tk_ClassProcs, which)) ? NULL:(procs)->which))
/*
* Each geometry manager (the packer, the placer, etc.) is represented by a
* structure of the following form, which indicates procedures to invoke in
* the geometry manager to carry out certain functions.
*/
#define Tk_GeomLostContentProc Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc
typedef void (Tk_GeomRequestProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
typedef void (Tk_GeomLostContentProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
typedef struct Tk_GeomMgr {
const char *name; /* Name of the geometry manager (command used
* to invoke it, or name of widget class that
* allows embedded widgets). */
Tk_GeomRequestProc *requestProc;
/* Procedure to invoke when a content's
* requested geometry changes. */
Tk_GeomLostContentProc *lostSlaveProc;
/* Procedure to invoke when content is taken
* away from one geometry manager by another.
* NULL means geometry manager doesn't care
* when content lost. */
} Tk_GeomMgr;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
781 782 783 784 785 786 787 |
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED)
#define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)
#define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE)
#define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth)
#define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight)
| | < | 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 |
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED)
#define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)
#define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE)
#define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth)
#define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight)
/* Tk_InternalBorderWidth is deprecated */
#define Tk_InternalBorderWidth(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft)
#define Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft)
#define Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderRight)
#define Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) \
(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderTop)
#define Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) \
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
829 830 831 832 833 834 835 |
Tk_Uid classUid;
XWindowChanges changes;
unsigned int dummy6; /* dirtyChanges */
XSetWindowAttributes atts;
unsigned long dummy7; /* dirtyAtts */
unsigned int flags;
char *dummy8; /* handlerList */
| | | < < < < | 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 |
Tk_Uid classUid;
XWindowChanges changes;
unsigned int dummy6; /* dirtyChanges */
XSetWindowAttributes atts;
unsigned long dummy7; /* dirtyAtts */
unsigned int flags;
char *dummy8; /* handlerList */
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
XIC dummy9; /* inputContext */
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
ClientData *dummy10; /* tagPtr */
int dummy11; /* numTags */
int dummy12; /* optionLevel */
char *dummy13; /* selHandlerList */
char *dummy14; /* geomMgrPtr */
ClientData dummy15; /* geomData */
int reqWidth, reqHeight;
int internalBorderLeft;
char *dummy16; /* wmInfoPtr */
char *dummy17; /* classProcPtr */
ClientData dummy18; /* instanceData */
char *dummy19; /* privatePtr */
int internalBorderRight;
int internalBorderTop;
int internalBorderBottom;
int minReqWidth;
int minReqHeight;
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
int dummy20;
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
char *dummy21; /* geomMgrName */
Tk_Window dummy22; /* maintainerPtr */
} Tk_FakeWin;
/*
* Flag values for TkWindow (and Tk_FakeWin) structures are:
*
* TK_MAPPED: 1 means window is currently mapped,
* 0 means unmapped.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
965 966 967 968 969 970 971 |
typedef enum {
TK_STATE_NULL = -1, TK_STATE_ACTIVE, TK_STATE_DISABLED,
TK_STATE_NORMAL, TK_STATE_HIDDEN
} Tk_State;
typedef struct Tk_SmoothMethod {
| | < | < < < < | | < < < | 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 |
typedef enum {
TK_STATE_NULL = -1, TK_STATE_ACTIVE, TK_STATE_DISABLED,
TK_STATE_NORMAL, TK_STATE_HIDDEN
} Tk_State;
typedef struct Tk_SmoothMethod {
CONST86 char *name;
int (*coordProc) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints,
int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]);
void (*postscriptProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
double *coordPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps);
} Tk_SmoothMethod;
/*
* For each item in a canvas widget there exists one record with the following
* structure. Each actual item is represented by a record with the following
* stuff at its beginning, plus additional type-specific stuff after that.
*/
#define TK_TAG_SPACE 3
typedef struct Tk_Item {
int id; /* Unique identifier for this item (also
* serves as first tag for item). */
struct Tk_Item *nextPtr; /* Next in display list of all items in this
* canvas. Later items in list are drawn on
* top of earlier ones. */
Tk_Uid staticTagSpace[TK_TAG_SPACE];
/* Built-in space for limited # of tags. */
Tk_Uid *tagPtr; /* Pointer to array of tags. Usually points to
* staticTagSpace, but may point to malloc-ed
* space if there are lots of tags. */
int tagSpace; /* Total amount of tag space available at
* tagPtr. */
int numTags; /* Number of tag slots actually used at
* *tagPtr. */
struct Tk_ItemType *typePtr;/* Table of procedures that implement this
* type of item. */
int x1, y1, x2, y2; /* Bounding box for item, in integer canvas
* units. Set by item-specific code and
* guaranteed to contain every pixel drawn in
* item. Item area includes x1 and y1 but not
* x2 and y2. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 | #define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW 2 /* * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g. * lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget. */ | | < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < | < < < > > > > > > > > > > < | < | < < < | | 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 |
#define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW 2
/*
* Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g.
* lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget.
*/
#ifdef USE_OLD_CANVAS
typedef int (Tk_ItemCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv);
typedef int (Tk_ItemConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv, int flags);
typedef int (Tk_ItemCoordProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv);
#else
typedef int (Tk_ItemCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
typedef int (Tk_ItemConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
int flags);
typedef int (Tk_ItemCoordProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
#endif /* USE_OLD_CANVAS */
typedef void (Tk_ItemDeleteProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
Display *display);
typedef void (Tk_ItemDisplayProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width,
int height);
typedef double (Tk_ItemPointProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double *pointPtr);
typedef int (Tk_ItemAreaProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double *rectPtr);
typedef int (Tk_ItemPostscriptProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
typedef void (Tk_ItemScaleProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double originX, double originY, double scaleX,
double scaleY);
typedef void (Tk_ItemTranslateProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double deltaX, double deltaY);
#ifdef USE_OLD_CANVAS
typedef int (Tk_ItemIndexProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, char *indexString, int *indexPtr);
#else
typedef int (Tk_ItemIndexProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexString, int *indexPtr);
#endif /* USE_OLD_CANVAS */
typedef void (Tk_ItemCursorProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int index);
typedef int (Tk_ItemSelectionProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
#ifdef USE_OLD_CANVAS
typedef void (Tk_ItemInsertProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int beforeThis, char *string);
#else
typedef void (Tk_ItemInsertProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *string);
#endif /* USE_OLD_CANVAS */
typedef void (Tk_ItemDCharsProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int first, int last);
#ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
CONST86 char *name; /* The name of this type of item, such as
* "line". */
int itemSize; /* Total amount of space needed for item's
* record. */
Tk_ItemCreateProc *createProc;
/* Procedure to create a new item of this
* type. */
CONST86 Tk_ConfigSpec *configSpecs; /* Pointer to array of configuration specs for
* this type. Used for returning configuration
* info. */
Tk_ItemConfigureProc *configProc;
/* Procedure to call to change configuration
* options. */
Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;/* Procedure to call to get and set the item's
* coordinates. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 |
Tk_ItemInsertProc *insertProc;
/* Procedure to insert something into an
* item. */
Tk_ItemDCharsProc *dCharsProc;
/* Procedure to delete characters from an
* item. */
struct Tk_ItemType *nextPtr;/* Used to link types together into a list. */
| < < | | 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 |
Tk_ItemInsertProc *insertProc;
/* Procedure to insert something into an
* item. */
Tk_ItemDCharsProc *dCharsProc;
/* Procedure to delete characters from an
* item. */
struct Tk_ItemType *nextPtr;/* Used to link types together into a list. */
char *reserved1; /* Reserved for future extension. */
int reserved2; /* Carefully compatible with */
char *reserved3; /* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */
char *reserved4;
} Tk_ItemType;
/*
* Flag (used in the alwaysRedraw field) to say whether an item supports
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 |
int selBorderWidth; /* Width of border around selection. Read-only
* to items. */
XColor *selFgColorPtr; /* Foreground color for selected text.
* Read-only to items. */
Tk_Item *selItemPtr; /* Pointer to selected item. NULL means
* selection isn't in this canvas. Writable by
* items. */
| < | | < < < < | < < < | 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 |
int selBorderWidth; /* Width of border around selection. Read-only
* to items. */
XColor *selFgColorPtr; /* Foreground color for selected text.
* Read-only to items. */
Tk_Item *selItemPtr; /* Pointer to selected item. NULL means
* selection isn't in this canvas. Writable by
* items. */
int selectFirst; /* Character index of first selected
* character. Writable by items. */
int selectLast; /* Character index of last selected character.
* Writable by items. */
Tk_Item *anchorItemPtr; /* Item corresponding to "selectAnchor": not
* necessarily selItemPtr. Read-only to
* items. */
int selectAnchor; /* Character index of fixed end of selection
* (i.e. "select to" operation will use this
* as one end of the selection). Writable by
* items. */
Tk_3DBorder insertBorder; /* Used to draw vertical bar for insertion
* cursor. Read-only to items. */
int insertWidth; /* Total width of insertion cursor. Read-only
* to items. */
int insertBorderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border around insert cursor.
* Read-only to items. */
Tk_Item *focusItemPtr; /* Item that currently has the input focus, or
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 | * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing images: * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; | | | | | | 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 | * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing images: * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, int argc, char **argv, Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster model, ClientData *clientDataPtr); #else typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST86 char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], CONST86 Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster model, ClientData *clientDataPtr); #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ typedef ClientData (Tk_ImageGetProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData); typedef void (Tk_ImageDisplayProc) (ClientData clientData, Display *display, Drawable drawable, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, int drawableX, int drawableY); typedef void (Tk_ImageFreeProc) (ClientData clientData, Display *display); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 |
* image, etc.). It provides information common to all images of that type,
* such as the type name and a collection of procedures in the image manager
* that respond to various events. Each image manager is represented by one of
* these structures.
*/
struct Tk_ImageType {
| | | 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 |
* image, etc.). It provides information common to all images of that type,
* such as the type name and a collection of procedures in the image manager
* that respond to various events. Each image manager is represented by one of
* these structures.
*/
struct Tk_ImageType {
CONST86 char *name; /* Name of image type. */
Tk_ImageCreateProc *createProc;
/* Procedure to call to create a new image of
* this type. */
Tk_ImageGetProc *getProc; /* Procedure to call the first time
* Tk_GetImage is called in a new way (new
* visual or screen). */
Tk_ImageDisplayProc *displayProc;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 |
/*
* The following structure represents a particular file format for storing
* images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.). It provides information to allow image
* files of that format to be recognized and read into a photo image.
*/
struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat {
| | | 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 |
/*
* The following structure represents a particular file format for storing
* images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.). It provides information to allow image
* files of that format to be recognized and read into a photo image.
*/
struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat {
CONST86 char *name; /* Name of image file format */
Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *fileMatchProc;
/* Procedure to call to determine whether an
* image file matches this format. */
Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *stringMatchProc;
/* Procedure to call to determine whether the
* data in a string matches this format. */
Tk_ImageFileReadProc *fileReadProc;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 | * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and * types related to event handling that used to be in Tk but have moved to * Tcl. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | < | 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 | * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and * types related to event handling that used to be in Tk but have moved to * Tcl. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #define TK_READABLE TCL_READABLE #define TK_WRITABLE TCL_WRITABLE #define TK_EXCEPTION TCL_EXCEPTION #define TK_DONT_WAIT TCL_DONT_WAIT #define TK_X_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS #define TK_WINDOW_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 | /* Additional stuff that has moved to Tcl: */ #define Tk_EventuallyFree Tcl_EventuallyFree #define Tk_FreeProc Tcl_FreeProc #define Tk_Preserve Tcl_Preserve #define Tk_Release Tcl_Release | < | 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 | /* Additional stuff that has moved to Tcl: */ #define Tk_EventuallyFree Tcl_EventuallyFree #define Tk_FreeProc Tcl_FreeProc #define Tk_Preserve Tcl_Preserve #define Tk_Release Tcl_Release /* Removed Tk_Main, use macro instead */ #if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ (Tcl_FindExecutable(0), (Tcl_CreateInterp)())) #else #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 | */ typedef int (Tk_ErrorProc) (ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr); typedef void (Tk_EventProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GenericProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_ClientMessageProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GetSelProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, | | < < < < < | 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 | */ typedef int (Tk_ErrorProc) (ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr); typedef void (Tk_EventProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GenericProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_ClientMessageProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GetSelProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST86 char *portion); typedef void (Tk_LostSelProc) (ClientData clientData); typedef Tk_RestrictAction (Tk_RestrictProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) (ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes); /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Platform independent exported procedures and variables. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 | #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra | | < | 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 | #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra * arguments to Tk_PhotoPutBlock() et al; DO NOT DEFINE THIS WHEN BUILDING TK. * * This goes after the inclusion of the stubbed-decls so that the declarations * of what is actually there can be correct. */ #ifdef USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutBlock Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 | # endif # define Tk_PhotoExpand Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize # undef Tk_PhotoSetSize # endif # define Tk_PhotoSetSize Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ | < | 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 | # endif # define Tk_PhotoExpand Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize # undef Tk_PhotoSetSize # endif # define Tk_PhotoSetSize Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* RC_INVOKED */ /* |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tk3d.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
633 634 635 636 637 638 639 | * Tk_GetRelief -- * * Parse a relief description and return the corresponding relief value, * or an error. * * Results: * A standard Tcl return value. If all goes well then *reliefPtr is | | < > | | < | | | > | | > | | > | > | | | | > > > > | 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 |
* Tk_GetRelief --
*
* Parse a relief description and return the corresponding relief value,
* or an error.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl return value. If all goes well then *reliefPtr is
* filled in with one of the values TK_RELIEF_*
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_GetRelief(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
const char *name, /* Name of a relief type. */
int *reliefPtr) /* Where to store converted relief. */
{
char c;
size_t length;
int relief;
c = name[0];
length = strlen(name);
if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(name, "flat", length) == 0)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
} else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(name, "groove", length) == 0)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_GROOVE;
} else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(name, "raised", length) == 0)
&& (length >= 2)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
} else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(name, "ridge", length) == 0)
&& (length >= 2)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_RIDGE;
} else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(name, "solid", length) == 0)
&& (length >= 2)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_SOLID;
} else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(name, "sunken", length) == 0)
&& (length >= 2)) {
relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN;
} else {
if (interp) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad relief \"%.50s\": must be %s",
name, "flat, groove, raised, ridge, solid, or sunken"));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "RELIEF", NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (reliefPtr) {
*reliefPtr = relief;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_NameOfRelief --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 |
if (borderPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBorder found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (borderPtr != NULL); borderPtr = borderPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
| | | | 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 |
if (borderPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBorder found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (borderPtr != NULL); borderPtr = borderPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(borderPtr->resourceRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(borderPtr->objRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
}
}
return resultPtr;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tk3d.h.
1 2 3 4 5 | /* * tk3d.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions shared by the 3d border module. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | /* * tk3d.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions shared by the 3d border module. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK3D #define _TK3D |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 |
Screen *screen; /* Screen on which the border will be used. */
Visual *visual; /* Visual for all windows and pixmaps using
* the border. */
int depth; /* Number of bits per pixel of drawables where
* the border will be used. */
Colormap colormap; /* Colormap out of which pixels are
* allocated. */
| | | | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 |
Screen *screen; /* Screen on which the border will be used. */
Visual *visual; /* Visual for all windows and pixmaps using
* the border. */
int depth; /* Number of bits per pixel of drawables where
* the border will be used. */
Colormap colormap; /* Colormap out of which pixels are
* allocated. */
int resourceRefCount; /* Number of active uses of this color (each
* active use corresponds to a call to
* Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj or Tk_Get3DBorder).
* If this count is 0, then this structure is
* no longer valid and it isn't present in
* borderTable: it is being kept around only
* because there are objects referring to it.
* The structure is freed when objRefCount and
* resourceRefCount are both 0. */
int objRefCount; /* The number of Tcl objects that reference
* this structure. */
XColor *bgColorPtr; /* Background color (intensity between
* lightColorPtr and darkColorPtr). */
XColor *darkColorPtr; /* Color for darker areas (must free when
* deleting structure). NULL means shadows
* haven't been allocated yet.*/
XColor *lightColorPtr; /* Color used for lighter areas of border
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkArgv.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 |
if (length > 0) {
c = curArg[1];
} else {
c = 0;
}
/*
| | | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 |
if (length > 0) {
c = curArg[1];
} else {
c = 0;
}
/*
* Loop through the argument descriptors searching for one with the
* matching key string. If found, leave a pointer to it in matchPtr.
*/
matchPtr = NULL;
for (i = 0; i < 2; i++) {
if (i == 0) {
infoPtr = argTable;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
srcIndex++;
argc--;
break;
case TK_ARGV_FUNC: {
typedef int (ArgvFunc)(char *, const char *, const char *);
| | | | | | | | 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
srcIndex++;
argc--;
break;
case TK_ARGV_FUNC: {
typedef int (ArgvFunc)(char *, const char *, const char *);
ArgvFunc *handlerProc = (ArgvFunc *) infoPtr->src;
if (handlerProc(infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->key, argv[srcIndex])) {
srcIndex++;
argc--;
}
break;
}
case TK_ARGV_GENFUNC: {
typedef int (ArgvGenFunc)(char *, Tcl_Interp *, const char *, int,
const char **);
ArgvGenFunc *handlerProc = (ArgvGenFunc *) infoPtr->src;
argc = handlerProc(infoPtr->dst, interp, infoPtr->key, argc,
argv+srcIndex);
if (argc < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
}
case TK_ARGV_HELP:
PrintUsage(interp, argTable, flags);
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "ARG", "HELP", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
case TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION:
Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->src,
TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
break;
case TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE:
if (argc < 1) {
goto missingArg;
}
Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, argv[srcIndex],
TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
srcIndex++;
argc--;
break;
case TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE:
if (argc < 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkArray.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | /* * tkArray.h -- * * An array is a sequence of items, stored in a contiguous memory region. * Random access to any item is very fast. New items can be either appended * or prepended. An array may be traversed in the forward or backward direction. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | /* * tkArray.h -- * * An array is a sequence of items, stored in a contiguous memory region. * Random access to any item is very fast. New items can be either appended * or prepended. An array may be traversed in the forward or backward direction. * * Copyright (c) 2018-2019 Gregor Cramer. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ /* * Note that this file will not be included in header files, it is the purpose |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkAtom.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
152 153 154 155 156 157 158 |
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
if (mustFree) {
XFree(mustFree);
}
name = (const char *)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
| | | 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 |
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
if (mustFree) {
XFree(mustFree);
}
name = (const char *)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, name);
}
return (const char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | } name = atomNameArray[atom - 1]; hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew); Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom)); name = (const char *)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr); hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew); | | | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 |
}
name = atomNameArray[atom - 1];
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
name = (const char *)Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, name);
}
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkBind.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkBind.c -- * * This file provides functions that associate Tcl commands with X events * or sequences of X events. * * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | /* * tkBind.c -- * * This file provides functions that associate Tcl commands with X events * or sequences of X events. * * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright (c) 1998 Scriptics Corporation. * Copyright (c) 2018-2019 Gregor Cramer. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkDList.h" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | #ifdef NDEBUG # define DEBUG(expr) #else # define DEBUG(expr) expr #endif | < < < < < < < < | 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | #ifdef NDEBUG # define DEBUG(expr) #else # define DEBUG(expr) expr #endif #define SIZE_OF_ARRAY(arr) (sizeof(arr)/sizeof(arr[0])) /* * File structure: * * Structure definitions and static variables. * |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | */ /* * In old implementation (the one that used an event ring), <Double-1> and <1><1> were * equivalent sequences. However it is logical to give <Double-1> higher precedence * since it is more specific. Indeed <Double-1> includes time and space requirements, * which is not the case for <1><1>. | | | | | | | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 | */ /* * In old implementation (the one that used an event ring), <Double-1> and <1><1> were * equivalent sequences. However it is logical to give <Double-1> higher precedence * since it is more specific. Indeed <Double-1> includes time and space requirements, * which is not the case for <1><1>. * This can be achieved by setting PREFER_MOST_SPECIALIZED_EVENT to 1. */ #ifndef PREFER_MOST_SPECIALIZED_EVENT # define PREFER_MOST_SPECIALIZED_EVENT 0 #endif /* * Traditionally motion events can be combined with buttons in this way: <B1-B2-Motion>. * However it should be allowed to express this as <Motion-1-2> in addition. This can be * achieved by setting SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX to 1. */ #ifndef SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX # define SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX 0 /* set to 1 if wanted */ #endif /* * The output for motion events is of the type <B1-Motion>. This can be changed to become * <Motion-1> instead by setting PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX to 1, however this would be a * backwards incompatibility. */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
139 140 141 142 143 144 145 |
struct PatSeq; /* forward declaration */
/* We need this array for bookkeeping the last matching modifier mask per pattern. */
TK_ARRAY_DEFINE(PSModMaskArr, unsigned);
typedef struct PSEntry {
| | | 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 |
struct PatSeq; /* forward declaration */
/* We need this array for bookkeeping the last matching modifier mask per pattern. */
TK_ARRAY_DEFINE(PSModMaskArr, unsigned);
typedef struct PSEntry {
TK_DLIST_LINKS(PSEntry); /* Makes this struct a doubly linked list; must be first entry. */
Window window; /* Window of last match. */
struct PatSeq* psPtr; /* Pointer to pattern sequence. */
PSModMaskArr *lastModMaskArr;
/* Last matching modifier mask per pattern (except last pattern).
* Only needed if pattern sequence is not single (more than one
* pattern), and if one of these patterns contains a non-zero
* modifier mask. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | * binding tables may exist at once, either because there are multiple * applications open, or because there are multiple domains within an * application with separate event bindings for each (for example, each canvas * widget has a separate binding table for associating events with the items * in the canvas). */ | | | 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 |
* binding tables may exist at once, either because there are multiple
* applications open, or because there are multiple domains within an
* application with separate event bindings for each (for example, each canvas
* widget has a separate binding table for associating events with the items
* in the canvas).
*/
/* Defining the whole PromArr_* stuff (array of PSList entries) */
TK_ARRAY_DEFINE(PromArr, PSList);
typedef struct Tk_BindingTable_ {
Event eventInfo[TK_LASTEVENT];
/* Containing the most recent event for every event type. */
PromArr *promArr; /* Contains the promoted pattern sequences. */
Event *curEvent; /* Pointing to most recent event. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 |
*
* The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the helper
* functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both binding
* tables and virtual event tables.
*/
typedef struct {
| | | 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 |
*
* The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the helper
* functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both binding
* tables and virtual event tables.
*/
typedef struct {
void *object; /* For binding table, identifies the binding tag of the object
* (or class of objects) relative to which the event occurred.
* For virtual event table, always NULL. */
unsigned type; /* Type of event (from X). */
Detail detail; /* Additional information, such as keysym, button, Tk_Uid, or zero
* if nothing additional. */
} PatternTableKey;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | * Compute memory size of struct PatSeq with given pattern size. * The caller must be sure that pattern size is greater than zero. */ #define PATSEQ_MEMSIZE(numPats) (sizeof(PatSeq) + (numPats - 1)*sizeof(TkPattern)) /* * Constants that define how close together two events must be in milliseconds | | | 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 | * Compute memory size of struct PatSeq with given pattern size. * The caller must be sure that pattern size is greater than zero. */ #define PATSEQ_MEMSIZE(numPats) (sizeof(PatSeq) + (numPats - 1)*sizeof(TkPattern)) /* * Constants that define how close together two events must be in milliseconds * or pixels to be considered close in space or time. */ #define NEARBY_PIXELS 5 #define NEARBY_MS 500 /* * The following structure is used in the nameTable of a virtual event table |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
415 416 417 418 419 420 421 | /* * Flags for ModInfo structures: * * DOUBLE - Non-zero means duplicate this event, e.g. for double-clicks. * TRIPLE - Non-zero means triplicate this event, e.g. for triple-clicks. * QUADRUPLE - Non-zero means quadruple this event, e.g. for 4-fold-clicks. | | | 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 | /* * Flags for ModInfo structures: * * DOUBLE - Non-zero means duplicate this event, e.g. for double-clicks. * TRIPLE - Non-zero means triplicate this event, e.g. for triple-clicks. * QUADRUPLE - Non-zero means quadruple this event, e.g. for 4-fold-clicks. * MULT_CLICKS - Combination of all the above. */ #define DOUBLE (1<<0) #define TRIPLE (1<<1) #define QUADRUPLE (1<<2) #define MULT_CLICKS (DOUBLE|TRIPLE|QUADRUPLE) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
441 442 443 444 445 446 447 |
{"Button2", Button2Mask, 0},
{"B3", Button3Mask, 0},
{"Button3", Button3Mask, 0},
{"B4", Button4Mask, 0},
{"Button4", Button4Mask, 0},
{"B5", Button5Mask, 0},
{"Button5", Button5Mask, 0},
| < < < < < < < < | 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 |
{"Button2", Button2Mask, 0},
{"B3", Button3Mask, 0},
{"Button3", Button3Mask, 0},
{"B4", Button4Mask, 0},
{"Button4", Button4Mask, 0},
{"B5", Button5Mask, 0},
{"Button5", Button5Mask, 0},
{"Mod1", Mod1Mask, 0},
{"M1", Mod1Mask, 0},
{"Command", Mod1Mask, 0},
{"Mod2", Mod2Mask, 0},
{"M2", Mod2Mask, 0},
{"Option", Mod2Mask, 0},
{"Mod3", Mod3Mask, 0},
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
560 561 562 563 564 565 566 | #define MAPREQ (1<<20) #define CONFIGREQ (1<<21) #define RESIZEREQ (1<<22) #define CIRCREQ (1<<23) /* * These structs agree with xkey for the fields type, serial, send_event, display, | | | 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | #define MAPREQ (1<<20) #define CONFIGREQ (1<<21) #define RESIZEREQ (1<<22) #define CIRCREQ (1<<23) /* * These structs agree with xkey for the fields type, serial, send_event, display, * window, root, subwindow, time, x, y, x_root, and y_root. So when accessing * these fields we may pretend that we are using a struct xkey. */ #define HAS_XKEY_HEAD (KEY|BUTTON|MOTION|VIRTUAL|CROSSING|WHEEL) /* * The xcrossing struct puts the state field in a different location, but the other |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
709 710 711 712 713 714 715 | char *virtString, const char *eventString); static int DeleteVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp, VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString, const char *eventString); static void DeleteVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr); static void ExpandPercents(TkWindow *winPtr, const char *before, Event *eventPtr, unsigned scriptCount, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); static PatSeq * FindSequence(Tcl_Interp *interp, LookupTables *lookupTables, | | | > | | | | | | | 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 |
char *virtString, const char *eventString);
static int DeleteVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp, VirtualEventTable *vetPtr,
char *virtString, const char *eventString);
static void DeleteVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
static void ExpandPercents(TkWindow *winPtr, const char *before, Event *eventPtr,
unsigned scriptCount, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
static PatSeq * FindSequence(Tcl_Interp *interp, LookupTables *lookupTables,
void *object, const char *eventString, int create,
int allowVirtual, unsigned *maskPtr);
static void GetAllVirtualEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp, VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
static const char * GetField(const char *p, char *copy, unsigned size);
static Tcl_Obj * GetPatternObj(const PatSeq *psPtr);
static int GetVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp, VirtualEventTable *vetPtr,
Tcl_Obj *virtName);
static Tk_Uid GetVirtualEventUid(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *virtString);
static int HandleEventGenerate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void InitVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
static PatSeq * MatchPatterns(TkDisplay *dispPtr, Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, PSList *psList,
PSList *psSuccList, unsigned patIndex, const Event *eventPtr,
void *object, PatSeq **physPtrPtr);
static int NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *tkwinPtr);
static unsigned ParseEventDescription(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char **eventStringPtr,
TkPattern *patPtr, unsigned *eventMaskPtr);
static void DoWarp(void *clientData);
static PSList * GetLookupForEvent(LookupTables* lookupPtr, const Event *eventPtr,
Tcl_Obj *object, int onlyConsiderDetailedEvents);
static void ClearLookupTable(LookupTables *lookupTables, void *object);
static void ClearPromotionLists(Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, void *object);
static PSEntry * MakeListEntry(PSList *pool, PatSeq *psPtr, int needModMasks);
static void RemovePatSeqFromLookup(LookupTables *lookupTables, PatSeq *psPtr);
static void RemovePatSeqFromPromotionLists(Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, PatSeq *psPtr);
static PatSeq * DeletePatSeq(PatSeq *psPtr);
static void InsertPatSeq(LookupTables *lookupTables, PatSeq *psPtr);
#if SUPPORT_DEBUGGING
void TkpDumpPS(const PatSeq *psPtr);
void TkpDumpPSList(const PSList *psList);
#endif
/*
* Some useful helper functions.
*/
#if SUPPORT_DEBUGGING
static int BindCount = 0; /* Can be set or queried from Tcl through 'event debug' subcommand. Otherwise not used. */
#endif
static unsigned Max(unsigned a, unsigned b) { return a < b ? b : a; }
static int Abs(int n) { return n < 0 ? -n : n; }
static int IsOdd(int n) { return n & 1; }
static int TestNearbyTime(int lhs, int rhs) { return Abs(lhs - rhs) <= NEARBY_MS; }
static int TestNearbyCoords(int lhs, int rhs) { return Abs(lhs - rhs) <= NEARBY_PIXELS; }
static int
IsSubsetOf(
unsigned lhsMask, /* Is this a subset... */
unsigned rhsMask) /* ...of this bit field? */
{
return (lhsMask & rhsMask) == lhsMask;
}
static const char*
SkipSpaces(
const char* s)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
788 789 790 791 792 793 794 |
return s;
}
static unsigned
GetButtonNumber(
const char *field)
{
| < | < > | 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 |
return s;
}
static unsigned
GetButtonNumber(
const char *field)
{
assert(field);
return (field[0] >= '1' && field[0] <= '5' && field[1] == '\0') ? field[0] - '0' : 0;
}
static Time
CurrentTimeInMilliSecs(void)
{
Tcl_Time now;
Tcl_GetTime(&now);
return ((Time) now.sec)*1000 + ((Time) now.usec)/1000;
}
static Info
GetInfo(
const PatSeq *psPtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
846 847 848 849 850 851 852 |
for (i = 0; i < sndMatchPtr->numPats; ++i) {
if (GetInfo(sndMatchPtr, i)) { sndCount += GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i); }
}
return sndCount - fstCount;
}
| | | | | | | | | 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 |
for (i = 0; i < sndMatchPtr->numPats; ++i) {
if (GetInfo(sndMatchPtr, i)) { sndCount += GetCount(sndMatchPtr, i); }
}
return sndCount - fstCount;
}
static int
IsKeyEventType(
int eventType)
{
return eventType == KeyPress || eventType == KeyRelease;
}
static int
IsButtonEventType(
unsigned eventType)
{
return eventType == ButtonPress || eventType == ButtonRelease;
}
static int
MatchEventNearby(
const XEvent *lhs, /* Previous button event */
const XEvent *rhs) /* Current button event */
{
assert(lhs);
assert(rhs);
assert(IsButtonEventType(lhs->type));
assert(lhs->type == rhs->type);
/* assert: lhs->xbutton.time <= rhs->xbutton.time */
return TestNearbyTime(rhs->xbutton.time, lhs->xbutton.time)
&& TestNearbyCoords(rhs->xbutton.x_root, lhs->xbutton.x_root)
&& TestNearbyCoords(rhs->xbutton.y_root, lhs->xbutton.y_root);
}
static int
MatchEventRepeat(
const XKeyEvent *lhs, /* Previous key event */
const XKeyEvent *rhs) /* Current key event */
{
assert(lhs);
assert(rhs);
assert(IsKeyEventType(lhs->type));
assert(lhs->type == rhs->type);
/* assert: lhs->time <= rhs->time */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
925 926 927 928 929 930 931 |
PSList_Append(pool, psEntry);
}
static void
ClearList(
PSList *psList,
PSList *pool,
| | | 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 |
PSList_Append(pool, psEntry);
}
static void
ClearList(
PSList *psList,
PSList *pool,
void *object)
{
assert(psList);
assert(pool);
if (object) {
PSEntry *psEntry;
PSEntry *psNext;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
989 990 991 992 993 994 995 |
unsigned state)
{
if (!(state & ALL_BUTTONS)) { return 0; }
if (state & Button1Mask) { return 1; }
if (state & Button2Mask) { return 2; }
if (state & Button3Mask) { return 3; }
if (state & Button4Mask) { return 4; }
| < < < < | | 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 |
unsigned state)
{
if (!(state & ALL_BUTTONS)) { return 0; }
if (state & Button1Mask) { return 1; }
if (state & Button2Mask) { return 2; }
if (state & Button3Mask) { return 3; }
if (state & Button4Mask) { return 4; }
return 5;
}
static void
SetupPatternKey(
PatternTableKey *key,
const PatSeq *psPtr)
{
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 |
{
PatternTableKey key;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
assert(lookupTables);
assert(eventPtr);
| | | 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 |
{
PatternTableKey key;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
assert(lookupTables);
assert(eventPtr);
/* Otherwise on some systems the key contains uninitialized bytes. */
memset(&key, 0, sizeof(PatternTableKey));
if (onlyConsiderDetailedEvents) {
switch (eventPtr->xev.type) {
case ButtonPress: /* fallthru */
case ButtonRelease: key.detail.info = eventPtr->xev.xbutton.button; break;
case MotionNotify: key.detail.info = ButtonNumberFromState(eventPtr->xev.xmotion.state); break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ClearLookupTable(
LookupTables *lookupTables,
| | | 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ClearLookupTable(
LookupTables *lookupTables,
void *object)
{
Tcl_HashSearch search;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *nextPtr;
PSList *pool = &lookupTables->entryPool;
assert(lookupTables);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 |
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ClearPromotionLists(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr,
| | | < | 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 |
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ClearPromotionLists(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr,
void *object)
{
size_t i, newArraySize = 0;
assert(bindPtr);
for (i = 0; i < PromArr_Size(bindPtr->promArr); ++i) {
PSList *psList = PromArr_Get(bindPtr->promArr, i);
ClearList(psList, &bindPtr->lookupTables.entryPool, object);
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psList)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 | * Side effects: * Memory allocated. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ /* | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 |
* Side effects:
* Memory allocated.
*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Windows compiler does not allow the definition of these static variables inside a function,
* otherwise this should belong to function TkBindInit().
*/
TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(bindMutex);
static int initialized = 0;
void
TkBindInit(
TkMainInfo *mainPtr) /* The newly created application. */
{
BindInfo *bindInfoPtr;
assert(mainPtr);
/* Otherwise virtual events can't be supported. */
assert(sizeof(XEvent) >= sizeof(XVirtualEvent));
/* Is type of TkPattern.info well defined? */
assert(sizeof(Info) >= sizeof(KeySym));
assert(sizeof(Info) >= sizeof(unsigned));
/* Ensure that our matching algorithm is working (when testing detail). */
assert(sizeof(Detail) == sizeof(Tk_Uid));
/* Test expected indices of Button1..Button5, otherwise our button handling is not working. */
assert(Button1 == 1 && Button2 == 2 && Button3 == 3 && Button4 == 4 && Button5 == 5);
assert(Button2Mask == (Button1Mask << 1));
assert(Button3Mask == (Button1Mask << 2));
assert(Button4Mask == (Button1Mask << 3));
assert(Button5Mask == (Button1Mask << 4));
/* Test expected values of button motion masks, otherwise our button handling is not working. */
assert(Button1MotionMask == Button1Mask);
assert(Button2MotionMask == Button2Mask);
assert(Button3MotionMask == Button3Mask);
assert(Button4MotionMask == Button4Mask);
assert(Button5MotionMask == Button5Mask);
/* Because we expect zero if keySym is empty. */
assert(NoSymbol == 0L);
/* This must be a union, not a struct, otherwise comparison with NULL will not work. */
assert(Tk_Offset(Detail, name) == Tk_Offset(Detail, info));
/* We use some constraints about X*Event. */
assert(Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, x_root) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, x_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, y_root) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, y_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, border_width) == Tk_Offset(XConfigureEvent, border_width));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, width) == Tk_Offset(XConfigureEvent, width));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XCirculateRequestEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XConfigureEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XGravityEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XMapEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XReparentEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, window) == Tk_Offset(XUnmapEvent, window));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, x) == Tk_Offset(XConfigureEvent, x));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, x) == Tk_Offset(XGravityEvent, x));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, y) == Tk_Offset(XConfigureEvent, y));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCreateWindowEvent, y) == Tk_Offset(XGravityEvent, y));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XEnterWindowEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XLeaveWindowEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, root) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, root) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, root) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, state) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, state));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, state) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, state));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, subwindow) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, subwindow));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, subwindow) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, subwindow));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, subwindow) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, subwindow));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, time) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, time));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, x));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, x));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, x));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x_root) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, x_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x_root) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, x_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, x_root) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, x_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, y));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, y));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, y));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y_root) == Tk_Offset(XButtonEvent, y_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y_root) == Tk_Offset(XCrossingEvent, y_root));
assert(Tk_Offset(XKeyEvent, y_root) == Tk_Offset(XMotionEvent, y_root));
/*
* Initialize the static data structures used by the binding package. They
* are only initialized once, no matter how many interps are created.
*/
if (!initialized) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
unsigned long
Tk_CreateBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to create binding. */
| | | 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
unsigned long
Tk_CreateBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to create binding. */
void *object, /* Token for object with which binding is associated. */
const char *eventString, /* String describing event sequence that triggers binding. */
const char *script, /* Contains Tcl script to execute when binding triggers. */
int append) /* 0 means replace any existing binding for eventString;
* 1 means append to that binding. If the existing binding is
* for a callback function and not a Tcl command string, the
* existing binding will always be replaced. */
{
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_DeleteBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to delete binding. */
| | | 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_DeleteBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to delete binding. */
void *object, /* Token for object with which binding is associated. */
const char *eventString) /* String describing event sequence that triggers binding. */
{
PatSeq *psPtr;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(object);
assert(eventString);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *
Tk_GetBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for binding. */
| | | 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *
Tk_GetBinding(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for binding. */
void *object, /* Token for object with which binding is associated. */
const char *eventString) /* String describing event sequence that triggers binding. */
{
const PatSeq *psPtr;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(object);
assert(eventString);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_GetAllBindings(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter returning result or error. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
| | | 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_GetAllBindings(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter returning result or error. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
void *object) /* Token for object. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(object);
if ((hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 |
*/
static void
RemovePatSeqFromPromotionLists(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PatSeq *psPtr) /* Remove this pattern sequence. */
{
| | | 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 |
*/
static void
RemovePatSeqFromPromotionLists(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PatSeq *psPtr) /* Remove this pattern sequence. */
{
size_t i;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(psPtr);
for (i = 0; i < PromArr_Size(bindPtr->promArr); ++i) {
PSList *psList = PromArr_Get(bindPtr->promArr, i);
PSEntry *psEntry;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 |
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_DeleteAllBindings(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to delete bindings. */
| | | 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 |
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_DeleteAllBindings(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to delete bindings. */
void *object) /* Token for object. */
{
PatSeq *psPtr;
PatSeq *nextPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(object);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 |
void
Tk_BindEvent(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
XEvent *eventPtr, /* What actually happened. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window on display where event occurred (needed in order to
* locate display information). */
int numObjects, /* Number of objects at *objArr. */
| | | 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 |
void
Tk_BindEvent(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
XEvent *eventPtr, /* What actually happened. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window on display where event occurred (needed in order to
* locate display information). */
int numObjects, /* Number of objects at *objArr. */
void **objArr) /* Array of one or more objects to check for a matching binding. */
{
Tcl_Interp *interp;
ScreenInfo *screenPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
TkDisplay *oldDispPtr;
Event *curEvent;
TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 |
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
bindInfoPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
curEvent = bindPtr->eventInfo + eventPtr->type;
/*
| < < < < < < < | > < < < < < < < < < | | | | 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 |
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
bindInfoPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
curEvent = bindPtr->eventInfo + eventPtr->type;
/*
* Compute current time needed for "event generate",
* and reset counters for Key and Button events.
*/
switch (eventPtr->type) {
case EnterNotify:
case LeaveNotify:
if (eventPtr->xcrossing.time) {
bindInfoPtr->lastCurrentTime = CurrentTimeInMilliSecs();
bindInfoPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
}
break;
case KeyPress:
case KeyRelease: {
int reset = 1;
if (eventPtr->xkey.time) {
bindInfoPtr->lastCurrentTime = CurrentTimeInMilliSecs();
bindInfoPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xkey.time;
}
/* Modifier keys should not influence button events. */
for (i = 0; i < (unsigned) dispPtr->numModKeyCodes; ++i) {
if (dispPtr->modKeyCodes[i] == eventPtr->xkey.keycode) {
reset = 0;
}
}
if (reset) {
/* Reset repetition count for button events. */
bindPtr->eventInfo[ButtonPress].countAny = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[ButtonPress].countDetailed = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[ButtonRelease].countAny = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[ButtonRelease].countDetailed = 0;
}
break;
}
case ButtonPress:
case ButtonRelease:
/* Reset repetition count for key events. */
bindPtr->eventInfo[KeyPress].countAny = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[KeyPress].countDetailed = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[KeyRelease].countAny = 0;
bindPtr->eventInfo[KeyRelease].countDetailed = 0;
/* fallthru */
case MotionNotify:
if (eventPtr->xmotion.time) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 |
bindPtr->curEvent = curEvent;
physTables = &bindPtr->lookupTables;
scriptCount = 0;
arraySize = 0;
Tcl_DStringInit(&scripts);
if ((size_t) numObjects > SIZE_OF_ARRAY(matchPtrBuf)) {
| | | 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 |
bindPtr->curEvent = curEvent;
physTables = &bindPtr->lookupTables;
scriptCount = 0;
arraySize = 0;
Tcl_DStringInit(&scripts);
if ((size_t) numObjects > SIZE_OF_ARRAY(matchPtrBuf)) {
/* It's unrealistic that the buffer size is too small, but who knows? */
matchPtrArr = (PatSeq **)ckalloc(numObjects*sizeof(matchPtrArr[0]));
}
memset(matchPtrArr, 0, numObjects*sizeof(matchPtrArr[0]));
if (!PromArr_IsEmpty(bindPtr->promArr)) {
for (k = 0; k < (unsigned) numObjects; ++k) {
psl[1] = PromArr_Last(bindPtr->promArr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 |
* usually this list only contains one or two patterns.
*/
for (i = PromArr_Size(bindPtr->promArr); i > 0; --i, --psl[0], --psl[1]) {
psPtr[0] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[0], psl[1], i, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
if (IsBetterMatch(matchPtrArr[k], psPtr[0])) {
| | | | 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 |
* usually this list only contains one or two patterns.
*/
for (i = PromArr_Size(bindPtr->promArr); i > 0; --i, --psl[0], --psl[1]) {
psPtr[0] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[0], psl[1], i, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
if (IsBetterMatch(matchPtrArr[k], psPtr[0])) {
/* We will process it later, because we still may find a pattern with better match. */
matchPtrArr[k] = psPtr[0];
}
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psl[1])) {
/* We have promoted sequences, adjust array size. */
arraySize = Max(i + 1, arraySize);
}
}
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 |
assert(psl[0] == NULL || psl[0] != psl[1]);
psPtr[0] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[0], psSuccList, 0, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
psPtr[1] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[1], psSuccList, 0, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psSuccList)) {
| | | 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 |
assert(psl[0] == NULL || psl[0] != psl[1]);
psPtr[0] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[0], psSuccList, 0, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
psPtr[1] = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psl[1], psSuccList, 0, curEvent, objArr[k], NULL);
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psSuccList)) {
/* We have promoted sequences, adjust array size. */
arraySize = Max(1u, arraySize);
}
bestPtr = psPtr[0] ? psPtr[0] : psPtr[1];
if (matchPtrArr[k]) {
if (IsBetterMatch(matchPtrArr[k], bestPtr)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 |
matchPtrArr[k] = matchPtr;
}
}
}
if (matchPtrArr[k]) {
ExpandPercents(winPtr, matchPtrArr[k]->script, curEvent, scriptCount++, &scripts);
| | | 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 |
matchPtrArr[k] = matchPtr;
}
}
}
if (matchPtrArr[k]) {
ExpandPercents(winPtr, matchPtrArr[k]->script, curEvent, scriptCount++, &scripts);
/* Null is added to the scripts string to separate the various scripts. */
Tcl_DStringAppend(&scripts, "", 1);
}
}
PromArr_SetSize(bindPtr->promArr, arraySize);
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 |
}
break;
}
}
}
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psList)) {
| | | | 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 |
}
break;
}
}
}
if (!PSList_IsEmpty(psList)) {
/* We still have promoted sequences, adjust array size. */
newArraySize = Max(i + 1, newArraySize);
}
}
PromArr_SetSize(bindPtr->promArr, newArraySize);
if (matchPtrArr != matchPtrBuf) {
ckfree(matchPtrArr);
}
if (Tcl_DStringLength(&scripts) == 0) {
return; /* Nothing to do. */
}
/*
* Now go back through and evaluate the binding for each object, in order,
* dealing with "break" and "continue" exceptions appropriately.
*
* There are two tricks here:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 |
* something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been freed, but we
* can tell that by first checking to see if winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(bindInfoPtr);
for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&scripts), end = p + Tcl_DStringLength(&scripts); p < end; ) {
| | | 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 |
* something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been freed, but we
* can tell that by first checking to see if winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(bindInfoPtr);
for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&scripts), end = p + Tcl_DStringLength(&scripts); p < end; ) {
size_t len = strlen(p);
int code;
if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted) {
++screenPtr->bindingDepth;
}
Tcl_AllowExceptions(interp);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 |
*/
/* helper function */
static int
VirtPatIsBound(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PatSeq *psPtr, /* Test this pattern. */
| | | | | 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 |
*/
/* helper function */
static int
VirtPatIsBound(
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PatSeq *psPtr, /* Test this pattern. */
void *object, /* Check for this binding tag. */
PatSeq **physPtrPtr) /* Input: the best physical event.
* Output: the physical event associated with matching virtual event. */
{
PatternTableKey key;
const struct VirtOwners *owners;
unsigned i;
assert(bindPtr);
assert(psPtr);
assert(!psPtr->object);
assert(physPtrPtr);
if (*physPtrPtr) {
const TkPattern *physPatPtr = (*physPtrPtr)->pats;
const TkPattern *virtPatPtr = psPtr->pats;
if (physPatPtr->info || !virtPatPtr->info) {
if (IsSubsetOf(virtPatPtr->modMask, physPatPtr->modMask)) {
return 0; /* We cannot surpass this match. */
}
}
}
/* Otherwise on some systems the key contains uninitialized bytes. */
memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key));
key.object = object;
key.type = VirtualEvent;
owners = psPtr->ptr.owners;
for (i = 0; i < VirtOwners_Size(owners); ++i) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 |
return 0;
}
/* helper function */
static int
Compare(
const PatSeq *fstMatchPtr,
| | | 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 |
return 0;
}
/* helper function */
static int
Compare(
const PatSeq *fstMatchPtr,
const PatSeq *sndMatchPtr) /* Most recent match. */
{
int diff;
if (!fstMatchPtr) { return +1; }
assert(sndMatchPtr);
diff = CountSpecialized(fstMatchPtr, sndMatchPtr);
return diff ? diff : (int) sndMatchPtr->count - (int) fstMatchPtr->count;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 |
/* Finally compare modifier masks of last pattern. */
if (IsSubsetOf(fstModMask, sndModMask)) { ++sndCount; }
if (IsSubsetOf(sndModMask, fstModMask)) { ++fstCount; }
return fstCount - sndCount;
}
static PatSeq *
MatchPatterns(
TkDisplay *dispPtr, /* Display from which the event came. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PSList *psList, /* List of potentially matching patterns, can be NULL. */
PSList *psSuccList, /* Add all matching higher-level pattern sequences to this list.
* Can be NULL. */
unsigned patIndex, /* Match only this tag in sequence. */
const Event *curEvent, /* Match this event. */
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 |
/* Finally compare modifier masks of last pattern. */
if (IsSubsetOf(fstModMask, sndModMask)) { ++sndCount; }
if (IsSubsetOf(sndModMask, fstModMask)) { ++fstCount; }
return fstCount - sndCount;
}
/* helper function */
static int
IsPSInPSList(
const PatSeq *psPtr, /* Is this pattern sequence... */
const PSList *psList) /* ...an element of this list of patterns sequence? */
{
PSEntry *psEntry;
TK_DLIST_FOREACH(psEntry, psList) {
if (psEntry->psPtr == psPtr) { return 1; }
}
return 0;
}
static PatSeq *
MatchPatterns(
TkDisplay *dispPtr, /* Display from which the event came. */
Tk_BindingTable bindPtr, /* Table in which to look for bindings. */
PSList *psList, /* List of potentially matching patterns, can be NULL. */
PSList *psSuccList, /* Add all matching higher-level pattern sequences to this list.
* Can be NULL. */
unsigned patIndex, /* Match only this tag in sequence. */
const Event *curEvent, /* Match this event. */
void *object, /* Check for this binding tag. */
PatSeq **physPtrPtr) /* Input: the best physical event; NULL if we test physical events.
* Output: the associated physical event for the best matching virtual
* event; NULL when we match physical events. */
{
Window window;
PSEntry *psEntry;
PatSeq *bestPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 |
assert(psPtr->numPats > patIndex);
if (psPtr->object
? psPtr->object == object
: VirtPatIsBound(bindPtr, psPtr, object, physPtrPtr)) {
TkPattern *patPtr = psPtr->pats + patIndex;
| | | | | | 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 |
assert(psPtr->numPats > patIndex);
if (psPtr->object
? psPtr->object == object
: VirtPatIsBound(bindPtr, psPtr, object, physPtrPtr)) {
TkPattern *patPtr = psPtr->pats + patIndex;
/* Ignore modifier key events, and KeyRelease events if the current event
* is of a different type (e.g. a Button event)
*/
psEntry->keepIt = isModKeyOnly || \
((patPtr->eventType != (unsigned) curEvent->xev.type) && curEvent->xev.type == KeyRelease);
if (patPtr->eventType == (unsigned) curEvent->xev.type
&& (curEvent->xev.type != CreateNotify
|| curEvent->xev.xcreatewindow.parent == window)
&& (!patPtr->name || patPtr->name == curEvent->detail.name)
&& (!patPtr->info || patPtr->info == curEvent->detail.info)) {
/*
* Resolve the modifier mask for Alt and Mod keys. Unfortunately this
* cannot be done in ParseEventDescription, otherwise this function would
* be the better place.
*/
unsigned modMask = ResolveModifiers(dispPtr, patPtr->modMask);
unsigned curModMask = ResolveModifiers(dispPtr, bindPtr->curModMask);
psEntry->expired = 1; /* Remove it from promotion list. */
psEntry->keepIt = 0; /* Don't keep matching patterns. */
if (IsSubsetOf(modMask, curModMask)) {
unsigned count = patPtr->info ? curEvent->countDetailed : curEvent->countAny;
if (patIndex < PSModMaskArr_Size(psEntry->lastModMaskArr)) {
PSModMaskArr_Set(psEntry->lastModMaskArr, patIndex, &modMask);
}
/*
* This pattern is finally matching.
*/
if (psPtr->numPats == patIndex + 1) {
if (patPtr->count <= count) {
/*
* This is also a final pattern (i.e. the pattern sequence is complete).
* We always prefer the pattern with better match.
* If completely equal than prefer most recently defined pattern.
*/
int cmp = Compare(bestPtr, psPtr);
if (cmp == 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 |
bestModMaskArr = psEntry->lastModMaskArr;
if (physPtrPtr) {
bestPhysPtr = *physPtrPtr;
}
}
} else {
DEBUG(psEntry->expired = 0;)
| | | > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > > > > | 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 |
bestModMaskArr = psEntry->lastModMaskArr;
if (physPtrPtr) {
bestPhysPtr = *physPtrPtr;
}
}
} else {
DEBUG(psEntry->expired = 0;)
psEntry->keepIt = 1; /* Don't remove it from promotion list. */
}
} else if (psSuccList) {
/*
* Not a final pattern, but matching (i.e. successive patterns match the pattern sequence so far),
* so promote the pattern sequence to next level if not already promoted in the success list.
* But do not promote if count of current pattern is not yet reached.
*/
if (!IsPSInPSList(psPtr, psSuccList)) {
if (patPtr->count == psEntry->count) {
PSEntry *psNewEntry;
assert(!patPtr->name);
psNewEntry = MakeListEntry(
&bindPtr->lookupTables.entryPool, psPtr, psPtr->modMaskUsed);
if (!PSModMaskArr_IsEmpty(psNewEntry->lastModMaskArr)) {
PSModMaskArr_Set(psNewEntry->lastModMaskArr, patIndex, &modMask);
}
assert(psNewEntry->keepIt);
assert(psNewEntry->count == 1u);
PSList_Append(psSuccList, psNewEntry);
psNewEntry->window = window; /* Bind to current window. */
} else {
assert(psEntry->count < patPtr->count);
DEBUG(psEntry->expired = 0;)
psEntry->count += 1;
psEntry->keepIt = 1; /* Don't remove it from promotion list. */
}
} else {
/*
* Pattern sequence is already present in the success list.
*/
DEBUG(psEntry->expired = 0;)
psEntry->keepIt = 1; /* Don't remove it from promotion list. */
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 | * See the user documentation. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_EventObjCmd( | | | > > > > > | > > > > > < < < < < < < < < < | 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_EventObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Main window associated with interpreter. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
int index, i;
char *name;
const char *event;
Tk_Window tkwin;
TkBindInfo bindInfo;
VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = { "add",
#if SUPPORT_DEBUGGING
"debug",
#endif
"delete", "generate", "info", NULL
};
enum options { EVENT_ADD,
#if SUPPORT_DEBUGGING
EVENT_DEBUG,
#endif
EVENT_DELETE, EVENT_GENERATE, EVENT_INFO
};
assert(clientData);
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(
interp, objv[1], optionStrings, sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
bindInfo = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->bindInfo;
vetPtr = &bindInfo->virtualEventTable;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 |
for (i = 3; i < objc; ++i) {
event = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
if (!CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
break;
case EVENT_DELETE:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "virtual ?sequence ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
if (objc == 3) {
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 |
for (i = 3; i < objc; ++i) {
event = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
if (!CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
break;
#if SUPPORT_DEBUGGING
case EVENT_DEBUG:
if (objc > 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "debug number");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(BindCount));
return TCL_OK;
}
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &BindCount) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return TCL_OK;
#endif
case EVENT_DELETE:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "virtual ?sequence ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
if (objc == 3) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 |
assert(eventString);
if (!(virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString))) {
return 0;
}
/*
| | | 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 |
assert(eventString);
if (!(virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString))) {
return 0;
}
/*
* Find/create physical event.
*/
if (!(psPtr = FindSequence(interp, &vetPtr->lookupTables, NULL, eventString, 1, 0, NULL))) {
return 0;
}
assert(TEST_PSENTRY(psPtr));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 |
assert(TEST_PSENTRY(psPtr));
if (!eventPSPtr || psPtr == eventPSPtr) {
VirtOwners *owners = psPtr->ptr.owners;
int iVirt = VirtOwners_Find(owners, vhPtr);
| | | 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 |
assert(TEST_PSENTRY(psPtr));
if (!eventPSPtr || psPtr == eventPSPtr) {
VirtOwners *owners = psPtr->ptr.owners;
int iVirt = VirtOwners_Find(owners, vhPtr);
assert(iVirt != -1); /* Otherwise we couldn't find owner, and this should not happen. */
/*
* Remove association between this physical event and the given
* virtual event that it triggers.
*/
if (VirtOwners_Size(owners) > 1) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 |
synch = 1;
warp = 0;
pos = TCL_QUEUE_TAIL;
for (i = 2; i < (unsigned) objc; i += 2) {
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
int badOpt = 0;
int index;
optionPtr = objv[i];
valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, optionPtr, fieldStrings,
sizeof(char *), "option", TCL_EXACT, &index) != TCL_OK) {
| > > > > > | 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 |
synch = 1;
warp = 0;
pos = TCL_QUEUE_TAIL;
for (i = 2; i < (unsigned) objc; i += 2) {
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
#if defined(_MSC_VER)
/* Work around MSVC compiler optimization bug, see [d93c8175fd]. */
volatile int badOpt = 0;
#else
int badOpt = 0;
#endif
int index;
optionPtr = objv[i];
valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, optionPtr, fieldStrings,
sizeof(char *), "option", TCL_EXACT, &index) != TCL_OK) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 |
}
break;
case EVENT_BUTTON:
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (flags & BUTTON) {
| < < < | 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 |
}
break;
case EVENT_BUTTON:
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (flags & BUTTON) {
event.general.xbutton.button = number;
} else {
badOpt = 1;
}
break;
case EVENT_COUNT:
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 | } dispPtr->warpWindow = warpWindow; } dispPtr->warpMainwin = mainWin; dispPtr->warpX = event.general.xmotion.x; dispPtr->warpY = event.general.xmotion.y; | < < < < < < < < | < | | | | 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 |
}
dispPtr->warpWindow = warpWindow;
}
dispPtr->warpMainwin = mainWin;
dispPtr->warpX = event.general.xmotion.x;
dispPtr->warpY = event.general.xmotion.y;
if (!(dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP)) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DoWarp, dispPtr);
dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
}
}
/*
* Now we have constructed the event, inject it into the event handling
* code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 |
*tkwinPtr = tkwin;
return 1;
}
/*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
| | | | | | | < < < < | < | | < | | < > > | > | | | | > > | | > | 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 |
*tkwinPtr = tkwin;
return 1;
}
/*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DoWarp --
*
* Perform warping of mouse pointer. Executed as an idle handler only.
*
* Results:
* None
*
* Side effects:
* Mouse pointer moves to a new location.
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DoWarp(
void *clientData)
{
TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *)clientData;
assert(clientData);
/*
* DoWarp was scheduled only if the window was mapped. It needs to be
* still mapped at the time the present idle callback is executed. Also
* one needs to guard against window destruction in the meantime.
* Finally, the case warpWindow == NULL is special in that it means
* the whole screen.
*/
if (!dispPtr->warpWindow ||
(Tk_IsMapped(dispPtr->warpWindow) && Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->warpWindow) != None)) {
TkpWarpPointer(dispPtr);
XForceScreenSaver(dispPtr->display, ScreenSaverReset);
}
if (dispPtr->warpWindow) {
Tcl_Release(dispPtr->warpWindow);
dispPtr->warpWindow = NULL;
}
dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
}
/*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetVirtualEventUid --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static PatSeq *
FindSequence(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
LookupTables *lookupTables, /* Tables used for lookup. */
| | | 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static PatSeq *
FindSequence(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
LookupTables *lookupTables, /* Tables used for lookup. */
void *object, /* For binding table, token for object with which binding is
* associated. For virtual event table, NULL. */
const char *eventString, /* String description of pattern to match on. See user
* documentation for details. */
int create, /* 0 means don't create the entry if it doesn't already exist.
* 1 means create. */
int allowVirtual, /* 0 means that virtual events are not allowed in the sequence.
* 1 otherwise. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 |
unsigned count = 1;
assert(eventStringPtr);
assert(patPtr);
assert(eventMaskPtr);
p = *eventStringPtr;
| | | 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 |
unsigned count = 1;
assert(eventStringPtr);
assert(patPtr);
assert(eventMaskPtr);
p = *eventStringPtr;
memset(patPtr, 0, sizeof(TkPattern)); /* Otherwise memcmp doesn't work. */
/*
* Handle simple ASCII characters.
*/
if (*p != '<') {
char string[2];
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 |
}
if (*field) {
unsigned button = GetButtonNumber(field);
if ((eventFlags & BUTTON)
|| (button && eventFlags == 0)
|| (SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX && (eventFlags & MOTION) && button == 0)) {
| | | 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 |
}
if (*field) {
unsigned button = GetButtonNumber(field);
if ((eventFlags & BUTTON)
|| (button && eventFlags == 0)
|| (SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX && (eventFlags & MOTION) && button == 0)) {
/* This must be a button (or bad motion) event. */
if (button == 0) {
return FinalizeParseEventDescription(
interp,
patPtr, 0,
Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad button number \"%s\"", field), "BUTTON");
}
patPtr->info = button;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 |
return FinalizeParseEventDescription(
interp,
patPtr, 0,
Tcl_ObjPrintf("specified button \"%s\" for non-button event", field),
"NON_BUTTON");
}
#if SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX
| | | | 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 |
return FinalizeParseEventDescription(
interp,
patPtr, 0,
Tcl_ObjPrintf("specified button \"%s\" for non-button event", field),
"NON_BUTTON");
}
#if SUPPORT_ADDITIONAL_MOTION_SYNTAX
patPtr->modMask |= TkGetButtonMask(button);
p = SkipFieldDelims(p);
while (*p && *p != '>') {
p = SkipFieldDelims(GetField(p, field, sizeof(field)));
if ((button = GetButtonNumber(field)) == 0) {
return FinalizeParseEventDescription(
interp,
patPtr, 0,
Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad button number \"%s\"", field), "BUTTON");
}
patPtr->modMask |= TkGetButtonMask(button);
}
patPtr->info = ButtonNumberFromState(patPtr->modMask);
#endif
} else {
return FinalizeParseEventDescription(
interp,
patPtr, 0,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 | Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "-", 1); Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, string, -1); } break; } case ButtonPress: case ButtonRelease: | | | | | | 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 |
Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, "-", 1);
Tcl_AppendToObj(patternObj, string, -1);
}
break;
}
case ButtonPress:
case ButtonRelease:
assert(patPtr->info <= Button5);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(patternObj, "-%u", (unsigned) patPtr->info);
break;
#if PRINT_SHORT_MOTION_SYNTAX
case MotionNotify: {
unsigned mask = patPtr->modMask;
while (mask & ALL_BUTTONS) {
unsigned button = ButtonNumberFromState(mask);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(patternObj, "-%u", button);
mask &= ~TkGetButtonMask(button);
}
break;
}
#endif
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 |
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter. */
{
TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp);
BindingTable *bindPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable;
return &bindPtr->curEvent->xev;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkpDumpPS --
*
* Dump given pattern sequence to stdout.
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 |
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter. */
{
TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp);
BindingTable *bindPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable;
return &bindPtr->curEvent->xev;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkpCancelWarp --
*
* This function cancels an outstanding pointer warp and
* is called during tear down of the display.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
TkpCancelWarp(
TkDisplay *dispPtr)
{
assert(dispPtr);
if (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DoWarp, dispPtr);
dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkpDumpPS --
*
* Dump given pattern sequence to stdout.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkBitmap.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" /* * The includes below are for pre-defined bitmaps. * * Platform-specific issue: Windows complains when the bitmaps are included, * because an array of characters is being initialized with integers as * elements. For lint purposes, the following pragmas temporarily turn off * that warning message. | > > > > | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * The includes below are for pre-defined bitmaps. * * Platform-specific issue: Windows complains when the bitmaps are included, * because an array of characters is being initialized with integers as * elements. For lint purposes, the following pragmas temporarily turn off * that warning message. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
532 533 534 535 536 537 538 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (dispPtr == NULL || !dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
unknown:
Tcl_Panic("Tk_NameOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
}
| | | 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (dispPtr == NULL || !dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
unknown:
Tcl_Panic("Tk_NameOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
goto unknown;
}
bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr);
return bitmapPtr->nameHashPtr->key.string;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
574 575 576 577 578 579 580 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
unknownBitmap:
Tcl_Panic("Tk_SizeOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
}
| | | 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
unknownBitmap:
Tcl_Panic("Tk_SizeOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
goto unknownBitmap;
}
bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr);
*widthPtr = bitmapPtr->width;
*heightPtr = bitmapPtr->height;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
662 663 664 665 666 667 668 |
Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeBitmap called before Tk_GetBitmap");
}
| | | 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 |
Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeBitmap called before Tk_GetBitmap");
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
}
FreeBitmap((TkBitmap *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr));
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
830 831 832 833 834 835 836 |
nameKey.height = height;
dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable,
(char *) &nameKey, &isNew);
if (!isNew) {
name = (char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(dataHashPtr);
} else {
dispPtr->bitmapAutoNumber++;
| | | 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 |
nameKey.height = height;
dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable,
(char *) &nameKey, &isNew);
if (!isNew) {
name = (char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(dataHashPtr);
} else {
dispPtr->bitmapAutoNumber++;
snprintf(string, sizeof(string), "_tk%d", dispPtr->bitmapAutoNumber);
name = string;
Tcl_SetHashValue(dataHashPtr, name);
if (Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, name, source, width, height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(dataHashPtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 |
* or NULL if unavailable. */
{
Tcl_Interp *dummy;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
/*
| | | 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 |
* or NULL if unavailable. */
{
Tcl_Interp *dummy;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
/*
* First initialize the data in the ThreadSpecificData structure, if
* needed.
*/
if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
dummy = Tcl_CreateInterp();
Tcl_InitHashTable(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkReadBitmapFile -- * * Loads a bitmap image in X bitmap format into the specified drawable. | | | 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkReadBitmapFile -- * * Loads a bitmap image in X bitmap format into the specified drawable. * This is equivalent to the XReadBitmapFile in X. * * Results: * Sets the size, hotspot, and bitmap on success. * * Side effects: * Creates a new bitmap from the file data. * |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 |
bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
if (bitmapPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBitmap found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (bitmapPtr != NULL); bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
| | | | | 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 |
bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
if (bitmapPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBitmap found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (bitmapPtr != NULL); bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(bitmapPtr->objRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
}
}
return resultPtr;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkGetBitmapPredefTable --
*
* This function is used by tkMacOSXBitmap.c to access the thread-specific
* predefBitmap table that maps from the names of the predefined bitmaps
* to data associated with those bitmaps. It is required because the
* table is allocated in thread-local storage and is not visible outside
* this file.
* Results:
* Returns a pointer to the predefined bitmap hash table for the current
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkBusy.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 |
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkBusy.h"
#include "default.h"
/*
* Things about the busy system that may be configured. Note that on some
* platforms this may or may not have an effect.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec busyOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
| > > > > | | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 |
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkBusy.h"
#include "default.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* Things about the busy system that may be configured. Note that on some
* platforms this may or may not have an effect.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec busyOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUSY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Busy, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* Forward declarations of functions defined in this file.
*/
static void BusyEventProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static void BusyGeometryProc(ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin);
static void BusyCustodyProc(ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin);
static int ConfigureBusy(Tcl_Interp *interp, Busy *busyPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static Busy * CreateBusy(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkRef);
static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyBusy;
static void DoConfigureNotify(Tk_FakeWin *winPtr);
static inline Tk_Window FirstChild(Tk_Window parent);
static Busy * GetBusy(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr,
Tcl_Obj *const windowObj);
static int HoldBusy(Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *const windowObj,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 |
{
Busy *busyPtr = (Busy *)clientData;
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(busyPtr->tkBusy, StructureNotifyMask, BusyEventProc,
busyPtr);
TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr);
busyPtr->tkBusy = NULL;
| | | 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 |
{
Busy *busyPtr = (Busy *)clientData;
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(busyPtr->tkBusy, StructureNotifyMask, BusyEventProc,
busyPtr);
TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr);
busyPtr->tkBusy = NULL;
Tcl_EventuallyFree(busyPtr, DestroyBusy);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* BusyGeometryProc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
254 255 256 257 258 259 260 |
switch (eventPtr->type) {
case ReparentNotify:
case DestroyNotify:
/*
* Arrange for the busy structure to be removed at a proper time.
*/
| | | 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 |
switch (eventPtr->type) {
case ReparentNotify:
case DestroyNotify:
/*
* Arrange for the busy structure to be removed at a proper time.
*/
Tcl_EventuallyFree(busyPtr, DestroyBusy);
break;
case ConfigureNotify:
if ((busyPtr->width != Tk_Width(busyPtr->tkRef)) ||
(busyPtr->height != Tk_Height(busyPtr->tkRef)) ||
(busyPtr->x != Tk_X(busyPtr->tkRef)) ||
(busyPtr->y != Tk_Y(busyPtr->tkRef))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
325 326 327 328 329 330 331 | * Memory and resources are released and the Tk event handler is removed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyBusy( | | | | 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 |
* Memory and resources are released and the Tk event handler is removed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyBusy(
char *data) /* Busy window structure record */
{
Busy *busyPtr = (Busy *)data;
if (busyPtr->hashPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(busyPtr->hashPtr);
}
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(busyPtr->tkRef, StructureNotifyMask,
RefWinEventProc, busyPtr);
if (busyPtr->tkBusy != NULL) {
Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *)data, busyPtr->optionTable, busyPtr->tkBusy);
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(busyPtr->tkBusy, StructureNotifyMask,
BusyEventProc, busyPtr);
Tk_ManageGeometry(busyPtr->tkBusy, NULL, busyPtr);
Tk_DestroyWindow(busyPtr->tkBusy);
}
ckfree(data);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
375 376 377 378 379 380 381 |
ClientData clientData, /* Busy window record */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Event which triggered call to routine */
{
Busy *busyPtr = (Busy *)clientData;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
busyPtr->tkBusy = NULL;
| | | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 |
ClientData clientData, /* Busy window record */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Event which triggered call to routine */
{
Busy *busyPtr = (Busy *)clientData;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
busyPtr->tkBusy = NULL;
Tcl_EventuallyFree(busyPtr, DestroyBusy);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* MakeTransparentWindowExist --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
546 547 548 549 550 551 552 |
y += Tk_Y(tkwin) + Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
}
}
for (tkChild = FirstChild(tkParent); tkChild != NULL;
tkChild = NextChild(tkChild)) {
Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkChild);
}
| | | | 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 |
y += Tk_Y(tkwin) + Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
}
}
for (tkChild = FirstChild(tkParent); tkChild != NULL;
tkChild = NextChild(tkChild)) {
Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkChild);
}
snprintf(name, length + 6, fmt, Tk_Name(tkRef));
tkBusy = Tk_CreateWindow(interp, tkParent, name, NULL);
ckfree(name);
if (tkBusy == NULL) {
return NULL;
}
Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkRef);
busyPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkRef);
busyPtr->interp = interp;
busyPtr->tkRef = tkRef;
busyPtr->tkParent = tkParent;
busyPtr->tkBusy = tkBusy;
busyPtr->width = Tk_Width(tkRef);
busyPtr->height = Tk_Height(tkRef);
busyPtr->x = Tk_X(tkRef);
busyPtr->y = Tk_Y(tkRef);
busyPtr->cursor = NULL;
Tk_SetClass(tkBusy, "Busy");
busyPtr->optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, busyOptionSpecs);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) busyPtr, busyPtr->optionTable,
tkBusy) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(tkBusy);
return NULL;
}
SetWindowInstanceData(tkBusy, busyPtr);
winPtr = (Tk_FakeWin *) tkRef;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
633 634 635 636 637 638 639 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Busy *busyPtr,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
{
Tk_Cursor oldCursor = busyPtr->cursor;
| | | 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Busy *busyPtr,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
{
Tk_Cursor oldCursor = busyPtr->cursor;
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) busyPtr, busyPtr->optionTable, objc,
objv, busyPtr->tkBusy, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (busyPtr->cursor != oldCursor) {
if (busyPtr->cursor == NULL) {
Tk_UndefineCursor(busyPtr->tkBusy);
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
678 679 680 681 682 683 684 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to look up main window of. */
Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr,/* Busy hash table */
Tcl_Obj *const windowObj) /* Path name of parent window */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin;
| | | | | 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to look up main window of. */
Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr,/* Busy hash table */
Tcl_Obj *const windowObj) /* Path name of parent window */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin;
tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
if (!tkwin || (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, windowObj, &tkwin) != TCL_OK)) {
return NULL;
}
hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(busyTablePtr, (char *) tkwin);
if (hPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't find busy window \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(windowObj)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "BUSY",
Tcl_GetString(windowObj), NULL);
return NULL;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 |
&tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(busyTablePtr, (char *) tkwin, &isNew);
if (isNew) {
busyPtr = CreateBusy(interp, tkwin);
if (busyPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, busyPtr);
busyPtr->hashPtr = hPtr;
} else {
busyPtr = (Busy *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
| > | 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 |
&tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(busyTablePtr, (char *) tkwin, &isNew);
if (isNew) {
busyPtr = CreateBusy(interp, tkwin);
if (busyPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, busyPtr);
busyPtr->hashPtr = hPtr;
} else {
busyPtr = (Busy *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
756 757 758 759 760 761 762 |
*/
if (Tk_IsMapped(busyPtr->tkRef)) {
TkpShowBusyWindow(busyPtr);
} else {
TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr);
}
| < < < | 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 |
*/
if (Tk_IsMapped(busyPtr->tkRef)) {
TkpShowBusyWindow(busyPtr);
} else {
TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr);
}
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_BusyObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
792 793 794 795 796 797 798 |
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr = &((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->busyTable;
Busy *busyPtr;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
int index, result = TCL_OK;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
| | < | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 |
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr = &((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->busyTable;
Busy *busyPtr;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
int index, result = TCL_OK;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"cget", "configure", "current", "forget", "hold", "status", NULL
};
enum options {
BUSY_CGET, BUSY_CONFIGURE, BUSY_CURRENT, BUSY_FORGET, BUSY_HOLD,
BUSY_STATUS
};
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "options ?arg arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* [tk busy <window>] command shortcut.
*/
if (Tcl_GetString(objv[1])[0] == '.') {
if (objc%2 == 1) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "window ?option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return HoldBusy(busyTablePtr, interp, objv[1], objc-2, objv+2);
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[1], optionStrings,
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum options) index) {
case BUSY_CGET:
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window option");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
busyPtr = GetBusy(interp, busyTablePtr, objv[2]);
if (busyPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(busyPtr);
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) busyPtr,
busyPtr->optionTable, objv[3], busyPtr->tkBusy);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
}
Tcl_Release(busyPtr);
return result;
case BUSY_CONFIGURE:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?option? ?value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
busyPtr = GetBusy(interp, busyTablePtr, objv[2]);
if (busyPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(busyPtr);
if (objc <= 4) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *)busyPtr,
busyPtr->optionTable, (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL,
busyPtr->tkBusy);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
892 893 894 895 896 897 898 |
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(busyTablePtr, &cursor); hPtr != NULL;
hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
busyPtr = (Busy *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
if (pattern == NULL ||
Tcl_StringCaseMatch(Tk_PathName(busyPtr->tkRef), pattern, 0)) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
| | | | | 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 |
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(busyTablePtr, &cursor); hPtr != NULL;
hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&cursor)) {
busyPtr = (Busy *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
if (pattern == NULL ||
Tcl_StringCaseMatch(Tk_PathName(busyPtr->tkRef), pattern, 0)) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
TkNewWindowObj(busyPtr->tkRef));
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
case BUSY_FORGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
busyPtr = GetBusy(interp, busyTablePtr, objv[2]);
if (busyPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr);
Tcl_EventuallyFree(busyPtr, DestroyBusy);
return TCL_OK;
case BUSY_HOLD:
if (objc < 3 || objc%2 != 1) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return HoldBusy(busyTablePtr, interp, objv[2], objc-3, objv+3);
case BUSY_STATUS:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkButton.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 |
* Class names for buttons, indexed by one of the type values defined in
* tkButton.h.
*/
static const char *const classNames[] = {"Label", "Button", "Checkbutton", "Radiobutton"};
/*
| | < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 |
* Class names for buttons, indexed by one of the type values defined in
* tkButton.h.
*/
static const char *const classNames[] = {"Label", "Button", "Checkbutton", "Radiobutton"};
/*
* The following table defines the legal values for the -default/-state options.
* It is used together with the "enum defaultValue/state" declarations in tkButton.h.
*/
const char *const tkStateStrings[] = {
"active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
};
/*
* The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option.
* It is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkButton.h
*/
const char *const tkCompoundStrings[] = {
"bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", NULL
};
char tkDefButtonHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH;
char tkDefButtonPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_PADX;
char tkDefButtonPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_PADY;
char tkDefButtonBorderWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH;
char tkDefLabelHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABEL_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH;
char tkDefLabelPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX;
char tkDefLabelPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY;
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration options. There is a
* separate table for each of the four widget classes.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeFg),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
tkDefButtonBorderWidth, Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, compound),
0, tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_LABEL_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, heightPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0,
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", tkDefLabelHighlightWidth,
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, imagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_BUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, state),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_LABEL_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkButton, takeFocusPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, widthPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeFg),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
tkDefButtonBorderWidth, Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, Tk_Offset(TkButton, commandPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, compound),
0, tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-default", "default", "Default",
DEF_BUTTON_DEFAULT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, defaultState),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_BUTTON_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, heightPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0,
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, imagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief",
DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
tkDefButtonPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
tkDefButtonPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay",
DEF_BUTTON_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, repeatDelay),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval",
DEF_BUTTON_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, repeatInterval),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_BUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, state),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_BUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkButton, takeFocusPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, widthPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
DEF_CHKRAD_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeFg),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
tkDefButtonBorderWidth, Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, Tk_Offset(TkButton, commandPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, compound),
0, tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_CHKRAD_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, heightPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0,
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, imagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn",
DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, indicatorOn), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-offrelief", "offRelief", "OffRelief",
DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, offRelief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", "offValue", "Value",
DEF_BUTTON_OFF_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, offValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", "onValue", "Value",
DEF_BUTTON_ON_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, onValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief",
DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selectBorder),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", "selectImage", "SelectImage",
DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selectImagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_BUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, state),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_BUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkButton, takeFocusPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristateimage", "tristateImage", "TristateImage",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateImagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristatevalue", "tristateValue", "TristateValue",
DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
DEF_CHECKBUTTON_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, widthPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
DEF_CHKRAD_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeFg),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
tkDefButtonBorderWidth, Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND, Tk_Offset(TkButton, commandPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, compound),
0, tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_CHKRAD_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, heightPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightBorder), 0,
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, imagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn",
DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, indicatorOn),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-offrelief", "offRelief", "OffRelief",
DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, offRelief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-overrelief", "overRelief", "OverRelief",
DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selectBorder),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", "selectImage", "SelectImage",
DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selectImagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_BUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, state),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_BUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkButton, takeFocusPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristateimage", "tristateImage", "TristateImage",
DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateImagePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristatevalue", "tristateValue", "TristateValue",
DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "value", "Value",
DEF_BUTTON_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, onValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
DEF_RADIOBUTTON_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, selVarNamePtr), -1,
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, widthPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* The following table maps from one of the type values defined in tkButton.h,
* such as TYPE_LABEL, to the option template for that class of widgets.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
624 625 626 627 628 629 630 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ButtonCreate( | | < | 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ButtonCreate(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* NULL. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument values. */
int type) /* Type of button to create: TYPE_LABEL,
* TYPE_BUTTON, TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON, or
* TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON. */
{
TkButton *butPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window tkwin;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (!tsdPtr->defaultsInitialized) {
TkpButtonSetDefaults();
tsdPtr->defaultsInitialized = 1;
}
if (objc < 2) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
746 747 748 749 750 751 752 |
butPtr->commandPtr = NULL;
butPtr->flags = 0;
Tk_CreateEventHandler(butPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
ButtonEventProc, butPtr);
| | | | 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 |
butPtr->commandPtr = NULL;
butPtr->flags = 0;
Tk_CreateEventHandler(butPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
ButtonEventProc, butPtr);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) butPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
!= TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(butPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(butPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(butPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ButtonWidgetCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
807 808 809 810 811 812 813 |
switch (map[butPtr->type][index]) {
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
goto error;
}
| | | | 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 |
switch (map[butPtr->type][index]) {
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
goto error;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) butPtr,
butPtr->optionTable, objv[2], butPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
break;
case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) butPtr,
butPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
butPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
| | | 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) butPtr,
butPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
butPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
} else {
/*
* Second pass: restore options to old values.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 |
}
if (butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, *namePtr;
if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr == NULL) {
butPtr->selVarNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
| | | 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 |
}
if (butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, *namePtr;
if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr == NULL) {
butPtr->selVarNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
Tk_Name(butPtr->tkwin), -1);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->selVarNamePtr);
}
namePtr = butPtr->selVarNamePtr;
/*
* Select the button if the associated variable has the
* appropriate value, initialize the variable if it doesn't exist,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 |
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
const char *value;
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
| < < | | | 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 |
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
const char *value;
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
/*
* If the variable is being unset, then just re-establish the trace unless
* the whole interpreter is going away.
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
butPtr->flags &= ~(SELECTED | TRISTATED);
if (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp)) {
void *probe = NULL;
do {
probe = Tcl_VarTraceInfo(interp,
Tcl_GetString(butPtr->selVarNamePtr),
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
ButtonVarProc, probe);
if (probe == (void *)butPtr) {
break;
}
} while (probe);
if (probe) {
/*
* We were able to fetch the unset trace for our
* selVarNamePtr, which means it is not unset and not
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Not used. */
const char *name2, /* Not used. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
| < < | | | 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Not used. */
const char *name2, /* Not used. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
if (butPtr->flags & BUTTON_DELETED) {
return NULL;
}
/*
* If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
* interpreter is going away.
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
if (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp) && butPtr->textVarNamePtr != NULL) {
/*
* An unset trace on some variable brought us here, but is it
* the variable we have stored in butPtr->textVarNamePtr ?
*/
void *probe = NULL;
do {
probe = Tcl_VarTraceInfo(interp,
Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textVarNamePtr),
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
ButtonTextVarProc, probe);
if (probe == (void *)butPtr) {
break;
}
} while (probe);
if (probe) {
/*
* We were able to fetch the unset trace for our
* textVarNamePtr, which means it is not unset and not
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
| < < < < < < | 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
if (butPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr);
if (Tk_IsMapped(butPtr->tkwin) && !(butPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayButton, butPtr);
butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
| < < < < < < | 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
if (butPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr);
}
#else
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
| < < < < < < | 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 |
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
* <= 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *)clientData;
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
if (butPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr);
}
#else
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkButton.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | /* * tkButton.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions used to implement button-like * widgets. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | /* * tkButton.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions used to implement button-like * widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKBUTTON #define _TKBUTTON |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvArc.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkCanvas.h" #include "default.h" | < < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 |
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkCanvas.h"
#include "default.h"
/*
* The structure below defines the record for each arc item.
*/
typedef enum {
PIESLICE_STYLE, CHORD_STYLE, ARC_STYLE
} Style;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 |
Style style; /* How to draw arc: arc, chord, or
* pieslice. */
GC fillGC; /* Graphics context for filling item. */
double center1[2]; /* Coordinates of center of arc outline at
* start (see ComputeArcOutline). */
double center2[2]; /* Coordinates of center of arc outline at
* start+extent (see ComputeArcOutline). */
| < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < | | | | | | | | | < | 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 |
Style style; /* How to draw arc: arc, chord, or
* pieslice. */
GC fillGC; /* Graphics context for filling item. */
double center1[2]; /* Coordinates of center of arc outline at
* start (see ComputeArcOutline). */
double center2[2]; /* Coordinates of center of arc outline at
* start+extent (see ComputeArcOutline). */
} ArcItem;
/*
* The definitions below define the sizes of the polygons used to display
* outline information for various styles of arcs:
*/
#define CHORD_OUTLINE_PTS 7
#define PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS 6
#define PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS 7
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static int StyleParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value,
char *widgRec, int offset);
static const char * StylePrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption styleOption = {
StyleParseProc, StylePrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption dashOption = {
TkCanvasDashParseProc, TkCanvasDashPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
TkOffsetParseProc, TkOffsetPrintProc, INT2PTR(TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
TkPixelParseProc, TkPixelPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.dash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-extent", NULL, NULL,
"90", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, extent), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-start", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, start), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-style", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, style), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
&styleOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"1.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
&pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
*/
static void ComputeArcBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, ArcItem *arcPtr);
static int ConfigureArc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int CreateArc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void DeleteArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
static void DisplayArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
213 214 215 216 217 218 219 | static void ComputeArcOutline(Tk_Canvas canvas, ArcItem *arcPtr); static int HorizLineToArc(double x1, double x2, double y, double rx, double ry, double start, double extent); static int VertLineToArc(double x, double y1, double y2, double rx, double ry, double start, double extent); | < < | 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 |
static void ComputeArcOutline(Tk_Canvas canvas, ArcItem *arcPtr);
static int HorizLineToArc(double x1, double x2,
double y, double rx, double ry,
double start, double extent);
static int VertLineToArc(double x, double y1,
double y2, double rx, double ry,
double start, double extent);
/*
* The structures below defines the arc item types by means of functions that
* can be invoked by generic item code.
*/
Tk_ItemType tkArcType = {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
242 243 244 245 246 247 248 |
TranslateArc, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 |
TranslateArc, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* CreateArc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
302 303 304 305 306 307 308 |
arcPtr->activeFillColor = NULL;
arcPtr->disabledFillColor = NULL;
arcPtr->fillStipple = None;
arcPtr->activeFillStipple = None;
arcPtr->disabledFillStipple = None;
arcPtr->style = PIESLICE_STYLE;
arcPtr->fillGC = NULL;
| < | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 |
arcPtr->activeFillColor = NULL;
arcPtr->disabledFillColor = NULL;
arcPtr->fillStipple = None;
arcPtr->activeFillStipple = None;
arcPtr->disabledFillStipple = None;
arcPtr->style = PIESLICE_STYLE;
arcPtr->fillGC = NULL;
/*
* Process the arguments to fill in the item record.
*/
for (i = 1; i < objc; i++) {
const char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
377 378 379 380 381 382 383 | "wrong # coordinates: expected 4, got %d", objc)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "COORDS", "ARC", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0], | | < < < < < < < < < < < | 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 |
"wrong # coordinates: expected 4, got %d", objc));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "COORDS", "ARC",
NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
&arcPtr->bbox[0]) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
&arcPtr->bbox[1]) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[2],
&arcPtr->bbox[2]) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[3],
&arcPtr->bbox[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "COORDS", "ARC", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 |
arcPtr->activeFillColor != NULL ||
arcPtr->activeFillStipple != None) {
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
} else {
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > > | 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 |
arcPtr->activeFillColor != NULL ||
arcPtr->activeFillStipple != None) {
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
} else {
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
}
tsoffset = &arcPtr->outline.tsoffset;
flags = tsoffset->flags;
if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[0] + 0.5);
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
tsoffset->xoffset = (int) ((arcPtr->bbox[0]+arcPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
}
if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[1] + 0.5);
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) ((arcPtr->bbox[1]+arcPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
}
i = (int) (arcPtr->start/360.0);
arcPtr->start -= i*360.0;
if (arcPtr->start < 0) {
arcPtr->start += 360.0;
}
i = (int) (arcPtr->extent/360.0);
arcPtr->extent -= i*360.0;
mask = Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(&gcValues, canvas, itemPtr, &(arcPtr->outline));
if (mask) {
gcValues.cap_style = CapButt;
mask |= GCCapStyle;
newGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
586 587 588 589 590 591 592 |
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[3] + 0.5);
}
ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 |
} else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (arcPtr->bbox[3] + 0.5);
}
ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DeleteArc --
*
* This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 |
arcPtr->bbox[3] = originY + scaleY*(arcPtr->bbox[3] - originY);
ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 |
arcPtr->bbox[3] = originY + scaleY*(arcPtr->bbox[3] - originY);
ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TranslateArc --
*
* This function is called to move an arc by a given amount.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 | Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "0 0 moveto ", -1); } Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc closepath\nsetmatrix\n", ang1, ang2); Tcl_ResetResult(interp); | | > > | > > | 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 |
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "0 0 moveto ", -1);
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc closepath\nsetmatrix\n",
ang1, ang2);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (fillStipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (arcPtr->outline.gc != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
}
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 | (arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2, (y1 + y2)/2, (arcPtr->bbox[2] - arcPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2); Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc\nsetmatrix\n0 setlinecap\n", ang1, ang2); Tcl_ResetResult(interp); | | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > > > > > > | 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 |
(arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2, (y1 + y2)/2,
(arcPtr->bbox[2] - arcPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc\nsetmatrix\n0 setlinecap\n",
ang1, ang2);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr, &arcPtr->outline) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (arcPtr->style != ARC_STYLE) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (arcPtr->style == CHORD_STYLE) {
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arcPtr->outlinePtr,
CHORD_OUTLINE_PTS);
} else {
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arcPtr->outlinePtr,
PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) !=TCL_OK){
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas,
arcPtr->outlinePtr + 2*PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS);
}
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
}
}
/*
* Plug the accumulated postscript back into the result.
*/
(void) Tcl_RestoreInterpState(interp, interpState);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), psObj);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_OK;
error:
Tcl_DiscardInterpState(interpState);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* StyleParseProc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 |
static int
StyleParseProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
| | | 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 |
static int
StyleParseProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset) /* Offset into item. */
{
int c;
size_t length;
Style *stylePtr = (Style *) (widgRec + offset);
if (value == NULL || *value == 0) {
*stylePtr = PIESLICE_STYLE;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 |
*/
static const char *
StylePrintProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Ignored. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Ignored. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
| | | 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 |
*/
static const char *
StylePrintProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Ignored. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Ignored. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset, /* Offset into item. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_FreeProc **)) /* Pointer to variable to fill in with
* information about how to reclaim storage
* for return string. */
{
Style *stylePtr = (Style *) (widgRec + offset);
if (*stylePtr == ARC_STYLE) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvBmap.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activebackground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activebitmap", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeforeground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeFgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
"center", Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-background", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-bitmap", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledbackground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBgColor),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledbitmap", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBitmap),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledFgColor),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVBMAP_FG, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, fgColor), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
&stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void DeleteBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); | < < | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void DeleteBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); static void ScaleBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY, double scaleX, double scaleY); static void TranslateBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 |
TranslateBitmap, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 |
TranslateBitmap, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkcCreateBitmap --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
418 419 420 421 422 423 424 |
static void
DeleteBitmap(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Info about overall canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
| < | 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 |
static void
DeleteBitmap(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Info about overall canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
if (bmapPtr->bitmap != None) {
Tk_FreeBitmap(display, bmapPtr->bitmap);
}
if (bmapPtr->activeBitmap != None) {
Tk_FreeBitmap(display, bmapPtr->activeBitmap);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 |
*
* Side effects:
* The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ComputeBitmapBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
BitmapItem *bmapPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
int width, height;
int x, y;
| > | 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 |
*
* Side effects:
* The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static void
ComputeBitmapBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
BitmapItem *bmapPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
int width, height;
int x, y;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static double
BitmapToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *coordPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
| > < | 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static double
BitmapToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *coordPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
x1 = bmapPtr->header.x1;
y1 = bmapPtr->header.y1;
x2 = bmapPtr->header.x2;
y2 = bmapPtr->header.y2;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
BitmapToArea(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
| > < | 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static int
BitmapToArea(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
if ((rectPtr[2] <= bmapPtr->header.x1)
|| (rectPtr[0] >= bmapPtr->header.x2)
|| (rectPtr[3] <= bmapPtr->header.y1)
|| (rectPtr[1] >= bmapPtr->header.y2)) {
return -1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
784 785 786 787 788 789 790 |
double scaleX, /* Amount to scale in X direction. */
double scaleY) /* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
bmapPtr->x = originX + scaleX*(bmapPtr->x - originX);
bmapPtr->y = originY + scaleY*(bmapPtr->y - originY);
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 |
double scaleX, /* Amount to scale in X direction. */
double scaleY) /* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
{
BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
bmapPtr->x = originX + scaleX*(bmapPtr->x - originX);
bmapPtr->y = originY + scaleY*(bmapPtr->y - originY);
ComputeBitmapBbox(canvas, bmapPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TranslateBitmap --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
889 890 891 892 893 894 895 |
int curRow;
XColor *fgColor;
XColor *bgColor;
Pixmap bitmap;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
Tcl_Obj *psObj;
Tcl_InterpState interpState;
| < | 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 |
int curRow;
XColor *fgColor;
XColor *bgColor;
Pixmap bitmap;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
Tcl_Obj *psObj;
Tcl_InterpState interpState;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
fgColor = bmapPtr->fgColor;
bgColor = bmapPtr->bgColor;
bitmap = bmapPtr->bitmap;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
962 963 964 965 966 967 968 |
if (bgColor != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"%.15g %.15g moveto %d 0 rlineto 0 %d rlineto "
"%d 0 rlineto closepath\n",
x, y, width, height, -width);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | > > | > > | 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 |
if (bgColor != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"%.15g %.15g moveto %d 0 rlineto 0 %d rlineto "
"%d 0 rlineto closepath\n",
x, y, width, height, -width);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, bgColor) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
/*
* Draw the bitmap, if there is a foreground color. If the bitmap is very
* large, then chop it up into multiple bitmaps, each consisting of one or
* more rows. This is needed because Postscript can't handle single
* strings longer than 64 KBytes long.
*/
if (fgColor != NULL) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fgColor) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (width > 60000) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't generate Postscript for bitmaps more than 60000"
" pixels wide", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "PS", "MEMLIMIT", NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 |
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"0 -%.15g translate\n%d %d true matrix {\n",
(double) rowsThisTime, width, rowsThisTime);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | | > > | 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 |
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj,
"0 -%.15g translate\n%d %d true matrix {\n",
(double) rowsThisTime, width, rowsThisTime);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(interp, canvas, bitmap,
0, curRow, width, rowsThisTime) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "\n} imagemask\n", -1);
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvImg.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | < < | 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-activeimage", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, activeImageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
"center", Tk_Offset(ImageItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-disabledimage", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, disabledImageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, imageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
*/
static void ImageChangedProc(ClientData clientData,
int x, int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
int imgHeight);
static int ImageCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int ImageToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
static double ImageToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr);
static int ImageToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
static void ComputeImageBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, ImageItem *imgPtr);
static int ConfigureImage(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int CreateImage(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void DeleteImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
static void DisplayImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
int x, int y, int width, int height);
static void ScaleImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
double scaleX, double scaleY);
static void TranslateImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 |
TranslateImage, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 |
TranslateImage, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* CreateImage --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
252 253 254 255 256 257 258 | NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } } if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0], &imgPtr->x) != TCL_OK) || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1], | | | 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 |
NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
&imgPtr->x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
&imgPtr->y) != TCL_OK)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ComputeImageBbox(canvas, imgPtr);
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 2, got %d", objc));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "COORDS", "IMAGE", NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
381 382 383 384 385 386 387 |
static void
DeleteImage(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Info about overall canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
| < < | 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 |
static void
DeleteImage(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Info about overall canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
if (imgPtr->imageString != NULL) {
ckfree(imgPtr->imageString);
}
if (imgPtr->activeImageString != NULL) {
ckfree(imgPtr->activeImageString);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 |
*
* Side effects:
* The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ComputeImageBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
ImageItem *imgPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
int width, height;
int x, y;
| > | 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 |
*
* Side effects:
* The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static void
ComputeImageBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
ImageItem *imgPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
int width, height;
int x, y;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
534 535 536 537 538 539 540 |
/* Describes region of canvas that must be
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
short drawableX, drawableY;
Tk_Image image;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
| < | 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 |
/* Describes region of canvas that must be
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
short drawableX, drawableY;
Tk_Image image;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
image = imgPtr->image;
if (Canvas(canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
593 594 595 596 597 598 599 |
ImageToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *coordPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
| < | 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 |
ImageToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *coordPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
x1 = imgPtr->header.x1;
y1 = imgPtr->header.y1;
x2 = imgPtr->header.x2;
y2 = imgPtr->header.y2;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 |
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
| < | 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 |
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
if ((rectPtr[2] <= imgPtr->header.x1)
|| (rectPtr[0] >= imgPtr->header.x2)
|| (rectPtr[3] <= imgPtr->header.y1)
|| (rectPtr[1] >= imgPtr->header.y2)) {
return -1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
722 723 724 725 726 727 728 |
}
}
if (image == NULL) {
/*
* Image item without actual image specified.
*/
| | | 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 |
}
}
if (image == NULL) {
/*
* Image item without actual image specified.
*/
return TCL_OK;
}
Tk_SizeOfImage(image, &width, &height);
/*
* Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the image, taking
* into account the anchor position for the image.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%.15g %.15g translate\n", x, y);
}
return Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, canvasWin,
((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo, 0, 0, width, height, prepass);
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%.15g %.15g translate\n", x, y);
}
return Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, canvasWin,
((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo, 0, 0, width, height, prepass);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ScaleImage --
*
* This function is invoked to rescale an item.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
888 889 890 891 892 893 894 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to canvas item for image. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
* 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
| | | 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to canvas item for image. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
* 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
ImageItem *imgPtr = clientData;
/*
* If the image's size changed and it's not anchored at its northwest
* corner then just redisplay the entire area of the image. This is a bit
* over-conservative, but we need to do something because a size change
* also means a position change.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvLine.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | /* * tkCanvLine.c -- * * This file implements line items for canvas widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 |
/*
* tkCanvLine.c --
*
* This file implements line items for canvas widgets.
*
* Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkCanvas.h"
#include "default.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* The structure below defines the record for each line item.
*/
typedef enum {
ARROWS_NONE, ARROWS_FIRST, ARROWS_LAST, ARROWS_BOTH
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | static void DeleteLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); static int GetLineIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, | | | | | | | | < < | 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | static void DeleteLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); static int GetLineIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr); static int LineCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void LineDeleteCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last); static void LineInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj); static int LineToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr); static double LineToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr); static int LineToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass); static int ArrowParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset); static const char * ArrowPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); static int ParseArrowShape(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset); static const char * PrintArrowShape(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); static void ScaleLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY, double scaleX, double scaleY); static void TranslateLine(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 |
static const Tk_CustomOption smoothOption = {
TkSmoothParseProc, TkSmoothPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 |
static const Tk_CustomOption smoothOption = {
TkSmoothParseProc, TkSmoothPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption dashOption = {
TkCanvasDashParseProc, TkCanvasDashPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
TkOffsetParseProc, TkOffsetPrintProc,
INT2PTR(TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE|TK_OFFSET_INDEX)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
TkPixelParseProc, TkPixelPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrow", NULL, NULL,
"none", Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrow),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &arrowOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrowshape", NULL, NULL,
"8 10 3", Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrowShapeA),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &arrowShapeOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE, "-capstyle", NULL, NULL,
"butt", Tk_Offset(LineItem, capStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.dash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", NULL, NULL,
"round", Tk_Offset(LineItem, joinStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, smooth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &smoothOption},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", NULL, NULL,
"12", Tk_Offset(LineItem, splineSteps), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"1.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.width),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* The structures below defines the line item type by means of functions that
* can be invoked by generic item code.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
238 239 240 241 242 243 244 |
TranslateLine, /* translateProc */
GetLineIndex, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
LineInsert, /* insertProc */
LineDeleteCoords, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 |
TranslateLine, /* translateProc */
GetLineIndex, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
LineInsert, /* insertProc */
LineDeleteCoords, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
* The definition below determines how large are static arrays used to hold
* spline points (splines larger than this have to have their arrays
* malloc-ed).
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
695 696 697 698 699 700 701 |
TkIncludePoint((Tk_Item *) linePtr, coordPtr);
}
width = linePtr->outline.width;
if (width < 1.0) {
width = 1.0;
}
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
| | | | 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 |
TkIncludePoint((Tk_Item *) linePtr, coordPtr);
}
width = linePtr->outline.width;
if (width < 1.0) {
width = 1.0;
}
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_LAST && linePtr->firstArrowPtr) {
TkIncludePoint((Tk_Item *) linePtr, linePtr->firstArrowPtr);
}
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_FIRST && linePtr->lastArrowPtr) {
TkIncludePoint((Tk_Item *) linePtr, linePtr->lastArrowPtr);
}
}
tsoffset = &linePtr->outline.tsoffset;
if (tsoffset->flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
834 835 836 837 838 839 840 |
Display *display, /* Display on which to draw item. */
Drawable drawable, /* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Describes region of canvas that must be */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* redisplayed (not used). */
TCL_UNUSED(int),
TCL_UNUSED(int))
{
| | | 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 |
Display *display, /* Display on which to draw item. */
Drawable drawable, /* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Describes region of canvas that must be */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* redisplayed (not used). */
TCL_UNUSED(int),
TCL_UNUSED(int))
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
XPoint staticPoints[MAX_STATIC_POINTS*3];
XPoint *pointPtr;
double linewidth;
int numPoints;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
if (!linePtr->numPoints || (linePtr->outline.gc == NULL)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
951 952 953 954 955 956 957 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
LineInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Line item to be modified. */
| | | > > | | > > > > > > | | | > > > > > > | | | | | < | | > > > > | > > > > > > > > | | > | | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > | | | | 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
LineInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Line item to be modified. */
int beforeThis, /* Index before which new coordinates are to
* be inserted. */
Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New coordinates to be inserted. */
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
int length, oriNumPoints, objc, nbInsPoints, i;
double *newCoordPtr, *coordPtr;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
Tcl_Obj **objv;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
|| !objc || objc&1) {
return;
}
oriNumPoints = linePtr->numPoints;
length = 2*linePtr->numPoints;
nbInsPoints = objc / 2;
if (beforeThis < 0) {
beforeThis = 0;
}
if (beforeThis > length) {
beforeThis = length;
}
/*
* With arrows, the end points of the line are adjusted so that a thick
* line doesn't stick out past the arrowheads (see ConfigureArrows).
*/
if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
linePtr->coordPtr[0] = linePtr->firstArrowPtr[0];
linePtr->coordPtr[1] = linePtr->firstArrowPtr[1];
}
if (linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) {
linePtr->coordPtr[length-2] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[0];
linePtr->coordPtr[length-1] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[1];
}
newCoordPtr = (double *)ckalloc(sizeof(double) * (length + objc));
for (i=0; i<beforeThis; i++) {
newCoordPtr[i] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
}
for (i=0; i<objc; i++) {
if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objv[i],
&newCoordPtr[i + beforeThis]) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_ResetResult(Canvas(canvas)->interp);
ckfree(newCoordPtr);
return;
}
}
for (i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
newCoordPtr[i+objc] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
}
if (linePtr->coordPtr) {
ckfree(linePtr->coordPtr);
}
linePtr->coordPtr = newCoordPtr;
length += objc ;
linePtr->numPoints = length / 2;
if ((length > 3) && (state != TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) {
/*
* This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
* the line that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
* that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
* the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
* flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing, otherwise I have
* to do it here.
* Rationale for the optimization code can be found in Tk ticket
* [5fb8145997].
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
/*
* Include one point at left of the left insert position, and one
* point at right of the right insert position.
*/
beforeThis -= 2;
objc += 4;
if (linePtr->smooth) {
if (!strcmp(linePtr->smooth->name, "true")) {
/*
* Quadratic Bezier splines. A second point must be included at
* each side of the insert position.
*/
beforeThis -= 2;
objc += 4;
/*
* Moreover, if the insert position is the first or last point
* of the line, include a third point.
*/
if (beforeThis == -4) {
objc += 2;
}
if (beforeThis + 4 == length - (objc - 8)) {
beforeThis -= 2;
objc += 2;
}
} else if (!strcmp(linePtr->smooth->name, "raw")) {
/*
* Cubic Bezier splines. See details in ticket [5fb8145997].
*/
if (((oriNumPoints - 1) % 3) || (nbInsPoints % 3)) {
/*
* No optimization for "degenerate" lines or when inserting
* something else than a multiple of 3 points.
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
} else {
beforeThis -= beforeThis % 6;
objc += 4;
}
} else {
/*
* Custom smoothing method. No optimization is possible.
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
}
}
if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
if (beforeThis < 0) {
beforeThis = 0;
}
if (beforeThis + objc > length) {
objc = length - beforeThis;
}
itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[beforeThis];
itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[beforeThis+1];
if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis < 2)) {
/*
* Include old first arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis+objc >= length)) {
/*
* Include old last arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr + beforeThis;
for (i=0; i<objc; i+=2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
coordPtr += 2;
}
}
}
if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
ckfree(linePtr->firstArrowPtr);
linePtr->firstArrowPtr = NULL;
}
if (linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) {
ckfree(linePtr->lastArrowPtr);
linePtr->lastArrowPtr = NULL;
}
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
}
if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
double width;
int intWidth;
if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis < 2)) {
/*
* Include new first arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis+objc >= length)) {
/*
* Include new last arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
LineDeleteCoords(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
| | | | > > | | | | | > > > > > > > | > > > > > | > | > | > > > > > > > | | > > > > | | > > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > | | 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
LineDeleteCoords(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
int first, /* Index of first character to delete. */
int last) /* Index of last character to delete. */
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
int count, i, first1, last1, nbDelPoints;
int oriNumPoints = linePtr->numPoints;
int canOptimize = 1;
int length = 2*linePtr->numPoints;
double *coordPtr;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
first &= -2; /* If odd, make it even. */
last &= -2;
if (first < 0) {
first = 0;
}
if (last >= length) {
last = length - 2;
}
if (first > last) {
return;
}
/*
* With arrows, the end points of the line are adjusted so that a thick
* line doesn't stick out past the arrowheads (see ConfigureArrows).
*/
if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
linePtr->coordPtr[0] = linePtr->firstArrowPtr[0];
linePtr->coordPtr[1] = linePtr->firstArrowPtr[1];
}
if (linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) {
linePtr->coordPtr[length-2] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[0];
linePtr->coordPtr[length-1] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[1];
}
first1 = first;
last1 = last;
nbDelPoints = (last - first) / 2 + 1;
/*
* Include one point at left of the left delete position, and one
* point at right of the right delete position.
*/
first1 -= 2;
last1 += 2;
if (linePtr->smooth) {
if (!strcmp(linePtr->smooth->name, "true")) {
/*
* Quadratic Bezier splines. A second point must be included at
* each side of the delete position.
*/
first1 -= 2;
last1 += 2;
/*
* If the delete position is the first or last point of the line,
* include a third point.
*/
if (first1 == -4) {
last1 += 2;
}
if (last1 - 4 == length - 2) {
first1 -= 2;
}
} else if (!strcmp(linePtr->smooth->name, "raw")) {
/*
* Cubic Bezier splines. See details in ticket [5fb8145997].
*/
if (((oriNumPoints - 1) % 3) || (nbDelPoints % 3)) {
/*
* No optimization for "degenerate" lines or when deleting
* something else than a multiple of 3 points.
*/
canOptimize = 0;
}
else {
first1 -= first1 % 6;
last1 = last + 6 - last % 6;
}
} else {
/*
* Custom smoothing method. No optimization is possible.
*/
canOptimize = 0;
}
}
if (first1 < 0) {
first1 = 0;
}
if (last1 >= length) {
last1 = length - 2;
}
if (canOptimize && ((first1 >= 2) || (last1 < length-2))) {
/*
* This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
* the line that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
* that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
* the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
* flag is set, the redrawing has to be done here, otherwise the
* general Canvas code will take care of it.
* Rationale for the optimization code can be found in Tk ticket
* [5fb8145997].
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[first1];
itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[first1+1];
if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1 < 2)) {
/*
* Include old first arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1 >= length - 2)) {
/*
* Include old last arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 |
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
}
if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
double width;
int intWidth;
| | | | | 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 |
if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
}
if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
double width;
int intWidth;
if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1 < 2)) {
/*
* Include new first arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1 >= length - 2)) {
/*
* Include new last arrow.
*/
for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
i++, coordPtr += 2) {
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 |
GetLineIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular coord in
* itemPtr's line. */
| | < | < < | < < > | < < < < < | < | | | 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 |
GetLineIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular coord in
* itemPtr's line. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted index. */
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(obj);
if (string[0] == 'e') {
if (strncmp(string, "end", obj->length) == 0) {
*indexPtr = 2*linePtr->numPoints;
} else {
goto badIndex;
}
} else if (string[0] == '@') {
int i;
double x, y, bestDist, dist, *coordPtr;
char *end;
const char *p;
p = string+1;
x = strtod(p, &end);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 |
if (dist < bestDist) {
bestDist = dist;
*indexPtr = 2*i;
}
coordPtr += 2;
}
} else {
| > > | > > > > > > > > > | | | | | > | | | < < | 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 |
if (dist < bestDist) {
bestDist = dist;
*indexPtr = 2*i;
}
coordPtr += 2;
}
} else {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, obj, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr &= -2; /* If index is odd, make it even. */
if (*indexPtr < 0){
*indexPtr = 0;
} else if (*indexPtr > (2*linePtr->numPoints)) {
*indexPtr = (2*linePtr->numPoints);
}
}
return TCL_OK;
/*
* Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result, so we have to
* clear it out before storing our own message.
*/
badIndex:
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad index \"%s\"", string));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "ITEM_INDEX", "LINE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TranslateLine --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 |
}
ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 |
}
ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ParseArrowShape --
*
* This function is called back during option parsing to parse arrow
* shape information.
*
* Results:
* The return value is a standard Tcl result: TCL_OK means that the arrow
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 |
ParseArrowShape(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Not used. */
const char *value, /* Textual specification of arrow shape. */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to item record in which to store
* arrow information. */
| | | | 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 |
ParseArrowShape(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Not used. */
const char *value, /* Textual specification of arrow shape. */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to item record in which to store
* arrow information. */
int offset) /* Offset of shape information in widget
* record. */
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) recordPtr;
double a, b, c;
int argc;
const char **argv = NULL;
if (offset != Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrowShapeA)) {
Tcl_Panic("ParseArrowShape received bogus offset");
}
if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, (char *) value, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
goto syntaxError;
} else if (argc != 3) {
goto syntaxError;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 |
static const char *
PrintArrowShape(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window associated with linePtr's widget. */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to item record containing current
* shape information. */
| | | | 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 |
static const char *
PrintArrowShape(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window associated with linePtr's widget. */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to item record containing current
* shape information. */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Offset of arrow information in record. */
Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr) /* Store address of function to call to free
* string here. */
{
LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) recordPtr;
char *buffer = (char *)ckalloc(120);
snprintf(buffer, 120, "%.5g %.5g %.5g", linePtr->arrowShapeA,
linePtr->arrowShapeB, linePtr->arrowShapeC);
*freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
return buffer;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 |
static int
ArrowParseProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
| | | 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 |
static int
ArrowParseProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset) /* Offset into item. */
{
int c;
size_t length;
Arrows *arrowPtr = (Arrows *) (widgRec + offset);
if (value == NULL || *value == 0) {
*arrowPtr = ARROWS_NONE;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 |
*/
static const char *
ArrowPrintProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Ignored. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
| | | 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 |
*/
static const char *
ArrowPrintProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Ignored. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window containing canvas widget. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset, /* Offset into item. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_FreeProc **)) /* Pointer to variable to fill in with
* information about how to reclaim storage
* for return string. */
{
Arrows *arrowPtr = (Arrows *) (widgRec + offset);
switch (*arrowPtr) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 | Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%.15g %.15g translate %.15g %.15g", linePtr->coordPtr[0], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr[1]), width/2.0, width/2.0); Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, " scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", -1); Tcl_ResetResult(interp); | | > > | > > | 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 |
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%.15g %.15g translate %.15g %.15g",
linePtr->coordPtr[0], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr[1]),
width/2.0, width/2.0);
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj,
" scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
goto done;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 |
style = 2;
} else {
style = 0;
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%d setlinejoin\n", style);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | > > | | > > | | > > > > > > > | 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 |
style = 2;
} else {
style = 0;
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%d setlinejoin\n", style);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr, &linePtr->outline) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
/*
* Output polygons for the arrowheads, if there are any.
*/
if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
}
if (ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr,
linePtr->firstArrowPtr, psObj) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
if (linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) {
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
}
if (ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr,
linePtr->lastArrowPtr, psObj) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
/*
* Plug the accumulated postscript back into the result.
*/
done:
(void) Tcl_RestoreInterpState(interp, interpState);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), psObj);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_OK;
error:
Tcl_DiscardInterpState(interpState);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ArrowheadPostscript --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 |
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arrowPtr, PTS_IN_ARROW);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | > > | 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 |
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arrowPtr, PTS_IN_ARROW);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvPoly.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 |
static const Tk_CustomOption smoothOption = {
TkSmoothParseProc, TkSmoothPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > | | | | | | | | | | | | 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 |
static const Tk_CustomOption smoothOption = {
TkSmoothParseProc, TkSmoothPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption dashOption = {
TkCanvasDashParseProc, TkCanvasDashPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
TkOffsetParseProc, TkOffsetPrintProc,
INT2PTR(TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE|TK_OFFSET_INDEX)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
TkPixelParseProc, TkPixelPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeStipple),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.dash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.offset),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledDash),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledColor),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledStipple),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledWidth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
/* Remark: Default for -fill should be NULL, see [2860519]. Will be fixed in Tk 8.7 */
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", NULL, NULL,
"round", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, joinStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, smooth),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &smoothOption},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", NULL, NULL,
"12", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, splineSteps), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"1.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.width),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 | static void DeletePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayPolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); static int GetPolygonIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, | | | | < < | 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | static void DeletePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display); static void DisplayPolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height); static int GetPolygonIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr); static int PolygonCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void PolygonDeleteCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last); static void PolygonInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj); static int PolygonToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr); static double PolygonToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); static int PolygonToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass); static void ScalePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY, double scaleX, double scaleY); static void TranslatePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 |
TranslatePolygon, /* translateProc */
GetPolygonIndex, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
PolygonInsert, /* insertProc */
PolygonDeleteCoords, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 |
TranslatePolygon, /* translateProc */
GetPolygonIndex, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* icursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
PolygonInsert, /* insertProc */
PolygonDeleteCoords, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
* The definition below determines how large are static arrays used to hold
* spline points (splines larger than this have to have their arrays
* malloc-ed).
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
675 676 677 678 679 680 681 |
index = 0;
}
}
index %= (polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed) * 2;
if (index < 0) {
index += (polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed) * 2;
}
| | | 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 |
index = 0;
}
}
index %= (polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed) * 2;
if (index < 0) {
index += (polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed) * 2;
}
tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (polyPtr->coordPtr[index] + 0.5);
tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (polyPtr->coordPtr[index+1] + 0.5);
} else {
if (tsoffset->flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
tsoffset->xoffset = polyPtr->header.x1;
} else if (tsoffset->flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
tsoffset->xoffset = (polyPtr->header.x1 + polyPtr->header.x2)/2;
} else if (tsoffset->flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
PolygonInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Line item to be modified. */
| | | > > | | | | | 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
PolygonInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Line item to be modified. */
int beforeThis, /* Index before which new coordinates are to
* be inserted. */
Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New coordinates to be inserted. */
{
PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
int length, oriNumPoints, objc, nbInsPoints, i;
Tcl_Obj **objv;
double *newCoordPtr;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
|| !objc || objc&1) {
return;
}
oriNumPoints = polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed;
length = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
nbInsPoints = objc / 2;
while (beforeThis > length) {
beforeThis -= length;
}
while (beforeThis < 0) {
beforeThis += length;
}
newCoordPtr = (double *)ckalloc(sizeof(double) * (length + 2 + objc));
for (i=0; i<beforeThis; i++) {
newCoordPtr[i] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
}
for (i=0; i<objc; i++) {
if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objv[i],
&newCoordPtr[i+beforeThis]) != TCL_OK){
ckfree(newCoordPtr);
return;
}
}
for (i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
newCoordPtr[i+objc] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
}
if (polyPtr->coordPtr) {
ckfree(polyPtr->coordPtr);
}
length += objc;
polyPtr->coordPtr = newCoordPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 | /* * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of * the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with * that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs * the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this * flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing, otherwise I have * to do it here. */ | > > | > > > > > > > | | | > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > | 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 |
/*
* This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
* the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
* that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
* the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
* flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing, otherwise I have
* to do it here.
* Rationale for the optimization code can be found in Tk ticket
* [5fb8145997].
*/
double width;
int j;
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
/*
* The header elements that normally are used for the bounding box,
* are now used to calculate the bounding box for only the part that
* has to be redrawn. That doesn't matter, because afterwards the
* bounding box has to be re-calculated anyway.
*/
itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) polyPtr->coordPtr[beforeThis];
itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) polyPtr->coordPtr[beforeThis+1];
beforeThis -= 2;
objc += 4;
if (polyPtr->smooth) {
if (!strcmp(polyPtr->smooth->name, "true")) {
/*
* Quadratic Bezier splines.
*/
beforeThis -= 2;
objc += 4;
} else if (!strcmp(polyPtr->smooth->name, "raw")) {
/*
* Cubic Bezier splines.
*/
if ((oriNumPoints % 3) || (nbInsPoints % 3)) {
/*
* No optimization for "degenerate" polygons or when inserting
* something else than a multiple of 3 points.
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
} else {
beforeThis -= abs(beforeThis) % 6;
objc += 4;
}
} else {
/*
* Custom smoothing method. No optimization is possible.
*/
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
}
}
if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
/*
* Be careful; beforeThis could now be negative
*/
for (i=beforeThis; i<beforeThis+objc; i+=2) {
j = i;
if (j < 0) {
j += length;
} else if (j >= length) {
j -= length;
}
TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, polyPtr->coordPtr+j);
}
width = polyPtr->outline.width;
if (Canvas(canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
if (polyPtr->outline.activeWidth > width) {
width = polyPtr->outline.activeWidth;
}
} else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
if (polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth > 0.0) {
width = polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
}
}
itemPtr->x1 -= (int) width;
itemPtr->y1 -= (int) width;
itemPtr->x2 += (int) width;
itemPtr->y2 += (int) width;
Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas,
itemPtr->x1, itemPtr->y1, itemPtr->x2, itemPtr->y2);
}
}
ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
PolygonDeleteCoords(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
| | | | | | | | 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
PolygonDeleteCoords(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
int first, /* Index of first character to delete. */
int last) /* Index of last character to delete. */
{
PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
int count, i;
int length = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
while (first >= length) {
first -= length;
}
while (first < 0) {
first += length;
}
while (last >= length) {
last -= length;
}
while (last < 0) {
last += length;
}
first &= -2;
last &= -2;
count = last + 2 - first;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 |
}
if (last >= first) {
for (i=last+2; i<length; i++) {
polyPtr->coordPtr[i-count] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
}
} else {
| | | 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 |
}
if (last >= first) {
for (i=last+2; i<length; i++) {
polyPtr->coordPtr[i-count] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
}
} else {
for (i=last; i<=first; i++) {
polyPtr->coordPtr[i-last] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
}
}
polyPtr->coordPtr[length-count] = polyPtr->coordPtr[0];
polyPtr->coordPtr[length-count+1] = polyPtr->coordPtr[1];
polyPtr->numPoints -= count/2;
ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 |
GetPolygonIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular coord in
* itemPtr's line. */
| | < | < < | | < < < | < | | < < | | 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 |
GetPolygonIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular coord in
* itemPtr's line. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted index. */
{
PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(obj);
if (string[0] == 'e') {
if (strncmp(string, "end", obj->length) != 0) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
} else if (string[0] == '@') {
int i;
double x, y, bestDist, dist, *coordPtr;
char *end;
const char *p;
p = string+1;
x = strtod(p, &end);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 |
if (dist < bestDist) {
bestDist = dist;
*indexPtr = 2*i;
}
coordPtr += 2;
}
} else {
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 |
if (dist < bestDist) {
bestDist = dist;
*indexPtr = 2*i;
}
coordPtr += 2;
}
} else {
int count = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, obj, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr &= -2; /* if odd, make it even */
if (!count) {
*indexPtr = 0;
} else if (*indexPtr > 0) {
*indexPtr = ((*indexPtr - 2) % count) + 2;
} else {
*indexPtr = -((-(*indexPtr)) % count);
}
}
return TCL_OK;
/*
* Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result, so we have to
* clear it out before storing our own message.
*/
badIndex:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad index \"%s\"", string));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "ITEM_INDEX", "POLY", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TranslatePolygon --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 | width/2.0, width/2.0); /* * Color it in. */ Tcl_ResetResult(interp); | | > > | > > | > > | > > | 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 |
width/2.0, width/2.0);
/*
* Color it in.
*/
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "clip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "fill\n", -1);
}
goto done;
}
/*
* Fill the area of the polygon.
*/
if (fillColor != NULL && polyPtr->numPoints > 3) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (!polyPtr->smooth || !polyPtr->smooth->postscriptProc) {
Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
polyPtr->numPoints);
} else {
polyPtr->smooth->postscriptProc(interp, canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps);
}
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (fillStipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "eoclip ", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (color != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore gsave\n", -1);
}
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "eofill\n", -1);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 |
style = 2;
} else {
style = 0;
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%d setlinejoin 1 setlinecap\n", style);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | > > > > > > > | 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 |
style = 2;
} else {
style = 0;
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%d setlinejoin 1 setlinecap\n", style);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr, &polyPtr->outline) != TCL_OK){
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
}
/*
* Plug the accumulated postscript back into the result.
*/
done:
(void) Tcl_RestoreInterpState(interp, interpState);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), psObj);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_OK;
error:
Tcl_DiscardInterpState(interpState);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkCanvPs.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 |
/*
* The table below provides a template that's used to process arguments to the
* canvas "postscript" command and fill in TkPostscriptInfo structures.
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormap", NULL, NULL,
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 |
/*
* The table below provides a template that's used to process arguments to the
* canvas "postscript" command and fill in TkPostscriptInfo structures.
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormap", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, colorVar), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormode", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, colorMode), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, fileName), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-channel", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, channelName), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-fontmap", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, fontVar), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, height), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-pageanchor", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageAnchor), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pageheight", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageHeightString), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagewidth", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageWidthString), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagex", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageXString), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagey", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageYString), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-prolog", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, prolog), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-rotate", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, rotate), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, width), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-x", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, x), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-y", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, y), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 |
*
* Side effects:
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkCanvPostscriptCmd(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Information about canvas widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int argc, /* Number of arguments. */
const char **argv) /* Argument strings. Caller has already parsed
* this command enough to know that argv[1] is
| > | 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 |
*
* Side effects:
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
int
TkCanvPostscriptCmd(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Information about canvas widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int argc, /* Number of arguments. */
const char **argv) /* Argument strings. Caller has already parsed
* this command enough to know that argv[1] is
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
486 487 488 489 490 491 492 |
/*
* Insert the prolog
*/
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, preambleObj);
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
| | | 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 |
/*
* Insert the prolog
*/
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, preambleObj);
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(psInfo.chan, psObj) == -1) {
channelWriteFailed:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"problem writing postscript data to channel: %s",
Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto cleanup;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
540 541 542 543 544 545 546 |
psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
psInfo.x, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr));
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
| | | 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 |
psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
psInfo.x, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr));
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(psInfo.chan, psObj) == -1) {
goto channelWriteFailed;
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
psObj = Tcl_NewObj();
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
572 573 574 575 576 577 578 |
}
result = itemPtr->typePtr->postscriptProc(interp,
(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"\n (generating Postscript for item %d)",
| | | | | 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 |
}
result = itemPtr->typePtr->postscriptProc(interp,
(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"\n (generating Postscript for item %d)",
itemPtr->id));
goto cleanup;
}
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "gsave\n", -1);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore\n", -1);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(psInfo.chan, psObj) == -1) {
goto channelWriteFailed;
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
psObj = Tcl_NewObj();
}
}
/*
* Output page-end information, such as commands to print the page and
* document trailer stuff.
*/
if (psInfo.prolog) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj,
"restore showpage\n\n"
"%%Trailer\n"
"end\n"
"%%EOF\n", -1);
if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(psInfo.chan, psObj) == -1) {
goto channelWriteFailed;
}
}
}
if (psInfo.chan == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, psObj);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 |
XGetGeometry(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, &dummyRoot,
(int *) &dummyX, (int *) &dummyY, (unsigned int *) &totalWidth,
(unsigned int *) &totalHeight, &dummyBorderwidth, &dummyDepth);
imagePtr = XGetImage(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, 0, 0,
totalWidth, totalHeight, 1, XYPixmap);
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "<", -1);
mask = 0x80;
value = 0;
charsInLine = 0;
lastX = startX + width - 1;
lastY = startY + height - 1;
for (y = lastY; y >= startY; y--) {
| > > > > > > > > > > > > | 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 |
XGetGeometry(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, &dummyRoot,
(int *) &dummyX, (int *) &dummyY, (unsigned int *) &totalWidth,
(unsigned int *) &totalHeight, &dummyBorderwidth, &dummyDepth);
imagePtr = XGetImage(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, 0, 0,
totalWidth, totalHeight, 1, XYPixmap);
if (!imagePtr) {
/*
* The XGetImage() function is apparently not implemented on this
* system. Just skip the pixels, the Postscript will still be
* syntactically correct.
*/
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "<>", -1);
return;
}
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "<", -1);
mask = 0x80;
value = 0;
charsInLine = 0;
lastX = startX + width - 1;
lastY = startY + height - 1;
for (y = lastY; y >= startY; y--) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 |
static void
TkImageGetColor(
TkColormapData *cdata, /* Colormap data */
unsigned long pixel, /* Pixel value to look up */
double *red, double *green, double *blue)
/* Color data to return */
{
| < < | 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 |
static void
TkImageGetColor(
TkColormapData *cdata, /* Colormap data */
unsigned long pixel, /* Pixel value to look up */
double *red, double *green, double *blue)
/* Color data to return */
{
*red = (double) GetRValue(pixel) / 255.0;
*green = (double) GetGValue(pixel) / 255.0;
*blue = (double) GetBValue(pixel) / 255.0;
}
#else /* ! (_WIN32 || MAC_OSX_TK) */
static void
TkImageGetColor(
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 |
int bytesPerLine = 0, maxWidth = 0;
int level = psInfoPtr->colorLevel;
Colormap cmap;
int i, ncolors;
Visual *visual;
TkColormapData cdata;
Tcl_Obj *psObj;
| < | | 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 |
int bytesPerLine = 0, maxWidth = 0;
int level = psInfoPtr->colorLevel;
Colormap cmap;
int i, ncolors;
Visual *visual;
TkColormapData cdata;
Tcl_Obj *psObj;
if (psInfoPtr->prepass) {
return TCL_OK;
}
cmap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
visual = Tk_Visual(tkwin);
/*
* Obtain information about the colormap, ie the mapping between pixel
* values and RGB values. The code below should work for all Visual types.
*/
ncolors = visual->map_entries;
cdata.colors = ckalloc(sizeof(XColor) * ncolors);
cdata.ncolors = ncolors;
if (visual->c_class == DirectColor || visual->c_class == TrueColor) {
cdata.separated = 1;
cdata.red_mask = visual->red_mask;
cdata.green_mask = visual->green_mask;
cdata.blue_mask = visual->blue_mask;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvText.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 |
* (and shared with) the generic canvas
* code. */
/*
* Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
*/
double x, y; /* Positioning point for text. */
| | | 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 |
* (and shared with) the generic canvas
* code. */
/*
* Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
*/
double x, y; /* Positioning point for text. */
int insertPos; /* Character index of character just before
* which the insertion cursor is displayed. */
/*
* Configuration settings that are updated by Tk_ConfigureWidget.
*/
Tk_Anchor anchor; /* Where to anchor text relative to (x,y). */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 |
* at. */
/*
* Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the
* configuration settings above.
*/
| | | | 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 |
* at. */
/*
* Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the
* configuration settings above.
*/
int numChars; /* Length of text in characters. */
int numBytes; /* Length of text in bytes. */
Tk_TextLayout textLayout; /* Cached text layout information. */
int actualWidth; /* Width of text as computed. Used to make
* selections of wrapped text display
* right. */
double drawOrigin[2]; /* Where we start drawing from. */
GC gc; /* Graphics context for drawing text. */
GC selTextGC; /* Graphics context for selected text. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < | 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
TkOffsetParseProc, TkOffsetPrintProc, INT2PTR(TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE)
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
"center", Tk_Offset(TextItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-angle", NULL, NULL,
"0.0", Tk_Offset(TextItem, angle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVITEM_OUTLINE, Tk_Offset(TextItem, color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL,
DEF_CANVTEXT_FONT, Tk_Offset(TextItem, tkfont), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, "-justify", NULL, NULL,
"left", Tk_Offset(TextItem, justify), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
"0,0", Tk_Offset(TextItem, tsoffset),
TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-text", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(TextItem, text), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-underline", NULL, NULL,
"-1", Tk_Offset(TextItem, underline), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(TextItem, width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
*/
static void ComputeTextBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, TextItem *textPtr);
static int ConfigureText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int CreateText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void DeleteText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
static void DisplayCanvText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
int x, int y, int width, int height);
static int GetSelText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int offset, char *buffer,
int maxBytes);
static int GetTextIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr);
static void ScaleText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
double scaleX, double scaleY);
static void SetTextCursor(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index);
static int TextCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void TextDeleteChars(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last);
static void TextInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj);
static int TextToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
static double TextToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr);
static int TextToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
static void TranslateText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
/*
* The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types by means of
* functions that can be invoked by generic item code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
197 198 199 200 201 202 203 |
TranslateText, /* translateProc */
GetTextIndex, /* indexProc */
SetTextCursor, /* icursorProc */
GetSelText, /* selectionProc */
TextInsert, /* insertProc */
TextDeleteChars, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 |
TranslateText, /* translateProc */
GetTextIndex, /* indexProc */
SetTextCursor, /* icursorProc */
GetSelText, /* selectionProc */
TextInsert, /* insertProc */
TextDeleteChars, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
#define ROUND(d) ((int) floor((d) + 0.5))
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
506 507 508 509 510 511 512 |
* keep them inside the item.
*/
textPtr->numBytes = strlen(textPtr->text);
textPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(textPtr->text, textPtr->numBytes);
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
| | | | | | 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 |
* keep them inside the item.
*/
textPtr->numBytes = strlen(textPtr->text);
textPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(textPtr->text, textPtr->numBytes);
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst >= textPtr->numChars) {
textInfoPtr->selItemPtr = NULL;
} else {
if (textInfoPtr->selectLast >= textPtr->numChars) {
textInfoPtr->selectLast = textPtr->numChars - 1;
}
if ((textInfoPtr->anchorItemPtr == itemPtr)
&& (textInfoPtr->selectAnchor >= textPtr->numChars)) {
textInfoPtr->selectAnchor = textPtr->numChars - 1;
}
}
}
if (textPtr->insertPos >= textPtr->numChars) {
textPtr->insertPos = textPtr->numChars;
}
/*
* Restrict so that 0.0 <= angle < 360.0, and then recompute the cached
* sine and cosine of the angle. Note that fmod() can produce negative
* results, and we try to avoid negative zero as well.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
561 562 563 564 565 566 567 | * Resources associated with itemPtr are released. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DeleteText( | | < | 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 |
* Resources associated with itemPtr are released.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DeleteText(
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Info about overall canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
if (textPtr->color != NULL) {
Tk_FreeColor(textPtr->color);
}
if (textPtr->activeColor != NULL) {
Tk_FreeColor(textPtr->activeColor);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
629 630 631 632 633 634 635 |
static void
ComputeTextBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
TextItem *textPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
| | | 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 |
static void
ComputeTextBbox(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas that contains item. */
TextItem *textPtr) /* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
{
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
int width, height, fudge, i;
Tk_State state = textPtr->header.state;
double x[4], y[4], dx[4], dy[4], sinA, cosA, tmp;
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 |
}
/*
* Use overall geometry information to compute the top-left corner of the
* bounding box for the text item.
*/
| < < | | | < | | < < < | | | | < | < < < | | | 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 |
}
/*
* Use overall geometry information to compute the top-left corner of the
* bounding box for the text item.
*/
for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
dx[i] = dy[i] = 0.0;
}
switch (textPtr->anchor) {
case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
case TK_ANCHOR_N:
case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
break;
case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
case TK_ANCHOR_S:
case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
dy[i] = -height;
}
break;
default:
for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
dy[i] = -height / 2;
}
break;
}
switch (textPtr->anchor) {
case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
case TK_ANCHOR_W:
case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
break;
case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
case TK_ANCHOR_E:
case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
dx[i] = -width;
}
break;
default:
for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
dx[i] = -width / 2;
}
break;
}
textPtr->actualWidth = width;
sinA = textPtr->sine;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 |
Drawable drawable, /* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
int x, int y, int width, int height)
/* Describes region of canvas that must be
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
TextItem *textPtr;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
| | | 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 |
Drawable drawable, /* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
int x, int y, int width, int height)
/* Describes region of canvas that must be
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
TextItem *textPtr;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
int selFirstChar, selLastChar;
short drawableX, drawableY;
Pixmap stipple;
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
834 835 836 837 838 839 840 |
* read-only.
*/
if (stipple != None) {
Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, textPtr->gc, &textPtr->tsoffset);
}
| | | | | 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 |
* read-only.
*/
if (stipple != None) {
Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, textPtr->gc, &textPtr->tsoffset);
}
selFirstChar = -1;
selLastChar = 0;
Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, textPtr->drawOrigin[0],
textPtr->drawOrigin[1], &drawableX, &drawableY);
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
selFirstChar = textInfoPtr->selectFirst;
selLastChar = textInfoPtr->selectLast;
if (selLastChar > textPtr->numChars) {
selLastChar = textPtr->numChars - 1;
}
if ((selFirstChar >= 0) && (selFirstChar <= selLastChar)) {
int xFirst, yFirst, hFirst;
int xLast, yLast, wLast;
/*
* Draw a special background under the selection.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
956 957 958 959 960 961 962 |
* there is selected text and the foregrounds differ, draw the regular
* text up to the selection, draw the selection, then draw the rest of the
* regular text. Drawing the regular text and then the selected text over
* it would causes problems with anti-aliased text because the two
* anti-aliasing colors would blend together.
*/
| | | 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 |
* there is selected text and the foregrounds differ, draw the regular
* text up to the selection, draw the selection, then draw the rest of the
* regular text. Drawing the regular text and then the selected text over
* it would causes problems with anti-aliased text because the two
* anti-aliasing colors would blend together.
*/
if ((selFirstChar >= 0) && (textPtr->selTextGC != textPtr->gc)) {
if (0 < selFirstChar) {
TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc,
textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle,
0, selFirstChar);
}
TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->selTextGC,
textPtr->textLayout, drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->angle,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
TextInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item to be modified. */
| | | | | | | | 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
TextInsert(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item to be modified. */
int index, /* Character index before which string is to
* be inserted. */
Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New characters to be inserted. */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
int byteIndex, charsAdded;
int byteCount;
char *newStr, *text;
const char *string;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &byteCount);
text = textPtr->text;
if (index < 0) {
index = 0;
}
if (index > textPtr->numChars) {
index = textPtr->numChars;
}
byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(text, index) - text;
byteCount = strlen(string);
if (byteCount == 0) {
return;
}
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(textPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1);
memcpy(newStr, text, byteIndex);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 |
/*
* Inserting characters invalidates indices such as those for the
* selection and cursor. Update the indices appropriately.
*/
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
| | | | | | 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 |
/*
* Inserting characters invalidates indices such as those for the
* selection and cursor. Update the indices appropriately.
*/
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
textInfoPtr->selectFirst += charsAdded;
}
if (textInfoPtr->selectLast >= index) {
textInfoPtr->selectLast += charsAdded;
}
if ((textInfoPtr->anchorItemPtr == itemPtr)
&& (textInfoPtr->selectAnchor >= index)) {
textInfoPtr->selectAnchor += charsAdded;
}
}
if (textPtr->insertPos >= index) {
textPtr->insertPos += charsAdded;
}
ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
TextDeleteChars(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
TextDeleteChars(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item in which to delete characters. */
int first, /* Character index of first character to
* delete. */
int last) /* Character index of last character to delete
* (inclusive). */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
int byteIndex, byteCount, charsRemoved;
char *newStr, *text;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
text = textPtr->text;
if (first < 0) {
first = 0;
}
if (last >= textPtr->numChars) {
last = textPtr->numChars - 1;
}
if (first > last) {
return;
}
charsRemoved = last + 1 - first;
byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(text, first) - text;
byteCount = TkUtfAtIndex(text + byteIndex, charsRemoved)
- (text + byteIndex);
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(textPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount);
memcpy(newStr, text, byteIndex);
strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, text + byteIndex + byteCount);
ckfree(text);
textPtr->text = newStr;
textPtr->numChars -= charsRemoved;
textPtr->numBytes -= byteCount;
/*
* Update indexes for the selection and cursor to reflect the renumbering
* of the remaining characters.
*/
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst > first) {
textInfoPtr->selectFirst -= charsRemoved;
if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst < first) {
textInfoPtr->selectFirst = first;
}
}
if (textInfoPtr->selectLast >= first) {
textInfoPtr->selectLast -= charsRemoved;
if (textInfoPtr->selectLast < first - 1) {
textInfoPtr->selectLast = first - 1;
}
}
if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst > textInfoPtr->selectLast) {
textInfoPtr->selItemPtr = NULL;
}
if ((textInfoPtr->anchorItemPtr == itemPtr)
&& (textInfoPtr->selectAnchor > first)) {
textInfoPtr->selectAnchor -= charsRemoved;
if (textInfoPtr->selectAnchor < first) {
textInfoPtr->selectAnchor = first;
}
}
}
if (textPtr->insertPos > first) {
textPtr->insertPos -= charsRemoved;
if (textPtr->insertPos < first) {
textPtr->insertPos = first;
}
}
ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr);
return;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 | (int) (rectPtr[3] - rectPtr[1] + 0.5), textPtr->angle); } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 | (int) (rectPtr[3] - rectPtr[1] + 0.5), textPtr->angle); } /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * ScaleText -- * * This function is invoked to rescale a text item. * * Results: * None. * |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 |
GetTextIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular character in
* itemPtr's text. */
| | | | < < | < < | > | < < < < < < | | 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 |
GetTextIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular character in
* itemPtr's text. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted character
* index. */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
int length;
int c;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
const char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
c = string[0];
if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0)) {
*indexPtr = textPtr->numChars;
} else if ((c == 'i')
&& (strncmp(string, "insert", length) == 0)) {
*indexPtr = textPtr->insertPos;
} else if ((c == 's') && (length >= 5)
&& (strncmp(string, "sel.first", length) == 0)) {
if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr != itemPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"selection isn't in item", -1));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 |
goto badIndex;
}
y = (int) ((tmp < 0) ? tmp - 0.5 : tmp + 0.5);
x -= (int) textPtr->drawOrigin[0];
y -= (int) textPtr->drawOrigin[1];
*indexPtr = Tk_PointToChar(textPtr->textLayout,
(int) (x*cs - y*s), (int) (y*cs + x*s));
} else {
/*
* Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result, so we
* have to clear it out before storing our own message.
*/
badIndex:
| > > > > > > | 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 |
goto badIndex;
}
y = (int) ((tmp < 0) ? tmp - 0.5 : tmp + 0.5);
x -= (int) textPtr->drawOrigin[0];
y -= (int) textPtr->drawOrigin[1];
*indexPtr = Tk_PointToChar(textPtr->textLayout,
(int) (x*cs - y*s), (int) (y*cs + x*s));
} else if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, obj, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
if (*indexPtr < 0) {
*indexPtr = 0;
} else if (*indexPtr > textPtr->numChars) {
*indexPtr = textPtr->numChars;
}
} else {
/*
* Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result, so we
* have to clear it out before storing our own message.
*/
badIndex:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 |
*/
static void
SetTextCursor(
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Record describing canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item in which cursor position is to be
* set. */
| | | | 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 |
*/
static void
SetTextCursor(
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Record describing canvas widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item in which cursor position is to be
* set. */
int index) /* Character index of character just before
* which cursor is to be positioned. */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
if (index < 0) {
textPtr->insertPos = 0;
} else if (index > textPtr->numChars) {
textPtr->insertPos = textPtr->numChars;
} else {
textPtr->insertPos = index;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 | * * Side effects: * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | | | | < < < > > > | | 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
GetSelText(
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Canvas), /* Canvas containing selection. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item containing selection. */
int offset, /* Byte offset within selection of first
* character to be returned. */
char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
* not including terminating NULL
* character. */
{
TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
int byteCount;
char *text;
const char *selStart, *selEnd;
Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
if ((textInfoPtr->selectFirst < 0) ||
(textInfoPtr->selectFirst > textInfoPtr->selectLast)) {
return 0;
}
text = textPtr->text;
selStart = TkUtfAtIndex(text, textInfoPtr->selectFirst);
selEnd = TkUtfAtIndex(selStart,
textInfoPtr->selectLast + 1 - textInfoPtr->selectFirst);
byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset;
if (byteCount > maxBytes) {
byteCount = maxBytes;
}
if (byteCount <= 0) {
return 0;
}
memcpy(buffer, selStart + offset, (size_t) byteCount);
buffer[byteCount] = '\0';
return byteCount;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 |
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (prepass != 0) {
goto done;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
| | > > < | < > | 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 |
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (prepass != 0) {
goto done;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "/StippleText {\n %s} bind def\n",
Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
}
switch (textPtr->anchor) {
case TK_ANCHOR_NW: x = 0; y = 0; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_N: x = 1; y = 0; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_NE: x = 2; y = 0; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_E: x = 2; y = 1; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_SE: x = 2; y = 2; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_S: x = 1; y = 2; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_SW: x = 0; y = 2; break;
case TK_ANCHOR_W: x = 0; y = 1; break;
default: x = 1; y = 1; break;
}
switch (textPtr->justify) {
case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: justify = "0.5"; break;
case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: justify = "1"; break;
default: justify = "0"; break;
}
Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%.15g %.15g %.15g [\n",
textPtr->angle, textPtr->x, Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, textPtr->y));
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvUtil.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkCanvas.h"
/*
* Structures defined only in this file.
*/
typedef struct SmoothAssocData {
struct SmoothAssocData *nextPtr;
/* Pointer to next SmoothAssocData. */
| > > > > | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkCanvas.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* Structures defined only in this file.
*/
typedef struct SmoothAssocData {
struct SmoothAssocData *nextPtr;
/* Pointer to next SmoothAssocData. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
227 228 229 230 231 232 233 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_CanvasGetCoord( | | < < | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_CanvasGetCoord(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
const char *string, /* Describes coordinate (any screen coordinate
* form may be used here). */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store converted coordinate. */
{
if (Tk_GetScreenMM(Canvas(canvas)->interp, Canvas(canvas)->tkwin, string,
doublePtr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*doublePtr *= Canvas(canvas)->pixelsPerMM;
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
265 266 267 268 269 270 271 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj( | | < < | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Describes coordinate (any screen coordinate
* form may be used here). */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store converted coordinate. */
{
return Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(Canvas(canvas)->interp, Canvas(canvas)->tkwin, obj, doublePtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
398 399 400 401 402 403 404 | * The tags for a given item get replaced by those indicated in the value * argument. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int | | | | < < < | | | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 |
* The tags for a given item get replaced by those indicated in the value
* argument.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Not used.*/
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option (list of tag names). */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset) /* Offset into item (ignored). */
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr = (Tk_Item *) widgRec;
int argc, i;
const char **argv;
Tk_Uid *newPtr;
/*
* Break the value up into the individual tag names.
*/
if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, value, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Make sure that there's enough space in the item to hold the tag names.
*/
if (itemPtr->tagSpace < argc) {
newPtr = (Tk_Uid *)ckalloc(argc * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
for (i = itemPtr->numTags - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
newPtr[i] = itemPtr->tagPtr[i];
}
if (itemPtr->tagPtr != itemPtr->staticTagSpace) {
ckfree(itemPtr->tagPtr);
}
itemPtr->tagPtr = newPtr;
itemPtr->tagSpace = argc;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 | * Side effects: * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ const char * | | | | < < < | 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 |
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *
Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Ignored. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset, /* Ignored. */
Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr) /* Pointer to variable to fill in with
* information about how to reclaim storage
* for return string. */
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr = (Tk_Item *) widgRec;
if (itemPtr->numTags == 0) {
*freeProcPtr = NULL;
return "";
}
if (itemPtr->numTags == 1) {
*freeProcPtr = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
514 515 516 517 518 519 520 | * indicated in the value argument. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkCanvasDashParseProc( | | | < < < | 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 |
* indicated in the value argument.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkCanvasDashParseProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Not used.*/
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset) /* Offset into item. */
{
return Tk_GetDash(interp, value, (Tk_Dash *) (widgRec+offset));
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkCanvasDashPrintProc --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
551 552 553 554 555 556 557 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ const char * TkCanvasDashPrintProc( | | | < < | | | | | 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *
TkCanvasDashPrintProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Ignored. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset, /* Offset in record for item. */
Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr) /* Pointer to variable to fill in with
* information about how to reclaim storage
* for return string. */
{
Tk_Dash *dash = (Tk_Dash *) (widgRec+offset);
char *buffer, *p;
int i = dash->number;
if (i < 0) {
i = -i;
*freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
buffer = ckalloc(i + 1);
p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
memcpy(buffer, p, (unsigned int) i);
buffer[i] = 0;
return buffer;
} else if (!i) {
*freeProcPtr = NULL;
return "";
}
buffer = ckalloc(4 * i);
*freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
snprintf(buffer, 4 * i, "%d", *p++ & 0xff);
while (--i) {
snprintf(buffer + strlen(buffer), 4 * i - strlen(buffer), " %d", *p++ & 0xff);
}
return buffer;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
613 614 615 616 617 618 619 |
static SmoothAssocData *
InitSmoothMethods(
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
SmoothAssocData *methods, *ptr;
| | | | 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 |
static SmoothAssocData *
InitSmoothMethods(
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
SmoothAssocData *methods, *ptr;
methods = ckalloc(sizeof(SmoothAssocData));
methods->smooth.name = tkRawSmoothMethod.name;
methods->smooth.coordProc = tkRawSmoothMethod.coordProc;
methods->smooth.postscriptProc = tkRawSmoothMethod.postscriptProc;
ptr = methods->nextPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(SmoothAssocData));
ptr->smooth.name = tkBezierSmoothMethod.name;
ptr->smooth.coordProc = tkBezierSmoothMethod.coordProc;
ptr->smooth.postscriptProc = tkBezierSmoothMethod.postscriptProc;
ptr->nextPtr = NULL;
Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", SmoothMethodCleanupProc,methods);
return methods;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
652 653 654 655 656 657 658 |
void
Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
const Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth)
{
SmoothAssocData *methods, *typePtr2, *prevPtr, *ptr;
| | | 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 |
void
Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
const Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth)
{
SmoothAssocData *methods, *typePtr2, *prevPtr, *ptr;
methods = Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", NULL);
/*
* Initialize if we were not previously initialized.
*/
if (methods == NULL) {
methods = InitSmoothMethods(interp);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
678 679 680 681 682 683 684 |
} else {
prevPtr->nextPtr = typePtr2->nextPtr;
}
ckfree(typePtr2);
break;
}
}
| | | 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 |
} else {
prevPtr->nextPtr = typePtr2->nextPtr;
}
ckfree(typePtr2);
break;
}
}
ptr = ckalloc(sizeof(SmoothAssocData));
ptr->smooth.name = smooth->name;
ptr->smooth.coordProc = smooth->coordProc;
ptr->smooth.postscriptProc = smooth->postscriptProc;
ptr->nextPtr = methods;
Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", SmoothMethodCleanupProc, ptr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
707 708 709 710 711 712 713 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
SmoothMethodCleanupProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Points to "smoothMethod" AssocData for the
* interpreter. */
| | | < | 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
SmoothMethodCleanupProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Points to "smoothMethod" AssocData for the
* interpreter. */
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
{
SmoothAssocData *ptr, *methods = clientData;
while (methods != NULL) {
ptr = methods;
methods = methods->nextPtr;
ckfree(ptr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
738 739 740 741 742 743 744 | * indicated in the value argument. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkSmoothParseProc( | | | < < | | | 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 |
* indicated in the value argument.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkSmoothParseProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Ignored. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for reporting errors. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
const char *value, /* Value of option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset) /* Offset into item. */
{
const Tk_SmoothMethod **smoothPtr =
(const Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
const Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth = NULL;
int b;
size_t length;
SmoothAssocData *methods;
if (value == NULL || *value == 0) {
*smoothPtr = NULL;
return TCL_OK;
}
length = strlen(value);
methods = Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", NULL);
/*
* Not initialized yet; fix that now.
*/
if (methods == NULL) {
methods = InitSmoothMethods(interp);
}
/*
* Backward compatibility hack.
*/
if (strncmp(value, "bezier", length) == 0) {
smooth = &tkBezierSmoothMethod;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
832 833 834 835 836 837 838 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ const char * TkSmoothPrintProc( | | | < < < | 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *
TkSmoothPrintProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Ignored. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing canvas widget. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record for item. */
int offset, /* Offset into item. */
Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr) /* Pointer to variable to fill in with
* information about how to reclaim storage
* for return string. */
{
const Tk_SmoothMethod *smoothPtr =
* (Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
return smoothPtr ? smoothPtr->name : "0";
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_GetDash
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
894 895 896 897 898 899 900 |
case '.': case ',': case '-': case '_':
i = DashConvert(NULL, value, -1, 0.0);
if (i <= 0) {
goto badDashList;
}
i = strlen(value);
if (i > (int) sizeof(char *)) {
| | | | 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 |
case '.': case ',': case '-': case '_':
i = DashConvert(NULL, value, -1, 0.0);
if (i <= 0) {
goto badDashList;
}
i = strlen(value);
if (i > (int) sizeof(char *)) {
dash->pattern.pt = pt = ckalloc(strlen(value));
} else {
pt = dash->pattern.array;
}
memcpy(pt, value, (unsigned) i);
dash->number = -i;
return TCL_OK;
}
if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, (char *) value, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
goto badDashList;
}
if ((unsigned) ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) {
ckfree(dash->pattern.pt);
}
if (argc > (int) sizeof(char *)) {
dash->pattern.pt = pt = ckalloc(argc);
} else {
pt = dash->pattern.array;
}
dash->number = argc;
largv = argv;
while (argc > 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 |
if ((dash->number<-1) ||
((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[0] != ','))) {
char *q;
int i = -dash->number;
p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
| | | 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 |
if ((dash->number<-1) ||
((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[0] != ','))) {
char *q;
int i = -dash->number;
p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
q = ckalloc(2 * i);
i = DashConvert(q, p, i, width);
XSetDashes(Canvas(canvas)->display, outline->gc, outline->offset, q,i);
ckfree(q);
} else if (dash->number>2 || (dash->number==2 &&
(dash->pattern.array[0]!=dash->pattern.array[1]))) {
p = (dash->number > (int) sizeof(char *))
? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 |
Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, outline->gc, tsoffset);
tsoffset->xoffset += w;
tsoffset->yoffset += h;
return 1;
}
return 0;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_ResetOutlineGC
*
* Restores the GC to the situation before Tk_ChangeOutlineGC() was
| > | 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 |
Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, outline->gc, tsoffset);
tsoffset->xoffset += w;
tsoffset->yoffset += h;
return 1;
}
return 0;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_ResetOutlineGC
*
* Restores the GC to the situation before Tk_ChangeOutlineGC() was
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 |
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, " ", -1);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, converted);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(converted);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "] %d setdash\n", outline->offset);
} else if (dash->number < 0) {
if (dash->number < -5) {
| | | > > > > > > | > > | 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 |
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, " ", -1);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, converted);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(converted);
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "] %d setdash\n", outline->offset);
} else if (dash->number < 0) {
if (dash->number < -5) {
lptr = ckalloc(1 - 2*dash->number);
}
i = DashConvert(lptr, ptr, -dash->number, width);
if (i > 0) {
char *p = lptr;
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "%d", *p++ & 0xff);
for (; --i>0 ;) {
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, " %d", *p++ & 0xff);
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "] %d setdash\n", outline->offset);
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "] 0 setdash\n", -1);
}
if (lptr != pattern) {
ckfree(lptr);
}
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "] 0 setdash\n", -1);
}
if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Note that psObj might hold an invalid reference now.
*/
if (stipple != None) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(GetPostscriptBuffer(interp), "StrokeClip ", -1);
if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(GetPostscriptBuffer(interp), "stroke\n", -1);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 |
double top, btm; /* Top and bottom sizes of the bounding box */
double *tempArr; /* Temporary storage used by the clipper */
double *a, *b, *t; /* Pointers to parts of the temporary
* storage */
int i, j; /* Loop counters */
double limit[4]; /* Boundries at which clipping occurs */
double staticSpace[480]; /* Temp space from the stack */
| < | 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 |
double top, btm; /* Top and bottom sizes of the bounding box */
double *tempArr; /* Temporary storage used by the clipper */
double *a, *b, *t; /* Pointers to parts of the temporary
* storage */
int i, j; /* Loop counters */
double limit[4]; /* Boundries at which clipping occurs */
double staticSpace[480]; /* Temp space from the stack */
/*
* Constrain all vertices of the path to be within a box that is no larger
* than 32000 pixels wide or height. The top-left corner of this clipping
* box is 1000 pixels above and to the left of the top left corner of the
* window on which the canvas is displayed.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 |
* coordArr[] requires. Divide this space into two separate arrays a[] and
* b[]. Initialize a[] to be equal to coordArr[].
*/
if (numVertex*12 <= (int) (sizeof(staticSpace) / sizeof(double))) {
tempArr = staticSpace;
} else {
| | | 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 |
* coordArr[] requires. Divide this space into two separate arrays a[] and
* b[]. Initialize a[] to be equal to coordArr[].
*/
if (numVertex*12 <= (int) (sizeof(staticSpace) / sizeof(double))) {
tempArr = staticSpace;
} else {
tempArr = ckalloc(numVertex * 12 * sizeof(double));
}
for (i=0; i<numVertex*2; i++){
tempArr[i] = coordArr[i];
}
a = tempArr;
b = &tempArr[numVertex*6];
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 |
TranslateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, a[i*2], a[i*2+1], outArr, i);
}
if (tempArr != staticSpace) {
ckfree(tempArr);
}
return numOutput;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 |
TranslateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, a[i*2], a[i*2+1], outArr, i);
}
if (tempArr != staticSpace) {
ckfree(tempArr);
}
return numOutput;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkCanvWind.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
| | | | | | | < < | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 |
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc, INT2PTR(2)
};
static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, NULL
};
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
"center", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, height), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
"0", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, "-window", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(WindowItem, tkwin), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
*/
static void ComputeWindowBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
WindowItem *winItemPtr);
static int ConfigureWinItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int CreateWinItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void DeleteWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
static void DisplayWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
int x, int y, int width, int height);
static void ScaleWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
double scaleX, double scaleY);
static void TranslateWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
static int WinItemCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
128 129 130 131 132 133 134 |
TranslateWinItem, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* cursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
| < | | | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 |
TranslateWinItem, /* translateProc */
NULL, /* indexProc */
NULL, /* cursorProc */
NULL, /* selectionProc */
NULL, /* insertProc */
NULL, /* dTextProc */
NULL, /* nextPtr */
NULL, 0, NULL, NULL
};
/*
* The structure below defines the official type record for the canvas (as
* geometry manager):
*/
static const Tk_GeomMgr canvasGeomType = {
"canvas", /* name */
WinItemRequestProc, /* requestProc */
WinItemLostContentProc, /* lostSlaveProc */
};
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* CreateWinItem --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
404 405 406 407 408 409 410 |
DeleteWinItem(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Overall info about widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
| < | 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 |
DeleteWinItem(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Overall info about widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is being deleted. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window for canvas. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
if (winItemPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(winItemPtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
WinItemStructureProc, winItemPtr);
Tk_ManageGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
if (canvasTkwin != Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
567 568 569 570 571 572 573 |
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
int width, height;
short x, y;
Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
| < < < < < > > > > | 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 |
* redisplayed (not used). */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
int width, height;
short x, y;
Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
if (winItemPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
Tcl_Preserve(canvas);
if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
state = Canvas(canvas)->canvas_state;
}
/*
* A drawable of None is used by the canvas UnmapNotify handler
* to indicate that we should no longer display ourselves.
*/
if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || drawable == None) {
if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
} else {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
}
Tcl_Release(canvas);
return;
}
Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(canvas, (double) winItemPtr->header.x1,
(double) winItemPtr->header.y1, &x, &y);
width = winItemPtr->header.x2 - winItemPtr->header.x1;
height = winItemPtr->header.y2 - winItemPtr->header.y1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 |
if (((x + width) <= 0) || ((y + height) <= 0)
|| (x >= Tk_Width(canvasTkwin)) || (y >= Tk_Height(canvasTkwin))) {
if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
} else {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
}
return;
}
/*
* Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending on
* whether the canvas is the window's parent).
*/
if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
if ((x != Tk_X(winItemPtr->tkwin)) || (y != Tk_Y(winItemPtr->tkwin))
|| (width != Tk_Width(winItemPtr->tkwin))
|| (height != Tk_Height(winItemPtr->tkwin))) {
Tk_MoveResizeWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin, x, y, width, height);
}
| > > > | > > > | 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 |
if (((x + width) <= 0) || ((y + height) <= 0)
|| (x >= Tk_Width(canvasTkwin)) || (y >= Tk_Height(canvasTkwin))) {
if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
} else {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
}
Tcl_Release(canvas);
return;
}
/*
* Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending on
* whether the canvas is the window's parent).
*/
if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
if ((x != Tk_X(winItemPtr->tkwin)) || (y != Tk_Y(winItemPtr->tkwin))
|| (width != Tk_Width(winItemPtr->tkwin))
|| (height != Tk_Height(winItemPtr->tkwin))) {
Tk_MoveResizeWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin, x, y, width, height);
}
if (winItemPtr->tkwin) {
Tk_MapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
}
} else {
Tk_MaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin, x, y,
width, height);
}
Tcl_Release(canvas);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* WinItemToPoint --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
660 661 662 663 664 665 666 |
WinItemToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *pointPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
| < | 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 |
WinItemToPoint(
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against point. */
double *pointPtr) /* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
x1 = winItemPtr->header.x1;
y1 = winItemPtr->header.y1;
x2 = winItemPtr->header.x2;
y2 = winItemPtr->header.y2;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
718 719 720 721 722 723 724 |
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
| < | 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 |
Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing item. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item to check against rectangle. */
double *rectPtr) /* Pointer to array of four coordinates
* (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
* area. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
if ((rectPtr[2] <= winItemPtr->header.x1)
|| (rectPtr[0] >= winItemPtr->header.x2)
|| (rectPtr[3] <= winItemPtr->header.y1)
|| (rectPtr[1] >= winItemPtr->header.y2)) {
return -1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
755 756 757 758 759 760 761 | * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ #ifdef X_GetImage static int xerrorhandler( | | < < < | 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 |
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#ifdef X_GetImage
static int
xerrorhandler(
ClientData clientData,
XErrorEvent *e)
{
return 0;
}
#endif /* X_GetImage */
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
799 800 801 802 803 804 805 |
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
double x, y;
int width, height;
Tk_Window tkwin = winItemPtr->tkwin;
if (prepass || winItemPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
| | | 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 |
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
double x, y;
int width, height;
Tk_Window tkwin = winItemPtr->tkwin;
if (prepass || winItemPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
}
width = Tk_Width(tkwin);
height = Tk_Height(tkwin);
/*
* Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the window, taking
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
925 926 927 928 929 930 931 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return result;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(psObj);
return result;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ScaleWinItem --
*
* This function is invoked to rescale a window item.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 |
*/
static void
WinItemStructureProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to record describing window item. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Describes what just happened. */
{
| | | 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 |
*/
static void
WinItemStructureProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to record describing window item. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Describes what just happened. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = clientData;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
winItemPtr->tkwin = NULL;
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 |
*/
static void
WinItemRequestProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to record for window item. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window that changed its desired size. */
{
| | < | 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 |
*/
static void
WinItemRequestProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to record for window item. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window that changed its desired size. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = clientData;
ComputeWindowBbox(winItemPtr->canvas, winItemPtr);
/*
* A drawable argument of None to DisplayWinItem is used by the canvas
* UnmapNotify handler to indicate that we should no longer display
* ourselves, so need to pass a (bogus) non-zero drawable value here.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 | * * Side effects: * Forgets all canvas-related information about the content window. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void WinItemLostContentProc( | > | | < | 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 |
*
* Side effects:
* Forgets all canvas-related information about the content window.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static void
WinItemLostContentProc(
ClientData clientData, /* WindowItem structure for content window that
* was stolen away. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Tk's handle for the content window. */
{
WindowItem *winItemPtr = clientData;
Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(winItemPtr->canvas);
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(winItemPtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
WinItemStructureProc, winItemPtr);
if (canvasTkwin != Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
}
Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvas.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | /* * tkCanvas.c -- * * This module implements canvas widgets for the Tk toolkit. A canvas * displays a background and a collection of graphical objects such as * rectangles, lines, and texts. * * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 |
/*
* tkCanvas.c --
*
* This module implements canvas widgets for the Tk toolkit. A canvas
* displays a background and a collection of graphical objects such as
* rectangles, lines, and texts.
*
* Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
/* #define USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH 1 */
#include "default.h"
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkCanvas.h"
#ifdef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
#include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
#endif
#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
/*
* See tkCanvas.h for key data structures used to implement canvases.
*/
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
/*
* The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search in
* progress. No field should be accessed by anyone other than StartTagSearch
* and NextItem.
*/
typedef struct TagSearch {
TkCanvas *canvasPtr; /* Canvas widget being searched. */
Tk_Uid tag; /* Tag to search for. 0 means return all
* items. */
Tk_Item *currentPtr; /* Pointer to last item returned. */
Tk_Item *lastPtr; /* The item right before the currentPtr is
* tracked so if the currentPtr is deleted we
* don't have to start from the beginning. */
int searchOver; /* Non-zero means NextItem should always
* return NULL. */
} TagSearch;
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search in
* progress. No field should be accessed by anyone other than TagSearchScan,
* TagSearchFirst, TagSearchNext, TagSearchScanExpr, TagSearchEvalExpr,
* TagSearchExprInit, TagSearchExprDestroy, TagSearchDestroy.
* (
* Not quite accurate: the TagSearch structure is also accessed from:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 |
Tk_Item *currentPtr; /* Pointer to last item returned. */
Tk_Item *lastPtr; /* The item right before the currentPtr is
* tracked so if the currentPtr is deleted we
* don't have to start from the beginning. */
int searchOver; /* Non-zero means NextItem should always
* return NULL. */
int type; /* Search type (see #defs below) */
| | > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > > | | | | | | | < < < | < > > > > > > | | > > > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 |
Tk_Item *currentPtr; /* Pointer to last item returned. */
Tk_Item *lastPtr; /* The item right before the currentPtr is
* tracked so if the currentPtr is deleted we
* don't have to start from the beginning. */
int searchOver; /* Non-zero means NextItem should always
* return NULL. */
int type; /* Search type (see #defs below) */
int id; /* Item id for searches by id */
const char *string; /* Tag expression string */
int stringIndex; /* Current position in string scan */
int stringLength; /* Length of tag expression string */
char *rewritebuffer; /* Tag string (after removing escapes) */
unsigned int rewritebufferAllocated;
/* Available space for rewrites. */
TagSearchExpr *expr; /* Compiled tag expression. */
} TagSearch;
/*
* Values for the TagSearch type field.
*/
#define SEARCH_TYPE_EMPTY 0 /* Looking for empty tag */
#define SEARCH_TYPE_ID 1 /* Looking for an item by id */
#define SEARCH_TYPE_ALL 2 /* Looking for all items */
#define SEARCH_TYPE_TAG 3 /* Looking for an item by simple tag */
#define SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR 4 /* Compound search */
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* Custom option for handling "-state" and "-offset"
*/
static const Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
TkStateParseProc, TkStatePrintProc,
NULL /* Only "normal" and "disabled". */
};
static const Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
TkOffsetParseProc, TkOffsetPrintProc, INT2PTR(TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE)
};
/*
* Information used for argv parsing.
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_CANVAS_BG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, bgBorder),
TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, bgBorder),
TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_BORDER_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, borderWidth), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-closeenough", "closeEnough", "CloseEnough",
DEF_CANVAS_CLOSE_ENOUGH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, closeEnough), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-confine", "confine", "Confine",
DEF_CANVAS_CONFINE, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, confine), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_CANVAS_CURSOR, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, cursor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_CANVAS_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, height), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, highlightColorPtr), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness",
DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, highlightWidth), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BG, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorder), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_COLOR,
Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_MONO,
Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_OFF_TIME, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, insertOffTime), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_ON_TIME, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, insertOnTime), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.insertWidth), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", "offset", "Offset", "0,0",
Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, tsoffset),TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
&offsetOption},
{TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_CANVAS_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, relief), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-scrollregion", "scrollRegion", "ScrollRegion",
DEF_CANVAS_SCROLL_REGION, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, regionString),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorder),
TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorder),
TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_COLOR,
Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorderWidth), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selBorderWidth),
TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selFgColorPtr),
TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, textInfo.selFgColorPtr),
TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", "state", "State",
"normal", Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, canvas_state), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
&stateOption},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_CANVAS_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, takeFocus),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_CANVAS_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, width), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_CMD, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, xScrollCmd),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-xscrollincrement", "xScrollIncrement",
"ScrollIncrement",
DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_INCREMENT, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, xScrollIncrement),
0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_CMD, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, yScrollCmd),
TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-yscrollincrement", "yScrollIncrement",
"ScrollIncrement",
DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_INCREMENT, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, yScrollIncrement),
0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* List of all the item types known at present. This is *global* and is
* protected by typeListMutex.
*/
static Tk_ItemType *typeList = NULL;
/* NULL means initialization hasn't been done
* yet. */
TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(typeListMutex)
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
/*
* Uids for operands in compiled advanced tag search expressions.
* Initialization is done by GetStaticUids()
*/
typedef struct {
Tk_Uid allUid;
Tk_Uid currentUid;
Tk_Uid andUid;
Tk_Uid orUid;
Tk_Uid xorUid;
Tk_Uid parenUid;
Tk_Uid negparenUid;
Tk_Uid endparenUid;
Tk_Uid tagvalUid;
Tk_Uid negtagvalUid;
} SearchUids;
static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
static SearchUids * GetStaticUids(void);
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static void CanvasBindProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static void CanvasBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
static void CanvasCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
static void CanvasDoEvent(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
static void CanvasEventProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static int CanvasFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
char *buffer, int maxBytes);
static Tk_Item * CanvasFindClosest(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
double coords[2]);
static void CanvasFocusProc(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int gotFocus);
static void CanvasLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
static void CanvasSelectTo(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index);
static void CanvasSetOrigin(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
int xOrigin, int yOrigin);
static void CanvasUpdateScrollbars(TkCanvas *canvasPtr);
static int CanvasWidgetCmd(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const *objv);
static void CanvasWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
static int ConfigureCanvas(Tcl_Interp *interp,
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const *objv, int flags);
static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyCanvas;
static void DisplayCanvas(ClientData clientData);
static void DoItem(Tcl_Obj *accumObj,
Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tk_Uid tag);
static void EventuallyRedrawItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tk_Item *itemPtr);
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
static int FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
int argc, Tcl_Obj *const *argv,
Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, int first);
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
static int FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv,
Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, int first,
TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
static int FindArea(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tcl_Obj *const *objv, Tk_Uid uid, int enclosed);
static double GridAlign(double coord, double spacing);
static const char** TkGetStringsFromObjs(int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv);
static void InitCanvas(void);
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
static Tk_Item * NextItem(TagSearch *searchPtr);
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
static void PickCurrentItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
static Tcl_Obj * ScrollFractions(int screen1,
int screen2, int object1, int object2);
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
static void RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr);
static Tk_Item * StartTagSearch(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch *searchPtr);
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
static int RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *tag,
Tk_Item *prevPtr, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
static void TagSearchExprInit(TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr);
static void TagSearchExprDestroy(TagSearchExpr *expr);
static void TagSearchDestroy(TagSearch *searchPtr);
static int TagSearchScan(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
static int TagSearchScanExpr(Tcl_Interp *interp,
TagSearch *searchPtr, TagSearchExpr *expr);
static int TagSearchEvalExpr(TagSearchExpr *expr,
Tk_Item *itemPtr);
static Tk_Item * TagSearchFirst(TagSearch *searchPtr);
static Tk_Item * TagSearchNext(TagSearch *searchPtr);
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* The structure below defines canvas class behavior by means of functions
* that can be invoked from generic window code.
*/
static const Tk_ClassProcs canvasClass = {
sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs), /* size */
CanvasWorldChanged, /* worldChangedProc */
NULL, /* createProc */
NULL /* modalProc */
};
/*
* Macros that significantly simplify all code that finds items.
*/
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
#define FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr,(objPtr),&search)
#define FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, (objPtr), &search); \
itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search))
#define FIND_ITEMS(objPtr, n) \
FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, (objPtr), (n))
#define RELINK_ITEMS(objPtr, itemPtr) \
RelinkItems(canvasPtr, (objPtr), (itemPtr))
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
#define FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
if ((result=TagSearchScan(canvasPtr,(objPtr),(searchPtrPtr))) != TCL_OK){ \
errorExitClause; \
} \
itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*(searchPtrPtr));
#define FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
if ((result=TagSearchScan(canvasPtr,(objPtr),(searchPtrPtr))) != TCL_OK){ \
errorExitClause; \
} \
for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*(searchPtrPtr)); \
itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(*(searchPtrPtr)))
#define FIND_ITEMS(objPtr, n) \
FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, (objPtr), (n), &searchPtr)
#define RELINK_ITEMS(objPtr, itemPtr) \
result = RelinkItems(canvasPtr, (objPtr), (itemPtr), &searchPtr)
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* ----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* AlwaysRedraw, ItemConfigure, ItemCoords, etc. --
*
* Helper functions that make access to canvas item functions simpler.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 |
}
static int
ItemIndex(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tk_Item *itemPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
| | | 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 |
}
static int
ItemIndex(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
Tk_Item *itemPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
int *indexPtr)
{
Tcl_Interp *interp = canvasPtr->interp;
if (itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
} else if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
return itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
559 560 561 562 563 564 565 |
Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double xDelta,
double yDelta)
{
itemPtr->typePtr->translateProc((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr,
xDelta, yDelta);
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 |
Tk_Item *itemPtr,
double xDelta,
double yDelta)
{
itemPtr->typePtr->translateProc((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr,
xDelta, yDelta);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_CanvasObjCmd --
*
* This function is invoked to process the "canvas" Tcl command. See the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
677 678 679 680 681 682 683 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_CanvasObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Main window associated with interpreter. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
| | | | | | | 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_CanvasObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Main window associated with interpreter. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
TkCanvas *canvasPtr;
Tk_Window newWin;
if (typeList == NULL) {
InitCanvas();
}
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp,tkwin,Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),NULL);
if (newWin == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureCanvas, or
* which ConfigureCanvas expects to have reasonable values (e.g. resource
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
721 722 723 724 725 726 727 |
canvasPtr->bgBorder = NULL;
canvasPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
canvasPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
canvasPtr->highlightBgColorPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->inset = 0;
canvasPtr->pixmapGC = NULL;
| | | | | | 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 |
canvasPtr->bgBorder = NULL;
canvasPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
canvasPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
canvasPtr->highlightBgColorPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->highlightColorPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->inset = 0;
canvasPtr->pixmapGC = NULL;
canvasPtr->width = 0;
canvasPtr->height = 0;
canvasPtr->confine = 0;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorder = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selBorderWidth = 0;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selFgColorPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst = -1;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast = -1;
canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor = 0;
canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorder = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.insertWidth = 0;
canvasPtr->textInfo.insertBorderWidth = 0;
canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr = NULL;
canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 |
canvasPtr->flags = 0;
canvasPtr->nextId = 1;
canvasPtr->psInfo = NULL;
canvasPtr->canvas_state = TK_STATE_NORMAL;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.flags = 0;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = 0;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.yoffset = 0;
canvasPtr->bindTagExprs = NULL;
Tcl_InitHashTable(&canvasPtr->idTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
Tk_SetClass(canvasPtr->tkwin, "Canvas");
Tk_SetClassProcs(canvasPtr->tkwin, &canvasClass, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
CanvasEventProc, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin, KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask
|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask|EnterWindowMask
|LeaveWindowMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask,
CanvasBindProc, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
CanvasFetchSelection, canvasPtr, XA_STRING);
| > > | | | 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 |
canvasPtr->flags = 0;
canvasPtr->nextId = 1;
canvasPtr->psInfo = NULL;
canvasPtr->canvas_state = TK_STATE_NORMAL;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.flags = 0;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.xoffset = 0;
canvasPtr->tsoffset.yoffset = 0;
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
canvasPtr->bindTagExprs = NULL;
#endif
Tcl_InitHashTable(&canvasPtr->idTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
Tk_SetClass(canvasPtr->tkwin, "Canvas");
Tk_SetClassProcs(canvasPtr->tkwin, &canvasClass, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
CanvasEventProc, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin, KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask
|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask|EnterWindowMask
|LeaveWindowMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask,
CanvasBindProc, canvasPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(canvasPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
CanvasFetchSelection, canvasPtr, XA_STRING);
if (ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(canvasPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
error:
Tk_DestroyWindow(canvasPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 |
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData;
int c, result;
Tk_Item *itemPtr = NULL; /* Initialization needed only to prevent
* compiler warning. */
TagSearch *searchPtr = NULL;/* Allocated by first TagSearchScan, freed by
* TagSearchDestroy */
| > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | < | | | | 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 |
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData;
int c, result;
Tk_Item *itemPtr = NULL; /* Initialization needed only to prevent
* compiler warning. */
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearch search;
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
TagSearch *searchPtr = NULL;/* Allocated by first TagSearchScan, freed by
* TagSearchDestroy */
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
int index;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"addtag", "bbox", "bind", "canvasx",
"canvasy", "cget", "configure", "coords",
"create", "dchars", "delete", "dtag",
"find", "focus", "gettags", "icursor",
"imove", "index", "insert", "itemcget",
"itemconfigure",
"lower", "move", "moveto", "postscript",
"raise", "rchars", "scale", "scan",
"select", "type", "xview", "yview",
NULL
};
enum options {
CANV_ADDTAG, CANV_BBOX, CANV_BIND, CANV_CANVASX,
CANV_CANVASY, CANV_CGET, CANV_CONFIGURE, CANV_COORDS,
CANV_CREATE, CANV_DCHARS, CANV_DELETE, CANV_DTAG,
CANV_FIND, CANV_FOCUS, CANV_GETTAGS, CANV_ICURSOR,
CANV_IMOVE, CANV_INDEX, CANV_INSERT, CANV_ITEMCGET,
CANV_ITEMCONFIGURE,
CANV_LOWER, CANV_MOVE, CANV_MOVETO, CANV_POSTSCRIPT,
CANV_RAISE, CANV_RCHARS, CANV_SCALE, CANV_SCAN,
CANV_SELECT, CANV_TYPE, CANV_XVIEW, CANV_YVIEW
};
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
&index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(canvasPtr);
result = TCL_OK;
switch ((enum options)index) {
case CANV_ADDTAG:
if (objc < 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tag searchCommand ?arg ...?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
result = FIND_ITEMS(objv[2], 3);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
925 926 927 928 929 930 931 |
}
}
}
}
if (gotAny) {
Tcl_Obj *resultObjs[4];
| | | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 |
}
}
}
}
if (gotAny) {
Tcl_Obj *resultObjs[4];
resultObjs[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x1);
resultObjs[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y1);
resultObjs[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x2);
resultObjs[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y2);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, resultObjs));
}
break;
}
case CANV_BIND: {
void *object;
if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 5)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId ?sequence? ?command?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
/*
* Figure out what object to use for the binding (individual item vs.
* tag).
*/
object = NULL;
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
if (isdigit(UCHAR(Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0]))) {
int id;
char *end;
Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
id = strtoul(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), &end, 0);
if (*end != 0) {
goto bindByTag;
}
entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable, (char *) id);
if (entryPtr != NULL) {
itemPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
object = itemPtr;
}
if (object == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"item \"%s\" doesn't exist", Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "CANVAS_ITEM",
Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
} else {
bindByTag:
object = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
}
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
goto done;
}
if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_ID) {
Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
971 972 973 974 975 976 977 |
"item \"%s\" doesn't exist", Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "CANVAS_ITEM",
Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
} else {
| | > > | | 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 |
"item \"%s\" doesn't exist", Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "CANVAS_ITEM",
Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
} else {
object = (void *)searchPtr->expr->uid;
}
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* Make a binding table if the canvas doesn't already have one.
*/
if (canvasPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
canvasPtr->bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
}
if (objc == 5) {
int append = 0;
unsigned int mask;
const char *argv4 = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
if (argv4[0] == 0) {
result = Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
goto done;
}
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR) {
/*
* If new tag expression, then insert in linked list.
*/
TagSearchExpr *expr, **lastPtr;
lastPtr = &(canvasPtr->bindTagExprs);
while ((expr = *lastPtr) != NULL) {
if (expr->uid == searchPtr->expr->uid) {
break;
}
lastPtr = &(expr->next);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 |
* Flag in TagSearch that expr has changed ownership so
* that TagSearchDestroy doesn't try to free it.
*/
searchPtr->expr = NULL;
}
}
if (argv4[0] == '+') {
argv4++;
append = 1;
}
mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), argv4, append);
if (mask == 0) {
| > | 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 |
* Flag in TagSearch that expr has changed ownership so
* that TagSearchDestroy doesn't try to free it.
*/
searchPtr->expr = NULL;
}
}
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
if (argv4[0] == '+') {
argv4++;
append = 1;
}
mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), argv4, append);
if (mask == 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 |
* Make a temporary object here that we can reuse for all the
* modifications in the loop.
*/
tmpObj = Tcl_NewListObj(2, objv+4);
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto doneImove) {
| < | 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 |
* Make a temporary object here that we can reuse for all the
* modifications in the loop.
*/
tmpObj = Tcl_NewListObj(2, objv+4);
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto doneImove) {
int x1, x2, y1, y2;
int dontRedraw1, dontRedraw2;
/*
* The TK_MOVABLE_POINTS flag should only be set for types that
* support the same semantics of index, dChars and insert methods
* as lines and canvases.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 |
}
case CANV_CREATE: {
Tk_ItemType *typePtr;
Tk_ItemType *matchPtr = NULL;
int isNew = 0;
Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
const char *arg;
| | | > | 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 |
}
case CANV_CREATE: {
Tk_ItemType *typePtr;
Tk_ItemType *matchPtr = NULL;
int isNew = 0;
Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
const char *arg;
size_t length;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type coords ?arg ...?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
length = objv[2]->length;
c = arg[0];
/*
* Lock because the list of types is a global resource that could be
* updated by another thread. That's fairly unlikely, but not
* impossible.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 |
} else {
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr->nextPtr = itemPtr;
}
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = itemPtr;
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= FORCE_REDRAW;
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED;
| | | | 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 |
} else {
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr->nextPtr = itemPtr;
}
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = itemPtr;
itemPtr->redraw_flags |= FORCE_REDRAW;
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(itemPtr->id));
break;
}
case CANV_DCHARS: {
int first, last;
int x1, x2, y1, y2;
if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId first ?last?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 |
}
if (objc == 4) {
tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
} else {
tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
}
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 |
}
if (objc == 4) {
tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
} else {
tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
}
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
for (i = itemPtr->numTags-1; i >= 0; i--) {
if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == tag) {
/*
* Don't shuffle the tags sequence: memmove the tags.
*/
memmove((void *)(itemPtr->tagPtr + i),
itemPtr->tagPtr + i + 1,
(itemPtr->numTags - (i+1)) * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
itemPtr->numTags--;
/*
* There must be no break here: all tags with the same name must
* be deleted.
*/
}
}
}
break;
}
case CANV_FIND:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "searchCommand ?arg ...?");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?tagOrId?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
itemPtr = canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr;
if (objc == 2) {
if (itemPtr != NULL) {
| | | 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?tagOrId?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
itemPtr = canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr;
if (objc == 2) {
if (itemPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(itemPtr->id));
}
goto done;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
}
if (Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0] == 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 |
goto done;
}
FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
if (itemPtr != NULL) {
int i;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
| | < | 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 |
goto done;
}
FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
if (itemPtr != NULL) {
int i;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < itemPtr->numTags; i++) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj,
Tcl_NewStringObj(itemPtr->tagPtr[i], -1));
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
break;
case CANV_ICURSOR: {
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId index");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 |
&& (canvasPtr->textInfo.cursorOn)) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
}
}
break;
}
case CANV_INDEX: {
| < | 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 |
&& (canvasPtr->textInfo.cursorOn)) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
}
}
break;
}
case CANV_INDEX: {
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId string");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
result = ItemIndex(canvasPtr, itemPtr, objv[3], &index);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
goto done;
}
| | | | 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
result = ItemIndex(canvasPtr, itemPtr, objv[3], &index);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
goto done;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
break;
}
case CANV_INSERT: {
int beforeThis;
int x1, x2, y1, y2;
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId beforeThis string");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 |
*/
if (objc == 3) {
itemPtr = NULL;
} else {
FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done);
if (itemPtr == NULL) {
goto done;
}
itemPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
}
RELINK_ITEMS(objv[2], itemPtr);
break;
}
| > > > > > | 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 |
*/
if (objc == 3) {
itemPtr = NULL;
} else {
FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done);
if (itemPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"tagOrId \"%s\" doesn't match any items",
Tcl_GetString(objv[3])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "ITEM", NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
itemPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
}
RELINK_ITEMS(objv[2], itemPtr);
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 |
prevPtr = canvasPtr->lastItemPtr;
} else {
prevPtr = NULL;
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done) {
prevPtr = itemPtr;
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
goto done;
}
}
RELINK_ITEMS(objv[2], prevPtr);
break;
}
case CANV_RCHARS: {
| > > > > > | | 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 |
prevPtr = canvasPtr->lastItemPtr;
} else {
prevPtr = NULL;
FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done) {
prevPtr = itemPtr;
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"tagOrId \"%s\" doesn't match any items",
Tcl_GetString(objv[3])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "ITEM", NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
}
RELINK_ITEMS(objv[2], prevPtr);
break;
}
case CANV_RCHARS: {
int first, last;
int x1, x2, y1, y2;
int dontRedraw1, dontRedraw2;
if (objc != 6) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId first last string");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 | * Except if the dCharsProc or insertProc sets the * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing more needs to be done. */ x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1; x2 = itemPtr->x2; y2 = itemPtr->y2; | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 |
* Except if the dCharsProc or insertProc sets the
* TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing more needs to be done.
*/
x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1;
x2 = itemPtr->x2; y2 = itemPtr->y2;
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
ItemDelChars(canvasPtr, itemPtr, first, last);
dontRedraw1 = itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
ItemInsert(canvasPtr, itemPtr, first, objv[5]);
dontRedraw2 = itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
if (!(dontRedraw1 && dontRedraw2)) {
Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
x1, y1, x2, y2);
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
}
itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
}
break;
}
case CANV_SCALE: {
double xOrigin, yOrigin, xScale, yScale;
if (objc != 7) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 |
"mark", "dragto", NULL
};
if (objc < 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x y ?dragGain?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionStrings,
| | | | | | 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 |
"mark", "dragto", NULL
};
if (objc < 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x y ?dragGain?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionStrings,
"scan option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 5+index)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, index?"x y ?gain?":"x y");
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK)){
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if ((objc == 6) &&
(Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &gain) != TCL_OK)) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else if (!index) {
canvasPtr->scanX = x;
canvasPtr->scanXOrigin = canvasPtr->xOrigin;
canvasPtr->scanY = y;
canvasPtr->scanYOrigin = canvasPtr->yOrigin;
} else {
int newXOrigin, newYOrigin, tmp;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 |
- canvasPtr->scrollY1;
newYOrigin = canvasPtr->scrollY1 + tmp;
CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newXOrigin, newYOrigin);
}
break;
}
case CANV_SELECT: {
| < | 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 |
- canvasPtr->scrollY1;
newYOrigin = canvasPtr->scrollY1 + tmp;
CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newXOrigin, newYOrigin);
}
break;
}
case CANV_SELECT: {
int optionindex;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"adjust", "clear", "from", "item", "to", NULL
};
enum options {
CANV_ADJUST, CANV_CLEAR, CANV_FROM, CANV_ITEM, CANV_TO
};
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 |
case CANV_ADJUST:
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagOrId index");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
| | | | 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 |
case CANV_ADJUST:
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagOrId index");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
if (index < (canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst
+ canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast)/2) {
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor =
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast + 1;
} else {
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor =
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
| | | 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr->id));
}
break;
case CANV_TO:
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId index");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 |
}
break;
case CANV_XVIEW: {
int count, type;
int newX = 0; /* Initialization needed only to prevent gcc
* warnings. */
double fraction;
| < < | < < < < < < > > > < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < | | | | < < < < | < < < | < < < | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > | 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 |
}
break;
case CANV_XVIEW: {
int count, type;
int newX = 0; /* Initialization needed only to prevent gcc
* warnings. */
double fraction;
if (objc == 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ScrollFractions(
canvasPtr->xOrigin + canvasPtr->inset,
canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin)
- canvasPtr->inset, canvasPtr->scrollX1,
canvasPtr->scrollX2));
break;
}
type = Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count);
switch (type) {
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
newX = canvasPtr->scrollX1 - canvasPtr->inset
+ (int) (fraction * (canvasPtr->scrollX2
- canvasPtr->scrollX1) + 0.5);
break;
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .9
* (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
break;
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) {
newX = canvasPtr->xOrigin + count*canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement;
} else {
newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .1
* (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
}
break;
default:
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newX, canvasPtr->yOrigin);
break;
}
case CANV_YVIEW: {
int count, type;
int newY = 0; /* Initialization needed only to prevent gcc
* warnings. */
double fraction;
if (objc == 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ScrollFractions(
canvasPtr->yOrigin + canvasPtr->inset,
canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)
- canvasPtr->inset,
canvasPtr->scrollY1, canvasPtr->scrollY2));
break;
}
type = Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count);
switch (type) {
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
newY = canvasPtr->scrollY1 - canvasPtr->inset + (int) (
fraction*(canvasPtr->scrollY2-canvasPtr->scrollY1) + 0.5);
break;
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .9
* (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
break;
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) {
newY = canvasPtr->yOrigin + count*canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement;
} else {
newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .1
* (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
}
break;
default:
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, newY);
break;
}
}
done:
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr);
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
Tcl_Release(canvasPtr);
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 | * Everything associated with the canvas is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyCanvas( | | > > | 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 |
* Everything associated with the canvas is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyCanvas(
char *memPtr) /* Info about canvas widget. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)memPtr;
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearchExpr *expr, *next;
#endif
/*
* Free up all of the items in the canvas.
*/
for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 |
* Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
*/
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&canvasPtr->idTable);
if (canvasPtr->pixmapGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(canvasPtr->display, canvasPtr->pixmapGC);
}
expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
while (expr) {
next = expr->next;
TagSearchExprDestroy(expr);
expr = next;
}
Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
if (canvasPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteBindingTable(canvasPtr->bindingTable);
}
| > > | | 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 |
* Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
*/
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&canvasPtr->idTable);
if (canvasPtr->pixmapGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(canvasPtr->display, canvasPtr->pixmapGC);
}
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
while (expr) {
next = expr->next;
TagSearchExprDestroy(expr);
expr = next;
}
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
if (canvasPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteBindingTable(canvasPtr->bindingTable);
}
Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *)canvasPtr, canvasPtr->display, 0);
canvasPtr->tkwin = NULL;
ckfree(canvasPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 |
*/
if ( old_canvas_state != canvasPtr->canvas_state ) {
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
int result;
for ( itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
| | | 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 |
*/
if ( old_canvas_state != canvasPtr->canvas_state ) {
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
int result;
for ( itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
if ( itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL ) {
result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(canvasPtr->interp,
(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0, NULL,
TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_ResetResult(canvasPtr->interp);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 |
if (Tcl_SplitList(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->regionString,
&argc2, &argv2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (argc2 != 4) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad scrollRegion \"%s\"", canvasPtr->regionString));
| | | 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 |
if (Tcl_SplitList(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->regionString,
&argc2, &argv2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (argc2 != 4) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad scrollRegion \"%s\"", canvasPtr->regionString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "CANVAS", "SCROLL_REGION", (char *)NULL);
badRegion:
ckfree(canvasPtr->regionString);
ckfree(argv2);
canvasPtr->regionString = NULL;
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((Tk_GetPixels(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 | canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin), canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 | canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin), canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * DisplayCanvas -- * * This function redraws the contents of a canvas window. It is invoked * as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else * for the application to do. * * Results: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 |
ClientData clientData) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
Pixmap pixmap;
int screenX1, screenX2, screenY1, screenY2, width, height;
if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if (!Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
goto done;
}
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
/*
* If drawing is disabled, all we need to do is
* clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
*/
| > > > > | | | 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 |
ClientData clientData) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
Pixmap pixmap;
int screenX1, screenX2, screenY1, screenY2, width, height;
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
TkWindow *winPtr;
MacDrawable *macWin;
#endif
if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if (!Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
goto done;
}
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
/*
* If drawing is disabled, all we need to do is
* clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
*/
winPtr = (TkWindow *)(canvasPtr->tkwin);
macWin = winPtr->privatePtr;
if (macWin && (macWin->flags & TK_DO_NOT_DRAW)){
canvasPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
return;
}
#endif
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 | Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), canvasPtr->bgBorder, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->highlightWidth, canvasPtr->borderWidth, canvasPtr->relief); } | | | | | 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 |
Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
canvasPtr->bgBorder, canvasPtr->highlightWidth,
canvasPtr->highlightWidth,
Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->highlightWidth,
Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->highlightWidth,
canvasPtr->borderWidth, canvasPtr->relief);
}
if (canvasPtr->highlightWidth > 0) {
GC fgGC, bgGC;
bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(canvasPtr->highlightBgColorPtr,
Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus) {
fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(canvasPtr->highlightColorPtr,
Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC,
canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
} else {
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC,
canvasPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
}
}
}
done:
canvasPtr->flags &= ~(REDRAW_PENDING|BBOX_NOT_EMPTY);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 |
canvasPtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(canvasPtr->interp,
canvasPtr->widgetCmd);
}
if (canvasPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayCanvas, canvasPtr);
}
| | | 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 |
canvasPtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(canvasPtr->interp,
canvasPtr->widgetCmd);
}
if (canvasPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayCanvas, canvasPtr);
}
Tcl_EventuallyFree(canvasPtr, DestroyCanvas);
} else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
canvasPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS;
/*
* The call below is needed in order to recenter the canvas if it's
* confined and its scroll region is smaller than the window.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 |
*/
if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if ((x1 >= x2) || (y1 >= y2) ||
| | | 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 |
*/
if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if ((x1 >= x2) || (y1 >= y2) ||
(x2 < canvasPtr->xOrigin) || (y2 < canvasPtr->yOrigin) ||
(x1 >= canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin)) ||
(y1 >= canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin))) {
return;
}
if (canvasPtr->flags & BBOX_NOT_EMPTY) {
if (x1 <= canvasPtr->redrawX1) {
canvasPtr->redrawX1 = x1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 |
Tk_Item *itemPtr) /* Item to be redrawn. May be NULL, in which
* case nothing happens. */
{
if (itemPtr == NULL || canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if ((itemPtr->x1 >= itemPtr->x2) || (itemPtr->y1 >= itemPtr->y2) ||
| | | 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 |
Tk_Item *itemPtr) /* Item to be redrawn. May be NULL, in which
* case nothing happens. */
{
if (itemPtr == NULL || canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if ((itemPtr->x1 >= itemPtr->x2) || (itemPtr->y1 >= itemPtr->y2) ||
(itemPtr->x2 < canvasPtr->xOrigin) ||
(itemPtr->y2 < canvasPtr->yOrigin) ||
(itemPtr->x1 >= canvasPtr->xOrigin+Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin)) ||
(itemPtr->y1 >= canvasPtr->yOrigin+Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin))) {
if (!AlwaysRedraw(itemPtr)) {
return;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 |
tkOvalType.nextPtr = &tkBitmapType;
tkBitmapType.nextPtr = &tkArcType;
tkArcType.nextPtr = &tkWindowType;
tkWindowType.nextPtr = NULL;
Tcl_MutexUnlock(&typeListMutex);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetStaticUids --
*
* This function is invoked to return a structure filled with the Uids
* used when doing tag searching. If it was never before called in the
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 |
tkOvalType.nextPtr = &tkBitmapType;
tkBitmapType.nextPtr = &tkArcType;
tkArcType.nextPtr = &tkWindowType;
tkWindowType.nextPtr = NULL;
Tcl_MutexUnlock(&typeListMutex);
}
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* StartTagSearch --
*
* This function is called to initiate an enumeration of all items in a
* given canvas that contain a given tag.
*
* Results:
* The return value is a pointer to the first item in canvasPtr that
* matches tag, or NULL if there is no such item. The information at
* *searchPtr is initialized such that successive calls to NextItem will
* return successive items that match tag.
*
* Side effects:
* SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress on canvasPtr,
* so that elements can safely be deleted while the search is in
* progress. EndTagSearch must be called at the end of the search to
* unlink searchPtr from this list.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tk_Item *
StartTagSearch(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas whose items are to be searched. */
Tcl_Obj *tagObj, /* Object giving tag value. */
TagSearch *searchPtr) /* Record describing tag search; will be
* initialized here. */
{
int id;
Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
Tk_Uid *tagPtr;
Tk_Uid uid;
char *tag = Tcl_GetString(tagObj);
int count;
TkWindow *tkwin = (TkWindow *) canvasPtr->tkwin;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = tkwin->dispPtr;
/*
* Initialize the search.
*/
searchPtr->canvasPtr = canvasPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 0;
/*
* Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag is a
* number then it selects the single item with the matching identifier.
* In this case see if the item being requested is the hot item, in which
* case the search can be skipped.
*/
if (isdigit(UCHAR(*tag))) {
char *end;
Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
dispPtr->numIdSearches++;
id = strtoul(tag, &end, 0);
if (*end == 0) {
itemPtr = canvasPtr->hotPtr;
lastPtr = canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr;
if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (itemPtr->id != id) || (lastPtr == NULL)
|| (lastPtr->nextPtr != itemPtr)) {
dispPtr->numSlowSearches++;
entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable, (char*) id);
if (entryPtr != NULL) {
itemPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
lastPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
} else {
lastPtr = itemPtr = NULL;
}
}
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
canvasPtr->hotPtr = itemPtr;
canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr = lastPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
}
searchPtr->tag = uid = Tk_GetUid(tag);
if (uid == Tk_GetUid("all")) {
/*
* All items match.
*/
searchPtr->tag = NULL;
searchPtr->lastPtr = NULL;
searchPtr->currentPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
return canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
}
/*
* None of the above. Search for an item with a matching tag.
*/
for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
}
}
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
return NULL;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* NextItem --
*
* This function returns successive items that match a given tag; it
* should be called only after StartTagSearch has been used to begin a
* search.
*
* Results:
* The return value is a pointer to the next item that matches the tag
* specified to StartTagSearch, or NULL if no such item exists.
* *SearchPtr is updated so that the next call to this function will
* return the next item.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tk_Item *
NextItem(
TagSearch *searchPtr) /* Record describing search in progress. */
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
int count;
Tk_Uid uid;
Tk_Uid *tagPtr;
/*
* Find next item in list (this may not actually be a suitable one to
* return), and return if there are no items left.
*/
lastPtr = searchPtr->lastPtr;
if (lastPtr == NULL) {
itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
} else {
itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
}
if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (searchPtr->searchOver)) {
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
return NULL;
}
if (itemPtr != searchPtr->currentPtr) {
/*
* The structure of the list has changed. Probably the previously-
* returned item was removed from the list. In this case, don't
* advance lastPtr; just return its new successor (i.e. do nothing
* here).
*/
} else {
lastPtr = itemPtr;
itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
}
/*
* Handle special case of "all" search by returning next item.
*/
uid = searchPtr->tag;
if (uid == NULL) {
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
/*
* Look for an item with a particular tag.
*/
for ( ; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
}
}
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
return NULL;
}
#else /* !USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetStaticUids --
*
* This function is invoked to return a structure filled with the Uids
* used when doing tag searching. If it was never before called in the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 |
*/
static void
TagSearchExprDestroy(
TagSearchExpr *expr)
{
if (expr != NULL) {
| | | 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 |
*/
static void
TagSearchExprDestroy(
TagSearchExpr *expr)
{
if (expr != NULL) {
if (expr->uids) {
ckfree(expr->uids);
}
ckfree(expr);
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 | uid = expr->uids[expr->index++]; result = 0; /* * set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags */ | | | | 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 |
uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
result = 0;
/*
* set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags
*/
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
result = 1;
break;
}
}
} else if (uid == searchUids->negtagvalUid) {
negate_result = ! negate_result;
/*
* assert(expr->index < expr->length);
*/
uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
result = 0;
/*
* set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags.
*/
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
result = 1;
break;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 |
/*
* Optimized single-tag search
*/
uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr=itemPtr, itemPtr=itemPtr->nextPtr) {
| | | 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 |
/*
* Optimized single-tag search
*/
uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr=itemPtr, itemPtr=itemPtr->nextPtr) {
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 |
if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_TAG) {
/*
* Optimized single-tag search
*/
uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
for (; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
| | | 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 |
if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_TAG) {
/*
* Optimized single-tag search
*/
uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
for (; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (*tagPtr == uid) {
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
return itemPtr;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 |
return itemPtr;
}
}
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
return NULL;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DoItem --
*
* This is a utility function called by FindItems. It either adds
| > | 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 |
return itemPtr;
}
}
searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
return NULL;
}
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DoItem --
*
* This is a utility function called by FindItems. It either adds
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 |
int count;
/*
* Handle the "add-to-result" case and return, if appropriate.
*/
if (tag == NULL) {
| | | | | 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 |
int count;
/*
* Handle the "add-to-result" case and return, if appropriate.
*/
if (tag == NULL) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, accumObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(itemPtr->id));
return;
}
for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
if (tag == *tagPtr) {
return;
}
}
/*
* Grow the tag space if there's no more room left in the current block.
*/
if (itemPtr->tagSpace == itemPtr->numTags) {
Tk_Uid *newTagPtr;
itemPtr->tagSpace += 5;
newTagPtr = (Tk_Uid *)ckalloc(itemPtr->tagSpace * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
memcpy(newTagPtr, itemPtr->tagPtr,
itemPtr->numTags * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
if (itemPtr->tagPtr != itemPtr->staticTagSpace) {
ckfree(itemPtr->tagPtr);
}
itemPtr->tagPtr = newTagPtr;
tagPtr = &itemPtr->tagPtr[itemPtr->numTags];
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 |
Tcl_Obj *newTag, /* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set on all
* found items; if NULL, then ids of found
* items are returned in the interp's
* result. */
int first /* For error messages: gives number of
* elements of objv which are already
* handled. */
,TagSearch **searchPtrPtr /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars*/
)
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
Tk_Uid uid;
int index, result;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"above", "all", "below", "closest",
"enclosed", "overlapping", "withtag", NULL
| > > > > > | 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 |
Tcl_Obj *newTag, /* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set on all
* found items; if NULL, then ids of found
* items are returned in the interp's
* result. */
int first /* For error messages: gives number of
* elements of objv which are already
* handled. */
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
,TagSearch **searchPtrPtr /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars*/
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
)
{
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearch search;
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
Tk_Uid uid;
int index, result;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"above", "all", "below", "closest",
"enclosed", "overlapping", "withtag", NULL
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 |
* The items identified by "tag" are moved so that they are all together
* in the display list and immediately after prevPtr. The order of the
* moved items relative to each other is not changed.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
RelinkItems(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas to be modified. */
Tcl_Obj *tag, /* Tag identifying items to be moved in the
* redisplay list. */
Tk_Item *prevPtr, /* Reposition the items so that they go just
* after this item (NULL means put at
* beginning of list). */
TagSearch **searchPtrPtr) /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars */
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
Tk_Item *firstMovePtr, *lastMovePtr;
int result;
/*
* Find all of the items to be moved and remove them from the list, making
* an auxiliary list running from firstMovePtr to lastMovePtr. Record
* their areas for redisplay.
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 |
* The items identified by "tag" are moved so that they are all together
* in the display list and immediately after prevPtr. The order of the
* moved items relative to each other is not changed.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
static void
RelinkItems(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas to be modified. */
Tcl_Obj *tag, /* Tag identifying items to be moved in the
* redisplay list. */
Tk_Item *prevPtr) /* Reposition the items so that they go just
* after this item (NULL means put at
* beginning of list). */
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
static int
RelinkItems(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Canvas to be modified. */
Tcl_Obj *tag, /* Tag identifying items to be moved in the
* redisplay list. */
Tk_Item *prevPtr, /* Reposition the items so that they go just
* after this item (NULL means put at
* beginning of list). */
TagSearch **searchPtrPtr) /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars */
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
{
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearch search;
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
Tk_Item *firstMovePtr, *lastMovePtr;
int result;
/*
* Find all of the items to be moved and remove them from the list, making
* an auxiliary list running from firstMovePtr to lastMovePtr. Record
* their areas for redisplay.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 |
/*
* Insert the list of to-be-moved items back into the canvas's at the
* desired position.
*/
if (firstMovePtr == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
if (canvasPtr->firstItemPtr != NULL) {
canvasPtr->firstItemPtr->prevPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
lastMovePtr->nextPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
canvasPtr->firstItemPtr = firstMovePtr;
} else {
if (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
prevPtr->nextPtr->prevPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
lastMovePtr->nextPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
if (firstMovePtr != NULL) {
firstMovePtr->prevPtr = prevPtr;
}
prevPtr->nextPtr = firstMovePtr;
}
if (canvasPtr->lastItemPtr == prevPtr) {
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* CanvasBindProc --
*
| > > > > > > | 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731 |
/*
* Insert the list of to-be-moved items back into the canvas's at the
* desired position.
*/
if (firstMovePtr == NULL) {
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
return;
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
return TCL_OK;
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
if (canvasPtr->firstItemPtr != NULL) {
canvasPtr->firstItemPtr->prevPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
lastMovePtr->nextPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
canvasPtr->firstItemPtr = firstMovePtr;
} else {
if (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
prevPtr->nextPtr->prevPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
lastMovePtr->nextPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
if (firstMovePtr != NULL) {
firstMovePtr->prevPtr = prevPtr;
}
prevPtr->nextPtr = firstMovePtr;
}
if (canvasPtr->lastItemPtr == prevPtr) {
canvasPtr->lastItemPtr = lastMovePtr;
}
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
return TCL_OK;
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* CanvasBindProc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 |
* canvasPtr>state. This information is used to defer repicks of the
* current item while buttons are down.
*/
switch (eventPtr->type) {
case ButtonPress:
case ButtonRelease:
| | | 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 |
* canvasPtr>state. This information is used to defer repicks of the
* current item while buttons are down.
*/
switch (eventPtr->type) {
case ButtonPress:
case ButtonRelease:
mask = TkGetButtonMask(eventPtr->xbutton.button);
/*
* For button press events, repick the current item using the button
* state before the event, then process the event. For button release
* events, first process the event, then repick the current item using
* the button state *after* the event (the button has logically gone
* up before we change the current item).
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 |
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Event describing location of mouse cursor.
* Must be EnterWindow, LeaveWindow,
* ButtonRelease, or MotionNotify. */
{
double coords[2];
unsigned int buttonDown;
Tk_Item *prevItemPtr;
SearchUids *searchUids = GetStaticUids();
/*
* Check whether or not a button is down. If so, we'll log entry and exit
* into and out of the current item, but not entry into any other item.
* This implements a form of grabbing equivalent to what the X server does
* for windows.
*/
| > > | 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 |
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Event describing location of mouse cursor.
* Must be EnterWindow, LeaveWindow,
* ButtonRelease, or MotionNotify. */
{
double coords[2];
unsigned int buttonDown;
Tk_Item *prevItemPtr;
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
SearchUids *searchUids = GetStaticUids();
#endif
/*
* Check whether or not a button is down. If so, we'll log entry and exit
* into and out of the current item, but not entry into any other item.
* This implements a form of grabbing equivalent to what the X server does
* for windows.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 | Tk_Item *itemPtr = canvasPtr->currentItemPtr; int i; event = canvasPtr->pickEvent; event.type = LeaveNotify; /* | > | | | > > > > > > > | > > > > | | | | 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 |
Tk_Item *itemPtr = canvasPtr->currentItemPtr;
int i;
event = canvasPtr->pickEvent;
event.type = LeaveNotify;
/*
* Behaviour before ticket #47d4f29159:
* If the event's detail happens to be NotifyInferior the binding
* mechanism will discard the event. To be consistent, always use
* NotifyAncestor.
*
* Behaviour after ticket #47d4f29159:
* The binding mechanism doesn't discard events with detail field
* NotifyInferior anymore. It would be best to base the detail
* field on the ancestry relationship between the old and new
* canvas items. For the time being, retain the choice from before
* ticket #47d4f29159, which doesn't harm.
*/
event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_IN_PROGRESS;
CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, &event);
canvasPtr->flags &= ~REPICK_IN_PROGRESS;
/*
* The check below is needed because there could be an event handler
* for <LeaveNotify> that deletes the current item.
*/
if ((itemPtr == canvasPtr->currentItemPtr) && !buttonDown) {
for (i = itemPtr->numTags-1; i >= 0; i--) {
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == Tk_GetUid("current"))
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == searchUids->currentUid)
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/* then */ {
memmove((void *)(itemPtr->tagPtr + i),
itemPtr->tagPtr + i + 1,
(itemPtr->numTags - (i+1)) * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
itemPtr->numTags--;
break;
}
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 |
(prevItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT)) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, prevItemPtr);
ItemConfigure(canvasPtr, prevItemPtr, 0, NULL);
}
if (canvasPtr->currentItemPtr != NULL) {
XEvent event;
DoItem(NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, searchUids->currentUid);
if ((canvasPtr->currentItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT
&& prevItemPtr != canvasPtr->currentItemPtr)) {
ItemConfigure(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, 0, NULL);
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr);
}
event = canvasPtr->pickEvent;
event.type = EnterNotify;
| > > > > | 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 |
(prevItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT)) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, prevItemPtr);
ItemConfigure(canvasPtr, prevItemPtr, 0, NULL);
}
if (canvasPtr->currentItemPtr != NULL) {
XEvent event;
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
DoItem(NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, Tk_GetUid("current"));
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
DoItem(NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, searchUids->currentUid);
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
if ((canvasPtr->currentItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT
&& prevItemPtr != canvasPtr->currentItemPtr)) {
ItemConfigure(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, 0, NULL);
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr);
}
event = canvasPtr->pickEvent;
event.type = EnterNotify;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5433 5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460 5461 5462 5463 5464 5465 5466 5467 5468 5469 5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 |
* processed. */
{
#define NUM_STATIC 3
void *staticObjects[NUM_STATIC];
void **objectPtr;
int numObjects, i;
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
TagSearchExpr *expr;
int numExprs;
SearchUids *searchUids = GetStaticUids();
if (canvasPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
return;
}
itemPtr = canvasPtr->currentItemPtr;
if ((eventPtr->type == KeyPress) || (eventPtr->type == KeyRelease)) {
itemPtr = canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr;
}
if (itemPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
/*
* Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing this
* event. The relevant objects are:
* (a) the event's item,
* (b) the tags associated with the event's item,
* (c) the expressions that are true for the event's item's tags, and
* (d) the tag "all".
*
* If there are a lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of the
* objects.
*/
/*
* Flag and count all expressions that match item's tags.
*/
numExprs = 0;
expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
while (expr) {
expr->index = 0;
| > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > | > | | > | > | 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 |
* processed. */
{
#define NUM_STATIC 3
void *staticObjects[NUM_STATIC];
void **objectPtr;
int numObjects, i;
Tk_Item *itemPtr;
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
TagSearchExpr *expr;
int numExprs;
SearchUids *searchUids = GetStaticUids();
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
if (canvasPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
return;
}
itemPtr = canvasPtr->currentItemPtr;
if ((eventPtr->type == KeyPress) || (eventPtr->type == KeyRelease)) {
itemPtr = canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr;
}
if (itemPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
/*
* Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing this
* event. The relevant objects are (a) the event's item, (b) the tags
* associated with the event's item, and (c) the tag "all". If there are a
* lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of the objects.
*/
numObjects = itemPtr->numTags + 2;
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing this
* event. The relevant objects are:
* (a) the event's item,
* (b) the tags associated with the event's item,
* (c) the expressions that are true for the event's item's tags, and
* (d) the tag "all".
*
* If there are a lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of the
* objects.
*/
/*
* Flag and count all expressions that match item's tags.
*/
numExprs = 0;
expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
while (expr) {
expr->index = 0;
expr->match = TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr);
if (expr->match) {
numExprs++;
}
expr = expr->next;
}
numObjects = itemPtr->numTags + numExprs + 2;
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
if (numObjects <= NUM_STATIC) {
objectPtr = staticObjects;
} else {
objectPtr = (void **)ckalloc(numObjects * sizeof(void *));
}
#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
objectPtr[0] = (void *)Tk_GetUid("all");
#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
objectPtr[0] = (void *)searchUids->allUid;
#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
for (i = itemPtr->numTags - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
objectPtr[i+1] = (void *)itemPtr->tagPtr[i];
}
objectPtr[itemPtr->numTags + 1] = itemPtr;
#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
/*
* Copy uids of matching expressions into object array
*/
i = itemPtr->numTags+2;
expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
while (expr) {
if (expr->match) {
objectPtr[i++] = (int *) expr->uid;
}
expr = expr->next;
}
#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
/*
* Invoke the binding system, then free up the object array if it was
* malloc-ed.
*/
if (canvasPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
CanvasSelectTo(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Information about widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is to hold selection. */
| | | | 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
CanvasSelectTo(
TkCanvas *canvasPtr, /* Information about widget. */
Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Item that is to hold selection. */
int index) /* Index of element that is to become the
* "other" end of the selection. */
{
int oldFirst, oldLast;
Tk_Item *oldSelPtr;
oldFirst = canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst;
oldLast = canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast;
oldSelPtr = canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 |
}
canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr = itemPtr;
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr != itemPtr) {
canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr = itemPtr;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor = index;
}
| | | | 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 |
}
canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr = itemPtr;
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr != itemPtr) {
canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr = itemPtr;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor = index;
}
if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor <= index) {
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst = canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast = index;
} else {
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst = index;
canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast = canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor - 1;
}
if ((canvasPtr->textInfo.selectFirst != oldFirst)
|| (canvasPtr->textInfo.selectLast != oldLast)
|| (itemPtr != oldSelPtr)) {
EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5683 5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 | * * Side effects: * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
CanvasFetchSelection(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about canvas widget. */
int offset, /* Offset within selection of first character
* to be returned. */
char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
* not including terminating NULL
* character. */
{
TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *)clientData;
return ItemSelection(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr, offset,
buffer, maxBytes);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvas.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | /* * tkCanvas.h -- * * Declarations shared among all the files that implement canvas widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | /* * tkCanvas.h -- * * Declarations shared among all the files that implement canvas widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright (c) 1998 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKCANVAS #define _TKCANVAS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
143 144 145 146 147 148 149 |
* of the previous current item. */
double closeEnough; /* The mouse is assumed to be inside an item
* if it is this close to it. */
XEvent pickEvent; /* The event upon which the current choice of
* currentItem is based. Must be saved so that
* if the currentItem is deleted, can pick
* another. */
| | | 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 |
* of the previous current item. */
double closeEnough; /* The mouse is assumed to be inside an item
* if it is this close to it. */
XEvent pickEvent; /* The event upon which the current choice of
* currentItem is based. Must be saved so that
* if the currentItem is deleted, can pick
* another. */
int state; /* Last known modifier state. Used to defer
* picking a new current object while buttons
* are down. */
/*
* Information used for managing scrollbars:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 |
char *takeFocus; /* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
* C code, but used by keyboard traversal
* scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
double pixelsPerMM; /* Scale factor between MM and pixels; used
* when converting coordinates. */
int flags; /* Various flags; see below for
* definitions. */
| | | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 |
char *takeFocus; /* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
* C code, but used by keyboard traversal
* scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
double pixelsPerMM; /* Scale factor between MM and pixels; used
* when converting coordinates. */
int flags; /* Various flags; see below for
* definitions. */
int nextId; /* Number to use as id for next item created
* in widget. */
Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo; /* Pointer to information used for generating
* Postscript for the canvas. NULL means no
* Postscript is currently being generated. */
Tcl_HashTable idTable; /* Table of integer indices. */
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | } TkCanvas; /* * Flag bits for canvases: * * REDRAW_PENDING - 1 means a DoWhenIdle handler has already been * created to redraw some or all of the canvas. | | | 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 | } TkCanvas; /* * Flag bits for canvases: * * REDRAW_PENDING - 1 means a DoWhenIdle handler has already been * created to redraw some or all of the canvas. * REDRAW_BORDERS - 1 means that the borders need to be redrawn * during the next redisplay operation. * REPICK_NEEDED - 1 means DisplayCanvas should pick a new * current item before redrawing the canvas. * GOT_FOCUS - 1 means the focus is currently in this widget, * so should draw the insertion cursor and * traversal highlight. * CURSOR_ON - 1 means the insertion cursor is in the "on" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | /* * Canvas-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported * to the outside world: */ MODULE_SCOPE int TkCanvPostscriptCmd(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv); | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | /* * Canvas-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported * to the outside world: */ MODULE_SCOPE int TkCanvPostscriptCmd(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv); MODULE_SCOPE int TkCanvTranslatePath(TkCanvas *canvPtr, int numVertex, double *coordPtr, int closed, XPoint *outPtr); /* * Standard item types provided by Tk: */ MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ItemType tkArcType, tkBitmapType, tkImageType, tkLineType; |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkClipboard.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkSelect.h" /* * Prototypes for functions used only in this file: */ | | | | | | | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkSelect.h" /* * Prototypes for functions used only in this file: */ static int ClipboardAppHandler(ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes); static int ClipboardHandler(ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes); static int ClipboardWindowHandler(ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes); static void ClipboardLostSel(ClientData clientData); static int ClipboardGetProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *portion); /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | | | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ClipboardHandler(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about data to fetch. */
int offset, /* Return selection bytes starting at this
* offset. */
char *buffer, /* Place to store converted selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
{
TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr = (TkClipboardTarget *)clientData;
TkClipboardBuffer *cbPtr;
char *srcPtr, *destPtr;
size_t count = 0;
int scanned = 0;
size_t length, freeCount;
/*
* Skip to buffer containing offset byte
*/
for (cbPtr = targetPtr->firstBufferPtr; ; cbPtr = cbPtr->nextPtr) {
if (cbPtr == NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 |
cbPtr = cbPtr->nextPtr;
if (cbPtr == NULL) {
break;
}
srcPtr = cbPtr->buffer;
length = cbPtr->length;
}
| | | 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 |
cbPtr = cbPtr->nextPtr;
if (cbPtr == NULL) {
break;
}
srcPtr = cbPtr->buffer;
length = cbPtr->length;
}
return (int)count;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ClipboardAppHandler --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ClipboardAppHandler(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to TkDisplay structure. */
int offset, /* Return selection bytes starting at this
* offset. */
char *buffer, /* Place to store converted selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
{
TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *)clientData;
int length;
const char *p;
p = dispPtr->clipboardAppPtr->winPtr->nameUid;
length = strlen(p);
if (length <= offset) {
return 0;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ClipboardWindowHandler(
TCL_UNUSED(void *), /* Not used. */
TCL_UNUSED(int), /* Return selection bytes starting at this
* offset. */
char *buffer, /* Place to store converted selection. */
TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
{
buffer[0] = '.';
buffer[1] = 0;
return 1;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
446 447 448 449 450 451 452 |
const char *targetName = NULL;
const char *formatName = NULL;
const char *string;
static const char *const appendOptionStrings[] = {
"-displayof", "-format", "-type", NULL
};
enum appendOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_FORMAT, APPEND_TYPE };
| | < | | 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 |
const char *targetName = NULL;
const char *formatName = NULL;
const char *string;
static const char *const appendOptionStrings[] = {
"-displayof", "-format", "-type", NULL
};
enum appendOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_FORMAT, APPEND_TYPE };
int subIndex, length;
for (i = 2; i < objc - 1; i++) {
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
if (string[0] != '-') {
break;
}
/*
* If the argument is "--", it signifies the end of arguments.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
705 706 707 708 709 710 711 |
ClipboardGetProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Dynamic string holding partially assembled
* selection. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Interp *), /* Interpreter used for error reporting (not
* used). */
const char *portion) /* New information to be appended. */
{
| > > > > | > > | 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 |
ClipboardGetProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Dynamic string holding partially assembled
* selection. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Interp *), /* Interpreter used for error reporting (not
* used). */
const char *portion) /* New information to be appended. */
{
Tcl_Encoding utf8 = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "utf-8");
Tcl_DString ds;
Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(utf8, portion, -1, &ds);
Tcl_DStringAppend((Tcl_DString *) clientData, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), Tcl_DStringLength(&ds));
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
Tcl_FreeEncoding(utf8);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkCmds.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 |
* Return all the current values
*/
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-height", 7));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
| | | | | > | | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 |
* Return all the current values
*/
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-height", 7));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->height));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-x", 2));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->x));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-y", 2));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->y));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else if (objc == 3) {
int value;
/*
* Return the current value of the selected option
*/
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], caretStrings,
"caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (index == TK_CARET_X) {
value = caretPtr->x;
} else if (index == TK_CARET_Y) {
value = caretPtr->y;
} else /* if (index == TK_CARET_HEIGHT) -- last case */ {
value = caretPtr->height;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
} else {
int i;
int value, x = 0, y = 0, height = -1;
for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
if ((Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], caretStrings,
"caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) ||
Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp,objv[i+1],&value) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
806 807 808 809 810 811 812 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Screen *screenPtr;
int skip, width, height;
double d;
| < < < < < < < > > > > > | 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Screen *screenPtr;
int skip, width, height;
double d;
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 1, objv + 1, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
screenPtr = Tk_Screen(tkwin);
if (objc - skip == 1) {
d = 25.4 / 72;
d *= WidthOfScreen(screenPtr);
d /= WidthMMOfScreen(screenPtr);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(d));
} else if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"setting the scaling not accessible in a safe interpreter", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "SCALING", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
} else if (objc - skip == 2) {
if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1+skip], &d) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
d = (25.4 / 72) / d;
width = (int) (d * WidthOfScreen(screenPtr) + 0.5);
if (width <= 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 |
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc-1, objv+1, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if ((objc - skip) == 2) {
int boolVal;
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[1+skip],
&boolVal) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| > > > > > > | > | 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 |
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc-1, objv+1, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if ((objc - skip) == 2) {
/*
* In the case where TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS is not defined, this
* will be ignored and we will always return 0. That will indicate
* to the user that input methods are just not available.
*/
int boolVal;
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[1+skip],
&boolVal) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
if (boolVal) {
dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
} else {
dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
}
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
} else if ((objc - skip) != 1) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv,
"?-displayof window? ?boolean?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 |
return code;
}
static char *
WaitVariableProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
| | | > > | 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 |
return code;
}
static char *
WaitVariableProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
TCL_UNUSED(const char *), /* Second part of variable name. */
TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* Information about what happened. */
{
int *donePtr = (int *)clientData;
*donePtr = 1;
Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, name1, TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
WaitVariableProc, clientData);
return NULL;
}
static void
WaitVisibilityProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event (not used). */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 |
}
}
winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
switch ((enum options) index) {
case WIN_CELLS:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
| | | 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 |
}
}
winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
switch ((enum options) index) {
case WIN_CELLS:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_Visual(tkwin)->map_entries));
break;
case WIN_CHILDREN: {
Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
winPtr = winPtr->childList;
for ( ; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_Class(tkwin), -1));
break;
case WIN_COLORMAPFULL:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(TkpCmapStressed(tkwin,Tk_Colormap(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_DEPTH:
| | | | 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_Class(tkwin), -1));
break;
case WIN_COLORMAPFULL:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(TkpCmapStressed(tkwin,Tk_Colormap(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_DEPTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_Depth(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_GEOMETRY:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("%dx%d+%d+%d",
Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_X(tkwin), Tk_Y(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_HEIGHT:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_Height(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_ID: {
char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
TkpPrintWindowId(buf, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, -1));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 |
y = -1;
} else {
TkGetPointerCoords((Tk_Window) winPtr, &x, &y);
}
if (useX & useY) {
Tcl_Obj *xyObj[2];
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 |
y = -1;
} else {
TkGetPointerCoords((Tk_Window) winPtr, &x, &y);
}
if (useX & useY) {
Tcl_Obj *xyObj[2];
xyObj[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x);
xyObj[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, xyObj));
} else if (useX) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
}
break;
case WIN_REQHEIGHT:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_REQWIDTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_ROOTX:
Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
break;
case WIN_ROOTY:
Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
break;
case WIN_SCREEN:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("%s.%d",
Tk_DisplayName(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_SCREENCELLS:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(CellsOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENDEPTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(DefaultDepthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENHEIGHT:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(HeightOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENWIDTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENMMHEIGHT:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(HeightMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENMMWIDTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewIntObj(WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_SCREENVISUAL:
c_class = DefaultVisualOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))->c_class;
goto visual;
case WIN_SERVER:
TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 |
break;
case WIN_VISUALID:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("0x%x", (unsigned)
XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_VROOTHEIGHT:
Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
| | | | | | | | | 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 |
break;
case WIN_VISUALID:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("0x%x", (unsigned)
XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin))));
break;
case WIN_VROOTHEIGHT:
Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
break;
case WIN_VROOTWIDTH:
Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
break;
case WIN_VROOTX:
Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
break;
case WIN_VROOTY:
Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
break;
case WIN_WIDTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_Width(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_X:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_X(tkwin)));
break;
case WIN_Y:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(Tk_Y(tkwin)));
break;
/*
* Uses -displayof.
*/
case WIN_ATOM:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 |
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &pixels) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 |
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &pixels) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(pixels));
break;
}
case WIN_RGB: {
XColor *colorPtr;
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window colorName");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 |
* destroyed when we are through with it, so we do not get stale RGB
* values next time.
*/
{
Colormap temp = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
Tk_Colormap(tkwin) = TK_DYNAMIC_COLORMAP;
| | | | 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 |
* destroyed when we are through with it, so we do not get stale RGB
* values next time.
*/
{
Colormap temp = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
Tk_Colormap(tkwin) = TK_DYNAMIC_COLORMAP;
colorPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[3]);
Tk_Colormap(tkwin) = temp;
}
#else
colorPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[3]);
#endif
if (colorPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("%d %d %d",
colorPtr->red, colorPtr->green, colorPtr->blue));
Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 |
}
resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, visInfoPtr[i].c_class);
if (string == NULL) {
strcpy(buf, "unknown");
} else {
| | | | 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 |
}
resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, visInfoPtr[i].c_class);
if (string == NULL) {
strcpy(buf, "unknown");
} else {
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%s %d", string, visInfoPtr[i].depth);
}
if (includeVisualId) {
snprintf(visualIdString, sizeof(visualIdString), " 0x%lx",
(unsigned long) visInfoPtr[i].visualid);
strcat(buf, visualIdString);
}
strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, -1);
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 |
* application associated with interp. On
* output, filled with window specified as
* option to "-displayof" argument, or
* unmodified if "-displayof" argument was not
* present. */
{
const char *string;
| | | | 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 |
* application associated with interp. On
* output, filled with window specified as
* option to "-displayof" argument, or
* unmodified if "-displayof" argument was not
* present. */
{
const char *string;
int length;
if (objc < 1) {
return 0;
}
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[0], &length);
if ((length >= 2) &&
(strncmp(string, "-displayof", length) == 0)) {
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"value for \"-displayof\" missing", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "NO_VALUE", "DISPLAYOF", NULL);
return -1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkColor.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkColor.h"
/*
* Structures of the following following type are used as keys for
* colorValueTable (in TkDisplay).
*/
typedef struct {
int red, green, blue; /* Values for desired color. */
| > > > > | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkColor.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* Structures of the following following type are used as keys for
* colorValueTable (in TkDisplay).
*/
typedef struct {
int red, green, blue; /* Values for desired color. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
367 368 369 370 371 372 373 |
if (tkColPtr->magic==COLOR_MAGIC && tkColPtr->type==TK_COLOR_BY_NAME) {
return tkColPtr->hashPtr->key.string;
} else {
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
| | | 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 |
if (tkColPtr->magic==COLOR_MAGIC && tkColPtr->type==TK_COLOR_BY_NAME) {
return tkColPtr->hashPtr->key.string;
} else {
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
snprintf(tsdPtr->rgbString, sizeof(tsdPtr->rgbString), "#%04x%04x%04x", colorPtr->red,
colorPtr->green, colorPtr->blue);
/*
* If the string has the form #RSRSTUTUVWVW (where equal letters
* denote equal hexdigits) then this is equivalent to #RSTUVW. Then
* output the shorter form.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
814 815 816 817 818 819 820 |
if (tkColPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugColor found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (tkColPtr != NULL); tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
| | | | 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 |
if (tkColPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugColor found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (tkColPtr != NULL); tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(tkColPtr->resourceRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(tkColPtr->objRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
}
}
return resultPtr;
}
#ifndef _WIN32
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkColor.h.
1 2 3 4 5 | /* * tkColor.h -- * * Declarations of data types and functions used by the Tk color module. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | /* * tkColor.h -- * * Declarations of data types and functions used by the Tk color module. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKCOLOR #define _TKCOLOR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 |
* color and all other fields defaulted. May
* be NULL. */
Screen *screen; /* Screen where this color is valid. Used to
* delete it, and to find its display. */
Colormap colormap; /* Colormap from which this entry was
* allocated. */
Visual *visual; /* Visual associated with colormap. */
| | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 |
* color and all other fields defaulted. May
* be NULL. */
Screen *screen; /* Screen where this color is valid. Used to
* delete it, and to find its display. */
Colormap colormap; /* Colormap from which this entry was
* allocated. */
Visual *visual; /* Visual associated with colormap. */
int resourceRefCount; /* Number of active uses of this color (each
* active use corresponds to a call to
* Tk_AllocColorFromObj or Tk_GetColor). If
* this count is 0, then this TkColor
* structure is no longer valid and it isn't
* present in a hash table: it is being kept
* around only because there are objects
* referring to it. The structure is freed
* when resourceRefCount and objRefCount are
* both 0. */
int objRefCount; /* The number of Tcl objects that reference
* this structure. */
int type; /* TK_COLOR_BY_NAME or TK_COLOR_BY_VALUE. */
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; /* Pointer to hash table entry for this
* structure. (for use in deleting entry). */
struct TkColor *nextPtr; /* Points to the next TkColor structure with
* the same color name. Colors with the same
* name but different screens or colormaps are
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkConfig.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 |
#define __NO_OLD_CONFIG
#endif
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkFont.h"
/*
* The following definition keeps track of all of
* the option tables that have been created for a thread.
*/
typedef struct {
int initialized; /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 |
#define __NO_OLD_CONFIG
#endif
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkFont.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* The following encoding is used in TYPE_FLAGS:
*
* if sizeof(type) == sizeof(int) => TYPE_FLAGS(type) = 0
* if sizeof(type) == 1 => TYPE_FLAGS(type) = 64
* if sizeof(type) == 2 => TYPE_FLAGS(type) = 128
*/
#define TYPE_FLAGS(type) (((int)(sizeof(type)&(sizeof(int)-1))<<6))
#define TYPE_MASK (((((int)sizeof(int)-1))|3)<<6)
/*
* The following definition keeps track of all of
* the option tables that have been created for a thread.
*/
typedef struct {
int initialized; /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 |
/*
* One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has been
* passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
*/
typedef struct OptionTable {
| | | | | | | | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 |
/*
* One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has been
* passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
*/
typedef struct OptionTable {
int refCount; /* Counts the number of uses of this table
* (the number of times Tk_CreateOptionTable
* has returned it). This can be greater than
* 1 if it is shared along several option
* table chains, or if the same table is used
* for multiple purposes. */
Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;/* Hash table entry that refers to this table;
* used to delete the entry. */
struct OptionTable *nextPtr;/* If templatePtr was part of a chain of
* templates, this points to the table
* corresponding to the next template in the
* chain. */
int numOptions; /* The number of items in the options array
* below. */
Option options[1]; /* Information about the individual options in
* the table. This must be the last field in
* the structure: the actual size of the array
* will be numOptions, not 1. */
} OptionTable;
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static int DoObjConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOption *savePtr);
static void FreeResources(Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
char *internalPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
static Tcl_Obj * GetConfigList(char *recordPtr,
Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
static Tcl_Obj * GetObjectForOption(char *recordPtr,
Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
static Option * GetOption(const char *name, OptionTable *tablePtr);
static Option * GetOptionFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, OptionTable *tablePtr);
static int ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static void FreeOptionInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static void DupOptionInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_Obj *);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 |
* options. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
int newEntry;
OptionTable *tablePtr;
const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr, *specPtr2;
Option *optionPtr;
| | | 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 |
* options. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
int newEntry;
OptionTable *tablePtr;
const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr, *specPtr2;
Option *optionPtr;
int numOptions, i;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
/*
* We use an TSD in the thread to keep a hash table of
* all the option tables we've created for this application. This is
* used for allowing us to share the tables (e.g. in several chains).
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | * Get the custom parsing, etc., functions. */ optionPtr->extra.custom = (const Tk_ObjCustomOption *)specPtr->clientData; } } if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_STRING) | | | 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 |
* Get the custom parsing, etc., functions.
*/
optionPtr->extra.custom = (const Tk_ObjCustomOption *)specPtr->clientData;
}
}
if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_STRING)
&& (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0))
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_FONT)
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_BITMAP)
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_BORDER)
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_CURSOR)
|| (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_CUSTOM)) {
optionPtr->flags |= OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
326 327 328 329 330 331 332 |
void
Tk_DeleteOptionTable(
Tk_OptionTable optionTable) /* The option table to delete. */
{
OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
Option *optionPtr;
| | | 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 |
void
Tk_DeleteOptionTable(
Tk_OptionTable optionTable) /* The option table to delete. */
{
OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
Option *optionPtr;
int count;
if (tablePtr->refCount-- > 1) {
return;
}
if (tablePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteOptionTable((Tk_OptionTable) tablePtr->nextPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
377 378 379 380 381 382 383 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_InitOptions(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. NULL means
* don't leave an error message. */
| | | 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_InitOptions(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. NULL means
* don't leave an error message. */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to the record to configure. Note:
* the caller should have properly initialized
* the record with NULL pointers for each
* option value. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, /* The token which matches the config specs
* for the widget in question. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Certain options types (such as
* TK_OPTION_COLOR) need fields out of the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
495 496 497 498 499 500 501 |
if (DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin,
NULL) != TCL_OK) {
if (interp != NULL) {
char msg[200];
switch (source) {
case OPTION_DATABASE:
| | | | | | 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 |
if (DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin,
NULL) != TCL_OK) {
if (interp != NULL) {
char msg[200];
switch (source) {
case OPTION_DATABASE:
snprintf(msg, 200, "\n (database entry for \"%.50s\")",
optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
break;
case SYSTEM_DEFAULT:
snprintf(msg, 200, "\n (system default for \"%.50s\")",
optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
break;
case TABLE_DEFAULT:
snprintf(msg, 200, "\n (default value for \"%.50s\")",
optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
}
if (tkwin != NULL) {
snprintf(msg + strlen(msg) - 1, 200 - (strlen(msg) - 1), " in widget \"%.50s\")",
Tk_PathName(tkwin));
}
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, msg);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(valuePtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 |
*/
static int
DoObjConfig(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no message is left if an error
* occurs. */
| | | | | | | | | | 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 |
*/
static int
DoObjConfig(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no message is left if an error
* occurs. */
char *recordPtr, /* The record to modify to hold the new option
* value. */
Option *optionPtr, /* Pointer to information about the option. */
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, /* New value for option. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which option will be used (needed
* to allocate resources for some options).
* May be NULL if the option doesn't require
* window-related resources. */
Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr)
/* If NULL, the old value for the option will
* be freed. If non-NULL, the old value will
* be stored here, and it becomes the property
* of the caller (the caller must eventually
* free the old value). */
{
Tcl_Obj **slotPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
char *internalPtr; /* Points to location in record where internal
* representation of value should be stored,
* or NULL. */
char *oldInternalPtr; /* Points to location in which to save old
* internal representation of value. */
Tk_SavedOption internal; /* Used to save the old internal
* representation of the value if
* savedOptionPtr is NULL. */
const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
int nullOK;
/*
* Save the old object form for the value, if there is one.
*/
specPtr = optionPtr->specPtr;
if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
slotPtrPtr = (Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr + specPtr->objOffset);
oldPtr = *slotPtrPtr;
} else {
slotPtrPtr = NULL;
oldPtr = NULL;
}
/*
* Apply the new value in a type-specific way. Also remember the old
* object and internal forms, if they exist.
*/
if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
internalPtr = recordPtr + specPtr->internalOffset;
} else {
internalPtr = NULL;
}
if (savedOptionPtr != NULL) {
savedOptionPtr->optionPtr = optionPtr;
savedOptionPtr->valuePtr = oldPtr;
oldInternalPtr = (char *) &savedOptionPtr->internalForm;
} else {
oldInternalPtr = (char *) &internal.internalForm;
}
nullOK = (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & (TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|32 /* TCL_NULL_OK */));
switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
int newBool;
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newBool) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
652 653 654 655 656 657 658 |
*((double *) internalPtr) = newDbl;
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
char *newStr;
const char *value;
| | | | | | | > > > > > > > > > > > | | > | 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 |
*((double *) internalPtr) = newDbl;
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
char *newStr;
const char *value;
int length;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
valuePtr = NULL;
}
if (internalPtr != NULL) {
if (valuePtr != NULL) {
value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &length);
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(length + 1);
strcpy(newStr, value);
} else {
newStr = NULL;
}
*((char **) oldInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
*((char **) internalPtr) = newStr;
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
int newValue;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
valuePtr = NULL;
newValue = -1;
} else {
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, valuePtr,
optionPtr->specPtr->clientData, sizeof(char *),
optionPtr->specPtr->optionName+1, 0, &newValue) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (internalPtr != NULL) {
if (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) {
if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(char)) {
*((char *) oldInternalPtr) = *((char *) internalPtr);
*((char *) internalPtr) = newValue;
} else if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(short)) {
*((short *) oldInternalPtr) = *((short *) internalPtr);
*((short *) internalPtr) = newValue;
} else {
Tcl_Panic("Invalid flags for %s", "TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE");
}
} else {
*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
*((int *) internalPtr) = newValue;
}
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
XColor *newPtr;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
845 846 847 848 849 850 851 |
}
case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
int newPixels;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
valuePtr = NULL;
newPixels = 0;
| < | | | < < | | | < | | 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 |
}
case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
int newPixels;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
valuePtr = NULL;
newPixels = 0;
} else if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
&newPixels) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (internalPtr != NULL) {
*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
*((int *) internalPtr) = newPixels;
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
Tk_Window newWin;
if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
valuePtr = NULL;
newWin = NULL;
} else if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
&newWin) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (internalPtr != NULL) {
*((Tk_Window *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = newWin;
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
if (custom->setProc(custom->clientData, interp, tkwin,
&valuePtr, recordPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset,
(char *)oldInternalPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->flags) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
}
default:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
975 976 977 978 979 980 981 |
const char *name, /* String balue to be looked up in the option
* table. */
OptionTable *tablePtr) /* Table in which to look up name. */
{
Option *bestPtr, *optionPtr;
OptionTable *tablePtr2;
const char *p1, *p2;
| | | 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 |
const char *name, /* String balue to be looked up in the option
* table. */
OptionTable *tablePtr) /* Table in which to look up name. */
{
Option *bestPtr, *optionPtr;
OptionTable *tablePtr2;
const char *p1, *p2;
int count;
/*
* Search through all of the option tables in the chain to find the best
* match. Some tricky aspects:
*
* 1. We have to accept unique abbreviations.
* 2. The same name could appear in different tables in the chain. If this
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_SetOptions(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no error message is returned.*/
| | | 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_SetOptions(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no error message is returned.*/
char *recordPtr, /* The record to configure. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, /* Describes valid options. */
int objc, /* The number of elements in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Contains one or more name-value pairs. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window associated with the thing being
* configured; needed for some options (such
* as colors). */
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, /* If non-NULL, the old values of modified
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 |
*/
void
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Holds saved option information; must have
* been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
{
| | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > > > > > | > | 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 |
*/
void
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Holds saved option information; must have
* been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
{
int i;
Option *optionPtr;
Tcl_Obj *newPtr; /* New object value of option, which we
* replace with old value and free. Taken from
* record. */
char *internalPtr; /* Points to internal value of option in
* record. */
const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
/*
* Be sure to restore the options in the opposite order they were set.
* This is important because it's possible that the same option name was
* used twice in a single call to Tk_SetOptions.
*/
if (savePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr->nextPtr);
ckfree(savePtr->nextPtr);
savePtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
for (i = savePtr->numItems - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
optionPtr = savePtr->items[i].optionPtr;
specPtr = optionPtr->specPtr;
/*
* First free the new value of the option, which is currently in the
* record.
*/
if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
newPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (savePtr->recordPtr + specPtr->objOffset));
} else {
newPtr = NULL;
}
if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
internalPtr = savePtr->recordPtr + specPtr->internalOffset;
} else {
internalPtr = NULL;
}
if (optionPtr->flags & OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING) {
FreeResources(optionPtr, newPtr, internalPtr, savePtr->tkwin);
}
if (newPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(newPtr);
}
/*
* Now restore the old value of the option.
*/
if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
*((Tcl_Obj **) (savePtr->recordPtr + specPtr->objOffset))
= savePtr->items[i].valuePtr;
}
if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
char *ptr = (char *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm;
CLANG_ASSERT(internalPtr);
switch (specPtr->type) {
case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
case TK_OPTION_INT:
*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
*((double *) internalPtr) = *((double *) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_STRING:
*((char **) internalPtr) = *((char **) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE:
if (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) {
if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(char)) {
*((char *) internalPtr) = *((char *) ptr);
} else if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(short)) {
*((short *) internalPtr) = *((short *) ptr);
} else {
Tcl_Panic("Invalid flags for %s", "TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE");
}
} else {
*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
}
break;
case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
*((XColor **) internalPtr) = *((XColor **) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_FONT:
*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) ptr);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 |
*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData, savePtr->tkwin,
| | | 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 |
*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) ptr);
break;
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData, savePtr->tkwin,
internalPtr, ptr);
}
break;
}
default:
Tcl_Panic("bad option type in Tk_RestoreSavedOptions");
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 |
*/
void
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Contains options saved in a previous call
* to Tk_SetOptions. */
{
| | | 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 |
*/
void
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(
Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Contains options saved in a previous call
* to Tk_SetOptions. */
{
int count;
Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr;
if (savePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr->nextPtr);
ckfree(savePtr->nextPtr);
}
for (count = savePtr->numItems; count > 0; count--) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 | * options in optionTable are freed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_FreeConfigOptions( | | | | | | | | | 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 |
* options in optionTable are freed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_FreeConfigOptions(
char *recordPtr, /* Record whose fields contain current values
* for options. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, /* Describes legal options. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
* for freeing some options. */
{
OptionTable *tablePtr;
Option *optionPtr;
int count;
Tcl_Obj **oldPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
char *oldInternalPtr;
const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
for (tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable; tablePtr != NULL;
tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
for (optionPtr = tablePtr->options, count = tablePtr->numOptions;
count > 0; optionPtr++, count--) {
specPtr = optionPtr->specPtr;
if (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
continue;
}
if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
oldPtrPtr = (Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr + specPtr->objOffset);
oldPtr = *oldPtrPtr;
*oldPtrPtr = NULL;
} else {
oldPtr = NULL;
}
if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
oldInternalPtr = recordPtr + specPtr->internalOffset;
} else {
oldInternalPtr = NULL;
}
if (optionPtr->flags & OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING) {
FreeResources(optionPtr, oldPtr, oldInternalPtr, tkwin);
}
if (oldPtr != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 |
*/
static void
FreeResources(
Option *optionPtr, /* Description of the configuration option. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* The current value of the option, specified
* as an object. */
| | | | | 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 |
*/
static void
FreeResources(
Option *optionPtr, /* Description of the configuration option. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* The current value of the option, specified
* as an object. */
char *internalPtr, /* A pointer to an internal representation for
* the option's value, such as an int or
* (XColor *). Only valid if
* optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* The window in which this option is used. */
{
int internalFormExists;
/*
* If there exists an internal form for the value, use it to free
* resources (also zero out the internal form). If there is no internal
* form, then use the object form.
*/
internalFormExists = optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0;
switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
case TK_OPTION_STRING:
if (internalFormExists) {
if (*((char **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
ckfree(*((char **) internalPtr));
*((char **) internalPtr) = NULL;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 |
} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
}
break;
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
| | | 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 |
} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
}
break;
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
custom->freeProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, internalPtr);
}
break;
}
default:
break;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Tcl_Obj *
Tk_GetOptionInfo(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no error message is created. */
| | | | 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Tcl_Obj *
Tk_GetOptionInfo(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
* then no error message is created. */
char *recordPtr, /* Record whose fields contain current values
* for options. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, /* Describes all the legal options. */
Tcl_Obj *namePtr, /* If non-NULL, the string value selects a
* single option whose info is to be returned.
* Otherwise info is returned for all options
* in optionTable. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to
* compute correct default value for some
* options. */
{
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
Option *optionPtr;
int count;
/*
* If information is only wanted for a single configuration spec, then
* handle that one spec specially.
*/
if (namePtr != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 | * Memory is allocated. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * GetConfigList( | | | 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 |
* Memory is allocated.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
GetConfigList(
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to record holding current values of
* configuration options. */
Option *optionPtr, /* Pointer to information describing a
* particular option. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
{
Tcl_Obj *listPtr, *elementPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 |
} else if (optionPtr->defaultPtr != NULL) {
elementPtr = optionPtr->defaultPtr;
} else {
elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
| | | | 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 |
} else if (optionPtr->defaultPtr != NULL) {
elementPtr = optionPtr->defaultPtr;
} else {
elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
if (optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
elementPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr
+ optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
if (elementPtr == NULL) {
elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
} else {
elementPtr = GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * GetObjectForOption( | | | | < < | | > > | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | > > | 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 |
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
GetObjectForOption(
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to record holding current values of
* configuration options. */
Option *optionPtr, /* Pointer to information describing an option
* whose internal value is stored in
* *recordPtr. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
{
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
char *internalPtr; /* Points to internal value of option in record. */
if (optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
internalPtr = recordPtr + optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset;
switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *)internalPtr));
break;
case TK_OPTION_INT:
objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *)internalPtr));
break;
case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*((double *)internalPtr));
break;
case TK_OPTION_STRING:
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(*((char **)internalPtr), -1);
break;
case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
int value = 0;
if (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) {
if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(char)) {
value = *((signed char *)internalPtr);
} else if ((optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_FLAGS(short)) {
value = *((short *)internalPtr);
} else {
Tcl_Panic("Invalid flags for %s", "TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE");
}
} else {
value = *((int *)internalPtr);
}
if (value >= 0) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(((char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData)[
value], -1);
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **)internalPtr);
if (colorPtr != NULL) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), -1);
}
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 |
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *)internalPtr);
if (pixmap != None) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
| | | | | | | | | 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 |
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *)internalPtr);
if (pixmap != None) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap), -1);
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *)internalPtr);
if (border != NULL) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border), -1);
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_RELIEF:
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfRelief(*((int *)internalPtr)), -1);
break;
case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *)internalPtr);
if (cursor != NULL) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor), -1);
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY:
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJustify(
*((Tk_Justify *)internalPtr)), -1);
break;
case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR:
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(
*((Tk_Anchor *)internalPtr)), -1);
break;
case TK_OPTION_PIXELS:
objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *)internalPtr));
break;
case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
tkwin = *((Tk_Window *)internalPtr);
if (tkwin != NULL) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
}
break;
}
case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
const Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
objPtr = custom->getProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, recordPtr,
optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset);
break;
}
default:
Tcl_Panic("bad option type in GetObjectForOption");
}
}
if (objPtr == NULL) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
return objPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 |
*/
Tcl_Obj *
Tk_GetOptionValue(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL
* then no messages are provided for
* errors. */
| | | | | 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 |
*/
Tcl_Obj *
Tk_GetOptionValue(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL
* then no messages are provided for
* errors. */
char *recordPtr, /* Record whose fields contain current values
* for options. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable, /* Describes legal options. */
Tcl_Obj *namePtr, /* Gives the command-line name for the option
* whose value is to be returned. */
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
{
OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
Option *optionPtr;
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
optionPtr = GetOptionFromObj(interp, namePtr, tablePtr);
if (optionPtr == NULL) {
return NULL;
}
if (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
optionPtr = optionPtr->extra.synonymPtr;
}
if (optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
resultPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr+optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
/*
* This option has a null value and is represented by a null
* object pointer. We can't return the null pointer, since that
* would indicate an error. Instead, return a new empty object.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 |
for (hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&tsdPtr->hashTable, &search);
hashEntryPtr != NULL;
hashEntryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
if (tablePtr == (OptionTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr)) {
for ( ; tablePtr != NULL; tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
| | | | 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 |
for (hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&tsdPtr->hashTable, &search);
hashEntryPtr != NULL;
hashEntryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
if (tablePtr == (OptionTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr)) {
for ( ; tablePtr != NULL; tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(tablePtr->refCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(tablePtr->numOptions));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj(
tablePtr->options[0].specPtr->optionName, -1));
}
break;
}
}
return objPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkConsole.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 |
* console. A refCount permits the struct to be shared as instance data
* by commands and by channels.
*/
typedef struct ConsoleInfo {
Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp; /* Interpreter displaying the console. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter controlled by console. */
| | | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 |
* console. A refCount permits the struct to be shared as instance data
* by commands and by channels.
*/
typedef struct ConsoleInfo {
Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp; /* Interpreter displaying the console. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter controlled by console. */
int refCount;
} ConsoleInfo;
/*
* Each console channel holds an instance of the ChannelData struct as
* its instance data. It contains ConsoleInfo, so the channel can work
* with the appropriate console window, and a type value to distinguish
* the stdout channel from the stderr channel.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 |
/*
* This structure describes the channel type structure for file based IO:
*/
static const Tcl_ChannelType consoleChannelType = {
"console", /* Type name. */
TCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_5, /* v5 channel */
| | | 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 |
/*
* This structure describes the channel type structure for file based IO:
*/
static const Tcl_ChannelType consoleChannelType = {
"console", /* Type name. */
TCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_5, /* v5 channel */
ConsoleClose, /* Close proc. */
ConsoleInput, /* Input proc. */
ConsoleOutput, /* Output proc. */
NULL, /* Seek proc. */
NULL, /* Set option proc. */
NULL, /* Get option proc. */
ConsoleWatch, /* Watch for events on console. */
ConsoleHandle, /* Get a handle from the device. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 |
ConsoleInfo *info;
Tcl_Channel consoleChannel;
/*
* Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl.
*/
| | | 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 |
ConsoleInfo *info;
Tcl_Channel consoleChannel;
/*
* Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl.
*/
if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6", 0) == NULL) {
return;
}
consoleInitPtr = (int *)Tcl_GetThreadData(&consoleInitKey, (int) sizeof(int));
if (*consoleInitPtr) {
/*
* We've already initialized console channels in this thread.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
439 440 441 442 443 444 445 |
if (mainWindow) {
Tk_CreateEventHandler(mainWindow, StructureNotifyMask,
ConsoleEventProc, info);
info->refCount++;
}
Tcl_Preserve(consoleInterp);
| | | 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 |
if (mainWindow) {
Tk_CreateEventHandler(mainWindow, StructureNotifyMask,
ConsoleEventProc, info);
info->refCount++;
}
Tcl_Preserve(consoleInterp);
result = Tcl_EvalEx(consoleInterp, "source -encoding utf-8 $tk_library/console.tcl",
-1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp,
Tcl_GetReturnOptions(consoleInterp, result));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp));
}
Tcl_Release(consoleInterp);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCursor.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" /* * A TkCursor structure exists for each cursor that is currently active. Each * structure is indexed with two hash tables defined below. One of the tables * is cursorIdTable, and the other is either cursorNameTable or * cursorDataTable, each of which are stored in the TkDisplay structure for * the current thread. */ | > > > > | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * A TkCursor structure exists for each cursor that is currently active. Each * structure is indexed with two hash tables defined below. One of the tables * is cursorIdTable, and the other is either cursorNameTable or * cursorDataTable, each of which are stored in the TkDisplay structure for * the current thread. */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
421 422 423 424 425 426 427 |
TkCursor *cursorPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
printid:
| | | | 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 |
TkCursor *cursorPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
printid:
snprintf(dispPtr->cursorString, sizeof(dispPtr->cursorString), "cursor id 0x%" TCL_Z_MODIFIER "x", (size_t)cursor);
return dispPtr->cursorString;
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, (char *) cursor);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
goto printid;
}
cursorPtr = (TkCursor *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr);
if (cursorPtr->otherTable != &dispPtr->cursorNameTable) {
goto printid;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
513 514 515 516 517 518 519 |
Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeCursor called before Tk_GetCursor");
}
| | | 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 |
Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeCursor called before Tk_GetCursor");
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, (char *) cursor);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeCursor received unknown cursor argument");
}
FreeCursor((TkCursor *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr));
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
858 859 860 861 862 863 864 |
cursorPtr = (TkCursor *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugCursor found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (cursorPtr != NULL); cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
| | | | 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 |
cursorPtr = (TkCursor *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugCursor found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (cursorPtr != NULL); cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(cursorPtr->resourceRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(cursorPtr->objRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
}
}
return resultPtr;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkDList.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | /* * tkDList.h -- * * A list is headed by pointers to first and last element. The elements * are doubly linked so that an arbitrary element can be removed without * a need to traverse the list. New elements can be added to the list * before or after an existing element or at the head/tail of the list. * A list may be traversed in the forward or backward direction. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | /* * tkDList.h -- * * A list is headed by pointers to first and last element. The elements * are doubly linked so that an arbitrary element can be removed without * a need to traverse the list. New elements can be added to the list * before or after an existing element or at the head/tail of the list. * A list may be traversed in the forward or backward direction. * * Copyright (c) 2018 Gregor Cramer. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ /* * Note that this file will not be included in header files, it is the purpose |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkDecls.h.
1 2 3 4 5 | /* * tkDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform independent public Tcl API. * | | < < < < < < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | /* * tkDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform independent public Tcl API. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKDECLS #define _TKDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif /* * WARNING: This file is automatically generated by the tools/genStubs.tcl * script. Any modifications to the function declarations below should be made * in the generic/tk.decls script. */ /* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | /* 17 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 18 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 19 */ | | | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | /* 17 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 18 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 19 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 20 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CanvasTkwin(Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 21 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *screenXPtr, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, | | | 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec, int flags); /* 30 */ EXTERN void Tk_ConfigureWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr); /* 31 */ EXTERN Tk_TextLayout Tk_ComputeTextLayout(Tk_Font font, const char *str, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | EXTERN void Tk_DeleteImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 53 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 54 */ EXTERN void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */ | | | 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | EXTERN void Tk_DeleteImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 53 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 54 */ EXTERN void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_DisplayName(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 56 */ EXTERN int Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 57 */ EXTERN void Tk_Draw3DPolygon(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
285 286 287 288 289 290 291 | char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 77 */ | < | | | | 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 | char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 77 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeXId(Display *display, XID xid); /* 78 */ EXTERN GC Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 79 */ EXTERN void Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 80 */ EXTERN Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorder(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName); /* 81 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetAllBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 82 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetAnchor(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 83 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetAtomName(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); /* 84 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, const char *eventStr); /* 85 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 86 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
351 352 353 354 355 356 357 | XGCValues *valuePtr); /* 97 */ EXTERN Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 98 */ | | | | 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 | XGCValues *valuePtr); /* 97 */ EXTERN Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 98 */ EXTERN ClientData Tk_GetImageMasterData(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, CONST86 Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr); /* 99 */ EXTERN Tk_ItemType * Tk_GetItemTypes(void); /* 100 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJoinStyle(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, int *joinPtr); /* 101 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJustify(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
381 382 383 384 385 386 387 | EXTERN int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr); /* 107 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 108 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, | | | 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 | EXTERN int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr); /* 107 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 108 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 109 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScreenMM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, double *doublePtr); /* 110 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetSelection(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | EXTERN int Tk_Grab(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 115 */ EXTERN void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr); /* 116 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window); /* 117 */ | | | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 | EXTERN int Tk_Grab(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 115 */ EXTERN void Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr); /* 116 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window); /* 117 */ EXTERN void Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageMaster model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 118 */ EXTERN int Tk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 119 */ EXTERN Atom Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 120 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | EXTERN void Tk_MoveResizeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 128 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 130 */ | | | | | | | > | | | | | | < | < | < | < | | 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 | EXTERN void Tk_MoveResizeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 128 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 130 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOf3DBorder(Tk_3DBorder border); /* 131 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfAnchor(Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 132 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfBitmap(Display *display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 133 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCapStyle(int cap); /* 134 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfColor(XColor *colorPtr); /* 135 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCursor(Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 136 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfFont(Tk_Font font); /* 137 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfImage(Tk_ImageMaster model); /* 138 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(int join); /* 139 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJustify(Tk_Justify justify); /* 140 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfRelief(int relief); /* 141 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 142 */ EXTERN void Tk_OwnSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 143 */ EXTERN int Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 144 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 145 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 146 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* 147 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 148 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 149 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 150 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 151 */ EXTERN int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 152 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 153 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
628 629 630 631 632 633 634 | Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 195 */ | | | 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 | Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 195 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeConfigOptions(char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 196 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 197 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 198 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 | /* 201 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 202 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 203 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 204 */ | | | | | | 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 | /* 201 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 202 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 203 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 204 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 206 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 207 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetMMFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 208 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr); /* 209 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetReliefFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr); /* 210 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 211 */ EXTERN int Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 212 */ EXTERN void Tk_MainEx(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 213 */ EXTERN void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 214 */ EXTERN int Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr); /* 215 */ EXTERN void Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 216 */ EXTERN int Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
784 785 786 787 788 789 790 | /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 246 */ | < | < | | 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 | /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 246 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 247 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 248 */ EXTERN int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display, int collapse); /* 249 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | /* 259 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 260 */ EXTERN Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 261 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, | | | | | | 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 | /* 259 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 260 */ EXTERN Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 261 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 262 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementBox(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 263 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 264 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawElement(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); /* 265 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoExpand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 266 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoPutBlock(Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
874 875 876 877 878 879 880 | /* 271 */ EXTERN Tcl_Interp * Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 272 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 273 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat( const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); | | < | < | > > | | | | | | | | > > > | | | 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 |
/* 271 */
EXTERN Tcl_Interp * Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin);
/* 272 */
EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldImageType(const Tk_ImageType *typePtr);
/* 273 */
EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(
const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr);
/* Slot 274 is reserved */
/* Slot 275 is reserved */
/* Slot 276 is reserved */
/* Slot 277 is reserved */
/* Slot 278 is reserved */
/* Slot 279 is reserved */
/* Slot 280 is reserved */
/* Slot 281 is reserved */
/* Slot 282 is reserved */
/* Slot 283 is reserved */
/* Slot 284 is reserved */
/* Slot 285 is reserved */
/* Slot 286 is reserved */
/* Slot 287 is reserved */
/* Slot 288 is reserved */
/* Slot 289 is reserved */
/* 290 */
EXTERN void TkUnusedStubEntry(void);
typedef struct {
const struct TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubs;
const struct TkIntStubs *tkIntStubs;
const struct TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubs;
const struct TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubs;
} TkStubHooks;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
920 921 922 923 924 925 926 |
int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr); /* 12 */
int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); /* 13 */
void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 14 */
int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); /* 15 */
double (*tk_CanvasPsY) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); /* 16 */
void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 17 */
int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 18 */
| | | | 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 |
int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr); /* 12 */
int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); /* 13 */
void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 14 */
int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); /* 15 */
double (*tk_CanvasPsY) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); /* 16 */
void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 17 */
int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 18 */
CONST86 char * (*tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 19 */
Tk_Window (*tk_CanvasTkwin) (Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 20 */
void (*tk_CanvasWindowCoords) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *screenXPtr, short *screenYPtr); /* 21 */
void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr); /* 22 */
int (*tk_CharBbox) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 23 */
void (*tk_ClearSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); /* 24 */
int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, const char *buffer); /* 25 */
int (*tk_ClipboardClear) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 26 */
int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 27 */
int (*tk_ConfigureValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 28 */
int (*tk_ConfigureWidget) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec, int flags); /* 29 */
void (*tk_ConfigureWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr); /* 30 */
Tk_TextLayout (*tk_ComputeTextLayout) (Tk_Font font, const char *str, int numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 31 */
Tk_Window (*tk_CoordsToWindow) (int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 32 */
unsigned long (*tk_CreateBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, const char *eventStr, const char *script, int append); /* 33 */
Tk_BindingTable (*tk_CreateBindingTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 34 */
Tk_ErrorHandler (*tk_CreateErrorHandler) (Display *display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, ClientData clientData); /* 35 */
void (*tk_CreateEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 36 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
956 957 958 959 960 961 962 |
void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 48 */
void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); /* 49 */
void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 50 */
void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 51 */
void (*tk_DeleteImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 52 */
void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 53 */
void (*tk_DestroyWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 54 */
| | | 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 |
void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 48 */
void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); /* 49 */
void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 50 */
void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 51 */
void (*tk_DeleteImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 52 */
void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 53 */
void (*tk_DestroyWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 54 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_DisplayName) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */
int (*tk_DistanceToTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 56 */
void (*tk_Draw3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 57 */
void (*tk_Draw3DRectangle) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 58 */
void (*tk_DrawChars) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, int numBytes, int x, int y); /* 59 */
void (*tk_DrawFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable); /* 60 */
void (*tk_DrawTextLayout) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int firstChar, int lastChar); /* 61 */
void (*tk_Fill3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 62 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
978 979 980 981 982 983 984 |
void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */
void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */
void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */
void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */
void (*tk_FreeOptions) (const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */
void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */
void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 |
void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */
void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */
void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */
void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */
void (*tk_FreeOptions) (const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */
void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */
void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */
void (*tk_FreeXId) (Display *display, XID xid); /* 77 */
GC (*tk_GCForColor) (XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 78 */
void (*tk_GeometryRequest) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 79 */
Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorder) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName); /* 80 */
void (*tk_GetAllBindings) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 81 */
int (*tk_GetAnchor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 82 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetAtomName) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); /* 83 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, const char *eventStr); /* 84 */
Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 85 */
Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const void *source, int width, int height); /* 86 */
int (*tk_GetCapStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, int *capPtr); /* 87 */
XColor * (*tk_GetColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name); /* 88 */
XColor * (*tk_GetColorByValue) (Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr); /* 89 */
Colormap (*tk_GetColormap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 90 */
Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str); /* 91 */
Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *source, const char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); /* 92 */
Tk_Font (*tk_GetFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str); /* 93 */
Tk_Font (*tk_GetFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 94 */
void (*tk_GetFontMetrics) (Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr); /* 95 */
GC (*tk_GetGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr); /* 96 */
Tk_Image (*tk_GetImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 97 */
ClientData (*tk_GetImageMasterData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, CONST86 Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr); /* 98 */
Tk_ItemType * (*tk_GetItemTypes) (void); /* 99 */
int (*tk_GetJoinStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, int *joinPtr); /* 100 */
int (*tk_GetJustify) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 101 */
int (*tk_GetNumMainWindows) (void); /* 102 */
Tk_Uid (*tk_GetOption) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, const char *className); /* 103 */
int (*tk_GetPixels) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, int *intPtr); /* 104 */
Pixmap (*tk_GetPixmap) (Display *display, Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth); /* 105 */
int (*tk_GetRelief) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr); /* 106 */
void (*tk_GetRootCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 107 */
int (*tk_GetScrollInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 108 */
int (*tk_GetScreenMM) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, double *doublePtr); /* 109 */
int (*tk_GetSelection) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 110 */
Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) (const char *str); /* 111 */
Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *str, int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr); /* 112 */
void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 113 */
int (*tk_Grab) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 114 */
void (*tk_HandleEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 115 */
Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) (Display *display, Window window); /* 116 */
void (*tk_ImageChanged) (Tk_ImageMaster model, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 117 */
int (*tk_Init) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 118 */
Atom (*tk_InternAtom) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 119 */
int (*tk_IntersectTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 120 */
void (*tk_MaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window window, Tk_Window container, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 121 */
Tk_Window (*tk_MainWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 122 */
void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 123 */
void (*tk_ManageGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData); /* 124 */
void (*tk_MapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 125 */
int (*tk_MeasureChars) (Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr); /* 126 */
void (*tk_MoveResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 127 */
void (*tk_MoveWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 128 */
void (*tk_MoveToplevelWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOf3DBorder) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 130 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 131 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfBitmap) (Display *display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 132 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCapStyle) (int cap); /* 133 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfColor) (XColor *colorPtr); /* 134 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 135 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfFont) (Tk_Font font); /* 136 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfImage) (Tk_ImageMaster model); /* 137 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) (int join); /* 138 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) (Tk_Justify justify); /* 139 */
CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) (int relief); /* 140 */
Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 141 */
void (*tk_OwnSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 142 */
int (*tk_ParseArgv) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv, const Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 143 */
void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 144 */
void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 145 */
int (*tk_PhotoGetImage) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* 146 */
void (*tk_PhotoBlank) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 147 */
void (*tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 148 */
void (*tk_PhotoGetSize) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 149 */
void (*tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 150 */
int (*tk_PointToChar) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 151 */
int (*tk_PostscriptFontName) (Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 152 */
void (*tk_PreserveColormap) (Display *display, Colormap colormap); /* 153 */
void (*tk_QueueWindowEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 154 */
void (*tk_RedrawImage) (Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY); /* 155 */
void (*tk_ResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height); /* 156 */
int (*tk_RestackWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 157 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 |
Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 188 */
Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 189 */
Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr); /* 190 */
void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 191 */
void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 192 */
void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */
void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */
| | | | | | | | 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 |
Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 188 */
Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 189 */
Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr); /* 190 */
void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 191 */
void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 192 */
void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */
void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */
void (*tk_FreeConfigOptions) (char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 195 */
void (*tk_FreeSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 196 */
void (*tk_FreeCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 197 */
void (*tk_FreeFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 198 */
Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 199 */
int (*tk_GetAnchorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 200 */
Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 201 */
XColor * (*tk_GetColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 202 */
Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 203 */
Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 204 */
Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */
int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 206 */
int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 207 */
int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr); /* 208 */
int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr); /* 209 */
int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 210 */
int (*tk_InitOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 211 */
void (*tk_MainEx) (int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 212 */
void (*tk_RestoreSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 213 */
int (*tk_SetOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr); /* 214 */
void (*tk_InitConsoleChannels) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 215 */
int (*tk_CreateConsoleWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 216 */
void (*tk_CreateSmoothMethod) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_SmoothMethod *method); /* 217 */
void (*reserved218)(void);
void (*reserved219)(void);
int (*tk_GetDash) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *value, Tk_Dash *dash); /* 220 */
void (*tk_CreateOutline) (Tk_Outline *outline); /* 221 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 |
void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */
void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */
Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, const char *screenName); /* 241 */
void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ClassProcs *procs, ClientData instanceData); /* 242 */
void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */
void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */
void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */
| | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > > > > > > > | | 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 |
void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */
void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */
Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, const char *screenName); /* 241 */
void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ClassProcs *procs, ClientData instanceData); /* 242 */
void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */
void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */
void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */
void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 246 */
void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 247 */
int (*tk_CollapseMotionEvents) (Display *display, int collapse); /* 248 */
Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_RegisterStyleEngine) (const char *name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); /* 249 */
Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_GetStyleEngine) (const char *name); /* 250 */
int (*tk_RegisterStyledElement) (Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr); /* 251 */
int (*tk_GetElementId) (const char *name); /* 252 */
Tk_Style (*tk_CreateStyle) (const char *name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData); /* 253 */
Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 254 */
void (*tk_FreeStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 255 */
const char * (*tk_NameOfStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 256 */
Tk_Style (*tk_AllocStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 257 */
Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 258 */
void (*tk_FreeStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 259 */
Tk_StyledElement (*tk_GetStyledElement) (Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 260 */
void (*tk_GetElementSize) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 261 */
void (*tk_GetElementBox) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 262 */
int (*tk_GetElementBorderWidth) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 263 */
void (*tk_DrawElement) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); /* 264 */
int (*tk_PhotoExpand) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 265 */
int (*tk_PhotoPutBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 266 */
int (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 267 */
int (*tk_PhotoSetSize) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 268 */
long (*tk_GetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 269 */
void (*tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 270 */
Tcl_Interp * (*tk_Interp) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 271 */
void (*tk_CreateOldImageType) (const Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 272 */
void (*tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) (const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); /* 273 */
void (*reserved274)(void);
void (*reserved275)(void);
void (*reserved276)(void);
void (*reserved277)(void);
void (*reserved278)(void);
void (*reserved279)(void);
void (*reserved280)(void);
void (*reserved281)(void);
void (*reserved282)(void);
void (*reserved283)(void);
void (*reserved284)(void);
void (*reserved285)(void);
void (*reserved286)(void);
void (*reserved287)(void);
void (*reserved288)(void);
void (*reserved289)(void);
void (*tkUnusedStubEntry) (void); /* 290 */
} TkStubs;
extern const TkStubs *tkStubsPtr;
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontFromObj) /* 94 */ #define Tk_GetFontMetrics \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontMetrics) /* 95 */ #define Tk_GetGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetGC) /* 96 */ #define Tk_GetImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetImage) /* 97 */ | | | | 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontFromObj) /* 94 */ #define Tk_GetFontMetrics \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontMetrics) /* 95 */ #define Tk_GetGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetGC) /* 96 */ #define Tk_GetImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetImage) /* 97 */ #define Tk_GetImageMasterData \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetImageMasterData) /* 98 */ #define Tk_GetItemTypes \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetItemTypes) /* 99 */ #define Tk_GetJoinStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetJoinStyle) /* 100 */ #define Tk_GetJustify \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetJustify) /* 101 */ #define Tk_GetNumMainWindows \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 | (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */ #define Tk_Interp \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */ #define Tk_CreateOldImageType \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldImageType) /* 272 */ #define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) /* 273 */ | | | | | | | | | | | > > > > > > | | < < < < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < > > | 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 |
(tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */
#define Tk_Interp \
(tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */
#define Tk_CreateOldImageType \
(tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldImageType) /* 272 */
#define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat \
(tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) /* 273 */
/* Slot 274 is reserved */
/* Slot 275 is reserved */
/* Slot 276 is reserved */
/* Slot 277 is reserved */
/* Slot 278 is reserved */
/* Slot 279 is reserved */
/* Slot 280 is reserved */
/* Slot 281 is reserved */
/* Slot 282 is reserved */
/* Slot 283 is reserved */
/* Slot 284 is reserved */
/* Slot 285 is reserved */
/* Slot 286 is reserved */
/* Slot 287 is reserved */
/* Slot 288 is reserved */
/* Slot 289 is reserved */
#define TkUnusedStubEntry \
(tkStubsPtr->tkUnusedStubEntry) /* 290 */
#endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */
/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
/* Functions that don't belong in the stub table */
#undef Tk_MainEx
#undef Tk_Init
#undef Tk_SafeInit
#undef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow
#define Tk_GetImageModelData Tk_GetImageMasterData
#if defined(_WIN32) && defined(UNICODE)
# define Tk_MainEx Tk_MainExW
EXTERN void Tk_MainExW(int argc, wchar_t **argv,
Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp);
#endif
#undef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj
#define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr) ((void)(objPtr))
#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
#undef TkUnusedStubEntry
#endif /* _TKDECLS */
|
Changes to generic/tkEntry.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkEntry.h" #include "default.h" /* * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each side of * the text in the entry. */ #define XPAD 1 #define YPAD 1 | > > > > | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkEntry.h" #include "default.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each side of * the text in the entry. */ #define XPAD 1 #define YPAD 1 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 |
/*
* Information used for Entry objv parsing.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 |
/*
* Information used for Entry objv parsing.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, normalBorder),
0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, showChar),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
0, stateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
0, validateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand","ValidateCommand",
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-validatecommand", 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, prefWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, scrollCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* Information used for Spinbox objv parsing.
*/
#define DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY "400"
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
182 183 184 185 186 187 188 |
#define DEF_SPINBOX_FORMAT ""
#define DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES ""
#define DEF_SPINBOX_WRAP "0"
static const Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Background",
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 |
#define DEF_SPINBOX_FORMAT ""
#define DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES ""
#define DEF_SPINBOX_WRAP "0"
static const Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, activeBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, normalBorder),
0, DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-buttonbackground", "buttonBackground", "Background",
DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buttonBorder),
0, DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-buttoncursor", "buttonCursor", "Cursor",
DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bCursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttondownrelief", "buttonDownRelief", "Relief",
DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bdRelief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttonuprelief", "buttonUpRelief", "Relief",
DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buRelief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
DEF_SPINBOX_CMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, command),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-format", "format", "Format",
DEF_SPINBOX_FORMAT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, reqFormat),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From",
DEF_SPINBOX_FROM, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, fromValue), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-increment", "increment", "Increment",
DEF_SPINBOX_INCREMENT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, increment), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay",
DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatDelay),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval",
DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatInterval),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
0, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
0, stateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To",
DEF_SPINBOX_TO, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, toValue), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
0, validateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand","ValidateCommand",
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, valueStr),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-validatecommand", 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, prefWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
DEF_SPINBOX_WRAP, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, wrap), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, scrollCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* The following tables define the entry widget commands (and sub-commands)
* and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
* dispatch the entry widget command.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static int ConfigureEntry(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static int ConfigureEntry(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static int DeleteChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, int count); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyEntry; static void DisplayEntry(void *clientData); static void EntryBlinkProc(void *clientData); static void EntryCmdDeletedProc(void *clientData); static void EntryComputeGeometry(Entry *entryPtr); static void EntryEventProc(void *clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static void EntryFocusProc(Entry *entryPtr, int gotFocus); static int EntryFetchSelection(void *clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes); static void EntryLostSelection(void *clientData); static void EventuallyRedraw(Entry *entryPtr); static void EntryScanTo(Entry *entryPtr, int y); static void EntrySetValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value); static void EntrySelectTo(Entry *entryPtr, int index); static char * EntryTextVarProc(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1, const char *name2, int flags); static void EntryUpdateScrollbar(Entry *entryPtr); static int EntryValidate(Entry *entryPtr, char *cmd); static int EntryValidateChange(Entry *entryPtr, const char *change, const char *newStr, int index, int type); static void ExpandPercents(Entry *entryPtr, const char *before, const char *change, const char *newStr, int index, int type, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); static int EntryValueChanged(Entry *entryPtr, const char *newValue); static void EntryVisibleRange(Entry *entryPtr, double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr); static int EntryWidgetObjCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void EntryWorldChanged(void *instanceData); static int GetEntryIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexObj, int *indexPtr); static int InsertChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, const char *string); /* * These forward declarations are the spinbox specific ones: */ static int SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static int GetSpinboxElement(Spinbox *sbPtr, int x, int y); static int SpinboxInvoke(Tcl_Interp *interp, Spinbox *sbPtr, int element); static int ComputeFormat(Spinbox *sbPtr); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
480 481 482 483 484 485 486 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_EntryObjCmd( | | < | 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_EntryObjCmd(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Entry *entryPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window tkwin;
char *tmp;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
530 531 532 533 534 535 536 |
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), EntryWidgetObjCmd, entryPtr,
EntryCmdDeletedProc);
entryPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
entryPtr->type = TK_ENTRY;
tmp = (char *)ckalloc(1);
tmp[0] = '\0';
entryPtr->string = tmp;
| | | < < | | | 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 |
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), EntryWidgetObjCmd, entryPtr,
EntryCmdDeletedProc);
entryPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
entryPtr->type = TK_ENTRY;
tmp = (char *)ckalloc(1);
tmp[0] = '\0';
entryPtr->string = tmp;
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
entryPtr->cursor = NULL;
entryPtr->exportSelection = 1;
entryPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
entryPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
entryPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL;
entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string;
entryPtr->inset = XPAD;
entryPtr->textGC = NULL;
entryPtr->selTextGC = NULL;
entryPtr->highlightGC = NULL;
entryPtr->avgWidth = 1;
entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
/*
* Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the entry,
* otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr->tkwin);
Tk_SetClass(entryPtr->tkwin, "Entry");
Tk_SetClassProcs(entryPtr->tkwin, &entryClass, entryPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(entryPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
EntryEventProc, entryPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
EntryFetchSelection, entryPtr, XA_STRING);
if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) entryPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
!= TCL_OK) ||
(ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK)) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(entryPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* EntryWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
594 595 596 597 598 599 600 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int EntryWidgetObjCmd( | | | 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
EntryWidgetObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Information about entry widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
int cmdIndex, selIndex, result;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
622 623 624 625 626 627 628 |
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr);
switch ((enum entryCmd) cmdIndex) {
case COMMAND_BBOX: {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 |
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr);
switch ((enum entryCmd) cmdIndex) {
case COMMAND_BBOX: {
int index;
int x, y, width, height;
Tcl_Obj *bbox[4];
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
index--;
}
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, &width, &height);
bbox[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x + entryPtr->layoutX);
bbox[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y + entryPtr->layoutY);
bbox[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(width);
bbox[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, bbox));
break;
}
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
goto error;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
break;
case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
entryPtr->optionTable,
(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
entryPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else {
result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
}
break;
case COMMAND_DELETE: {
int first, last;
int code;
if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&first) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (objc == 3) {
last = first + 1;
} else if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3],
&last) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
code = DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
break;
}
case COMMAND_GET:
if (objc != 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(entryPtr->string, -1));
break;
case COMMAND_ICURSOR:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
break;
case COMMAND_INDEX: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
break;
}
case COMMAND_INSERT: {
int index;
int code;
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
790 791 792 793 794 795 796 |
minorCmd, NULL);
goto error;
}
break;
}
case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
| | | 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 |
minorCmd, NULL);
goto error;
}
break;
}
case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
int index, index2;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
goto error;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
828 829 830 831 832 833 834 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
| | | | | | | | | 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
int half1, half2;
half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
if (index < half1) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
} else if (index > half2) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
} else {
/*
* We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
* keep the existing anchor.
*/
}
}
EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
break;
case SELECTION_CLEAR:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
}
goto done;
case SELECTION_FROM:
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
877 878 879 880 881 882 883 |
case SELECTION_PRESENT:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
| | | | | | 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 |
case SELECTION_PRESENT:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0));
goto done;
case SELECTION_RANGE:
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3],
&index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[4],
&index2) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index >= index2) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
} else {
entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
}
if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
&& (entryPtr->exportSelection)
&& (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
944 945 946 947 948 949 950 |
entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
break;
}
case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
| | | 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 |
entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
break;
}
case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
int index;
if (objc == 2) {
double first, last;
Tcl_Obj *span[2];
EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
span[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(first);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
967 968 969 970 971 972 973 |
} else {
double fraction;
int count;
index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
&count)) {
| < < > > | | | 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 |
} else {
double fraction;
int count;
index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
&count)) {
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
break;
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
int charsPerPage;
charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
- 2 * entryPtr->inset) / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
if (charsPerPage < 1) {
charsPerPage = 1;
}
index += count * charsPerPage;
break;
}
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
index += count;
break;
default:
goto error;
}
}
if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
}
if (index < 0) {
index = 0;
}
entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 | * Everything associated with the entry is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyEntry( | | | 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 |
* Everything associated with the entry is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyEntry(
char *memPtr) /* Info about entry widget. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)memPtr;
/*
* Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
* Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 |
char *oldFormat = NULL;
int error;
int oldExport = 0;
int valuesChanged = 0;
double oldFrom = 0.0;
double oldTo = 0.0;
int code;
/*
* Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the entry.
*/
if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
&& (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_VAR_TRACED)) {
| > | 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 |
char *oldFormat = NULL;
int error;
int oldExport = 0;
int valuesChanged = 0;
double oldFrom = 0.0;
double oldTo = 0.0;
int code;
size_t formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE;
/*
* Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the entry.
*/
if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
&& (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_VAR_TRACED)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
| | | 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
entryPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
entryPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
} else {
/*
* Second pass: restore options to old values.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 |
}
if (entryPtr->insertBorderWidth > entryPtr->insertWidth/2) {
entryPtr->insertBorderWidth = entryPtr->insertWidth/2;
}
if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) {
if (sbPtr->fromValue > sbPtr->toValue) {
| < > | < | < | < > | | | | 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 |
}
if (entryPtr->insertBorderWidth > entryPtr->insertWidth/2) {
entryPtr->insertBorderWidth = entryPtr->insertWidth/2;
}
if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) {
if (sbPtr->fromValue > sbPtr->toValue) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"-to value must be greater than -from value",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SPINBOX", "RANGE_SANITY",
NULL);
continue;
}
if (sbPtr->reqFormat && (oldFormat != sbPtr->reqFormat)) {
/*
* Make sure that the given format is somewhat correct, and
* calculate the minimum space we'll need for the values as
* strings.
*/
int min, max;
size_t formatLen;
char fbuf[4], *fmt = sbPtr->reqFormat;
formatLen = strlen(fmt);
if ((fmt[0] != '%') || (fmt[formatLen-1] != 'f')) {
badFormatOpt:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad spinbox format specifier \"%s\"",
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj);
}
sbPtr->listObj = NULL;
if (sbPtr->valueStr != NULL) {
Tcl_Obj *newObjPtr;
int nelems;
| | | 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj);
}
sbPtr->listObj = NULL;
if (sbPtr->valueStr != NULL) {
Tcl_Obj *newObjPtr;
int nelems;
newObjPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(sbPtr->valueStr, -1);
if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, newObjPtr, &nelems)
!= TCL_OK) {
valuesChanged = -1;
continue;
}
sbPtr->listObj = newObjPtr;
Tcl_IncrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 | /* * Claim the selection if we've suddenly started exporting it. */ if (entryPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp)) | | | 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 |
/*
* Claim the selection if we've suddenly started exporting it.
*/
if (entryPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport)
&& (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp))
&& (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1)
&& !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
entryPtr);
entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 |
/* Scan failure */
dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
} else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
} else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
}
| | | 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 |
/* Scan failure */
dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
} else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
} else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
}
snprintf(sbPtr->formatBuf, formatSpace, sbPtr->valueFormat, dvalue);
/*
* No check for error return here as well, because any possible
* error will be trapped below when attempting tracing.
*/
EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, sbPtr->formatBuf);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 | * Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EntryWorldChanged( | | | 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 |
* Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed.
*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntryWorldChanged(
void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc = NULL;
unsigned long mask;
Tk_3DBorder border;
XColor *colorPtr;
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)instanceData;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 |
mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
if (entryPtr->textGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->textGC);
}
entryPtr->textGC = gc;
| < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 |
mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
if (entryPtr->textGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->textGC);
}
entryPtr->textGC = gc;
if (entryPtr->selFgColorPtr != NULL) {
gcValues.foreground = entryPtr->selFgColorPtr->pixel;
}
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(entryPtr->tkfont);
mask = GCForeground | GCFont;
gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
if (entryPtr->selTextGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->selTextGC);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus( | | | | < < < < | 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(
TCL_UNUSED(Entry *),
TCL_UNUSED(Drawable),
TCL_UNUSED(int))
{
return 0;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkpDrawSpinboxButtons --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkpDrawSpinboxButtons( | | | < < < | 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(
TCL_UNUSED(Spinbox *),
TCL_UNUSED(Pixmap))
{
return 0;
}
#endif /* Not MAC_OSX_TK */
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 | * Information appears on the screen. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DisplayEntry( | | | 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 |
* Information appears on the screen.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayEntry(
void *clientData) /* Information about window. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->tkwin;
int baseY, selStartX, selEndX, cursorX;
int showSelection, xBound;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
Pixmap pixmap;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 |
xBound = Tk_Width(tkwin) - entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth;
baseY = (Tk_Height(tkwin) + fm.ascent - fm.descent) / 2;
/*
* Hide the selection whenever we don't have the focus, unless we
* always want to show selection.
*/
| | | 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 |
xBound = Tk_Width(tkwin) - entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth;
baseY = (Tk_Height(tkwin) + fm.ascent - fm.descent) / 2;
/*
* Hide the selection whenever we don't have the focus, unless we
* always want to show selection.
*/
if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(entryPtr->tkwin)) {
showSelection = 1;
} else {
showSelection = (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS);
}
/*
* Draw the background in three layers. From bottom to top the layers are:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 |
} else {
border = entryPtr->normalBorder;
}
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
if (showSelection && (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED)
| | | 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 |
} else {
border = entryPtr->normalBorder;
}
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
if (showSelection && (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED)
&& (entryPtr->selectLast > entryPtr->leftIndex)) {
if (entryPtr->selectFirst <= entryPtr->leftIndex) {
selStartX = entryPtr->leftX;
} else {
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->selectFirst,
&selStartX, NULL, NULL, NULL);
selStartX += entryPtr->layoutX;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 |
if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) && (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->insertPos, &cursorX, NULL,
NULL, NULL);
cursorX += entryPtr->layoutX;
cursorX -= (entryPtr->insertWidth == 1) ? 1 : (entryPtr->insertWidth)/2;
Tk_SetCaretPos(entryPtr->tkwin, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent,
fm.ascent + fm.descent);
| | < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < | 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 |
if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) && (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->insertPos, &cursorX, NULL,
NULL, NULL);
cursorX += entryPtr->layoutX;
cursorX -= (entryPtr->insertWidth == 1) ? 1 : (entryPtr->insertWidth)/2;
Tk_SetCaretPos(entryPtr->tkwin, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent,
fm.ascent + fm.descent);
if (entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex && cursorX < xBound) {
if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder,
cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
fm.ascent + fm.descent, entryPtr->insertBorderWidth,
TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
} else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) {
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, cursorX,
baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
}
}
}
if (showSelection && (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED)
&& (entryPtr->selTextGC != entryPtr->textGC)
&& (entryPtr->selectFirst < entryPtr->selectLast)) {
/*
* Draw the selected and unselected portions separately.
*/
int selFirst;
if (entryPtr->selectFirst < entryPtr->leftIndex) {
selFirst = entryPtr->leftIndex;
} else {
selFirst = entryPtr->selectFirst;
}
if (entryPtr->leftIndex < selFirst) {
Tk_DrawTextLayout(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->layoutX, entryPtr->layoutY,
entryPtr->leftIndex, selFirst);
}
Tk_DrawTextLayout(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->selTextGC,
entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->layoutX, entryPtr->layoutY,
selFirst, entryPtr->selectLast);
if (entryPtr->selectLast < entryPtr->numChars) {
Tk_DrawTextLayout(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->layoutX, entryPtr->layoutY,
entryPtr->selectLast, entryPtr->numChars);
}
} else {
/*
* Draw the entire visible text
*/
Tk_DrawTextLayout(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->layoutX, entryPtr->layoutY,
entryPtr->leftIndex, entryPtr->numChars);
}
if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) {
int startx, height, inset, pad, tHeight, xWidth;
Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 |
*/
static void
EntryComputeGeometry(
Entry *entryPtr) /* Widget record for entry. */
{
int totalLength, overflow, rightX;
| | | 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 |
*/
static void
EntryComputeGeometry(
Entry *entryPtr) /* Widget record for entry. */
{
int totalLength, overflow, rightX;
int maxOffScreen;
int height, width, i;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
char *p;
if (entryPtr->displayString != entryPtr->string) {
ckfree((char *)entryPtr->displayString);
entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 | TkUtfToUniChar(entryPtr->showChar, &ch); size = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, buf); entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numChars * size; p = (char *)ckalloc(entryPtr->numDisplayBytes + 1); entryPtr->displayString = p; | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 |
TkUtfToUniChar(entryPtr->showChar, &ch);
size = TkUniCharToUtf(ch, buf);
entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numChars * size;
p = (char *)ckalloc(entryPtr->numDisplayBytes + 1);
entryPtr->displayString = p;
for (i = entryPtr->numChars; --i >= 0; ) {
memcpy(p, buf, size);
p += size;
}
*p = '\0';
}
Tk_FreeTextLayout(entryPtr->textLayout);
entryPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(entryPtr->tkfont,
entryPtr->displayString, entryPtr->numChars, 0,
entryPtr->justify, TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES, &totalLength, &height);
entryPtr->layoutY = (Tk_Height(entryPtr->tkwin) - height) / 2;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 |
maxOffScreen = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout, overflow, 0);
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, maxOffScreen,
&rightX, NULL, NULL, NULL);
if (rightX < overflow) {
maxOffScreen++;
}
| | | 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 |
maxOffScreen = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout, overflow, 0);
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, maxOffScreen,
&rightX, NULL, NULL, NULL);
if (rightX < overflow) {
maxOffScreen++;
}
if (entryPtr->leftIndex > maxOffScreen) {
entryPtr->leftIndex = maxOffScreen;
}
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, entryPtr->leftIndex, &rightX,
NULL, NULL, NULL);
entryPtr->leftX = entryPtr->inset;
entryPtr->layoutX = entryPtr->leftX - rightX;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
InsertChars(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
| | > | > | | 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
InsertChars(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
int index, /* Add the new elements before this character
* index. */
const char *value) /* New characters to add (NULL-terminated
* string). */
{
ptrdiff_t byteIndex;
size_t byteCount, newByteCount;
int oldChars, charsAdded;
const char *string;
char *newStr;
string = entryPtr->string;
byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
byteCount = strlen(value);
if (byteCount == 0) {
return TCL_OK;
}
newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1;
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(newByteCount);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 |
return TCL_OK;
}
ckfree((char *)string);
entryPtr->string = newStr;
/*
* The following construction is used because inserting improperly formed
* UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8 sequences could
* result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences; the number of
* characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1), because of
* context. The actual number of characters added is how many characters
* are in the string now minus the number that used to be there.
*/
oldChars = entryPtr->numChars;
| > > | | | | | | | 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 |
return TCL_OK;
}
ckfree((char *)string);
entryPtr->string = newStr;
/*
* ??? Is this construction still needed with Tcl_NumUtfChars ???
*
* The following construction is used because inserting improperly formed
* UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8 sequences could
* result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences; the number of
* characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1), because of
* context. The actual number of characters added is how many characters
* are in the string now minus the number that used to be there.
*/
oldChars = entryPtr->numChars;
entryPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(newStr, -1);
charsAdded = entryPtr->numChars - oldChars;
entryPtr->numBytes += byteCount;
if (entryPtr->displayString == string) {
entryPtr->displayString = newStr;
entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes;
}
/*
* Inserting characters invalidates all indexes into the string. Touch up
* the indexes so that they still refer to the same characters (at new
* positions). When updating the selection end-points, don't include the
* new text in the selection unless it was completely surrounded by the
* selection.
*/
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
entryPtr->selectFirst += charsAdded;
}
if (entryPtr->selectLast > index) {
entryPtr->selectLast += charsAdded;
}
if ((entryPtr->selectAnchor > index) || (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index)) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor += charsAdded;
}
if (entryPtr->leftIndex > index) {
entryPtr->leftIndex += charsAdded;
}
if (entryPtr->insertPos >= index) {
entryPtr->insertPos += charsAdded;
}
return EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, NULL);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
DeleteChars(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry widget to modify. */
| | | | | | | | 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
DeleteChars(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry widget to modify. */
int index, /* Index of first character to delete. */
int count) /* How many characters to delete. */
{
int byteIndex, byteCount, newByteCount;
const char *string;
char *newStr, *toDelete;
if (index + count > entryPtr->numChars) {
count = entryPtr->numChars - index;
}
if (count <= 0) {
return TCL_OK;
}
string = entryPtr->string;
byteIndex = TkUtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
byteCount = TkUtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex);
newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount;
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(newByteCount);
memcpy(newStr, string, (size_t) byteIndex);
strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount);
toDelete = (char *)ckalloc(byteCount + 1);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 |
/*
* Deleting characters results in the remaining characters being
* renumbered. Update the various indexes into the string to reflect this
* change.
*/
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 |
/*
* Deleting characters results in the remaining characters being
* renumbered. Update the various indexes into the string to reflect this
* change.
*/
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index + count) {
entryPtr->selectFirst -= count;
} else {
entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
}
}
if (entryPtr->selectLast >= index) {
if (entryPtr->selectLast >= index + count) {
entryPtr->selectLast -= count;
} else {
entryPtr->selectLast = index;
}
}
if (entryPtr->selectLast <= entryPtr->selectFirst) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
}
if (entryPtr->selectAnchor >= index) {
if (entryPtr->selectAnchor >= index + count) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor -= count;
} else {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
}
}
if (entryPtr->leftIndex > index) {
if (entryPtr->leftIndex >= index + count) {
entryPtr->leftIndex -= count;
} else {
entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
}
}
if (entryPtr->insertPos >= index) {
if (entryPtr->insertPos >= index + count) {
entryPtr->insertPos -= count;
} else {
entryPtr->insertPos = index;
}
}
return EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, NULL);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 |
entryPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, valueLen);
if (entryPtr->displayString == oldSource) {
entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string;
entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes;
}
| | | | | | | | | | 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 |
entryPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, valueLen);
if (entryPtr->displayString == oldSource) {
entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string;
entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes;
}
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= entryPtr->numChars) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
} else if (entryPtr->selectLast > entryPtr->numChars) {
entryPtr->selectLast = entryPtr->numChars;
}
}
if (entryPtr->leftIndex >= entryPtr->numChars) {
if (entryPtr->numChars > 0) {
entryPtr->leftIndex = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
} else {
entryPtr->leftIndex = 0;
}
}
if (entryPtr->insertPos > entryPtr->numChars) {
entryPtr->insertPos = entryPtr->numChars;
}
entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 | * When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EntryEventProc( | | | 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 |
* When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntryEventProc(
void *clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
if ((entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) && (eventPtr->type == MotionNotify)) {
Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *)clientData;
int elem;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 |
case DestroyNotify:
if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp, entryPtr->widgetCmd);
if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
}
| | | 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 |
case DestroyNotify:
if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp, entryPtr->widgetCmd);
if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
}
Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyEntry);
}
break;
case ConfigureNotify:
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr);
entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 | * The widget is destroyed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EntryCmdDeletedProc( | | | 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 |
* The widget is destroyed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntryCmdDeletedProc(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
/*
* This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
* and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
* because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 |
static int
GetEntryIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *indexObj, /* Specifies character in entryPtr. */
| | < | | < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > | | 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 |
static int
GetEntryIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *indexObj, /* Specifies character in entryPtr. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted character index */
{
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(indexObj);
size_t length = indexObj->length;
switch (string[0]) {
case 'a':
if (strncmp(string, "anchor", length) != 0) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = entryPtr->selectAnchor;
break;
case 'e':
if (strncmp(string, "end", length) != 0) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = entryPtr->numChars;
break;
case 'i':
if (strncmp(string, "insert", length) != 0) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = entryPtr->insertPos;
break;
case 's':
if (entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"selection isn't in widget %s",
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK",
(entryPtr->type == TK_ENTRY) ? "ENTRY" : "SPINBOX",
"NO_SELECTION", NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 | /* * Special trick: if the x-position was off-screen to the right, round * the index up to refer to the character just after the last visible * one on the screen. This is needed to enable the last character to * be selected, for example. */ | | > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | < < | 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 |
/*
* Special trick: if the x-position was off-screen to the right, round
* the index up to refer to the character just after the last visible
* one on the screen. This is needed to enable the last character to
* be selected, for example.
*/
if (roundUp && (*indexPtr < entryPtr->numChars)) {
*indexPtr += 1;
}
break;
}
default:
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, indexObj, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
goto badIndex;
}
if (*indexPtr < 0){
*indexPtr = 0;
} else if (*indexPtr > entryPtr->numChars) {
*indexPtr = entryPtr->numChars;
}
}
return TCL_OK;
badIndex:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad %s index \"%s\"",
(entryPtr->type == TK_ENTRY) ? "entry" : "spinbox", string));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK",
(entryPtr->type == TK_ENTRY) ? "ENTRY" : "SPINBOX",
"BAD_INDEX", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* EntryScanTo --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 |
*/
static void
EntryScanTo(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int x) /* X-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
{
| | | | | 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 |
*/
static void
EntryScanTo(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int x) /* X-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
{
int newLeftIndex;
/*
* Compute new leftIndex for entry by amplifying the difference between
* the current position and the place where the scan started (the "mark"
* position). If we run off the left or right side of the entry, then
* reset the mark point so that the current position continues to
* correspond to the edge of the window. This means that the picture will
* start dragging as soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this
* reset, might have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture
* starts moving again).
*/
newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex
- (10 * (x - entryPtr->scanMarkX)) / entryPtr->avgWidth;
if (newLeftIndex >= entryPtr->numChars) {
newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
}
if (newLeftIndex < 0) {
newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0;
entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
}
if (newLeftIndex != entryPtr->leftIndex) {
entryPtr->leftIndex = newLeftIndex;
entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntrySelectTo(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Information about widget. */
| | | | | | | | 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntrySelectTo(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int index) /* Character index of element that is to
* become the "other" end of the selection. */
{
int newFirst, newLast;
/*
* Grab the selection if we don't own it already.
*/
if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION) && (entryPtr->exportSelection)
&& (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp))) {
Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
entryPtr);
entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
}
/*
* Pick new starting and ending points for the selection.
*/
if (entryPtr->selectAnchor > entryPtr->numChars) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->numChars;
}
if (entryPtr->selectAnchor <= index) {
newFirst = entryPtr->selectAnchor;
newLast = index;
} else {
newFirst = index;
newLast = entryPtr->selectAnchor;
if (newLast < 0) {
newFirst = newLast = -1;
}
}
if ((entryPtr->selectFirst == newFirst)
&& (entryPtr->selectLast == newLast)) {
return;
}
entryPtr->selectFirst = newFirst;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | | | | < < < > > > | 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
EntryFetchSelection(
void *clientData, /* Information about entry widget. */
int offset, /* Byte offset within selection of first
* character to be returned. */
char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
* not including terminating NUL character. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
int byteCount;
const char *string;
const char *selStart, *selEnd;
if ((entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) || (!entryPtr->exportSelection)
|| Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp)) {
return -1;
}
string = entryPtr->displayString;
selStart = TkUtfAtIndex(string, entryPtr->selectFirst);
selEnd = TkUtfAtIndex(selStart,
entryPtr->selectLast - entryPtr->selectFirst);
byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset;
if (byteCount > maxBytes) {
byteCount = maxBytes;
}
if (byteCount <= 0) {
return 0;
}
memcpy(buffer, selStart + offset, byteCount);
buffer[byteCount] = '\0';
return byteCount;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 | * not containing a selection. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EntryLostSelection( | | | | | | | 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 |
* not containing a selection.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntryLostSelection(
void *clientData) /* Information about entry widget. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
entryPtr->flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
/*
* On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for the
* next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, we need to clear the
* selection since it is always visible.
* This is controlled by ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection.
*/
if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(entryPtr->tkwin)
&& (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) && entryPtr->exportSelection
&& (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp))) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 |
if (entryPtr->numChars == 0) {
*firstPtr = 0.0;
*lastPtr = 1.0;
} else {
charsInWindow = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout,
Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - entryPtr->inset
- entryPtr->xWidth - entryPtr->layoutX - 1, 0);
| | | 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 |
if (entryPtr->numChars == 0) {
*firstPtr = 0.0;
*lastPtr = 1.0;
} else {
charsInWindow = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout,
Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - entryPtr->inset
- entryPtr->xWidth - entryPtr->layoutX - 1, 0);
if (charsInWindow < entryPtr->numChars) {
charsInWindow++;
}
charsInWindow -= entryPtr->leftIndex;
if (charsInWindow == 0) {
charsInWindow = 1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 |
interp = entryPtr->interp;
Tcl_Preserve(interp);
EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, firstStr);
Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, lastStr);
Tcl_DStringInit(&buf);
| | | | | | | | 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 |
interp = entryPtr->interp;
Tcl_Preserve(interp);
EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, firstStr);
Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, lastStr);
Tcl_DStringInit(&buf);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, entryPtr->scrollCmd, -1);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, " ", -1);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, firstStr, -1);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, " ", -1);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, lastStr, -1);
code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&buf), -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"\n (horizontal scrolling command executed by %s)",
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_BackgroundException(interp, code);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 | * function reschedules itself. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void EntryBlinkProc( | | | 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 |
* function reschedules itself.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
EntryBlinkProc(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to record describing entry. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) ||
(entryPtr->state == STATE_READONLY) ||
!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) || (entryPtr->insertOffTime == 0)) {
return;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 | * The text displayed in the entry will change to match the variable. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static char * EntryTextVarProc( | | | | < < | | | 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 |
* The text displayed in the entry will change to match the variable.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static char *
EntryTextVarProc(
void *clientData, /* Information about button. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
TCL_UNUSED(const char *),
TCL_UNUSED(const char *),
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
const char *value;
if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
/*
* Just abort early if we entered here while being deleted.
*/
return NULL;
}
/*
* If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
* interpreter is going away.
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
if (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp) && entryPtr->textVarName) {
void *probe = NULL;
do {
probe = Tcl_VarTraceInfo(interp,
entryPtr->textVarName,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
EntryTextVarProc, probe);
if (probe == (void *)entryPtr) {
break;
}
} while (probe);
if (probe) {
/*
* We were able to fetch the unset trace for our
* textVarName, which means it is not unset and not
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 |
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
char *cmd) /* Validation command (NULL-terminated
* string). */
{
Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->interp;
int code, isOK;
| | | 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 |
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
char *cmd) /* Validation command (NULL-terminated
* string). */
{
Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->interp;
int code, isOK;
code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, cmd, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT);
/*
* We accept TCL_OK and TCL_RETURN as valid return codes from the command
* callback.
*/
if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_RETURN) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 |
static int
EntryValidateChange(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
const char *change, /* Characters to be added/deleted
* (NUL-terminated string). */
const char *newValue, /* Potential new value of entry string */
| | | 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 |
static int
EntryValidateChange(
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
const char *change, /* Characters to be added/deleted
* (NUL-terminated string). */
const char *newValue, /* Potential new value of entry string */
int index, /* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
int type) /* forced, delete, insert, focusin or
* focusout */
{
int code, varValidate = (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_VAR);
char *p;
Tcl_DString script;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 |
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
const char *before,
/* Command containing percent expressions to
* be replaced. */
const char *change, /* Characters to added/deleted (NUL-terminated
* string). */
const char *newValue, /* Potential new value of entry string */
| | | 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 |
Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that needs validation. */
const char *before,
/* Command containing percent expressions to
* be replaced. */
const char *change, /* Characters to added/deleted (NUL-terminated
* string). */
const char *newValue, /* Potential new value of entry string */
int index, /* index of insert/delete */
int type, /* INSERT or DELETE */
Tcl_DString *dsPtr) /* Dynamic string in which to append new
* command. */
{
int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags; /* Used to substitute string as proper Tcl
* list element. */
int number, length;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 | case VALIDATE_DELETE: number = 0; break; default: number = -1; break; } | | | | 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 | case VALIDATE_DELETE: number = 0; break; default: number = -1; break; } snprintf(numStorage, sizeof(numStorage), "%d", number); string = numStorage; break; case 'i': /* index of insert/delete */ snprintf(numStorage, sizeof(numStorage), "%d", index); string = numStorage; break; case 'P': /* 'Peeked' new value of the string */ string = newValue; break; case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */ string = entryPtr->string; |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_SpinboxObjCmd( | | < | 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Entry *entryPtr;
Spinbox *sbPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window tkwin;
char *tmp;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 |
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), SpinboxWidgetObjCmd, sbPtr,
EntryCmdDeletedProc);
entryPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
entryPtr->type = TK_SPINBOX;
tmp = (char *)ckalloc(1);
tmp[0] = '\0';
entryPtr->string = tmp;
| | | | 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 |
Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), SpinboxWidgetObjCmd, sbPtr,
EntryCmdDeletedProc);
entryPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
entryPtr->type = TK_SPINBOX;
tmp = (char *)ckalloc(1);
tmp[0] = '\0';
entryPtr->string = tmp;
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
entryPtr->cursor = NULL;
entryPtr->exportSelection = 1;
entryPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
entryPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
entryPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL;
entryPtr->displayString = entryPtr->string;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 |
sbPtr->fromValue = 0.0;
sbPtr->toValue = 100.0;
sbPtr->increment = 1.0;
sbPtr->formatBuf = (char *)ckalloc(TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE);
sbPtr->bdRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
sbPtr->buRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
| < < | | | 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 |
sbPtr->fromValue = 0.0;
sbPtr->toValue = 100.0;
sbPtr->increment = 1.0;
sbPtr->formatBuf = (char *)ckalloc(TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE);
sbPtr->bdRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
sbPtr->buRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
/*
* Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the spinbox,
* otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr->tkwin);
Tk_SetClass(entryPtr->tkwin, "Spinbox");
Tk_SetClassProcs(entryPtr->tkwin, &entryClass, entryPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(entryPtr->tkwin,
PointerMotionMask|ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
EntryEventProc, entryPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
EntryFetchSelection, entryPtr, XA_STRING);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) sbPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
!= TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(entryPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
error:
Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int SpinboxWidgetObjCmd( | | | 3737 3738 3739 3740 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Information about spinbox widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *)clientData;
Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *)clientData;
int cmdIndex, selIndex, result;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 |
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr);
switch ((enum sbCmd) cmdIndex) {
case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
| | | | | | | | | | | | 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 |
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr);
switch ((enum sbCmd) cmdIndex) {
case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
int index;
int x, y, width, height;
Tcl_Obj *bbox[4];
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
index--;
}
Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, &width, &height);
bbox[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x + entryPtr->layoutX);
bbox[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y + entryPtr->layoutY);
bbox[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(width);
bbox[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(height);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, bbox));
break;
}
case SB_CMD_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
goto error;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
break;
case SB_CMD_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
entryPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
entryPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else {
result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
}
break;
case SB_CMD_DELETE: {
int first, last;
int code;
if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&first) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (objc == 3) {
last = first + 1;
} else {
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3],
&last) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
code = DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewStringObj(selElementNames[elem], -1));
}
break;
}
case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
| | | | | 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewStringObj(selElementNames[elem], -1));
}
break;
}
case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
&index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
break;
}
case SB_CMD_INSERT: {
int index;
int code;
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 |
minorCmd, NULL);
goto error;
}
break;
}
case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
| | | 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 |
minorCmd, NULL);
goto error;
}
break;
}
case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
int index, index2;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
goto error;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
| | | | | | | | | 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
int half1, half2;
half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
if (index < half1) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
} else if (index > half2) {
entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
} else {
/*
* We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
* keep the existing anchor.
*/
}
}
EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
break;
case SB_SEL_CLEAR:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
}
goto done;
case SB_SEL_FROM:
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 |
case SB_SEL_PRESENT:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(
| | | | | | 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 |
case SB_SEL_PRESENT:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(
entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0));
goto done;
case SB_SEL_RANGE:
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
objv[4],& index2) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index >= index2) {
entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
} else {
entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
}
if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
&& entryPtr->exportSelection
&& (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 |
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
break;
}
case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
| | | 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 |
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
break;
}
case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
int index;
if (objc == 2) {
double first, last;
Tcl_Obj *span[2];
EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
span[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(first);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 |
} else {
double fraction;
int count;
index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
&count)) {
| < < | > > | | | 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 |
} else {
double fraction;
int count;
index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
&count)) {
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
break;
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
int charsPerPage;
charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
- 2 * entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth)
/ entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
if (charsPerPage < 1) {
charsPerPage = 1;
}
index += count * charsPerPage;
break;
}
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
index += count;
break;
default:
goto error;
}
}
if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
}
if (index < 0) {
index = 0;
}
entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 | /* * Somehow the string changed from what we expected, so let's * do a search on the list to see if the current value is * there. If not, move to the first element of the list. */ int i, listc; | | | | 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 |
/*
* Somehow the string changed from what we expected, so let's
* do a search on the list to see if the current value is
* there. If not, move to the first element of the list.
*/
int i, listc;
int elemLen, length = entryPtr->numChars;
const char *bytes;
Tcl_Obj **listv;
Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, sbPtr->listObj, &listc, &listv);
for (i = 0; i < listc; i++) {
bytes = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(listv[i], &elemLen);
if ((length == elemLen) &&
(memcmp(bytes, entryPtr->string,
length) == 0)) {
sbPtr->eIndex = i;
break;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 | * greater than the toValue, because the user may have * manipulated the value by hand. */ dvalue = sbPtr->toValue; } } | | | 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 |
* greater than the toValue, because the user may have
* manipulated the value by hand.
*/
dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
}
}
snprintf(sbPtr->formatBuf, TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE, sbPtr->valueFormat, dvalue);
code = EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, sbPtr->formatBuf);
}
}
if (code != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 |
if (afterDecimal > 0) {
fDigits++; /* Decimal point. */
}
if (mostSigDigit < 0) {
fDigits++; /* Zero to left of decimal point. */
}
if (fDigits <= eDigits) {
| | | | 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 |
if (afterDecimal > 0) {
fDigits++; /* Decimal point. */
}
if (mostSigDigit < 0) {
fDigits++; /* Zero to left of decimal point. */
}
if (fDigits <= eDigits) {
snprintf(sbPtr->digitFormat, sizeof(sbPtr->digitFormat), "%%.%df", afterDecimal);
} else {
snprintf(sbPtr->digitFormat, sizeof(sbPtr->digitFormat), "%%.%de", numDigits-1);
}
sbPtr->valueFormat = sbPtr->digitFormat;
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkEntry.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 |
/*
* Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
*/
const char *string; /* Pointer to storage for string;
* NULL-terminated; malloc-ed. */
| | | | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 |
/*
* Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
*/
const char *string; /* Pointer to storage for string;
* NULL-terminated; malloc-ed. */
int insertPos; /* Character index before which next typed
* character will be inserted. */
/*
* Information about what's selected, if any.
*/
int selectFirst; /* Character index of first selected character
* (-1 means nothing selected. */
int selectLast; /* Character index just after last selected
* character (-1 means nothing selected. */
int selectAnchor; /* Fixed end of selection (i.e. "select to"
* operation will use this as one end of the
* selection). */
/*
* Information for scanning:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 |
* scrollbar(s). Malloc'ed. NULL means no
* command to issue. */
char *showChar; /* Value of -show option. If non-NULL, first
* character is used for displaying all
* characters in entry. Malloc'ed. This is
* only used by the Entry widget. */
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 |
* scrollbar(s). Malloc'ed. NULL means no
* command to issue. */
char *showChar; /* Value of -show option. If non-NULL, first
* character is used for displaying all
* characters in entry. Malloc'ed. This is
* only used by the Entry widget. */
/*
* Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the
* configuration settings above.
*/
const char *displayString; /* String to use when displaying. This may be
* a pointer to string, or a pointer to
* malloced memory with the same character
* length as string but whose characters are
* all equal to showChar. */
int numBytes; /* Length of string in bytes. */
int numChars; /* Length of string in characters. Both string
* and displayString have the same character
* length, but may have different byte lengths
* due to being made from different UTF-8
* characters. */
int numDisplayBytes; /* Length of displayString in bytes. */
int inset; /* Number of pixels on the left and right
* sides that are taken up by XPAD,
* borderWidth (if any), and highlightWidth
* (if any). */
Tk_TextLayout textLayout; /* Cached text layout information. */
int layoutX, layoutY; /* Origin for layout. */
int leftX; /* X position at which character at leftIndex
* is drawn (varies depending on justify). */
int leftIndex; /* Character index of left-most character
* visible in window. */
Tcl_TimerToken insertBlinkHandler;
/* Timer handler used to blink cursor on and
* off. */
GC textGC; /* For drawing normal text. */
GC selTextGC; /* For drawing selected text. */
GC highlightGC; /* For drawing traversal highlight. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 |
double fromValue; /* Value corresponding to left/top of dial */
double toValue; /* Value corresponding to right/bottom of
* dial */
double increment; /* If > 0, all values are rounded to an even
* multiple of this value. */
char *formatBuf; /* string into which to format value.
* Malloc'ed. */
| | | | | 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 |
double fromValue; /* Value corresponding to left/top of dial */
double toValue; /* Value corresponding to right/bottom of
* dial */
double increment; /* If > 0, all values are rounded to an even
* multiple of this value. */
char *formatBuf; /* string into which to format value.
* Malloc'ed. */
char *reqFormat; /* Snprintf conversion specifier used for the
* value that the users requests. Malloc'ed */
char *valueFormat; /* Snprintf conversion specifier used for the
* value. */
char digitFormat[16]; /* Snprintf conversion specifier computed from
* digits and other information; used for the
* value. */
char *valueStr; /* Values List. Malloc'ed. */
Tcl_Obj *listObj; /* Pointer to the list object being used */
int eIndex; /* Holds the current index into elements */
int nElements; /* Holds the current count of elements */
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkError.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 |
* codes). */
int minorCode, /* Consider only errors with this minor
* request code (-1 means consider all minor
* codes). */
Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, /* Procedure to invoke when a matching error
* occurs. NULL means just ignore matching
* errors. */
| | | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 |
* codes). */
int minorCode, /* Consider only errors with this minor
* request code (-1 means consider all minor
* codes). */
Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, /* Procedure to invoke when a matching error
* occurs. NULL means just ignore matching
* errors. */
void *clientData) /* Arbitrary value to pass to errorProc. */
{
TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
/*
* Find the display. If Tk doesn't know about this display then it's an
* error: panic.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 |
/*
* Create the handler record.
*/
errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *)ckalloc(sizeof(TkErrorHandler));
errorPtr->dispPtr = dispPtr;
errorPtr->firstRequest = NextRequest(display);
| | | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 |
/*
* Create the handler record.
*/
errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *)ckalloc(sizeof(TkErrorHandler));
errorPtr->dispPtr = dispPtr;
errorPtr->firstRequest = NextRequest(display);
errorPtr->lastRequest = (unsigned long) -1;
errorPtr->error = error;
errorPtr->request = request;
errorPtr->minorCode = minorCode;
errorPtr->errorProc = errorProc;
errorPtr->clientData = clientData;
errorPtr->nextPtr = dispPtr->errorPtr;
dispPtr->errorPtr = errorPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 |
* return value from Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
{
TkErrorHandler *errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *) handler;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = errorPtr->dispPtr;
errorPtr->lastRequest = NextRequest(dispPtr->display) - 1;
/*
* Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer active. We
* probably won't be able to free the handler that was just deleted (need
* to wait for any outstanding requests to be processed by server), but
* there may be previously-deleted handlers that are now ready for garbage
* collection. To reduce the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers
* pile up, then clean them all at once. This adds a bit of overhead to
| > > > > > | 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 |
* return value from Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
{
TkErrorHandler *errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *) handler;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = errorPtr->dispPtr;
errorPtr->lastRequest = NextRequest(dispPtr->display) - 1;
/*
* Ensure that no user callback for this handler is invoked any further.
*/
errorPtr->errorProc = NULL;
/*
* Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer active. We
* probably won't be able to free the handler that was just deleted (need
* to wait for any outstanding requests to be processed by server), but
* there may be previously-deleted handlers that are now ready for garbage
* collection. To reduce the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers
* pile up, then clean them all at once. This adds a bit of overhead to
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkEvent.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" | < < < < < < < < | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" /* * There's a potential problem if a handler is deleted while it's current * (i.e. its function is executing), since Tk_HandleEvent will need to read * the handler's "nextPtr" field when the function returns. To handle this * problem, structures of the type below indicate the next handler to be * processed for any (recursively nested) dispatches in progress. The * nextHandler fields get updated if the handlers pointed to are deleted. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | static int InvokeMouseHandlers(TkWindow *winPtr, unsigned long mask, XEvent *eventPtr); static Window ParentXId(Display *display, Window w); static int RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded(XEvent *eventPtr); static int TkXErrorHandler(ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr); static int WindowEventProc(Tcl_Event *evPtr, int flags); static void CreateXIC(TkWindow *winPtr); /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * InvokeFocusHandlers -- * * Call focus-related code to look at FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, and Leave | > > | 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 | static int InvokeMouseHandlers(TkWindow *winPtr, unsigned long mask, XEvent *eventPtr); static Window ParentXId(Display *display, Window w); static int RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded(XEvent *eventPtr); static int TkXErrorHandler(ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr); static int WindowEventProc(Tcl_Event *evPtr, int flags); #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS static void CreateXIC(TkWindow *winPtr); #endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * InvokeFocusHandlers -- * * Call focus-related code to look at FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, and Leave |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 |
*
* Create the X input context for our winPtr.
* XIM is only ever enabled on Unix.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
CreateXIC(
TkWindow *winPtr)
{
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
long im_event_mask = 0L;
const char *preedit_attname = NULL;
| > | 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 |
*
* Create the X input context for our winPtr.
* XIM is only ever enabled on Unix.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
static void
CreateXIC(
TkWindow *winPtr)
{
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
long im_event_mask = 0L;
const char *preedit_attname = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 |
*/
XGetICValues(winPtr->inputContext, XNFilterEvents, &im_event_mask, NULL);
if ((winPtr->atts.event_mask & im_event_mask) != im_event_mask) {
winPtr->atts.event_mask |= im_event_mask;
XSelectInput(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, winPtr->atts.event_mask);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetTkWindowFromXEvent --
*
* Attempt to find which TkWindow is associated with an event. If it
| > | 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 |
*/
XGetICValues(winPtr->inputContext, XNFilterEvents, &im_event_mask, NULL);
if ((winPtr->atts.event_mask & im_event_mask) != im_event_mask) {
winPtr->atts.event_mask |= im_event_mask;
XSelectInput(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, winPtr->atts.event_mask);
}
}
#endif
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetTkWindowFromXEvent --
*
* Attempt to find which TkWindow is associated with an event. If it
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
509 510 511 512 513 514 515 |
}
return 0;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
| | | < < < | < | | | 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 |
}
return 0;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkGetButtonMask --
*
* Return the proper Button${n}Mask for the button.
*
* Results:
* A button mask.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static const unsigned buttonMasks[] = {
0, Button1Mask, Button2Mask, Button3Mask, Button4Mask, Button5Mask
};
unsigned
TkGetButtonMask(
unsigned button)
{
return (button > Button5) ? 0 : buttonMasks[button];
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* InvokeClientMessageHandlers --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
988 989 990 991 992 993 994 |
}
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 |
}
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkXErrorHandler --
*
* TkXErrorHandler is an error handler, to be installed via
* Tk_CreateErrorHandler, that will set a flag if an X error occurred.
*
* Results:
* Always returns 0, indicating that the X error was handled.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 |
TkWindow *winPtr;
unsigned long mask;
InProgress ip;
Tcl_Interp *interp = NULL;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
| < | < < < | | < | < < | < < | 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 |
TkWindow *winPtr;
unsigned long mask;
InProgress ip;
Tcl_Interp *interp = NULL;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
#if !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) && !defined(_WIN32)
if (((eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) || (eventPtr->type == ButtonRelease))
&& ((eventPtr->xbutton.button - 6) < 2)) {
eventPtr->xbutton.button -= 2;
eventPtr->xbutton.state ^= ShiftMask;
}
#endif
/*
* If the generic handler processed this event we are done and can return.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 |
/*
* Create the input context for the window if it hasn't already been done
* (XFilterEvent needs this context). When the event is a FocusIn event,
* set the input context focus to the receiving window. This code is only
* ever active for X11.
*/
/*
* If the XIC has been invalidated, it must be recreated.
*/
if (winPtr->dispPtr->ximGeneration != winPtr->ximGeneration) {
winPtr->flags &= ~TK_CHECKED_IC;
winPtr->inputContext = NULL;
}
| > | 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 |
/*
* Create the input context for the window if it hasn't already been done
* (XFilterEvent needs this context). When the event is a FocusIn event,
* set the input context focus to the receiving window. This code is only
* ever active for X11.
*/
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
/*
* If the XIC has been invalidated, it must be recreated.
*/
if (winPtr->dispPtr->ximGeneration != winPtr->ximGeneration) {
winPtr->flags &= ~TK_CHECKED_IC;
winPtr->inputContext = NULL;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 |
}
if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) &&
(winPtr->dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) &&
(winPtr->inputContext != NULL)) {
XSetICFocus(winPtr->inputContext);
}
}
/*
* For events where it hasn't already been done, update the current time
* in the display.
*/
if (eventPtr->type == PropertyNotify) {
| > | 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 |
}
if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) &&
(winPtr->dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) &&
(winPtr->inputContext != NULL)) {
XSetICFocus(winPtr->inputContext);
}
}
#endif /*TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS*/
/*
* For events where it hasn't already been done, update the current time
* in the display.
*/
if (eventPtr->type == PropertyNotify) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkFinalize -- * * Runs our private exit handlers and removes itself from Tcl. This is | | | 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkFinalize -- * * Runs our private exit handlers and removes itself from Tcl. This is * beneficial should we want to protect from dangling pointers should the * Tk shared library be unloaded prior to Tcl which can happen on windows * should the process be forcefully exiting from an exception handler. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFileFilter.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
258 259 260 261 262 263 264 |
/*
* Might be cleaner to use 'Tcl_GetOSTypeFromObj' but that is actually
* static to the MacOS X/Darwin version of Tcl, and would therefore
* require further code refactoring.
*/
for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
| | | | 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 |
/*
* Might be cleaner to use 'Tcl_GetOSTypeFromObj' but that is actually
* static to the MacOS X/Darwin version of Tcl, and would therefore
* require further code refactoring.
*/
for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
int len;
const char *strType = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(ostypeList[i], &len);
/*
* If len is < 4, it is definitely an error. If equal or longer,
* we need to use the macRoman encoding to determine the correct
* length (assuming there may be non-ascii characters, e.g.,
* embedded nulls or accented characters in the string, the
* macRoman length will be different).
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 |
}
}
/*
* Add the clause into the list of clauses
*/
| | | | | | | | | | | 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 |
}
}
/*
* Add the clause into the list of clauses
*/
clausePtr = ckalloc(sizeof(FileFilterClause));
clausePtr->patterns = NULL;
clausePtr->patternsTail = NULL;
clausePtr->macTypes = NULL;
clausePtr->macTypesTail = NULL;
if (filterPtr->clauses == NULL) {
filterPtr->clauses = filterPtr->clausesTail = clausePtr;
} else {
filterPtr->clausesTail->next = clausePtr;
filterPtr->clausesTail = clausePtr;
}
clausePtr->next = NULL;
if (globCount > 0 && globList != NULL) {
for (i=0; i<globCount; i++) {
GlobPattern *globPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(GlobPattern));
int len;
const char *str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(globList[i], &len);
len = (len + 1) * sizeof(char);
if (str[0] && str[0] != '*') {
/*
* Prepend a "*" to patterns that do not have a leading "*"
*/
globPtr->pattern = ckalloc(len + 1);
globPtr->pattern[0] = '*';
strcpy(globPtr->pattern+1, str);
} else if (isWindows) {
if (strcmp(str, "*") == 0) {
globPtr->pattern = ckalloc(4);
strcpy(globPtr->pattern, "*.*");
} else if (strcmp(str, "") == 0) {
/*
* An empty string means "match all files with no
* extensions"
* TODO: "*." actually matches with all files on Win95
*/
globPtr->pattern = ckalloc(3);
strcpy(globPtr->pattern, "*.");
} else {
globPtr->pattern = ckalloc(len);
strcpy(globPtr->pattern, str);
}
} else {
globPtr->pattern = ckalloc(len);
strcpy(globPtr->pattern, str);
}
/*
* Add the glob pattern into the list of patterns.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
371 372 373 374 375 376 377 |
}
if (ostypeList != NULL && ostypeCount > 0) {
if (macRoman == NULL) {
macRoman = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "macRoman");
}
for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
Tcl_DString osTypeDS;
| | | | | 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 |
}
if (ostypeList != NULL && ostypeCount > 0) {
if (macRoman == NULL) {
macRoman = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "macRoman");
}
for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
Tcl_DString osTypeDS;
int len;
MacFileType *mfPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(MacFileType));
const char *strType = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(ostypeList[i], &len);
char *string;
/*
* Convert utf to macRoman, since MacOS types are defined to be 4
* macRoman characters long
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
441 442 443 444 445 446 447 |
for (; filterPtr; filterPtr=filterPtr->next) {
if (strcmp(filterPtr->name, name) == 0) {
return filterPtr;
}
}
| | | | 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 |
for (; filterPtr; filterPtr=filterPtr->next) {
if (strcmp(filterPtr->name, name) == 0) {
return filterPtr;
}
}
filterPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(FileFilter));
filterPtr->clauses = NULL;
filterPtr->clausesTail = NULL;
len = strlen(name) + 1;
filterPtr->name = ckalloc(len);
memcpy(filterPtr->name, name, len);
if (flistPtr->filters == NULL) {
flistPtr->filters = flistPtr->filtersTail = filterPtr;
} else {
flistPtr->filtersTail->next = filterPtr;
flistPtr->filtersTail = filterPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFileFilter.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK_FILE_FILTER #define _TK_FILE_FILTER | < < < < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#ifndef _TK_FILE_FILTER
#define _TK_FILE_FILTER
#define OSType long
typedef struct GlobPattern {
struct GlobPattern *next; /* Chains to the next glob pattern in a glob
* pattern list */
char *pattern; /* String value of the pattern, such as
* "*.txt" or "*.*" */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 |
MODULE_SCOPE void TkFreeFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkInitFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetFileFilters(Tcl_Interp *interp,
FileFilterList *flistPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
int isWindows);
| < < < < | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 |
MODULE_SCOPE void TkFreeFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkInitFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetFileFilters(Tcl_Interp *interp,
FileFilterList *flistPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
int isWindows);
#endif /* _TK_FILE_FILTER */
|
Changes to generic/tkFocus.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 |
/*
* Debugging support...
*/
#define DEBUG(dispPtr, arguments) \
if ((dispPtr)->focusDebug) { \
| | | 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
/*
* Debugging support...
*/
#define DEBUG(dispPtr, arguments) \
if ((dispPtr)->focusDebug) { \
printf arguments; fflush(stdout); \
}
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
*/
static DisplayFocusInfo*FindDisplayFocusInfo(TkMainInfo *mainPtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 |
* If invoked with no arguments, just return the current focus window.
*/
if (objc == 1) {
Tk_Window focusWin = (Tk_Window) TkGetFocusWin(winPtr);
if (focusWin != NULL) {
| | | 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 |
* If invoked with no arguments, just return the current focus window.
*/
if (objc == 1) {
Tk_Window focusWin = (Tk_Window) TkGetFocusWin(winPtr);
if (focusWin != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(focusWin));
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* If invoked with a single argument beginning with "." then focus on that
* window.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
175 176 177 178 179 180 181 |
windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
if (newPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
if (newPtr != NULL) {
| | | 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 |
windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
if (newPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
if (newPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj((Tk_Window) newPtr));
}
break;
case 1: /* -force */
windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
/*
* The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
208 209 210 211 212 213 214 |
topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr) {
if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
continue;
}
for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
| | | | 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 |
topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr) {
if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
continue;
}
for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj((Tk_Window)
tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr));
return TCL_OK;
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj((Tk_Window) topLevelPtr));
return TCL_OK;
}
break;
default:
Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to focusOptions in focus command");
}
return TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
311 312 313 314 315 316 317 | * Skip FocusIn events that cause confusion * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur on * windows in between the origin and destination of the focus * change. For FocusIn we may see this when focus goes into an * embedded child. We don't care about this, although we may end * up getting a NotifyPointer later. * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child. When | | | 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 | * Skip FocusIn events that cause confusion * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur on * windows in between the origin and destination of the focus * change. For FocusIn we may see this when focus goes into an * embedded child. We don't care about this, although we may end * up getting a NotifyPointer later. * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child. When * focus is on an embedded focus, we still think we have the * focus, too, so this message doesn't change our state. * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent to the * root window. * * Interesting FocusIn events are * NotifyAncestor - focus is coming from our parent, probably the root. * NotifyNonlinear - focus is coming from a different branch, probably |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
365 366 367 368 369 370 371 |
retValue = 1;
if (eventPtr->xcrossing.detail == NotifyInferior) {
return retValue;
}
}
/*
| | | 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 |
retValue = 1;
if (eventPtr->xcrossing.detail == NotifyInferior) {
return retValue;
}
}
/*
* If winPtr isn't a top-level window then just ignore the event.
*/
winPtr = TkWmFocusToplevel(winPtr);
if (winPtr == NULL) {
return retValue;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
497 498 499 500 501 502 503 |
* dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!! In addition, we generate events because
* the window manager won't give us a FocusOut event when we focus on
* the root.
*/
if ((dispPtr->implicitWinPtr != NULL)
&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
| | > | 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 |
* dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!! In addition, we generate events because
* the window manager won't give us a FocusOut event when we focus on
* the root.
*/
if ((dispPtr->implicitWinPtr != NULL)
&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
DEBUG(dispPtr, ("Defocussed implicit Async from %s\n", displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr->pathName));
GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, NULL);
XSetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, PointerRoot, RevertToPointerRoot,
CurrentTime);
displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
dispPtr->implicitWinPtr = NULL;
dispPtr->focusPtr = NULL;
}
}
return retValue;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
632 633 634 635 636 637 638 |
if (topLevelPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED &&
(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)) {
/*
* We are assigning focus to an embedded toplevel. The platform
* specific function TkpClaimFocus needs to handle the job of
* assigning focus to the container, since we have no way to find the
| | | 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 |
if (topLevelPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED &&
(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)) {
/*
* We are assigning focus to an embedded toplevel. The platform
* specific function TkpClaimFocus needs to handle the job of
* assigning focus to the container, since we have no way to find the
* container.
*/
TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force);
} else if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr != NULL) || force) {
/*
* If we are forcing removal of focus from a container hosting a
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 |
TkFocusDeadWindow(
TkWindow *winPtr) /* Information about the window that is being
* deleted. */
{
ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr, *prevPtr;
DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
/*
* Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
* mainPtr.
*/
if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
| > | 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 |
TkFocusDeadWindow(
TkWindow *winPtr) /* Information about the window that is being
* deleted. */
{
ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr, *prevPtr;
DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
int noMatch = 1;
/*
* Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
* mainPtr.
*/
if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 |
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
} else {
prevPtr->nextPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
}
ckfree(tlFocusPtr);
break;
} else if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
/*
* The deleted window had the focus for its top-level: move the
* focus to the top-level itself.
*/
tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr)
&& !(tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
DEBUG(dispPtr, ("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName, winPtr->pathName));
GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr);
displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
dispPtr->focusPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
}
break;
}
}
/*
* Occasionally, things can become unsynchronized. Move them back into
* synch now. [Bug 2496114]
*/
if (displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr) {
DEBUG(dispPtr, ("focus cleared after %s died\n", winPtr->pathName));
displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
}
if (displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr == winPtr) {
displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr = NULL;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GenerateFocusEvents --
*
| > > > > > > > > > > > | 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 |
}
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
} else {
prevPtr->nextPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
}
ckfree(tlFocusPtr);
noMatch = 0;
break;
} else if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
/*
* The deleted window had the focus for its top-level: move the
* focus to the top-level itself.
*/
tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr)
&& !(tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
DEBUG(dispPtr, ("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName, winPtr->pathName));
GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr);
displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
dispPtr->focusPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
}
noMatch = 0;
break;
}
}
/*
* Occasionally, things can become unsynchronized. Move them back into
* synch now. [Bug 2496114]
*/
if (displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr) {
DEBUG(dispPtr, ("focus cleared after %s died\n", winPtr->pathName));
displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
}
if (displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr == winPtr) {
displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr = NULL;
}
/*
* It may happen that the search above for focus records that refer
* to this window did not find any match. In such a case, when the
* dead window had the focus, release it.
*/
if (noMatch && (dispPtr->focusPtr == winPtr)) {
dispPtr->focusPtr = NULL;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GenerateFocusEvents --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 | * * Free resources associated with maintaining the focus. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: | | | 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 |
*
* Free resources associated with maintaining the focus.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
* Side effects:
* This mainPtr should no longer access focus information.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
TkFocusFree(
TkMainInfo *mainPtr) /* Record that identifies a particular
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 | } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkFocusJoin -- * | | | 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 | } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkFocusJoin -- * * Remove the focus record for this window that is no longer managed * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * A tlFocusPtr record is removed * |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFont.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 |
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkFont.h"
#if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
#include "tkMacOSXInt.h" /* Defines TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
#endif
/*
* The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that exist
* in the current application. It must be stored in the TkMainInfo for the
* application.
*/
typedef struct TkFontInfo {
| > > > > | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 |
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkFont.h"
#if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
#include "tkMacOSXInt.h" /* Defines TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
#endif
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that exist
* in the current application. It must be stored in the TkMainInfo for the
* application.
*/
typedef struct TkFontInfo {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 |
/*
* The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes
* for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted
* when the last reference to it goes away.
*/
typedef struct NamedFont {
| | | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 |
/*
* The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes
* for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted
* when the last reference to it goes away.
*/
typedef struct NamedFont {
int refCount; /* Number of users of named font. */
int deletePending; /* Non-zero if font should be deleted when
* last reference goes away. */
TkFontAttributes fa; /* Desired attributes for named font. */
} NamedFont;
/*
* The following two structures are used to keep track of string measurement
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
350 351 352 353 354 355 356 |
*/
const Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
"font", /* name */
FreeFontObjProc, /* freeIntRepProc */
DupFontObjProc, /* dupIntRepProc */
NULL, /* updateStringProc */
| | | 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 |
*/
const Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
"font", /* name */
FreeFontObjProc, /* freeIntRepProc */
DupFontObjProc, /* dupIntRepProc */
NULL, /* updateStringProc */
SetFontFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */
};
/*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkFontPkgInit --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 |
void
TkFontPkgFree(
TkMainInfo *mainPtr) /* The application being deleted. */
{
TkFontInfo *fiPtr = mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr, *searchPtr;
Tcl_HashSearch search;
int fontsLeft = 0;
for (searchPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search);
searchPtr != NULL;
searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
fontsLeft++;
#ifdef DEBUG_FONTS
fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n",
(char *) Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr));
#endif
}
#ifdef PURIFY
| > > > > | 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 |
void
TkFontPkgFree(
TkMainInfo *mainPtr) /* The application being deleted. */
{
TkFontInfo *fiPtr = mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr, *searchPtr;
Tcl_HashSearch search;
#ifdef PURIFY
int fontsLeft = 0;
#endif
for (searchPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search);
searchPtr != NULL;
searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
#ifdef PURIFY
fontsLeft++;
#endif
#ifdef DEBUG_FONTS
fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n",
(char *) Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr));
#endif
}
#ifdef PURIFY
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
514 515 516 517 518 519 520 | return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Next parameter may be an option. */ | | | 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Next parameter may be an option.
*/
n = 3 + skip;
optPtr = NULL;
charPtr = NULL;
if (n < objc) {
s = Tcl_GetString(objv[n]);
if (s[0] == '-' && s[1] != '-') {
optPtr = objv[n];
n++;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
552 553 554 555 556 557 558 |
/*
* If there were fewer than 3 args, or args remain, that's an error.
*/
if (objc < 3 || n < objc) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
| | | | | 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 |
/*
* If there were fewer than 3 args, or args remain, that's an error.
*/
if (objc < 3 || n < objc) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"font ?-displayof window? ?option? ?--? ?char?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* The 'charPtr' arg must be a single Unicode.
*/
if (charPtr != NULL) {
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(charPtr);
int len = TkUtfToUniChar(string, &uniChar);
if (len != charPtr->length) {
resultPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
"expected a single character but got \"", -1);
Tcl_AppendLimitedToObj(resultPtr, string,
-1, 40, "...");
Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, "\"", -1);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "FONT_SAMPLE", NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
656 657 658 659 660 661 662 |
}
if (name == NULL) {
/*
* No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX".
*/
for (i = 1; ; i++) {
| | | 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 |
}
if (name == NULL) {
/*
* No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX".
*/
for (i = 1; ; i++) {
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "font%d", i);
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf);
if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
break;
}
}
name = buf;
skip = 2;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
701 702 703 704 705 706 707 |
}
case FONT_FAMILIES: {
int skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | | | | | | | 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 |
}
case FONT_FAMILIES: {
int skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (objc != 2 + skip) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin);
break;
}
case FONT_MEASURE: {
const char *string;
Tk_Font tkfont;
int length = 0;
int skip = 0;
if (objc > 4) {
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (objc != 4 + skip) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"font ?-displayof window? text");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
if (tkfont == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length)));
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
break;
}
case FONT_METRICS: {
Tk_Font tkfont;
int skip, i;
const TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
static const char *const switches[] = {
"-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL
};
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
if (skip < 0) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4 + skip)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
if (tkfont == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
objc -= skip;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
777 778 779 780 781 782 783 |
i = 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */
switch (index) {
case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent; break;
case 1: i = fmPtr->descent; break;
case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; break;
case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed; break;
}
| | | 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 |
i = 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */
switch (index) {
case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent; break;
case 1: i = fmPtr->descent; break;
case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; break;
case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed; break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(i));
}
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
break;
}
case FONT_NAMES: {
Tcl_HashSearch search;
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 |
static void
RecomputeWidgets(
TkWindow *winPtr) /* Window to which command is sent. */
{
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *proc =
Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, worldChangedProc);
if (proc != NULL) {
proc(winPtr->instanceData);
}
/*
* Notify all the descendants of this window that the world has changed.
*
* This could be done recursively or iteratively. The recursive version is
* easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a -font
| > | | | | | | | > > > > > > > | 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 |
static void
RecomputeWidgets(
TkWindow *winPtr) /* Window to which command is sent. */
{
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *proc =
Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, worldChangedProc);
TkWindow *tkwinPtr;
if (proc != NULL) {
proc(winPtr->instanceData);
}
/*
* Notify all the descendants of this window that the world has changed.
*
* This could be done recursively or iteratively. The recursive version is
* easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a -font
* option will be leaf nodes in the widget hierarchy (buttons, labels,
* etc.), so the recursion depth will be shallow.
*
* However, the additional overhead of the recursive calls may become a
* performance problem if typical usage alters such that -font'ed widgets
* appear high in the hierarchy, causing deep recursion. This could happen
* with text widgets, or more likely with the labelframe
* widget. With these widgets it is possible, even likely, that a
* -font'ed widget (text or labelframe) will not be a leaf node, but
* will instead have many descendants. If this is ever found to cause a
* performance problem, it may be worth investigating an iterative version
* of the code below.
*/
for (tkwinPtr=winPtr->childList ; tkwinPtr!=NULL ; tkwinPtr=tkwinPtr->nextPtr) {
RecomputeWidgets(tkwinPtr);
}
/*
* Broadcast font change virtually for mega-widget layout managers.
* Do this after the font change has been propagated to core widgets.
*/
TkSendVirtualEvent((Tk_Window)winPtr, "TkWorldChanged",
Tcl_NewStringObj("FontChanged",-1));
}
/*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkCreateNamedFont --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 |
upper = 1;
for (; *src != '\0'; ) {
while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */
src++;
upper = 1;
}
src += TkUtfToUniChar(src, &ch);
| > | | | | | > > > | 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 |
upper = 1;
for (; *src != '\0'; ) {
while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */
src++;
upper = 1;
}
src += TkUtfToUniChar(src, &ch);
if (ch <= 0xffff) {
if (upper) {
ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch);
upper = 0;
} else {
ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch);
}
} else {
upper = 0;
}
dest += TkUniCharToUtf(ch, dest);
}
*dest = '\0';
Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, dest - Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr));
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 |
* newline characters should not cause a line
* break. */
int *widthPtr, /* Filled with width of string. */
int *heightPtr) /* Filled with height of string. */
{
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
const char *start, *endp, *special;
| > | | 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 |
* newline characters should not cause a line
* break. */
int *widthPtr, /* Filled with width of string. */
int *heightPtr) /* Filled with height of string. */
{
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
const char *start, *endp, *special;
int n;
int y, bytesThisChunk, maxChunks, curLine, layoutHeight;
int baseline, height, curX, newX, maxWidth, *lineLengths;
TextLayout *layoutPtr;
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
const TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
Tcl_DString lineBuffer;
Tcl_DStringInit(&lineBuffer);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 |
}
if (wrapLength == 0) {
wrapLength = -1;
}
maxChunks = 1;
| | | | 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 |
}
if (wrapLength == 0) {
wrapLength = -1;
}
maxChunks = 1;
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)ckalloc(Tk_Offset(TextLayout, chunks)
+ maxChunks * sizeof(LayoutChunk));
layoutPtr->tkfont = tkfont;
layoutPtr->string = string;
layoutPtr->numChunks = 0;
baseline = fmPtr->ascent;
maxWidth = 0;
/*
* Divide the string up into simple strings and measure each string.
*/
curX = 0;
endp = TkUtfAtIndex(string, numChars);
special = string;
flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES;
flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
for (start = string; start < endp; ) {
if (start >= special) {
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 |
* means to draw all characters. */
{
#if 0
/* Use TkDrawAngledTextLayout() implementation - testing purposes at this point */
TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, 0.0, firstChar, lastChar);
#else
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
| > | | | | 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 |
* means to draw all characters. */
{
#if 0
/* Use TkDrawAngledTextLayout() implementation - testing purposes at this point */
TkDrawAngledTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, 0.0, firstChar, lastChar);
#else
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
int i, drawX;
int numDisplayChars;
const char *firstByte, *lastByte;
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
if (layoutPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
if (lastChar < 0) {
lastChar = 100000000;
}
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) {
numDisplayChars = chunkPtr->numDisplayChars;
if ((numDisplayChars > 0) && (firstChar < numDisplayChars)) {
if (firstChar <= 0) {
drawX = 0;
firstChar = 0;
firstByte = chunkPtr->start;
} else {
firstByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar);
Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start,
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX);
}
if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) {
numDisplayChars = lastChar;
}
lastByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars);
#ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
TkpDrawCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont,
chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes,
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, lastByte - firstByte,
x+chunkPtr->x, y+chunkPtr->y);
#else /* !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, firstByte,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 |
double dx, dy;
if (firstChar <= 0) {
drawX = 0;
firstChar = 0;
firstByte = chunkPtr->start;
} else {
| | | | 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 |
double dx, dy;
if (firstChar <= 0) {
drawX = 0;
firstChar = 0;
firstByte = chunkPtr->start;
} else {
firstByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar);
Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start,
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX);
}
if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) {
numDisplayChars = lastChar;
}
lastByte = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars);
#ifdef TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
dx = cosA * (chunkPtr->x) + sinA * (chunkPtr->y);
dy = -sinA * (chunkPtr->x) + cosA * (chunkPtr->y);
if (angle == 0.0) {
TkpDrawCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc,
layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, chunkPtr->numBytes,
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, lastByte - firstByte,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 |
* non-NULL. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
/* Filled with the width and height of the
* bounding box for the character specified by
* index, if non-NULL. */
{
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
| | > | | 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 |
* non-NULL. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
/* Filled with the width and height of the
* bounding box for the character specified by
* index, if non-NULL. */
{
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
int i, x = 0, w;
Tk_Font tkfont;
TkFont *fontPtr;
const char *end;
if (index < 0) {
return 0;
}
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
tkfont = layoutPtr->tkfont;
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) {
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) {
if (index == 0) {
x = chunkPtr->x;
w = chunkPtr->totalWidth;
goto check;
}
} else if (index < chunkPtr->numChars) {
end = TkUtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, index);
if (xPtr != NULL) {
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, chunkPtr->start,
end - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x);
x += chunkPtr->x;
}
if (widthPtr != NULL) {
int ch;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 |
Tk_TextLayout layout) /* The layout to be rendered. */
{
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
int baseline = chunkPtr->y;
Tcl_Obj *psObj = Tcl_NewObj();
int i, j;
| | | 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 |
Tk_TextLayout layout) /* The layout to be rendered. */
{
TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
int baseline = chunkPtr->y;
Tcl_Obj *psObj = Tcl_NewObj();
int i, j;
int len;
const char *p, *glyphname;
char uindex[5], c, *ps;
int ch;
Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "[(", -1);
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++, chunkPtr++) {
if (baseline != chunkPtr->y) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 |
* Eventually this should be revised to handle more sophsticiated
* international postscript fonts.
*/
p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
if ((ch == '(') || (ch == ')') || (ch == '\\') || (ch < 0x20)) {
/*
| | | 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 |
* Eventually this should be revised to handle more sophsticiated
* international postscript fonts.
*/
p += TkUtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
if ((ch == '(') || (ch == ')') || (ch == '\\') || (ch < 0x20)) {
/*
* Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the snprintf below,
* so that a full three digits of octal are always generated.
* Without the "03", a number following this sequence could be
* interpreted by Postscript as part of this sequence.
*/
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(psObj, "\\%03o", ch);
continue;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 |
* This character doesn't belong to the ASCII character set, so we
* use the full glyph name.
*/
if (ch > 0xffff) {
goto noMapping;
}
| | | | 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 |
* This character doesn't belong to the ASCII character set, so we
* use the full glyph name.
*/
if (ch > 0xffff) {
goto noMapping;
}
snprintf(uindex, sizeof(uindex), "%04X", ch); /* endianness? */
glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "::tk::psglyphs", uindex, 0);
if (glyphname) {
ps = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(psObj, &len);
if (ps[len-1] == '(') {
/*
* In-place edit. Ewww!
*/
ps[len-1] = '/';
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 |
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* For display on which font will be used. */
int objc, /* Number of elements in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Command line options. */
TkFontAttributes *faPtr) /* Font attributes structure whose fields are
* to be modified. Structure must already be
* properly initialized. */
{
| > | | 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 |
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* For display on which font will be used. */
int objc, /* Number of elements in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Command line options. */
TkFontAttributes *faPtr) /* Font attributes structure whose fields are
* to be modified. Structure must already be
* properly initialized. */
{
int i;
int n, index;
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
const char *value;
for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
optionPtr = objv[i];
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, fontOpt, "option", 1,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 |
case FONT_FAMILY:
str = faPtr->family;
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
break;
case FONT_SIZE:
if (faPtr->size >= 0.0) {
| | | | 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 |
case FONT_FAMILY:
str = faPtr->family;
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
break;
case FONT_SIZE:
if (faPtr->size >= 0.0) {
valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj((int)(faPtr->size + 0.5));
} else {
valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(-(int)(-faPtr->size + 0.5));
}
break;
case FONT_WEIGHT:
str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight);
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 |
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj(fontOpt[i], -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, valuePtr);
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 |
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr,
Tcl_NewStringObj(fontOpt[i], -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, valuePtr);
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ParseFontNameObj --
*
* Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used to
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* Parseable font description object. */
TkFontAttributes *faPtr) /* Filled with attributes parsed from font
* name. Any attributes that were not
* specified in font name are filled with
* default values. */
{
const char *dash;
| > | | 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* Parseable font description object. */
TkFontAttributes *faPtr) /* Filled with attributes parsed from font
* name. Any attributes that were not
* specified in font name are filled with
* default values. */
{
const char *dash;
int result, n;
int objc, i;
Tcl_Obj **objv;
const char *string;
TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr);
string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
if (*string == '-') {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 |
int maxChunks, numChars;
size_t s;
layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr;
maxChunks = *maxPtr;
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) {
maxChunks *= 2;
| | | 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 |
int maxChunks, numChars;
size_t s;
layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr;
maxChunks = *maxPtr;
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) {
maxChunks *= 2;
s = Tk_Offset(TextLayout, chunks) + (maxChunks * sizeof(LayoutChunk));
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)ckrealloc(layoutPtr, s);
*layoutPtrPtr = layoutPtr;
*maxPtr = maxChunks;
}
numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(start, numBytes);
chunkPtr = &layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks];
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Tcl_Obj *
TkDebugFont(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* The window in which the font will be used
* (not currently used). */
| | | | | 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Tcl_Obj *
TkDebugFont(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* The window in which the font will be used
* (not currently used). */
const char *name) /* Name of the desired font. */
{
TkFont *fontPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr, *objPtr;
resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(
&((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr->fontCache, name);
if (hashPtr != NULL) {
fontPtr = (TkFont *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
if (fontPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry");
}
for ( ; (fontPtr != NULL); fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) {
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->resourceRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
}
}
return resultPtr;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFont.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKFONT #define _TKFONT | < < < < | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 |
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#ifndef _TKFONT
#define _TKFONT
/*
* The following structure keeps track of the attributes of a font. It can be
* used to keep track of either the desired attributes or the actual
* attributes gotten when the font was instantiated.
*/
struct TkFontAttributes {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 |
*/
typedef struct TkFont {
/*
* Fields used and maintained exclusively by generic code.
*/
| | | | 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 |
*/
typedef struct TkFont {
/*
* Fields used and maintained exclusively by generic code.
*/
int resourceRefCount; /* Number of active uses of this font (each
* active use corresponds to a call to
* Tk_AllocFontFromTable or Tk_GetFont). If
* this count is 0, then this TkFont structure
* is no longer valid and it isn't present in
* a hash table: it is being kept around only
* because there are objects referring to it.
* The structure is freed when
* resourceRefCount and objRefCount are both
* 0. */
int objRefCount; /* The number of Tcl objects that reference
* this structure. */
Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr;/* Entry in font cache for this structure,
* used when deleting it. */
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;/* Pointer to hash table entry that
* corresponds to the named font that the
* tkfont was based on, or NULL if the tkfont
* was not based on a named font. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
221 222 223 224 225 226 227 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkpFontPkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); MODULE_SCOPE TkFont * TkpGetFontFromAttributes(TkFont *tkFontPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, const TkFontAttributes *faPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpGetFontFamilies(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); MODULE_SCOPE TkFont * TkpGetNativeFont(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); | < < < < | 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | MODULE_SCOPE void TkpFontPkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); MODULE_SCOPE TkFont * TkpGetFontFromAttributes(TkFont *tkFontPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, const TkFontAttributes *faPtr); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpGetFontFamilies(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); MODULE_SCOPE TkFont * TkpGetNativeFont(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); #endif /* _TKFONT */ |
Changes to generic/tkFrame.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 |
* pixels of extra space to leave on left and
* right of child area. */
int padX; /* Integer value corresponding to padXPtr. */
Tcl_Obj *padYPtr; /* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
* pixels of extra space to leave above and
* below child area. */
int padY; /* Integer value corresponding to padYPtr. */
| < < < < < < < < < < | 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 |
* pixels of extra space to leave on left and
* right of child area. */
int padX; /* Integer value corresponding to padXPtr. */
Tcl_Obj *padYPtr; /* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
* pixels of extra space to leave above and
* below child area. */
int padY; /* Integer value corresponding to padYPtr. */
} Frame;
/*
* A data structure of the following type is kept for each labelframe widget
* managed by this file:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 |
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration options. There are one common
* table used by all and one table for each widget class.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < | < < | | | < < < < < | < < | | | | | < < | | | | | | | | | | | | 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 |
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration options. There are one common
* table used by all and one table for each widget class.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_FRAME_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, border),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_FRAME_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-colormap", "colormap", "Colormap",
DEF_FRAME_COLORMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, colormapName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
/*
* Having -container is useless in a labelframe since a container has
* no border. It should be deprecated.
*/
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-container", "container", "Container",
DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, isContainer), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_FRAME_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, height), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Frame, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Frame, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
DEF_FRAME_PADX, Tk_Offset(Frame, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(Frame, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
DEF_FRAME_PADY, Tk_Offset(Frame, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(Frame, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_FRAME_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, takeFocus),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-visual", "visual", "Visual",
DEF_FRAME_VISUAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, visualName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_FRAME_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, width), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec frameOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
DEF_FRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec toplevelOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
DEF_TOPLEVEL_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, menuName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-screen", "screen", "Screen",
DEF_TOPLEVEL_SCREEN, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, screenName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-use", "use", "Use",
DEF_TOPLEVEL_USE, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, useThis),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_LABELFRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
DEF_LABELFRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_LABELFRAME_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_LABELFRAME_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, textColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-labelanchor", "labelAnchor", "LabelAnchor",
DEF_LABELFRAME_LABELANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelAnchor),
0, labelAnchorStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-labelwidget", "labelWidget", "LabelWidget",
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelWin), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_LABELFRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_LABELFRAME_TEXT, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, textPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, 0, 0, commonOptSpec, 0}
};
/*
* Class names for widgets, indexed by FrameType.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
325 326 327 328 329 330 331 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static void ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr); static int ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); | | | | | < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 |
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static void ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr);
static int ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int CreateFrame(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
enum FrameType type, const char *appName);
static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyFrame;
static void DestroyFramePartly(Frame *framePtr);
static void DisplayFrame(void *clientData);
static void FrameCmdDeletedProc(void *clientData);
static void FrameEventProc(void *clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static void FrameLostContentProc(void *clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin);
static void FrameRequestProc(void *clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin);
static void FrameStructureProc(void *clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static int FrameWidgetObjCmd(void *clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void FrameWorldChanged(void *instanceData);
static void MapFrame(void *clientData);
/*
* The structure below defines frame class behavior by means of functions that
* can be invoked from generic window code.
*/
static const Tk_ClassProcs frameClass = {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
396 397 398 399 400 401 402 | * call CreateFrame to do all of the real work. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_FrameObjCmd( | | | | | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 |
* call CreateFrame to do all of the real work.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_FrameObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_FRAME, NULL);
}
int
Tk_ToplevelObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_TOPLEVEL, NULL);
}
int
Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_LABELFRAME, NULL);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkCreateFrame( | | | 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkCreateFrame(
void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int argc, /* Number of arguments. */
const char *const *argv, /* Argument strings. */
int toplevel, /* Non-zero means create a toplevel window,
* zero means create a frame. */
const char *appName) /* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main
* window associated with the interpreter.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
475 476 477 478 479 480 481 |
}
ckfree(objv);
return result;
}
int
TkListCreateFrame(
| | | 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 |
}
ckfree(objv);
return result;
}
int
TkListCreateFrame(
void *clientData, /* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
Tcl_Obj *listObj, /* List of arguments. */
int toplevel, /* Non-zero means create a toplevel window,
* zero means create a frame. */
Tcl_Obj *nameObj) /* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main
* window associated with the interpreter.
* Gives the base name to use for the new
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
498 499 500 501 502 503 504 |
return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv,
toplevel ? TYPE_TOPLEVEL : TYPE_FRAME,
nameObj ? Tcl_GetString(nameObj) : NULL);
}
static int
CreateFrame(
| | | < | 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 |
return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv,
toplevel ? TYPE_TOPLEVEL : TYPE_FRAME,
nameObj ? Tcl_GetString(nameObj) : NULL);
}
static int
CreateFrame(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects. */
enum FrameType type, /* What widget type to create. */
const char *appName) /* Should only be non-NULL if there are no
* Main window associated with the
* interpreter. Gives the base name to use for
* the new application. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin;
Frame *framePtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window newWin;
const char *className, *screenName, *visualName, *colormapName;
const char *arg, *useOption;
int i, depth;
int length;
unsigned int mask;
Colormap colormap;
Visual *visual;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
543 544 545 546 547 548 549 |
* be processed specially, before the window is configured using the usual
* Tk mechanisms.
*/
className = colormapName = screenName = visualName = useOption = NULL;
colormap = None;
for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
| | | 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 |
* be processed specially, before the window is configured using the usual
* Tk mechanisms.
*/
className = colormapName = screenName = visualName = useOption = NULL;
colormap = None;
for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
if (length < 2) {
continue;
}
if ((arg[1] == 'c') && (length >= 3)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", length) == 0)) {
className = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
} else if ((arg[1] == 'c') && (length >= 3)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
710 711 712 713 714 715 716 |
Tk_SetClassProcs(newWin, &frameClass, framePtr);
mask = ExposureMask | StructureNotifyMask | FocusChangeMask;
if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
mask |= ActivateMask;
}
Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin, mask, FrameEventProc, framePtr);
| | | | 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 |
Tk_SetClassProcs(newWin, &frameClass, framePtr);
mask = ExposureMask | StructureNotifyMask | FocusChangeMask;
if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
mask |= ActivateMask;
}
Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin, mask, FrameEventProc, framePtr);
if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr, optionTable, newWin)
!= TCL_OK) ||
(ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK)) {
goto error;
}
if (framePtr->isContainer) {
if (framePtr->useThis != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"windows cannot have both the -use and the -container"
" option set", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "FRAME", "CONTAINMENT", NULL);
goto error;
}
TkpMakeContainer(framePtr->tkwin);
}
if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(MapFrame, framePtr);
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(newWin));
return TCL_OK;
error:
if (newWin != NULL) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(newWin);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
758 759 760 761 762 763 764 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int FrameWidgetObjCmd( | | | | | | | | 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
FrameWidgetObjCmd(
void *clientData, /* Information about frame widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
static const char *const frameOptions[] = {
"cget", "configure", NULL
};
enum options {
FRAME_CGET, FRAME_CONFIGURE
};
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
int result = TCL_OK, index;
int c, i;
int length;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[1], frameOptions,
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(framePtr);
switch ((enum options) index) {
case FRAME_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) framePtr,
framePtr->optionTable, objv[2], framePtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
break;
case FRAME_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) framePtr,
framePtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
framePtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else {
/*
* Don't allow the options -class, -colormap, -container, -screen,
* -use, or -visual to be changed.
*/
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
const char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
if (length < 2) {
continue;
}
c = arg[1];
if (((c == 'c') && (length >= 2)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", length) == 0))
|| ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", length) == 0))
|| ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-container", length) == 0))
|| ((c == 's') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", length) == 0))
|| ((c == 'u') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", length) == 0))
|| ((c == 'v')
&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", length) == 0))) {
#ifdef _WIN32
if (c == 'u') {
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
if (TkpUseWindow(interp, framePtr->tkwin,
string) != TCL_OK) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
goto done;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
886 887 888 889 890 891 892 | * Everything associated with the frame is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyFrame( | | < < < < < < < < | 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 |
* Everything associated with the frame is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyFrame(
char *memPtr) /* Info about frame widget. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)memPtr;
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)memPtr;
if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
Tk_FreeTextLayout(labelframePtr->textLayout);
if (labelframePtr->textGC != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(framePtr->display, labelframePtr->textGC);
}
}
if (framePtr->colormap != None) {
Tk_FreeColormap(framePtr->display, framePtr->colormap);
}
ckfree(framePtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DestroyFramePartly --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
982 983 984 985 986 987 988 |
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
char *oldMenuName;
Tk_Window oldWindow = NULL;
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr;
| < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 |
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
char *oldMenuName;
Tk_Window oldWindow = NULL;
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr;
/*
* Need the old menubar name for the menu code to delete it.
*/
if (framePtr->menuName == NULL) {
oldMenuName = NULL;
} else {
oldMenuName = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(framePtr->menuName) + 1);
strcpy(oldMenuName, framePtr->menuName);
}
if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
oldWindow = labelframePtr->labelWin;
}
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr,
framePtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
framePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
if (oldMenuName != NULL) {
ckfree(oldMenuName);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
/*
* A few of the options require additional processing.
*/
if ((((oldMenuName == NULL) && (framePtr->menuName != NULL))
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 | * Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameWorldChanged( | | < < < < < < < < < | 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 |
* Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed.
*
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameWorldChanged(
void *instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)instanceData;
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)instanceData;
Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc;
int anyTextLabel, anyWindowLabel;
int bWidthLeft, bWidthRight, bWidthTop, bWidthBottom;
const char *labelText;
anyTextLabel = (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) &&
(labelframePtr->textPtr != NULL) &&
(labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL);
anyWindowLabel = (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) &&
(labelframePtr->labelWin != NULL);
if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
/*
* The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's always
* created for a labelframe.
*/
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(labelframePtr->tkfont);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 | * Commands are output to X to display the frame in its current mode. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DisplayFrame( | | | | 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 |
* Commands are output to X to display the frame in its current mode.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayFrame(
void *clientData) /* Information about widget. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
int bdX1, bdY1, bdX2, bdY2, hlWidth;
Pixmap pixmap;
Bool useClipping = False;
framePtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
if ((framePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
return;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 |
* If -background is set to "", no interior is drawn.
*/
if (framePtr->border == NULL) {
return;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 |
* If -background is set to "", no interior is drawn.
*/
if (framePtr->border == NULL) {
return;
}
if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
/*
* Pass to platform specific draw function. In general, it just draws
* a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background.
*/
noLabel:
TkpDrawFrame(tkwin, framePtr->border, hlWidth,
framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->relief);
} else {
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr;
if ((labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL) &&
(labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL)) {
goto noLabel;
}
#ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
/*
* In order to avoid screen flashes, this function redraws the frame
* into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen in a single
* operation. This means there's no point in time where the on-screen
* image has been cleared.
*/
pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(framePtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
#else
pixmap = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
/*
* Clear the pixmap.
*/
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, 0, 0,
Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 |
* Draw label. If there is not room for the entire label, use
* clipping to get a nice appearance.
*/
if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.width < labelframePtr->labelReqWidth)
|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height <
labelframePtr->labelReqHeight)) {
| < < | | < > | < | 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 |
* Draw label. If there is not room for the entire label, use
* clipping to get a nice appearance.
*/
if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.width < labelframePtr->labelReqWidth)
|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height <
labelframePtr->labelReqHeight)) {
useClipping = True;
XSetClipRectangles(framePtr->display, labelframePtr->textGC, 0, 0,
&labelframePtr->labelBox, 1, Unsorted);
}
Tk_DrawTextLayout(framePtr->display, pixmap,
labelframePtr->textGC, labelframePtr->textLayout,
labelframePtr->labelTextX + LABELSPACING,
labelframePtr->labelTextY + LABELSPACING, 0, -1);
if (useClipping) {
XSetClipMask(framePtr->display, labelframePtr->textGC, None);
}
} else {
/*
* Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending
* on whether the frame is the window's parent).
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 |
} else {
Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin,
labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
}
}
| | < | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 |
} else {
Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin,
labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
}
}
#ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
/*
* Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen
* and free up the pixmap.
*/
XCopyArea(framePtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
labelframePtr->textGC, hlWidth, hlWidth,
(unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * hlWidth),
(unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * hlWidth),
hlWidth, hlWidth);
Tk_FreePixmap(framePtr->display, pixmap);
#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
}
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* FrameEventProc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 | * When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameEventProc( | | | 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 |
* When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameEventProc(
void *clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
goto redraw;
} else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 |
framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
}
if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, framePtr);
}
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(MapFrame, framePtr);
| | | 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 |
framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
}
if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, framePtr);
}
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(MapFrame, framePtr);
Tcl_EventuallyFree(framePtr, DestroyFrame);
} else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
framePtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS;
if (framePtr->highlightWidth > 0) {
goto redraw;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 | * The widget is destroyed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameCmdDeletedProc( | | | 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 |
* The widget is destroyed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameCmdDeletedProc(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
if (framePtr->menuName != NULL) {
TkSetWindowMenuBar(framePtr->interp, framePtr->tkwin,
framePtr->menuName, NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 | * The frame given by the clientData argument is mapped. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void MapFrame( | | | 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 |
* The frame given by the clientData argument is mapped.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
MapFrame(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to frame structure. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
/*
* Wait for all other background events to be processed before mapping
* window. This ensures that the window's correct geometry will have been
* determined before it is first mapped, so that the window manager
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 | * The window is disassociated from the frame when it is deleted. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameStructureProc( | | | 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 |
* The window is disassociated from the frame when it is deleted.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameStructureProc(
void *clientData, /* Pointer to record describing frame. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Describes what just happened. */
{
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)clientData;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
/*
* This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 | * on the options specified for the frame. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameRequestProc( | | | < | 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 |
* on the options specified for the frame.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameRequestProc(
void *clientData, /* Pointer to record for frame. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window)) /* Window that changed its desired size. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
FrameWorldChanged(framePtr);
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 | * Forgets all frame-related information about the content window. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void FrameLostContentProc( | | | < | 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 |
* Forgets all frame-related information about the content window.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FrameLostContentProc(
void *clientData, /* Frame structure for content window that was
* stolen away. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window)) /* Tk's handle for the content window window. */
{
Frame *framePtr = (Frame *)clientData;
Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *)clientData;
/*
* This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
* careful.
*/
if (labelframePtr->frame.type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 |
}
framePtr = (Frame *)cmdInfo.objClientData;
if (framePtr->type != TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
return NULL;
}
return framePtr->tkwin;
}
/*
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 |
}
framePtr = (Frame *)cmdInfo.objClientData;
if (framePtr->type != TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
return NULL;
}
return framePtr->tkwin;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkGC.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 |
* values in the graphics context and the other based on the display and GC
* identifier.
*/
typedef struct {
GC gc; /* Graphics context. */
Display *display; /* Display to which gc belongs. */
| | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 |
* values in the graphics context and the other based on the display and GC
* identifier.
*/
typedef struct {
GC gc; /* Graphics context. */
Display *display; /* Display to which gc belongs. */
int refCount; /* Number of active uses of gc. */
Tcl_HashEntry *valueHashPtr;/* Entry in valueTable (needed when deleting
* this structure). */
} TkGC;
typedef struct {
XGCValues values; /* Desired values for GC. */
Display *display; /* Display for which GC is valid. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 |
* This may still get called by other things shutting down, but the
* GCs should no longer be in use.
*/
return;
}
| | | 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 |
* This may still get called by other things shutting down, but the
* GCs should no longer be in use.
*/
return;
}
idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, (char *) gc);
if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeGC received unknown gc argument");
}
gcPtr = (TkGC *)Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr);
if (gcPtr->refCount-- <= 1) {
XFreeGC(gcPtr->display, gcPtr->gc);
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(gcPtr->valueHashPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGeometry.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | * None. * * Side effects: * Proc becomes the new geometry manager for tkwin, replacing any * previous geometry manager. The geometry manager will be notified (by * calling procedures in *mgrPtr) when interesting things happen in the * future. If there was an existing geometry manager for tkwin different | | | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 |
* None.
*
* Side effects:
* Proc becomes the new geometry manager for tkwin, replacing any
* previous geometry manager. The geometry manager will be notified (by
* calling procedures in *mgrPtr) when interesting things happen in the
* future. If there was an existing geometry manager for tkwin different
* from the new one, it is notified by calling its lostSlaveProc.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_ManageGeometry(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window whose geometry is to be managed by
* proc. */
const Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, /* Static structure describing the geometry
* manager. This structure must never go
* away. */
ClientData clientData) /* Arbitrary one-word argument to pass to
* geometry manager procedures. */
{
TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
if ((winPtr->geomMgrPtr != NULL) && (mgrPtr != NULL)
&& ((winPtr->geomMgrPtr != mgrPtr)
|| (winPtr->geomData != clientData))
&& (winPtr->geomMgrPtr->lostSlaveProc != NULL)) {
winPtr->geomMgrPtr->lostSlaveProc(winPtr->geomData, tkwin);
}
winPtr->geomMgrPtr = mgrPtr;
winPtr->geomData = clientData;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
329 330 331 332 333 334 335 |
if (winPtr->geomMgrName != NULL &&
strcmp(winPtr->geomMgrName, name) == 0) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (winPtr->geomMgrName != NULL) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| | | | 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 |
if (winPtr->geomMgrName != NULL &&
strcmp(winPtr->geomMgrName, name) == 0) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (winPtr->geomMgrName != NULL) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"cannot use geometry manager %s inside %s which already"
" has slaves managed by %s",
name, Tk_PathName(tkwin), winPtr->geomMgrName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "FIGHT", NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
winPtr->geomMgrName = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(name) + 1);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
557 558 559 560 561 562 563 | * container, then this procedure has no effect. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void Tk_UnmaintainGeometry( | | | 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 |
* container, then this procedure has no effect.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(
Tk_Window window, /* Window for geometry management. */
Tk_Window container) /* Container for window; must be a descendant of
* window's parent. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
MaintainContainer *containerPtr;
MaintainContent *contentPtr, *prevPtr;
Tk_Window ancestor;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGet.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 |
Tk_Justify justify) /* Justification style for which identifying
* string is desired. */
{
switch (justify) {
case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT: return "left";
case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: return "right";
case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: return "center";
}
return "unknown justification style";
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
| > | 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 |
Tk_Justify justify) /* Justification style for which identifying
* string is desired. */
{
switch (justify) {
case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT: return "left";
case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: return "right";
case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: return "center";
default: break;
}
return "unknown justification style";
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 |
* units. */
const char *string, /* String describing a number of pixels. */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store converted result. */
{
char *end;
double d;
d = strtod((char *) string, &end);
if (end == string) {
goto error;
}
while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
end++;
}
| > > > > > | 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 |
* units. */
const char *string, /* String describing a number of pixels. */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store converted result. */
{
char *end;
double d;
if (!tkwin) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("bad screen"));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "FRACTIONAL_PIXELS", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
d = strtod((char *) string, &end);
if (end == string) {
goto error;
}
while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
end++;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGrab.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #elif !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) #include "tkUnixInt.h" #endif /* * The grab state machine has four states: ungrabbed, button pressed, grabbed, * and button pressed while grabbed. In addition, there are three pieces of * grab state information: the current grab window, the current restrict * window, and whether the mouse is captured. * | > > | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #elif !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) #include "tkUnixInt.h" #else #include "tkMacOSXInt.h" #endif /* * The grab state machine has four states: ungrabbed, button pressed, grabbed, * and button pressed while grabbed. In addition, there are three pieces of * grab state information: the current grab window, the current restrict * window, and whether the mouse is captured. * * The current grab window specifies the point in the Tk window hierarchy * above which pointer events will not be reported. Any window within the * subtree below the grab window will continue to receive events as normal. * Events outside of the grab tree will be reported to the grab window. * * If the current restrict window is set, then all pointer events will be * reported only to the restrict window. The restrict window is normally set * during an automatic button grab. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
174 175 176 177 178 179 180 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
int globalGrab;
Tk_Window tkwin;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
const char *arg;
int index;
| | | 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
int globalGrab;
Tk_Window tkwin;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
const char *arg;
int index;
int len;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"current", "release", "set", "status", NULL
};
static const char *const flagStrings[] = {
"-global", NULL
};
enum options {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* First check for a window name or "-global" as the first argument.
*/
| | | 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* First check for a window name or "-global" as the first argument.
*/
arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], &len);
if (arg[0] == '.') {
/* [grab window] */
if (objc != 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?-global? window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, arg, (Tk_Window)clientData);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
266 267 268 269 270 271 272 |
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
(Tk_Window)clientData);
if (tkwin == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
| | | | 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 |
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
(Tk_Window)clientData);
if (tkwin == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj((Tk_Window)
dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr));
}
} else {
Tcl_Obj *resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
for (dispPtr = TkGetDisplayList(); dispPtr != NULL;
dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj, TkNewWindowObj(
(Tk_Window) dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr));
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
return TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
662 663 664 665 666 667 668 | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkPointerEvent -- * * This function is called for each pointer-related event, before the * event has been processed. It does various things to make grabs work * correctly. | < < < < | 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkPointerEvent --
*
* This function is called for each pointer-related event, before the
* event has been processed. It does various things to make grabs work
* correctly.
*
* Results:
* If the return value is 1 it means the event should be processed (event
* handlers should be invoked). If the return value is 0 it means the
* event should be ignored in order to make grabs work correctly. In some
* cases this function modifies the event.
*
* Side effects:
* Grab state information may be updated. New events may also be pushed
* back onto the event queue to replace or augment the one passed in
* here.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkPointerEvent(
XEvent *eventPtr, /* Pointer to the event. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
773 774 775 776 777 778 779 |
&& (winPtr != dispPtr->buttonWinPtr)) {
return 0;
}
}
return 1;
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 |
&& (winPtr != dispPtr->buttonWinPtr)) {
return 0;
}
}
return 1;
}
if (!appGrabbed) {
return 1;
}
if (eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) {
/*
* When grabs are active, X reports motion events relative to the
* window under the pointer. Instead, it should report the events
* relative to the window the button went down in, if there is a
* button down. Otherwise, if the pointer window is outside the
* subtree of the grab window, the events should be reported relative
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
813 814 815 816 817 818 819 |
winPtr2 = dispPtr->grabWinPtr;
}
if (winPtr2 != winPtr) {
TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr2);
Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_HEAD);
return 0;
}
| < < < < < < < | 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 |
winPtr2 = dispPtr->grabWinPtr;
}
if (winPtr2 != winPtr) {
TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr2);
Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_HEAD);
return 0;
}
return 1;
}
/*
* Process ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events:
* 1. Keep track of whether a button is down and what window it went down
* in.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
892 893 894 895 896 897 898 |
}
dispPtr->buttonWinPtr = winPtr;
return 1;
}
} else {
if (eventPtr->xbutton.button != AnyButton &&
((eventPtr->xbutton.state & ALL_BUTTONS)
| | | 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 |
}
dispPtr->buttonWinPtr = winPtr;
return 1;
}
} else {
if (eventPtr->xbutton.button != AnyButton &&
((eventPtr->xbutton.state & ALL_BUTTONS)
== TkGetButtonMask(eventPtr->xbutton.button))) {
ReleaseButtonGrab(dispPtr); /* Note 4. */
}
}
if (winPtr2 != winPtr) {
TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr2);
Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_HEAD);
return 0; /* Note 3. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGrid.c.
1 2 3 4 5 | /* * tkGrid.c -- * * Grid based geometry manager. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | /* * tkGrid.c -- * * Grid based geometry manager. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
258 259 260 261 262 263 264 | static int AdjustOffsets(int width, int elements, SlotInfo *slotPtr); static void ArrangeGrid(ClientData clientData); static int CheckSlotData(Gridder *containerPtr, int slot, int slotType, int checkOnly); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); | | | 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 | static int AdjustOffsets(int width, int elements, SlotInfo *slotPtr); static void ArrangeGrid(ClientData clientData); static int CheckSlotData(Gridder *containerPtr, int slot, int slotType, int checkOnly); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyGrid; static Gridder * GetGrid(Tk_Window tkwin); static int GridAnchorCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static int GridBboxCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static int GridForgetRemoveCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void GridStructureProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static void GridLostContentProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin); static void GridReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin); static void InitContainerData(Gridder *containerPtr); | | | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 |
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void GridStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static void GridLostContentProc(ClientData clientData,
Tk_Window tkwin);
static void GridReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
static void InitContainerData(Gridder *containerPtr);
static Tcl_Obj * NewPairObj(int, int);
static Tcl_Obj * NewQuadObj(int, int, int, int);
static int ResolveConstraints(Gridder *gridPtr, int rowOrColumn,
int maxOffset);
static void SetGridSize(Gridder *gridPtr);
static int SetContentColumn(Tcl_Interp *interp, Gridder *contentPtr,
int column, int numCols);
static int SetContentRow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Gridder *contentPtr,
int row, int numRows);
static Tcl_Obj * StickyToObj(int flags);
static int StringToSticky(const char *string);
static void Unlink(Gridder *gridPtr);
static const Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
"grid", /* name */
GridReqProc, /* requestProc */
GridLostContentProc, /* lostSlaveProc */
};
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_GridCmd --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
337 338 339 340 341 342 343 |
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"anchor", "bbox", "columnconfigure", "configure",
"content", "forget", "info", "location", "propagate",
"remove", "rowconfigure", "size", "slaves", NULL
};
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 |
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"anchor", "bbox", "columnconfigure", "configure",
"content", "forget", "info", "location", "propagate",
"remove", "rowconfigure", "size", "slaves", NULL
};
enum options {
GRID_ANCHOR, GRID_BBOX, GRID_COLUMNCONFIGURE, GRID_CONFIGURE,
GRID_CONTENT, GRID_FORGET, GRID_INFO, GRID_LOCATION, GRID_PROPAGATE,
GRID_REMOVE, GRID_ROWCONFIGURE, GRID_SIZE, GRID_SLAVES
};
int index;
if (objc >= 2) {
const char *argv1 = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
if ((argv1[0] == '.') || (argv1[0] == REL_SKIP) ||
(argv1[0] == REL_VERT)) {
return ConfigureContent(interp, tkwin, objc-1, objv+1);
}
}
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option arg ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[1], optionStrings,
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum options) index) {
case GRID_ANCHOR:
return GridAnchorCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
case GRID_BBOX:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?anchor?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?anchor?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (objc == 3) {
gridPtr = containerPtr->containerDataPtr;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
Tk_NameOfAnchor(gridPtr?gridPtr->anchor:GRID_DEFAULT_ANCHOR),
-1));
return TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
520 521 522 523 524 525 526 |
int row, column; /* origin for bounding box */
int row2, column2; /* end of bounding box */
int endX, endY; /* last column/row in the layout */
int x=0, y=0; /* starting pixels for this bounding box */
int width, height; /* size of the bounding box */
if (objc!=3 && objc != 5 && objc != 7) {
| | | > > | 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 |
int row, column; /* origin for bounding box */
int row2, column2; /* end of bounding box */
int endX, endY; /* last column/row in the layout */
int x=0, y=0; /* starting pixels for this bounding box */
int width, height; /* size of the bounding box */
if (objc!=3 && objc != 5 && objc != 7) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "master ?column row ?column row??");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (objc >= 5) {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &column) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &row) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 |
char c = string[0];
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 |
char c = string[0];
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetGrid(content))) {
continue;
}
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) {
/*
* For "forget", reset all the settings to their defaults
*/
if (c == 'f') {
contentPtr->column = -1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
741 742 743 744 745 746 747 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | | | | | | 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetGrid(content))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (contentPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
return TCL_OK;
}
infoObj = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-in", -1),
TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-column", -1),
Tcl_NewIntObj(contentPtr->column));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-row", -1),
Tcl_NewIntObj(contentPtr->row));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-columnspan", -1),
Tcl_NewIntObj(contentPtr->numCols));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-rowspan", -1),
Tcl_NewIntObj(contentPtr->numRows));
TkAppendPadAmount(infoObj, "-ipadx", contentPtr->iPadX/2, contentPtr->iPadX);
TkAppendPadAmount(infoObj, "-ipady", contentPtr->iPadY/2, contentPtr->iPadY);
TkAppendPadAmount(infoObj, "-padx", contentPtr->padLeft, contentPtr->padX);
TkAppendPadAmount(infoObj, "-pady", contentPtr->padTop, contentPtr->padY);
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-sticky", -1),
StickyToObj(contentPtr->sticky));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, infoObj);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
801 802 803 804 805 806 807 |
GridContainer *gridPtr; /* Pointer to grid data. */
SlotInfo *slotPtr;
int x, y; /* Offset in pixels, from edge of container. */
int i, j; /* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
int endX, endY; /* End of grid. */
if (objc != 5) {
| | | > > | 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 |
GridContainer *gridPtr; /* Pointer to grid data. */
SlotInfo *slotPtr;
int x, y; /* Offset in pixels, from edge of container. */
int i, j; /* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
int endX, endY; /* End of grid. */
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "master x y");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, container, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, container, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (containerPtr->containerDataPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(-1, -1));
return TCL_OK;
}
gridPtr = containerPtr->containerDataPtr;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
897 898 899 900 901 902 903 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?boolean?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?boolean?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (objc == 3) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(!(containerPtr->flags & DONT_PROPAGATE)));
return TCL_OK;
}
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3], &propagate) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 |
enum options {
ROWCOL_MINSIZE, ROWCOL_PAD, ROWCOL_UNIFORM, ROWCOL_WEIGHT
};
int index;
Tcl_Obj *listCopy;
if (((objc % 2 != 0) && (objc > 6)) || (objc < 4)) {
| | | 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 |
enum options {
ROWCOL_MINSIZE, ROWCOL_PAD, ROWCOL_UNIFORM, ROWCOL_WEIGHT
};
int index;
Tcl_Obj *listCopy;
if (((objc % 2 != 0) && (objc > 6)) || (objc < 4)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "master index ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("no %s indices specified",
(slotType == COLUMN) ? "column" : "row"));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "NO_INDEX", NULL);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf("no %s indices specified",
(slotType == COLUMN) ? "column" : "row"));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "NO_INDEX", NULL);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
first = 0;
last = 0;
if ((objc == 4) || (objc == 5)) {
if (lObjc != 1) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"must specify a single element on retrieval", -1));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 |
pad = slotPtr[slot].pad;
weight = slotPtr[slot].weight;
uniform = slotPtr[slot].uniform;
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-minsize", -1));
| | | | | | | | 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 |
pad = slotPtr[slot].pad;
weight = slotPtr[slot].weight;
uniform = slotPtr[slot].uniform;
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-minsize", -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(minsize));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-pad", -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(pad));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-uniform", -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj(uniform == NULL ? "" : uniform, -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res,
Tcl_NewStringObj("-weight", -1));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(weight));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, res);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* If only one option is given, with no value, the current value is
* returned.
*/
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[4], optionStrings,
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (index == ROWCOL_MINSIZE) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
(ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].minSize : 0));
} else if (index == ROWCOL_WEIGHT) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
(ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].weight : 0));
} else if (index == ROWCOL_UNIFORM) {
Tk_Uid value = (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].uniform : "";
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
(value == NULL) ? "" : value, -1));
} else if (index == ROWCOL_PAD) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
(ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].pad : 0));
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_OK;
}
for (j = 0; j < lObjc; j++) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 |
allContent = 1;
} else if (TkGetWindowFromObj(NULL, tkwin, lObjv[j], &content)
== TCL_OK) {
/*
* Is it gridded in this container?
*/
| | > > | | 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 |
allContent = 1;
} else if (TkGetWindowFromObj(NULL, tkwin, lObjv[j], &content)
== TCL_OK) {
/*
* Is it gridded in this container?
*/
if (!(contentPtr = GetGrid(content))) {
continue;
}
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != containerPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"the window \"%s\" is not managed by \"%s\"",
Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]), Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "NOT_MASTER", NULL);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"illegal index \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "GRID_INDEX", NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (containerPtr->containerDataPtr != NULL) {
SetGridSize(containerPtr);
gridPtr = containerPtr->containerDataPtr;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(
MAX(gridPtr->columnEnd, gridPtr->columnMax),
MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax)));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 |
row = value;
}
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | | 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 |
row = value;
}
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) {
if ((column >= 0) && (contentPtr->column > column
|| contentPtr->column+contentPtr->numCols-1 < column)) {
continue;
}
if ((row >= 0) && (contentPtr->row > row ||
contentPtr->row+contentPtr->numRows-1 < row)) {
continue;
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp,res, TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->tkwin));
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, res);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * GetGrid -- * * This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid structure for a given | | > | > > > > | 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 |
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetGrid --
*
* This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid structure for a given
* window, creating one if one doesn't exist already, except if the window
* is already dead.
*
* Results:
* The return value is a pointer to the Grid structure corresponding to
* tkwin, or NULL when tkwin is already dead.
*
* Side effects:
* A new grid structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set up
* to clean things up when the window is deleted.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Gridder *
GetGrid(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for window for which grid structure
* is desired. */
{
Gridder *gridPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (((TkWindow *) tkwin)->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
return NULL;
}
if (!dispPtr->gridInit) {
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->gridHashTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
dispPtr->gridInit = 1;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 |
gridPtr->iPadY = 0;
gridPtr->doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
gridPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
gridPtr->flags = 0;
gridPtr->sticky = 0;
gridPtr->size = 0;
gridPtr->in = NULL;
| < | 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 |
gridPtr->iPadY = 0;
gridPtr->doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
gridPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
gridPtr->flags = 0;
gridPtr->sticky = 0;
gridPtr->size = 0;
gridPtr->in = NULL;
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, gridPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
GridStructureProc, gridPtr);
return gridPtr;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 |
SetGridSize(contentPtr->containerPtr);
contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
/*
* If we have emptied this container from content it means we are no longer
* handling it and should mark it as free.
| < < < < | 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 |
SetGridSize(contentPtr->containerPtr);
contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
/*
* If we have emptied this container from content it means we are no longer
* handling it and should mark it as free.
*/
if ((containerPtr->contentPtr == NULL) && (containerPtr->flags & ALLOCED_CONTAINER)) {
TkFreeGeometryContainer(containerPtr->tkwin, "grid");
containerPtr->flags &= ~ALLOCED_CONTAINER;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DestroyGrid --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 | * Everything associated with the grid is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyGrid( | | > > > | 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 |
* Everything associated with the grid is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyGrid(
char *memPtr) /* Info about window that is now dead. */
{
Gridder *gridPtr = (Gridder *)memPtr;
if (gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangeGrid, gridPtr);
}
if (gridPtr->containerDataPtr != NULL) {
if (gridPtr->containerDataPtr->rowPtr != NULL) {
ckfree(gridPtr->containerDataPtr -> rowPtr);
}
if (gridPtr->containerDataPtr->columnPtr != NULL) {
ckfree(gridPtr->containerDataPtr -> columnPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 | Tk_ManageGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL); Tk_UnmapWindow(contentPtr->tkwin); contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL; nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr; contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL; } Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->gridHashTable, | | | | 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 |
Tk_ManageGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
Tk_UnmapWindow(contentPtr->tkwin);
contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->gridHashTable,
(char *)gridPtr->tkwin));
if (gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangeGrid, gridPtr);
}
gridPtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_EventuallyFree(gridPtr, DestroyGrid);
} else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
if ((gridPtr->contentPtr != NULL)
&& !(gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
gridPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, gridPtr);
}
} else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 |
/*
* Count the number of windows, or window short-cuts.
*/
firstChar = 0;
for (numWindows=0, i=0; i < objc; i++) {
| | | | > > | > > | > > | 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 |
/*
* Count the number of windows, or window short-cuts.
*/
firstChar = 0;
for (numWindows=0, i=0; i < objc; i++) {
int length;
char prevChar = firstChar;
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
firstChar = string[0];
if (firstChar == '.') {
/*
* Check that windows are valid, and locate the first content's
* parent window (default for -in).
*/
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
/*
* Is there any saved -in from a removed content?
* If there is, it becomes default for -in.
* If the stored container does not exist, just ignore it.
*/
if (!(contentPtr = GetGrid(content))) {
continue;
}
if (contentPtr->in != NULL) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, content, contentPtr->in, &parent)
== TCL_OK) {
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(parent))) {
continue;
}
InitContainerData(containerPtr);
}
}
}
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
parent = Tk_Parent(content);
if (parent != NULL) {
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(parent))) {
continue;
}
InitContainerData(containerPtr);
}
}
numWindows++;
continue;
}
if (length > 1 && i == 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (index == CONF_IN) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) !=
TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (index == CONF_IN) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) !=
TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(other))) {
continue;
}
InitContainerData(containerPtr);
} else if (index == CONF_ROW) {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
|| tmp < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad row value \"%s\": must be a non-negative integer",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1])));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 |
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't manage \"%s\": it's a top-level window",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 |
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't manage \"%s\": it's a top-level window",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetGrid(content))) {
continue;
}
/*
* The following statement is taken from tkPack.c:
*
* "If the content isn't currently managed, reset all of its
* configuration information to default values (there could be old
* values left from a previous packer)."
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 |
if (other == content) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"window can't be managed in itself", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "SELF", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
positionGiven = 1;
| | > > | 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 |
if (other == content) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"window can't be managed in itself", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "SELF", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
positionGiven = 1;
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(other))) {
continue;
}
InitContainerData(containerPtr);
break;
case CONF_STICKY: {
int sticky = StringToSticky(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
if (sticky == -1) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 |
* Make sure we have a geometry container. We look at:
* 1) the -in flag
* 2) the parent of the first content.
*/
parent = Tk_Parent(content);
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
| | > > | 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 |
* Make sure we have a geometry container. We look at:
* 1) the -in flag
* 2) the parent of the first content.
*/
parent = Tk_Parent(content);
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
if (!(containerPtr = GetGrid(parent))) {
continue;
}
InitContainerData(containerPtr);
}
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL && contentPtr->containerPtr != containerPtr) {
if (contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 |
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| | | | 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 |
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't put %s inside %s", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", NULL);
Unlink(contentPtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
/*
* Check for management loops.
*/
for (container = (TkWindow *)containerPtr->tkwin; container != NULL;
container = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(container)) {
if (container == (TkWindow *)content) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't put %s inside %s, would cause management loop",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "LOOP", NULL);
Unlink(contentPtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(content)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 |
}
if (firstChar != REL_VERT) {
continue;
}
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
| | | 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 |
}
if (firstChar != REL_VERT) {
continue;
}
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't use '^', cant find master", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "SHORTCUT_USAGE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Count the number of consecutive ^'s starting from this position.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 |
*/
if (lastWindow == NULL) {
lastRow = defaultRow - 1;
lastColumn = 0;
} else {
other = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, lastWindow, tkwin);
| | > > | 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 |
*/
if (lastWindow == NULL) {
lastRow = defaultRow - 1;
lastColumn = 0;
} else {
other = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, lastWindow, tkwin);
if (!(otherPtr = GetGrid(other))) {
continue;
}
lastRow = otherPtr->row + otherPtr->numRows - 2;
lastColumn = otherPtr->column + otherPtr->numCols;
}
lastColumn += numSkip;
match = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 |
numSkip = 0;
break;
}
}
}
if (!match) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
| | | < < < < | 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 |
numSkip = 0;
break;
}
}
}
if (!match) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't find slave to extend with \"^\"", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "SHORTCUT_USAGE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't determine master window", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GRID", "SHORTCUT_USAGE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
SetGridSize(containerPtr);
/*
* If we have emptied this container from content it means we are no longer
* handling it and should mark it as free.
*/
if (containerPtr->contentPtr == NULL && containerPtr->flags & ALLOCED_CONTAINER) {
TkFreeGeometryContainer(containerPtr->tkwin, "grid");
containerPtr->flags &= ~ALLOCED_CONTAINER;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * NewPairObj( | | | | | 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 |
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
NewPairObj(
int val1, int val2)
{
Tcl_Obj *ary[2];
ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
return Tcl_NewListObj(2, ary);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* NewQuadObj --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * NewQuadObj( | | | | | | | 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 |
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
NewQuadObj(
int val1, int val2, int val3, int val4)
{
Tcl_Obj *ary[4];
ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
ary[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val3);
ary[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val4);
return Tcl_NewListObj(4, ary);
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkImage.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
/*
* Each call to Tk_GetImage returns a pointer to one of the following
* structures, which is used as a token by clients (widgets) that display
* images.
*/
typedef struct Image {
| > > > > | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 |
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* Each call to Tk_GetImage returns a pointer to one of the following
* structures, which is used as a token by clients (widgets) that display
* images.
*/
typedef struct Image {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 |
ClientData instanceData; /* One word argument to pass to image manager
* when dealing with this image instance. */
Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
/* Code in widget to call when image changes
* in a way that affects redisplay. */
ClientData widgetClientData;/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
struct Image *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all image instances
* associated with the same name. */
} Image;
/*
* For each image model there is one of the following structures, which
* represents a name in the image table and all of the images instantiated
* from it. Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to these structures.
| > > | 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 |
ClientData instanceData; /* One word argument to pass to image manager
* when dealing with this image instance. */
Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
/* Code in widget to call when image changes
* in a way that affects redisplay. */
ClientData widgetClientData;/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
struct Image *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all image instances
* associated with the same name. */
struct Image *prevPtr; /* Previous in list of all image instances
* associated with the same name. */
} Image;
/*
* For each image model there is one of the following structures, which
* represents a name in the image table and all of the images instantiated
* from it. Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to these structures.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; /* * Prototypes for local functions: */ static void ImageTypeThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData); | | | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 | static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey; /* * Prototypes for local functions: */ static void ImageTypeThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData); static Tcl_FreeProc DeleteImage; static void EventuallyDeleteImage(ImageModel *modelPtr, int forgetImageHashNow); /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ImageTypeThreadExitProc -- |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 |
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Tcl_HashSearch search;
char idString[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
const char *arg, *name;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
| | | 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 |
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Tcl_HashSearch search;
char idString[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
const char *arg, *name;
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?args?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[1], imageOptions,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 |
/*
* Figure out a name to use for the new image.
*/
if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
do {
dispPtr->imageId++;
| | | 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 |
/*
* Figure out a name to use for the new image.
*/
if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
do {
dispPtr->imageId++;
snprintf(idString, sizeof(idString), "image%d", dispPtr->imageId);
name = idString;
} while (Tcl_FindCommand(interp, name, NULL, 0) != NULL);
firstOption = 3;
} else {
TkWindow *topWin;
name = arg;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
364 365 366 367 368 369 370 |
args = (Tcl_Obj **)ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(Tcl_Obj *));
for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
}
args[objc] = NULL;
}
Tcl_Preserve(modelPtr);
| > > > > > > > | | > > | 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 |
args = (Tcl_Obj **)ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(Tcl_Obj *));
for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
}
args[objc] = NULL;
}
Tcl_Preserve(modelPtr);
if (oldimage) {
typedef int (OldCreateProc)(Tcl_Interp*, char*, int, char**,
Tk_ImageType*, Tk_ImageModel, ClientData*);
i = ((OldCreateProc*)typePtr->createProc)(interp,
(char*)name, objc, (char**)args, typePtr,
(Tk_ImageModel)modelPtr, &modelPtr->modelData);
} else {
i = typePtr->createProc(interp, name, objc, args, typePtr,
(Tk_ImageModel)modelPtr, &modelPtr->modelData);
}
if (i != TCL_OK){
EventuallyDeleteImage(modelPtr, 0);
Tcl_Release(modelPtr);
if (oldimage) {
ckfree(args);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
398 399 400 401 402 403 404 |
if (hPtr == NULL) {
goto alreadyDeleted;
}
modelPtr = (ImageModel *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
if (modelPtr->deleted) {
goto alreadyDeleted;
}
| | | 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 |
if (hPtr == NULL) {
goto alreadyDeleted;
}
modelPtr = (ImageModel *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
if (modelPtr->deleted) {
goto alreadyDeleted;
}
DeleteImage((char *)modelPtr);
}
break;
case IMAGE_NAMES:
if (objc != 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
468 469 470 471 472 473 474 |
/*
* Now we read off the specific piece of data we were asked for.
*/
switch ((enum options) index) {
case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
| | | | 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 |
/*
* Now we read off the specific piece of data we were asked for.
*/
switch ((enum options) index) {
case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(modelPtr->height));
break;
case IMAGE_INUSE:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(
modelPtr->typePtr && modelPtr->instancePtr));
break;
case IMAGE_TYPE:
if (modelPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewStringObj(modelPtr->typePtr->name, -1));
}
break;
case IMAGE_WIDTH:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(modelPtr->width));
break;
default:
Tcl_Panic("can't happen");
}
break;
}
return TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 |
imagePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
imagePtr->modelPtr = modelPtr;
imagePtr->instanceData =
modelPtr->typePtr->getProc(tkwin, modelPtr->modelData);
imagePtr->changeProc = changeProc;
imagePtr->widgetClientData = clientData;
imagePtr->nextPtr = modelPtr->instancePtr;
modelPtr->instancePtr = imagePtr;
return (Tk_Image) imagePtr;
noSuchImage:
if (interp) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image \"%s\" doesn't exist", name));
| > > > > | 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 |
imagePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
imagePtr->modelPtr = modelPtr;
imagePtr->instanceData =
modelPtr->typePtr->getProc(tkwin, modelPtr->modelData);
imagePtr->changeProc = changeProc;
imagePtr->widgetClientData = clientData;
imagePtr->nextPtr = modelPtr->instancePtr;
if (imagePtr->nextPtr) {
imagePtr->nextPtr->prevPtr = imagePtr;
}
imagePtr->prevPtr = NULL;
modelPtr->instancePtr = imagePtr;
return (Tk_Image) imagePtr;
noSuchImage:
if (interp) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image \"%s\" doesn't exist", name));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
664 665 666 667 668 669 670 |
void
Tk_FreeImage(
Tk_Image image) /* Token for image that is no longer needed by
* a widget. */
{
Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
ImageModel *modelPtr = imagePtr->modelPtr;
| < | | | > > | > | < | 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 |
void
Tk_FreeImage(
Tk_Image image) /* Token for image that is no longer needed by
* a widget. */
{
Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
ImageModel *modelPtr = imagePtr->modelPtr;
/*
* Clean up the particular instance.
*/
if (modelPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
modelPtr->typePtr->freeProc(imagePtr->instanceData,
imagePtr->display);
}
if (imagePtr->prevPtr) {
imagePtr->prevPtr->nextPtr = imagePtr->nextPtr;
if (imagePtr->nextPtr) {
imagePtr->nextPtr->prevPtr = imagePtr->prevPtr;
}
} else {
modelPtr->instancePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr;
if (modelPtr->instancePtr) {
modelPtr->instancePtr->prevPtr = NULL;
}
}
ckfree(imagePtr);
/*
* If there are no more instances left for the model, and if the model
* image has been deleted, then delete the model too.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 |
if (winPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, name);
if (hPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
| | | 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 |
if (winPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, name);
if (hPtr == NULL) {
return;
}
DeleteImage((char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* DeleteImage --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 | * existing instances will not be deleted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DeleteImage( | | > | 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 |
* existing instances will not be deleted.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DeleteImage(
char *blockPtr) /* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
{
Image *imagePtr;
Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
ImageModel *modelPtr = (ImageModel *)blockPtr;
typePtr = modelPtr->typePtr;
modelPtr->typePtr = NULL;
if (typePtr != NULL) {
for (imagePtr = modelPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
typePtr->freeProc(imagePtr->instanceData, imagePtr->display);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 |
* to vanish. */
{
if (forgetImageHashNow) {
modelPtr->hPtr = NULL;
}
if (!modelPtr->deleted) {
modelPtr->deleted = 1;
| | | 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 |
* to vanish. */
{
if (forgetImageHashNow) {
modelPtr->hPtr = NULL;
}
if (!modelPtr->deleted) {
modelPtr->deleted = 1;
Tcl_EventuallyFree(modelPtr, DeleteImage);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkDeleteAllImages --
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgBmap.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | /* * tkImgBmap.c -- * * This procedure implements images of type "bitmap" for Tk. * * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 |
/*
* tkImgBmap.c --
*
* This procedure implements images of type "bitmap" for Tk.
*
* Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
* of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
/*
* The following data structure represents the model for a bitmap
* image:
*/
typedef struct BitmapModel {
Tk_ImageModel tkModel; /* Tk's token for image model. NULL means the
* image is being deleted. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter for application that is using
* image. */
Tcl_Command imageCmd; /* Token for image command (used to delete it
* when the image goes away). NULL means the
* image command has already been deleted. */
int width, height; /* Dimensions of image. */
char *data; /* Data comprising bitmap (suitable for input
* to XCreateBitmapFromData). May be NULL if
* no data. Malloc'ed. */
char *maskData; /* Data for bitmap's mask (suitable for input
* to XCreateBitmapFromData). Malloc'ed. */
Tk_Uid fgUid; /* Value of -foreground option. */
Tk_Uid bgUid; /* Value of -background option. */
char *fileString; /* Value of -file option (malloc'ed). */
char *dataString; /* Value of -data option (malloc'ed). */
char *maskFileString; /* Value of -maskfile option (malloc'ed). */
char *maskDataString; /* Value of -maskdata option (malloc'ed). */
struct BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
/* First in list of all instances associated
* with this model. */
} BitmapModel;
/*
* The following data structure represents all of the instances of an image
* that lie within a particular window:
*/
typedef struct BitmapInstance {
int refCount; /* Number of instances that share this data
* structure. */
BitmapModel *modelPtr; /* Pointer to model for image. */
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Window in which the instances will be
* displayed. */
XColor *fg; /* Foreground color for displaying image. */
XColor *bg; /* Background color for displaying image. */
Pixmap bitmap; /* The bitmap to display. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | /* * The type record for bitmap images: */ static int GetByte(Tcl_Channel chan); static int ImgBmapCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, | | | | | | | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 |
/*
* The type record for bitmap images:
*/
static int GetByte(Tcl_Channel chan);
static int ImgBmapCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
const Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model,
void **clientDataPtr);
static void *ImgBmapGet(Tk_Window tkwin, void *clientData);
static void ImgBmapDisplay(void *clientData,
Display *display, Drawable drawable,
int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height,
int drawableX, int drawableY);
static void ImgBmapFree(void *clientData, Display *display);
static void ImgBmapDelete(void *clientData);
static int ImgBmapPostscript(void *clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int prepass);
Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
"bitmap", /* name */
ImgBmapCreate, /* createProc */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 |
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", NULL, NULL,
| | | | | | | | 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 |
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", NULL, NULL,
"", Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, bgUid), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, dataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_UID, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
"#000000", Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, fgUid), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskdata", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, maskDataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskfile", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapModel, maskFileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* The following data structure is used to describe the state of parsing a
* bitmap file or string. It is used for communication between TkGetBitmapData
* and NextBitmapWord.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 |
int wordLength; /* Number of non-NULL bytes in word. */
} ParseInfo;
/*
* Prototypes for procedures used only locally in this file:
*/
| | | | | | 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 |
int wordLength; /* Number of non-NULL bytes in word. */
} ParseInfo;
/*
* Prototypes for procedures used only locally in this file:
*/
static int ImgBmapCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(void *clientData);
static void ImgBmapConfigureInstance(BitmapInstance *instancePtr);
static int ImgBmapConfigureModel(BitmapModel *modelPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int NextBitmapWord(ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr);
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImgBmapCreate --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 |
*/
static int
ImgBmapCreate(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for application containing
* image. */
const char *name, /* Name to use for image. */
| | | | | < | | 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 |
*/
static int
ImgBmapCreate(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for application containing
* image. */
const char *name, /* Name to use for image. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects for options (doesn't
* include image name or type). */
TCL_UNUSED(const Tk_ImageType *),/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
Tk_ImageModel model, /* Token for image, to be used by us in later
* callbacks. */
void **clientDataPtr) /* Store manager's token for image here; it
* will be returned in later callbacks. */
{
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)ckalloc(sizeof(BitmapModel));
modelPtr->tkModel = model;
modelPtr->interp = interp;
modelPtr->imageCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, ImgBmapCmd,
modelPtr, ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc);
modelPtr->width = modelPtr->height = 0;
modelPtr->data = NULL;
modelPtr->maskData = NULL;
modelPtr->fgUid = NULL;
modelPtr->bgUid = NULL;
modelPtr->fileString = NULL;
modelPtr->dataString = NULL;
modelPtr->maskFileString = NULL;
modelPtr->maskDataString = NULL;
modelPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
if (ImgBmapConfigureModel(modelPtr, objc, objv, 0) != TCL_OK) {
ImgBmapDelete(modelPtr);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*clientDataPtr = modelPtr;
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 |
int objc, /* Number of entries in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
* as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
{
BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2;
| < < < < < < | < < | 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 |
int objc, /* Number of entries in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
* as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
{
BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2;
if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(modelPtr->interp, Tk_MainWindow(modelPtr->interp),
configSpecs, objc, (const char **) objv, (char *) modelPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data. Make sure that the
* bitmap and mask have the same dimensions.
*/
if (modelPtr->data != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
496 497 498 499 500 501 502 |
if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't get bitmap data from a file in a safe interpreter",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "BITMAP_FILE", NULL);
return NULL;
}
| | | > > < < < < | 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 |
if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't get bitmap data from a file in a safe interpreter",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "BITMAP_FILE", NULL);
return NULL;
}
expandedFileName = Tcl_TranslateFileName(NULL, fileName, &buffer);
if (expandedFileName == NULL) {
Tcl_SetErrno(ENOENT);
goto cannotRead;
}
pi.chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, expandedFileName, "r", 0);
Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
if (pi.chan == NULL) {
cannotRead:
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"couldn't read bitmap file \"%s\": %s",
fileName, Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
}
return NULL;
}
if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) {
return NULL;
}
} else {
pi.chan = NULL;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
747 748 749 750 751 752 753 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ImgBmapCmd( | | | 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImgBmapCmd(
void *clientData, /* Information about the image model. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
static const char *const bmapOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", NULL};
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)clientData;
int index;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
771 772 773 774 775 776 777 |
switch (index) {
case 0: /* cget */
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
| | | | | 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 |
switch (index) {
case 0: /* cget */
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
(char *)modelPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
case 1: /* configure */
if (objc == 2) {
return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
configSpecs, (char *)modelPtr, NULL, 0);
} else if (objc == 3) {
return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
configSpecs, (char *)modelPtr,
Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
} else {
return ImgBmapConfigureModel(modelPtr, objc-2, objv+2,
TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
}
default:
Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to bmapOptions in ImgBmapCmd");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
808 809 810 811 812 813 814 | * Side effects: * A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance * is re-used for the new one). * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 |
* Side effects:
* A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance
* is re-used for the new one).
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void *
ImgBmapGet(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which the instance will be
* used. */
void *modelData) /* Pointer to our model structure for the
* image. */
{
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)modelData;
BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
/*
* See if there is already an instance for this window. If so then just
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
879 880 881 882 883 884 885 | * A portion of the image gets rendered in a pixmap or window. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgBmapDisplay( | | | 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 |
* A portion of the image gets rendered in a pixmap or window.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgBmapDisplay(
void *clientData, /* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
* instance to be displayed. */
Display *display, /* Display on which to draw image. */
Drawable drawable, /* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
int imageX, int imageY, /* Upper-left corner of region within image to
* draw. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
int drawableX, int drawableY)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
940 941 942 943 944 945 946 | * Internal data structures get cleaned up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgBmapFree( | | | 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 |
* Internal data structures get cleaned up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgBmapFree(
void *clientData, /* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
* instance to be displayed. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window that used image. */
{
BitmapInstance *instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *)clientData;
BitmapInstance *prevPtr;
if (instancePtr->refCount-- > 1) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 | * Resources associated with the image get freed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgBmapDelete( | | | | 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 |
* Resources associated with the image get freed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgBmapDelete(
void *modelData) /* Pointer to BitmapModel structure for
* image. Must not have any more instances. */
{
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)modelData;
if (modelPtr->instancePtr != NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("tried to delete bitmap image when instances still exist");
}
modelPtr->tkModel = NULL;
if (modelPtr->imageCmd != NULL) {
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(modelPtr->interp, modelPtr->imageCmd);
}
if (modelPtr->data != NULL) {
ckfree(modelPtr->data);
}
if (modelPtr->maskData != NULL) {
ckfree(modelPtr->maskData);
}
Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *)modelPtr, NULL, 0);
ckfree(modelPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 | * The image is deleted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc( | | | 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 |
* The image is deleted.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to BitmapModel structure for
* image. */
{
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)clientData;
modelPtr->imageCmd = NULL;
if (modelPtr->tkModel != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteImage(modelPtr->interp, Tk_NameOfImage(modelPtr->tkModel));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 |
*/
static int
GetByte(
Tcl_Channel chan) /* The channel we read from. */
{
char buffer;
| < | < | 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 |
*/
static int
GetByte(
Tcl_Channel chan) /* The channel we read from. */
{
char buffer;
if (Tcl_Read(chan, &buffer, 1) != 1) {
return EOF;
} else {
return buffer;
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ImgBmapPostscript( | | | 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 |
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImgBmapPostscript(
void *clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin,
Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo,
int x, int y, int width, int height,
int prepass)
{
BitmapModel *modelPtr = (BitmapModel *)clientData;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgGIF.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 |
* state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF.
*/
typedef struct mFile {
unsigned char *data; /* mmencoded source string */
int c; /* bits left over from previous character */
int state; /* decoder state (0-4 or GIF_DONE) */
| | | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 |
* state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF.
*/
typedef struct mFile {
unsigned char *data; /* mmencoded source string */
int c; /* bits left over from previous character */
int state; /* decoder state (0-4 or GIF_DONE) */
int length; /* Total amount of bytes in data */
} MFile;
/*
* Non-ASCII encoding support:
* Most data in a GIF image is binary and is treated as such. However, a few
* key bits are stashed in ASCII. If we try to compare those pieces to the
* char they represent, it will fail on any non-ASCII (eg, EBCDIC) system. To
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | } GIFImageConfig; /* * Type of a function used to do the writing to a file or buffer when * serializing in the GIF format. */ | | | | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | } GIFImageConfig; /* * Type of a function used to do the writing to a file or buffer when * serializing in the GIF format. */ typedef int (WriteBytesFunc) (void *clientData, const char *bytes, int byteCount); /* * The format record for the GIF file format: */ static int FileMatchGIF(Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 | Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); static int FileWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *filename, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int StringWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); | | | 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 |
Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
int srcX, int srcY);
static int FileWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *filename,
Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
static int StringWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
static int CommonWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData,
WriteBytesFunc *writeProc, Tcl_Obj *format,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF = {
"gif", /* name */
FileMatchGIF, /* fileMatchProc */
StringMatchGIF, /* stringMatchProc */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4], int srcX, int srcY, int interlace, int transparent); /* * these are for the BASE64 image reader code only */ | | | | | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4], int srcX, int srcY, int interlace, int transparent); /* * these are for the BASE64 image reader code only */ static int Fread(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr, unsigned char *dst, size_t size, size_t count, Tcl_Channel chan); static int Mread(unsigned char *dst, size_t size, size_t count, MFile *handle); static int Mgetc(MFile *handle); static int char64(int c); static void mInit(unsigned char *string, MFile *handle, int length); /* * Types, defines and variables needed to write and compress a GIF. */ #define LSB(a) ((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) & 0x00FF)) #define MSB(a) ((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) >> 8)) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
276 277 278 279 280 281 282 |
* codes are re-sized at this point, and a special CLEAR code is generated
* for the decompressor. Late addition: construct the table according to
* file size for noticeable speed improvement on small files. Please
* direct questions about this implementation to ames!jaw.
*/
int initialBits;
| | | 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 |
* codes are re-sized at this point, and a special CLEAR code is generated
* for the decompressor. Late addition: construct the table according to
* file size for noticeable speed improvement on small files. Please
* direct questions about this implementation to ames!jaw.
*/
int initialBits;
void *destination;
WriteBytesFunc *writeProc;
int clearCode;
int eofCode;
unsigned long currentAccumulated;
int currentBits;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
304 305 306 307 308 309 310 | /* * Definition of new functions to write GIFs */ static int ColorNumber(GifWriterState *statePtr, int red, int green, int blue); | | | 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 | /* * Definition of new functions to write GIFs */ static int ColorNumber(GifWriterState *statePtr, int red, int green, int blue); static void Compress(int initBits, void *handle, WriteBytesFunc *writeProc, ifunptr readValue, GifWriterState *statePtr); static int IsNewColor(GifWriterState *statePtr, int red, int green, int blue); static void SaveMap(GifWriterState *statePtr, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int ReadValue(GifWriterState *statePtr); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 |
FileMatchGIF(
Tcl_Channel chan, /* The image file, open for reading. */
const char *fileName, /* The name of the image file. */
Tcl_Obj *format, /* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
/* The dimensions of the image are returned
* here if the file is a valid raw GIF file. */
| | < < < | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 |
FileMatchGIF(
Tcl_Channel chan, /* The image file, open for reading. */
const char *fileName, /* The name of the image file. */
Tcl_Obj *format, /* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
/* The dimensions of the image are returned
* here if the file is a valid raw GIF file. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Interp *))
{
GIFImageConfig gifConf;
memset(&gifConf, 0, sizeof(GIFImageConfig));
return ReadGIFHeader(&gifConf, chan, widthPtr, heightPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
435 436 437 438 439 440 441 |
sizeof(char *), "option name", 0, &optionIdx) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (i == (argc-1)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"no value given for \"%s\" option",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i])));
| | > | > | > > > > > > > > | | > | 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 |
sizeof(char *), "option name", 0, &optionIdx) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (i == (argc-1)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"no value given for \"%s\" option",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "OPT_VALUE",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[++i], &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
/*
* Read the GIF file header and check for some sanity.
*/
if (!ReadGIFHeader(gifConfPtr, chan, &fileWidth, &fileHeight)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"couldn't read GIF header from file \"%s\"", fileName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "HEADER",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((fileWidth <= 0) || (fileHeight <= 0)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"GIF image file \"%s\" has dimension(s) <= 0", fileName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "BOGUS_SIZE",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Get the general colormap information.
*/
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 3, chan) != 3) {
/*
* Bug [865af0148c]: 3 bytes should be there, but data ended before
*/
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"GIF file truncated", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "TRUNCATED",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
bitPixel = 2 << (buf[0] & 0x07);
if (BitSet(buf[0], LOCALCOLORMAP)) { /* Global Colormap */
if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading color map", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "COLOR_MAP",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if ((srcX + width) > fileWidth) {
width = fileWidth - srcX;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | /* * Premature end of image. */ Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "premature end of image data for this index", -1)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "PREMATURE_END", | | | > | | | | 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 |
/*
* Premature end of image.
*/
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"premature end of image data for this index", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "PREMATURE_END",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
switch (buf[0]) {
case GIF_TERMINATOR:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"no image data for this index", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "NO_DATA",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
case GIF_EXTENSION:
/*
* This is a GIF extension.
*/
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 1, chan) != 1) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading extension function code in GIF image",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "BAD_EXT",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
if (DoExtension(gifConfPtr, chan, buf[0],
gifConfPtr->workingBuffer, &transparent) < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading extension in GIF image", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "BAD_EXT",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
continue;
case GIF_START:
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 9, chan) != 9) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"couldn't read left/top/width/height in GIF image",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "DIMENSIONS",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
break;
default:
/*
* Not a valid start character; ignore it.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
582 583 584 585 586 587 588 |
*/
if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading color map", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF",
| | | 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 |
*/
if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading color map", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF",
"COLOR_MAP", (char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
}
/*
* If we've not yet allocated a trash buffer, do so now.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
* common case.
*/
if (ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, trashBuffer, chan, imageWidth,
imageHeight, colorMap, 0, 0, 0, -1) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
continue;
}
break;
}
/*
* Found the frame we want to read. Next, check for a local color map for
* this frame.
*/
if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading color map", -1));
| > > > > > > > | > | 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 |
* common case.
*/
if (ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, trashBuffer, chan, imageWidth,
imageHeight, colorMap, 0, 0, 0, -1) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
/*
* This extension starts a new scope, so Graphic control Extension
* data should be cleared
*/
transparent = -1;
continue;
}
break;
}
/*
* Found the frame we want to read. Next, check for a local color map for
* this frame.
*/
if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"error reading color map", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "COLOR_MAP",
(char *) NULL);
goto error;
}
}
/*
* Extract the location within the overall visible image to put the data
* in this frame, together with the size of this frame.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 |
srcY = 0;
}
if (height > imageHeight) {
height = imageHeight;
}
if ((width > 0) && (height > 0)) {
Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
/*
* Read the data and put it into the photo buffer for display by the
* general image machinery.
*/
| > | 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 |
srcY = 0;
}
if (height > imageHeight) {
height = imageHeight;
}
if ((width > 0) && (height > 0)) {
unsigned char* pixelPtr;
Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
/*
* Read the data and put it into the photo buffer for display by the
* general image machinery.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
691 692 693 694 695 696 697 |
goto error;
}
block.pitch = block.pixelSize * imageWidth;
if (imageHeight > (int)(UINT_MAX/block.pitch)) {
goto error;
}
nBytes = block.pitch * imageHeight;
| | | | > | > | | | 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 |
goto error;
}
block.pitch = block.pixelSize * imageWidth;
if (imageHeight > (int)(UINT_MAX/block.pitch)) {
goto error;
}
nBytes = block.pitch * imageHeight;
pixelPtr = (unsigned char*)ckalloc(nBytes);
if (pixelPtr) {
memset(pixelPtr, 0, nBytes);
}
block.pixelPtr = pixelPtr;
if (ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, block.pixelPtr, chan, imageWidth,
imageHeight, colorMap, srcX, srcY, BitSet(buf[8], INTERLACE),
transparent) != TCL_OK) {
ckfree(pixelPtr);
goto error;
}
block.pixelPtr += srcX * block.pixelSize + srcY * block.pitch;
if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
width, height, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET) != TCL_OK) {
ckfree(pixelPtr);
goto error;
}
ckfree(pixelPtr);
}
/*
* We've successfully read the GIF frame (or there was nothing to read,
* which suits as well). We're done.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
753 754 755 756 757 758 759 |
static int
StringMatchGIF(
Tcl_Obj *dataObj, /* the object containing the image data */
Tcl_Obj *format, /* the image format object, or NULL */
int *widthPtr, /* where to put the string width */
int *heightPtr, /* where to put the string height */
| | | < < | | 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 |
static int
StringMatchGIF(
Tcl_Obj *dataObj, /* the object containing the image data */
Tcl_Obj *format, /* the image format object, or NULL */
int *widthPtr, /* where to put the string width */
int *heightPtr, /* where to put the string height */
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* not used */
{
unsigned char *data, header[10];
int got, length;
MFile handle;
data = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataObj, &length);
/*
* Header is a minimum of 10 bytes.
*/
if (length < 10) {
return 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
827 828 829 830 831 832 833 |
Tcl_Obj *format, /* format object, or NULL */
Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* the image to write this data into */
int destX, int destY, /* The rectangular region of the */
int width, int height, /* image to copy */
int srcX, int srcY)
{
MFile handle, *hdlPtr = &handle;
| | | | 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 |
Tcl_Obj *format, /* format object, or NULL */
Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* the image to write this data into */
int destX, int destY, /* The rectangular region of the */
int width, int height, /* image to copy */
int srcX, int srcY)
{
MFile handle, *hdlPtr = &handle;
int length;
const char *xferFormat;
unsigned char *data = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataObj, &length);
mInit(data, hdlPtr, length);
/*
* Check whether the data is Base64 encoded by doing a character-by-
* charcter comparison with the binary-format headers; BASE64-encoded
* never matches (matching the other way is harder because of potential
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
918 919 920 921 922 923 924 |
int number,
unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4])
{
int i;
unsigned char rgb[3];
for (i = 0; i < number; ++i) {
| | | 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 |
int number,
unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4])
{
int i;
unsigned char rgb[3];
for (i = 0; i < number; ++i) {
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, rgb, sizeof(rgb), 1, chan) <= 0) {
return 0;
}
if (buffer) {
buffer[i][CM_RED] = rgb[0];
buffer[i][CM_GREEN] = rgb[1];
buffer[i][CM_BLUE] = rgb[2];
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 |
unsigned char *buf,
int *transparent)
{
int count;
switch (label) {
case 0x01: /* Plain Text Extension */
break;
case 0xff: /* Application Extension */
break;
case 0xfe: /* Comment Extension */
do {
| > > > > > | 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 |
unsigned char *buf,
int *transparent)
{
int count;
switch (label) {
case 0x01: /* Plain Text Extension */
/*
* This extension starts a new scope, so Graphic control Extension
* data should be cleared
*/
*transparent = -1;
break;
case 0xff: /* Application Extension */
break;
case 0xfe: /* Comment Extension */
do {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
984 985 986 987 988 989 990 |
GetDataBlock(
GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
Tcl_Channel chan,
unsigned char *buf)
{
unsigned char count;
| | | | 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 |
GetDataBlock(
GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
Tcl_Channel chan,
unsigned char *buf)
{
unsigned char count;
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, &count, 1, 1, chan) <= 0) {
return -1;
}
if ((count != 0) && (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, count, 1, chan) <= 0)) {
return -1;
}
return count;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 |
ReadImage(
GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
unsigned char *imagePtr,
Tcl_Channel chan,
int len, int rows,
unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
| | > < < | | > | 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 |
ReadImage(
GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
unsigned char *imagePtr,
Tcl_Channel chan,
int len, int rows,
unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
TCL_UNUSED(int),
TCL_UNUSED(int),
int interlace,
int transparent)
{
unsigned char initialCodeSize;
int xpos = 0, ypos = 0, pass = 0, i, count;
unsigned char *pixelPtr;
static const int interlaceStep[] = { 8, 8, 4, 2 };
static const int interlaceStart[] = { 0, 4, 2, 1 };
unsigned short prefix[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)];
unsigned char append[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)];
unsigned char stack[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)*2];
unsigned char *top;
int codeSize, clearCode, inCode, endCode, oldCode, maxCode;
int code, firstCode, v;
/*
* Initialize the decoder
*/
if (Fread(gifConfPtr, &initialCodeSize, 1, 1, chan) <= 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"error reading GIF image: %s", Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (initialCodeSize > MAX_LWZ_BITS) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("malformed image", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "MALFORMED",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (transparent != -1) {
cmap[transparent][CM_RED] = 0;
cmap[transparent][CM_GREEN] = 0;
cmap[transparent][CM_BLUE] = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 | */ *top++ = append[code]; code = prefix[code]; } firstCode = append[code]; | | | | | | | | | | 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 |
*/
*top++ = append[code];
code = prefix[code];
}
firstCode = append[code];
/*
* Push the head of the code onto the stack.
*/
*top++ = firstCode;
if (maxCode < (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)) {
/*
* If there's still room in our codes table, add a new entry.
* Otherwise don't, and keep using the current table.
* See DEFERRED CLEAR CODE IN LZW COMPRESSION in the GIF89a
* specification.
*/
prefix[maxCode] = oldCode;
append[maxCode] = firstCode;
maxCode++;
}
/*
* maxCode tells us the maximum code value we can accept. If
* we see that we need more bits to represent it than we are
* requesting from the unpacker, we need to increase the
* number we ask for.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
mInit(
unsigned char *string, /* string containing initial mmencoded data */
MFile *handle, /* mmdecode "file" handle */
| | | 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
mInit(
unsigned char *string, /* string containing initial mmencoded data */
MFile *handle, /* mmdecode "file" handle */
int length) /* Number of bytes in string */
{
handle->data = string;
handle->state = 0;
handle->c = 0;
handle->length = length;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 | * * Side effects: * The base64 handle will change state. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 |
*
* Side effects:
* The base64 handle will change state.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
Mread(
unsigned char *dst, /* where to put the result */
size_t chunkSize, /* size of each transfer */
size_t numChunks, /* number of chunks */
MFile *handle) /* mmdecode "file" handle */
{
int i, c;
int count = chunkSize * numChunks;
for (i=0; i<count && (c=Mgetc(handle)) != GIF_DONE; i++) {
*dst++ = c;
}
return i;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 | * a base64 encoded string. * * Results: - same as POSIX fread() or Tcl Tcl_Read() * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 |
* a base64 encoded string.
*
* Results: - same as POSIX fread() or Tcl Tcl_Read()
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
Fread(
GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
unsigned char *dst, /* where to put the result */
size_t hunk, size_t count, /* how many */
Tcl_Channel chan)
{
if (gifConfPtr->fromData == INLINE_DATA_BASE64) {
return Mread(dst, hunk, count, (MFile *) chan);
}
if (gifConfPtr->fromData == INLINE_DATA_BINARY) {
MFile *handle = (MFile *) chan;
if ((handle->length <= 0) || ((size_t)handle->length < hunk * count)) {
return -1;
}
memcpy(dst, handle->data, hunk * count);
handle->data += hunk * count;
handle->length -= hunk * count;
return hunk * count;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 |
Tcl_Channel chan = NULL;
int result;
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, (char *) filename, "w", 0644);
if (!chan) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | | 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 |
Tcl_Channel chan = NULL;
int result;
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, (char *) filename, "w", 0644);
if (!chan) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
result = CommonWriteGIF(interp, chan, WriteToChannel, format, blockPtr);
if (Tcl_Close(interp, chan) == TCL_ERROR) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 |
if (result == TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
return result;
}
| | | | | | | | < | 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 |
if (result == TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
return result;
}
static int
WriteToChannel(
void *clientData,
const char *bytes,
int byteCount)
{
Tcl_Channel handle = (Tcl_Channel)clientData;
return Tcl_Write(handle, bytes, byteCount);
}
static int
WriteToByteArray(
void *clientData,
const char *bytes,
int byteCount)
{
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = (Tcl_Obj *)clientData;
Tcl_Obj *tmpObj = Tcl_NewByteArrayObj((unsigned char *) bytes, byteCount);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(tmpObj);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(objPtr, tmpObj);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(tmpObj);
return byteCount;
}
static int
CommonWriteGIF(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
void *handle,
WriteBytesFunc *writeProc,
Tcl_Obj *format,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
GifWriterState state;
int resolution;
long width, height, x;
unsigned char c;
unsigned int top, left;
top = 0;
left = 0;
memset(&state, 0, sizeof(state));
state.pixelSize = blockPtr->pixelSize;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 |
width = blockPtr->width;
height = blockPtr->height;
state.pixelOffset = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
state.pixelPitch = blockPtr->pitch;
SaveMap(&state, blockPtr);
if (state.num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("too many colors", -1));
| | > | 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 |
width = blockPtr->width;
height = blockPtr->height;
state.pixelOffset = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
state.pixelPitch = blockPtr->pitch;
SaveMap(&state, blockPtr);
if (state.num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("too many colors", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "GIF", "COLORFUL",
(char *) NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (state.num<2) {
state.num = 2;
}
c = LSB(width);
writeProc(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 |
* James A. Woods (decvax!ihnp4!ames!jaw)
* Joe Orost (decvax!vax135!petsd!joe)
*/
static void
Compress(
int initialBits,
| | | 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 |
* James A. Woods (decvax!ihnp4!ames!jaw)
* Joe Orost (decvax!vax135!petsd!joe)
*/
static void
Compress(
int initialBits,
void *handle,
WriteBytesFunc *writeProc,
ifunptr readValue,
GifWriterState *statePtr)
{
long fcode, ent, disp, hSize, i = 0;
int c, hshift;
GIFState_t state;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted generic/tkImgListFormat.c.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to generic/tkImgPNG.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" | | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #define PNG_UINT32(a,b,c,d) \ (((unsigned long)(a) << 24) | ((unsigned long)(b) << 16) | ((unsigned long)(c) << 8) | (unsigned long)(d)) #define PNG_BLOCK_SZ 1024 /* Process up to 1k at a time. */ #define PNG_MIN(a, b) (((a) < (b)) ? (a) : (b)) /* * Every PNG image starts with the following 8-byte signature. */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | /* * Chunk types, not all of which have support implemented. Note that there are * others in the official extension set which we will never support (as they * are officially deprecated). */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
/*
* Chunk types, not all of which have support implemented. Note that there are
* others in the official extension set which we will never support (as they
* are officially deprecated).
*/
#define CHUNK_IDAT PNG_UINT32('I','D','A','T') /* Pixel data. */
#define CHUNK_IEND PNG_UINT32('I','E','N','D') /* End of Image. */
#define CHUNK_IHDR PNG_UINT32('I','H','D','R') /* Header. */
#define CHUNK_PLTE PNG_UINT32('P','L','T','E') /* Palette. */
#define CHUNK_bKGD PNG_UINT32('b','K','G','D') /* Background Color */
#define CHUNK_cHRM PNG_UINT32('c','H','R','M') /* Chroma values. */
#define CHUNK_gAMA PNG_UINT32('g','A','M','A') /* Gamma. */
#define CHUNK_hIST PNG_UINT32('h','I','S','T') /* Histogram. */
#define CHUNK_iCCP PNG_UINT32('i','C','C','P') /* Color profile. */
#define CHUNK_iTXt PNG_UINT32('i','T','X','t') /* Internationalized
* text (comments,
* etc.) */
#define CHUNK_oFFs PNG_UINT32('o','F','F','s') /* Image offset. */
#define CHUNK_pCAL PNG_UINT32('p','C','A','L') /* Pixel calibration
* data. */
#define CHUNK_pHYs PNG_UINT32('p','H','Y','s') /* Physical pixel
* dimensions. */
#define CHUNK_sBIT PNG_UINT32('s','B','I','T') /* Significant bits */
#define CHUNK_sCAL PNG_UINT32('s','C','A','L') /* Physical scale. */
#define CHUNK_sPLT PNG_UINT32('s','P','L','T') /* Suggested
* palette. */
#define CHUNK_sRGB PNG_UINT32('s','R','G','B') /* Standard RGB space
* declaration. */
#define CHUNK_tEXt PNG_UINT32('t','E','X','t') /* Plain Latin-1
* text. */
#define CHUNK_tIME PNG_UINT32('t','I','M','E') /* Time stamp. */
#define CHUNK_tRNS PNG_UINT32('t','R','N','S') /* Transparency. */
#define CHUNK_zTXt PNG_UINT32('z','T','X','t') /* Compressed Latin-1
* text. */
/*
* Color flags.
*/
#define PNG_COLOR_INDEXED 1
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 |
/*
* PNG data source/destination channel/object/byte array.
*/
Tcl_Channel channel; /* Channel for from-file reads. */
Tcl_Obj *objDataPtr;
unsigned char *strDataBuf; /* Raw source data for from-string reads. */
| | | 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 |
/*
* PNG data source/destination channel/object/byte array.
*/
Tcl_Channel channel; /* Channel for from-file reads. */
Tcl_Obj *objDataPtr;
unsigned char *strDataBuf; /* Raw source data for from-string reads. */
int strDataLen; /* Length of source data. */
unsigned char *base64Data; /* base64 encoded string data. */
unsigned char base64Bits; /* Remaining bits from last base64 read. */
unsigned char base64State; /* Current state of base64 decoder. */
double alpha; /* Alpha from -format option. */
/*
* Image header information.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | static int CheckColor(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static inline int CheckCRC(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned long calculated); static void CleanupPNGImage(PNGImage *pngPtr); static int DecodeLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static int DecodePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, | | > | | | | | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | static int CheckColor(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static inline int CheckCRC(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned long calculated); static void CleanupPNGImage(PNGImage *pngPtr); static int DecodeLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static int DecodePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); static int EncodePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, PNGImage *pngPtr); static int FileMatchPNG(Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp); static int FileReadPNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY); static int FileWritePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *filename, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int InitPNGImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, Tcl_Channel chan, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int dir); static inline unsigned char Paeth(int a, int b, int c); static int ParseFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, PNGImage *pngPtr); static int ReadBase64(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned char *destPtr, int destSz, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int ReadByteArray(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned char *destPtr, int destSz, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int ReadData(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned char *destPtr, int destSz, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int ReadChunkHeader(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, int *sizePtr, unsigned long *typePtr, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int ReadIDAT(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, int chunkSz, unsigned long crc); static int ReadIHDR(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static inline int ReadInt32(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned long *resultPtr, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int ReadPLTE(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
246 247 248 249 250 251 252 | static int StringWritePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int UnfilterLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static inline int WriteByte(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned char c, unsigned long *crcPtr); static inline int WriteChunk(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned long chunkType, | | | | 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 | static int StringWritePNG(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int UnfilterLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static inline int WriteByte(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned char c, unsigned long *crcPtr); static inline int WriteChunk(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, unsigned long chunkType, const unsigned char *dataPtr, int dataSize); static int WriteData(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, const unsigned char *srcPtr, int srcSz, unsigned long *crcPtr); static int WriteExtraChunks(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr); static int WriteIHDR(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); static int WriteIDAT(Tcl_Interp *interp, PNGImage *pngPtr, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
315 316 317 318 319 320 321 |
* reading with ReadData().
*/
if (objPtr) {
Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
pngPtr->objDataPtr = objPtr;
pngPtr->strDataBuf =
| | | 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 |
* reading with ReadData().
*/
if (objPtr) {
Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
pngPtr->objDataPtr = objPtr;
pngPtr->strDataBuf =
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(objPtr, &pngPtr->strDataLen);
}
/*
* Initialize the palette transparency table to fully opaque.
*/
memset(pngPtr->palette, 255, sizeof(pngPtr->palette));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
426 427 428 429 430 431 432 |
*/
static int
ReadBase64(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
| | | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 |
*/
static int
ReadBase64(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
int destSz,
unsigned long *crcPtr)
{
static const unsigned char from64[] = {
0x82, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x80, 0x80,
0x83, 0x80, 0x80, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x80,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x3e,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
453 454 455 456 457 458 459 | 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, | | | 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 |
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83
};
/*
* Definitions for the base-64 decoder.
*/
#define PNG64_SPECIAL 0x80 /* Flag bit */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
551 552 553 554 555 556 557 |
*/
static int
ReadByteArray(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
| | | | | 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 |
*/
static int
ReadByteArray(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
int destSz,
unsigned long *crcPtr)
{
/*
* Check to make sure the number of requested bytes are available.
*/
if (pngPtr->strDataLen < destSz) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"unexpected end of image data", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PNG", "EARLY_END", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
while (destSz) {
int blockSz = PNG_MIN(destSz, PNG_BLOCK_SZ);
memcpy(destPtr, pngPtr->strDataBuf, blockSz);
pngPtr->strDataBuf += blockSz;
pngPtr->strDataLen -= blockSz;
if (crcPtr) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
609 610 611 612 613 614 615 |
*/
static int
ReadData(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
| | | | | 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 |
*/
static int
ReadData(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned char *destPtr,
int destSz,
unsigned long *crcPtr)
{
if (pngPtr->base64Data) {
return ReadBase64(interp, pngPtr, destPtr, destSz, crcPtr);
} else if (pngPtr->strDataBuf) {
return ReadByteArray(interp, pngPtr, destPtr, destSz, crcPtr);
}
while (destSz) {
int blockSz = PNG_MIN(destSz, PNG_BLOCK_SZ);
blockSz = Tcl_Read(pngPtr->channel, (char *)destPtr, blockSz);
if (blockSz == -1) {
/* TODO: failure info... */
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"channel read failed: %s", Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
690 691 692 693 694 695 696 |
{
unsigned char p[4];
if (ReadData(interp, pngPtr, p, 4, crcPtr) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 |
{
unsigned char p[4];
if (ReadData(interp, pngPtr, p, 4, crcPtr) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*resultPtr = PNG_UINT32(p[0], p[1], p[2], p[3]);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
854 855 856 857 858 859 860 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ReadChunkHeader(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
| | | 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ReadChunkHeader(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
int *sizePtr,
unsigned long *typePtr,
unsigned long *crcPtr)
{
unsigned long chunkType = 0;
int chunkSz = 0;
unsigned long crc = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
882 883 884 885 886 887 888 |
* maximum size for Tcl_Read, Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj, etc.
*/
if (ReadData(interp, pngPtr, pc, 4, NULL) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 |
* maximum size for Tcl_Read, Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj, etc.
*/
if (ReadData(interp, pngPtr, pc, 4, NULL) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
temp = PNG_UINT32(pc[0], pc[1], pc[2], pc[3]);
if (temp > INT_MAX) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"chunk size is out of supported range on this architecture",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PNG", "OUTSIZE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
907 908 909 910 911 912 913 | return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Convert it to a host-order integer for simple comparison. */ | | | 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 | return TCL_ERROR; } /* * Convert it to a host-order integer for simple comparison. */ chunkType = PNG_UINT32(pc[0], pc[1], pc[2], pc[3]); /* * Check to see if this is a known/supported chunk type. Note that the * PNG specs require non-critical (i.e., ancillary) chunk types that * are not recognized to be ignored, rather than be treated as an * error. It does, however, recommend that an unknown critical chunk * type be treated as a failure. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
972 973 974 975 976 977 978 |
default:
/*
* Unknown chunk type. If it's critical, we can't continue.
*/
if (!(chunkType & PNG_CF_ANCILLARY)) {
| | | 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 |
default:
/*
* Unknown chunk type. If it's critical, we can't continue.
*/
if (!(chunkType & PNG_CF_ANCILLARY)) {
if (chunkType & PNG_UINT32(128,128,128,128)) {
/*
* No nice ASCII conversion; shouldn't happen either, but
* we'll be doubly careful.
*/
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"encountered an unsupported critical chunk type",
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 |
static int
ReadIHDR(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
unsigned char sigBuf[PNG_SIG_SZ];
unsigned long chunkType;
| | | 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 |
static int
ReadIHDR(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
unsigned char sigBuf[PNG_SIG_SZ];
unsigned long chunkType;
int chunkSz;
unsigned long crc;
unsigned long width, height;
int mismatch;
/*
* Read the appropriate number of bytes for the PNG signature.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 |
mismatch = memcmp(sigBuf, pngSignature, PNG_SIG_SZ);
/*
* If reading from string, reset position and try base64 decode.
*/
if (mismatch && pngPtr->strDataBuf) {
| | | 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 |
mismatch = memcmp(sigBuf, pngSignature, PNG_SIG_SZ);
/*
* If reading from string, reset position and try base64 decode.
*/
if (mismatch && pngPtr->strDataBuf) {
pngPtr->strDataBuf = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->objDataPtr,
&pngPtr->strDataLen);
pngPtr->base64Data = pngPtr->strDataBuf;
if (ReadData(interp, pngPtr, sigBuf, PNG_SIG_SZ, NULL) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 |
static int
UnfilterLine(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
unsigned char *thisLine =
| | | | 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 |
static int
UnfilterLine(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
unsigned char *thisLine =
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->thisLineObj, (int *)NULL);
unsigned char *lastLine =
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->lastLineObj, (int *)NULL);
#define PNG_FILTER_NONE 0
#define PNG_FILTER_SUB 1
#define PNG_FILTER_UP 2
#define PNG_FILTER_AVG 3
#define PNG_FILTER_PAETH 4
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 |
int haveBits = 0; /* Number of bits remaining in current byte */
unsigned char pixBits = 0; /* Extracted bits for current channel */
int shifts = 0; /* Number of channels extracted from byte */
int offset = 0; /* Current offset into pixelPtr */
int colStep = 1; /* Column increment each pass */
int pixStep = 0; /* extra pixelPtr increment each pass */
unsigned char lastPixel[6];
| | | 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 |
int haveBits = 0; /* Number of bits remaining in current byte */
unsigned char pixBits = 0; /* Extracted bits for current channel */
int shifts = 0; /* Number of channels extracted from byte */
int offset = 0; /* Current offset into pixelPtr */
int colStep = 1; /* Column increment each pass */
int pixStep = 0; /* extra pixelPtr increment each pass */
unsigned char lastPixel[6];
unsigned char *p = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->thisLineObj, (int *)NULL);
p++;
if (UnfilterLine(interp, pngPtr) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (pngPtr->currentLine >= pngPtr->block.height) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 |
unsigned long crc)
{
/*
* Process IDAT contents until there is no more in this chunk.
*/
while (chunkSz && !Tcl_ZlibStreamEof(pngPtr->stream)) {
| | | 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 |
unsigned long crc)
{
/*
* Process IDAT contents until there is no more in this chunk.
*/
while (chunkSz && !Tcl_ZlibStreamEof(pngPtr->stream)) {
int len1, len2;
/*
* Read another block of input into the zlib stream if data remains.
*/
if (chunkSz) {
Tcl_Obj *inputObj = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 |
/*
* Inflate, processing each output buffer's worth as a line of pixels,
* until we cannot fill the buffer any more.
*/
getNextLine:
| | | | | 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 |
/*
* Inflate, processing each output buffer's worth as a line of pixels,
* until we cannot fill the buffer any more.
*/
getNextLine:
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->thisLineObj, &len1);
if (Tcl_ZlibStreamGet(pngPtr->stream, pngPtr->thisLineObj,
pngPtr->phaseSize - len1) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->thisLineObj, &len2);
if (len2 == pngPtr->phaseSize) {
if (pngPtr->phase > 7) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"extra data after final scan line of final phase",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PNG", "EXTRA_DATA",
NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 |
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
Tcl_Obj **objv = NULL;
int objc = 0;
static const char *const fmtOptions[] = {
"-alpha", NULL
};
| | | 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 |
PNGImage *pngPtr)
{
Tcl_Obj **objv = NULL;
int objc = 0;
static const char *const fmtOptions[] = {
"-alpha", NULL
};
enum fmtOptions {
OPT_ALPHA
};
/*
* Extract elements of format specification as a list.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 | Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "value"); return TCL_ERROR; } objc--; objv++; | | | 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "value");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
objc--;
objv++;
switch ((enum fmtOptions) optIndex) {
case OPT_ALPHA:
if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[0],
&pngPtr->alpha) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((pngPtr->alpha < 0.0) || (pngPtr->alpha > 1.0)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 | * dimensions and contents may change. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int DecodePNG( | | | | | | > > > > | > | | 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 |
* dimensions and contents may change.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
DecodePNG(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
PNGImage *pngPtr, /* PNG image information record. */
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, /* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* The photo image to write into. */
int destX, int destY, /* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
* image to be written to. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
* written to. */
int srcX, int srcY) /* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
* image being read. */
{
unsigned long chunkType;
int result;
int chunkSz;
unsigned long crc;
/*
* Parse the PNG signature and IHDR (header) chunk.
*/
if (ReadIHDR(interp, pngPtr) == TCL_ERROR) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 |
/*
* Expand the photo size (if not set by the user) to provide enough space
* for the image being parsed. It does not matter if width or height wrap
* to negative here: Tk will not shrink the image.
*/
| | | | 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 |
/*
* Expand the photo size (if not set by the user) to provide enough space
* for the image being parsed. It does not matter if width or height wrap
* to negative here: Tk will not shrink the image.
*/
if (Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, imageHandle, destX + width,
destY + height) == TCL_ERROR) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* A scan line consists of one byte for a filter type, plus the number of
* bits per color sample times the number of color samples per pixel.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 |
pngPtr->thisLineObj = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pngPtr->thisLineObj);
pngPtr->block.pixelPtr = (unsigned char *)attemptckalloc(pngPtr->blockLen);
if (!pngPtr->block.pixelPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"memory allocation failed", -1));
| | | 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 |
pngPtr->thisLineObj = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pngPtr->thisLineObj);
pngPtr->block.pixelPtr = (unsigned char *)attemptckalloc(pngPtr->blockLen);
if (!pngPtr->block.pixelPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"memory allocation failed", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Determine size of the first phase if interlaced. Phase size should
* always be <= line size, so probably not necessary to check for
* arithmetic overflow here: should be covered by line size check.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 |
ApplyAlpha(pngPtr);
/*
* Copy the decoded image block into the Tk photo image.
*/
| > | < | | | < | | 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 |
ApplyAlpha(pngPtr);
/*
* Copy the decoded image block into the Tk photo image.
*/
pngPtr->block.pixelPtr += srcX * pngPtr->block.pixelSize + srcY * pngPtr->block.pitch;
result = Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &pngPtr->block, destX, destY,
width, height, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
pngPtr->block.pixelPtr -= srcX * pngPtr->block.pixelSize + srcY * pngPtr->block.pitch;
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* FileMatchPNG --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 |
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
int *widthPtr,
int *heightPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
PNGImage png;
int match = 0;
| < < | 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 |
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
int *widthPtr,
int *heightPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
PNGImage png;
int match = 0;
InitPNGImage(NULL, &png, chan, NULL, TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_INFLATE);
if (ReadIHDR(interp, &png) == TCL_OK) {
*widthPtr = png.block.width;
*heightPtr = png.block.height;
match = 1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 | * image given by imageHandle. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int FileReadPNG( | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < < < | | 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 |
* image given by imageHandle.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
FileReadPNG(
Tcl_Interp* interp, /* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
Tcl_Channel chan, /* The image file, open for reading. */
const char* fileName, /* The name of the image file. */
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, /* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* The photo image to write into. */
int destX, int destY, /* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
* image to be written to. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
* written to. */
int srcX, int srcY) /* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
* image being read. */
{
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
result = InitPNGImage(interp, &png, chan, NULL, TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_INFLATE);
if (TCL_OK == result) {
result = DecodePNG(interp, &png, fmtObj, imageHandle, destX, destY, width, height, srcX, srcY);
}
CleanupPNGImage(&png);
return result;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 |
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
int *widthPtr,
int *heightPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
PNGImage png;
int match = 0;
| < | | 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 |
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
int *widthPtr,
int *heightPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
PNGImage png;
int match = 0;
InitPNGImage(NULL, &png, NULL, pObjData, TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_INFLATE);
png.strDataBuf = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pObjData, &png.strDataLen);
if (ReadIHDR(interp, &png) == TCL_OK) {
*widthPtr = png.block.width;
*heightPtr = png.block.height;
match = 1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 | * New data is added to the image given by imageHandle. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int StringReadPNG( | | | | | | | | | | < < < < | | 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 |
* New data is added to the image given by imageHandle.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
StringReadPNG(
Tcl_Interp* interp, /* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
Tcl_Obj *pObjData,
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj, /* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* The photo image to write into. */
int destX, int destY, /* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
* image to be written to. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
* written to. */
int srcX, int srcY) /* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
* image being read. */
{
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
result = InitPNGImage(interp, &png, NULL, pObjData,
TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_INFLATE);
if (TCL_OK == result) {
result = DecodePNG(interp, &png, fmtObj, imageHandle, destX, destY, width, height, srcX, srcY);
}
CleanupPNGImage(&png);
return result;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 |
*/
static int
WriteData(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
const unsigned char *srcPtr,
| | | | | | | | 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 |
*/
static int
WriteData(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
const unsigned char *srcPtr,
int srcSz,
unsigned long *crcPtr)
{
if (!srcPtr || srcSz <= 0) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (crcPtr) {
*crcPtr = Tcl_ZlibCRC32(*crcPtr, srcPtr, srcSz);
}
/*
* TODO: is Tcl_AppendObjToObj faster here? i.e., does Tcl join the
* objects immediately or store them in a multi-object rep?
*/
if (pngPtr->objDataPtr) {
int objSz;
unsigned char *destPtr;
Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(pngPtr->objDataPtr, &objSz);
if (objSz > INT_MAX - srcSz) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"image too large to store completely in byte array", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PNG", "TOO_LARGE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
destPtr = Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(pngPtr->objDataPtr, objSz + srcSz);
if (!destPtr) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"memory allocation failed", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
memcpy(destPtr+objSz, srcPtr, srcSz);
} else if (Tcl_Write(pngPtr->channel, (const char *) srcPtr, srcSz) == -1) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"write to channel failed: %s", Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 |
static inline int
WriteChunk(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned long chunkType,
const unsigned char *dataPtr,
| | | 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 |
static inline int
WriteChunk(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
unsigned long chunkType,
const unsigned char *dataPtr,
int dataSize)
{
unsigned long crc = Tcl_ZlibCRC32(0, NULL, 0);
int result = TCL_OK;
/*
* Write the length field for the chunk.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
int rowNum, flush = TCL_ZLIB_NO_FLUSH, result;
Tcl_Obj *outputObj;
unsigned char *outputBytes;
| | | 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
PNGImage *pngPtr,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
int rowNum, flush = TCL_ZLIB_NO_FLUSH, result;
Tcl_Obj *outputObj;
unsigned char *outputBytes;
int outputSize;
/*
* Filter and compress each row one at a time.
*/
for (rowNum=0 ; rowNum < blockPtr->height ; rowNum++) {
int colNum;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 |
/*
* Now get the compressed data and write it as one big IDAT chunk.
*/
outputObj = Tcl_NewObj();
(void) Tcl_ZlibStreamGet(pngPtr->stream, outputObj, -1);
| | | 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 |
/*
* Now get the compressed data and write it as one big IDAT chunk.
*/
outputObj = Tcl_NewObj();
(void) Tcl_ZlibStreamGet(pngPtr->stream, outputObj, -1);
outputBytes = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(outputObj, &outputSize);
result = WriteChunk(interp, pngPtr, CHUNK_IDAT, outputBytes, outputSize);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(outputObj);
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 |
const char *filename,
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Channel chan;
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
| < | 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 |
const char *filename,
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Channel chan;
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
/*
* Open a Tcl file channel where the image data will be stored. Tk ought
* to take care of this, and just provide a channel, but it doesn't.
*/
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, filename, "w", 0644);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 |
*/
if (InitPNGImage(interp, &png, chan, NULL,
TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_DEFLATE) == TCL_ERROR) {
goto cleanup;
}
| < < < < < | | | 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 |
*/
if (InitPNGImage(interp, &png, chan, NULL,
TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_DEFLATE) == TCL_ERROR) {
goto cleanup;
}
if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) {
goto cleanup;
}
/*
* Write the raw PNG data out to the file.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Obj *resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
| < | 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 |
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *fmtObj,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Obj *resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
PNGImage png;
int result = TCL_ERROR;
/*
* Initalize PNGImage instance for encoding.
*/
if (InitPNGImage(interp, &png, NULL, resultObj,
TCL_ZLIB_STREAM_DEFLATE) == TCL_ERROR) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgPPM.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), * Department of Computer Science, * Australian National University. */ #include "tkInt.h" /* * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the file. If we * need more than this, we do it in pieces. */ #define MAX_MEMORY 10000 /* don't allocate > 10KB */ | > > > > | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), * Department of Computer Science, * Australian National University. */ #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the file. If we * need more than this, we do it in pieces. */ #define MAX_MEMORY 10000 /* don't allocate > 10KB */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
138 139 140 141 142 143 144 |
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
* written to. */
int srcX, int srcY) /* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
* image being read. */
{
int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
int nLines, h, type, bytesPerChannel = 1;
| | | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 |
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
* written to. */
int srcX, int srcY) /* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
* image being read. */
{
int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
int nLines, h, type, bytesPerChannel = 1;
int nBytes, count;
unsigned char *pixelPtr;
Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
type = ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, &fileWidth, &fileHeight, &maxIntensity);
if (type == 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"couldn't read raw PPM header from file \"%s\"", fileName));
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 |
for (p = pixelPtr; count > 0; count--, p++) {
*p = (((int) *p) * 255)/maxIntensity;
}
} else if (maxIntensity > 0x00ff) {
unsigned char *p;
unsigned int value;
| | | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 |
for (p = pixelPtr; count > 0; count--, p++) {
*p = (((int) *p) * 255)/maxIntensity;
}
} else if (maxIntensity > 0x00ff) {
unsigned char *p;
unsigned int value;
for (p = pixelPtr; count > 0; count -= 2, p += 2) {
value = ((unsigned int) p[0]) * 256 + ((unsigned int) p[1]);
value = value * 255 / maxIntensity;
p[0] = p[1] = (unsigned char) value;
}
}
block.height = nLines;
if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
282 283 284 285 286 287 288 |
FileWritePPM(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *fileName,
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Obj *),
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Channel chan;
| | < < < < < | < | | | | | | 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 |
FileWritePPM(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *fileName,
TCL_UNUSED(Tcl_Obj *),
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
Tcl_Channel chan;
int w, h, greenOffset, blueOffset, nBytes;
unsigned char *pixelPtr, *pixLinePtr;
char header[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, fileName, "w", 0666);
if (chan == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
snprintf(header, sizeof(header), "P6\n%d %d\n255\n", blockPtr->width, blockPtr->height);
Tcl_Write(chan, header, -1);
pixLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1] - blockPtr->offset[0];
blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2] - blockPtr->offset[0];
if ((greenOffset == 1) && (blueOffset == 2) && (blockPtr->pixelSize == 3)
&& (blockPtr->pitch == (blockPtr->width * 3))) {
nBytes = blockPtr->height * blockPtr->pitch;
if (Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) pixLinePtr, nBytes) != nBytes) {
goto writeerror;
}
} else {
for (h = blockPtr->height; h > 0; h--) {
pixelPtr = pixLinePtr;
for (w = blockPtr->width; w > 0; w--) {
if (Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[0], 1) == -1 ||
Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[greenOffset],1) == -1 ||
Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[blueOffset],1) == -1) {
goto writeerror;
}
pixelPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
}
pixLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
374 375 376 377 378 379 380 |
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
int w, h, size, greenOffset, blueOffset;
unsigned char *pixLinePtr, *byteArray;
char header[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
Tcl_Obj *byteArrayObj;
| | | 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 |
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
int w, h, size, greenOffset, blueOffset;
unsigned char *pixLinePtr, *byteArray;
char header[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
Tcl_Obj *byteArrayObj;
snprintf(header, sizeof(header), "P6\n%d %d\n255\n", blockPtr->width, blockPtr->height);
/*
* Construct a byte array of the right size with the header and
* get a pointer to the data part of it.
*/
size = strlen(header);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 |
if (maxIntensity < 0x00ff) {
for (p=pixelPtr,count=nBytes ; count>0 ; count--,p++,dataBuffer++) {
*p = (((int) *dataBuffer) * 255)/maxIntensity;
}
} else {
unsigned int value;
| | | | 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 |
if (maxIntensity < 0x00ff) {
for (p=pixelPtr,count=nBytes ; count>0 ; count--,p++,dataBuffer++) {
*p = (((int) *dataBuffer) * 255)/maxIntensity;
}
} else {
unsigned int value;
for (p = pixelPtr,count=nBytes; count > 1; count-=2, p += 2, dataBuffer += 2) {
value = ((unsigned int)dataBuffer[0]) * 256 + ((unsigned int)dataBuffer[1]);
value = value * 255 / maxIntensity;
p[0] = p[1] = (unsigned char) value;
}
}
dataSize -= nBytes;
block.height = nLines;
if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
* is stored here. */
unsigned char **dataBufferPtr,
int *dataSizePtr)
{
#define BUFFER_SIZE 1000
char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE], c;
int i, numFields, type = 0;
| | | | 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 |
* is stored here. */
unsigned char **dataBufferPtr,
int *dataSizePtr)
{
#define BUFFER_SIZE 1000
char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE], c;
int i, numFields, type = 0;
int dataSize;
unsigned char *dataBuffer;
dataBuffer = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataPtr, &dataSize);
/*
* Read 4 space-separated fields from the string, ignoring comments (any
* line that starts with "#").
*/
if (dataSize-- < 1) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgPhInstance.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | * Department of Computer Science, * Australian National University. */ #include "tkImgPhoto.h" #include "tkPort.h" /* * Declaration for internal Xlib function used here: */ | > > > > | < < < < < < < | | | 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | * Department of Computer Science, * Australian National University. */ #include "tkImgPhoto.h" #include "tkPort.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * Declaration for internal Xlib function used here: */ extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image); /* * Forward declarations */ #ifndef TK_CAN_RENDER_RGBA static void BlendComplexAlpha(XImage *bgImg, PhotoInstance *iPtr, int xOffset, int yOffset, int width, int height); #endif static int IsValidPalette(PhotoInstance *instancePtr, const char *palette); static int CountBits(pixel mask); static void GetColorTable(PhotoInstance *instancePtr); static void FreeColorTable(ColorTable *colorPtr, int force); static void AllocateColors(ColorTable *colorPtr); static void DisposeColorTable(ClientData clientData); static int ReclaimColors(ColorTableId *id, int numColors); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
TkImgPhotoConfigureInstance(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr) /* Instance to reconfigure. */
{
| | | 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
TkImgPhotoConfigureInstance(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr) /* Instance to reconfigure. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
XImage *imagePtr;
int bitsPerPixel;
ColorTable *colorTablePtr;
XRectangle validBox;
/*
* If the -palette configuration option has been set for the model, use
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 |
|| (instancePtr->palette != colorTablePtr->id.palette)
|| (instancePtr->gamma != colorTablePtr->id.gamma)) {
/*
* Free up our old color table, and get a new one.
*/
if (colorTablePtr != NULL) {
| | | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 |
|| (instancePtr->palette != colorTablePtr->id.palette)
|| (instancePtr->gamma != colorTablePtr->id.gamma)) {
/*
* Free up our old color table, and get a new one.
*/
if (colorTablePtr != NULL) {
colorTablePtr->liveRefCount -= 1;
FreeColorTable(colorTablePtr, 0);
}
GetColorTable(instancePtr);
/*
* Create a new XImage structure for sending data to the X server, if
* necessary.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
213 214 215 216 217 218 219 |
ClientData
TkImgPhotoGet(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which the instance will be
* used. */
ClientData modelData) /* Pointer to our model structure for the
* image. */
{
| | > > > | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 |
ClientData
TkImgPhotoGet(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window in which the instance will be
* used. */
ClientData modelData) /* Pointer to our model structure for the
* image. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr = modelData;
PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
Colormap colormap;
int mono, nRed, nGreen, nBlue, numVisuals;
XVisualInfo visualInfo, *visInfoPtr;
char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 3];
XColor *white, *black;
XGCValues gcValues;
#if (!defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
int gcmask;
#endif
/*
* Table of "best" choices for palette for PseudoColor displays with
* between 3 and 15 bits/pixel.
*/
static const int paletteChoice[13][3] = {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 |
* colormap. If so then just re-use it.
*/
colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
for (instancePtr = modelPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
if ((colormap == instancePtr->colormap)
| | > > > > | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 |
* colormap. If so then just re-use it.
*/
colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
for (instancePtr = modelPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
if ((colormap == instancePtr->colormap)
&& (Tk_Display(tkwin) == instancePtr->display)
#if (!defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
&& (Tk_Visual(tkwin) == instancePtr->visualInfo.visual)
#endif
) {
/*
* Re-use this instance.
*/
if (instancePtr->refCount == 0) {
/*
* We are resurrecting this instance.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
279 280 281 282 283 284 285 |
}
/*
* The image isn't already in use in a window with the same colormap. Make
* a new instance of the image.
*/
| | | | 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 |
}
/*
* The image isn't already in use in a window with the same colormap. Make
* a new instance of the image.
*/
instancePtr = ckalloc(sizeof(PhotoInstance));
instancePtr->masterPtr = modelPtr;
instancePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
instancePtr->colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
Tk_PreserveColormap(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->colormap);
instancePtr->refCount = 1;
instancePtr->colorTablePtr = NULL;
instancePtr->pixels = None;
instancePtr->error = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 |
Tcl_Panic("TkImgPhotoGet couldn't find visual for window");
}
nRed = 2;
nGreen = nBlue = 0;
mono = 1;
instancePtr->visualInfo = *visInfoPtr;
switch (visInfoPtr->c_class) {
case DirectColor:
case TrueColor:
nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
mono = 0;
break;
case PseudoColor:
case StaticColor:
if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
nRed = 32;
nGreen = 32;
nBlue = 32;
| > > > > > > > > > > > > | 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 |
Tcl_Panic("TkImgPhotoGet couldn't find visual for window");
}
nRed = 2;
nGreen = nBlue = 0;
mono = 1;
instancePtr->visualInfo = *visInfoPtr;
#if (!defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
gcmask = 0;
instancePtr->visualInfo.visual = Tk_Visual(tkwin);
#endif
switch (visInfoPtr->c_class) {
case DirectColor:
case TrueColor:
nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
mono = 0;
#if (!defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
if (visInfoPtr->depth > 24) {
gcValues.plane_mask = visInfoPtr->red_mask
| visInfoPtr->green_mask
| visInfoPtr->blue_mask;
gcmask = GCPlaneMask;
}
#endif
break;
case PseudoColor:
case StaticColor:
if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
nRed = 32;
nGreen = 32;
nBlue = 32;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
342 343 344 345 346 347 348 |
case StaticGray:
nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
break;
}
XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
if (mono) {
| | | > > > > | > | | 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 |
case StaticGray:
nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
break;
}
XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
if (mono) {
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%d", nRed);
} else {
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%d/%d/%d", nRed, nGreen, nBlue);
}
instancePtr->defaultPalette = Tk_GetUid(buf);
/*
* Make a GC with background = black and foreground = white.
*/
white = Tk_GetColor(modelPtr->interp, tkwin, "white");
black = Tk_GetColor(modelPtr->interp, tkwin, "black");
gcValues.foreground = (white != NULL)? white->pixel:
WhitePixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
gcValues.background = (black != NULL)? black->pixel:
BlackPixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
Tk_FreeColor(white);
Tk_FreeColor(black);
gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
#if (!defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
instancePtr->gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
gcmask|GCForeground|GCBackground|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
#else
instancePtr->gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
GCForeground|GCBackground|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
#endif
/*
* Set configuration options and finish the initialization of the
* instance. This will also dither the image if necessary.
*/
TkImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr);
/*
* If this is the first instance, must set the size of the image.
*/
if (instancePtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0,
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
}
return instancePtr;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
412 413 414 415 416 417 418 | * whereas RGB15 is the correct version and works for 15bpp+, but it * slower, so it's only used for 15bpp+. * * Note that Win32 pre-defines those operations that we really need. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | * whereas RGB15 is the correct version and works for 15bpp+, but it * slower, so it's only used for 15bpp+. * * Note that Win32 pre-defines those operations that we really need. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #ifndef TK_CAN_RENDER_RGBA #ifndef _WIN32 #define GetRValue(rgb) (UCHAR(((rgb) & red_mask) >> red_shift)) #define GetGValue(rgb) (UCHAR(((rgb) & green_mask) >> green_shift)) #define GetBValue(rgb) (UCHAR(((rgb) & blue_mask) >> blue_shift)) #define RGB(r, g, b) ((unsigned)( \ (UCHAR(r) << red_shift) | \ (UCHAR(g) << green_shift) | \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
438 439 440 441 442 443 444 |
int xOffset, int yOffset, /* X & Y offset into image instance to
* draw. */
int width, int height) /* Width & height of image to draw. */
{
int x, y, line;
unsigned long pixel;
unsigned char r, g, b, alpha, unalpha, *modelPtr;
| | | 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 |
int xOffset, int yOffset, /* X & Y offset into image instance to
* draw. */
int width, int height) /* Width & height of image to draw. */
{
int x, y, line;
unsigned long pixel;
unsigned char r, g, b, alpha, unalpha, *modelPtr;
unsigned char *alphaAr = iPtr->masterPtr->pix32;
/*
* This blending is an integer version of the Source-Over compositing rule
* (see Porter&Duff, "Compositing Digital Images", proceedings of SIGGRAPH
* 1984) that has been hard-coded (for speed) to work with targetting a
* solid surface.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
495 496 497 498 499 500 501 |
if (bgImg->depth < 24) {
unsigned char red_mlen, green_mlen, blue_mlen;
red_mlen = 8 - CountBits(red_mask >> red_shift);
green_mlen = 8 - CountBits(green_mask >> green_shift);
blue_mlen = 8 - CountBits(blue_mask >> blue_shift);
for (y = 0; y < height; y++) {
| | | 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 |
if (bgImg->depth < 24) {
unsigned char red_mlen, green_mlen, blue_mlen;
red_mlen = 8 - CountBits(red_mask >> red_shift);
green_mlen = 8 - CountBits(green_mask >> green_shift);
blue_mlen = 8 - CountBits(blue_mask >> blue_shift);
for (y = 0; y < height; y++) {
line = (y + yOffset) * iPtr->masterPtr->width;
for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
modelPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
alpha = modelPtr[3];
/*
* Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
538 539 540 541 542 543 544 |
}
}
return;
}
#endif /* !_WIN32 */
for (y = 0; y < height; y++) {
| | | 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 |
}
}
return;
}
#endif /* !_WIN32 */
for (y = 0; y < height; y++) {
line = (y + yOffset) * iPtr->masterPtr->width;
for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
modelPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
alpha = modelPtr[3];
/*
* Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
578 579 580 581 582 583 584 |
}
XPutPixel(bgImg, x, y, RGB(r, g, b));
}
}
}
#undef ALPHA_BLEND
}
| | | 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 |
}
XPutPixel(bgImg, x, y, RGB(r, g, b));
}
}
}
#undef ALPHA_BLEND
}
#endif /* TK_CAN_RENDER_RGBA */
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkImgPhotoDisplay --
*
* This function is invoked to draw a photo image.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
609 610 611 612 613 614 615 |
int imageX, int imageY, /* Upper-left corner of region within image to
* draw. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of region within image to
* draw. */
int drawableX,int drawableY)/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
* to imageX and imageY. */
{
| | | | > | | | > | | 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 |
int imageX, int imageY, /* Upper-left corner of region within image to
* draw. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of region within image to
* draw. */
int drawableX,int drawableY)/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
* to imageX and imageY. */
{
PhotoInstance *instancePtr = clientData;
#ifndef TK_CAN_RENDER_RGBA
XVisualInfo visInfo = instancePtr->visualInfo;
#endif
/*
* If there's no pixmap, it means that an error occurred while creating
* the image instance so it can't be displayed.
*/
if (instancePtr->pixels == None) {
return;
}
#ifdef TK_CAN_RENDER_RGBA
/*
* We can use TkpPutRGBAImage to render RGBA Ximages directly so there is
* no need to call XGetImage or to do the Porter-Duff compositing by hand.
*/
unsigned char *rgbaPixels = instancePtr->masterPtr->pix32;
XImage *photo = XCreateImage(display, NULL, 32, ZPixmap, 0, (char*)rgbaPixels,
(unsigned int)instancePtr->width,
(unsigned int)instancePtr->height,
0, (unsigned int)(4 * instancePtr->width));
TkpPutRGBAImage(display, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
photo, imageX, imageY, drawableX, drawableY,
(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height);
photo->data = NULL;
XDestroyImage(photo);
#else
if ((instancePtr->masterPtr->flags & COMPLEX_ALPHA)
&& visInfo.depth >= 15
&& (visInfo.c_class == DirectColor || visInfo.c_class == TrueColor)) {
Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
XImage *bgImg = NULL;
/*
* Create an error handler to suppress the case where the input was
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
682 683 684 685 686 687 688 |
TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
bgImg, 0, 0, drawableX, drawableY,
(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height);
XDestroyImage(bgImg);
Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
} else {
/*
| | | | 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 |
TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
bgImg, 0, 0, drawableX, drawableY,
(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height);
XDestroyImage(bgImg);
Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
} else {
/*
* modelPtr->validRegion describes which parts of the image contain valid
* data. We set this region as the clip mask for the gc, setting its
* origin appropriately, and use it when drawing the image.
*/
fallBack:
TkSetRegion(display, instancePtr->gc,
instancePtr->masterPtr->validRegion);
XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, drawableX - imageX,
drawableY - imageY);
XCopyArea(display, instancePtr->pixels, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
imageX, imageY, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
drawableX, drawableY);
XSetClipMask(display, instancePtr->gc, None);
XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, 0, 0);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
727 728 729 730 731 732 733 |
void
TkImgPhotoFree(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
* instance to be displayed. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window that used
* image. */
{
| | < | | 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 |
void
TkImgPhotoFree(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
* instance to be displayed. */
Display *display) /* Display containing window that used
* image. */
{
PhotoInstance *instancePtr = clientData;
ColorTable *colorPtr;
if (instancePtr->refCount-- > 1) {
return;
}
/*
* There are no more uses of the image within this widget. Decrement the
* count of live uses of its color table, so that its colors can be
* reclaimed if necessary, and set up an idle call to free the instance
* structure.
*/
colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
if (colorPtr != NULL) {
colorPtr->liveRefCount -= 1;
}
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkImgDisposeInstance, instancePtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
778 779 780 781 782 783 784 |
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr;
schar *newError, *errSrcPtr, *errDestPtr;
int h, offset;
XRectangle validBox;
Pixmap newPixmap;
| | | 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 |
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr;
schar *newError, *errSrcPtr, *errDestPtr;
int h, offset;
XRectangle validBox;
Pixmap newPixmap;
modelPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
TkClipBox(modelPtr->validRegion, &validBox);
if ((instancePtr->width != modelPtr->width)
|| (instancePtr->height != modelPtr->height)
|| (instancePtr->pixels == None)) {
newPixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(instancePtr->display,
RootWindow(instancePtr->display,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
828 829 830 831 832 833 834 |
if (modelPtr->height > 0 && modelPtr->width > 0) {
/*
* TODO: use attemptckalloc() here once there is a strategy that
* will allow us to recover from failure. Right now, there's no
* such possibility.
*/
| | | 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 |
if (modelPtr->height > 0 && modelPtr->width > 0) {
/*
* TODO: use attemptckalloc() here once there is a strategy that
* will allow us to recover from failure. Right now, there's no
* such possibility.
*/
newError = ckalloc(modelPtr->height * modelPtr->width
* 3 * sizeof(schar));
/*
* Zero the new array so that we don't get bogus error values
* propagating into areas we dither later.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
866 867 868 869 870 871 872 |
* Copy the common area over to the new array and free the old
* array.
*/
if (modelPtr->width == instancePtr->width) {
offset = validBox.y * modelPtr->width * 3;
memcpy(newError + offset, instancePtr->error + offset,
| | | | 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 |
* Copy the common area over to the new array and free the old
* array.
*/
if (modelPtr->width == instancePtr->width) {
offset = validBox.y * modelPtr->width * 3;
memcpy(newError + offset, instancePtr->error + offset,
(size_t) (validBox.height
* modelPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar)));
} else if (validBox.width > 0 && validBox.height > 0) {
errDestPtr = newError +
(validBox.y * modelPtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
errSrcPtr = instancePtr->error +
(validBox.y * instancePtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int CountBits( | | | 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 |
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
CountBits(
pixel mask) /* Value to count the 1 bits in. */
{
int n;
for (n=0 ; mask!=0 ; mask&=mask-1) {
n++;
}
return n;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 |
entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, (char *) &id, &isNew);
if (!isNew) {
/*
* Re-use the existing entry.
*/
| | | | 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 |
entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, (char *) &id, &isNew);
if (!isNew) {
/*
* Re-use the existing entry.
*/
colorPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
} else {
/*
* No color table currently available; need to make one.
*/
colorPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(ColorTable));
/*
* The following line of code should not normally be needed due to the
* assignment in the following line. However, it compensates for bugs
* in some compilers (HP, for example) where sizeof(ColorTable) is 24
* but the assignment only copies 20 bytes, leaving 4 bytes
* uninitialized; these cause problems when using the id for lookups
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 |
static void
FreeColorTable(
ColorTable *colorPtr, /* Pointer to the color table which is no
* longer required by an instance. */
int force) /* Force free to happen immediately. */
{
| > | | 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 |
static void
FreeColorTable(
ColorTable *colorPtr, /* Pointer to the color table which is no
* longer required by an instance. */
int force) /* Force free to happen immediately. */
{
colorPtr->refCount--;
if (colorPtr->refCount > 0) {
return;
}
if (force) {
if (colorPtr->flags & DISPOSE_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisposeColorTable, colorPtr);
colorPtr->flags &= ~DISPOSE_PENDING;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 |
*/
if (mono) {
numColors = nGreen = nBlue = nRed;
} else {
numColors = MAX(MAX(nRed, nGreen), nBlue);
}
| | | | 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 |
*/
if (mono) {
numColors = nGreen = nBlue = nRed;
} else {
numColors = MAX(MAX(nRed, nGreen), nBlue);
}
colors = ckalloc(numColors * sizeof(XColor));
for (i = 0; i < numColors; ++i) {
if (igam == 1.0) {
colors[i].red = CFRAC(i, nRed - 1);
colors[i].green = CFRAC(i, nGreen - 1);
colors[i].blue = CFRAC(i, nBlue - 1);
} else {
colors[i].red = CGFRAC(i, nRed - 1, igam);
colors[i].green = CGFRAC(i, nGreen - 1, igam);
colors[i].blue = CGFRAC(i, nBlue - 1, igam);
}
}
} else {
/*
* PseudoColor, StaticColor, GrayScale or StaticGray visual: we
* have to allocate each color in the color cube separately.
*/
numColors = (mono) ? nRed: (nRed * nGreen * nBlue);
colors = ckalloc(numColors * sizeof(XColor));
if (!mono) {
/*
* Color display using a PseudoColor or StaticColor visual.
*/
i = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 | } } /* * Now try to allocate the colors we've calculated. */ | | | 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 |
}
}
/*
* Now try to allocate the colors we've calculated.
*/
pixels = ckalloc(numColors * sizeof(unsigned long));
for (i = 0; i < numColors; ++i) {
if (!XAllocColor(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap,
&colors[i])) {
/*
* Can't get all the colors we want in the default colormap;
* first try freeing colors from other unused color tables.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 |
*/
static void
DisposeColorTable(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to the ColorTable whose
* colors are to be released. */
{
| | | | 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 |
*/
static void
DisposeColorTable(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to the ColorTable whose
* colors are to be released. */
{
ColorTable *colorPtr = clientData;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
if (colorPtr->pixelMap != NULL) {
if (colorPtr->numColors > 0) {
XFreeColors(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap,
colorPtr->pixelMap, colorPtr->numColors, 0);
Tk_FreeColormap(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap);
}
ckfree(colorPtr->pixelMap);
}
entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, (char *) &colorPtr->id);
if (entry == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("DisposeColorTable couldn't find hash entry");
}
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
ckfree(colorPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 |
/*
* First scan through the color hash table to get an upper bound on how
* many colors we might be able to free.
*/
entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, &srch);
while (entry != NULL) {
| | | 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 |
/*
* First scan through the color hash table to get an upper bound on how
* many colors we might be able to free.
*/
entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, &srch);
while (entry != NULL) {
colorPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
if ((colorPtr->id.display == id->display)
&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0 )&& (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
/*
* We could take this guy's colors off him.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 |
/*
* Scan through a second time freeing colors.
*/
entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, &srch);
while ((entry != NULL) && (numColors > 0)) {
| | | 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 |
/*
* Scan through a second time freeing colors.
*/
entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, &srch);
while ((entry != NULL) && (numColors > 0)) {
colorPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
if ((colorPtr->id.display == id->display)
&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0) && (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
/*
* Free the colors that this ColorTable has.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 |
*/
void
TkImgDisposeInstance(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to the instance whose resources are
* to be released. */
{
| | | | | | 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 |
*/
void
TkImgDisposeInstance(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to the instance whose resources are
* to be released. */
{
PhotoInstance *instancePtr = clientData;
PhotoInstance *prevPtr;
if (instancePtr->pixels != None) {
Tk_FreePixmap(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->pixels);
}
if (instancePtr->gc != NULL) {
Tk_FreeGC(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->gc);
}
if (instancePtr->imagePtr != NULL) {
XDestroyImage(instancePtr->imagePtr);
}
if (instancePtr->error != NULL) {
ckfree(instancePtr->error);
}
if (instancePtr->colorTablePtr != NULL) {
FreeColorTable(instancePtr->colorTablePtr, 1);
}
if (instancePtr->masterPtr->instancePtr == instancePtr) {
instancePtr->masterPtr->instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr;
} else {
for (prevPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr->instancePtr;
prevPtr->nextPtr != instancePtr; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
/* Empty loop body. */
}
prevPtr->nextPtr = instancePtr->nextPtr;
}
Tk_FreeColormap(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->colormap);
ckfree(instancePtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 |
void
TkImgDitherInstance(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr, /* The instance to be updated. */
int xStart, int yStart, /* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
* block to be dithered. */
int width, int height) /* Dimensions of the block to be dithered. */
{
| | | | 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 |
void
TkImgDitherInstance(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr, /* The instance to be updated. */
int xStart, int yStart, /* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
* block to be dithered. */
int width, int height) /* Dimensions of the block to be dithered. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
ColorTable *colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
XImage *imagePtr;
int nLines, bigEndian, i, c, x, y, xEnd, doDithering = 1;
int bitsPerPixel, bytesPerLine, lineLength;
unsigned char *srcLinePtr;
schar *errLinePtr;
pixel firstBit, word, mask;
/*
* Turn dithering off in certain cases where it is not needed (TrueColor,
* DirectColor with many colors).
*/
if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.c_class == DirectColor)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 |
imagePtr->bytes_per_line = bytesPerLine;
/*
* TODO: use attemptckalloc() here once we have some strategy for
* recovering from the failure.
*/
| | | 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 |
imagePtr->bytes_per_line = bytesPerLine;
/*
* TODO: use attemptckalloc() here once we have some strategy for
* recovering from the failure.
*/
imagePtr->data = ckalloc(imagePtr->bytes_per_line * nLines);
bigEndian = imagePtr->bitmap_bit_order == MSBFirst;
firstBit = bigEndian? (1 << (imagePtr->bitmap_unit - 1)): 1;
lineLength = modelPtr->width * 3;
srcLinePtr = modelPtr->pix32 + (yStart * modelPtr->width + xStart) * 4;
errLinePtr = instancePtr->error + yStart * lineLength + xStart * 3;
xEnd = xStart + width;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 |
nLines = height;
}
yEnd = yStart + nLines;
for (y = yStart; y < yEnd; ++y) {
unsigned char *srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
schar *errPtr = errLinePtr;
unsigned char *destBytePtr = dstLinePtr;
| | | 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 |
nLines = height;
}
yEnd = yStart + nLines;
for (y = yStart; y < yEnd; ++y) {
unsigned char *srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
schar *errPtr = errLinePtr;
unsigned char *destBytePtr = dstLinePtr;
pixel *destLongPtr = (pixel *) dstLinePtr;
if (colorPtr->flags & COLOR_WINDOW) {
/*
* Color window. We dither the three components independently,
* using Floyd-Steinberg dithering, which propagates errors
* from the quantization of pixels to the pixels below and to
* the right.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 | * image format is different from the pixel format in * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This * would speed up the image code for all of the common * sizes. */ | | | 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 | * image format is different from the pixel format in * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This * would speed up the image code for all of the common * sizes. */ case NBBY * sizeof(pixel): *destLongPtr++ = i; break; #endif default: XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart, (unsigned) i); } |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 | * image format is different from the pixel format in * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This * would speed up the image code for all of the common * sizes. */ | | | 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 | * image format is different from the pixel format in * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This * would speed up the image code for all of the common * sizes. */ case NBBY * sizeof(pixel): *destLongPtr++ = i; break; #endif default: XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart, (unsigned) i); } |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 |
void
TkImgResetDither(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr)
{
if (instancePtr->error) {
memset(instancePtr->error, 0,
| | | | 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 |
void
TkImgResetDither(
PhotoInstance *instancePtr)
{
if (instancePtr->error) {
memset(instancePtr->error, 0,
/*(size_t)*/ (instancePtr->masterPtr->width
* instancePtr->masterPtr->height * 3 * sizeof(schar)));
}
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkImgPhoto.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | /* * Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions: each bit is set in the * allowedOptions parameter on a call to ParseSubcommandOptions if that option * is allowed for the current photo image subcommand. On return, the bit is * set in the options field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option * was specified. * | < < < | | | | | | | | < | < < | | | | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 |
/*
* Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions: each bit is set in the
* allowedOptions parameter on a call to ParseSubcommandOptions if that option
* is allowed for the current photo image subcommand. On return, the bit is
* set in the options field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option
* was specified.
*
* OPT_BACKGROUND: Set if -format option allowed/specified.
* OPT_COMPOSITE: Set if -compositingrule option allowed/spec'd.
* OPT_FORMAT: Set if -format option allowed/specified.
* OPT_FROM: Set if -from option allowed/specified.
* OPT_GRAYSCALE: Set if -grayscale option allowed/specified.
* OPT_SHRINK: Set if -shrink option allowed/specified.
* OPT_SUBSAMPLE: Set if -subsample option allowed/spec'd.
* OPT_TO: Set if -to option allowed/specified.
* OPT_ZOOM: Set if -zoom option allowed/specified.
*/
#define OPT_BACKGROUND 1
#define OPT_COMPOSITE 2
#define OPT_FORMAT 4
#define OPT_FROM 8
#define OPT_GRAYSCALE 0x10
#define OPT_SHRINK 0x20
#define OPT_SUBSAMPLE 0x40
#define OPT_TO 0x80
#define OPT_ZOOM 0x100
/*
* List of option names. The order here must match the order of declarations
* of the OPT_* constants above.
*/
static const char *const optionNames[] = {
"-background",
"-compositingrule",
"-format",
"-from",
"-grayscale",
"-shrink",
"-subsample",
"-to",
"-zoom",
NULL
};
/*
* Message to generate when an attempt to resize an image fails due to memory
* problems.
*/
#define TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE \
"not enough free memory for image buffer"
/*
* Functions used in the type record for photo images.
*/
static int ImgPhotoCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
const Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageModel model,
void **clientDataPtr);
static void ImgPhotoDelete(void *clientData);
static int ImgPhotoPostscript(void *clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int x, int y, int width,
int height, int prepass);
/*
* The type record itself for photo images:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 |
NULL
};
typedef struct {
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;
/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
* photo image formats.*/
| < < > > | > > | | | | | | | > > > | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 |
NULL
};
typedef struct {
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;
/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
* photo image formats.*/
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList;
/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
* photo image formats.*/
int initialized; /* Set to 1 if we've initialized the
* structure. */
} ThreadSpecificData;
static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
/*
* Default configuration
*/
#define DEF_PHOTO_GAMMA "1"
#define DEF_PHOTO_HEIGHT "0"
#define DEF_PHOTO_PALETTE ""
#define DEF_PHOTO_WIDTH "0"
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration specifications:
*/
static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
NULL, Tk_Offset(PhotoModel, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-format", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-gamma", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PHOTO_GAMMA, Tk_Offset(PhotoModel, gamma), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-height", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PHOTO_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(PhotoModel, userHeight), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_UID, "-palette", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PHOTO_PALETTE, Tk_Offset(PhotoModel, palette), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_INT, "-width", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PHOTO_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(PhotoModel, userWidth), 0, NULL},
{TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, NULL}
};
/*
* Forward declarations
*/
static void PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(void *clientData);
static int ImgPhotoCmd(void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int ParseSubcommandOptions(
struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int allowedOptions,
int *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(void *clientData);
static int ImgPhotoConfigureModel(Tcl_Interp *interp,
PhotoModel *modelPtr, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static int ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoModel *mPtr);
static int ImgPhotoSetSize(PhotoModel *modelPtr, int width,
int height);
static int ImgStringWrite(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *formatString,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
static char * ImgGetPhoto(PhotoModel *modelPtr,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr);
static int MatchFileFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 |
PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *)) /* not used */
{
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
| < < | 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 |
PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(
TCL_UNUSED(void *)) /* not used */
{
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
while (tsdPtr->oldFormatList != NULL) {
freePtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
tsdPtr->oldFormatList = tsdPtr->oldFormatList->nextPtr;
ckfree(freePtr);
}
while (tsdPtr->formatList != NULL) {
freePtr = tsdPtr->formatList;
tsdPtr->formatList = tsdPtr->formatList->nextPtr;
ckfree((char *)freePtr->name);
ckfree(freePtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
257 258 259 260 261 262 263 | * Side effects: * The new image file format is entered into a table used in the photo * image "read" and "write" subcommands. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | < < < | < < | 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 |
* Side effects:
* The new image file format is entered into a table used in the photo
* image "read" and "write" subcommands.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(
const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
/* Structure describing the format. All of the
* fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
* by caller. */
{
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(PhotoFormatThreadExitProc, NULL);
}
copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat));
*copyPtr = *formatPtr;
copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr;
}
void
Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(
const Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
/* Structure describing the format. All of the
* fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
* by caller. */
{
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(PhotoFormatThreadExitProc, NULL);
}
copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat));
*copyPtr = *formatPtr;
if (isupper((unsigned char) *formatPtr->name)) {
copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr;
} else {
/* for compatibility with aMSN: make a copy of formatPtr->name */
char *name = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(formatPtr->name) + 1);
strcpy(name, formatPtr->name);
copyPtr->name = name;
copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->formatList;
tsdPtr->formatList = copyPtr;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
341 342 343 344 345 346 347 |
const char *name, /* Name to use for image. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects for options (doesn't
* include image name or type). */
TCL_UNUSED(const Tk_ImageType *),/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
Tk_ImageModel model, /* Token for image, to be used by us in later
* callbacks. */
| | | | 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 |
const char *name, /* Name to use for image. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Argument objects for options (doesn't
* include image name or type). */
TCL_UNUSED(const Tk_ImageType *),/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
Tk_ImageModel model, /* Token for image, to be used by us in later
* callbacks. */
void **clientDataPtr) /* Store manager's token for image here; it
* will be returned in later callbacks. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr;
/*
* Allocate and initialize the photo image model record.
*/
modelPtr = (PhotoModel *)ckalloc(sizeof(PhotoModel));
memset(modelPtr, 0, sizeof(PhotoModel));
modelPtr->tkMaster = model;
modelPtr->interp = interp;
modelPtr->imageCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, ImgPhotoCmd,
modelPtr, ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc);
modelPtr->palette = NULL;
modelPtr->pix32 = NULL;
modelPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
modelPtr->validRegion = TkCreateRegion();
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
394 395 396 397 398 399 400 | * See the user documentation. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ImgPhotoCmd( | | | > > > | | 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImgPhotoCmd(
void *clientData, /* Information about photo model. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
static const char *const photoOptions[] = {
"blank", "cget", "configure", "copy", "data", "get", "put",
"read", "redither", "transparency", "write", NULL
};
enum PhotoOptions {
PHOTO_BLANK, PHOTO_CGET, PHOTO_CONFIGURE, PHOTO_COPY, PHOTO_DATA,
PHOTO_GET, PHOTO_PUT, PHOTO_READ, PHOTO_REDITHER, PHOTO_TRANS,
PHOTO_WRITE
};
PhotoModel *modelPtr = (PhotoModel *)clientData;
int result, x, y, width, height, dataWidth, dataHeight, listObjc;
int index;
struct SubcommandOptions options;
Tcl_Obj **listObjv, **srcObjv;
unsigned char *pixelPtr;
Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
Tk_Window tkwin;
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *imageFormat;
int length;
int imageWidth, imageHeight, matched, oldformat = 0;
Tcl_Channel chan;
Tk_PhotoHandle srcHandle;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (objc < 2) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
453 454 455 456 457 458 459 |
case PHOTO_CGET: {
const char *arg;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > | | | | | > | | | | | 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 |
case PHOTO_CGET: {
const char *arg;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
length = objv[2]->length;
if (strncmp(arg,"-data", length) == 0) {
if (modelPtr->dataString) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, modelPtr->dataString);
}
} else if (strncmp(arg,"-format", length) == 0) {
if (modelPtr->format) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, modelPtr->format);
}
} else {
Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
(char *)modelPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
case PHOTO_CONFIGURE:
/*
* photo configure command - handle this in the standard way.
*/
if (objc == 2) {
Tcl_Obj *obj, *subobj;
result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
configSpecs, (char *)modelPtr, NULL, 0);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
obj = Tcl_NewObj();
subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-data {} {} {}", 14);
if (modelPtr->dataString) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, modelPtr->dataString);
} else {
Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *)NULL);
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-format {} {} {}", 16);
if (modelPtr->format) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, modelPtr->format);
} else {
Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *)NULL);
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
Tcl_ListObjAppendList(interp, obj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, obj);
return TCL_OK;
} else if (objc == 3) {
const char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
length = objv[2]->length;
if (length > 1 && !strncmp(arg, "-data", length)) {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-data {} {} {}", (char *)NULL);
if (modelPtr->dataString) {
/*
* TODO: Modifying result is bad!
*/
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
modelPtr->dataString);
} else {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {}", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_OK;
} else if (length > 1 &&
!strncmp(arg, "-format", length)) {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-format {} {} {}", (char *)NULL);
if (modelPtr->format) {
/*
* TODO: Modifying result is bad!
*/
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
modelPtr->format);
} else {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {}", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_OK;
} else {
return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
configSpecs, (char *) modelPtr, arg, 0);
}
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
573 574 575 576 577 578 579 |
srcHandle = Tk_FindPhoto(interp, Tcl_GetString(options.name));
if (srcHandle == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image \"%s\" doesn't exist or is not a photo image",
Tcl_GetString(options.name)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO",
| | | < < < | | 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 |
srcHandle = Tk_FindPhoto(interp, Tcl_GetString(options.name));
if (srcHandle == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image \"%s\" doesn't exist or is not a photo image",
Tcl_GetString(options.name)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO",
Tcl_GetString(options.name), (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_PhotoGetImage(srcHandle, &block);
if ((options.fromX > block.width) || (options.fromY > block.height)
|| (options.fromX2 > block.width)
|| (options.fromY2 > block.height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"coordinates for -from option extend outside source image",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_FROM", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Hack to pass through the message that the place we're coming from
* has a simple alpha channel.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
635 636 637 638 639 640 641 | options.toY2 = options.toY + height * options.zoomY; } /* * Copy the image data over using Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock. */ | > | | | | | | | | | > > > < < < | > | | < < | < | | > > > | > > > < < < < > | | | | | | | | | | | | < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < | | | | | | | > | > > > > > | 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 |
options.toY2 = options.toY + height * options.zoomY;
}
/*
* Copy the image data over using Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.
*/
if (block.pixelPtr) {
block.pixelPtr += options.fromX * block.pixelSize
+ options.fromY * block.pitch;
block.width = options.fromX2 - options.fromX;
block.height = options.fromY2 - options.fromY;
result = Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, (Tk_PhotoHandle) modelPtr,
&block, options.toX, options.toY, options.toX2 - options.toX,
options.toY2 - options.toY, options.zoomX, options.zoomY,
options.subsampleX, options.subsampleY,
options.compositingRule);
} else {
result = TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Set the destination image size if the -shrink option was specified.
* This has to be done _after_ copying the data. Otherwise, if source
* and destination are the same image, block.pixelPtr would point to
* an invalid memory block (bug [5239fd749b]).
*/
if (options.options & OPT_SHRINK) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, options.toX2,
options.toY2) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (block.pixelPtr || (options.options & OPT_SHRINK)) {
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0,
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
}
return result;
case PHOTO_DATA: {
char *data;
/*
* photo data command - first parse and check any options given.
*/
Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *stringWriteProc = NULL;
index = 2;
memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
options.name = NULL;
options.format = NULL;
options.fromX = 0;
options.fromY = 0;
if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp,
OPT_FORMAT | OPT_FROM | OPT_GRAYSCALE | OPT_BACKGROUND,
&index, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((options.name != NULL) || (index < objc)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-option value ...?");
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((options.fromX > modelPtr->width)
|| (options.fromY > modelPtr->height)
|| (options.fromX2 > modelPtr->width)
|| (options.fromY2 > modelPtr->height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"coordinates for -from option extend outside image", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_FROM", (char *)NULL);
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Fill in default values for unspecified parameters.
*/
if (!(options.options & OPT_FROM) || (options.fromX2 < 0)) {
options.fromX2 = modelPtr->width;
options.fromY2 = modelPtr->height;
}
/*
* Search for an appropriate image string format handler.
*/
if (options.options & OPT_FORMAT) {
matched = 0;
for (imageFormat = tsdPtr->formatList; imageFormat != NULL;
imageFormat = imageFormat->nextPtr) {
if ((strncasecmp(Tcl_GetString(options.format),
imageFormat->name, strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) {
matched = 1;
if (imageFormat->stringWriteProc != NULL) {
stringWriteProc = imageFormat->stringWriteProc;
break;
}
}
}
if (stringWriteProc == NULL) {
oldformat = 1;
for (imageFormat = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; imageFormat != NULL;
imageFormat = imageFormat->nextPtr) {
if ((strncasecmp(Tcl_GetString(options.format),
imageFormat->name,
strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) {
matched = 1;
if (imageFormat->stringWriteProc != NULL) {
stringWriteProc = imageFormat->stringWriteProc;
break;
}
}
}
}
if (stringWriteProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image string format \"%s\" is %s",
Tcl_GetString(options.format),
(matched ? "not supported" : "unknown")));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO_FORMAT",
Tcl_GetString(options.format), NULL);
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else {
stringWriteProc = ImgStringWrite;
}
/*
* Call the handler's string write function to write out the image.
*/
data = ImgGetPhoto(modelPtr, &block, &options);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
784 785 786 787 788 789 790 |
if (result == TCL_OK) {
Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &buffer);
} else {
Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
}
} else {
typedef int (*NewStringWriteProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp,
| | < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < | | < < < < | | | | < | | < < | < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > | > > > > > > | > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | > > > > > > > | | < | < < | < > | | < < | < | < | | | < | < < < < < < < < < | > | | | 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 |
if (result == TCL_OK) {
Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &buffer);
} else {
Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
}
} else {
typedef int (*NewStringWriteProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
result = ((NewStringWriteProc)(void *)stringWriteProc)(interp,
options.format, &block);
}
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
if (data) {
ckfree(data);
}
return result;
}
case PHOTO_GET: {
/*
* photo get command - first parse and check parameters.
*/
Tcl_Obj *channels[3];
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((x < 0) || (x >= modelPtr->width)
|| (y < 0) || (y >= modelPtr->height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"%s get: coordinates out of range",
Tcl_GetString(objv[0])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "COORDINATES",
(char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Extract the value of the desired pixel and format it as a list.
*/
pixelPtr = modelPtr->pix32 + (y * modelPtr->width + x) * 4;
channels[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pixelPtr[0]);
channels[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pixelPtr[1]);
channels[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pixelPtr[2]);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(3, channels));
return TCL_OK;
}
case PHOTO_PUT:
/*
* photo put command - first parse the options and colors specified.
*/
index = 2;
memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
options.name = NULL;
if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp, OPT_TO|OPT_FORMAT,
&index, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((options.name == NULL) || (index < objc)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "data ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (MatchStringFormat(interp, options.name ? objv[2]:NULL,
options.format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
&imageHeight, &oldformat) == TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Obj *format, *data;
if (!(options.options & OPT_TO) || (options.toX2 < 0)) {
options.toX2 = options.toX + imageWidth;
options.toY2 = options.toY + imageHeight;
}
if (imageWidth > options.toX2 - options.toX) {
imageWidth = options.toX2 - options.toX;
}
if (imageHeight > options.toY2 - options.toY) {
imageHeight = options.toY2 - options.toY;
}
format = options.format;
data = objv[2];
if (oldformat) {
if (format) {
format = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(format);
}
data = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(data);
}
if (imageFormat->stringReadProc(interp, data, format,
(Tk_PhotoHandle) modelPtr, options.toX, options.toY,
imageWidth, imageHeight, 0, 0) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
modelPtr->flags |= IMAGE_CHANGED;
return TCL_OK;
}
if (options.options & OPT_FORMAT) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, options.name,
&dataHeight, &srcObjv) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
block.pixelPtr = NULL;
dataWidth = 0;
pixelPtr = NULL;
for (y = 0; y < dataHeight; ++y) {
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, srcObjv[y],
&listObjc, &listObjv) != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
if (y == 0) {
if (listObjc == 0) {
/*
* Lines must be non-empty...
*/
break;
}
dataWidth = listObjc;
/*
* Memory allocation overflow protection.
* May not be able to trigger/ demo / test this.
*/
if (dataWidth > (int)((UINT_MAX/3) / dataHeight)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"photo image dimensions exceed Tcl memory limits", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"OVERFLOW", NULL);
break;
}
pixelPtr = ckalloc(dataWidth * dataHeight * 3);
block.pixelPtr = pixelPtr;
} else if (listObjc != dataWidth) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"all elements of color list must have the same"
" number of elements", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"NON_RECTANGULAR", NULL);
break;
}
for (x = 0; x < dataWidth; ++x) {
const char *colorString = Tcl_GetString(listObjv[x]);
XColor color;
int tmpr, tmpg, tmpb;
/*
* We do not use Tk_GetColorFromObj() because we absolutely do
* not want to invoke the fallback code.
*/
if (colorString[0] == '#') {
if (isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[1])) &&
isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[2])) &&
isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[3]))) {
if (colorString[4] == '\0') {
/* Got #rgb */
sscanf(colorString+1, "%1x%1x%1x",
&tmpr, &tmpg, &tmpb);
*pixelPtr++ = tmpr * 0x11;
*pixelPtr++ = tmpg * 0x11;
*pixelPtr++ = tmpb * 0x11;
continue;
} else if (isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[4])) &&
isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[5])) &&
isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[6])) &&
colorString[7] == '\0') {
/* Got #rrggbb */
sscanf(colorString+1, "%2x%2x%2x",
&tmpr, &tmpg, &tmpb);
*pixelPtr++ = tmpr;
*pixelPtr++ = tmpg;
*pixelPtr++ = tmpb;
continue;
}
}
}
if (!TkParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin),
colorString, &color)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't parse color \"%s\"", colorString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "COLOR", NULL);
break;
}
*pixelPtr++ = color.red >> 8;
*pixelPtr++ = color.green >> 8;
*pixelPtr++ = color.blue >> 8;
}
if (x < dataWidth) {
break;
}
}
if (y < dataHeight || dataHeight == 0 || dataWidth == 0) {
if (block.pixelPtr != NULL) {
ckfree(block.pixelPtr);
}
if (y < dataHeight) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Fill in default values for the -to option, then copy the block in
* using Tk_PhotoPutBlock.
*/
if (!(options.options & OPT_TO) || (options.toX2 < 0)) {
options.toX2 = options.toX + dataWidth;
options.toY2 = options.toY + dataHeight;
}
block.width = dataWidth;
block.height = dataHeight;
block.pitch = dataWidth * 3;
block.pixelSize = 3;
block.offset[0] = 0;
block.offset[1] = 1;
block.offset[2] = 2;
block.offset[3] = 0;
result = Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, modelPtr, &block,
options.toX, options.toY, options.toX2 - options.toX,
options.toY2 - options.toY,
TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
ckfree(block.pixelPtr);
return result;
case PHOTO_READ: {
Tcl_Obj *format;
/*
* photo read command - first parse the options specified.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
956 957 958 959 960 961 962 |
/*
* Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
*/
if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't get image from a file in a safe interpreter", -1));
| | < < < < < | 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 |
/*
* Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
*/
if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't get image from a file in a safe interpreter", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "PHOTO_FILE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Open the image file and look for a handler for it.
*/
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp,
Tcl_GetString(options.name), "r", 0);
if (chan == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (MatchFileFormat(interp, chan,
Tcl_GetString(options.name), options.format, &imageFormat,
&imageWidth, &imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 |
if ((options.fromX > imageWidth) || (options.fromY > imageHeight)
|| (options.fromX2 > imageWidth)
|| (options.fromY2 > imageHeight)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"coordinates for -from option extend outside source image",
-1));
| | | 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 |
if ((options.fromX > imageWidth) || (options.fromY > imageHeight)
|| (options.fromX2 > imageWidth)
|| (options.fromY2 > imageHeight)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"coordinates for -from option extend outside source image",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_FROM", (char *)NULL);
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(options.options & OPT_FROM) || (options.fromX2 < 0)) {
width = imageWidth - options.fromX;
height = imageHeight - options.fromY;
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 |
if (options.options & OPT_SHRINK) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, options.toX + width,
options.toY + height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
| | | 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 |
if (options.options & OPT_SHRINK) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, options.toX + width,
options.toY + height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
/*
* Call the handler's file read function to read the data into the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 |
}
if (y < modelPtr->height) {
/*
* Tell the core image code that part of the image has changed.
*/
| | | 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 |
}
if (y < modelPtr->height) {
/*
* Tell the core image code that part of the image has changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, x, y,
(modelPtr->width - x), (modelPtr->height - y),
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
}
return TCL_OK;
case PHOTO_TRANS: {
static const char *const photoTransOptions[] = {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 |
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], photoTransOptions, "option",
0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum transOptions) index) {
case PHOTO_TRANS_GET: {
| < < < < < < | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < | | < < < | < < < < < | | | < < | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > | > | < | > > > > > > > > > > > | > < | | 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 |
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], photoTransOptions, "option",
0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum transOptions) index) {
case PHOTO_TRANS_GET: {
if (objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "x y");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((x < 0) || (x >= modelPtr->width)
|| (y < 0) || (y >= modelPtr->height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"%s transparency get: coordinates out of range",
Tcl_GetString(objv[0])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "COORDINATES",
(char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
pixelPtr = modelPtr->pix32 + (y * modelPtr->width + x) * 4;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(pixelPtr[3] == 0));
return TCL_OK;
}
case PHOTO_TRANS_SET: {
int transFlag;
XRectangle setBox;
if (objc != 6) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "x y boolean");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[5],
&transFlag) != TCL_OK)) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((x < 0) || (x >= modelPtr->width)
|| (y < 0) || (y >= modelPtr->height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"%s transparency set: coordinates out of range",
Tcl_GetString(objv[0])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "COORDINATES",
(char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
setBox.x = x;
setBox.y = y;
setBox.width = 1;
setBox.height = 1;
pixelPtr = modelPtr->pix32 + (y * modelPtr->width + x) * 4;
if (transFlag) {
/*
* Make pixel transparent.
*/
TkRegion clearRegion = TkCreateRegion();
TkUnionRectWithRegion(&setBox, clearRegion, clearRegion);
TkSubtractRegion(modelPtr->validRegion, clearRegion,
modelPtr->validRegion);
TkDestroyRegion(clearRegion);
/*
* Set the alpha value correctly.
*/
pixelPtr[3] = 0;
} else {
/*
* Make pixel opaque.
*/
TkUnionRectWithRegion(&setBox, modelPtr->validRegion,
modelPtr->validRegion);
pixelPtr[3] = 255;
}
/*
* Inform the generic image code that the image
* has (potentially) changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, x, y, 1, 1,
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
modelPtr->flags &= ~IMAGE_CHANGED;
return TCL_OK;
}
}
Tcl_Panic("unexpected fallthrough");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 |
/*
* Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
*/
if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't write image to a file in a safe interpreter", -1));
| | > > > | > > > | 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 |
/*
* Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
*/
if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't write image to a file in a safe interpreter", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "PHOTO_FILE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* photo write command - first parse and check any options given.
*/
index = 2;
memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
options.name = NULL;
options.format = NULL;
if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp,
OPT_FORMAT | OPT_FROM | OPT_GRAYSCALE | OPT_BACKGROUND,
&index, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((options.name == NULL) || (index < objc)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fileName ?-option value ...?");
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((options.fromX > modelPtr->width)
|| (options.fromY > modelPtr->height)
|| (options.fromX2 > modelPtr->width)
|| (options.fromY2 > modelPtr->height)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"coordinates for -from option extend outside image", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_FROM", (char *)NULL);
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Fill in default values for unspecified parameters. Note that a
* missing -format flag results in us having a guess from the file
* extension. [Bug 2983824]
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 |
strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) {
matched = 1;
if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) {
break;
}
}
}
| < < | 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 |
strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) {
matched = 1;
if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) {
break;
}
}
}
if (imageFormat == NULL) {
oldformat = 1;
for (imageFormat = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; imageFormat != NULL;
imageFormat = imageFormat->nextPtr) {
if ((fmtString == NULL)
|| (strncasecmp(fmtString, imageFormat->name,
strlen(imageFormat->name)) == 0)) {
matched = 1;
if (imageFormat->fileWriteProc != NULL) {
break;
}
}
}
}
if (usedExt && !matched) {
/*
* If we didn't find one and we're using file extensions as the
* basis for the guessing, go back and look again without
* prejudice. Supports old broken code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 |
"image file format \"%s\" is unknown", fmtString));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image file format \"%s\" has no file writing capability",
fmtString));
}
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO_FORMAT",
| | > > > | 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 |
"image file format \"%s\" is unknown", fmtString));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image file format \"%s\" has no file writing capability",
fmtString));
}
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO_FORMAT",
fmtString, (char *)NULL);
if (options.background) {
Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Call the handler's file write function to write out the image.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * ParseSubcommandOptions -- * * This function is invoked to process one of the options which may be * specified for the photo image subcommands, namely, -from, -to, -zoom, | | < < < | < < | 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 |
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ParseSubcommandOptions --
*
* This function is invoked to process one of the options which may be
* specified for the photo image subcommands, namely, -from, -to, -zoom,
* -subsample, -format, -shrink, and -compositingrule.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl result.
*
* Side effects:
* Fields in *optPtr get filled in.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ParseSubcommandOptions(
struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments to be parsed. */
{
static const char *const compositingRules[] = {
"overlay", "set", /* Note that these must match the
* TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_* constants. */
NULL
};
| | | | | | 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments to be parsed. */
{
static const char *const compositingRules[] = {
"overlay", "set", /* Note that these must match the
* TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_* constants. */
NULL
};
int index, length, argIndex;
int c, bit, currentBit;
int values[4], numValues, maxValues;
const char *option, *expandedOption, *needed;
const char *const *listPtr;
Tcl_Obj *msgObj;
for (index = *optIndexPtr; index < objc; *optIndexPtr = ++index) {
/*
* We can have one value specified without an option; it goes into
* optPtr->name.
*/
expandedOption = option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[index], &length);
if (option[0] != '-') {
if (optPtr->name == NULL) {
optPtr->name = objv[index];
continue;
}
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 |
* The -background option takes a single XColor value.
*/
if (index + 1 >= objc) {
goto oneValueRequired;
}
*optIndexPtr = ++index;
| | | | 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 |
* The -background option takes a single XColor value.
*/
if (index + 1 >= objc) {
goto oneValueRequired;
}
*optIndexPtr = ++index;
optPtr->background = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
objv[index]);
if (!optPtr->background) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else if (bit == OPT_FORMAT) {
/*
* The -format option takes a single string value. Note that
* parsing this is outside the scope of this function.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 |
index++;
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[index], compositingRules,
"compositing rule", 0, &optPtr->compositingRule)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*optIndexPtr = index;
| | < | 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 |
index++;
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[index], compositingRules,
"compositing rule", 0, &optPtr->compositingRule)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*optIndexPtr = index;
} else if ((bit != OPT_SHRINK) && (bit != OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
const char *val;
maxValues = ((bit == OPT_FROM) || (bit == OPT_TO)) ? 4 : 2;
argIndex = index + 1;
for (numValues = 0; numValues < maxValues; ++numValues) {
if (argIndex >= objc) {
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 |
/*
* Exception generation.
*/
oneValueRequired:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"the \"%s\" option requires a value", expandedOption));
| | | | | | 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 |
/*
* Exception generation.
*/
oneValueRequired:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"the \"%s\" option requires a value", expandedOption));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "MISSING_VALUE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
manyValuesRequired:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"the \"%s\" option requires one %s integer values",
expandedOption, (maxValues == 2) ? "or two": "to four"));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "MISSING_VALUE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
numberOutOfRange:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"value(s) for the %s option must be %s", expandedOption, needed));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_VALUE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
unknownOrAmbiguousOption:
msgObj = Tcl_ObjPrintf("unrecognized option \"%s\": must be ", option);
bit = 1;
for (listPtr = optionNames; *listPtr != NULL; ++listPtr) {
if (allowedOptions & bit) {
if (allowedOptions & (bit - 1)) {
if (allowedOptions & ~((bit << 1) - 1)) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(msgObj, ", ", -1);
} else {
Tcl_AppendToObj(msgObj, ", or ", -1);
}
}
Tcl_AppendToObj(msgObj, *listPtr, -1);
}
bit <<= 1;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, msgObj);
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO", "BAD_OPTION", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImgPhotoConfigureModel --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 |
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
* as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
{
PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
const char *oldFileString, *oldPaletteString;
Tcl_Obj *oldData, *data = NULL, *oldFormat, *format = NULL;
Tcl_Obj *tempdata, *tempformat;
| | | < < | | | | | < < | | | < < | | 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 |
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
* as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
{
PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
const char *oldFileString, *oldPaletteString;
Tcl_Obj *oldData, *data = NULL, *oldFormat, *format = NULL;
Tcl_Obj *tempdata, *tempformat;
int i, length;
int result, imageWidth, imageHeight, oldformat;
double oldGamma;
Tcl_Channel chan;
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *imageFormat;
for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
const char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
if ((length > 1) && (arg[0] == '-')) {
if ((arg[1] == 'd') &&
!strncmp(arg, "-data", length)) {
if (++i < objc) {
data = objv[i];
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"value for \"-data\" missing", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"MISSING_VALUE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else if ((arg[1] == 'f') &&
!strncmp(arg, "-format", length)) {
if (++i < objc) {
format = objv[i];
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"value for \"-format\" missing", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"MISSING_VALUE", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 |
oldGamma = modelPtr->gamma;
/*
* Process the configuration options specified.
*/
if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
| | < < | | | 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 |
oldGamma = modelPtr->gamma;
/*
* Process the configuration options specified.
*/
if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
objc, (const char **)objv, (char *) modelPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS) != TCL_OK) {
goto errorExit;
}
/*
* Regard the empty string for -file, -data or -format as the null value.
*/
if ((modelPtr->fileString != NULL) && (modelPtr->fileString[0] == 0)) {
ckfree(modelPtr->fileString);
modelPtr->fileString = NULL;
}
if (data) {
/*
* Force into ByteArray format, which most (all) image handlers will
* use anyway. Empty length means ignore the -data option.
*/
int bytesize;
(void) Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(data, &bytesize);
if (bytesize) {
Tcl_IncrRefCount(data);
} else {
data = NULL;
}
if (modelPtr->dataString) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(modelPtr->dataString);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 |
* is correctly allocated for this image.
*/
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
| | | < < < < | | | | 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 |
* is correctly allocated for this image.
*/
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
goto errorExit;
}
/*
* Read in the image from the file or string if the user has specified the
* -file or -data option.
*/
if ((modelPtr->fileString != NULL)
&& ((modelPtr->fileString != oldFileString)
|| (modelPtr->format != oldFormat))) {
/*
* Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
*/
if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"can't get image from a file in a safe interpreter",
-1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "SAFE", "PHOTO_FILE", (char *)NULL);
goto errorExit;
}
chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, modelPtr->fileString, "r", 0);
if (chan == NULL) {
goto errorExit;
}
if ((Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
!= TCL_OK) ||
(MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, modelPtr->fileString,
modelPtr->format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
&imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK)) {
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
goto errorExit;
}
result = ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, imageWidth, imageHeight);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
goto errorExit;
}
tempformat = modelPtr->format;
if (oldformat && tempformat) {
tempformat = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(tempformat);
}
result = imageFormat->fileReadProc(interp, chan,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 |
modelPtr->format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
&imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK) {
goto errorExit;
}
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, imageWidth, imageHeight) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
| | | 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 |
modelPtr->format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
&imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK) {
goto errorExit;
}
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, imageWidth, imageHeight) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
goto errorExit;
}
tempformat = modelPtr->format;
tempdata = modelPtr->dataString;
if (oldformat) {
if (tempformat) {
tempformat = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(tempformat);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 |
TkImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr);
}
/*
* Inform the generic image code that the image has (potentially) changed.
*/
| | | 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 |
TkImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr);
}
/*
* Inform the generic image code that the image has (potentially) changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height, modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
modelPtr->flags &= ~IMAGE_CHANGED;
if (oldData != NULL) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(oldData);
}
if (oldFormat != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 |
static int
ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(
PhotoModel *mPtr)
{
size_t len = (size_t)MAX(mPtr->userWidth, mPtr->width) *
(size_t)MAX(mPtr->userHeight, mPtr->height) * 4;
unsigned char *c = mPtr->pix32;
| | > | | 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 |
static int
ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(
PhotoModel *mPtr)
{
size_t len = (size_t)MAX(mPtr->userWidth, mPtr->width) *
(size_t)MAX(mPtr->userHeight, mPtr->height) * 4;
unsigned char *c = mPtr->pix32;
unsigned char *end;
/*
* Set the COMPLEX_ALPHA flag if we have an image with partially
* transparent bits.
*/
mPtr->flags &= ~COMPLEX_ALPHA;
if (c == NULL) {
return 0;
}
end = c + len;
c += 3; /* Start at first alpha byte. */
for (; c < end; c += 4) {
if (*c && *c != 255) {
mPtr->flags |= COMPLEX_ALPHA;
break;
}
}
return (mPtr->flags & COMPLEX_ALPHA);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 | * Resources associated with the image get freed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgPhotoDelete( | | | | 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 |
* Resources associated with the image get freed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgPhotoDelete(
void *modelData) /* Pointer to PhotoModel structure for image.
* Must not have any more instances. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr = (PhotoModel *)modelData;
PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
while ((instancePtr = modelPtr->instancePtr) != NULL) {
if (instancePtr->refCount > 0) {
Tcl_Panic("tried to delete photo image when instances still exist");
}
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkImgDisposeInstance, instancePtr);
TkImgDisposeInstance(instancePtr);
}
modelPtr->tkMaster = NULL;
if (modelPtr->imageCmd != NULL) {
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(modelPtr->interp, modelPtr->imageCmd);
}
if (modelPtr->pix32 != NULL) {
ckfree(modelPtr->pix32);
}
if (modelPtr->validRegion != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 | * The image is deleted. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc( | | | | | 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 |
* The image is deleted.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(
void *clientData) /* Pointer to PhotoModel structure for
* image. */
{
PhotoModel *modelPtr = (PhotoModel *)clientData;
modelPtr->imageCmd = NULL;
if (modelPtr->tkMaster != NULL) {
Tk_DeleteImage(modelPtr->interp, Tk_NameOfImage(modelPtr->tkMaster));
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImgPhotoSetSize --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 |
}
matched = 1;
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"-file option isn't supported for %s images",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
| | < | | < | | | 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 |
}
matched = 1;
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"-file option isn't supported for %s images",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"NOT_FILE_FORMAT", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc != NULL) {
(void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET);
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc(chan, fileName, formatObj,
widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
if (*widthPtr < 1) {
*widthPtr = 1;
}
if (*heightPtr < 1) {
*heightPtr = 1;
}
break;
}
}
}
if (formatPtr == NULL) {
useoldformat = 1;
for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; formatPtr != NULL;
formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
if (formatString != NULL) {
if (strncasecmp(formatString,
formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) {
continue;
}
matched = 1;
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"-file option isn't supported for %s images",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"NOT_FILE_FORMAT", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc != NULL) {
(void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET);
if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc(chan, fileName, (Tcl_Obj *)
formatString, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
if (*widthPtr < 1) {
*widthPtr = 1;
}
if (*heightPtr < 1) {
*heightPtr = 1;
}
break;
}
}
}
}
if (formatPtr == NULL) {
if ((formatObj != NULL) && !matched) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image file format \"%s\" is not supported",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO_FORMAT",
formatString, (char *)NULL);
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"couldn't recognize data in image file \"%s\"",
fileName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PHOTO", "IMAGE",
"UNRECOGNIZED_DATA", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*imageFormatPtr = formatPtr;
*oldformat = useoldformat;
(void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 |
* is returned here. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
/* The dimensions of the image are returned
* here. */
int *oldformat) /* Returns 1 if the old image API is used. */
{
int matched = 0, useoldformat = 0;
| | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | < < < < < < < | 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 |
* is returned here. */
int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
/* The dimensions of the image are returned
* here. */
int *oldformat) /* Returns 1 if the old image API is used. */
{
int matched = 0, useoldformat = 0;
Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
const char *formatString = NULL;
if (formatObj) {
formatString = Tcl_GetString(formatObj);
}
/*
* Scan through the table of file format handlers to find one which can
* handle the image.
*/
for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->formatList; formatPtr != NULL;
formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
if (formatObj != NULL) {
if (strncasecmp(formatString,
formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) {
continue;
}
matched = 1;
if (formatPtr->stringMatchProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"-data option isn't supported for %s images",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"NOT_DATA_FORMAT", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if ((formatPtr->stringMatchProc != NULL)
&& (formatPtr->stringReadProc != NULL)
&& formatPtr->stringMatchProc(data, formatObj,
widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
break;
}
}
if (formatPtr == NULL) {
useoldformat = 1;
for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList; formatPtr != NULL;
formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
if (formatObj != NULL) {
if (strncasecmp(formatString,
formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) {
continue;
}
matched = 1;
if (formatPtr->stringMatchProc == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"-data option isn't supported for %s images",
formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"NOT_DATA_FORMAT", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if ((formatPtr->stringMatchProc != NULL)
&& (formatPtr->stringReadProc != NULL)
&& formatPtr->stringMatchProc(
(Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(data),
(Tcl_Obj *) formatString,
widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
break;
}
}
}
if (formatPtr == NULL) {
if ((formatObj != NULL) && !matched) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"image format \"%s\" is not supported", formatString));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "PHOTO_FORMAT",
formatString, (char *)NULL);
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"couldn't recognize image data", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "IMAGE", "PHOTO",
"UNRECOGNIZED_DATA", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
*imageFormatPtr = formatPtr;
*oldformat = useoldformat;
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_FindPhoto --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 |
Tk_PhotoHandle
Tk_FindPhoto(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter (application) in which image
* exists. */
const char *imageName) /* Name of the desired photo image. */
{
const Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
| | | | 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 |
Tk_PhotoHandle
Tk_FindPhoto(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter (application) in which image
* exists. */
const char *imageName) /* Name of the desired photo image. */
{
const Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
void *clientData =
Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, imageName, &typePtr);
if ((typePtr == NULL) || (typePtr->name != tkPhotoImageType.name)) {
return NULL;
}
return clientData;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 |
*
* To find out, just comparing the pointers is not enough - they might have
* different values and still point to the same block of memory. (e.g.
* if the -from option was passed to [imageName copy])
*/
sourceBlock = *blockPtr;
memToFree = NULL;
| | | | | | | 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 |
*
* To find out, just comparing the pointers is not enough - they might have
* different values and still point to the same block of memory. (e.g.
* if the -from option was passed to [imageName copy])
*/
sourceBlock = *blockPtr;
memToFree = NULL;
if (modelPtr->pix32 && (sourceBlock.pixelPtr >= modelPtr->pix32)
&& (sourceBlock.pixelPtr < modelPtr->pix32 + modelPtr->width
* modelPtr->height * 4)) {
/*
* Fix 5c51be6411: avoid reading
*
* (sourceBlock.pitch - sourceBlock.width * sourceBlock.pixelSize)
*
* bytes past the end of modelPtr->pix32[] when
*
* blockPtr->pixelPtr > (modelPtr->pix32 +
* 4 * modelPtr->width * modelPtr->height -
* sourceBlock.height * sourceBlock.pitch)
*/
unsigned int cpyLen = (sourceBlock.height - 1) * sourceBlock.pitch +
sourceBlock.width * sourceBlock.pixelSize;
sourceBlock.pixelPtr = (unsigned char *)attemptckalloc(cpyLen);
if (sourceBlock.pixelPtr == NULL) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
memToFree = sourceBlock.pixelPtr;
memcpy(sourceBlock.pixelPtr, blockPtr->pixelPtr, cpyLen);
}
xEnd = x + width;
yEnd = y + height;
if ((xEnd > modelPtr->width) || (yEnd > modelPtr->height)) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, MAX(xEnd, modelPtr->width),
MAX(yEnd, modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
goto errorExit;
}
}
if ((y < modelPtr->ditherY) || ((y == modelPtr->ditherY)
&& (x < modelPtr->ditherX))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 |
/*
* Add this new block to the region which specifies which data is valid.
*/
if (alphaOffset) {
/*
* This block is grossly inefficient. For each row in the image, it
| | | 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 |
/*
* Add this new block to the region which specifies which data is valid.
*/
if (alphaOffset) {
/*
* This block is grossly inefficient. For each row in the image, it
* finds each contiguous string of nontransparent pixels, then marks
* those areas as valid in the validRegion mask. This makes drawing
* very efficient, because of the way we use X: we just say, here's
* your mask, and here's your data. We need not worry about the
* current background color, etc. But this costs us a lot on the image
* setup. Still, image setup only happens once, whereas the drawing
* happens many times, so this might be the best way to go.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 |
Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle)modelPtr, x, y, width, height);
/*
* Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
*/
| | | 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 |
Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle)modelPtr, x, y, width, height);
/*
* Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, x, y, width, height,
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
if (memToFree) ckfree(memToFree);
return TCL_OK;
errorExit:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 |
*
* To find out, just comparing the pointers is not enough - they might have
* different values and still point to the same block of memory. (e.g.
* if the -from option was passed to [imageName copy])
*/
sourceBlock = *blockPtr;
memToFree = NULL;
| | | | | | | 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 |
*
* To find out, just comparing the pointers is not enough - they might have
* different values and still point to the same block of memory. (e.g.
* if the -from option was passed to [imageName copy])
*/
sourceBlock = *blockPtr;
memToFree = NULL;
if (modelPtr->pix32 && (sourceBlock.pixelPtr >= modelPtr->pix32)
&& (sourceBlock.pixelPtr < modelPtr->pix32 + modelPtr->width
* modelPtr->height * 4)) {
/*
* Fix 5c51be6411: avoid reading
*
* (sourceBlock.pitch - sourceBlock.width * sourceBlock.pixelSize)
*
* bytes past the end of modelPtr->pix32[] when
*
* blockPtr->pixelPtr > (modelPtr->pix32 +
* 4 * modelPtr->width * modelPtr->height -
* sourceBlock.height * sourceBlock.pitch)
*/
unsigned int cpyLen = (sourceBlock.height - 1) * sourceBlock.pitch +
sourceBlock.width * sourceBlock.pixelSize;
sourceBlock.pixelPtr = (unsigned char *)attemptckalloc(cpyLen);
if (sourceBlock.pixelPtr == NULL) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
memToFree = sourceBlock.pixelPtr;
memcpy(sourceBlock.pixelPtr, blockPtr->pixelPtr, cpyLen);
}
xEnd = x + width;
yEnd = y + height;
if ((xEnd > modelPtr->width) || (yEnd > modelPtr->height)) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, MAX(xEnd, modelPtr->width),
MAX(yEnd, modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
goto errorExit;
}
}
if ((y < modelPtr->ditherY) || ((y == modelPtr->ditherY)
&& (x < modelPtr->ditherX))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 |
if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
*destPtr++ = 255;
continue;
| | | 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 |
if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
*destPtr++ = 255;
continue;
}
if (compRule==TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET || !destPtr[3]) {
/*
* Either this is the SET rule (we overwrite
* whatever is there) or the destination is
* entirely blank. In both cases, we just set the
* destination to the source.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 |
Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle) modelPtr, x, y, width, height);
/*
* Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
*/
| | | 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 |
Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle) modelPtr, x, y, width, height);
/*
* Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, x, y, width, height, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height);
if (memToFree) ckfree(memToFree);
return TCL_OK;
errorExit:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 |
modelPtr->validRegion = TkCreateRegion();
/*
* Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array. Clear out the dithering error
* arrays for each instance.
*/
| > | | > | | 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 |
modelPtr->validRegion = TkCreateRegion();
/*
* Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array. Clear out the dithering error
* arrays for each instance.
*/
if (modelPtr->pix32) {
memset(modelPtr->pix32, 0,
((size_t)modelPtr->width * modelPtr->height * 4));
}
for (instancePtr = modelPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
TkImgResetDither(instancePtr);
}
/*
* Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
*/
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height, modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_PhotoExpand --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 |
}
if ((width != modelPtr->width) || (height != modelPtr->height)) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, MAX(width, modelPtr->width),
MAX(height, modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
| | | | 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 |
}
if ((width != modelPtr->width) || (height != modelPtr->height)) {
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, MAX(width, modelPtr->width),
MAX(height, modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0, modelPtr->width,
modelPtr->height);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 |
modelPtr->userWidth = width;
modelPtr->userHeight = height;
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, ((width > 0) ? width: modelPtr->width),
((height > 0) ? height: modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
| | | | 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 |
modelPtr->userWidth = width;
modelPtr->userHeight = height;
if (ImgPhotoSetSize(modelPtr, ((width > 0) ? width: modelPtr->width),
((height > 0) ? height: modelPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
if (interp != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MALLOC", (char *)NULL);
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_ImageChanged(modelPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0,
modelPtr->width, modelPtr->height);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 |
srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
destPtr += newPixelSize;
}
srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
}
} else {
| | | 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 |
srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
destPtr += newPixelSize;
}
srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
}
} else {
int gray = (unsigned char) (((optPtr->background->red>>8) * 11
+ (optPtr->background->green>>8) * 16
+ (optPtr->background->blue>>8) * 5 + 16) >> 5);
for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
destPtr[0] += ((255 - *srcPtr) *
(gray-destPtr[0])) / 255;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 |
blockPtr->offset[2] = 0;
blockPtr->offset[3]= 1;
}
return data;
}
return NULL;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_PhotoGetImage --
*
* This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 |
blockPtr->offset[2] = 0;
blockPtr->offset[3]= 1;
}
return data;
}
return NULL;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImgStringWrite --
*
* Default string write function. The data is formatted in the default
* format as accepted by the "<img> put" command.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl result.
*
* Side effects:
* See the user documentation.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImgStringWrite(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *formatString,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
{
int greenOffset, blueOffset;
Tcl_Obj *data;
greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1] - blockPtr->offset[0];
blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2] - blockPtr->offset[0];
data = Tcl_NewObj();
if ((blockPtr->width > 0) && (blockPtr->height > 0)) {
int row, col;
for (row=0; row<blockPtr->height; row++) {
Tcl_Obj *line = Tcl_NewObj();
unsigned char *pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0]
+ row * blockPtr->pitch;
for (col=0; col<blockPtr->width; col++) {
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(line, "%s#%02x%02x%02x",
col ? " " : "", *pixelPtr,
pixelPtr[greenOffset], pixelPtr[blueOffset]);
pixelPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
}
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, data, line);
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, data);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_PhotoGetImage --
*
* This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 | * None. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ImgPhotoPostscript( | | | | | 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 |
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImgPhotoPostscript(
void *clientData, /* Handle for the photo image. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* (unused) */
Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, /* Postscript info. */
int x, int y, /* First pixel to output. */
int width, int height, /* Width and height of area. */
TCL_UNUSED(int)) /* (unused) */
{
Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
Tk_PhotoGetImage(clientData, &block);
block.pixelPtr += y * block.pitch + x * block.pixelSize;
return Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, &block, psInfo, width, height);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite --
*
* These backward-compatibility functions just exist to fill slots in stubs
* table. For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the corresponding
* function without the extra suffix, except that the compositing rule is
* always "overlay" and the function always panics on memory-allocation
* failure.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void
Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(
Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
int x, int y, int width, int height)
{
if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic, * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic * | | | 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic, * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic * * Backward compatibility functions for preserving the old behaviour (i.e. * panic on memory allocation failure) so that extensions do not need to be * significantly updated to take account of TIP #116. These call the new * interface (i.e. the interface without the extra suffix), but panic if an * error condition is returned. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 |
Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
int width, int height)
{
if (Tk_PhotoSetSize(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
}
}
| < | 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 |
Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
int width, int height)
{
if (Tk_PhotoSetSize(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
}
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* tab-width: 8
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkImgPhoto.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | #include "tkUnixInt.h" #endif /* * Forward declarations of the structures we define. */ | | | > > > > > > > | 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 |
#include "tkUnixInt.h"
#endif
/*
* Forward declarations of the structures we define.
*/
#define PhotoModel PhotoMaster
typedef struct ColorTableId ColorTableId;
typedef struct ColorTable ColorTable;
typedef struct PhotoInstance PhotoInstance;
typedef struct PhotoMaster PhotoMaster;
/*
* A signed 8-bit integral type. If chars are unsigned and the compiler isn't
* an ANSI one, then we have to use short instead (which wastes space) to get
* signed behavior.
*/
#if defined(__STDC__) || defined(_AIX)
typedef signed char schar;
#else
# ifndef __CHAR_UNSIGNED__
typedef char schar;
# else
typedef short schar;
# endif
#endif
/*
* An unsigned 32-bit integral type, used for pixel values. We use int rather
* than long here to accommodate those systems where longs are 64 bits.
*/
typedef unsigned int pixel;
/*
* The maximum number of pixels to transmit to the server in a single
* XPutImage call.
*/
#define MAX_PIXELS 65536
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 |
* structure of the following type is used to store the allocated pixel values
* and other information:
*/
struct ColorTable {
ColorTableId id; /* Information used in selecting this color
* table. */
| < < < < < < | | < | | | | 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 |
* structure of the following type is used to store the allocated pixel values
* and other information:
*/
struct ColorTable {
ColorTableId id; /* Information used in selecting this color
* table. */
int flags; /* See below. */
int refCount; /* Number of instances using this map. */
int liveRefCount; /* Number of instances which are actually in
* use, using this map. */
int numColors; /* Number of colors allocated for this map. */
XVisualInfo visualInfo; /* Information about the visual for windows
* using this color table. */
pixel redValues[256]; /* Maps 8-bit values of red intensity to a
* pixel value or index in pixelMap. */
pixel greenValues[256]; /* Ditto for green intensity. */
pixel blueValues[256]; /* Ditto for blue intensity. */
unsigned long *pixelMap; /* Actual pixel values allocated. */
unsigned char colorQuant[3][256];
/* Maps 8-bit intensities to quantized
* intensities. The first index is 0 for red,
* 1 for green, 2 for blue. */
};
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | #define DISPOSE_PENDING 4 #define MAP_COLORS 8 /* * Definition of the data associated with each photo image model. */ | | | | 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 |
#define DISPOSE_PENDING 4
#define MAP_COLORS 8
/*
* Definition of the data associated with each photo image model.
*/
struct PhotoMaster {
Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster; /* Tk's token for image model. NULL means the
* image is being deleted. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter associated with the application
* using this image. */
Tcl_Command imageCmd; /* Token for image command (used to delete it
* when the image goes away). NULL means the
* image command has already been deleted. */
int flags; /* Sundry flags, defined below. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 |
TkRegion validRegion; /* Tk region indicating which parts of the
* image have valid image data. */
PhotoInstance *instancePtr; /* First in the list of instances associated
* with this model. */
};
/*
| | | 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 |
TkRegion validRegion; /* Tk region indicating which parts of the
* image have valid image data. */
PhotoInstance *instancePtr; /* First in the list of instances associated
* with this model. */
};
/*
* Bit definitions for the flags field of a PhotoMaster.
* COLOR_IMAGE: 1 means that the image has different color
* components.
* IMAGE_CHANGED: 1 means that the instances of this image need
* to be redithered.
* COMPLEX_ALPHA: 1 means that the instances of this image have
* alpha values that aren't 0 or 255, and so need
* the copy-merge-replace renderer .
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 |
/*
* The following data structure represents all of the instances of a photo
* image in windows on a given screen that are using the same colormap.
*/
struct PhotoInstance {
| | < | < < < | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 |
/*
* The following data structure represents all of the instances of a photo
* image in windows on a given screen that are using the same colormap.
*/
struct PhotoInstance {
PhotoMaster *masterPtr; /* Pointer to model for image. */
Display *display; /* Display for windows using this instance. */
Colormap colormap; /* The image may only be used in windows with
* this particular colormap. */
PhotoInstance *nextPtr; /* Pointer to the next instance in the list of
* instances associated with this model. */
int refCount; /* Number of instances using this structure. */
Tk_Uid palette; /* Palette for these particular instances. */
double gamma; /* Gamma value for these instances. */
Tk_Uid defaultPalette; /* Default palette to use if a palette is not
* specified for the model. */
ColorTable *colorTablePtr; /* Pointer to information about colors
* allocated for image display in windows like
* this one. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted generic/tkImgSVGnano.c.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to generic/tkImgUtil.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 |
*/
dataWidth = image->bytes_per_line;
if (dataWidth % alignment) {
dataWidth += (alignment - (dataWidth % alignment));
}
| | | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 |
*/
dataWidth = image->bytes_per_line;
if (dataWidth % alignment) {
dataWidth += (alignment - (dataWidth % alignment));
}
data = ckalloc(dataWidth * image->height);
destPtr = data;
for (i = 0; i < image->height; i++) {
srcPtr = &image->data[i * image->bytes_per_line];
for (j = 0; j < dataWidth; j++) {
if (j >= image->bytes_per_line) {
*destPtr = 0;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkInt.decls.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 |
Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC)
}
declare 21 {
int TkFindStateNum(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option,
const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey)
}
declare 22 {
| | | 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 |
Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC)
}
declare 21 {
int TkFindStateNum(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option,
const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey)
}
declare 22 {
CONST86 char *TkFindStateString(const TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey)
}
declare 23 {
void TkFocusDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr)
}
declare 24 {
int TkFocusFilterEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
178 179 180 181 182 183 184 |
TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType,
Tcl_QueuePosition position)
}
declare 45 {
void TkInstallFrameMenu(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 46 {
| | | 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 |
TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType,
Tcl_QueuePosition position)
}
declare 45 {
void TkInstallFrameMenu(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 46 {
CONST86 char *TkKeysymToString(KeySym keysym)
}
declare 47 {
int TkLineToArea(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[])
}
declare 48 {
double TkLineToPoint(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[])
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
284 285 286 287 288 289 290 |
declare 78 {
int TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename,
unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return,
Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return)
}
declare 79 {
int TkScrollWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y,
| | | 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 |
declare 78 {
int TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename,
unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return,
Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return)
}
declare 79 {
int TkScrollWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int dx, int dy, TkRegion damageRgn)
}
declare 80 {
void TkSelDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr)
}
declare 81 {
void TkSelEventProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
385 386 387 388 389 390 391 |
TkMainInfo *TkGetMainInfoList(void)
}
declare 108 {
int TkGetWindowFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr)
}
declare 109 {
| | | | | | | | | | | 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 |
TkMainInfo *TkGetMainInfoList(void)
}
declare 108 {
int TkGetWindowFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr)
}
declare 109 {
CONST86 char *TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr)
}
declare 110 {
void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont)
}
declare 111 {
Tcl_Obj *TkpGetSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin,
const char *dbName, const char *className)
}
declare 112 {
void TkpMenuThreadInit(void)
}
declare 113 {
int TkClipBox(TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return)
}
declare 114 {
TkRegion TkCreateRegion(void)
}
declare 115 {
int TkDestroyRegion(TkRegion rgn)
}
declare 116 {
int TkIntersectRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return)
}
declare 117 {
int TkRectInRegion(TkRegion rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width,
unsigned int height)
}
declare 118 {
int TkSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn)
}
declare 119 {
int TkUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect,
TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return)
}
declare 121 aqua {
Pixmap TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Display *display, const void *source)
}
declare 122 aqua {
void TkpDefineNativeBitmaps(void)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
448 449 450 451 452 453 454 |
declare 138 {
KeySym TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)
}
declare 139 {
void TkpInitKeymapInfo(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
}
declare 140 {
| | | | 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 |
declare 138 {
KeySym TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)
}
declare 139 {
void TkpInitKeymapInfo(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
}
declare 140 {
TkRegion TkPhotoGetValidRegion(Tk_PhotoHandle handle)
}
declare 141 {
TkWindow **TkWmStackorderToplevel(TkWindow *parentPtr)
}
declare 142 {
void TkFocusFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr)
}
declare 143 {
void TkClipCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
}
declare 144 {
void TkGCCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
}
declare 145 {
int TkSubtractRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return)
}
declare 146 {
void TkStylePkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr)
}
declare 147 {
void TkStylePkgFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
534 535 536 537 538 539 540 |
}
declare 162 {
struct TkTextIndex *TkTextMakeByteIndex(TkTextBTree tree,
const struct TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex,
int byteIndex, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr)
}
declare 163 {
| | | 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 |
}
declare 162 {
struct TkTextIndex *TkTextMakeByteIndex(TkTextBTree tree,
const struct TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex,
int byteIndex, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr)
}
declare 163 {
int TkTextPrintIndex(const struct TkText *textPtr,
const struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr, char *string)
}
declare 164 {
struct TkTextSegment *TkTextSetMark(struct TkText *textPtr,
const char *name, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr)
}
declare 165 {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
563 564 565 566 567 568 569 |
struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
int height, int baseline, Display *display,
Drawable dst, int screenY)
}
# Next group of functions exposed due to [Bug 2768945].
declare 169 {
int TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 |
struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
int height, int baseline, Display *display,
Drawable dst, int screenY)
}
# Next group of functions exposed due to [Bug 2768945].
declare 169 {
int TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 170 {
CONST86 char *TkStatePrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 171 {
int TkCanvasDashParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 172 {
CONST86 char *TkCanvasDashPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 173 {
int TkOffsetParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 174 {
CONST86 char *TkOffsetPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 175 {
int TkPixelParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 176 {
CONST86 char *TkPixelPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 177 {
int TkOrientParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 178 {
CONST86 char *TkOrientPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
declare 179 {
int TkSmoothParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
}
declare 180 {
CONST86 char *TkSmoothPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
}
# Angled text API, exposed for Emiliano Gavilán's RBC work.
declare 181 {
void TkDrawAngledTextLayout(Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc,
Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, double angle, int firstChar,
int lastChar)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
638 639 640 641 642 643 644 |
# Support for aqua's inability to draw outside [NSView drawRect:]
declare 185 macosx {
void TkpRedrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 186 macosx {
int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
| < < < < > | 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 |
# Support for aqua's inability to draw outside [NSView drawRect:]
declare 185 macosx {
void TkpRedrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 186 macosx {
int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
declare 187 {
void TkUnusedStubEntry(void)
}
##############################################################################
# Define the platform specific internal Tcl interface. These functions are
# only available on the designated platform.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
914 915 916 917 918 919 920 |
}
declare 9 aqua {
void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void)
}
declare 10 aqua {
int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index)
}
| < | | < > | 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 |
}
declare 9 aqua {
void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void)
}
declare 10 aqua {
int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index)
}
declare 11 aqua {
void TkMacOSXInstallCursor(int resizeOverride)
}
declare 12 aqua {
void TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu(void)
}
declare 14 aqua {
int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(void *theEvent)
}
declare 16 aqua {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
989 990 991 992 993 994 995 |
#declare 33 aqua {
# void TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(void *portPtr)
#}
declare 34 aqua {
int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID)
}
declare 35 aqua {
| | | 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 |
#declare 33 aqua {
# void TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(void *portPtr)
#}
declare 34 aqua {
int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID)
}
declare 35 aqua {
TkRegion TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr)
}
declare 36 aqua {
void TkMacOSXWinBounds(TkWindow *winPtr, void *geometry)
}
declare 37 aqua {
void TkMacOSXWindowOffset(void *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 |
declare 45 aqua {
void TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void)
}
declare 46 aqua {
int TkpIsWindowFloating(void *window)
}
declare 47 aqua {
| | | | 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 |
declare 45 aqua {
void TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void)
}
declare 46 aqua {
int TkpIsWindowFloating(void *window)
}
declare 47 aqua {
Tk_Window TkMacOSXGetCapture(void)
}
declare 49 aqua {
Tk_Window TkGetTransientMaster(TkWindow *winPtr)
}
declare 50 aqua {
int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state)
}
declare 51 aqua {
void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin)
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 |
KeySym *k, Status *s)
}
declare 80 win {
int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display,
Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
}
| < | | | < | | 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 |
KeySym *k, Status *s)
}
declare 80 win {
int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display,
Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
}
declare 81 win {
int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin,
int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering)
}
declare 82 win {
Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map,
_Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr)
}
declare 83 win {
GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d,
unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 |
int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y)
}
declare 137 win {
int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im,
int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy,
unsigned int w, unsigned int h)
}
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | | | | | | | | | < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | | < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < > | 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 |
int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y)
}
declare 137 win {
int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im,
int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy,
unsigned int w, unsigned int h)
}
declare 158 win {
void TkUnusedStubEntry(void)
}
################################
# X functions for Aqua
declare 0 aqua {
int XSetDashes(Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset,
_Xconst char *dash_list, int n)
}
declare 1 aqua {
XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(Display *d)
}
declare 2 aqua {
XImage *XCreateImage(Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1,
int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3,
int i4)
}
declare 3 aqua {
XImage *XGetImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3)
}
declare 4 aqua {
char *XGetAtomName(Display *d, Atom a)
}
declare 5 aqua {
char *XKeysymToString(KeySym k)
}
declare 6 aqua {
Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i)
}
declare 7 aqua {
GContext XGContextFromGC(GC g)
}
declare 8 aqua {
KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, KeyCode k, int i)
}
declare 9 aqua {
KeySym XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c)
}
declare 10 aqua {
Window XRootWindow(Display *d, int i)
}
declare 11 aqua {
XErrorHandler XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x)
}
declare 12 aqua {
Status XAllocColor(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp)
}
declare 13 aqua {
int XBell(Display *d, int i)
}
declare 14 aqua {
int XChangeProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1,
int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3)
}
declare 15 aqua {
int XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul,
XSetWindowAttributes *x)
}
declare 16 aqua {
int XConfigureWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i,
XWindowChanges *x)
}
declare 17 aqua {
int XCopyArea(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1,
int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)
}
declare 18 aqua {
int XCopyPlane(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1,
int i2, unsigned int ui1,
unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul)
}
declare 19 aqua {
Pixmap XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d,
_Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
}
declare 20 aqua {
int XDefineCursor(Display *d, Window w, Cursor c)
}
declare 21 aqua {
int XDestroyWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 22 aqua {
int XDrawArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)
}
declare 23 aqua {
int XDrawLines(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2)
}
declare 24 aqua {
int XDrawRectangle(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)
}
declare 25 aqua {
int XFillArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)
}
declare 26 aqua {
int XFillPolygon(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x,
int i1, int i2, int i3)
}
declare 27 aqua {
int XFillRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i)
}
declare 28 aqua {
int XFreeColormap(Display *d, Colormap c)
}
declare 29 aqua {
int XFreeColors(Display *d, Colormap c,
unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul)
}
declare 30 aqua {
int XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *x)
}
declare 31 aqua {
Status XGetGeometry(Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1,
int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3,
unsigned int *ui4)
}
declare 32 aqua {
int XGetWindowProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2,
Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1,
unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp)
}
declare 33 aqua {
int XGrabKeyboard(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t)
}
declare 34 aqua {
int XGrabPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui,
int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t)
}
declare 35 aqua {
KeyCode XKeysymToKeycode(Display *d, KeySym k)
}
declare 36 aqua {
int XMapWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 37 aqua {
int XMoveResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)
}
declare 38 aqua {
int XMoveWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2)
}
declare 39 aqua {
Bool XQueryPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3,
int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui)
}
declare 40 aqua {
int XRaiseWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 41 aqua {
int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *x)
}
declare 42 aqua {
int XResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1,
unsigned int ui2)
}
declare 43 aqua {
int XSelectInput(Display *d, Window w, long l)
}
declare 44 aqua {
Status XSendEvent(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x)
}
declare 45 aqua {
int XSetIconName(Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c)
}
declare 46 aqua {
int XSetInputFocus(Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t)
}
declare 47 aqua {
int XSetSelectionOwner(Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t)
}
declare 48 aqua {
int XSetWindowBackground(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)
}
declare 49 aqua {
int XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)
}
declare 50 aqua {
int XSetWindowBorder(Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)
}
declare 51 aqua {
int XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)
}
declare 52 aqua {
int XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui)
}
declare 53 aqua {
int XSetWindowColormap(Display *d, Window w, Colormap c)
}
declare 54 aqua {
int XUngrabKeyboard(Display *d, Time t)
}
declare 55 aqua {
int XUngrabPointer(Display *d, Time t)
}
declare 56 aqua {
int XUnmapWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 57 aqua {
int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display,
Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
}
declare 58 aqua {
Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map,
_Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr)
}
declare 59 aqua {
GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d,
unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values)
}
declare 60 aqua {
int XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc)
}
declare 61 aqua {
Atom XInternAtom(Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name,
Bool only_if_exists)
}
declare 62 aqua {
int XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)
}
declare 63 aqua {
int XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)
}
declare 64 aqua {
int XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap)
}
declare 65 aqua {
int XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin)
}
declare 66 aqua {
int XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin)
}
declare 67 aqua {
int XChangeGC(Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values)
}
declare 68 aqua {
int XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font)
}
declare 69 aqua {
int XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode)
}
declare 70 aqua {
int XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple)
}
declare 71 aqua {
int XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule)
}
declare 72 aqua {
int XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style)
}
declare 73 aqua {
int XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function)
}
declare 74 aqua {
int XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width,
int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style)
}
declare 75 aqua {
int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image)
}
declare 76 aqua {
XIC XCreateIC(XIM xim, ...)
}
declare 77 aqua {
XVisualInfo *XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask,
XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return)
}
declare 78 aqua {
void XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w,
XTextProperty *text_prop)
}
declare 79 aqua {
Status XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count,
XTextProperty *text_prop_return)
}
declare 80 aqua {
int XDrawSegments(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
XSegment *segments, int nsegments)
}
declare 81 aqua {
int XForceScreenSaver(Display *display, int mode)
}
declare 82 aqua {
int XDrawLine(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1,
int x2, int y2)
}
declare 83 aqua {
int XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
}
declare 84 aqua {
int XClearWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 85 aqua {
int XDrawPoint(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y)
}
declare 86 aqua {
int XDrawPoints(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points,
int npoints, int mode)
}
declare 87 aqua {
int XWarpPointer(Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w,
int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width,
unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y)
}
declare 88 aqua {
int XQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out)
}
declare 89 aqua {
int XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors)
}
declare 90 aqua {
Status XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3,
Window **w4, unsigned int *ui)
}
declare 91 aqua {
int XSync(Display *display, Bool discard)
}
declare 106 aqua {
int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin,
int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering)
}
declare 107 aqua {
int XFlush(Display *display)
}
declare 108 aqua {
int XGrabServer(Display *display)
}
declare 109 aqua {
int XUngrabServer(Display *display)
}
declare 110 aqua {
int XFree(void *data)
}
declare 111 aqua {
int XNoOp(Display *display)
}
declare 112 aqua {
XAfterFunction XSynchronize(Display *display, Bool onoff)
}
declare 114 aqua {
VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual)
}
declare 120 aqua {
int XOffsetRegion(void *rgn, int dx, int dy)
}
declare 129 aqua {
int XLowerWindow(Display *d, Window w)
}
declare 137 aqua {
int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im,
int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy,
unsigned int w, unsigned int h)
}
declare 144 aqua {
void XDestroyIC(XIC xic)
}
declare 145 aqua {
Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2,
XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)
}
declare 146 aqua {
Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *d, Font f1, Font f2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1,
XColor _Xconst *x2)
}
declare 157 aqua {
KeySym XkbKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, unsigned int k, int g, int i)
}
declare 158 aqua {
void TkUnusedStubEntry(void)
}
# Local Variables:
# mode: tcl
# End:
|
Changes to generic/tkInt.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkInt.h -- * * Declarations for things used internally by the Tk functions but not * exported outside the module. * * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | /* * tkInt.h -- * * Declarations for things used internally by the Tk functions but not * exported outside the module. * * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright (c) 1998 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKINT #define _TKINT #ifndef _TKPORT #include "tkPort.h" #endif #define TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR ((int)(sizeof(Tk_OptionType)&(sizeof(int)-1))<<6) /* * Ensure WORDS_BIGENDIAN is defined correctly: * Needs to happen here in addition to configure to work with fat compiles on * Darwin (where configure runs only once for multiple architectures). */ #include <stdio.h> #ifdef HAVE_SYS_TYPES_H # include <sys/types.h> #endif #ifdef HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H # include <sys/param.h> #endif #ifdef BYTE_ORDER |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | # elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) __attribute__((unused)) # else # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) # endif #endif | | | > | | < < < < < | | < < > > > | | | | | | | 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | # elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) __attribute__((unused)) # else # define TCL_UNUSED(T) T JOIN(dummy, __LINE__) # endif #endif #if defined(_WIN32) && (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9) && (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 7) # if TCL_UTF_MAX > 3 # define Tcl_WCharToUtfDString(a,b,c) Tcl_WinTCharToUtf((TCHAR *)(a),(b)*sizeof(WCHAR),c) # define Tcl_UtfToWCharDString(a,b,c) (WCHAR *)Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(a,b,c) # else # define Tcl_WCharToUtfDString ((char * (*)(const WCHAR *, int len, Tcl_DString *))Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString) # define Tcl_UtfToWCharDString ((WCHAR * (*)(const char *, int len, Tcl_DString *))Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString) # endif #endif #if defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) # define TKFLEXARRAY #elif defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 2) # define TKFLEXARRAY 0 #else # define TKFLEXARRAY 1 #endif #ifndef Tcl_GetParent # define Tcl_GetParent Tcl_GetMaster #endif /* * Macros used to cast between pointers and integers (e.g. when storing an int * in ClientData), on 64-bit architectures they avoid gcc warning about "cast * to/from pointer from/to integer of different size". */ #if !defined(INT2PTR) && !defined(PTR2INT) # if defined(HAVE_INTPTR_T) || defined(intptr_t) # define INT2PTR(p) ((void*)(intptr_t)(p)) # define PTR2INT(p) ((int)(intptr_t)(p)) # else # define INT2PTR(p) ((void*)(p)) # define PTR2INT(p) ((int)(p)) # endif #endif #if !defined(UINT2PTR) && !defined(PTR2UINT) # if defined(HAVE_UINTPTR_T) || defined(uintptr_t) # define UINT2PTR(p) ((void*)(uintptr_t)(p)) # define PTR2UINT(p) ((unsigned int)(uintptr_t)(p)) # else # define UINT2PTR(p) ((void*)(p)) # define PTR2UINT(p) ((unsigned int)(p)) # endif #endif #ifndef TCL_Z_MODIFIER # if defined(_WIN64) # define TCL_Z_MODIFIER "I" # elif defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(_WIN32) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | * Opaque type declarations: */ typedef struct TkColormap TkColormap; typedef struct TkFontAttributes TkFontAttributes; typedef struct TkGrabEvent TkGrabEvent; typedef struct TkpCursor_ *TkpCursor; | | | | | 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 |
* Opaque type declarations:
*/
typedef struct TkColormap TkColormap;
typedef struct TkFontAttributes TkFontAttributes;
typedef struct TkGrabEvent TkGrabEvent;
typedef struct TkpCursor_ *TkpCursor;
typedef struct TkRegion_ *TkRegion;
typedef struct TkStressedCmap TkStressedCmap;
typedef struct TkBindInfo_ *TkBindInfo;
typedef struct Busy *TkBusy;
/*
* One of the following structures is maintained for each cursor in use in the
* system. This structure is used by tkCursor.c and the various system-
* specific cursor files.
*/
typedef struct TkCursor {
Tk_Cursor cursor; /* System specific identifier for cursor. */
Display *display; /* Display containing cursor. Needed for
* disposal and retrieval of cursors. */
int resourceRefCount; /* Number of active uses of this cursor (each
* active use corresponds to a call to
* Tk_AllocPreserveFromObj or Tk_Preserve). If
* this count is 0, then this structure is no
* longer valid and it isn't present in a hash
* table: it is being kept around only because
* there are objects referring to it. The
* structure is freed when resourceRefCount
* and objRefCount are both 0. */
int objRefCount; /* Number of Tcl objects that reference this
* structure.. */
Tcl_HashTable *otherTable; /* Second table (other than idTable) used to
* index this entry. */
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; /* Entry in otherTable for this structure
* (needed when deleting). */
Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr; /* Entry in idTable for this structure (needed
* when deleting). */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
196 197 198 199 200 201 202 | /* * One of the following structures is maintained for each display containing a * window managed by Tk. In part, the structure is used to store thread- * specific data, since each thread will have its own TkDisplay structure. */ | < < | 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 |
/*
* One of the following structures is maintained for each display containing a
* window managed by Tk. In part, the structure is used to store thread-
* specific data, since each thread will have its own TkDisplay structure.
*/
typedef struct TkDisplay {
Display *display; /* Xlib's info about display. */
struct TkDisplay *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all displays. */
char *name; /* Name of display (with any screen identifier
* removed). Malloc-ed. */
Time lastEventTime; /* Time of last event received for this
* display. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
239 240 241 242 243 244 245 |
* modifier, than this is zero. */
unsigned int metaModMask; /* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
* corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
* modifier, then this is zero. */
unsigned int altModMask; /* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
* corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
* modifier, then this is zero. */
| | | 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 |
* modifier, than this is zero. */
unsigned int metaModMask; /* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
* corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
* modifier, then this is zero. */
unsigned int altModMask; /* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
* corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
* modifier, then this is zero. */
enum {LU_IGNORE, LU_CAPS, LU_SHIFT} lockUsage;
/* Indicates how to interpret lock
* modifier. */
int numModKeyCodes; /* Number of entries in modKeyCodes array
* below. */
KeyCode *modKeyCodes; /* Pointer to an array giving keycodes for all
* of the keys that have modifiers associated
* with them. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
313 314 315 316 317 318 319 |
* Information used by tkError.c only:
*/
struct TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
/* First in list of error handlers for this
* display. NULL means no handlers exist at
* present. */
| | | 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 |
* Information used by tkError.c only:
*/
struct TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
/* First in list of error handlers for this
* display. NULL means no handlers exist at
* present. */
int deleteCount; /* Counts # of handlers deleted since last
* time inactive handlers were garbage-
* collected. When this number gets big,
* handlers get cleaned up. */
/*
* Used by tkEvent.c only:
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
370 371 372 373 374 375 376 |
Tcl_HashTable maintainHashTable;
/* Hash table that maps from a container's
* Tk_Window token to a list of windows managed
* by that container. */
int geomInit;
| > > > > > > | | | 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 |
Tcl_HashTable maintainHashTable;
/* Hash table that maps from a container's
* Tk_Window token to a list of windows managed
* by that container. */
int geomInit;
/*
* Information used by tkGrid.c, tkPack.c, tkPlace.c, tkPointer.c,
* and ttkMacOSXTheme.c:
*/
#define TkGetContainer(tkwin) (Tk_TopWinHierarchy((TkWindow *)tkwin) ? NULL : \
(((TkWindow *)tkwin)->maintainerPtr != NULL ? \
((TkWindow *)tkwin)->maintainerPtr : ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->parentPtr))
/*
* Information used by tkGet.c only:
*/
Tcl_HashTable uidTable; /* Stores all Tk_Uid used in a thread. */
int uidInit; /* 0 means uidTable needs initializing. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
448 449 450 451 452 453 454 |
* Packer structures. */
/*
* Information used by tkPlace.c only.
*/
int placeInit; /* 0 means tables below need initializing. */
| | | | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 |
* Packer structures. */
/*
* Information used by tkPlace.c only.
*/
int placeInit; /* 0 means tables below need initializing. */
Tcl_HashTable masterTable; /* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Master
* structure for the window, if it exists. */
Tcl_HashTable slaveTable; /* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Slave
* structure for the window, if it exists. */
/*
* Information used by tkSelect.c and tkClipboard.c only:
*/
struct TkSelectionInfo *selectionInfoPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
522 523 524 525 526 527 528 |
TkColormap *cmapPtr; /* First in list of all non-default colormaps
* allocated for this display. */
/*
* Miscellaneous information:
*/
| | | < < < < < < < > < < < < > > > > | 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 |
TkColormap *cmapPtr; /* First in list of all non-default colormaps
* allocated for this display. */
/*
* Miscellaneous information:
*/
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
XIM inputMethod; /* Input method for this display. */
XIMStyle inputStyle; /* Input style selected for this display. */
XFontSet inputXfs; /* XFontSet cached for over-the-spot XIM. */
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
Tcl_HashTable winTable; /* Maps from X window ids to TkWindow ptrs. */
int refCount; /* Reference count of how many Tk applications
* are using this display. Used to clean up
* the display when we no longer have any Tk
* applications using it. */
/*
* The following field were all added for Tk8.3
*/
int mouseButtonState; /* Current mouse button state for this
* display. NOT USED as of 8.6.10 */
Window mouseButtonWindow; /* Window the button state was set in, added
* in Tk 8.4. */
Tk_Window warpWindow;
Tk_Window warpMainwin; /* For finding the root window for warping
* purposes. */
int warpX;
int warpY;
/*
* The following field(s) were all added for Tk8.4
*/
unsigned int flags; /* Various flag values: these are all defined
* in below. */
TkCaret caret; /* Information about the caret for this
* display. This is not a pointer. */
int iconDataSize; /* Size of default iconphoto image data. */
unsigned char *iconDataPtr; /* Default iconphoto image data, if set. */
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
int ximGeneration; /* Used to invalidate XIC */
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
} TkDisplay;
/*
* Flag values for TkDisplay flags.
* TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS: (default on)
* Indicates that we should collapse motion events on this display
* TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM: (default on, set via tk.tcl)
* Whether to use input methods for this display
* TK_DISPLAY_WM_TRACING: (default off)
* Whether we should do wm tracing on this display.
* TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP: (default off)
* Indicates that we are in a pointer warp
*/
#define TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS (1 << 0)
#define TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM (1 << 1)
#define TK_DISPLAY_WM_TRACING (1 << 3)
#define TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP (1 << 4)
#define TK_DISPLAY_USE_XKB (1 << 5)
/*
* One of the following structures exists for each error handler created by a
* call to Tk_CreateErrorHandler. The structure is managed by tkError.c.
*/
typedef struct TkErrorHandler {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
639 640 641 642 643 644 645 |
/*
* Tk keeps one of the following data structures for each main window (created
* by a call to TkCreateMainWindow). It stores information that is shared by
* all of the windows associated with a particular main window.
*/
typedef struct TkMainInfo {
| | < | < < < | 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 |
/*
* Tk keeps one of the following data structures for each main window (created
* by a call to TkCreateMainWindow). It stores information that is shared by
* all of the windows associated with a particular main window.
*/
typedef struct TkMainInfo {
int refCount; /* Number of windows whose "mainPtr" fields
* point here. When this becomes zero, can
* free up the structure (the reference count
* is zero because windows can get deleted in
* almost any order; the main window isn't
* necessarily the last one deleted). */
struct TkWindow *winPtr; /* Pointer to main window. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter associated with application. */
Tcl_HashTable nameTable; /* Hash table mapping path names to TkWindow
* structs for all windows related to this
* main window. Managed by tkWindow.c. */
long deletionEpoch; /* Incremented by window deletions. */
Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
/* Used in conjunction with "bind" command to
* bind events to Tcl commands. */
TkBindInfo bindInfo; /* Information used by tkBind.c on a per
* application basis. */
struct TkFontInfo *fontInfoPtr;
/* Information used by tkFont.c on a per
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 |
int strictMotif; /* This is linked to the tk_strictMotif global
* variable. */
int alwaysShowSelection; /* This is linked to the
* ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection variable. */
struct TkMainInfo *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all main windows managed by
* this process. */
Tcl_HashTable busyTable; /* Information used by [tk busy] command. */
} TkMainInfo;
/*
* Tk keeps the following data structure for each of it's builtin bitmaps.
* This structure is only used by tkBitmap.c and other platform specific
* bitmap files.
*/
typedef struct {
const void *source; /* Bits for bitmap. */
int width, height; /* Dimensions of bitmap. */
int native; /* 0 means generic (X style) bitmap, 1 means
| > > > > > > | | 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 |
int strictMotif; /* This is linked to the tk_strictMotif global
* variable. */
int alwaysShowSelection; /* This is linked to the
* ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection variable. */
struct TkMainInfo *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all main windows managed by
* this process. */
Tcl_HashTable busyTable; /* Information used by [tk busy] command. */
Tcl_ObjCmdProc *tclUpdateObjProc;
/* Saved Tcl [update] command, used to restore
* Tcl's version of [update] after Tk is shut
* down */
unsigned int ttkNbTabsStickBit;
/* Information used by ttk::notebook. */
} TkMainInfo;
/*
* Tk keeps the following data structure for each of it's builtin bitmaps.
* This structure is only used by tkBitmap.c and other platform specific
* bitmap files.
*/
typedef struct {
const void *source; /* Bits for bitmap. */
int width, height; /* Dimensions of bitmap. */
int native; /* 0 means generic (X style) bitmap, 1 means
* native style bitmap. */
} TkPredefBitmap;
/*
* Tk keeps one of the following structures for each window. Some of the
* information (like size and location) is a shadow of information managed by
* the X server, and some is special information used here, such as event and
* geometry management information. This information is (mostly) managed by
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
791 792 793 794 795 796 797 |
/*
* Information kept by the event manager (tkEvent.c):
*/
TkEventHandler *handlerList;/* First in list of event handlers declared
* for this window, or NULL if none. */
| | | 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 |
/*
* Information kept by the event manager (tkEvent.c):
*/
TkEventHandler *handlerList;/* First in list of event handlers declared
* for this window, or NULL if none. */
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
XIC inputContext; /* XIM input context. */
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
/*
* Information used for event bindings (see "bind" and "bindtags" commands
* in tkCmds.c):
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
872 873 874 875 876 877 878 |
/* The remaining fields of internal border. */
int internalBorderRight;
int internalBorderTop;
int internalBorderBottom;
int minReqWidth; /* Minimum requested width. */
int minReqHeight; /* Minimum requested height. */
| | < < < < > > > > > > > | | < < < < < < < < < | 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 |
/* The remaining fields of internal border. */
int internalBorderRight;
int internalBorderTop;
int internalBorderBottom;
int minReqWidth; /* Minimum requested width. */
int minReqHeight; /* Minimum requested height. */
#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
int ximGeneration; /* Used to invalidate XIC */
#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
char *geomMgrName; /* Records the name of the geometry manager. */
struct TkWindow *maintainerPtr;
/* The geometry container for this window. The
* value is NULL if the window has no container or
* if its container is its parent. */
} TkWindow;
/*
* String tables:
*/
MODULE_SCOPE const char *const tkStateStrings[];
MODULE_SCOPE const char *const tkCompoundStrings[];
/*
* Real definition of some events. Note that these events come from outside
* but have internally generated pieces added to them.
*/
typedef struct {
XKeyEvent keyEvent; /* The real event from X11. */
#ifdef _WIN32
char trans_chars[XMaxTransChars];
/* translated characters */
unsigned char nbytes;
#elif !defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
char *charValuePtr; /* A pointer to a string that holds the key's
* %A substitution text (before backslash
* adding), or NULL if that has not been
* computed yet. If non-NULL, this string was
* allocated with ckalloc(). */
int charValueLen; /* Length of string in charValuePtr when that
* is non-NULL. */
KeySym keysym; /* Key symbol computed after input methods
* have been invoked */
#endif
} TkKeyEvent;
/*
* Flags passed to TkpMakeMenuWindow's 'transient' argument.
*/
#define TK_MAKE_MENU_TEAROFF 0 /* Only non-transient case. */
#define TK_MAKE_MENU_POPUP 1
#define TK_MAKE_MENU_DROPDOWN 2
/*
* The following structure is used with TkMakeEnsemble to create ensemble
* commands and optionally to create sub-ensembles.
*/
typedef struct TkEnsemble {
const char *name;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
958 959 960 961 962 963 964 |
* representation of a clip_mask in a GC.
*/
typedef struct TkpClipMask {
int type; /* TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP or TKP_CLIP_REGION. */
union {
Pixmap pixmap;
| | | 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 |
* representation of a clip_mask in a GC.
*/
typedef struct TkpClipMask {
int type; /* TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP or TKP_CLIP_REGION. */
union {
Pixmap pixmap;
TkRegion region;
} value;
} TkpClipMask;
#define TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP 0
#define TKP_CLIP_REGION 1
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 | * bits. */ #define META_MASK (AnyModifier<<1) #define ALT_MASK (AnyModifier<<2) #define EXTENDED_MASK (AnyModifier<<3) | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | > | 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 | * bits. */ #define META_MASK (AnyModifier<<1) #define ALT_MASK (AnyModifier<<2) #define EXTENDED_MASK (AnyModifier<<3) /* * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons, plus * masks that select individual buttons' bits: */ #define ALL_BUTTONS \ (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask) MODULE_SCOPE unsigned TkGetButtonMask(unsigned); /* * Object types not declared in tkObj.c need to be mentioned here so they can * be properly registered with Tcl: */ MODULE_SCOPE const Tcl_ObjType tkBorderObjType; |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 | * outside world: */ MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SmoothMethod tkBezierSmoothMethod; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF; MODULE_SCOPE void (*tkHandleEventProc) (XEvent* eventPtr); | < < | | 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 | * outside world: */ MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SmoothMethod tkBezierSmoothMethod; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF; MODULE_SCOPE void (*tkHandleEventProc) (XEvent* eventPtr); MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPNG; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM; MODULE_SCOPE TkMainInfo *tkMainWindowList; MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ImageType tkPhotoImageType; MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_HashTable tkPredefBitmapTable; MODULE_SCOPE const char *const tkWebColors[20]; /* * The definition of pi, at least from the perspective of double-precision * floats. */ #ifndef PI #ifdef M_PI #define PI M_PI #else #define PI 3.14159265358979323846 #endif #endif /* * Support for Clang Static Analyzer <https://clang-analyzer.llvm.org/> */ #if defined(PURIFY) && defined(__clang__) #if __has_feature(attribute_analyzer_noreturn) && \ !defined(Tcl_Panic) && defined(Tcl_Panic_TCL_DECLARED) void Tcl_Panic(const char *, ...) __attribute__((analyzer_noreturn)); #endif |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 |
#include "tkIntDecls.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/*
| | > | 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 |
#include "tkIntDecls.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/*
* Themed widget set init function, and handler called when Tk is destroyed.
*/
MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_TkDestroyedHandler(Tcl_Interp *interp);
/*
* Internal functions shared among Tk modules but not exported to the outside
* world:
*/
MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_BellObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_SelectionObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_SendObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); | < < < | 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_SelectionObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_SendObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_TextObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(ClientData clientData, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_WinfoObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_WmObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); MODULE_SCOPE int TkSetGeometryContainer(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); MODULE_SCOPE void TkFreeGeometryContainer(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); | > > > > > < | < < < < < < < < < | | > | < < > > > > < < < > < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | > > > | | | > | | < | < < < < < < < < < | 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 |
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_WinfoObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_WmObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
MODULE_SCOPE int Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
double *doublePtr);
#define TkSetGeometryContainer TkSetGeometryMaster
MODULE_SCOPE int TkSetGeometryContainer(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name);
#define TkFreeGeometryContainer TkFreeGeometryMaster
MODULE_SCOPE void TkFreeGeometryContainer(Tk_Window tkwin,
const char *name);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkRegisterObjTypes(void);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkDeadAppObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkCanvasGetCoordObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj *obj,
double *doublePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetDoublePixels(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
const char *string, double *doublePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkPostscriptImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XImage *ximage,
int x, int y, int width, int height);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMapTopFrame(Tk_Window tkwin);
MODULE_SCOPE XEvent * TkpGetBindingXEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkCreateExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
void *clientData);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkDeleteExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
ClientData clientData);
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ExitProc TkFinalize;
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ExitProc TkFinalizeThread;
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(TkRegion region,
unsigned x, unsigned y, unsigned width,
unsigned height, unsigned char *dataPtr,
unsigned pixelStride, unsigned lineStride);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkAppendPadAmount(Tcl_Obj *bufferObj,
const char *buffer, int pad1, int pad2);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkParsePadAmount(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
int *pad1Ptr, int *pad2Ptr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusSplit(TkWindow *winPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkFocusJoin(TkWindow *winPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkpAlwaysShowSelection(Tk_Window tkwin);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpDrawCharsInContext(Display * display,
Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
const char *source, int numBytes, int rangeStart,
int rangeLength, int x, int y);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpDrawAngledCharsInContext(Display * display,
Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
const char *source, int numBytes, int rangeStart,
int rangeLength, double x, double y, double angle);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkpMeasureCharsInContext(Tk_Font tkfont,
const char *source, int numBytes, int rangeStart,
int rangeLength, int maxLength, int flags,
int *lengthPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkUnderlineCharsInContext(Display *display,
Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
const char *string, int numBytes, int x, int y,
int firstByte, int lastByte);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpGetFontAttrsForChar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Font tkfont,
int c, struct TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj * TkNewWindowObj(Tk_Window tkwin);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpShowBusyWindow(TkBusy busy);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpHideBusyWindow(TkBusy busy);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpMakeTransparentWindowExist(Tk_Window tkwin,
Window parent);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpCreateBusy(Tk_FakeWin *winPtr, Tk_Window tkRef,
Window *parentPtr, Tk_Window tkParent,
TkBusy busy);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkBackgroundEvalObjv(Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv, int flags);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkSendVirtualEvent(Tk_Window tgtWin,
const char *eventName, Tcl_Obj *detail);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkDrawDottedRect(Display *disp, Drawable d, GC gc,
int x, int y, int width, int height);
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Command TkMakeEnsemble(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *nsname, const char *name,
ClientData clientData, const TkEnsemble *map);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkInitTkCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp,
ClientData clientData);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkInitFontchooser(Tcl_Interp *interp,
ClientData clientData);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpWarpPointer(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpCancelWarp(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkListCreateFrame(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listObj,
int toplevel, Tcl_Obj *nameObj);
#ifdef _WIN32
#define TkParseColor XParseColor
#else
MODULE_SCOPE Status TkParseColor (Display * display,
Colormap map, const char* spec,
XColor * colorPtr);
#endif
#ifdef HAVE_XFT
MODULE_SCOPE void TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(TkRegion clipRegion);
#endif
MODULE_SCOPE void TkpCopyRegion(TkRegion dst, TkRegion src);
#if !defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(c_plusplus)
# define c_class class
#endif
/* Tcl 8.6 has a different definition of Tcl_UniChar than other Tcl versions for TCL_UTF_MAX > 3 */
#if TCL_UTF_MAX > (3 + (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION == 8 && TCL_MINOR_VERSION == 6))
# define TkUtfToUniChar Tcl_UtfToUniChar
# define TkUniCharToUtf Tcl_UniCharToUtf
# define TkUtfPrev Tcl_UtfPrev
# define TkUtfAtIndex Tcl_UtfAtIndex
#else
MODULE_SCOPE int TkUtfToUniChar(const char *, int *);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkUniCharToUtf(int, char *);
MODULE_SCOPE const char *TkUtfPrev(const char *, const char *);
MODULE_SCOPE const char *TkUtfAtIndex(const char *src, int index);
#endif
/*
* Unsupported commands.
*/
MODULE_SCOPE int TkUnsupported1ObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkIntDecls.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkIntDecls.h -- * * This file contains the declarations for all unsupported * functions that are exported by the Tk library. These * interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between * versions. Use at your own risk. * | | < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | /* * tkIntDecls.h -- * * This file contains the declarations for all unsupported * functions that are exported by the Tk library. These * interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between * versions. Use at your own risk. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKINTDECLS #define _TKINTDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif struct TkText; typedef struct TkTextBTree_ *TkTextBTree; |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 21 */ EXTERN int TkFindStateNum(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey); /* 22 */ | | | 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 21 */ EXTERN int TkFindStateNum(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey); /* 22 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkFindStateString(const TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey); /* 23 */ EXTERN void TkFocusDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 24 */ EXTERN int TkFocusFilterEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 25 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | /* 44 */ EXTERN void TkInOutEvents(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 45 */ EXTERN void TkInstallFrameMenu(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 46 */ | | | 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | /* 44 */ EXTERN void TkInOutEvents(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 45 */ EXTERN void TkInstallFrameMenu(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 46 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkKeysymToString(KeySym keysym); /* 47 */ EXTERN int TkLineToArea(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[]); /* 48 */ EXTERN double TkLineToPoint(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[]); /* 49 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
252 253 254 255 256 257 258 | unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 79 */ EXTERN int TkScrollWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, | | | 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 | unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 79 */ EXTERN int TkScrollWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, TkRegion damageRgn); /* 80 */ EXTERN void TkSelDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 81 */ EXTERN void TkSelEventProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 82 */ EXTERN void TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 83 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
322 323 324 325 326 327 328 | /* 107 */ EXTERN TkMainInfo * TkGetMainInfoList(void); /* 108 */ EXTERN int TkGetWindowFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 109 */ | | | | | | | | | | | | 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 | /* 107 */ EXTERN TkMainInfo * TkGetMainInfoList(void); /* 108 */ EXTERN int TkGetWindowFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 109 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 110 */ EXTERN void TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 111 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * TkpGetSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 112 */ EXTERN void TkpMenuThreadInit(void); /* 113 */ EXTERN int TkClipBox(TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return); /* 114 */ EXTERN TkRegion TkCreateRegion(void); /* 115 */ EXTERN int TkDestroyRegion(TkRegion rgn); /* 116 */ EXTERN int TkIntersectRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 117 */ EXTERN int TkRectInRegion(TkRegion rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 118 */ EXTERN int TkSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn); /* 119 */ EXTERN int TkUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect, TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return); /* Slot 120 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 121 */ EXTERN Pixmap TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Display *display, const void *source); #endif /* AQUA */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | EXTERN void TkpSetKeycodeAndState(Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */ EXTERN KeySym TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 139 */ EXTERN void TkpInitKeymapInfo(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 140 */ | | | | | 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 | EXTERN void TkpSetKeycodeAndState(Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */ EXTERN KeySym TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 139 */ EXTERN void TkpInitKeymapInfo(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 140 */ EXTERN TkRegion TkPhotoGetValidRegion(Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 141 */ EXTERN TkWindow ** TkWmStackorderToplevel(TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 142 */ EXTERN void TkFocusFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 143 */ EXTERN void TkClipCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 144 */ EXTERN void TkGCCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 145 */ EXTERN int TkSubtractRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 146 */ EXTERN void TkStylePkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 147 */ EXTERN void TkStylePkgFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 148 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkToplevelWindowForCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
457 458 459 460 461 462 463 | const struct TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count, struct TkTextIndex *dstPtr); /* 162 */ EXTERN struct TkTextIndex * TkTextMakeByteIndex(TkTextBTree tree, const struct TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex, int byteIndex, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 163 */ | | | 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 | const struct TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count, struct TkTextIndex *dstPtr); /* 162 */ EXTERN struct TkTextIndex * TkTextMakeByteIndex(TkTextBTree tree, const struct TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex, int byteIndex, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 163 */ EXTERN int TkTextPrintIndex(const struct TkText *textPtr, const struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr, char *string); /* 164 */ EXTERN struct TkTextSegment * TkTextSetMark(struct TkText *textPtr, const char *name, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 165 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | EXTERN void TkTextInsertDisplayProc(struct TkText *textPtr, struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y, int height, int baseline, Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY); /* 169 */ EXTERN int TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, | | < | | | | < | | | | < | | | | < | | | | < | | | | < | | | | 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 | EXTERN void TkTextInsertDisplayProc(struct TkText *textPtr, struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y, int height, int baseline, Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY); /* 169 */ EXTERN int TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 170 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkStatePrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 171 */ EXTERN int TkCanvasDashParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 172 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkCanvasDashPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 173 */ EXTERN int TkOffsetParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 174 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkOffsetPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 175 */ EXTERN int TkPixelParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 176 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkPixelPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 177 */ EXTERN int TkOrientParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 178 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkOrientPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 179 */ EXTERN int TkSmoothParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 180 */ EXTERN CONST86 char * TkSmoothPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 181 */ EXTERN void TkDrawAngledTextLayout(Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, double angle, int firstChar, int lastChar); /* 182 */ EXTERN void TkUnderlineAngledTextLayout(Display *display, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
563 564 565 566 567 568 569 | EXTERN void TkpRedrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin); #endif /* MACOSX */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */ /* 186 */ EXTERN int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin); #endif /* MACOSX */ /* 187 */ | | < < | 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 |
EXTERN void TkpRedrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin);
#endif /* MACOSX */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */
/* 186 */
EXTERN int TkpWillDrawWidget(Tk_Window tkwin);
#endif /* MACOSX */
/* 187 */
EXTERN void TkUnusedStubEntry(void);
typedef struct TkIntStubs {
int magic;
void *hooks;
TkWindow * (*tkAllocWindow) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, int screenNum, TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 0 */
void (*tkBezierPoints) (double control[], int numSteps, double *coordPtr); /* 1 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
593 594 595 596 597 598 599 |
Time (*tkCurrentTime) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 15 */
void (*tkDeleteAllImages) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 16 */
void (*tkDoConfigureNotify) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 17 */
void (*tkDrawInsetFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable, int padding); /* 18 */
void (*tkEventDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 19 */
void (*tkFillPolygon) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 20 */
int (*tkFindStateNum) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey); /* 21 */
| | | 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 |
Time (*tkCurrentTime) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 15 */
void (*tkDeleteAllImages) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 16 */
void (*tkDoConfigureNotify) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 17 */
void (*tkDrawInsetFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable, int padding); /* 18 */
void (*tkEventDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 19 */
void (*tkFillPolygon) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 20 */
int (*tkFindStateNum) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *option, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, const char *strKey); /* 21 */
CONST86 char * (*tkFindStateString) (const TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey); /* 22 */
void (*tkFocusDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 23 */
int (*tkFocusFilterEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 24 */
TkWindow * (*tkFocusKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 25 */
void (*tkFontPkgInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 26 */
void (*tkFontPkgFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 27 */
void (*tkFreeBindingTags) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 28 */
void (*tkpFreeCursor) (TkCursor *cursorPtr); /* 29 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
617 618 619 620 621 622 623 |
void (*tkGetPointerCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 39 */
void (*tkGetServerInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 40 */
void (*tkGrabDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 41 */
int (*tkGrabState) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 42 */
void (*tkIncludePoint) (Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); /* 43 */
void (*tkInOutEvents) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 44 */
void (*tkInstallFrameMenu) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 45 */
| | | 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 |
void (*tkGetPointerCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 39 */
void (*tkGetServerInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 40 */
void (*tkGrabDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 41 */
int (*tkGrabState) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 42 */
void (*tkIncludePoint) (Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); /* 43 */
void (*tkInOutEvents) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 44 */
void (*tkInstallFrameMenu) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 45 */
CONST86 char * (*tkKeysymToString) (KeySym keysym); /* 46 */
int (*tkLineToArea) (double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[]); /* 47 */
double (*tkLineToPoint) (double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[]); /* 48 */
int (*tkMakeBezierCurve) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]); /* 49 */
void (*tkMakeBezierPostscript) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints); /* 50 */
void (*tkOptionClassChanged) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 51 */
void (*tkOptionDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 52 */
int (*tkOvalToArea) (double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr); /* 53 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 |
int (*tkPositionInTree) (TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr); /* 72 */
void (*tkpRedirectKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 73 */
void (*tkpSetMainMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName); /* 74 */
int (*tkpUseWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string); /* 75 */
void (*reserved76)(void);
void (*tkQueueEventForAllChildren) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 77 */
int (*tkReadBitmapFile) (Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 78 */
| | | 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 |
int (*tkPositionInTree) (TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr); /* 72 */
void (*tkpRedirectKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 73 */
void (*tkpSetMainMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *menuName); /* 74 */
int (*tkpUseWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *string); /* 75 */
void (*reserved76)(void);
void (*tkQueueEventForAllChildren) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 77 */
int (*tkReadBitmapFile) (Display *display, Drawable d, const char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 78 */
int (*tkScrollWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, TkRegion damageRgn); /* 79 */
void (*tkSelDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 80 */
void (*tkSelEventProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 81 */
void (*tkSelInit) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 82 */
void (*tkSelPropProc) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 83 */
void (*reserved84)(void);
void (*tkSetWindowMenuBar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *oldMenuName, const char *menuName); /* 85 */
KeySym (*tkStringToKeysym) (const char *name); /* 86 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
680 681 682 683 684 685 686 |
Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugConfig) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_OptionTable table); /* 102 */
Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugFont) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 103 */
int (*tkFindStateNumObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr); /* 104 */
Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) (void); /* 105 */
TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) (void); /* 106 */
TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) (void); /* 107 */
int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 108 */
| | | | | | | | | > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 |
Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugConfig) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_OptionTable table); /* 102 */
Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugFont) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name); /* 103 */
int (*tkFindStateNumObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, const TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr); /* 104 */
Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) (void); /* 105 */
TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) (void); /* 106 */
TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) (void); /* 107 */
int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 108 */
CONST86 char * (*tkpGetString) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 109 */
void (*tkpGetSubFonts) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 110 */
Tcl_Obj * (*tkpGetSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, const char *dbName, const char *className); /* 111 */
void (*tkpMenuThreadInit) (void); /* 112 */
int (*tkClipBox) (TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return); /* 113 */
TkRegion (*tkCreateRegion) (void); /* 114 */
int (*tkDestroyRegion) (TkRegion rgn); /* 115 */
int (*tkIntersectRegion) (TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 116 */
int (*tkRectInRegion) (TkRegion rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 117 */
int (*tkSetRegion) (Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn); /* 118 */
int (*tkUnionRectWithRegion) (XRectangle *rect, TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return); /* 119 */
void (*reserved120)(void);
#if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
void (*reserved121)(void);
#endif /* X11 */
#if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */
void (*reserved121)(void);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
# if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9
void (*reserved121)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
# endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */
Pixmap (*tkpCreateNativeBitmap) (Display *display, const void *source); /* 121 */
#endif /* AQUA */
#if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
void (*reserved122)(void);
#endif /* X11 */
#if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */
void (*reserved122)(void);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
# if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9
void (*reserved122)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
# endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */
void (*tkpDefineNativeBitmaps) (void); /* 122 */
#endif /* AQUA */
void (*reserved123)(void);
#if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
void (*reserved124)(void);
#endif /* X11 */
#if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */
void (*reserved124)(void);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
# if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9
void (*reserved124)(void); /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
# endif /* TCL_MAJOR_VERSION < 9 */
Pixmap (*tkpGetNativeAppBitmap) (Display *display, const char *name, int *width, int *height); /* 124 */
#endif /* AQUA */
void (*reserved125)(void);
void (*reserved126)(void);
void (*reserved127)(void);
void (*reserved128)(void);
void (*reserved129)(void);
void (*reserved130)(void);
void (*reserved131)(void);
void (*reserved132)(void);
void (*reserved133)(void);
void (*reserved134)(void);
void (*tkpDrawHighlightBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable); /* 135 */
void (*tkSetFocusWin) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 136 */
void (*tkpSetKeycodeAndState) (Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 137 */
KeySym (*tkpGetKeySym) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */
void (*tkpInitKeymapInfo) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 139 */
TkRegion (*tkPhotoGetValidRegion) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 140 */
TkWindow ** (*tkWmStackorderToplevel) (TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 141 */
void (*tkFocusFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 142 */
void (*tkClipCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 143 */
void (*tkGCCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 144 */
int (*tkSubtractRegion) (TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 145 */
void (*tkStylePkgInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 146 */
void (*tkStylePkgFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 147 */
Tk_Window (*tkToplevelWindowForCommand) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName); /* 148 */
const Tk_OptionSpec * (*tkGetOptionSpec) (const char *name, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 149 */
int (*tkMakeRawCurve) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]); /* 150 */
void (*tkMakeRawCurvePostscript) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints); /* 151 */
void (*tkpDrawFrame) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 152 */
void (*tkCreateThreadExitHandler) (Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 153 */
void (*tkDeleteThreadExitHandler) (Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 154 */
void (*reserved155)(void);
int (*tkpTestembedCmd) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 156 */
int (*tkpTesttextCmd) (ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 157 */
int (*tkSelGetSelection) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 158 */
int (*tkTextGetIndex) (Tcl_Interp *interp, struct TkText *textPtr, const char *string, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 159 */
int (*tkTextIndexBackBytes) (const struct TkText *textPtr, const struct TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count, struct TkTextIndex *dstPtr); /* 160 */
int (*tkTextIndexForwBytes) (const struct TkText *textPtr, const struct TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count, struct TkTextIndex *dstPtr); /* 161 */
struct TkTextIndex * (*tkTextMakeByteIndex) (TkTextBTree tree, const struct TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex, int byteIndex, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 162 */
int (*tkTextPrintIndex) (const struct TkText *textPtr, const struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr, char *string); /* 163 */
struct TkTextSegment * (*tkTextSetMark) (struct TkText *textPtr, const char *name, struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr); /* 164 */
int (*tkTextXviewCmd) (struct TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); /* 165 */
void (*tkTextChanged) (struct TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, struct TkText *textPtr, const struct TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, const struct TkTextIndex *index2Ptr); /* 166 */
int (*tkBTreeNumLines) (TkTextBTree tree, const struct TkText *textPtr); /* 167 */
void (*tkTextInsertDisplayProc) (struct TkText *textPtr, struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y, int height, int baseline, Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY); /* 168 */
int (*tkStateParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 169 */
CONST86 char * (*tkStatePrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 170 */
int (*tkCanvasDashParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 171 */
CONST86 char * (*tkCanvasDashPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 172 */
int (*tkOffsetParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 173 */
CONST86 char * (*tkOffsetPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 174 */
int (*tkPixelParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 175 */
CONST86 char * (*tkPixelPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 176 */
int (*tkOrientParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 177 */
CONST86 char * (*tkOrientPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 178 */
int (*tkSmoothParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 179 */
CONST86 char * (*tkSmoothPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 180 */
void (*tkDrawAngledTextLayout) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, double angle, int firstChar, int lastChar); /* 181 */
void (*tkUnderlineAngledTextLayout) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, double angle, int underline); /* 182 */
int (*tkIntersectAngledTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height, double angle); /* 183 */
void (*tkDrawAngledChars) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, int numBytes, double x, double y, double angle); /* 184 */
#if !defined(_WIN32) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TCL) /* UNIX */
void (*reserved185)(void);
#endif /* UNIX */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
801 802 803 804 805 806 807 |
#endif /* UNIX */
#if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */
void (*reserved186)(void);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */
int (*tkpWillDrawWidget) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 186 */
#endif /* MACOSX */
| | | 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 |
#endif /* UNIX */
#if defined(_WIN32) /* WIN */
void (*reserved186)(void);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */
int (*tkpWillDrawWidget) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 186 */
#endif /* MACOSX */
void (*tkUnusedStubEntry) (void); /* 187 */
} TkIntStubs;
extern const TkIntStubs *tkIntStubsPtr;
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetString) /* 109 */ #define TkpGetSubFonts \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSubFonts) /* 110 */ #define TkpGetSystemDefault \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSystemDefault) /* 111 */ #define TkpMenuThreadInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMenuThreadInit) /* 112 */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetString) /* 109 */ #define TkpGetSubFonts \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSubFonts) /* 110 */ #define TkpGetSystemDefault \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpGetSystemDefault) /* 111 */ #define TkpMenuThreadInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpMenuThreadInit) /* 112 */ #define TkClipBox \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkClipBox) /* 113 */ #define TkCreateRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkCreateRegion) /* 114 */ #define TkDestroyRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkDestroyRegion) /* 115 */ #define TkIntersectRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkIntersectRegion) /* 116 */ #define TkRectInRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkRectInRegion) /* 117 */ #define TkSetRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSetRegion) /* 118 */ #define TkUnionRectWithRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkUnionRectWithRegion) /* 119 */ /* Slot 120 is reserved */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkpCreateNativeBitmap \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpCreateNativeBitmap) /* 121 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkWmStackorderToplevel) /* 141 */ #define TkFocusFree \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkFocusFree) /* 142 */ #define TkClipCleanup \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkClipCleanup) /* 143 */ #define TkGCCleanup \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGCCleanup) /* 144 */ | | | | 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 | (tkIntStubsPtr->tkWmStackorderToplevel) /* 141 */ #define TkFocusFree \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkFocusFree) /* 142 */ #define TkClipCleanup \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkClipCleanup) /* 143 */ #define TkGCCleanup \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkGCCleanup) /* 144 */ #define TkSubtractRegion \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkSubtractRegion) /* 145 */ #define TkStylePkgInit \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkStylePkgInit) /* 146 */ #define TkStylePkgFree \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkStylePkgFree) /* 147 */ #define TkToplevelWindowForCommand \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkToplevelWindowForCommand) /* 148 */ #define TkGetOptionSpec \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 | #define TkpRedrawWidget \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpRedrawWidget) /* 185 */ #endif /* MACOSX */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */ #define TkpWillDrawWidget \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpWillDrawWidget) /* 186 */ #endif /* MACOSX */ | | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 | #define TkpRedrawWidget \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpRedrawWidget) /* 185 */ #endif /* MACOSX */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL /* MACOSX */ #define TkpWillDrawWidget \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkpWillDrawWidget) /* 186 */ #endif /* MACOSX */ #define TkUnusedStubEntry \ (tkIntStubsPtr->tkUnusedStubEntry) /* 187 */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT /* * On X11, these macros are just wrappers for the equivalent X Region calls. */ #if !(defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */ #undef TkClipBox #undef TkCreateRegion #undef TkDestroyRegion #undef TkIntersectRegion #undef TkRectInRegion #undef TkSetRegion #undef TkSubtractRegion #undef TkUnionRectWithRegion #undef TkpCmapStressed_ #undef TkpSync_ #undef TkUnixContainerId_ #undef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ #undef TkUnixSetMenubar_ #undef TkWmCleanup_ #undef TkSendCleanup_ #undef TkpTestsendCmd_ #define TkClipBox(rgn, rect) XClipBox((Region) rgn, rect) #define TkCreateRegion() (TkRegion) XCreateRegion() #define TkDestroyRegion(rgn) XDestroyRegion((Region) rgn) #define TkIntersectRegion(a, b, r) XIntersectRegion((Region) a, \ (Region) b, (Region) r) #define TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, w, h) XRectInRegion((Region) r, x, y, w, h) #define TkSetRegion(d, gc, rgn) XSetRegion(d, gc, (Region) rgn) #define TkSubtractRegion(a, b, r) XSubtractRegion((Region) a, \ (Region) b, (Region) r) #define TkUnionRectWithRegion(rect, src, ret) XUnionRectWithRegion(rect, \ (Region) src, (Region) ret) #endif /* UNIX */ #if !defined(MAC_OSX_TK) # undef TkpWillDrawWidget # undef TkpRedrawWidget # define TkpWillDrawWidget(w) 0 # define TkpRedrawWidget(w) #endif #undef TkUnusedStubEntry #endif /* _TKINTDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkIntPlatDecls.h -- * * This file contains the declarations for all platform dependent * unsupported functions that are exported by the Tk library. These * interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between * versions. Use at your own risk. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | /* * tkIntPlatDecls.h -- * * This file contains the declarations for all platform dependent * unsupported functions that are exported by the Tk library. These * interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between * versions. Use at your own risk. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * All rights reserved. */ #ifndef _TKINTPLATDECLS #define _TKINTPLATDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
166 167 168 169 170 171 172 | EXTERN void TkAboutDlg(void); /* 8 */ EXTERN unsigned int TkMacOSXButtonKeyState(void); /* 9 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void); /* 10 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index); | | > | 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 | EXTERN void TkAboutDlg(void); /* 8 */ EXTERN unsigned int TkMacOSXButtonKeyState(void); /* 9 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void); /* 10 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index); /* 11 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInstallCursor(int resizeOverride); /* 12 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu(void); /* Slot 13 is reserved */ /* 14 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(void *theEvent); /* Slot 15 is reserved */ /* 16 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 | EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, void *destPort); /* 32 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr); /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* 34 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID); /* 35 */ | | | 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, void *destPort); /* 32 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr); /* Slot 33 is reserved */ /* 34 */ EXTERN int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID); /* 35 */ EXTERN TkRegion TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 36 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXWinBounds(TkWindow *winPtr, void *geometry); /* 37 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXWindowOffset(void *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset); /* 38 */ EXTERN int TkSetMacColor(unsigned long pixel, void *macColor); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | /* 44 */ EXTERN MacDrawable * TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 45 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void); /* 46 */ EXTERN int TkpIsWindowFloating(void *window); /* 47 */ | | | | 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 | /* 44 */ EXTERN MacDrawable * TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 45 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void); /* 46 */ EXTERN int TkpIsWindowFloating(void *window); /* 47 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkMacOSXGetCapture(void); /* Slot 48 is reserved */ /* 49 */ EXTERN Tk_Window TkGetTransientMaster(TkWindow *winPtr); /* 50 */ EXTERN int TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 51 */ EXTERN void TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 52 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
397 398 399 400 401 402 403 |
void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */
void (*tkpSetCursor) (TkpCursor cursor); /* 5 */
void (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 6 */
void (*tkAboutDlg) (void); /* 7 */
unsigned int (*tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) (void); /* 8 */
void (*tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) (void); /* 9 */
int (*tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) (int menuID, int index); /* 10 */
| | | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 |
void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */
void (*tkpSetCursor) (TkpCursor cursor); /* 5 */
void (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 6 */
void (*tkAboutDlg) (void); /* 7 */
unsigned int (*tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) (void); /* 8 */
void (*tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) (void); /* 9 */
int (*tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) (int menuID, int index); /* 10 */
void (*tkMacOSXInstallCursor) (int resizeOverride); /* 11 */
void (*tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) (void); /* 12 */
void (*reserved13)(void);
int (*tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) (void *theEvent); /* 14 */
void (*reserved15)(void);
Window (*tkMacOSXGetXWindow) (void *macWinPtr); /* 16 */
int (*tkMacOSXGrowToplevel) (void *whichWindow, XPoint start); /* 17 */
void (*tkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect) (short theMenu, unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed); /* 18 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
421 422 423 424 425 426 427 |
void (*tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) (void); /* 28 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 29 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) (Drawable drawable); /* 30 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) (GC gc, void *destPort); /* 31 */
void (*tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 32 */
void (*reserved33)(void);
int (*tkMacOSXUseMenuID) (short macID); /* 34 */
| | | | | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 |
void (*tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) (void); /* 28 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 29 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) (Drawable drawable); /* 30 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) (GC gc, void *destPort); /* 31 */
void (*tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 32 */
void (*reserved33)(void);
int (*tkMacOSXUseMenuID) (short macID); /* 34 */
TkRegion (*tkMacOSXVisableClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 35 */
void (*tkMacOSXWinBounds) (TkWindow *winPtr, void *geometry); /* 36 */
void (*tkMacOSXWindowOffset) (void *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset); /* 37 */
int (*tkSetMacColor) (unsigned long pixel, void *macColor); /* 38 */
void (*tkSetWMName) (TkWindow *winPtr, Tk_Uid titleUid); /* 39 */
void (*reserved40)(void);
int (*tkMacOSXZoomToplevel) (void *whichWindow, short zoomPart); /* 41 */
Tk_Window (*tk_TopCoordsToWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int rootX, int rootY, int *newX, int *newY); /* 42 */
MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 43 */
MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXGetHostToplevel) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 44 */
void (*tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) (void); /* 45 */
int (*tkpIsWindowFloating) (void *window); /* 46 */
Tk_Window (*tkMacOSXGetCapture) (void); /* 47 */
void (*reserved48)(void);
Tk_Window (*tkGetTransientMaster) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 49 */
int (*tkGenerateButtonEvent) (int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 50 */
void (*tkGenWMDestroyEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 51 */
void (*tkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 52 */
unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) (void); /* 53 */
void * (*tkMacOSXDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 54 */
int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 55 */
#endif /* AQUA */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
623 624 625 626 627 628 629 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkAboutDlg) /* 7 */ #define TkMacOSXButtonKeyState \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) /* 8 */ #define TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) /* 9 */ #define TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) /* 10 */ | | > | 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkAboutDlg) /* 7 */ #define TkMacOSXButtonKeyState \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) /* 8 */ #define TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) /* 9 */ #define TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) /* 10 */ #define TkMacOSXInstallCursor \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInstallCursor) /* 11 */ #define TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) /* 12 */ /* Slot 13 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXDoHLEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) /* 14 */ /* Slot 15 is reserved */ #define TkMacOSXGetXWindow \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
687 688 689 690 691 692 693 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXContainerId) /* 43 */ #define TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetHostToplevel) /* 44 */ #define TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) /* 45 */ #define TkpIsWindowFloating \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpIsWindowFloating) /* 46 */ | | | | | | 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 | (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXContainerId) /* 43 */ #define TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetHostToplevel) /* 44 */ #define TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) /* 45 */ #define TkpIsWindowFloating \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpIsWindowFloating) /* 46 */ #define TkMacOSXGetCapture \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetCapture) /* 47 */ /* Slot 48 is reserved */ #define TkGetTransientMaster \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGetTransientMaster) /* 49 */ #define TkGenerateButtonEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenerateButtonEvent) /* 50 */ #define TkGenWMDestroyEvent \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMDestroyEvent) /* 51 */ #define TkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled \ (tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXSetDrawingEnabled) /* 52 */ #define TkpGetMS \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
787 788 789 790 791 792 793 | #undef TkUnixContainerId_ #undef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ #undef TkUnixSetMenubar_ #undef TkWmCleanup_ #undef TkSendCleanup_ #undef TkpTestsendCmd_ #undef TkGenerateActivateEvents_ | > > | > < < < | 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | #undef TkUnixContainerId_ #undef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_ #undef TkUnixSetMenubar_ #undef TkWmCleanup_ #undef TkSendCleanup_ #undef TkpTestsendCmd_ #undef TkGenerateActivateEvents_ #define TkMacOSXGetContainer TkGetTransientMaster #undef TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing #define TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing(tkfont) ((void)tkfont, 0) #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* _TKINTPLATDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkIntXlibDecls.h -- * * This file contains the declarations for all platform dependent * unsupported functions that are exported by the Tk library. These * interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between * versions. Use at your own risk. * | | | > | < | > > | | < < < < < < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 |
/*
* tkIntXlibDecls.h --
*
* This file contains the declarations for all platform dependent
* unsupported functions that are exported by the Tk library. These
* interfaces are not guaranteed to remain the same between
* versions. Use at your own risk.
*
* Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation.
* All rights reserved.
*/
#ifndef _TKINTXLIBDECLS
#define _TKINTXLIBDECLS
/*
* WARNING: This file is automatically generated by the tools/genStubs.tcl
* script. Any modifications to the function declarations below should be made
* in the generic/tkInt.decls script.
*/
#ifndef _TCL
# include <tcl.h>
#endif
/* Some (older) versions of X11/Xutil.h have a wrong signature of those
two functions, so move them out of the way temporarily. */
#define XOffsetRegion _XOffsetRegion
#define XUnionRegion _XUnionRegion
#include "X11/Xutil.h"
#undef XOffsetRegion
#undef XUnionRegion
#ifdef BUILD_tk
#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
#endif
typedef int (*XAfterFunction) ( /* WARNING, this type not in Xlib spec */
Display* /* display */
);
/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 80 */ EXTERN int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); | | > > > | 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 | char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 80 */ EXTERN int TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 81 */ EXTERN int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering); /* 82 */ EXTERN Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 83 */ EXTERN GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 84 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
415 416 417 418 419 420 421 | /* 136 */ EXTERN int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 137 */ EXTERN int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); | | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < < < < | < < < < | < | < < | < | < | < < < < < | < | < < | < < | | 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | /* 136 */ EXTERN int XReparentWindow(Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 137 */ EXTERN int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* Slot 138 is reserved */ /* Slot 139 is reserved */ /* Slot 140 is reserved */ /* Slot 141 is reserved */ /* Slot 142 is reserved */ /* Slot 143 is reserved */ /* Slot 144 is reserved */ /* Slot 145 is reserved */ /* Slot 146 is reserved */ /* Slot 147 is reserved */ /* Slot 148 is reserved */ /* Slot 149 is reserved */ /* Slot 150 is reserved */ /* Slot 151 is reserved */ /* Slot 152 is reserved */ /* Slot 153 is reserved */ /* Slot 154 is reserved */ /* Slot 155 is reserved */ /* Slot 156 is reserved */ /* Slot 157 is reserved */ /* 158 */ EXTERN void TkUnusedStubEntry(void); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ /* 0 */ EXTERN int XSetDashes(Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 1 */ EXTERN XModifierKeymap * XGetModifierMapping(Display *d); /* 2 */ EXTERN XImage * XCreateImage(Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
493 494 495 496 497 498 499 | EXTERN char * XKeysymToString(KeySym k); /* 6 */ EXTERN Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 7 */ EXTERN GContext XGContextFromGC(GC g); /* 8 */ | | | 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 | EXTERN char * XKeysymToString(KeySym k); /* 6 */ EXTERN Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 7 */ EXTERN GContext XGContextFromGC(GC g); /* 8 */ EXTERN KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, KeyCode k, int i); /* 9 */ EXTERN KeySym XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c); /* 10 */ EXTERN Window XRootWindow(Display *d, int i); /* 11 */ EXTERN XErrorHandler XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x); /* 12 */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
732 733 734 735 736 737 738 | EXTERN int XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 90 */ EXTERN Status XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 91 */ EXTERN int XSync(Display *display, Bool discard); | | < < < | < | < | < | < < | < | < | < | < | < < | < < | < | < | < | < < | | < < | < < < < < < < | < < | < < | < < | < < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < < < < | < < < < | < | < < | < | < | < < < < < | < | < < | | 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 |
EXTERN int XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors);
/* 90 */
EXTERN Status XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2,
Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui);
/* 91 */
EXTERN int XSync(Display *display, Bool discard);
/* Slot 92 is reserved */
/* Slot 93 is reserved */
/* Slot 94 is reserved */
/* Slot 95 is reserved */
/* Slot 96 is reserved */
/* Slot 97 is reserved */
/* Slot 98 is reserved */
/* Slot 99 is reserved */
/* Slot 100 is reserved */
/* Slot 101 is reserved */
/* Slot 102 is reserved */
/* Slot 103 is reserved */
/* Slot 104 is reserved */
/* Slot 105 is reserved */
/* 106 */
EXTERN int XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc,
int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin,
XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering);
/* 107 */
EXTERN int XFlush(Display *display);
/* 108 */
EXTERN int XGrabServer(Display *display);
/* 109 */
EXTERN int XUngrabServer(Display *display);
/* 110 */
EXTERN int XFree(void *data);
/* 111 */
EXTERN int XNoOp(Display *display);
/* 112 */
EXTERN XAfterFunction XSynchronize(Display *display, Bool onoff);
/* Slot 113 is reserved */
/* 114 */
EXTERN VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual);
/* Slot 115 is reserved */
/* Slot 116 is reserved */
/* Slot 117 is reserved */
/* Slot 118 is reserved */
/* Slot 119 is reserved */
/* 120 */
EXTERN int XOffsetRegion(void *rgn, int dx, int dy);
/* Slot 121 is reserved */
/* Slot 122 is reserved */
/* Slot 123 is reserved */
/* Slot 124 is reserved */
/* Slot 125 is reserved */
/* Slot 126 is reserved */
/* Slot 127 is reserved */
/* Slot 128 is reserved */
/* 129 */
EXTERN int XLowerWindow(Display *d, Window w);
/* Slot 130 is reserved */
/* Slot 131 is reserved */
/* Slot 132 is reserved */
/* Slot 133 is reserved */
/* Slot 134 is reserved */
/* Slot 135 is reserved */
/* Slot 136 is reserved */
/* 137 */
EXTERN int XPutImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im,
int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy,
unsigned int w, unsigned int h);
/* Slot 138 is reserved */
/* Slot 139 is reserved */
/* Slot 140 is reserved */
/* Slot 141 is reserved */
/* Slot 142 is reserved */
/* Slot 143 is reserved */
/* 144 */
EXTERN void XDestroyIC(XIC xic);
/* 145 */
EXTERN Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2,
XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1,
unsigned int ui2);
/* 146 */
EXTERN Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *d, Font f1, Font f2,
unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2);
/* Slot 147 is reserved */
/* Slot 148 is reserved */
/* Slot 149 is reserved */
/* Slot 150 is reserved */
/* Slot 151 is reserved */
/* Slot 152 is reserved */
/* Slot 153 is reserved */
/* Slot 154 is reserved */
/* Slot 155 is reserved */
/* Slot 156 is reserved */
/* 157 */
EXTERN KeySym XkbKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, unsigned int k, int g,
int i);
/* 158 */
EXTERN void TkUnusedStubEntry(void);
#endif /* AQUA */
typedef struct TkIntXlibStubs {
int magic;
void *hooks;
#if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
979 980 981 982 983 984 985 |
int (*xUngrabPointer) (Display *d, Time t); /* 74 */
int (*xUnmapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 75 */
int (*xWindowEvent) (Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x); /* 76 */
void (*xDestroyIC) (XIC x); /* 77 */
Bool (*xFilterEvent) (XEvent *x, Window w); /* 78 */
int (*xmbLookupString) (XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 79 */
int (*tkPutImage) (unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 80 */
| | | 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 |
int (*xUngrabPointer) (Display *d, Time t); /* 74 */
int (*xUnmapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 75 */
int (*xWindowEvent) (Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x); /* 76 */
void (*xDestroyIC) (XIC x); /* 77 */
Bool (*xFilterEvent) (XEvent *x, Window w); /* 78 */
int (*xmbLookupString) (XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 79 */
int (*tkPutImage) (unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 80 */
int (*xSetClipRectangles) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering); /* 81 */
Status (*xParseColor) (Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 82 */
GC (*xCreateGC) (Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 83 */
int (*xFreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 84 */
Atom (*xInternAtom) (Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists); /* 85 */
int (*xSetBackground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 86 */
int (*xSetForeground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 87 */
int (*xSetClipMask) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap); /* 88 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 |
int (*xDrawArcs) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 131 */
int (*xDrawRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n); /* 132 */
int (*xDrawSegments) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XSegment *s, int n); /* 133 */
int (*xDrawPoint) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 134 */
int (*xDrawPoints) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XPoint *p, int n, int m); /* 135 */
int (*xReparentWindow) (Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 136 */
int (*xPutImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* 137 */
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 |
int (*xDrawArcs) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XArc *a, int n); /* 131 */
int (*xDrawRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XRectangle *r, int n); /* 132 */
int (*xDrawSegments) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XSegment *s, int n); /* 133 */
int (*xDrawPoint) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 134 */
int (*xDrawPoints) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XPoint *p, int n, int m); /* 135 */
int (*xReparentWindow) (Display *d, Window w, Window p, int x, int y); /* 136 */
int (*xPutImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* 137 */
void (*reserved138)(void);
void (*reserved139)(void);
void (*reserved140)(void);
void (*reserved141)(void);
void (*reserved142)(void);
void (*reserved143)(void);
void (*reserved144)(void);
void (*reserved145)(void);
void (*reserved146)(void);
void (*reserved147)(void);
void (*reserved148)(void);
void (*reserved149)(void);
void (*reserved150)(void);
void (*reserved151)(void);
void (*reserved152)(void);
void (*reserved153)(void);
void (*reserved154)(void);
void (*reserved155)(void);
void (*reserved156)(void);
void (*reserved157)(void);
void (*tkUnusedStubEntry) (void); /* 158 */
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */
XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) (Display *d); /* 1 */
XImage * (*xCreateImage) (Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4); /* 2 */
XImage * (*xGetImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3); /* 3 */
char * (*xGetAtomName) (Display *d, Atom a); /* 4 */
char * (*xKeysymToString) (KeySym k); /* 5 */
Colormap (*xCreateColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 6 */
GContext (*xGContextFromGC) (GC g); /* 7 */
KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) (Display *d, KeyCode k, int i); /* 8 */
KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) (_Xconst char *c); /* 9 */
Window (*xRootWindow) (Display *d, int i); /* 10 */
XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) (XErrorHandler x); /* 11 */
Status (*xAllocColor) (Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp); /* 12 */
int (*xBell) (Display *d, int i); /* 13 */
int (*xChangeProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3); /* 14 */
int (*xChangeWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x); /* 15 */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 |
int (*xDrawPoint) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 85 */
int (*xDrawPoints) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode); /* 86 */
int (*xWarpPointer) (Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y); /* 87 */
int (*xQueryColor) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out); /* 88 */
int (*xQueryColors) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 89 */
Status (*xQueryTree) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 90 */
int (*xSync) (Display *display, Bool discard); /* 91 */
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 |
int (*xDrawPoint) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 85 */
int (*xDrawPoints) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode); /* 86 */
int (*xWarpPointer) (Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y); /* 87 */
int (*xQueryColor) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out); /* 88 */
int (*xQueryColors) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 89 */
Status (*xQueryTree) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 90 */
int (*xSync) (Display *display, Bool discard); /* 91 */
void (*reserved92)(void);
void (*reserved93)(void);
void (*reserved94)(void);
void (*reserved95)(void);
void (*reserved96)(void);
void (*reserved97)(void);
void (*reserved98)(void);
void (*reserved99)(void);
void (*reserved100)(void);
void (*reserved101)(void);
void (*reserved102)(void);
void (*reserved103)(void);
void (*reserved104)(void);
void (*reserved105)(void);
int (*xSetClipRectangles) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int ordering); /* 106 */
int (*xFlush) (Display *display); /* 107 */
int (*xGrabServer) (Display *display); /* 108 */
int (*xUngrabServer) (Display *display); /* 109 */
int (*xFree) (void *data); /* 110 */
int (*xNoOp) (Display *display); /* 111 */
XAfterFunction (*xSynchronize) (Display *display, Bool onoff); /* 112 */
void (*reserved113)(void);
VisualID (*xVisualIDFromVisual) (Visual *visual); /* 114 */
void (*reserved115)(void);
void (*reserved116)(void);
void (*reserved117)(void);
void (*reserved118)(void);
void (*reserved119)(void);
int (*xOffsetRegion) (void *rgn, int dx, int dy); /* 120 */
void (*reserved121)(void);
void (*reserved122)(void);
void (*reserved123)(void);
void (*reserved124)(void);
void (*reserved125)(void);
void (*reserved126)(void);
void (*reserved127)(void);
void (*reserved128)(void);
int (*xLowerWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 129 */
void (*reserved130)(void);
void (*reserved131)(void);
void (*reserved132)(void);
void (*reserved133)(void);
void (*reserved134)(void);
void (*reserved135)(void);
void (*reserved136)(void);
int (*xPutImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC gc, XImage *im, int sx, int sy, int dx, int dy, unsigned int w, unsigned int h); /* 137 */
void (*reserved138)(void);
void (*reserved139)(void);
void (*reserved140)(void);
void (*reserved141)(void);
void (*reserved142)(void);
void (*reserved143)(void);
void (*xDestroyIC) (XIC xic); /* 144 */
Cursor (*xCreatePixmapCursor) (Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 145 */
Cursor (*xCreateGlyphCursor) (Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2); /* 146 */
void (*reserved147)(void);
void (*reserved148)(void);
void (*reserved149)(void);
void (*reserved150)(void);
void (*reserved151)(void);
void (*reserved152)(void);
void (*reserved153)(void);
void (*reserved154)(void);
void (*reserved155)(void);
void (*reserved156)(void);
KeySym (*xkbKeycodeToKeysym) (Display *d, unsigned int k, int g, int i); /* 157 */
void (*tkUnusedStubEntry) (void); /* 158 */
#endif /* AQUA */
} TkIntXlibStubs;
extern const TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubsPtr;
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDestroyIC) /* 77 */ #define XFilterEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFilterEvent) /* 78 */ #define XmbLookupString \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xmbLookupString) /* 79 */ #define TkPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->tkPutImage) /* 80 */ | | > | 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDestroyIC) /* 77 */ #define XFilterEvent \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFilterEvent) /* 78 */ #define XmbLookupString \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xmbLookupString) /* 79 */ #define TkPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->tkPutImage) /* 80 */ #define XSetClipRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetClipRectangles) /* 81 */ #define XParseColor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xParseColor) /* 82 */ #define XCreateGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateGC) /* 83 */ #define XFreeGC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFreeGC) /* 84 */ #define XInternAtom \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoint) /* 134 */ #define XDrawPoints \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoints) /* 135 */ #define XReparentWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xReparentWindow) /* 136 */ #define XPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPutImage) /* 137 */ | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < < < < < > > | < | < | < | < | < | < | | | | | 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoint) /* 134 */ #define XDrawPoints \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDrawPoints) /* 135 */ #define XReparentWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xReparentWindow) /* 136 */ #define XPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPutImage) /* 137 */ /* Slot 138 is reserved */ /* Slot 139 is reserved */ /* Slot 140 is reserved */ /* Slot 141 is reserved */ /* Slot 142 is reserved */ /* Slot 143 is reserved */ /* Slot 144 is reserved */ /* Slot 145 is reserved */ /* Slot 146 is reserved */ /* Slot 147 is reserved */ /* Slot 148 is reserved */ /* Slot 149 is reserved */ /* Slot 150 is reserved */ /* Slot 151 is reserved */ /* Slot 152 is reserved */ /* Slot 153 is reserved */ /* Slot 154 is reserved */ /* Slot 155 is reserved */ /* Slot 156 is reserved */ /* Slot 157 is reserved */ #define TkUnusedStubEntry \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->tkUnusedStubEntry) /* 158 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define XSetDashes \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetDashes) /* 0 */ #define XGetModifierMapping \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGetModifierMapping) /* 1 */ #define XCreateImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateImage) /* 2 */ #define XGetImage \ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColor) /* 88 */ #define XQueryColors \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColors) /* 89 */ #define XQueryTree \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryTree) /* 90 */ #define XSync \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSync) /* 91 */ | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < | < < < < < > > | < | < | < | < | < | | | | < < < < > > | 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColor) /* 88 */ #define XQueryColors \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryColors) /* 89 */ #define XQueryTree \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xQueryTree) /* 90 */ #define XSync \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSync) /* 91 */ /* Slot 92 is reserved */ /* Slot 93 is reserved */ /* Slot 94 is reserved */ /* Slot 95 is reserved */ /* Slot 96 is reserved */ /* Slot 97 is reserved */ /* Slot 98 is reserved */ /* Slot 99 is reserved */ /* Slot 100 is reserved */ /* Slot 101 is reserved */ /* Slot 102 is reserved */ /* Slot 103 is reserved */ /* Slot 104 is reserved */ /* Slot 105 is reserved */ #define XSetClipRectangles \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSetClipRectangles) /* 106 */ #define XFlush \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFlush) /* 107 */ #define XGrabServer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xGrabServer) /* 108 */ #define XUngrabServer \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xUngrabServer) /* 109 */ #define XFree \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xFree) /* 110 */ #define XNoOp \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xNoOp) /* 111 */ #define XSynchronize \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xSynchronize) /* 112 */ /* Slot 113 is reserved */ #define XVisualIDFromVisual \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xVisualIDFromVisual) /* 114 */ /* Slot 115 is reserved */ /* Slot 116 is reserved */ /* Slot 117 is reserved */ /* Slot 118 is reserved */ /* Slot 119 is reserved */ #define XOffsetRegion \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xOffsetRegion) /* 120 */ /* Slot 121 is reserved */ /* Slot 122 is reserved */ /* Slot 123 is reserved */ /* Slot 124 is reserved */ /* Slot 125 is reserved */ /* Slot 126 is reserved */ /* Slot 127 is reserved */ /* Slot 128 is reserved */ #define XLowerWindow \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xLowerWindow) /* 129 */ /* Slot 130 is reserved */ /* Slot 131 is reserved */ /* Slot 132 is reserved */ /* Slot 133 is reserved */ /* Slot 134 is reserved */ /* Slot 135 is reserved */ /* Slot 136 is reserved */ #define XPutImage \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xPutImage) /* 137 */ /* Slot 138 is reserved */ /* Slot 139 is reserved */ /* Slot 140 is reserved */ /* Slot 141 is reserved */ /* Slot 142 is reserved */ /* Slot 143 is reserved */ #define XDestroyIC \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xDestroyIC) /* 144 */ #define XCreatePixmapCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreatePixmapCursor) /* 145 */ #define XCreateGlyphCursor \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xCreateGlyphCursor) /* 146 */ /* Slot 147 is reserved */ /* Slot 148 is reserved */ /* Slot 149 is reserved */ /* Slot 150 is reserved */ /* Slot 151 is reserved */ /* Slot 152 is reserved */ /* Slot 153 is reserved */ /* Slot 154 is reserved */ /* Slot 155 is reserved */ /* Slot 156 is reserved */ #define XkbKeycodeToKeysym \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->xkbKeycodeToKeysym) /* 157 */ #define TkUnusedStubEntry \ (tkIntXlibStubsPtr->tkUnusedStubEntry) /* 158 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #undef TkUnusedStubEntry #endif /* _TKINTXLIBDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkListbox.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ | < < < | < | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 |
* Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "default.h"
#include "tkInt.h"
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionTable listboxOptionTable;
/* Table defining configuration options
* available for the listbox. */
Tk_OptionTable itemAttrOptionTable;
/* Table defining configuration options
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 |
* below.
*/
enum state {
STATE_DISABLED, STATE_NORMAL
};
| < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < | | | | | | | | < | | | < | | 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 |
* below.
*/
enum state {
STATE_DISABLED, STATE_NORMAL
};
enum activeStyle {
ACTIVE_STYLE_DOTBOX, ACTIVE_STYLE_NONE, ACTIVE_STYLE_UNDERLINE
};
static const char *const activeStyleStrings[] = {
"dotbox", "none", "underline", NULL
};
/*
* The optionSpecs table defines the valid configuration options for the
* listbox widget.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-activestyle", "activeStyle", "ActiveStyle",
DEF_LISTBOX_ACTIVE_STYLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, activeStyle),
0, activeStyleStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, normalBorder),
0, DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_LISTBOX_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, borderWidth),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_LISTBOX_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_LISTBOX_DISABLED_FG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Listbox, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
"ExportSelection", DEF_LISTBOX_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
Tk_Offset(Listbox, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_LISTBOX_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_LISTBOX_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_LISTBOX_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, height), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Listbox, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Listbox, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_LISTBOX_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_LISTBOX_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, selBorder),
0, DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_BD, -1,
Tk_Offset(Listbox, selBorderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, selFgColorPtr),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectmode", "selectMode", "SelectMode",
DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MODE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, selectMode),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid",
DEF_LISTBOX_SET_GRID, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, setGrid), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_LISTBOX_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, state),
0, &tkStateStrings[1], 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_LISTBOX_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, takeFocus),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_LISTBOX_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, width), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_LISTBOX_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, xScrollCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
DEF_LISTBOX_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, yScrollCmd),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-listvariable", "listVariable", "Variable",
DEF_LISTBOX_LIST_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, listVarName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* The itemAttrOptionSpecs table defines the valid configuration options for
* listbox items.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec itemAttrOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, border),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, fgColor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selBorder),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", NULL, NULL,
NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selFgColor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, NULL, 0}
};
/*
* The following tables define the listbox widget commands (and sub-commands)
* and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
* dispatch the listbox widget command.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
373 374 375 376 377 378 379 |
"mark", "dragto", NULL
};
enum scancommand {
SCAN_MARK, SCAN_DRAGTO
};
static const char *const indexNames[] = {
| | | | | | | 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 |
"mark", "dragto", NULL
};
enum scancommand {
SCAN_MARK, SCAN_DRAGTO
};
static const char *const indexNames[] = {
"active", "anchor", "end", NULL
};
enum indices {
INDEX_ACTIVE, INDEX_ANCHOR, INDEX_END
};
/*
* Declarations for procedures defined later in this file.
*/
static void ChangeListboxOffset(Listbox *listPtr, int offset);
static void ChangeListboxView(Listbox *listPtr, int index);
static int ConfigureListbox(Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int ConfigureListboxItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Listbox *listPtr, ItemAttr *attrs, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int index);
static int ListboxDeleteSubCmd(Listbox *listPtr,
int first, int last);
static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyListbox;
static void DestroyListboxOptionTables(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp);
static void DisplayListbox(ClientData clientData);
static int GetListboxIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr,
Tcl_Obj *index, int endIsSize, int *indexPtr);
static int ListboxInsertSubCmd(Listbox *listPtr,
int index, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void ListboxCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
static void ListboxComputeGeometry(Listbox *listPtr,
int fontChanged, int maxIsStale, int updateGrid);
static void ListboxEventProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static int ListboxFetchSelection(ClientData clientData,
int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
static void ListboxLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
static void GenerateListboxSelectEvent(Listbox *listPtr);
static void EventuallyRedrawRange(Listbox *listPtr,
int first, int last);
static void ListboxScanTo(Listbox *listPtr, int x, int y);
static int ListboxSelect(Listbox *listPtr,
int first, int last, int select);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
469 470 471 472 473 474 475 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_ListboxObjCmd( | | < | | | 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_ListboxObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* NULL. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Listbox *listPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin;
ListboxOptionTables *optionTables;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
if (tkwin == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
optionTables = Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "ListboxOptionTables", NULL);
if (optionTables == NULL) {
/*
* We haven't created the option tables for this widget class yet. Do
* it now and save the a pointer to them as the ClientData for the
* command, so future invocations will have access to it.
*/
optionTables = ckalloc(sizeof(ListboxOptionTables));
/*
* Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct.
*/
Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "ListboxOptionTables",
DestroyListboxOptionTables, optionTables);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
523 524 525 526 527 528 529 |
/*
* Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
* ConfigureListbox, or that ConfigureListbox requires to be initialized
* already (e.g. resource pointers).
*/
| | | | | 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 |
/*
* Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
* ConfigureListbox, or that ConfigureListbox requires to be initialized
* already (e.g. resource pointers).
*/
listPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(Listbox));
memset(listPtr, 0, sizeof(Listbox));
listPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
listPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
listPtr->interp = interp;
listPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
Tk_PathName(listPtr->tkwin), ListboxWidgetObjCmd, listPtr,
ListboxCmdDeletedProc);
listPtr->optionTable = optionTables->listboxOptionTable;
listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable = optionTables->itemAttrOptionTable;
listPtr->selection = ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
Tcl_InitHashTable(listPtr->selection, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
listPtr->itemAttrTable = ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
Tcl_InitHashTable(listPtr->itemAttrTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
listPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
listPtr->textGC = NULL;
listPtr->selFgColorPtr = NULL;
listPtr->selTextGC = NULL;
listPtr->fullLines = 1;
listPtr->xScrollUnit = 1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
564 565 566 567 568 569 570 |
Tk_SetClass(listPtr->tkwin, "Listbox");
Tk_SetClassProcs(listPtr->tkwin, &listboxClass, listPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(listPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
ListboxEventProc, listPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(listPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
ListboxFetchSelection, listPtr, XA_STRING);
| | | | 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 |
Tk_SetClass(listPtr->tkwin, "Listbox");
Tk_SetClassProcs(listPtr->tkwin, &listboxClass, listPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(listPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
ListboxEventProc, listPtr);
Tk_CreateSelHandler(listPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
ListboxFetchSelection, listPtr, XA_STRING);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)listPtr,
optionTables->listboxOptionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(listPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(listPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(listPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ListboxWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
604 605 606 607 608 609 610 |
static int
ListboxWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about listbox widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments as Tcl_Obj's. */
{
| | | 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 |
static int
ListboxWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about listbox widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments as Tcl_Obj's. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
int cmdIndex, index;
int result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
679 680 681 682 683 684 685 |
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
| | | | 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 |
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) listPtr,
listPtr->optionTable, objv[2], listPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
result = TCL_OK;
break;
case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) listPtr,
listPtr->optionTable,
(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, listPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
725 726 727 728 729 730 731 |
* the indices in order, adding them to the result if they are
* selected.
*/
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, KEY(i))) {
| | | 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 |
* the indices in order, adding them to the result if they are
* selected.
*/
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, KEY(i))) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(i));
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
result = TCL_OK;
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
838 839 840 841 842 843 844 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
| | | 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
result = TCL_OK;
break;
case COMMAND_INSERT:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index ?element ...?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
902 903 904 905 906 907 908 |
}
case COMMAND_ITEMCONFIGURE: {
ItemAttr *attrPtr;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
| | | | 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 |
}
case COMMAND_ITEMCONFIGURE: {
ItemAttr *attrPtr;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"index ?-option? ?value? ?-option value ...?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
if (index < 0 || index >= listPtr->nElements) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"item number \"%s\" out of range",
Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LISTBOX", "ITEM_INDEX", NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
attrPtr = ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index);
if (objc <= 4) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) attrPtr,
listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable,
(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, listPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
953 954 955 956 957 958 959 |
}
result = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &y);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
index = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
| | | 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 |
}
result = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &y);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
break;
}
index = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
result = TCL_OK;
break;
}
case COMMAND_SCAN: {
int x, y, scanCmdIndex;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 |
break;
case COMMAND_SIZE:
if (objc != 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
| | | 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 |
break;
case COMMAND_SIZE:
if (objc != 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(listPtr->nElements));
result = TCL_OK;
break;
case COMMAND_XVIEW:
result = ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
break;
case COMMAND_YVIEW:
result = ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 |
/*
* Only allow bbox requests for indices that are visible.
*/
if ((listPtr->topIndex <= index) && (index < lastVisibleIndex)) {
Tcl_Obj *el, *results[4];
const char *stringRep;
| | < | | | | | | 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 |
/*
* Only allow bbox requests for indices that are visible.
*/
if ((listPtr->topIndex <= index) && (index < lastVisibleIndex)) {
Tcl_Obj *el, *results[4];
const char *stringRep;
int pixelWidth, stringLen, x, y, result;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
/*
* Compute the pixel width of the requested element.
*/
result = Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, listPtr->listObj, index, &el);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(el, &stringLen);
Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm);
pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, stringLen);
if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
x = (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - listPtr->xOffset;
} else if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth)
- pixelWidth - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr);
} else {
x = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - pixelWidth)/2
- listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr)/2;
}
y = ((index - listPtr->topIndex)*listPtr->lineHeight)
+ listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth;
results[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x);
results[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y);
results[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pixelWidth);
results[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(fm.linespace);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(4, results));
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 |
} else if (objc == 3) {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, index*listPtr->xScrollUnit);
} else {
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count)) {
| < < > > | 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 |
} else if (objc == 3) {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, index*listPtr->xScrollUnit);
} else {
switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count)) {
case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
offset = (int) (fraction*listPtr->maxWidth + 0.5);
break;
case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
windowUnits = windowWidth / listPtr->xScrollUnit;
if (windowUnits > 2) {
offset = listPtr->xOffset
+ count*listPtr->xScrollUnit*(windowUnits-2);
} else {
offset = listPtr->xOffset + count*listPtr->xScrollUnit;
}
break;
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
offset = listPtr->xOffset + count*listPtr->xScrollUnit;
break;
default:
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, offset);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 |
} else {
index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
}
break;
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
break;
| < | 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 |
} else {
index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
}
break;
case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
break;
default:
return TCL_ERROR;
}
ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 |
{
int isNew;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
ItemAttr *attrs;
entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, KEY(index), &isNew);
if (isNew) {
| | | | | 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 |
{
int isNew;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
ItemAttr *attrs;
entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, KEY(index), &isNew);
if (isNew) {
attrs = ckalloc(sizeof(ItemAttr));
attrs->border = NULL;
attrs->selBorder = NULL;
attrs->fgColor = NULL;
attrs->selFgColor = NULL;
Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)attrs, listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable,
listPtr->tkwin);
Tcl_SetHashValue(entry, attrs);
} else {
attrs = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
}
return attrs;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 | * Everything associated with the listbox is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyListbox( | | | 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 |
* Everything associated with the listbox is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyListbox(
char *memPtr) /* Info about listbox widget. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *)memPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
Tcl_HashSearch search;
/*
* If we have an internal list object, free it.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyListboxOptionTables(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
| | < < | 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyListboxOptionTables(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Pointer to the calling interp */
{
ckfree(clientData);
return;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
| | | 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) listPtr,
listPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
listPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
} else {
/*
* Second pass: restore options to old values.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 |
ItemAttr *attrs, /* Information about the item to configure */
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */
int index) /* Index of the listbox item being configure */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
| | | 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 |
ItemAttr *attrs, /* Information about the item to configure */
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */
int index) /* Index of the listbox item being configure */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)attrs,
listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable, objc, objv, listPtr->tkwin,
&savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 |
static void
ListboxWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc;
unsigned long mask;
| | | 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 |
static void
ListboxWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc;
unsigned long mask;
Listbox *listPtr = instanceData;
if (listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL) {
gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
} else if (listPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
gcValues.foreground = listPtr->dfgColorPtr->pixel;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayListbox(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about window. */
{
| | > | < | 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayListbox(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about window. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = listPtr->tkwin;
Display *disp = listPtr->display;
GC gc;
int i, limit, x, y, prevSelected, freeGC, stringLen;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
Tcl_Obj *curElement;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
const char *stringRep;
ItemAttr *attrs;
Tk_3DBorder selectedBg;
XGCValues gcValues;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 |
* Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated here and
* freed at the end of the procedure. All drawing is done to the pixmap,
* and the pixmap is copied to the screen at the end of the procedure.
* This provides the smoothest possible visual effects (no flashing on the
* screen).
*/
| | | 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 |
* Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated here and
* freed at the end of the procedure. All drawing is done to the pixmap,
* and the pixmap is copied to the screen at the end of the procedure.
* This provides the smoothest possible visual effects (no flashing on the
* screen).
*/
pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(disp, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
#else
pixmap = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder, 0, 0,
Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 |
}
prevSelected = 0;
for (i = listPtr->topIndex; i <= limit; i++) {
int width = Tk_Width(tkwin); /* zeroth approx to silence warning */
x = listPtr->inset;
| | | 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 |
}
prevSelected = 0;
for (i = listPtr->topIndex; i <= limit; i++) {
int width = Tk_Width(tkwin); /* zeroth approx to silence warning */
x = listPtr->inset;
y = (i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight + listPtr->inset;
gc = listPtr->textGC;
freeGC = 0;
/*
* Lookup this item in the item attributes table, to see if it has
* special foreground/background colors.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 |
/*
* If there is attribute information for this item, adjust the
* drawing accordingly.
*/
if (entry != NULL) {
| | | 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 |
/*
* If there is attribute information for this item, adjust the
* drawing accordingly.
*/
if (entry != NULL) {
attrs = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
/*
* Default GC has the values from the widget at large.
*/
if (listPtr->selFgColorPtr) {
gcValues.foreground = listPtr->selFgColorPtr->pixel;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 |
} else {
/*
* If there is an item attributes record for this item, draw
* the background box and set the foreground color accordingly.
*/
if (entry != NULL) {
| | | 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 |
} else {
/*
* If there is an item attributes record for this item, draw
* the background box and set the foreground color accordingly.
*/
if (entry != NULL) {
attrs = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(listPtr->tkfont);
gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
/*
* If the item has its own background color, draw it now.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 |
}
/*
* Draw the actual text of this item.
*/
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &curElement);
| | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < < < < < < | < < < < < < | < < < < < | < | | 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 |
}
/*
* Draw the actual text of this item.
*/
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &curElement);
stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curElement, &stringLen);
textWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, stringLen);
Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm);
y += fm.ascent + listPtr->selBorderWidth;
if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
x = (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth) - listPtr->xOffset;
} else if (listPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth)
- textWidth - listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr);
} else {
x = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - textWidth)/2
- listPtr->xOffset + GetMaxOffset(listPtr)/2;
}
Tk_DrawChars(disp, pixmap, gc, listPtr->tkfont,
stringRep, stringLen, x, y);
/*
* If this is the active element, apply the activestyle to it.
*/
if ((i == listPtr->active) && (listPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
if (listPtr->activeStyle == ACTIVE_STYLE_UNDERLINE) {
/*
* Underline the text.
*/
Tk_UnderlineChars(disp, pixmap, gc, listPtr->tkfont,
stringRep, x, y, 0, stringLen);
} else if (listPtr->activeStyle == ACTIVE_STYLE_DOTBOX) {
/*
* Draw a dotted box around the text.
*/
x = listPtr->inset;
y = (i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight
+ listPtr->inset;
width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset;
TkDrawDottedRect(disp, pixmap, gc, x, y,
width, listPtr->lineHeight);
if (!freeGC) {
/*
* Don't bother changing if it is about to be freed.
*/
gcValues.line_style = LineSolid;
XChangeGC(disp, gc, GCLineStyle, &gcValues);
}
}
}
if (freeGC) {
Tk_FreeGC(disp, gc);
}
}
/*
* Redraw the border for the listbox to make sure that it's on top of any
* of the text of the listbox entries.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 |
listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
} else {
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC,
listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
}
}
#ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
| | | < | | 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 |
listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
} else {
TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC,
listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
}
}
#ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
XCopyArea(disp, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), listPtr->textGC, 0, 0,
(unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
Tk_FreePixmap(disp, pixmap);
#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ListboxComputeGeometry --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 |
* longer be up-to-date and must be
* recomputed. If fontChanged is 1 then this
* must be 1. */
int updateGrid) /* Non-zero means call Tk_SetGrid or
* Tk_UnsetGrid to update gridding for the
* window. */
{
| | < | | 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 |
* longer be up-to-date and must be
* recomputed. If fontChanged is 1 then this
* must be 1. */
int updateGrid) /* Non-zero means call Tk_SetGrid or
* Tk_UnsetGrid to update gridding for the
* window. */
{
int width, height, pixelWidth, pixelHeight, textLength, i, result;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
Tcl_Obj *element;
const char *text;
if (fontChanged || maxIsStale) {
listPtr->xScrollUnit = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
if (listPtr->xScrollUnit == 0) {
listPtr->xScrollUnit = 1;
}
listPtr->maxWidth = 0;
for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
/*
* Compute the pixel width of the current element.
*/
result = Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i,
&element);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
text = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(element, &textLength);
Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm);
pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, text, textLength);
if (pixelWidth > listPtr->maxWidth) {
listPtr->maxWidth = pixelWidth;
}
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 |
ListboxInsertSubCmd(
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox that is to get the new elements. */
int index, /* Add the new elements before this
* element. */
int objc, /* Number of new elements to add. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* New elements (one per entry). */
{
| | < | | 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 |
ListboxInsertSubCmd(
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox that is to get the new elements. */
int index, /* Add the new elements before this
* element. */
int objc, /* Number of new elements to add. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* New elements (one per entry). */
{
int i, oldMaxWidth, pixelWidth, result, length;
Tcl_Obj *newListObj;
const char *stringRep;
oldMaxWidth = listPtr->maxWidth;
for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
/*
* Check if any of the new elements are wider than the current widest;
* if so, update our notion of "widest."
*/
stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, length);
if (pixelWidth > listPtr->maxWidth) {
listPtr->maxWidth = pixelWidth;
}
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 |
static int
ListboxDeleteSubCmd(
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox widget to modify. */
int first, /* Index of first element to delete. */
int last) /* Index of last element to delete. */
{
| | < | 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 |
static int
ListboxDeleteSubCmd(
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox widget to modify. */
int first, /* Index of first element to delete. */
int last) /* Index of last element to delete. */
{
int count, i, widthChanged, length, result, pixelWidth;
Tcl_Obj *newListObj, *element;
const char *stringRep;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
/*
* Adjust the range to fit within the existing elements of the listbox,
* and make sure there's something to delete.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 |
* Check width of the element. We only have to check if widthChanged
* has not already been set to 1, because we only need one maxWidth
* element to disappear for us to have to recompute the width.
*/
if (widthChanged == 0) {
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &element);
| | | 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 |
* Check width of the element. We only have to check if widthChanged
* has not already been set to 1, because we only need one maxWidth
* element to disappear for us to have to recompute the width.
*/
if (widthChanged == 0) {
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &element);
stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(element, &length);
pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, length);
if (pixelWidth == listPtr->maxWidth) {
widthChanged = 1;
}
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 |
*/
static void
ListboxEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
| | | | 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 |
*/
static void
ListboxEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
if (eventPtr->type == Expose) {
EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr,
NearestListboxElement(listPtr, eventPtr->xexpose.y),
NearestListboxElement(listPtr, eventPtr->xexpose.y
+ eventPtr->xexpose.height));
} else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
if (!(listPtr->flags & LISTBOX_DELETED)) {
listPtr->flags |= LISTBOX_DELETED;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(listPtr->interp, listPtr->widgetCmd);
if (listPtr->setGrid) {
Tk_UnsetGrid(listPtr->tkwin);
}
if (listPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayListbox, clientData);
}
Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyListbox);
}
} else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
int vertSpace;
vertSpace = Tk_Height(listPtr->tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset;
listPtr->fullLines = vertSpace / listPtr->lineHeight;
if ((listPtr->fullLines*listPtr->lineHeight) < vertSpace) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ListboxCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
| | | 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ListboxCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
/*
* This procedure could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
* and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
* because the command was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the
* widget.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 |
static int
GetListboxIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *indexObj, /* Specifies an element in the listbox. */
| | < < < < < < < < < < > > > > > > > > | 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 |
static int
GetListboxIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
Listbox *listPtr, /* Listbox for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *indexObj, /* Specifies an element in the listbox. */
int endIsSize, /* If 1, "end" refers to the number of entries
* in the listbox. If 0, "end" refers to 1
* less than the number of entries. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted index. */
{
int result, index;
const char *stringRep;
/*
* First see if the index is one of the named indices.
*/
result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, indexObj, indexNames, "", 0, &index);
if (result == TCL_OK) {
switch (index) {
case INDEX_ACTIVE:
/* "active" index */
*indexPtr = listPtr->active;
break;
case INDEX_ANCHOR:
/* "anchor" index */
*indexPtr = listPtr->selectAnchor;
break;
case INDEX_END:
/* "end" index */
if (endIsSize) {
*indexPtr = listPtr->nElements;
} else {
*indexPtr = listPtr->nElements - 1;
}
break;
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* The index didn't match any of the named indices; maybe it's an @x,y
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 |
y = strtol(start, &end, 0);
if ((start == end) || (*end != '\0')) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Everything failed, nothing matched. Throw up an error message.
*/
badIndex:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| > > > > > > > > | 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 |
y = strtol(start, &end, 0);
if ((start == end) || (*end != '\0')) {
goto badIndex;
}
*indexPtr = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Maybe the index is just an integer.
*/
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, indexObj, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Everything failed, nothing matched. Throw up an error message.
*/
badIndex:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | < | 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ListboxFetchSelection(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about listbox widget. */
int offset, /* Offset within selection of first byte to be
* returned. */
char *buffer, /* Location in which to place selection. */
int maxBytes) /* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
* not including terminating NULL
* character. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
Tcl_DString selection;
int length, count, needNewline, stringLen, i;
Tcl_Obj *curElement;
const char *stringRep;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
if ((!listPtr->exportSelection) || Tcl_IsSafe(listPtr->interp)) {
return -1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 |
entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, KEY(i));
if (entry != NULL) {
if (needNewline) {
Tcl_DStringAppend(&selection, "\n", 1);
}
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i,
&curElement);
| | | > < | | | | 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 |
entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, KEY(i));
if (entry != NULL) {
if (needNewline) {
Tcl_DStringAppend(&selection, "\n", 1);
}
Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i,
&curElement);
stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curElement, &stringLen);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&selection, stringRep, stringLen);
needNewline = 1;
}
}
length = Tcl_DStringLength(&selection);
if (length == 0) {
return -1;
}
/*
* Copy the requested portion of the selection to the buffer.
*/
count = length - offset;
if (count <= 0) {
count = 0;
} else {
if (count > maxBytes) {
count = maxBytes;
}
memcpy(buffer, Tcl_DStringValue(&selection) + offset, (size_t) count);
}
buffer[count] = '\0';
Tcl_DStringFree(&selection);
return count;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ListboxLostSelection(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about listbox widget. */
{
| | | 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ListboxLostSelection(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about listbox widget. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
if ((listPtr->exportSelection) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(listPtr->interp))
&& (listPtr->nElements > 0)) {
ListboxSelect(listPtr, 0, listPtr->nElements-1, 0);
GenerateListboxSelectEvent(listPtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
GenerateListboxSelectEvent(
Listbox *listPtr) /* Information about widget. */
{
| | | 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
GenerateListboxSelectEvent(
Listbox *listPtr) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkSendVirtualEvent(listPtr->tkwin, "ListboxSelect", NULL);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* EventuallyRedrawRange --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 |
Listbox *listPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int first, /* Index of first element in list that needs
* to be redrawn. */
int last) /* Index of last element in list that needs to
* be redrawn. May be less than first; these
* just bracket a range. */
{
| < < < | | 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 |
Listbox *listPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int first, /* Index of first element in list that needs
* to be redrawn. */
int last) /* Index of last element in list that needs to
* be redrawn. May be less than first; these
* just bracket a range. */
{
/*
* We don't have to a redraw callback if one is already pending,
* or if the window doesn't exist, or if the window isn't mapped.
*/
if ((listPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)
|| (listPtr->flags & LISTBOX_DELETED)
|| !Tk_IsMapped(listPtr->tkwin)) {
return;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 |
ListboxListVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Not used. */
const char *name2, /* Not used. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
| | < < | 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 |
ListboxListVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Not used. */
const char *name2, /* Not used. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
Listbox *listPtr = clientData;
Tcl_Obj *oldListObj, *varListObj;
int oldLength, i;
Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
/*
* Bwah hahahaha! Puny mortal, you can't unset a -listvar'd variable!
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMacWinMenu.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | /* * tkMacWinMenu.c -- * * This module implements the common elements of the Mac and Windows * specific features of menus. This file is not used for UNIX. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | /* * tkMacWinMenu.c -- * * This module implements the common elements of the Mac and Windows * specific features of menus. This file is not used for UNIX. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkMenu.h" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 |
*/
static int
PreprocessMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr)
{
int index, result, finished;
| | | 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 |
*/
static int
PreprocessMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr)
{
int index, result, finished;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr =
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
Tcl_Preserve(menuPtr);
/*
* First, let's process the post command on ourselves. If this command
* destroys this menu, or if there was an error, we are done.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 |
* Now, we go through structure and process all of the commands. Since the
* structure is changing, we stop after we do one command, and start over.
* When we get through without doing any, we are done.
*/
do {
finished = 1;
| | | 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 |
* Now, we go through structure and process all of the commands. Since the
* structure is changing, we stop after we do one command, and start over.
* When we get through without doing any, we are done.
*/
do {
finished = 1;
for (index = 0; index < menuPtr->numEntries; index++) {
TkMenuEntry *entryPtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
if ((entryPtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
&& (entryPtr->namePtr != NULL)
&& (entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
&& (entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr = entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkPreprocessMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr)
{
| | | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkPreprocessMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr)
{
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr =
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration++;
menuPtr->postCommandGeneration = tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration;
return PreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMain.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" | > | > > | | | | < | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 |
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(UNICODE) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD)
MODULE_SCOPE void TkCygwinMainEx(int, char **, Tcl_AppInitProc *, Tcl_Interp *);
#endif
/*
* The default prompt used when the user has not overridden it.
*/
static const char DEFAULT_PRIMARY_PROMPT[] = "% ";
static const char ENCODING_ERROR[] = "\n\t(encoding error in stderr)";
/*
* This file can be compiled on Windows in UNICODE mode, as well as on all
* other platforms using the native encoding. This is done by using the normal
* Windows functions like _tcscmp, but on platforms which don't have <tchar.h>
* we have to translate that to strcmp here.
*/
#ifdef _WIN32
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/* Little hack to eliminate the need for "tclInt.h" here:
Just copy a small portion of TclIntPlatStubs, just
enough to make it work. See [600b72bfbc] */
typedef struct {
int magic;
void *hooks;
void (*dummy[16]) (void); /* dummy entries 0-15, not used */
int (*tclpIsAtty) (int fd); /* 16 */
} TclIntPlatStubs;
extern const TclIntPlatStubs *tclIntPlatStubsPtr;
#ifdef __cplusplus
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 |
static inline Tcl_Obj *
NewNativeObj(
TCHAR *string)
{
Tcl_Obj *obj;
Tcl_DString ds;
| > | > | | | | 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 |
static inline Tcl_Obj *
NewNativeObj(
TCHAR *string)
{
Tcl_Obj *obj;
Tcl_DString ds;
const char *str;
#if defined(_WIN32) && defined(UNICODE)
Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
Tcl_WCharToUtfDString(string, wcslen(string), &ds);
str = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds);
#else
str = Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, (char *)string, strlen(string), &ds);
#endif
obj = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, Tcl_DStringLength(&ds));
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
return obj;
}
/*
* Declarations for various library functions and variables (don't want to
* include tclInt.h or tclPort.h here, because people might copy this file out
* of the Tk source directory to make their own modified versions). Note: do
* not declare "exit" here even though a declaration is really needed, because
* it will conflict with a declaration elsewhere on some systems.
*/
#if defined(_WIN32)
#define isatty WinIsTty
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 | || (GetFileType(handle) == FILE_TYPE_UNKNOWN) || (GetFileType(handle) == FILE_TYPE_CHAR); } #else extern int isatty(int fd); #endif | | | | > > > > > > | | < | < | | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 |
|| (GetFileType(handle) == FILE_TYPE_UNKNOWN)
|| (GetFileType(handle) == FILE_TYPE_CHAR);
}
#else
extern int isatty(int fd);
#endif
typedef struct {
Tcl_Channel input; /* The standard input channel from which lines
* are read. */
int tty; /* Non-zero means standard input is a
* terminal-like device. Zero means it's a
* file. */
Tcl_DString command; /* Used to assemble lines of terminal input
* into Tcl commands. */
Tcl_DString line; /* Used to read the next line from the
* terminal input. */
int gotPartial;
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter that evaluates interactive
* commands. */
} InteractiveState;
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file.
*/
static void Prompt(Tcl_Interp *interp, InteractiveState *isPtr);
static void StdinProc(void *clientData, int mask);
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_MainEx --
*
* Main program for Wish and most other Tk-based applications.
*
* Results:
* None. This function never returns (it exits the process when it's
* done).
*
* Side effects:
* This function initializes the Tk world and then starts interpreting
* commands; almost anything could happen, depending on the script being
* interpreted.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
TCL_NORETURN1 void
Tk_MainEx(
int argc, /* Number of arguments. */
TCHAR **argv, /* Array of argument strings. */
Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc,
/* Application-specific initialization
* function to call after most initialization
* but before starting to execute commands. */
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
int i=0; /* argv[i] index */
Tcl_Obj *path, *argvPtr, *appName;
const char *encodingName;
int code, nullStdin = 0;
Tcl_Channel chan;
InteractiveState is;
if (0 < argc) {
--argc; /* "consume" argv[0] */
++i;
}
/*
* Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl.
*/
if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.6", 0) == NULL) {
if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.1", 0) == NULL) {
abort();
} else {
Tcl_Panic("%s", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
}
}
#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(UNICODE) && !defined(STATIC_BUILD)
if (tclStubsPtr->reserved9) {
/* We are running win32 Tk under Cygwin, so let's check
* whether the env("DISPLAY") variable or the -display
* argument is set. If so, we really want to run the
* Tk_MainEx function of libtk8.?.dll, not this one. */
if (Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "env", "DISPLAY", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY)) {
loadCygwinTk:
TkCygwinMainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp);
/* Only returns when Tk_MainEx() was not found */
} else {
int j;
for (j = 1; j < argc; ++j) {
if (!strcmp(argv[j], "-display")) {
goto loadCygwinTk;
}
}
}
}
#endif
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
246 247 248 249 250 251 252 | * -encoding ENCODING FILENAME * or like * FILENAME * or like * -file FILENAME (ancient history support only) */ | > | | | | | | | | < < | | | 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 |
* -encoding ENCODING FILENAME
* or like
* FILENAME
* or like
* -file FILENAME (ancient history support only)
*/
/* mind argc is being adjusted as we proceed */
if ((argc >= 3) && (0 == _tcscmp(TEXT("-encoding"), argv[1]))
&& ('-' != argv[3][0])) {
Tcl_Obj *value = NewNativeObj(argv[2]);
Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[3]), Tcl_GetString(value));
Tcl_DecrRefCount(value);
argc -= 3;
i += 3;
} else if ((argc >= 1) && ('-' != argv[1][0])) {
Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[1]), NULL);
argc--;
i++;
} else if ((argc >= 2) && (length = _tcslen(argv[1]))
&& (length > 1) && (0 == _tcsncmp(TEXT("-file"), argv[1], length))
&& ('-' != argv[2][0])) {
Tcl_SetStartupScript(NewNativeObj(argv[2]), NULL);
argc -= 2;
i += 2;
}
}
path = Tcl_GetStartupScript(&encodingName);
if (path == NULL) {
appName = NewNativeObj(argv[0]);
} else {
appName = path;
}
Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argv0", NULL, appName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argc", NULL, Tcl_NewIntObj(argc), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
argvPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
while (argc--) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, argvPtr, NewNativeObj(argv[i++]));
}
Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "argv", NULL, argvPtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
/*
* Set the "tcl_interactive" variable.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 |
if (!is.tty) {
struct stat st;
nullStdin = fstat(0, &st) || (S_ISCHR(st.st_mode) && !st.st_blocks);
}
#endif
Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "tcl_interactive", NULL,
| | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 |
if (!is.tty) {
struct stat st;
nullStdin = fstat(0, &st) || (S_ISCHR(st.st_mode) && !st.st_blocks);
}
#endif
Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, "tcl_interactive", NULL,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(!path && (is.tty || nullStdin)), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
/*
* Invoke application-specific initialization.
*/
if (appInitProc(interp) != TCL_OK) {
TkpDisplayWarning(Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)),
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
398 399 400 401 402 403 404 | * Could be almost arbitrary, depending on the command that's typed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void StdinProc( | | | | > | | > > > > > > < < > | 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 |
* Could be almost arbitrary, depending on the command that's typed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
StdinProc(
void *clientData, /* The state of interactive cmd line */
int mask) /* Not used. */
{
char *cmd;
int code;
int length;
InteractiveState *isPtr = (InteractiveState *)clientData;
Tcl_Channel chan = isPtr->input;
Tcl_Interp *interp = isPtr->interp;
(void)mask;
length = Tcl_Gets(chan, &isPtr->line);
if ((length < 0) && !isPtr->gotPartial) {
if (isPtr->tty) {
/*
* Would be better to find a way to exit the mainLoop? Or perhaps
* evaluate [exit]? Leaving as is for now due to compatibility
* concerns.
*/
Tcl_Exit(0);
}
Tcl_DeleteChannelHandler(chan, StdinProc, isPtr);
return;
}
Tcl_DStringAppend(&isPtr->command, Tcl_DStringValue(&isPtr->line), -1);
cmd = Tcl_DStringAppend(&isPtr->command, "\n", -1);
Tcl_DStringFree(&isPtr->line);
if (!Tcl_CommandComplete(cmd)) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
437 438 439 440 441 442 443 |
* otherwise if the command re-enters the event loop we might process
* commands from stdin before the current command is finished. Among other
* things, this will trash the text of the command being evaluated.
*/
Tcl_CreateChannelHandler(chan, 0, StdinProc, isPtr);
code = Tcl_RecordAndEval(interp, cmd, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
| < | | | < | | > | | > > | | > > > | > > > > > > > > > | 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 |
* otherwise if the command re-enters the event loop we might process
* commands from stdin before the current command is finished. Among other
* things, this will trash the text of the command being evaluated.
*/
Tcl_CreateChannelHandler(chan, 0, StdinProc, isPtr);
code = Tcl_RecordAndEval(interp, cmd, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
isPtr->input = chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDIN);
if (chan != NULL) {
Tcl_CreateChannelHandler(chan, TCL_READABLE, StdinProc, isPtr);
}
Tcl_DStringFree(&isPtr->command);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDERR);
if (chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(chan, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)) < 0) {
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, ENCODING_ERROR, -1);
}
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, "\n", 1);
}
} else if (isPtr->tty) {
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDOUT);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(resultPtr);
(void)Tcl_GetStringFromObj(resultPtr, &length);
if ((length > 0) && (chan != NULL)) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(chan, resultPtr) < 0) {
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, "\n\t(encoding error in stdout)", -1);
}
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, "\n", 1);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultPtr);
}
/*
* If a tty stdin is still around, output a prompt.
*/
prompt:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
506 507 508 509 510 511 512 |
}
}
} else {
code = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, promptCmdPtr, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
"\n (script that generates prompt)");
| < | | | | | > | 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 |
}
}
} else {
code = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, promptCmdPtr, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
if (code != TCL_OK) {
Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
"\n (script that generates prompt)");
chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDERR);
if (chan != NULL) {
if (Tcl_WriteObj(chan, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)) < 0) {
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, ENCODING_ERROR, -1);
}
Tcl_WriteChars(chan, "\n", 1);
}
goto defaultPrompt;
}
}
chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDOUT);
if (chan != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenu.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 |
static const char *const menuStateStrings[] = {"active", "normal", "disabled", NULL};
static const char *const menuEntryTypeStrings[] = {
"cascade", "checkbutton", "command", "radiobutton", "separator", NULL
};
| < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 |
static const char *const menuStateStrings[] = {"active", "normal", "disabled", NULL};
static const char *const menuEntryTypeStrings[] = {
"cascade", "checkbutton", "command", "radiobutton", "separator", NULL
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, activeBorderPtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, activeFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-accelerator", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, accelPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, bitmapPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-columnbreak", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, columnBreak), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, commandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, compound), 0,
tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FONT,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, fontPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FG,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, fgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hidemargin", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_HIDE_MARGIN,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, hideMargin), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_IMAGE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, imagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_LABEL,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, labelPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, state),
0, menuStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, underline), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkCheckButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorOn), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_OFF_VALUE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, offValuePtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ON_VALUE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, onValuePtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, selectImagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_CHECK_VARIABLE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkRadioButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorOn), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, selectImagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_VALUE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, onValuePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_RADIO_VARIABLE,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkCascadeEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_MENU,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", NULL, NULL,
DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, state),
0, menuStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec *specsArray[] = {
tkCascadeEntryConfigSpecs, tkCheckButtonEntryConfigSpecs,
tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs, tkRadioButtonEntryConfigSpecs,
tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs, tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs
};
/*
* Menu type strings for use with Tcl_GetIndexFromObj.
*/
static const char *const menuTypeStrings[] = {
"normal", "tearoff", "menubar", NULL
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground",
"Foreground", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeBorderPtr), -1, 0,
(ClientData) DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-activeborderwidth", "activeBorderWidth",
"BorderWidth", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BORDER_WIDTH,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeBorderWidthPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground",
"Background", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeFgPtr), -1, 0,
(ClientData) DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_MENU_BG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, borderPtr), -1, 0,
(ClientData) DEF_MENU_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, borderWidthPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_MENU_CURSOR,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, cursorPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, disabledFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
(ClientData) DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_MENU_FONT, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, fontPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_MENU_FG, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, fgPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-postcommand", "postCommand", "Command",
DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, postCommandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_MENU_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, reliefPtr), -1, 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", "selectColor", "Background",
DEF_MENU_SELECT_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, indicatorFgPtr), -1, 0,
(ClientData) DEF_MENU_SELECT_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_MENU_TAKE_FOCUS,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, takeFocusPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-tearoff", "tearOff", "TearOff",
DEF_MENU_TEAROFF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, tearoff), 0, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tearoffcommand", "tearOffCommand",
"TearOffCommand", DEF_MENU_TEAROFF_CMD,
Tk_Offset(TkMenu, tearoffCommandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title",
DEF_MENU_TITLE, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, titlePtr), -1,
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, NULL, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-type", "type", "Type",
DEF_MENU_TYPE, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, menuTypePtr), -1,
0, menuTypeStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0}
};
/*
* Command line options. Put here because MenuCmd has to look at them along
* with MenuWidgetObjCmd.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
341 342 343 344 345 346 347 | static int ConfigureMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void DeleteMenuCloneEntries(TkMenu *menuPtr, int first, int last); static void DestroyMenuHashTable(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp); static void DestroyMenuInstance(TkMenu *menuPtr); | | | | | | < < | 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | static int ConfigureMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void DeleteMenuCloneEntries(TkMenu *menuPtr, int first, int last); static void DestroyMenuHashTable(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp); static void DestroyMenuInstance(TkMenu *menuPtr); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyMenuEntry; static int GetIndexFromCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, const char *string, int *indexPtr); static int MenuDoYPosition(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int MenuDoXPosition(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static int MenuAddOrInsert(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void MenuCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData); static TkMenuEntry * MenuNewEntry(TkMenu *menuPtr, int index, int type); static char * MenuVarProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1, const char *name2, int flags); static int MenuWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void MenuWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData); static int PostProcessEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr); static void RecursivelyDeleteMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr); static void UnhookCascadeEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr); static void TkMenuCleanup(ClientData unused); /* * The structure below is a list of procs that respond to certain window * manager events. One of these includes a font change, which forces the * geometry proc to be called. */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
409 410 411 412 413 414 415 |
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Tk_Window newWin;
TkMenu *menuPtr;
TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
| > | | 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 |
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
Tk_Window newWin;
TkMenu *menuPtr;
TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
int i;
int index, toplevel;
const char *windowName;
static const char *const typeStringList[] = {"-type", NULL};
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
455 456 457 458 459 460 461 |
memset(menuPtr, 0, sizeof(TkMenu));
menuPtr->tkwin = newWin;
menuPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
menuPtr->interp = interp;
menuPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), MenuWidgetObjCmd, menuPtr,
MenuCmdDeletedProc);
| | | | | 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 |
memset(menuPtr, 0, sizeof(TkMenu));
menuPtr->tkwin = newWin;
menuPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
menuPtr->interp = interp;
menuPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), MenuWidgetObjCmd, menuPtr,
MenuCmdDeletedProc);
menuPtr->active = -1;
menuPtr->cursorPtr = NULL;
menuPtr->masterMenuPtr = menuPtr;
menuPtr->menuType = UNKNOWN_TYPE;
TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr);
Tk_SetClass(menuPtr->tkwin, "Menu");
Tk_SetClassProcs(menuPtr->tkwin, &menuClass, menuPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|ActivateMask,
TkMenuEventProc, menuPtr);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, menuPtr->tkwin)
!= TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(menuPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
522 523 524 525 526 527 528 |
* points to this menu in a cascade entry, we have to clone the
* new menu and point the entry to the clone instead of the menu
* we are creating. Otherwise, ConfigureMenuEntry will hook up the
* platform-specific cascade linkages now that the menu we are
* creating exists.
*/
| | | | | 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 |
* points to this menu in a cascade entry, we have to clone the
* new menu and point the entry to the clone instead of the menu
* we are creating. Otherwise, ConfigureMenuEntry will hook up the
* platform-specific cascade linkages now that the menu we are
* creating exists.
*/
if ((menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr)
|| ((menuPtr->masterMenuPtr == menuPtr)
&& ((cascadeListPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr
== cascadeListPtr->menuPtr)))) {
newObjv[0] = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
newObjv[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin),-1);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadeListPtr, 2, newObjv);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
589 590 591 592 593 594 595 |
listtkwin = topLevelListPtr->tkwin;
TkSetWindowMenuBar(menuPtr->interp, listtkwin,
Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
topLevelListPtr = nextPtr;
}
}
| | | 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 |
listtkwin = topLevelListPtr->tkwin;
TkSetWindowMenuBar(menuPtr->interp, listtkwin,
Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
topLevelListPtr = nextPtr;
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(menuPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* MenuWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &option) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(menuPtr);
switch ((enum options) option) {
case MENU_ACTIVATE: {
| | | | | | 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 |
sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &option) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Preserve(menuPtr);
switch ((enum options) option) {
case MENU_ACTIVATE: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (menuPtr->active == index) {
goto done;
}
if ((index >= 0) && ((menuPtr->entries[index]->type==SEPARATOR_ENTRY)
|| (menuPtr->entries[index]->state == ENTRY_DISABLED))) {
index = -1;
}
result = TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index);
break;
}
case MENU_ADD:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?-option value ...?");
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
673 674 675 676 677 678 679 |
case MENU_CGET: {
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
goto error;
}
| | | | | < | < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | > | | | | | | 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 |
case MENU_CGET: {
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
goto error;
}
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, objv[2],
menuPtr->tkwin);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
break;
}
case MENU_CLONE:
if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "newMenuName ?menuType?");
goto error;
}
result = CloneMenu(menuPtr, objv[2], (objc == 3) ? NULL : objv[3]);
break;
case MENU_CONFIGURE: {
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
if (objc == 2) {
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, NULL,
menuPtr->tkwin);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
}
} else if (objc == 3) {
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, objv[2],
menuPtr->tkwin);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
}
} else {
result = ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2);
}
if (result != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
break;
}
case MENU_DELETE: {
int first, last;
if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "first ?last?");
goto error;
}
/*
* If 'first' explicitly refers to past the end of the menu, we don't
* do anything. [Bug 220950]
*/
if (isdigit(UCHAR(Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0]))
&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[2], &first) == TCL_OK) {
if (first >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
goto done;
}
} else if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp,menuPtr,objv[2],0,&first) != TCL_OK){
goto error;
}
if (objc == 3) {
last = first;
} else if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp,menuPtr,objv[3],0,&last) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (menuPtr->tearoff && (first == 0)) {
/*
* Sorry, can't delete the tearoff entry; must reconfigure the
* menu.
*/
first = 1;
}
if ((first == -1) || (last < first)) {
goto done;
}
DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last);
break;
}
case MENU_ENTRYCGET: {
int index;
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
if (objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index option");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index < 0) {
goto done;
}
mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
Tcl_Preserve(mePtr);
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mePtr,
mePtr->optionTable, objv[3], menuPtr->tkwin);
Tcl_Release(mePtr);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
break;
}
case MENU_ENTRYCONFIGURE: {
int index;
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index ?-option value ...?");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index < 0) {
goto done;
}
mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
Tcl_Preserve(mePtr);
if (objc == 3) {
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
mePtr->optionTable, NULL, menuPtr->tkwin);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
}
} else if (objc == 4) {
resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
mePtr->optionTable, objv[3], menuPtr->tkwin);
if (resultPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
}
} else {
result = ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index,
objc-3, objv+3);
}
Tcl_Release(mePtr);
break;
}
case MENU_INDEX: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("none", -1));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
}
break;
}
case MENU_INSERT:
if (objc < 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"index type ?-option value ...?");
goto error;
}
if (MenuAddOrInsert(interp,menuPtr,objv[2],objc-3,objv+3) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
break;
case MENU_INVOKE: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index < 0) {
goto done;
}
result = TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index);
break;
}
case MENU_POST: {
int x, y;
int index = -1;
if (objc != 4 && objc != 5) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y ?index?");
goto error;
}
if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
goto error;
}
if (objc == 5) {
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[4], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
}
/*
* Tearoff menus are the same as ordinary menus on the Mac and are
* posted differently on Windows than non-tearoffs. TkpPostMenu
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
908 909 910 911 912 913 914 |
result = TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y, index);
} else {
result = TkpPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y, index);
}
break;
}
case MENU_POSTCASCADE: {
| | | | | | | | 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 |
result = TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y, index);
} else {
result = TkpPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y, index);
}
break;
}
case MENU_POSTCASCADE: {
int index;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if ((index < 0) || (menuPtr->entries[index]->type != CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, NULL);
} else {
result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[index]);
}
break;
}
case MENU_TYPE: {
int index;
const char *typeStr;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
goto error;
}
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
if (index < 0) {
goto done;
}
if (menuPtr->entries[index]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
typeStr = "tearoff";
} else {
typeStr = menuEntryTypeStrings[menuPtr->entries[index]->type];
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
992 993 994 995 996 997 998 | * associated with that index. * * Results: * Standard Tcl result. * * Side effects: * Commands may get excecuted; variables may get set; sub-menus may get | | > > > > | > | > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | < > | > | 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 |
* associated with that index.
*
* Results:
* Standard Tcl result.
*
* Side effects:
* Commands may get excecuted; variables may get set; sub-menus may get
* posted, the passed menu may be destroyed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkInvokeMenu(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* The interp that the menu lives in. */
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* The menu we are invoking. */
/* Must be protected by Tcl_Preserve
* against freeing by the caller.
* Tk Bug [2d3a81c0].
*/
int index) /* The zero based index of the item we are
* invoking. */
{
int result = TCL_OK;
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
Tcl_Obj *commandPtr = NULL, *namePtr = NULL;
if (index < 0) {
goto done;
}
mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) {
goto done;
}
if (mePtr->commandPtr != NULL) {
commandPtr = mePtr->commandPtr;
Tcl_IncrRefCount(commandPtr);
}
if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) ||
(mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)) {
if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
namePtr = mePtr->namePtr;
Tcl_IncrRefCount(namePtr);
}
}
if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
Tcl_DString ds;
Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "tk::TearOffMenu ", -1);
Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), -1);
result = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
} else if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
&& (namePtr != NULL)) {
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED) {
valuePtr = mePtr->offValuePtr;
} else {
valuePtr = mePtr->onValuePtr;
}
if (valuePtr == NULL) {
valuePtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
Tcl_IncrRefCount(valuePtr);
if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, namePtr, NULL, valuePtr,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG) == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(valuePtr);
} else if ((mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)
&& (namePtr != NULL)) {
Tcl_Obj *valuePtr = mePtr->onValuePtr;
if (valuePtr == NULL) {
valuePtr = Tcl_NewObj();
}
Tcl_IncrRefCount(valuePtr);
if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, namePtr, NULL, valuePtr,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG) == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(valuePtr);
}
/*
* We check numEntries in addition to whether the menu entry has a command
* because that goes to zero if the menu gets deleted (e.g., during
* command evaluation).
*/
if ((menuPtr->numEntries != 0) && (result == TCL_OK)
&& (commandPtr != NULL)) {
result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, commandPtr, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
}
if (commandPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(commandPtr);
}
if (namePtr != NULL) {
Tcl_DecrRefCount(namePtr);
}
done:
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 |
if (TkFreeMenuReferences(menuPtr->menuRefPtr)) {
menuPtr->menuRefPtr = NULL;
}
for (; cascadePtr != NULL; cascadePtr = nextCascadePtr) {
nextCascadePtr = cascadePtr->nextCascadePtr;
| | | | 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 |
if (TkFreeMenuReferences(menuPtr->menuRefPtr)) {
menuPtr->menuRefPtr = NULL;
}
for (; cascadePtr != NULL; cascadePtr = nextCascadePtr) {
nextCascadePtr = cascadePtr->nextCascadePtr;
if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
Tcl_Obj *menuNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
parentMainMenuPtr = cascadePtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
parentMainEntryPtr =
parentMainMenuPtr->entries[cascadePtr->index];
newObjv[0] = menuNamePtr;
newObjv[1] = parentMainEntryPtr->namePtr;
/*
* It is possible that the menu info is out of sync, and these
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
}
} else {
ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadePtr, 0, NULL);
}
}
| | | | 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
}
} else {
ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadePtr, 0, NULL);
}
}
if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
for (menuInstancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
menuInstancePtr != NULL;
menuInstancePtr = menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
if (menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr == menuPtr) {
menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr =
menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr;
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 | /* * As each menu entry is deleted from the end of the array of entries, * decrement menuPtr->numEntries. Otherwise, the act of deleting menu * entry i will dereference freed memory attempting to queue a redraw * for menu entries (i+1)...numEntries. */ | | > > < | | | | | 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 |
/*
* As each menu entry is deleted from the end of the array of entries,
* decrement menuPtr->numEntries. Otherwise, the act of deleting menu
* entry i will dereference freed memory attempting to queue a redraw
* for menu entries (i+1)...numEntries.
*/
Tcl_EventuallyFree(menuPtr->entries[i], DestroyMenuEntry);
menuPtr->numEntries = i;
}
menuPtr->active = -1;
if (menuPtr->entries != NULL) {
ckfree(menuPtr->entries);
menuPtr->entries = NULL;
}
TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr);
Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) menuPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, menuPtr->tkwin);
if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
Tk_Window tkwin = menuPtr->tkwin;
menuPtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkDestroyMenu --
*
* This function is invoked to clean up the internal structure of a menu
* at a safe time (when no-one is using it anymore). If called on a main
* instance, destroys all of the instances. If called on a non-main
* instance, just destroys that instance.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
* Side effects:
* Everything associated with the menu is freed up.
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 |
topLevelListPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
while (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
nextTopLevelPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
TkpSetWindowMenuBar(topLevelListPtr->tkwin, NULL);
topLevelListPtr = nextTopLevelPtr;
}
}
| | | 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 |
topLevelListPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
while (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
nextTopLevelPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
TkpSetWindowMenuBar(topLevelListPtr->tkwin, NULL);
topLevelListPtr = nextTopLevelPtr;
}
}
if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr == menuPtr) {
while (menuPtr->nextInstancePtr != NULL) {
menuInstancePtr = menuPtr->nextInstancePtr;
menuPtr->nextInstancePtr = menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr;
if (menuInstancePtr->tkwin != NULL) {
Tk_Window tkwin = menuInstancePtr->tkwin;
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 | * Everything associated with the menu entry is freed. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyMenuEntry( | | | | | 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 |
* Everything associated with the menu entry is freed.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyMenuEntry(
char *memPtr) /* Pointer to entry to be freed. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *)memPtr;
TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
if (menuPtr->postedCascade == mePtr) {
/*
* Ignore errors while unposting the menu, since it's possible that
* the menu has already been deleted and the unpost will generate an
* error.
*/
TkPostSubmenu(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr, NULL);
}
/*
* Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
* Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
*/
if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
TkMenu *destroyThis = NULL;
TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr;
/*
* The menu as a whole is a clone. We must delete the clone of the
* cascaded menu for the particular entry we are destroying.
*/
if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
destroyThis = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
/*
* But only if it is a clone. What can happen is that we are
* in the middle of deleting a menu and this menu pointer has
* already been reset to point to the original menu. In that
* case we have nothing special to do.
*/
if ((destroyThis != NULL)
&& (destroyThis->masterMenuPtr == destroyThis)) {
destroyThis = NULL;
}
}
UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr);
menuRefPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr;
if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr == destroyThis) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 |
*/
static void
MenuWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *)instanceData;
| | | 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 |
*/
static void
MenuWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *)instanceData;
int i;
TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr);
for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(menuPtr->entries[i],
menuPtr->entries[i]->index);
TkpConfigureMenuEntry(menuPtr->entries[i]);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 |
{
int i;
TkMenu *menuListPtr, *cleanupPtr;
int result;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
| | | | | 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 |
{
int i;
TkMenu *menuListPtr, *cleanupPtr;
int result;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL;
menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
menuListPtr->errorStructPtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *)ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_SavedOptions));
result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) menuListPtr,
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable, objc, objv,
menuListPtr->tkwin, menuListPtr->errorStructPtr, NULL);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
for (cleanupPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
cleanupPtr != menuListPtr;
cleanupPtr = cleanupPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
ckfree(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr = NULL;
}
if (menuListPtr->errorStructPtr != NULL) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 |
* an initial tear-off entry at the beginning of the menu.
*/
if (menuListPtr->tearoff) {
if ((menuListPtr->numEntries == 0)
|| (menuListPtr->entries[0]->type != TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
if (MenuNewEntry(menuListPtr, 0, TEAROFF_ENTRY) == NULL) {
| | | | | | | 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 |
* an initial tear-off entry at the beginning of the menu.
*/
if (menuListPtr->tearoff) {
if ((menuListPtr->numEntries == 0)
|| (menuListPtr->entries[0]->type != TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
if (MenuNewEntry(menuListPtr, 0, TEAROFF_ENTRY) == NULL) {
for (cleanupPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
cleanupPtr != menuListPtr;
cleanupPtr = cleanupPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
ckfree(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr = NULL;
}
if (menuListPtr->errorStructPtr != NULL) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(menuListPtr->errorStructPtr);
ckfree(menuListPtr->errorStructPtr);
menuListPtr->errorStructPtr = NULL;
}
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
} else if ((menuListPtr->numEntries > 0)
&& (menuListPtr->entries[0]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
Tcl_EventuallyFree(menuListPtr->entries[0], DestroyMenuEntry);
for (i = 0; i < menuListPtr->numEntries - 1; i++) {
menuListPtr->entries[i] = menuListPtr->entries[i + 1];
menuListPtr->entries[i]->index = i;
}
if (--menuListPtr->numEntries == 0) {
ckfree(menuListPtr->entries);
menuListPtr->entries = NULL;
}
}
TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuListPtr);
/*
* After reconfiguring a menu, we need to reconfigure all of the
* entries in the menu, since some of the things in the children (such
* as graphics contexts) may have to change to reflect changes in the
* parent.
*/
for (i = 0; i < menuListPtr->numEntries; i++) {
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
mePtr = menuListPtr->entries[i];
ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, 0, NULL);
}
TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuListPtr);
}
for (cleanupPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; cleanupPtr != NULL;
cleanupPtr = cleanupPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
ckfree(cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr);
cleanupPtr->errorStructPtr = NULL;
}
return TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 |
* Tk_ConfigureWidget, such as special processing for defaults, sizing
* strings, graphics contexts, etc.
*/
if (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) {
mePtr->labelLength = 0;
} else {
| | | | 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 |
* Tk_ConfigureWidget, such as special processing for defaults, sizing
* strings, graphics contexts, etc.
*/
if (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) {
mePtr->labelLength = 0;
} else {
Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, &mePtr->labelLength);
}
if (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL) {
mePtr->accelLength = 0;
} else {
Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->accelPtr, &mePtr->accelLength);
}
/*
* If this is a cascade entry, the platform-specific data of the child
* menu has to be updated. Also, the links that point to parents and
* cascades have to be updated.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 |
Tcl_UntraceVar2(menuPtr->interp, name, NULL,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
MenuVarProc, mePtr);
}
result = TCL_OK;
if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
| | | 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 |
Tcl_UntraceVar2(menuPtr->interp, name, NULL,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
MenuVarProc, mePtr);
}
result = TCL_OK;
if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
if (Tk_SetOptions(menuPtr->interp, (char *) mePtr,
mePtr->optionTable, objc, objv, menuPtr->tkwin,
&errorStruct, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
result = PostProcessEntry(mePtr);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&errorStruct);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 | * mePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ConfigureMenuCloneEntries( | | < | | 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 |
* mePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting. */
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Information about whole menu. */
int index, /* Index of mePtr within menuPtr's entries. */
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
TkMenu *menuListPtr;
int cascadeEntryChanged = 0;
TkMenuReferences *oldCascadeMenuRefPtr, *cascadeMenuRefPtr = NULL;
Tcl_Obj *oldCascadePtr = NULL;
const char *newCascadeName;
/*
* Cascades are kind of tricky here. This is special case #3 in the
* comment at the top of this file. Basically, if a menu is the main
* menu of a clone chain, and has an entry with a cascade menu, the clones
* of the menu will point to clones of the cascade menu. We have to
* destroy the clones of the cascades, clone the new cascade menu, and
* configure the entry to point to the new clone.
*/
mePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->entries[index];
if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
oldCascadePtr = mePtr->namePtr;
if (oldCascadePtr != NULL) {
Tcl_IncrRefCount(oldCascadePtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 |
if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
newCascadeName = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
cascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
newCascadeName);
}
}
| | | 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 |
if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
newCascadeName = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
cascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
newCascadeName);
}
}
for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr;
menuListPtr != NULL;
menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
mePtr = menuListPtr->entries[index];
if (cascadeEntryChanged && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)) {
oldCascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 |
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
| | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < | | > < > > | | < > | > > > | > > > > > > > | > > | > > | > > > | | < < < | 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 |
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkGetMenuIndex --
*
* Parse a textual index into a menu and return the numerical index of
* the indicated entry.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
* with the entry index corresponding to string (ranges from -1 to the
* number of entries in the menu minus one). Otherwise an error message
* is left in the interp's result.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkGetMenuIndex(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* For error messages. */
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Menu for which the index is being
* specified. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* Specification of an entry in menu. See
* manual entry for valid .*/
int lastOK, /* Non-zero means its OK to return index just
* *after* last entry. */
int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted index. */
{
int i;
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
if ((string[0] == 'a') && (strcmp(string, "active") == 0)) {
*indexPtr = menuPtr->active;
return TCL_OK;
}
if (((string[0] == 'l') && (strcmp(string, "last") == 0))
|| ((string[0] == 'e') && (strcmp(string, "end") == 0))) {
*indexPtr = menuPtr->numEntries - ((lastOK) ? 0 : 1);
return TCL_OK;
}
if ((string[0] == '\0') ||
((string[0] == 'n') && (strcmp(string, "none") == 0))) {
*indexPtr = -1;
return TCL_OK;
}
if (string[0] == '@') {
if (GetIndexFromCoords(interp, menuPtr, string, indexPtr)
== TCL_OK) {
return TCL_OK;
}
}
if (isdigit(UCHAR(string[0]))) {
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objPtr, &i) == TCL_OK) {
if (i >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
if (lastOK) {
i = menuPtr->numEntries;
} else {
i = menuPtr->numEntries-1;
}
} else if (i < 0) {
i = -1;
}
*indexPtr = i;
return TCL_OK;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
}
for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
Tcl_Obj *labelPtr = menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr;
const char *label = (labelPtr == NULL) ? NULL : Tcl_GetString(labelPtr);
if ((label != NULL) && (Tcl_StringCaseMatch(label, string, 0))) {
*indexPtr = i;
return TCL_OK;
}
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad menu entry index \"%s\"", string));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MENU", "INDEX", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* MenuCmdDeletedProc --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static TkMenuEntry *
MenuNewEntry(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Menu that will hold the new entry. */
| | | | 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static TkMenuEntry *
MenuNewEntry(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Menu that will hold the new entry. */
int index, /* Where in the menu the new entry is to
* go. */
int type) /* The type of the new entry. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
TkMenuEntry **newEntries;
int i;
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
/*
* Create a new array of entries with an empty slot for the new entry.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 |
mePtr->namePtr = NULL;
mePtr->childMenuRefPtr = NULL;
mePtr->onValuePtr = NULL;
mePtr->offValuePtr = NULL;
mePtr->entryFlags = 0;
mePtr->index = index;
mePtr->nextCascadePtr = NULL;
| | | 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 |
mePtr->namePtr = NULL;
mePtr->childMenuRefPtr = NULL;
mePtr->onValuePtr = NULL;
mePtr->offValuePtr = NULL;
mePtr->entryFlags = 0;
mePtr->index = index;
mePtr->nextCascadePtr = NULL;
if (Tk_InitOptions(menuPtr->interp, (char *) mePtr,
mePtr->optionTable, menuPtr->tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
ckfree(mePtr);
return NULL;
}
TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr);
if (TkpMenuNewEntry(mePtr) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) mePtr, mePtr->optionTable,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 |
Tcl_Obj *indexPtr, /* Object describing index at which to insert.
* NULL means insert at end. */
int objc, /* Number of elements in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments to command: first arg is type of
* entry, others are config options. */
{
int type;
| | | | | | | | | < | 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 |
Tcl_Obj *indexPtr, /* Object describing index at which to insert.
* NULL means insert at end. */
int objc, /* Number of elements in objv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Arguments to command: first arg is type of
* entry, others are config options. */
{
int type;
int index;
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
TkMenu *menuListPtr;
if (indexPtr != NULL) {
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, 1, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
} else {
index = menuPtr->numEntries;
}
if (index < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad index \"%s\"", Tcl_GetString(indexPtr)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "MENU", "INDEX", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (menuPtr->tearoff && (index == 0)) {
index = 1;
}
/*
* Figure out the type of the new entry.
*/
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[0], menuEntryTypeStrings,
sizeof(char *), "menu entry type", 0, &type) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Now we have to add an entry for every instance related to this menu.
*/
for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL;
menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
mePtr = MenuNewEntry(menuListPtr, index, type);
if (mePtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc - 1, objv + 1) != TCL_OK) {
TkMenu *errorMenuPtr;
int i;
for (errorMenuPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
errorMenuPtr != NULL;
errorMenuPtr = errorMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
Tcl_EventuallyFree(errorMenuPtr->entries[index], DestroyMenuEntry);
for (i = index; i < errorMenuPtr->numEntries - 1; i++) {
errorMenuPtr->entries[i] = errorMenuPtr->entries[i + 1];
errorMenuPtr->entries[i]->index = i;
}
if (--errorMenuPtr->numEntries == 0) {
ckfree(errorMenuPtr->entries);
errorMenuPtr->entries = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 |
*/
if ((menuPtr != menuListPtr) && (type == CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
if ((mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr =
| | | 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 |
*/
if ((menuPtr != menuListPtr) && (type == CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
if ((mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr =
mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
Tcl_Obj *newCascadePtr, *newObjv[2];
Tcl_Obj *menuNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr =
Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(menuListPtr->tkwin), -1);
Tcl_Obj *normalPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("normal", -1);
TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 |
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable's name. */
int flags) /* Describes what just happened. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *)clientData;
TkMenu *menuPtr;
const char *value;
const char *name, *onValue;
| < < | 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 |
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable's name. */
int flags) /* Describes what just happened. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *)clientData;
TkMenu *menuPtr;
const char *value;
const char *name, *onValue;
if (Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp) || (mePtr->namePtr == NULL)) {
/*
* Do nothing if the interpreter is going away or we have
* no variable name.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkActivateMenuEntry(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Menu in which to activate. */
| | | | | | 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkActivateMenuEntry(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Menu in which to activate. */
int index) /* Index of entry to activate, or -1 to
* deactivate all entries. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
int result = TCL_OK;
if (menuPtr->active >= 0) {
mePtr = menuPtr->entries[menuPtr->active];
/*
* Don't change the state unless it's currently active (state might
* already have been changed to disabled).
*/
if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE) {
mePtr->state = ENTRY_NORMAL;
}
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[menuPtr->active]);
}
menuPtr->active = index;
if (index >= 0) {
mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
mePtr->state = ENTRY_ACTIVE;
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr);
}
return result;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 |
CloneMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* The menu we are going to clone. */
Tcl_Obj *newMenuNamePtr, /* The name to give the new menu. */
Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypePtr) /* What kind of menu is this, a normal menu a
* menubar, or a tearoff? */
{
int returnResult;
| | > | 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 |
CloneMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* The menu we are going to clone. */
Tcl_Obj *newMenuNamePtr, /* The name to give the new menu. */
Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypePtr) /* What kind of menu is this, a normal menu a
* menubar, or a tearoff? */
{
int returnResult;
int menuType;
int i;
TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
Tcl_Obj *menuDupCommandArray[4];
if (newMenuTypePtr == NULL) {
menuType = MAIN_MENU;
} else {
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(menuPtr->interp, newMenuTypePtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 |
/*
* Now put this newly created menu into the parent menu's instance
* chain.
*/
if (menuPtr->nextInstancePtr == NULL) {
menuPtr->nextInstancePtr = newMenuPtr;
| | | | | | | | 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 |
/*
* Now put this newly created menu into the parent menu's instance
* chain.
*/
if (menuPtr->nextInstancePtr == NULL) {
menuPtr->nextInstancePtr = newMenuPtr;
newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
} else {
TkMenu *masterMenuPtr;
masterMenuPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
newMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr = masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr;
masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr = newMenuPtr;
newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr = masterMenuPtr;
}
/*
* Add the main menu's window to the bind tags for this window after
* this window's tag. This is so the user can bind to either this
* clone (which may not be easy to do) or the entire menu clone
* structure.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 |
for (i = 0; i < numElements; i++) {
Tcl_ListObjIndex(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, i,
&elementPtr);
windowName = Tcl_GetString(elementPtr);
if (strcmp(windowName, Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin))
== 0) {
Tcl_Obj *newElementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
| | | 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 |
for (i = 0; i < numElements; i++) {
Tcl_ListObjIndex(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, i,
&elementPtr);
windowName = Tcl_GetString(elementPtr);
if (strcmp(windowName, Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin))
== 0) {
Tcl_Obj *newElementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
/*
* The newElementPtr will have its refCount incremented
* here, so we don't need to worry about it any more.
*/
Tcl_ListObjReplace(menuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 | Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]); Tcl_ResetResult(menuPtr->interp); /* * Clone all of the cascade menus that this menu points to. */ | | | 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
Tcl_ResetResult(menuPtr->interp);
/*
* Clone all of the cascade menus that this menu points to.
*/
for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
TkMenuReferences *cascadeRefPtr;
TkMenu *oldCascadePtr;
if ((menuPtr->entries[i]->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
&& (menuPtr->entries[i]->namePtr != NULL)) {
cascadeRefPtr =
TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp,
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 |
static int
MenuDoXPosition(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
TkMenu *menuPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
{
| | | | | | | 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 |
static int
MenuDoXPosition(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
TkMenu *menuPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
{
int index;
TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (index < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(0));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(menuPtr->entries[index]->x));
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 |
static int
MenuDoYPosition(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
TkMenu *menuPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
{
| | | | | | | 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 |
static int
MenuDoYPosition(
Tcl_Interp *interp,
TkMenu *menuPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
{
int index;
TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
if (index < 0) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(0));
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(menuPtr->entries[index]->y));
}
return TCL_OK;
error:
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 | * * Side effects: * If int is invalid, interp's result will be set to NULL. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | > | > > > | | 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 |
*
* Side effects:
* If int is invalid, interp's result will be set to NULL.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
GetIndexFromCoords(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter of menu. */
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* The menu we are searching. */
const char *string, /* The @string we are parsing. */
int *indexPtr) /* The index of the item that matches. */
{
int x, y;
int i;
const char *p;
char *end;
int x2, borderwidth, max;
TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
p = string + 1;
y = strtol(p, &end, 0);
if (end == p) {
goto error;
}
Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, menuPtr->tkwin,
menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderwidth);
if (*end == ',') {
x = y;
p = end + 1;
y = strtol(p, &end, 0);
if ((end == p) || (*end != '\0')) {
goto error;
}
} else {
if (*end != '\0') {
goto error;
}
x = borderwidth;
}
*indexPtr = -1;
/* set the width of the final column to the remainder of the window
* being aware of windows that may not be mapped yet.
*/
max = Tk_IsMapped(menuPtr->tkwin)
? Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) : Tk_ReqWidth(menuPtr->tkwin);
max -= borderwidth;
for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
if (menuPtr->entries[i]->entryFlags & ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN) {
x2 = max;
} else {
x2 = menuPtr->entries[i]->x + menuPtr->entries[i]->width;
}
if ((x >= menuPtr->entries[i]->x) && (y >= menuPtr->entries[i]->y)
&& (x < x2)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
RecursivelyDeleteMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr) /* The menubar instance we are deleting. */
{
| | | 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
RecursivelyDeleteMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr) /* The menubar instance we are deleting. */
{
int i;
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
/*
* It is not 100% clear that this preserve/release pair is required, but
* we have added them for safety in this very complex code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultPtr);
resultPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(parentPtr);
if (doDot) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, ".", -1);
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(resultPtr, childPtr);
| | | 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 |
Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultPtr);
resultPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(parentPtr);
if (doDot) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, ".", -1);
}
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(resultPtr, childPtr);
intPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(i);
Tcl_AppendObjToObj(resultPtr, intPtr);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(intPtr);
}
destString = Tcl_GetString(resultPtr);
if ((Tcl_FindCommand(interp, destString, NULL, 0) == NULL)
&& ((nameTablePtr == NULL)
|| (Tcl_FindHashEntry(nameTablePtr, destString) == NULL))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 |
*/
if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL) {
TkMenu *instancePtr;
menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
| | | 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 |
*/
if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL) {
TkMenu *instancePtr;
menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
for (instancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
instancePtr != NULL;
instancePtr = instancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
if (instancePtr->menuType == MENUBAR
&& instancePtr->parentTopLevelPtr == tkwin) {
RecursivelyDeleteMenu(instancePtr);
break;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyMenuHashTable(
ClientData clientData, /* The menu hash table we are destroying. */
| | < < | 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyMenuHashTable(
ClientData clientData, /* The menu hash table we are destroying. */
Tcl_Interp *interp) /* The interpreter we are destroying. */
{
Tcl_DeleteHashTable((Tcl_HashTable *)clientData);
ckfree(clientData);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 |
* entries to delete. */
int last) /* The zero-based last entry. */
{
TkMenu *menuListPtr;
int numDeleted, i, j;
numDeleted = last + 1 - first;
| | | | | | | | | | < < | 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 |
* entries to delete. */
int last) /* The zero-based last entry. */
{
TkMenu *menuListPtr;
int numDeleted, i, j;
numDeleted = last + 1 - first;
for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL;
menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
for (i = last; i >= first; i--) {
Tcl_EventuallyFree(menuListPtr->entries[i], DestroyMenuEntry);
}
for (i = last + 1; i < menuListPtr->numEntries; i++) {
j = i - numDeleted;
menuListPtr->entries[j] = menuListPtr->entries[i];
menuListPtr->entries[j]->index = j;
}
menuListPtr->numEntries -= numDeleted;
if (menuListPtr->numEntries == 0) {
ckfree(menuListPtr->entries);
menuListPtr->entries = NULL;
}
if ((menuListPtr->active >= first)
&& (menuListPtr->active <= last)) {
menuListPtr->active = -1;
} else if (menuListPtr->active > last) {
menuListPtr->active -= numDeleted;
}
TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuListPtr);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkMenuCleanup --
*
* Resets menusInitialized to allow Tk to be finalized and reused without
* the DLL being unloaded.
*
* Results:
* None.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
TkMenuCleanup(
ClientData unused)
{
menusInitialized = 0;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkMenuInit --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 | menusInitialized = 1; } /* * Make sure we cleanup on finalize. */ | | | 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 |
menusInitialized = 1;
}
/*
* Make sure we cleanup on finalize.
*/
TkCreateExitHandler((Tcl_ExitProc *) TkMenuCleanup, NULL);
Tcl_MutexUnlock(&menuMutex);
}
if (!tsdPtr->menusInitialized) {
TkpMenuThreadInit();
tsdPtr->menuOptionTable =
Tk_CreateOptionTable(NULL, tkMenuConfigSpecs);
tsdPtr->entryOptionTables[TEAROFF_ENTRY] =
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenu.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | /* * tkMenu.h -- * * Declarations shared among all of the files that implement menu * widgets. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | /* * tkMenu.h -- * * Declarations shared among all of the files that implement menu * widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKMENU #define _TKMENU |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 |
int type; /* Type of menu entry; see below for valid
* types. */
struct TkMenu *menuPtr; /* Menu with which this entry is
* associated. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable; /* Option table for this menu entry. */
Tcl_Obj *labelPtr; /* Main text label displayed in entry (NULL if
* no label). */
| | | | | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 |
int type; /* Type of menu entry; see below for valid
* types. */
struct TkMenu *menuPtr; /* Menu with which this entry is
* associated. */
Tk_OptionTable optionTable; /* Option table for this menu entry. */
Tcl_Obj *labelPtr; /* Main text label displayed in entry (NULL if
* no label). */
int labelLength; /* Number of non-NULL characters in label. */
int state; /* State of button for display purposes:
* normal, active, or disabled. */
int underline; /* Value of -underline option: specifies index
* of character to underline (<0 means don't
* underline anything). */
Tcl_Obj *underlinePtr; /* Index of character to underline. */
Tcl_Obj *bitmapPtr; /* Bitmap to display in menu entry, or NULL.
* If not NULL then label is ignored. */
Tcl_Obj *imagePtr; /* Name of image to display, or NULL. If not
* NULL, bitmap, text, and textVarName are
* ignored. */
Tk_Image image; /* Image to display in menu entry, or NULL if
* none. */
Tcl_Obj *selectImagePtr; /* Name of image to display when selected, or
* NULL. */
Tk_Image selectImage; /* Image to display in entry when selected, or
* NULL if none. Ignored if image is NULL. */
Tcl_Obj *accelPtr; /* Accelerator string displayed at right of
* menu entry. NULL means no such accelerator.
* Malloc'ed. */
int accelLength; /* Number of non-NULL characters in
* accelerator. */
int indicatorOn; /* True means draw indicator, false means
* don't draw it. This field is ignored unless
* the entry is a radio or check button. */
/*
* Display attributes
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 |
Display *display; /* Display containing widget. Needed, among
* other things, so that resources can be
* freed up even after tkwin has gone away. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter associated with menu. */
Tcl_Command widgetCmd; /* Token for menu's widget command. */
TkMenuEntry **entries; /* Array of pointers to all the entries in the
* menu. NULL means no entries. */
| | | | | 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 |
Display *display; /* Display containing widget. Needed, among
* other things, so that resources can be
* freed up even after tkwin has gone away. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter associated with menu. */
Tcl_Command widgetCmd; /* Token for menu's widget command. */
TkMenuEntry **entries; /* Array of pointers to all the entries in the
* menu. NULL means no entries. */
int numEntries; /* Number of elements in entries. */
int active; /* Index of active entry. -1 means nothing
* active. */
int menuType; /* MAIN_MENU, TEAROFF_MENU, or MENUBAR. See
* below for definitions. */
Tcl_Obj *menuTypePtr; /* Used to control whether created tkwin is a
* toplevel or not. "normal", "menubar", or
* "toplevel" */
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 |
* definition. */
TkMenuEntry *postedCascade; /* Points to menu entry for cascaded submenu
* that is currently posted or NULL if no
* submenu posted. */
struct TkMenu *nextInstancePtr;
/* The next instance of this menu in the
* chain. */
| | | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 |
* definition. */
TkMenuEntry *postedCascade; /* Points to menu entry for cascaded submenu
* that is currently posted or NULL if no
* submenu posted. */
struct TkMenu *nextInstancePtr;
/* The next instance of this menu in the
* chain. */
struct TkMenu *masterMenuPtr;
/* A pointer to the original menu for this
* clone chain. Points back to this structure
* if this menu is a main menu. */
void *reserved1; /* not used any more. */
Tk_Window parentTopLevelPtr;/* If this menu is a menubar, this is the
* toplevel that owns the menu. Only
* applicable for menubar clones. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
374 375 376 377 378 379 380 |
* of options are in this structure. */
Tk_OptionSpec *extensionPtr;/* Needed by the configuration package for
* this widget to be extended. */
Tk_SavedOptions *errorStructPtr;
/* We actually have to allocate these because
* multiple menus get changed during one
* ConfigureMenu call. */
| < | 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 |
* of options are in this structure. */
Tk_OptionSpec *extensionPtr;/* Needed by the configuration package for
* this widget to be extended. */
Tk_SavedOptions *errorStructPtr;
/* We actually have to allocate these because
* multiple menus get changed during one
* ConfigureMenu call. */
} TkMenu;
/*
* When the toplevel configure -menu command is executed, the menu may not
* exist yet. We need to keep a linked list of windows that reference a
* particular menu.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | * configuration information. If the main instance is deleted, all instances * are deleted. If one of the other instances is deleted, only that instance * is deleted. */ #define UNKNOWN_TYPE -1 #define MAIN_MENU 0 #define TEAROFF_MENU 1 #define MENUBAR 2 /* * Various geometry definitions: */ #define CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT 10 #define CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH 8 #define DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH 2 /* * Menu-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported to * the outside world: */ | > | > > | | | | 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 |
* configuration information. If the main instance is deleted, all instances
* are deleted. If one of the other instances is deleted, only that instance
* is deleted.
*/
#define UNKNOWN_TYPE -1
#define MAIN_MENU 0
#define MASTER_MENU 0
#define TEAROFF_MENU 1
#define MENUBAR 2
/*
* Various geometry definitions:
*/
#define CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT 10
#define CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH 8
#define DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH 2
/*
* Menu-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported to
* the outside world:
*/
MODULE_SCOPE int TkActivateMenuEntry(TkMenu *menuPtr, int index);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkBindMenu(Tk_Window tkwin, TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkCreateMenuReferences(Tcl_Interp *interp,
const char *name);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkDestroyMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr,
TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkFindMenuReferences(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name);
MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkFindMenuReferencesObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *namePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkFreeMenuReferences(TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_HashTable *TkGetMenuHashTable(Tcl_Interp *interp);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkGetMenuIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int lastOK, int *indexPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkInvokeMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
int index);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int index);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuEventProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int imgWidth,
int imgHeight);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuInit(void);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkMenuSelectImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x,
int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
int imgHeight);
MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj * TkNewMenuName(Tcl_Interp *interp,
Tcl_Obj *parentNamePtr, TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkPostCommand(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkPostSubmenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkPostTearoffMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
int x, int y);
MODULE_SCOPE int TkPreprocessMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
MODULE_SCOPE void TkRecomputeMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
/*
* These routines are the platform-dependent routines called by the common
* code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
536 537 538 539 540 541 542 | int drawingParameters); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpMenuInit(void); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpMenuNewEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpNewMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpPostMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, int x, int y, int index); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpPostTearoffMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, | | | 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 | int drawingParameters); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpMenuInit(void); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpMenuNewEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpNewMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpPostMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, int x, int y, int index); MODULE_SCOPE int TkpPostTearoffMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, int x, int y, int index); MODULE_SCOPE void TkpSetWindowMenuBar(Tk_Window tkwin, TkMenu *menuPtr); #endif /* _TKMENU */ |
Changes to generic/tkMenuDraw.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | /* * tkMenuDraw.c -- * * This module implements the platform-independent drawing and geometry * calculations of menu widgets. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | /* * tkMenuDraw.c -- * * This module implements the platform-independent drawing and geometry * calculations of menu widgets. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkMenu.h" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
294 295 296 297 298 299 300 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
| | | 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 |
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
int index)
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC newGC, newActiveGC, newDisabledGC, newIndicatorGC;
unsigned long mask;
Tk_Font tkfont;
TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
483 484 485 486 487 488 489 |
void
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Information about menu to redraw. */
TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Entry to redraw. NULL means redraw all the
* entries in the menu. */
{
| | | 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 |
void
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(
TkMenu *menuPtr, /* Information about menu to redraw. */
TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Entry to redraw. NULL means redraw all the
* entries in the menu. */
{
int i;
if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if (mePtr != NULL) {
mePtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_NEEDS_REDISPLAY;
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
526 527 528 529 530 531 532 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ComputeMenuGeometry(
ClientData clientData) /* Structure describing menu. */
{
| | | 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
ComputeMenuGeometry(
ClientData clientData) /* Structure describing menu. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = clientData;
if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
return;
}
if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
TkpComputeMenubarGeometry(menuPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
582 583 584 585 586 587 588 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
* <=0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
| | < < < < < < | 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
* <=0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkMenuEntry *mePtr = clientData;
if ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)
&& !(mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMenu, mePtr->menuPtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
617 618 619 620 621 622 623 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayMenu(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about widget. */
{
| | < | | 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayMenu(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about widget. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = clientData;
TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
Tk_Window tkwin = menuPtr->tkwin;
int index, strictMotif;
Tk_Font tkfont;
Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics;
int width;
int borderWidth;
Tk_3DBorder border;
int relief;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
762 763 764 765 766 767 768 |
*/
void
TkMenuEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
| | | 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 |
*/
void
TkMenuEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = clientData;
if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
} else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
} else if (eventPtr->type == ActivateNotify) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
827 828 829 830 831 832 833 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
* <=0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
| | < < < < < < | 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
* <=0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkMenu *menuPtr = ((TkMenuEntry *) clientData)->menuPtr;
if ((menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
menuPtr->menuFlags |= RESIZE_PENDING;
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ComputeMenuGeometry, menuPtr);
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 |
Tk_GetRootCoords(menuPtr->tkwin, &x, &y);
AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, &x, &y);
menuPtr->postedCascade = mePtr;
subary[0] = mePtr->namePtr;
subary[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj("post", -1);
| | | | 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 |
Tk_GetRootCoords(menuPtr->tkwin, &x, &y);
AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, &x, &y);
menuPtr->postedCascade = mePtr;
subary[0] = mePtr->namePtr;
subary[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj("post", -1);
subary[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x);
subary[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[1]);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[2]);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[3]);
result = Tcl_EvalObjv(interp, 4, subary, 0);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[1]);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[2]);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[3]);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenubutton.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkMenubutton.h"
/*
* The structure below defines menubutton class behavior by means of
* procedures that can be invoked from generic window code.
*/
static const Tk_ClassProcs menubuttonClass = {
| > | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 |
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "tkInt.h"
#include "tkMenubutton.h"
#include "default.h"
/*
* The structure below defines menubutton class behavior by means of
* procedures that can be invoked from generic window code.
*/
static const Tk_ClassProcs menubuttonClass = {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 |
* is used together with the "enum direction" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
*/
static const char *const directionStrings[] = {
"above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", NULL
};
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 |
* is used together with the "enum direction" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
*/
static const char *const directionStrings[] = {
"above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", NULL
};
/*
* Information used for parsing configuration specs:
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeBorder), 0,
(ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeFg),
0, DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalBorder),
0, DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1,
0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1,
0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, bitmap),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, direction),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, directionStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
"DisabledForeground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
(ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, -1,
0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, heightString),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, imageString),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, indicatorOn),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, menuName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padX),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padY),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, relief),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, compound),
0, tkCompoundStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, state),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, tkStateStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, takeFocus), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, text), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1,
Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, textVarName), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, underline),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, widthString),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, wrapLength),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, NULL, 0}
};
/*
* The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the
* indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd( | | < | 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* NULL. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window tkwin;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
304 305 306 307 308 309 310 |
mbPtr->takeFocus = NULL;
mbPtr->flags = 0;
Tk_CreateEventHandler(mbPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
MenuButtonEventProc, mbPtr);
| | | | 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 |
mbPtr->takeFocus = NULL;
mbPtr->flags = 0;
Tk_CreateEventHandler(mbPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
MenuButtonEventProc, mbPtr);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) mbPtr, optionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(mbPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(mbPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(mbPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
343 344 345 346 347 348 349 |
static int
MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
| | | 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 |
static int
MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = clientData;
int result, index;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
365 366 367 368 369 370 371 |
switch (index) {
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
goto error;
}
| | | | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 |
switch (index) {
case COMMAND_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
goto error;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
mbPtr->optionTable, objv[2], mbPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
break;
case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
mbPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
mbPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
goto error;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
520 521 522 523 524 525 526 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
| | | 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 |
for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
if (!error) {
/*
* First pass: set options to new values.
*/
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
mbPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
mbPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
} else {
/*
* Second pass: restore options to old values.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
629 630 631 632 633 634 635 |
if (value == NULL) {
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, NULL, mbPtr->text,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
} else {
if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
ckfree(mbPtr->text);
}
| | | 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 |
if (value == NULL) {
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, NULL, mbPtr->text,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
} else {
if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
ckfree(mbPtr->text);
}
mbPtr->text = ckalloc(strlen(value) + 1);
strcpy(mbPtr->text, value);
}
Tcl_TraceVar2(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, NULL,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
MenuButtonTextVarProc, mbPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
671 672 673 674 675 676 677 |
void
TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc;
unsigned long mask;
| | | 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 |
void
TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc;
unsigned long mask;
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = instanceData;
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(mbPtr->tkfont);
gcValues.foreground = mbPtr->normalFg->pixel;
gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(mbPtr->normalBorder)->pixel;
/*
* Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in GC's because they're used
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
772 773 774 775 776 777 778 |
*/
static void
MenuButtonEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
| | | 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 |
*/
static void
MenuButtonEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = clientData;
if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
goto redraw;
} else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
/*
* Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and
* borders will need to be redrawn.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
831 832 833 834 835 836 837 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
| | | 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = mbPtr->tkwin;
/*
* This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
* and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
* because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
* widget.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 |
* Side effects:
* The text displayed in the menu button will change to match the
* variable.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static char *
MenuButtonTextVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
| > | | < < | 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 |
* Side effects:
* The text displayed in the menu button will change to match the
* variable.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static char *
MenuButtonTextVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = clientData;
const char *value;
unsigned len;
/*
* If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
* interpreter is going away.
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
921 922 923 924 925 926 927 |
value = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
if (value == NULL) {
value = "";
}
if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
ckfree(mbPtr->text);
}
| | | | 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 |
value = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
if (value == NULL) {
value = "";
}
if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
ckfree(mbPtr->text);
}
len = 1 + (unsigned) strlen(value);
mbPtr->text = ckalloc(len);
memcpy(mbPtr->text, value, len);
TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr);
if ((mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) && Tk_IsMapped(mbPtr->tkwin)
&& !(mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, mbPtr);
mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
961 962 963 964 965 966 967 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
* 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
| | < < < < < < | 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 |
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int x, int y, /* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
* be redisplayed. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
* 0). */
int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
{
TkMenuButton *mbPtr = clientData;
if (mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr);
if (Tk_IsMapped(mbPtr->tkwin) && !(mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, mbPtr);
mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMenubutton.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | /* * tkMenubutton.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions used to implement the menubutton * widget. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | /* * tkMenubutton.h -- * * Declarations of types and functions used to implement the menubutton * widget. * * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKMENUBUTTON #define _TKMENUBUTTON |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
161 162 163 164 165 166 167 |
* whether the menubutton should show both an
* image and text, and, if so, how. */
enum direction direction; /* Direction for where to pop the menu. Valid
* directions are "above", "below", "left",
* "right", and "flush". "flush" means that
* the upper left corner of the menubutton is
* where the menu pops up. "above" and "below"
| | | 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 |
* whether the menubutton should show both an
* image and text, and, if so, how. */
enum direction direction; /* Direction for where to pop the menu. Valid
* directions are "above", "below", "left",
* "right", and "flush". "flush" means that
* the upper left corner of the menubutton is
* where the menu pops up. "above" and "below"
* will attempt to pop the menu completely
* above or below the menu respectively.
* "left" and "right" will pop the menu left
* or right, and the active item will be next
* to the button. */
Tk_Cursor cursor; /* Current cursor for window, or NULL. */
char *takeFocus; /* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
* C code, but used by keyboard traversal
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkMessage.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | /* * tkMessage.c -- * * This module implements a message widgets for the Tk toolkit. A message * widget displays a multi-line string in a window according to a * particular aspect ratio. * * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 |
/*
* tkMessage.c --
*
* This module implements a message widgets for the Tk toolkit. A message
* widget displays a multi-line string in a window according to a
* particular aspect ratio.
*
* Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#include "default.h"
#include "tkInt.h"
/*
* A data structure of the following type is kept for each message widget
* managed by this file:
*/
typedef struct {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 |
/*
* Information used for argv parsing.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", DEF_MESSAGE_ANCHOR,
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 |
/*
* Information used for argv parsing.
*/
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", DEF_MESSAGE_ANCHOR,
-1, Tk_Offset(Message, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_INT, "-aspect", "aspect", "Aspect", DEF_MESSAGE_ASPECT,
-1, Tk_Offset(Message, aspect), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, border), 0,
DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL,
0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL,
0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_MESSAGE_BORDER_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Message, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL,
0, -1, 0, "-foreground", 0},
{TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
DEF_MESSAGE_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
DEF_MESSAGE_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
"HighlightBackground", DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1,
Tk_Offset(Message, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, highlightColorPtr),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
"HighlightThickness", DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
Tk_Offset(Message, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, justify), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
DEF_MESSAGE_PADX, Tk_Offset(Message, padXPtr),
Tk_Offset(Message, padX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
DEF_MESSAGE_PADY, Tk_Offset(Message, padYPtr),
Tk_Offset(Message, padY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, takeFocus),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, string), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, textVarName),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, width), 0, 0 ,0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static void MessageCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
static void MessageEventProc(ClientData clientData,
XEvent *eventPtr);
static char * MessageTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
const char *name2, int flags);
static int MessageWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static void MessageWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
static void ComputeMessageGeometry(Message *msgPtr);
static int ConfigureMessage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Message *msgPtr,
int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
static void DestroyMessage(char *memPtr);
static void DisplayMessage(ClientData clientData);
/*
* The structure below defines message class behavior by means of functions
* that can be invoked from generic window code.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 | * See the user documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_MessageObjCmd( | | < | | | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 |
* See the user documentation.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
Tk_MessageObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* NULL. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
Message *msgPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
Tk_Window tkwin;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
if (tkwin == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
* created, the cached pointer will be returned.
*/
optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
msgPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(Message));
memset(msgPtr, 0, (size_t) sizeof(Message));
/*
* Set values for those fields that don't take a 0 or NULL value.
*/
msgPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
msgPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
264 265 266 267 268 269 270 |
msgPtr->cursor = NULL;
Tk_SetClass(msgPtr->tkwin, "Message");
Tk_SetClassProcs(msgPtr->tkwin, &messageClass, msgPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(msgPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
MessageEventProc, msgPtr);
| | | | 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 |
msgPtr->cursor = NULL;
Tk_SetClass(msgPtr->tkwin, "Message");
Tk_SetClassProcs(msgPtr->tkwin, &messageClass, msgPtr);
Tk_CreateEventHandler(msgPtr->tkwin,
ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
MessageEventProc, msgPtr);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)msgPtr, optionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(msgPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(msgPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(msgPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* MessageWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 |
static int
MessageWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about message widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
| | | 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 |
static int
MessageWidgetObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about message widget. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
Message *msgPtr = clientData;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = { "cget", "configure", NULL };
enum options { MESSAGE_CGET, MESSAGE_CONFIGURE };
int index;
int result = TCL_OK;
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
if (objc < 2) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
328 329 330 331 332 333 334 |
switch ((enum options) index) {
case MESSAGE_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
| | | | 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 |
switch ((enum options) index) {
case MESSAGE_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
msgPtr->optionTable, objv[2], msgPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
result = TCL_OK;
}
}
break;
case MESSAGE_CONFIGURE:
if (objc <= 3) {
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
msgPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
msgPtr->tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
result = TCL_OK;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
379 380 381 382 383 384 385 | * Everything associated with the message is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyMessage( | | | 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 |
* Everything associated with the message is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyMessage(
char *memPtr) /* Info about message widget. */
{
Message *msgPtr = (Message *) memPtr;
msgPtr->flags |= MESSAGE_DELETED;
Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(msgPtr->interp, msgPtr->widgetCmd);
if (msgPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
441 442 443 444 445 446 447 |
Message *msgPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not
* already have values for some fields. */
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
| < | | 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 |
Message *msgPtr, /* Information about widget; may or may not
* already have values for some fields. */
int objc, /* Number of valid entries in argv. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[], /* Arguments. */
int flags) /* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
/*
* Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the message.
*/
if (msgPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, NULL,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
MessageTextVarProc, msgPtr);
}
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) msgPtr, msgPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
msgPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* If the message is to display the value of a variable, then set up a
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 |
if (value == NULL) {
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, NULL, msgPtr->string,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
} else {
if (msgPtr->string != NULL) {
ckfree(msgPtr->string);
}
| | | 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 |
if (value == NULL) {
Tcl_SetVar2(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, NULL, msgPtr->string,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
} else {
if (msgPtr->string != NULL) {
ckfree(msgPtr->string);
}
msgPtr->string = strcpy(ckalloc(strlen(value) + 1), value);
}
Tcl_TraceVar2(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, NULL,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
MessageTextVarProc, msgPtr);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
525 526 527 528 529 530 531 |
static void
MessageWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc = NULL;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
| | | 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 |
static void
MessageWorldChanged(
ClientData instanceData) /* Information about widget. */
{
XGCValues gcValues;
GC gc = NULL;
Tk_FontMetrics fm;
Message *msgPtr = instanceData;
if (msgPtr->border != NULL) {
Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(msgPtr->tkwin, msgPtr->border);
}
gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(msgPtr->tkfont);
gcValues.foreground = msgPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
664 665 666 667 668 669 670 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayMessage(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about window. */
{
| | | 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 |
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DisplayMessage(
ClientData clientData) /* Information about window. */
{
Message *msgPtr = clientData;
Tk_Window tkwin = msgPtr->tkwin;
int x, y;
int borderWidth = msgPtr->highlightWidth;
msgPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
if ((msgPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
return;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 |
*/
static void
MessageEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
| | | 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 |
*/
static void
MessageEventProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about window. */
XEvent *eventPtr) /* Information about event. */
{
Message *msgPtr = clientData;
if (((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0))
|| (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify)) {
goto redraw;
} else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
DestroyMessage(clientData);
} else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
793 794 795 796 797 798 799 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
MessageCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
| | | 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
MessageCmdDeletedProc(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
{
Message *msgPtr = clientData;
/*
* This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
* and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
* because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
* widget.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 |
*
* Side effects:
* The text displayed in the message will change to match the variable.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static char *
MessageTextVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about message. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
| > | < < | 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 |
*
* Side effects:
* The text displayed in the message will change to match the variable.
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static char *
MessageTextVarProc(
ClientData clientData, /* Information about message. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */
const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */
const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */
int flags) /* Information about what happened. */
{
Message *msgPtr = clientData;
const char *value;
/*
* If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
* interpreter is going away.
*/
if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
881 882 883 884 885 886 887 |
if (value == NULL) {
value = "";
}
if (msgPtr->string != NULL) {
ckfree(msgPtr->string);
}
msgPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, -1);
| | | 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 |
if (value == NULL) {
value = "";
}
if (msgPtr->string != NULL) {
ckfree(msgPtr->string);
}
msgPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, -1);
msgPtr->string = ckalloc(strlen(value) + 1);
strcpy(msgPtr->string, value);
ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr);
if ((msgPtr->tkwin != NULL) && Tk_IsMapped(msgPtr->tkwin)
&& !(msgPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMessage, msgPtr);
msgPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkObj.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 |
* Tcl_ObjTypes that we can use as screen distances without conversion. The
* "dataKey" below is used to locate the ThreadSpecificData for the current
* thread.
*/
typedef struct {
const Tcl_ObjType *doubleTypePtr;
| < < | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 |
* Tcl_ObjTypes that we can use as screen distances without conversion. The
* "dataKey" below is used to locate the ThreadSpecificData for the current
* thread.
*/
typedef struct {
const Tcl_ObjType *doubleTypePtr;
} ThreadSpecificData;
static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
/*
* The following structure is the internal representation for mm objects.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 |
* A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups. The cache is invalid if tkwin is
* NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
*/
typedef struct WindowRep {
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Cached window; NULL if not found. */
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* MainWindow associated with tkwin. */
| < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 |
* A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups. The cache is invalid if tkwin is
* NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
*/
typedef struct WindowRep {
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Cached window; NULL if not found. */
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* MainWindow associated with tkwin. */
long epoch; /* Value of mainPtr->deletionEpoch at last
* successful lookup. */
} WindowRep;
/*
* Prototypes for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static void DupMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
static void DupPixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj*copyPtr);
static void DupWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,Tcl_Obj*copyPtr);
static void FreeMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static void FreePixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static void FreeWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static ThreadSpecificData *GetTypeCache(void);
static void UpdateStringOfMM(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static int SetMMFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static int SetPixelFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
static int SetWindowFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
/*
* The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
* object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
* initial display-independent settings.
*/
static const Tcl_ObjType pixelObjType = {
"pixel", /* name */
FreePixelInternalRep, /* freeIntRepProc */
DupPixelInternalRep, /* dupIntRepProc */
NULL, /* updateStringProc */
SetPixelFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */
};
/*
* The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
* object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
* initial display-independent settings.
*/
static const Tcl_ObjType mmObjType = {
"mm", /* name */
FreeMMInternalRep, /* freeIntRepProc */
DupMMInternalRep, /* dupIntRepProc */
UpdateStringOfMM, /* updateStringProc */
SetMMFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */
};
/*
* The following structure defines the implementation of the "window"
* Tcl object.
*/
static const Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
"window", /* name */
FreeWindowInternalRep, /* freeIntRepProc */
DupWindowInternalRep, /* dupIntRepProc */
NULL, /* updateStringProc */
SetWindowFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */
};
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetTypeCache --
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
177 178 179 180 181 182 183 |
static ThreadSpecificData *
GetTypeCache(void)
{
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr == NULL) {
| | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 |
static ThreadSpecificData *
GetTypeCache(void)
{
ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
if (tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr == NULL) {
/* Smart initialization of doubleTypePtr without
* hash-table lookup or creating complete Tcl_Obj's */
Tcl_Obj obj;
obj.length = 3;
obj.bytes = (char *)"0.0";
obj.typePtr = NULL;
Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, &obj, &obj.internalRep.doubleValue);
tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr = obj.typePtr;
}
return tsdPtr;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetPixelsFromObjEx --
*
* Attempt to return a pixel value from the Tcl object "objPtr". If the
* object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
283 284 285 286 287 288 289 |
int *intPtr,
double *dblPtr) /* Places to store resulting pixels. */
{
int result, fresh;
double d;
PixelRep *pixelPtr;
static const double bias[] = {
| | < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < | 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 |
int *intPtr,
double *dblPtr) /* Places to store resulting pixels. */
{
int result, fresh;
double d;
PixelRep *pixelPtr;
static const double bias[] = {
1.0, 10.0, 25.4, 0.35277777777777775 /*25.4 / 72.0*/
};
if (objPtr->typePtr != &pixelObjType) {
if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &d) == TCL_OK) {
if (dblPtr != NULL) {
*dblPtr = d;
}
*intPtr = (int) (d<0 ? d-0.5 : d+0.5);
return TCL_OK;
}
}
retry:
fresh = (objPtr->typePtr != &pixelObjType);
if (fresh) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 |
*/
static int
SetPixelFromAny(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object to convert. */
{
const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
const char *string;
char *rest;
double d;
int i, units;
| > | | | | < | > | > | > | | < < > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 |
*/
static int
SetPixelFromAny(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object to convert. */
{
ThreadSpecificData *typeCache = GetTypeCache();
const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
const char *string;
char *rest;
double d;
int i, units;
if (objPtr->typePtr != typeCache->doubleTypePtr
&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &units) == TCL_OK) {
d = (double) units;
units = -1;
/*
* In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid string exists
* in order for int-but-not-string objects to be converted back to
* ints again from pixel obj types.
*/
(void) Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
} else if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &d) == TCL_OK) {
units = -1;
} else {
string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
d = strtod(string, &rest);
if (rest == string) {
goto error;
}
while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
rest++;
}
switch (*rest) {
case '\0':
units = -1;
break;
case 'm':
units = 0;
break;
case 'c':
units = 1;
break;
case 'i':
units = 2;
break;
case 'p':
units = 3;
break;
default:
goto error;
}
}
/*
* Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
*/
typePtr = objPtr->typePtr;
if ((typePtr != NULL) && (typePtr->freeIntRepProc != NULL)) {
typePtr->freeIntRepProc(objPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
633 634 635 636 637 638 639 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* The object from which to get mms. */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store resulting millimeters. */
{
int result;
double d;
MMRep *mmPtr;
static const double bias[] = {
| | | 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 |
Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* The object from which to get mms. */
double *doublePtr) /* Place to store resulting millimeters. */
{
int result;
double d;
MMRep *mmPtr;
static const double bias[] = {
10.0, 25.4, 1.0, 0.35277777777777775 /*25.4 / 72.0*/
};
if (objPtr->typePtr != &mmObjType) {
result = SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr);
if (result != TCL_OK) {
return result;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
747 748 749 750 751 752 753 |
static void
UpdateStringOfMM(
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* pixel obj with string rep to update. */
{
MMRep *mmPtr;
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
| | | 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 |
static void
UpdateStringOfMM(
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* pixel obj with string rep to update. */
{
MMRep *mmPtr;
char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
size_t len;
mmPtr = (MMRep *)objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
/* assert( mmPtr->units == -1 && objPtr->bytes == NULL ); */
if ((mmPtr->units != -1) || (objPtr->bytes != NULL)) {
Tcl_Panic("UpdateStringOfMM: false precondition");
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
789 790 791 792 793 794 795 |
static int
SetMMFromAny(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object to convert. */
{
ThreadSpecificData *typeCache = GetTypeCache();
const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
| | | < < < | > > < < < < < | 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 |
static int
SetMMFromAny(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object to convert. */
{
ThreadSpecificData *typeCache = GetTypeCache();
const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
char *string;
char *rest;
double d;
int units;
MMRep *mmPtr;
if (objPtr->typePtr != typeCache->doubleTypePtr
&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &units) == TCL_OK) {
d = (double) units;
units = -1;
/*
* In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid string exists
* in order for int-but-not-string objects to be converted back to
* ints again from mm obj types.
*/
(void) Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
} else if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &d) == TCL_OK) {
units = -1;
} else {
/*
* It wasn't a known int or double, so parse it.
*/
string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
d = strtod(string, &rest);
if (rest == string) {
error:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad screen distance \"%s\"", string));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "DISTANCE", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 |
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
objPtr->typePtr = NULL;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
| | | | | | 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 |
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
objPtr->typePtr = NULL;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkNewWindowObj --
*
* This function allocates a new Tcl_Obj that refers to a particular
* Tk window.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl object reference, with refcount 0.
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Tcl_Obj *
TkNewWindowObj(
Tk_Window tkwin)
{
Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
TkMainInfo *mainPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr;
WindowRep *winPtr;
SetWindowFromAny(NULL, objPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkOldConfig.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" | < < < < < < < < | < | < < | | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #include "tkWinInt.h" #endif /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static int DoConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, Tk_Uid value, int valueIsUid, char *widgRec); static Tk_ConfigSpec * FindConfigSpec(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, const char *argvName, int needFlags, int hateFlags); static char * FormatConfigInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, char *widgRec); static const char * FormatConfigValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, char *widgRec, char *buffer, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); static Tk_ConfigSpec * GetCachedSpecs(Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecs); static void DeleteSpecCacheTable(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 |
if (tkwin == NULL) {
/*
* Either we're not really in Tk, or the main window was destroyed and
* we're on our way out of the application
*/
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("NULL main window", -1));
| | | 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 |
if (tkwin == NULL) {
/*
* Either we're not really in Tk, or the main window was destroyed and
* we're on our way out of the application
*/
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj("NULL main window", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "NO_MAIN_WINDOW", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
needFlags = flags & ~(TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT - 1);
if (Tk_Depth(tkwin) <= 1) {
hateFlags = TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY;
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 |
/*
* Process the entry.
*/
if (argc < 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"value for \"%s\" missing", arg));
| | | 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 |
/*
* Process the entry.
*/
if (argc < 2) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"value for \"%s\" missing", arg));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE_MISSING", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
arg = Tcl_GetString((Tcl_Obj *) argv[1]);
} else {
arg = argv[1];
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
272 273 274 275 276 277 278 |
if (specPtr->argvName[length] == 0) {
matchPtr = specPtr;
goto gotMatch;
}
if (matchPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"ambiguous option \"%s\"", argvName));
| | | | | 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 |
if (specPtr->argvName[length] == 0) {
matchPtr = specPtr;
goto gotMatch;
}
if (matchPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"ambiguous option \"%s\"", argvName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "OPTION", argvName, (char *)NULL);
return NULL;
}
matchPtr = specPtr;
}
if (matchPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"unknown option \"%s\"", argvName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "OPTION", argvName, (char *)NULL);
return NULL;
}
/*
* Found a matching entry. If it's a synonym, then find the entry that
* it's a synonym for.
*/
gotMatch:
specPtr = matchPtr;
if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM) {
for (specPtr = specs; ; specPtr++) {
if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_END) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"couldn't find synonym for option \"%s\"",
argvName));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "LOOKUP", "OPTION", argvName,
(char *)NULL);
return NULL;
}
if ((specPtr->dbName == matchPtr->dbName)
&& (specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM)
&& ((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) == needFlags)
&& !(specPtr->specFlags & hateFlags)) {
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
340 341 342 343 344 345 346 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing widget (needed to set up
* X resources). */
Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, /* Specifier to apply. */
Tk_Uid value, /* Value to use to fill in widgRec. */
int valueIsUid, /* Non-zero means value is a Tk_Uid; zero
* means it's an ordinary string. */
| | | | > > > > > > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window containing widget (needed to set up
* X resources). */
Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, /* Specifier to apply. */
Tk_Uid value, /* Value to use to fill in widgRec. */
int valueIsUid, /* Non-zero means value is a Tk_Uid; zero
* means it's an ordinary string. */
char *widgRec) /* Record whose fields are to be modified.
* Values must be properly initialized. */
{
char *ptr;
Tk_Uid uid;
int nullValue;
nullValue = 0;
if ((*value == 0) && (specPtr->specFlags & (TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK|32 /* TCL_NULL_OK */))) {
nullValue = 1;
}
if (specPtr->specFlags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
/* Prevent surprises, TK_CONFIG_OBJS is not supported here in 8.6 */
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "TK_CONFIG_OBJS not supported", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
do {
if (specPtr->offset < 0) {
break;
}
ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
switch (specPtr->type) {
case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, value, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_INT:
if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, value, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
if (Tcl_GetDouble(interp, value, (double *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_STRING: {
char *oldStr, *newStr;
if (nullValue) {
newStr = NULL;
} else {
newStr = (char *)ckalloc(strlen(value) + 1);
strcpy(newStr, value);
}
oldStr = *((char **)ptr);
if (oldStr != NULL) {
ckfree(oldStr);
}
*((char **)ptr) = newStr;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_UID:
if (nullValue) {
*((Tk_Uid *)ptr) = NULL;
} else {
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid)value : Tk_GetUid(value);
*((Tk_Uid *)ptr) = uid;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_COLOR: {
XColor *newPtr, *oldPtr;
if (nullValue) {
newPtr = NULL;
} else {
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
newPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, uid);
if (newPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
oldPtr = *((XColor **)ptr);
if (oldPtr != NULL) {
Tk_FreeColor(oldPtr);
}
*((XColor **)ptr) = newPtr;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_FONT: {
Tk_Font newFont;
if (nullValue) {
newFont = NULL;
} else {
newFont = Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, value);
if (newFont == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *)ptr));
*((Tk_Font *)ptr) = newFont;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP: {
Pixmap newBmp, oldBmp;
if (nullValue) {
newBmp = None;
} else {
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
newBmp = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, uid);
if (newBmp == None) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
oldBmp = *((Pixmap *)ptr);
if (oldBmp != None) {
Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), oldBmp);
}
*((Pixmap *)ptr) = newBmp;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_BORDER: {
Tk_3DBorder newBorder, oldBorder;
if (nullValue) {
newBorder = NULL;
} else {
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
newBorder = Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, uid);
if (newBorder == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
oldBorder = *((Tk_3DBorder *)ptr);
if (oldBorder != NULL) {
Tk_Free3DBorder(oldBorder);
}
*((Tk_3DBorder *)ptr) = newBorder;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_RELIEF:
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, uid, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR: {
Tk_Cursor newCursor, oldCursor;
if (nullValue) {
newCursor = NULL;
} else {
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
newCursor = Tk_GetCursor(interp, tkwin, uid);
if (newCursor == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
oldCursor = *((Tk_Cursor *)ptr);
if (oldCursor != NULL) {
Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), oldCursor);
}
*((Tk_Cursor *)ptr) = newCursor;
if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR) {
Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, newCursor);
}
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY:
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
if (Tk_GetJustify(interp, uid, (Tk_Justify *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR:
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
if (Tk_GetAnchor(interp, uid, (Tk_Anchor *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
if (Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, uid, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, uid, (int *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, value, (int *)ptr)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_MM:
if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, value, (double *)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
Tk_Window tkwin2;
if (nullValue) {
tkwin2 = NULL;
} else {
tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, value, tkwin);
if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
*((Tk_Window *)ptr) = tkwin2;
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
if (specPtr->customPtr->parseProc(specPtr->customPtr->clientData,
interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, specPtr->offset)!=TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
default:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad config table: unknown type %d", specPtr->type));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "BAD_CONFIG", (char *)NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
specPtr++;
} while ((specPtr->argvName == NULL) && (specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END));
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
652 653 654 655 656 657 658 |
if ((argvName != NULL) && (specPtr->argvName != argvName)) {
continue;
}
if (((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) != needFlags)
|| (specPtr->specFlags & hateFlags)) {
continue;
}
| | | | 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 |
if ((argvName != NULL) && (specPtr->argvName != argvName)) {
continue;
}
if (((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) != needFlags)
|| (specPtr->specFlags & hateFlags)) {
continue;
}
if ((specPtr->argvName == NULL) || (specPtr->offset < 0)) {
continue;
}
list = FormatConfigInfo(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec);
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, leader, list, "}", (char *)NULL);
ckfree(list);
leader = " {";
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
689 690 691 692 693 694 695 |
FormatConfigInfo(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for things like
* floating-point precision. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window corresponding to widget. */
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
/* Pointer to information describing
* option. */
| | | 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 |
FormatConfigInfo(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter to use for things like
* floating-point precision. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window corresponding to widget. */
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
/* Pointer to information describing
* option. */
char *widgRec) /* Pointer to record holding current values of
* info for widget. */
{
const char *argv[6];
char *result;
char buffer[200];
Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
720 721 722 723 724 725 726 |
argv[3] = "";
}
if (argv[4] == NULL) {
argv[4] = "";
}
result = Tcl_Merge(5, argv);
if (freeProc != NULL) {
| | | | | 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 |
argv[3] = "";
}
if (argv[4] == NULL) {
argv[4] = "";
}
result = Tcl_Merge(5, argv);
if (freeProc != NULL) {
if (freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
ckfree((char *)argv[4]);
} else {
freeProc((char *)argv[4]);
}
}
return result;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
755 756 757 758 759 760 761 |
static const char *
FormatConfigValue(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for use in real conversions. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window corresponding to widget. */
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, /* Pointer to information describing option.
* Must not point to a synonym option. */
| | > > > | | | 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 |
static const char *
FormatConfigValue(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for use in real conversions. */
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Window corresponding to widget. */
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, /* Pointer to information describing option.
* Must not point to a synonym option. */
char *widgRec, /* Pointer to record holding current values of
* info for widget. */
char *buffer, /* Static buffer to use for small values.
* Must have at least 200 bytes of storage. */
Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr) /* Pointer to word to fill in with address of
* function to free the result, or NULL if
* result is static. */
{
void *ptr;
const char *result;
*freeProcPtr = NULL;
if (specPtr->offset < 0) {
return NULL;
}
ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
result = "";
switch (specPtr->type) {
case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
if (*((int *)ptr) == 0) {
result = "0";
} else {
result = "1";
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_INT:
snprintf(buffer, 200, "%d", *((int *)ptr));
result = buffer;
break;
case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *)ptr), buffer);
result = buffer;
break;
case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
856 857 858 859 860 861 862 |
case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
result = Tk_NameOfCapStyle(*((int *)ptr));
break;
case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
result = Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(*((int *)ptr));
break;
case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
| | | | 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 |
case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
result = Tk_NameOfCapStyle(*((int *)ptr));
break;
case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
result = Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(*((int *)ptr));
break;
case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
snprintf(buffer, 200, "%d", *((int *)ptr));
result = buffer;
break;
case TK_CONFIG_MM:
Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *)ptr), buffer);
result = buffer;
break;
case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
tkwin = *((Tk_Window *)ptr);
if (tkwin != NULL) {
result = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
}
break;
}
case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
result = specPtr->customPtr->printProc(specPtr->customPtr->clientData,
tkwin, widgRec, specPtr->offset, freeProcPtr);
break;
default:
result = "?? unknown type ??";
}
return result;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
940 941 942 943 944 945 946 |
if (specPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
result = FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer,
&freeProc);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(result, -1));
if (freeProc != NULL) {
| | | | | 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 |
if (specPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
result = FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer,
&freeProc);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(result, -1));
if (freeProc != NULL) {
if (freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) {
ckfree((char *)result);
} else {
freeProc((char *)result);
}
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 |
{
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
char *ptr;
for (specPtr = specs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END; specPtr++) {
if ((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) != needFlags) {
continue;
}
ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
switch (specPtr->type) {
case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
| > > > | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 |
{
const Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
char *ptr;
for (specPtr = specs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END; specPtr++) {
if ((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) != needFlags) {
continue;
}
if (specPtr->offset < 0) {
continue;
}
ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
switch (specPtr->type) {
case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
if (*((char **)ptr) != NULL) {
ckfree(*((char **)ptr));
*((char **)ptr) = NULL;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_COLOR:
if (*((XColor **)ptr) != NULL) {
Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **)ptr));
*((XColor **)ptr) = NULL;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_FONT:
Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *)ptr));
*((Tk_Font *)ptr) = NULL;
break;
case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP:
if (*((Pixmap *)ptr) != None) {
Tk_FreeBitmap(display, *((Pixmap *)ptr));
*((Pixmap *)ptr) = None;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_BORDER:
if (*((Tk_3DBorder *)ptr) != NULL) {
Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *)ptr));
*((Tk_3DBorder *)ptr) = NULL;
}
break;
case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR:
if (*((Tk_Cursor *)ptr) != NULL) {
Tk_FreeCursor(display, *((Tk_Cursor *)ptr));
*((Tk_Cursor *)ptr) = NULL;
}
}
}
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkOldTest.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | /* * tkOldTest.c -- * * This file contains C command functions for additional Tcl * commands that are used to test Tk's support for legacy * interfaces. These commands are not normally included in Tcl/Tk * applications; they're only used for testing. * * Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. | | > > > | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 |
/*
* tkOldTest.c --
*
* This file contains C command functions for additional Tcl
* commands that are used to test Tk's support for legacy
* interfaces. These commands are not normally included in Tcl/Tk
* applications; they're only used for testing.
*
* Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
* Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation.
* Contributions by Don Porter, NIST, 2007. (not subject to US copyright)
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
*/
#define USE_OLD_IMAGE
#ifndef USE_TCL_STUBS
# define USE_TCL_STUBS
#endif
#ifndef USE_TK_STUBS
# define USE_TK_STUBS
#endif
#include "tkInt.h"
#ifdef _WIN32
#include "tkWinInt.h"
#endif
/*
* The following data structure represents the model for a test image:
*/
typedef struct TImageModel {
Tk_ImageModel model; /* Tk's token for image model. */
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter for application. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 |
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static int ImageObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
| | | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 |
/*
* Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
*/
static int ImageObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* TkOldTestInit --
*
* This function performs initialization for the Tk test suite
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | * Creates several test commands. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ int TkOldTestInit( | | < < < | > < | | | | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 |
* Creates several test commands.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
TkOldTestInit(
Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
static int initialized = 0;
if (!initialized) {
initialized = 1;
Tk_CreateImageType(&imageType);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* ImageCreate --
*
* This function is called by the Tk image code to create "oldtest" images.
*
* Results:
* A standard Tcl result.
*
* Side effects:
* The data structure for a new image is allocated.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static int
ImageCreate(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for application containing
* image. */
char *name, /* Name to use for image. */
int argc, /* Number of arguments. */
char **argv, /* Argument strings for options (doesn't
* include image name or type). */
Tk_ImageType *typePtr, /* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
Tk_ImageModel model, /* Token for image, to be used by us in later
* callbacks. */
ClientData *clientDataPtr) /* Store manager's token for image here; it
* will be returned in later callbacks. */
{
TImageModel *timPtr;
const char *varName;
int i;
varName = "log";
for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) {
if (strcmp(argv[i], "-variable") != 0) {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option name \"",
argv[i], "\"", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if ((i+1) == argc) {
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"",
argv[i], "\" option", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
varName = argv[i+1];
}
timPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(TImageModel));
timPtr->model = model;
timPtr->interp = interp;
timPtr->width = 30;
timPtr->height = 15;
timPtr->imageName = ckalloc(strlen(name) + 1);
strcpy(timPtr->imageName, name);
timPtr->varName = ckalloc(strlen(varName) + 1);
strcpy(timPtr->varName, varName);
Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, ImageObjCmd, timPtr, NULL);
*clientDataPtr = timPtr;
Tk_ImageChanged(model, 0, 0, 30, 15, 30, 15);
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 |
*
* Side effects:
* Forces windows to be created.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
ImageObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Main window for application. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
| > | | 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 |
*
* Side effects:
* Forces windows to be created.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* ARGSUSED */
static int
ImageObjCmd(
ClientData clientData, /* Main window for application. */
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument strings. */
{
TImageModel *timPtr = clientData;
int x, y, width, height;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), "changed") == 0) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 |
static ClientData
ImageGet(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Token for window in which image will be
* used. */
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. */
{
| | | | | 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 |
static ClientData
ImageGet(
Tk_Window tkwin, /* Token for window in which image will be
* used. */
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. */
{
TImageModel *timPtr = clientData;
TImageInstance *instPtr;
char buffer[100];
XGCValues gcValues;
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s get", timPtr->imageName);
Tcl_SetVar2(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, NULL, buffer,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
instPtr = ckalloc(sizeof(TImageInstance));
instPtr->modelPtr = timPtr;
instPtr->fg = Tk_GetColor(timPtr->interp, tkwin, "#ff0000");
gcValues.foreground = instPtr->fg->pixel;
instPtr->gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
return instPtr;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 |
int imageX, int imageY, /* Origin of area to redraw, relative to
* origin of image. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redraw. */
int drawableX, int drawableY)
/* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to
* imageX and imageY. */
{
| | | | 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 |
int imageX, int imageY, /* Origin of area to redraw, relative to
* origin of image. */
int width, int height, /* Dimensions of area to redraw. */
int drawableX, int drawableY)
/* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to
* imageX and imageY. */
{
TImageInstance *instPtr = clientData;
char buffer[200 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 6];
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s display %d %d %d %d %d %d",
instPtr->modelPtr->imageName, imageX, imageY, width, height,
drawableX, drawableY);
Tcl_SetVar2(instPtr->modelPtr->interp, instPtr->modelPtr->varName, NULL,
buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
if (width > (instPtr->modelPtr->width - imageX)) {
width = instPtr->modelPtr->width - imageX;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
353 354 355 356 357 358 359 |
*/
static void
ImageFree(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */
Display *display) /* Display where image was to be drawn. */
{
| | | | 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 |
*/
static void
ImageFree(
ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */
Display *display) /* Display where image was to be drawn. */
{
TImageInstance *instPtr = clientData;
char buffer[200];
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s free", instPtr->modelPtr->imageName);
Tcl_SetVar2(instPtr->modelPtr->interp, instPtr->modelPtr->varName, NULL,
buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
Tk_FreeColor(instPtr->fg);
Tk_FreeGC(display, instPtr->gc);
ckfree(instPtr);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
387 388 389 390 391 392 393 |
static void
ImageDelete(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. When
* this function is called, no more instances
* exist. */
{
| | | < | 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 |
static void
ImageDelete(
ClientData clientData) /* Pointer to TImageModel for image. When
* this function is called, no more instances
* exist. */
{
TImageModel *timPtr = clientData;
char buffer[100];
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%s delete", timPtr->imageName);
Tcl_SetVar2(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, NULL, buffer,
TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
Tcl_DeleteCommand(timPtr->interp, timPtr->imageName);
ckfree(timPtr->imageName);
ckfree(timPtr->varName);
ckfree(timPtr);
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkOption.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
517 518 519 520 521 522 523 |
* option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
* masquerading options.
*/
if (masqName != NULL) {
char *masqClass;
Tk_Uid nodeId, winClassId, winNameId;
| | | | 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 |
* option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
* masquerading options.
*/
if (masqName != NULL) {
char *masqClass;
Tk_Uid nodeId, winClassId, winNameId;
size_t classNameLength;
Element *nodePtr, *leafPtr;
static const int searchOrder[] = {
EXACT_NODE_NAME, WILDCARD_NODE_NAME, EXACT_NODE_CLASS,
WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS, -1
};
const int *currentPtr;
int currentStack, leafCount;
/*
* Extract the masquerade class name from the name field.
*/
classNameLength = (size_t) (masqName - name);
masqClass = (char *)ckalloc(classNameLength + 1);
strncpy(masqClass, name, classNameLength);
masqClass[classNameLength] = '\0';
winClassId = Tk_GetUid(masqClass);
ckfree(masqClass);
winNameId = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->nameUid;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 |
int priority) /* Priority level to use for options in this
* file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
* TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
* TK_MAX_PRIO. */
{
const char *realName;
Tcl_Obj *buffer;
| | < | 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 |
int priority) /* Priority level to use for options in this
* file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
* TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
* TK_MAX_PRIO. */
{
const char *realName;
Tcl_Obj *buffer;
int result, bufferSize;
Tcl_Channel chan;
Tcl_DString newName;
/*
* Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
buffer = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(buffer);
Tcl_SetChannelOption(NULL, chan, "-encoding", "utf-8");
bufferSize = Tcl_ReadChars(chan, buffer, -1, 0);
| | | 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 |
return TCL_ERROR;
}
buffer = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(buffer);
Tcl_SetChannelOption(NULL, chan, "-encoding", "utf-8");
bufferSize = Tcl_ReadChars(chan, buffer, -1, 0);
if (bufferSize == -1) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"error reading file \"%s\": %s",
fileName, Tcl_PosixError(interp)));
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPack.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static void ArrangePacking(ClientData clientData); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); | | < < | 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | /* * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file: */ static void ArrangePacking(ClientData clientData); static int ConfigureContent(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static Tcl_FreeProc DestroyPacker; static Packer * GetPacker(Tk_Window tkwin); static int PackAfter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Packer *prevPtr, Packer *containerPtr, int objc,Tcl_Obj *const objv[]); static void PackStructureProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); static void Unlink(Packer *packPtr); static int XExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityWidth); static int YExpansion(Packer *contentPtr, int cavityHeight); /* |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 |
int halfSpace, /* The left or top padding amount */
int allSpace) /* The total amount of padding */
{
Tcl_Obj *padding[2];
if (halfSpace*2 == allSpace) {
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, bufferObj, Tcl_NewStringObj(switchName, -1),
| | | | | 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 |
int halfSpace, /* The left or top padding amount */
int allSpace) /* The total amount of padding */
{
Tcl_Obj *padding[2];
if (halfSpace*2 == allSpace) {
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, bufferObj, Tcl_NewStringObj(switchName, -1),
Tcl_NewIntObj(halfSpace));
} else {
padding[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(halfSpace);
padding[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(allSpace - halfSpace);
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, bufferObj, Tcl_NewStringObj(switchName, -1),
Tcl_NewListObj(2, padding));
}
}
/*
*------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
195 196 197 198 199 200 201 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
const char *argv2;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
| | | < | < < < | < | | | | | < | > > | > > | > > | 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 |
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interpreter. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */
{
Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
const char *argv2;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
/* after, append, before and unpack are deprecated */
"after", "append", "before", "unpack", "configure",
"content", "forget", "info", "propagate", "slaves", NULL };
enum options {
PACK_AFTER, PACK_APPEND, PACK_BEFORE, PACK_UNPACK, PACK_CONFIGURE,
PACK_CONTENT, PACK_FORGET, PACK_INFO, PACK_PROPAGATE, PACK_SLAVES };
int index;
if (objc >= 2) {
const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
if (string[0] == '.') {
return ConfigureContent(interp, tkwin, objc-1, objv+1);
}
}
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option arg ?arg ...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, objv[1], optionStrings,
"option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
/*
* Call it again without the deprecated ones to get a proper error
* message. This works well since there can't be any ambiguity between
* deprecated and new options.
*/
Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], &optionStrings[4],
"option", 0, &index);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
argv2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
switch ((enum options) index) {
case PACK_AFTER: {
Packer *prevPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin2;
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(prevPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (prevPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, prevPtr->containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
}
case PACK_APPEND: {
Packer *containerPtr;
Packer *prevPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin2;
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr;
if (prevPtr != NULL) {
while (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
}
}
return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
}
case PACK_BEFORE: {
Packer *packPtr, *containerPtr;
Packer *prevPtr;
Tk_Window tkwin2;
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (packPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
containerPtr = packPtr->containerPtr;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 |
if (prevPtr->nextPtr == packPtr) {
break;
}
}
}
return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
}
| < | > > | 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 |
if (prevPtr->nextPtr == packPtr) {
break;
}
}
}
return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, containerPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
}
case PACK_CONFIGURE:
if (argv2[0] != '.') {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"bad argument \"%s\": must be name of window", argv2));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "WINDOW_PATH", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
return ConfigureContent(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2);
case PACK_FORGET: {
Tk_Window content;
Packer *contentPtr;
int i;
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &content) != TCL_OK) {
continue;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) {
continue;
}
if ((contentPtr != NULL) && (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL)) {
Tk_ManageGeometry(content, NULL, NULL);
if (contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin,
contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
Unlink(contentPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
343 344 345 346 347 348 349 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | | 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 |
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &content) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (contentPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"window \"%s\" isn't packed", argv2));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
infoObj = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-in", -1),
TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-anchor", -1),
Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(contentPtr->anchor), -1));
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-expand", -1),
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(contentPtr->flags & EXPAND));
switch (contentPtr->flags & (FILLX|FILLY)) {
case 0:
Tcl_DictObjPut(NULL, infoObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("-fill", -1),
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
397 398 399 400 401 402 403 |
if (objc > 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?boolean?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 |
if (objc > 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?boolean?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
if (objc == 3) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
Tcl_NewBooleanObj(!(containerPtr->flags & DONT_PROPAGATE)));
return TCL_OK;
}
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3], &propagate) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
| | > > | < | < | 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 |
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &container) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(container))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj,
TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->tkwin));
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
break;
}
case PACK_UNPACK: {
Tk_Window tkwin2;
Packer *packPtr;
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2);
if (packPtr && (packPtr->containerPtr != NULL)) {
Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin2, NULL, NULL);
if (packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(packPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(packPtr->tkwin,
packPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
Unlink(packPtr);
Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr->tkwin);
}
break;
}
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 | /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------ * * GetPacker -- * * This internal function is used to locate a Packer structure for a | | > | > > > > | 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 |
/*
*------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* GetPacker --
*
* This internal function is used to locate a Packer structure for a
* window, creating one if one doesn't exist already, except if the window
* is already dead.
*
* Results:
* The return value is a pointer to the Packer structure corresponding to
* tkwin, or NULL when tkwin is already dead.
*
* Side effects:
* A new packer structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set
* up to clean things up when the window is deleted.
*
*------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Packer *
GetPacker(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for window for which packer structure
* is desired. */
{
Packer *packPtr;
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (((TkWindow *) tkwin)->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
return NULL;
}
if (!dispPtr->packInit) {
dispPtr->packInit = 1;
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->packerHashTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 | * Side effects: * The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and again * in the future. * *------------------------------------------------------------------------ */ | < | 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 |
* Side effects:
* The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and again
* in the future.
*
*------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int
PackAfter(
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. */
Packer *prevPtr, /* Pack windows in argv just after this
* window; NULL means pack as first child of
* containerPtr. */
Packer *containerPtr, /* Container in which to pack windows. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 |
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
badWindow:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| | | > > | | | 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 |
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
badWindow:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't pack %s inside %s", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
goto badWindow;
}
if (tkwin == containerPtr->tkwin) {
goto badWindow;
}
if (!(packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin))) {
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Process options for this window.
*/
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[1], &optionCount, &options)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
packPtr->side = TOP;
packPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
packPtr->padX = packPtr->padY = 0;
packPtr->padLeft = packPtr->padTop = 0;
packPtr->iPadX = packPtr->iPadY = 0;
packPtr->flags &= ~(FILLX|FILLY|EXPAND);
packPtr->flags |= OLD_STYLE;
for (index = 0 ; index < optionCount; index++) {
Tcl_Obj *curOptPtr = options[index];
int length;
const char *curOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curOptPtr, &length);
c = curOpt[0];
if ((c == 't')
&& (strncmp(curOpt, "top", length)) == 0) {
packPtr->side = TOP;
} else if ((c == 'b')
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 |
&& (strcmp(curOpt, "fill")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY;
} else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "fillx")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLX;
} else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "filly")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLY;
} else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "padx")) == 0) {
| | | | | 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 |
&& (strcmp(curOpt, "fill")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY;
} else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "fillx")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLX;
} else if ((length == 5) && (strcmp(curOpt, "filly")) == 0) {
packPtr->flags |= FILLY;
} else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "padx")) == 0) {
if (optionCount <= (index+1)) {
missingPad:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"wrong # args: \"%s\" option must be"
" followed by screen distance", curOpt));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "OLDPACK", "BAD_PARAMETER",
NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, options[index+1],
&packPtr->padLeft, &packPtr->padX) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
packPtr->padX /= 2;
packPtr->padLeft /= 2;
packPtr->iPadX = 0;
index++;
} else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "pady")) == 0) {
if (optionCount <= (index+1)) {
goto missingPad;
}
if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, options[index+1],
&packPtr->padTop, &packPtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
packPtr->padY /= 2;
packPtr->padTop /= 2;
packPtr->iPadY = 0;
index++;
} else if ((c == 'f') && (length > 1)
&& (strncmp(curOpt, "frame", length) == 0)) {
if (optionCount <= (index+1)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"wrong # args: \"frame\""
" option must be followed by anchor point", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "OLDPACK", "BAD_PARAMETER",
NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 |
}
if (!(containerPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK)) {
containerPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_REPACK;
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangePacking, containerPtr);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
| < | 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 |
}
if (!(containerPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK)) {
containerPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_REPACK;
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangePacking, containerPtr);
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Unlink --
*
* Remove a packer from its container's list of content.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 |
}
packPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
/*
* If we have emptied this container from content it means we are no longer
* handling it and should mark it as free.
| < < < < | 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 |
}
packPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
/*
* If we have emptied this container from content it means we are no longer
* handling it and should mark it as free.
*/
if ((containerPtr->contentPtr == NULL) && (containerPtr->flags & ALLOCED_CONTAINER)) {
TkFreeGeometryContainer(containerPtr->tkwin, "pack");
containerPtr->flags &= ~ALLOCED_CONTAINER;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 | * Everything associated with the packer is freed up. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DestroyPacker( | | > > > | 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 |
* Everything associated with the packer is freed up.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
DestroyPacker(
char *memPtr) /* Info about packed window that is now
* dead. */
{
Packer *packPtr = (Packer *)memPtr;
if (packPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangePacking, packPtr);
}
ckfree(packPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* PackStructureProc --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 |
nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
if (packPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) packPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable,
| | | | 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 |
nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
if (packPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) packPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable,
(void *)packPtr->tkwin));
}
if (packPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangePacking, packPtr);
}
packPtr->tkwin = NULL;
Tcl_EventuallyFree(packPtr, DestroyPacker);
} else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
/*
* When a container gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation so
* that all of its content get remapped.
*/
if ((packPtr->contentPtr != NULL)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 |
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't pack \"%s\": it's a top-level window",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > > | 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 |
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(content)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't pack \"%s\": it's a top-level window",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(contentPtr = GetPacker(content))) {
continue;
}
contentPtr->flags &= ~OLD_STYLE;
/*
* If the content isn't currently packed, reset all of its configuration
* information to default values (there could be old values left from
* a previous packing).
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 |
if ((i+2) > objc) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"extra option \"%s\" (option with no value?)",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | | > > | 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 |
if ((i+2) > objc) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"extra option \"%s\" (option with no value?)",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "BAD_PARAMETER", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings,
"option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum options) index) {
case CONF_AFTER:
if (j == 0) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(prevPtr = GetPacker(other))) {
continue;
}
if (prevPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
notPacked:
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"window \"%s\" isn't packed",
Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PACK", "NOT_PACKED",
NULL);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 |
break;
case CONF_BEFORE:
if (j == 0) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 |
break;
case CONF_BEFORE:
if (j == 0) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(otherPtr = GetPacker(other))) {
continue;
}
if (otherPtr->containerPtr == NULL) {
goto notPacked;
}
containerPtr = otherPtr->containerPtr;
prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr;
if (prevPtr == otherPtr) {
prevPtr = NULL;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 |
break;
case CONF_IN:
if (j == 0) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | > > | 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 |
break;
case CONF_IN:
if (j == 0) {
if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
!= TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(other))) {
continue;
}
prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr;
if (prevPtr != NULL) {
while (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
}
}
positionGiven = 1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 |
case CONF_PADY:
if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, content, objv[i+1],
&contentPtr->padTop, &contentPtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case CONF_SIDE:
| | | | 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 |
case CONF_PADY:
if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, content, objv[i+1],
&contentPtr->padTop, &contentPtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
break;
case CONF_SIDE:
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], sideNames,
"side", TCL_EXACT, &side) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
contentPtr->side = (Side) side;
break;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 |
/*
* If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has been
* specified, arrange for the content to go at the end of the order for
* its parent.
*/
if (!positionGiven) {
| | > > | 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 |
/*
* If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has been
* specified, arrange for the content to go at the end of the order for
* its parent.
*/
if (!positionGiven) {
if (!(containerPtr = GetPacker(Tk_Parent(content)))) {
continue;
}
prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr;
if (prevPtr != NULL) {
while (prevPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
}
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 |
parent = Tk_Parent(content);
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| | | | | 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 |
parent = Tk_Parent(content);
for (ancestor = containerPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == parent) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't pack %s inside %s", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (content == containerPtr->tkwin) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't pack %s inside itself", Tcl_GetString(objv[j])));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "SELF", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* Check for management loops.
*/
for (container = (TkWindow *)containerPtr->tkwin; container != NULL;
container = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(container)) {
if (container == (TkWindow *)content) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't put %s inside %s, would cause management loop",
Tcl_GetString(objv[j]), Tk_PathName(containerPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "LOOP", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
if (containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(content)) {
((TkWindow *)content)->maintainerPtr = (TkWindow *)containerPtr->tkwin;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPanedWindow.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
221 222 223 224 225 226 227 | static int ConfigurePanes(PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * const objv[]); static void DestroyOptionTables(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp); static int SetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, | | | | | 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | static int ConfigurePanes(PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * const objv[]); static void DestroyOptionTables(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp); static int SetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset, char *oldInternalPtr, int flags); static Tcl_Obj * GetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset); static void RestoreSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr, char *oldInternalPtr); static void AdjustForSticky(int sticky, int cavityWidth, int cavityHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *paneWidthPtr, int *paneHeightPtr); static void MoveSash(PanedWindow *pwPtr, int sash, int diff); static int ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); static char * ComputeSlotAddress(char *recordPtr, int offset); static int PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int x, int y); /* * Sashes are between panes only, so there is one less sash than panes */ |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
271 272 273 274 275 276 277 |
RestoreSticky, /* restoreProc */
NULL, /* freeProc */
0
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 |
RestoreSticky, /* restoreProc */
NULL, /* freeProc */
0
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, background), 0,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-borderwidth", 0},
{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-background", 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, borderWidth),
0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, cursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlepad", "handlePad", "HandlePad",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLEPAD, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handlePad),
0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlesize", "handleSize", "HandleSize",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLESIZE, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handleSizePtr),
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handleSize), 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, heightPtr),
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-opaqueresize", "opaqueResize", "OpaqueResize",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_OPAQUERESIZE, -1,
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, resizeOpaque), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_ORIENT, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, orient),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, orientStrings, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-proxybackground", "proxyBackground", "ProxyBackground",
0, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, proxyBackground),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-proxyborderwidth", "proxyBorderWidth", "ProxyBorderWidth",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PROXYBORDER, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, proxyBorderWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, proxyBorderWidth), 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-proxyrelief", "proxyRelief", "Relief",
0, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, proxyRelief),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, relief), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-sashcursor", "sashCursor", "Cursor",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHCURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashCursor),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashpad", "sashPad", "SashPad",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHPAD, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashPad),
0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-sashrelief", "sashRelief", "Relief",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHRELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashRelief),
0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashwidth", "sashWidth", "Width",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHWIDTH, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashWidthPtr),
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashWidth), 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-showhandle", "showHandle", "ShowHandle",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SHOWHANDLE, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, showHandle),
0, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, widthPtr),
Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
static const Tk_OptionSpec paneOptionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-after", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_AFTER, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, after),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-before", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_BEFORE, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, before),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(Pane, heightPtr),
Tk_Offset(Pane, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HIDE, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, hide), 0,0,GEOMETRY},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_MINSIZE, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, minSize), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, padx), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, pady), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STICKY, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, sticky),
0, &stickyOption, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-stretch", "stretch", "Stretch",
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STRETCH, -1, Tk_Offset(Pane, stretch),
TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, stretchStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(Pane, widthPtr),
Tk_Offset(Pane, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
406 407 408 409 410 411 412 |
pwOpts = (OptionTables *)
Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables", NULL);
if (pwOpts == NULL) {
/*
* The first time this function is invoked, the option tables will be
* NULL. We then create the option tables from the templates and store
| | | | 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 |
pwOpts = (OptionTables *)
Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables", NULL);
if (pwOpts == NULL) {
/*
* The first time this function is invoked, the option tables will be
* NULL. We then create the option tables from the templates and store
* a pointer to the tables as the command's clientData so we'll have
* easy access to it in the future.
*/
pwOpts = ckalloc(sizeof(OptionTables));
/*
* Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct.
*/
Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables",
DestroyOptionTables, pwOpts);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
455 456 457 458 459 460 461 |
/*
* Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the widget,
* otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(pwPtr->tkwin);
| | | 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 |
/*
* Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the widget,
* otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
*/
Tcl_Preserve(pwPtr->tkwin);
if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) pwPtr, pwOpts->pwOptions,
tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(pwPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_CreateEventHandler(pwPtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask,
PanedWindowEventProc, pwPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
502 503 504 505 506 507 508 |
if (ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(pwPtr->proxywin);
Tk_DestroyWindow(pwPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 |
if (ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_DestroyWindow(pwPtr->proxywin);
Tk_DestroyWindow(pwPtr->tkwin);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkNewWindowObj(pwPtr->tkwin));
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
*--------------------------------------------------------------
*
* PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd --
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
547 548 549 550 551 552 553 |
};
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
int index, count, i, x, y;
Tk_Window tkwin;
Pane *panePtr;
if (objc < 2) {
| | | 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 |
};
Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
int index, count, i, x, y;
Tk_Window tkwin;
Pane *panePtr;
if (objc < 2) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg...?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "command",
0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
574 575 576 577 578 579 580 |
case PW_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
| | | | 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 |
case PW_CGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
pwPtr->optionTable, objv[2], pwPtr->tkwin);
if (resultObj == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
break;
case PW_CONFIGURE:
resultObj = NULL;
if (objc <= 3) {
resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
pwPtr->optionTable,
(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, pwPtr->tkwin);
if (resultObj == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
664 665 666 667 668 669 670 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
resultObj = NULL;
for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,
| | | | | | 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 |
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
resultObj = NULL;
for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,
(char *) pwPtr->panes[i], pwPtr->paneOpts,
objv[3], tkwin);
}
}
if (resultObj == NULL) {
if (i == pwPtr->numPanes) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"not managed by this window", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "PANEDWINDOW", "UNMANAGED",
NULL);
}
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
break;
case PW_PANECONFIGURE:
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
"pane ?option? ?value option value ...?");
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
resultObj = NULL;
if (objc <= 4) {
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
pwPtr->tkwin);
if (tkwin == NULL) {
/*
* Just a plain old bad window; Tk_NameToWindow filled in an
* error message for us.
*/
result = TCL_ERROR;
break;
}
for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
(char *) pwPtr->panes[i], pwPtr->paneOpts,
(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL,
pwPtr->tkwin);
if (resultObj == NULL) {
result = TCL_ERROR;
} else {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
}
break;
}
}
} else {
result = ConfigurePanes(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
}
break;
case PW_PANES:
resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultObj,
TkNewWindowObj(pwPtr->panes[i]->tkwin));
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
break;
case PW_PROXY:
result = PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
843 844 845 846 847 848 849 |
* Pre-parse the configuration options, to get the before/after specifiers
* into an easy-to-find location (a local variable). Also, check the
* return from Tk_SetOptions once, here, so we can save a little bit of
* extra testing in the for loop below.
*/
memset((void *)&options, 0, sizeof(Pane));
| | | 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 |
* Pre-parse the configuration options, to get the before/after specifiers
* into an easy-to-find location (a local variable). Also, check the
* return from Tk_SetOptions once, here, so we can save a little bit of
* extra testing in the for loop below.
*/
memset((void *)&options, 0, sizeof(Pane));
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) &options, pwPtr->paneOpts,
objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
pwPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
/*
* If either -after or -before was given, find the numerical index that
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
920 921 922 923 924 925 926 |
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i + 2]),
pwPtr->tkwin);
found = 0;
for (j = 0; j < pwPtr->numPanes; j++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[j] != NULL && pwPtr->panes[j]->tkwin == tkwin) {
| | | 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 |
tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i + 2]),
pwPtr->tkwin);
found = 0;
for (j = 0; j < pwPtr->numPanes; j++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[j] != NULL && pwPtr->panes[j]->tkwin == tkwin) {
Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) pwPtr->panes[j],
pwPtr->paneOpts, objc - firstOptionArg,
objv + firstOptionArg, pwPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
if (pwPtr->panes[j]->minSize < 0) {
pwPtr->panes[j]->minSize = 0;
}
found = 1;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
967 968 969 970 971 972 973 | /* * Create a new pane structure and initialize it. All panes start * out with their "natural" dimensions. */ panePtr = (Pane *)ckalloc(sizeof(Pane)); memset(panePtr, 0, sizeof(Pane)); | | | | 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 |
/*
* Create a new pane structure and initialize it. All panes start
* out with their "natural" dimensions.
*/
panePtr = (Pane *)ckalloc(sizeof(Pane));
memset(panePtr, 0, sizeof(Pane));
Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)panePtr, pwPtr->paneOpts,
pwPtr->tkwin);
Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)panePtr, pwPtr->paneOpts,
objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
pwPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
panePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
panePtr->containerPtr = pwPtr;
doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(panePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
if (panePtr->width > 0) {
panePtr->paneWidth = panePtr->width;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 |
i = sizeof(Pane *) * (pwPtr->numPanes + numNewPanes);
newPanes = (Pane **)ckalloc(i);
memset(newPanes, 0, i);
if (index == -1) {
/*
* If none of the existing panes have to be moved, just copy the old
* and append the new.
*/
| > > > | | > | | | 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 |
i = sizeof(Pane *) * (pwPtr->numPanes + numNewPanes);
newPanes = (Pane **)ckalloc(i);
memset(newPanes, 0, i);
if (index == -1) {
/*
* If none of the existing panes have to be moved, just copy the old
* and append the new.
* Be careful about the case pwPtr->numPanes == 0 since in this case
* pwPtr->panes is NULL, and the memcpy would have undefined behavior.
*/
if (pwPtr->numPanes) {
memcpy(newPanes, pwPtr->panes,
sizeof(Pane *) * pwPtr->numPanes);
}
memcpy(&newPanes[pwPtr->numPanes], inserts,
sizeof(Pane *) * numNewPanes);
} else {
/*
* If some of the existing panes were moved, the old panes array
* will be partially populated, with some valid and some invalid
* entries. Walk through it, copying valid entries to the new panes
* array as we go; when we get to the insert location for the new
* panes, copy the inserts array over, then finish off the old panes
* array.
*/
for (i = 0, j = 0; i < index; i++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[i] != NULL) {
newPanes[j] = pwPtr->panes[i];
j++;
}
}
memcpy(&newPanes[j], inserts, sizeof(Pane *)*insertIndex);
j += firstOptionArg - 2;
for (i = index; i < pwPtr->numPanes; i++) {
if (pwPtr->panes[i] != NULL) {
newPanes[j] = pwPtr->panes[i];
j++;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj( "invalid sash index", -1)); Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "SASH_INDEX", NULL); return TCL_ERROR; } panePtr = pwPtr->panes[sash]; | | | | 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 |
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(
"invalid sash index", -1));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "VALUE", "SASH_INDEX", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
panePtr = pwPtr->panes[sash];
coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(panePtr->sashx);
coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(panePtr->sashy);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, coords));
break;
case SASH_MARK:
if (objc != 6 && objc != 4) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?x y?");
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 |
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
pwPtr->panes[sash]->markx = x;
pwPtr->panes[sash]->marky = y;
} else {
| | | | 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 |
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
pwPtr->panes[sash]->markx = x;
pwPtr->panes[sash]->marky = y;
} else {
coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->panes[sash]->markx);
coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->panes[sash]->marky);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, coords));
}
break;
case SASH_DRAGTO:
case SASH_PLACE:
if (objc != 6) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 |
PanedWindow *pwPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument values. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
int typemask = 0;
| | | 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 |
PanedWindow *pwPtr, /* Information about widget. */
int objc, /* Number of arguments. */
Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument values. */
{
Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
int typemask = 0;
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)pwPtr, pwPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
pwPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &typemask) != TCL_OK) {
Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 |
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
GetSticky(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window),
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to widget record. */
| | | 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 |
*/
static Tcl_Obj *
GetSticky(
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window),
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to widget record. */
int internalOffset) /* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
* sticky value. */
{
int sticky = *(int *)(recordPtr + internalOffset);
char buffer[5];
char *p = &buffer[0];
if (sticky & STICK_NORTH) {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 |
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window for which option is being set. */
Tcl_Obj **value, /* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
* We use a pointer to the pointer because we
* may need to return a value (NULL). */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
| | < | | 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 |
TCL_UNUSED(void *),
Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
TCL_UNUSED(Tk_Window), /* Window for which option is being set. */
Tcl_Obj **value, /* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
* We use a pointer to the pointer because we
* may need to return a value (NULL). */
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
int internalOffset, /* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
* internal value is to be stored. */
char *oldInternalPtr, /* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
int flags) /* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
{
int sticky = 0;
char c, *internalPtr;
const char *string;
internalPtr = ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, internalOffset);
if (flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK && ObjectIsEmpty(*value)) {
*value = NULL;
} else {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 |
switch ((enum options) index) {
case PROXY_COORD:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
| | | | 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 |
switch ((enum options) index) {
case PROXY_COORD:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyx);
coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyy);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, coords));
break;
case PROXY_FORGET:
if (objc != 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 | * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ | | | | | | | 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 |
*
* Side effects:
* None.
*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static char *
ComputeSlotAddress(
char *recordPtr, /* Pointer to the start of a record. */
int offset) /* Offset of a slot within that record; may be < 0. */
{
if (offset >= 0) {
return recordPtr + offset;
} else {
return NULL;
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 |
* Set results. Note that the empty string is the default (this function
* is called inside the implementation of a command).
*/
if (found != -1) {
Tcl_Obj *list[2];
| | | 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 |
* Set results. Note that the empty string is the default (this function
* is called inside the implementation of a command).
*/
if (found != -1) {
Tcl_Obj *list[2];
list[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(found);
list[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj((isHandle ? "handle" : "sash"), -1);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, list));
}
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Deleted generic/tkPkgConfig.c.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to generic/tkPlace.c.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
/*
* Type masks for options:
*/
#define IN_MASK 1
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 |
/*
* Type masks for options:
*/
#define IN_MASK 1
static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL, "nw", -1,
Tk_Offset(Content, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-bordermode", NULL, NULL, "inside", -1,
Tk_Offset(Content, borderMode), TK_OPTION_ENUM_VAR, borderModeStrings, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL, "", Tk_Offset(Content, heightPtr),
Tk_Offset(Content, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-in", NULL, NULL, "", -1, Tk_Offset(Content, inTkwin),
0, 0, IN_MASK},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-relheight", NULL, NULL, "",
Tk_Offset(Content, relHeightPtr), Tk_Offset(Content, relHeight),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-relwidth", NULL, NULL, "",
Tk_Offset(Content, relWidthPtr), Tk_Offset(Content, relWidth),
TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-relx", NULL, NULL, "0", -1,
Tk_Offset(Content, relX), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-rely", NULL, NULL, "0", -1,
Tk_Offset(Content, relY), 0, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL, "", Tk_Offset(Content, widthPtr),
Tk_Offset(Content, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-x", NULL, NULL, "0", Tk_Offset(Content, xPtr),
Tk_Offset(Content, x), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-y", NULL, NULL, "0", Tk_Offset(Content, yPtr),
Tk_Offset(Content, y), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
{TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
};
/*
* Flag definitions for Content structures:
*
* CHILD_WIDTH - 1 means -width was specified;
* CHILD_REL_WIDTH - 1 means -relwidth was specified.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
/*
* For each container window that has a content managed by the placer there is a
* structure of the following form:
*/
typedef struct Container {
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Tk's token for container window. */
| | | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 |
/*
* For each container window that has a content managed by the placer there is a
* structure of the following form:
*/
typedef struct Container {
Tk_Window tkwin; /* Tk's token for container window. */
struct Content *contentPtr; /* First in linked list of content placed
* relative to this container. */
int *abortPtr; /* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
* call to RecomputePlacement already working on
* this window. *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
* abort that nested call. This happens, for
* example, if tkwin or any of its content
* is deleted. */
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 |
Tk_Window tkwin;
Content *contentPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"configure", "content", "forget", "info", "slaves", NULL
};
| < < < | 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 |
Tk_Window tkwin;
Content *contentPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr;
Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
"configure", "content", "forget", "info", "slaves", NULL
};
enum options { PLACE_CONFIGURE, PLACE_CONTENT, PLACE_FORGET, PLACE_INFO, PLACE_SLAVES };
int index;
if (objc < 3) {
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option|pathName args");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
246 247 248 249 250 251 252 |
/*
* Initialize, if that hasn't been done yet.
*/
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (!dispPtr->placeInit) {
| | | | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 |
/*
* Initialize, if that hasn't been done yet.
*/
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (!dispPtr->placeInit) {
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->masterTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->slaveTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
dispPtr->placeInit = 1;
}
return ConfigureContent(interp, tkwin, optionTable, objc-2, objv+2);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
270 271 272 273 274 275 276 |
/*
* Initialize, if that hasn't been done yet.
*/
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (!dispPtr->placeInit) {
| | | | | < < < < < < < < | | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 |
/*
* Initialize, if that hasn't been done yet.
*/
dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (!dispPtr->placeInit) {
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->masterTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->slaveTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
dispPtr->placeInit = 1;
}
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings,
"option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch ((enum options) index) {
case PLACE_CONFIGURE:
if (objc == 3 || objc == 4) {
Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
contentPtr = FindContent(tkwin);
if (contentPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
}
objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *)contentPtr, optionTable,
(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, tkwin);
if (objPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
return TCL_OK;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 |
return TCL_OK;
}
if ((contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) &&
(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin))) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
| | | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 |
return TCL_OK;
}
if ((contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) &&
(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin))) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
(void *)tkwin));
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, ContentStructureProc,
contentPtr);
Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, NULL, NULL);
Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
FreeContent(contentPtr);
break;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
352 353 354 355 356 357 358 |
containerPtr = FindContainer(tkwin);
if (containerPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_Obj *listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr,
| | | 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 |
containerPtr = FindContainer(tkwin);
if (containerPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_Obj *listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr) {
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr,
TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->tkwin));
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listPtr);
}
break;
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
390 391 392 393 394 395 396 |
Tk_OptionTable table)
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Content *contentPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
| | | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 |
Tk_OptionTable table)
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Content *contentPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin, &isNew);
if (!isNew) {
return (Content *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
/*
* No preexisting content structure for that window, so make a new one and
* populate it with some default values.
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FreeContent(
Content *contentPtr)
{
Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) contentPtr, contentPtr->optionTable,
contentPtr->tkwin);
ckfree(contentPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
| > > > | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 |
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
FreeContent(
Content *contentPtr)
{
if (contentPtr->containerPtr && (contentPtr->containerPtr->flags & PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING)) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(RecomputePlacement, contentPtr->containerPtr);
}
Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) contentPtr, contentPtr->optionTable,
contentPtr->tkwin);
ckfree(contentPtr);
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
463 464 465 466 467 468 469 |
static Content *
FindContent(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired content. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
| | | 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 |
static Content *
FindContent(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired content. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin);
if (hPtr == NULL) {
return NULL;
}
return (Content *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
503 504 505 506 507 508 509 |
return;
}
if (containerPtr->contentPtr == contentPtr) {
containerPtr->contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
} else {
for (prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
| | | 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 |
return;
}
if (containerPtr->contentPtr == contentPtr) {
containerPtr->contentPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
} else {
for (prevPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
if (prevPtr == NULL) {
Tcl_Panic("UnlinkContent couldn't find slave to unlink");
}
if (prevPtr->nextPtr == contentPtr) {
prevPtr->nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
break;
}
}
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
544 545 546 547 548 549 550 |
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired container. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Container *containerPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
| | | 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 |
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired container. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
Container *containerPtr;
int isNew;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *)tkwin, &isNew);
if (isNew) {
containerPtr = (Container *)ckalloc(sizeof(Container));
containerPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
containerPtr->contentPtr = NULL;
containerPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
containerPtr->flags = 0;
Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, containerPtr);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
586 587 588 589 590 591 592 |
static Container *
FindContainer(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired container. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
| | | 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 |
static Container *
FindContainer(
Tk_Window tkwin) /* Token for desired container. */
{
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *) tkwin);
if (hPtr == NULL) {
return NULL;
}
return (Container *)Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
}
/*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
"wm command instead", Tk_PathName(tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
contentPtr = CreateContent(tkwin, table);
| | | 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
"wm command instead", Tk_PathName(tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "TOPLEVEL", NULL);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
contentPtr = CreateContent(tkwin, table);
if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)contentPtr, table, objc, objv,
contentPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK) {
goto error;
}
/*
* Set content flags. First clear the field, then add bits as needed.
*/
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
690 691 692 693 694 695 696 |
for (ancestor = win; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
| | | | | 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 |
for (ancestor = win; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
if (ancestor == Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
break;
}
if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't place %s relative to %s",
Tk_PathName(contentPtr->tkwin), Tk_PathName(win)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "HIERARCHY", NULL);
goto error;
}
}
if (contentPtr->tkwin == win) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't place %s relative to itself",
Tk_PathName(contentPtr->tkwin)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "LOOP", NULL);
goto error;
}
/*
* Check for management loops.
*/
for (container = (TkWindow *)win; container != NULL;
container = (TkWindow *)TkGetContainer(container)) {
if (container == (TkWindow *)contentPtr->tkwin) {
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
"can't put %s inside %s, would cause management loop",
Tk_PathName(contentPtr->tkwin), Tk_PathName(win)));
Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TK", "GEOMETRY", "LOOP", NULL);
goto error;
}
}
if (win != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
((TkWindow *)contentPtr->tkwin)->maintainerPtr = (TkWindow *)win;
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
814 815 816 817 818 819 820 |
if (contentPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
}
infoObj = Tcl_NewObj();
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(infoObj, "-in", -1);
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, infoObj,
| | | 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 |
if (contentPtr == NULL) {
return TCL_OK;
}
infoObj = Tcl_NewObj();
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) {
Tcl_AppendToObj(infoObj, "-in", -1);
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, infoObj,
TkNewWindowObj(contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin));
Tcl_AppendToObj(infoObj, " ", -1);
}
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(infoObj,
"-x %d -relx %.4g -y %d -rely %.4g",
contentPtr->x, contentPtr->relX, contentPtr->y, contentPtr->relY);
if (contentPtr->flags & CHILD_WIDTH) {
Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(infoObj, " -width %d", contentPtr->width);
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 |
case DestroyNotify:
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = nextPtr) {
contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
| | | | 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 |
case DestroyNotify:
for (contentPtr = containerPtr->contentPtr; contentPtr != NULL;
contentPtr = nextPtr) {
contentPtr->containerPtr = NULL;
nextPtr = contentPtr->nextPtr;
contentPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
}
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable,
(char *) containerPtr->tkwin));
if (containerPtr->flags & PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING) {
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(RecomputePlacement, containerPtr);
}
containerPtr->tkwin = NULL;
if (containerPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
*containerPtr->abortPtr = 1;
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 |
Content *contentPtr = (Content *)clientData;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) contentPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) {
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
}
| | | | 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 |
Content *contentPtr = (Content *)clientData;
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) contentPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
if (contentPtr->containerPtr != NULL) {
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
}
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
(char *) contentPtr->tkwin));
FreeContent(contentPtr);
}
}
/*
*----------------------------------------------------------------------
*
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) contentPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
| | | | 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 |
TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) contentPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
if (contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(contentPtr->tkwin)) {
Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(contentPtr->tkwin, contentPtr->containerPtr->tkwin);
}
Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
UnlinkContent(contentPtr);
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
(char *) tkwin));
Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, ContentStructureProc,
contentPtr);
FreeContent(contentPtr);
}
/*
* Local Variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* End:
*/
|
Changes to generic/tkPlatDecls.h.
1 2 3 4 5 | /* * tkPlatDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform-specific public Tcl API. * | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | /* * tkPlatDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform-specific public Tcl API. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TKPLATDECLS #define _TKPLATDECLS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | EXTERN void Tk_PointerEvent(HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 5 */ EXTERN int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result); #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ | | > > > > > > | > | > | > | | > | | | | | | | | | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 |
EXTERN void Tk_PointerEvent(HWND hwnd, int x, int y);
/* 5 */
EXTERN int Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam,
LRESULT *result);
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
/* 0 */
EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler(
Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc,
Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc);
/* 1 */
EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus(void);
/* 2 */
EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor(int tkOwnsIt);
/* 3 */
EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitMenus(Tcl_Interp *interp);
/* 4 */
EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp);
/* 5 */
EXTERN void TkGenWMConfigureEvent(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int flags);
/* 6 */
EXTERN void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin);
/* 7 */
EXTERN void * TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable);
/* 8 */
EXTERN void * TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable);
/* 9 */
EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier(void);
/* 10 */
EXTERN int Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront(void);
/* 11 */
EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow(void *w);
/* 12 */
EXTERN void * Tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable(Drawable drawable);
/* 13 */
EXTERN void * Tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable(Drawable drawable);
/* Slot 14 is reserved */
/* Slot 15 is reserved */
/* 16 */
EXTERN void TkGenWMConfigureEvent_(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
int width, int height, int flags);
#endif /* AQUA */
typedef struct TkPlatStubs {
int magic;
void *hooks;
#if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
Window (*tk_AttachHWND) (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 0 */
HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) (void); /* 1 */
HWND (*tk_GetHWND) (Window window); /* 2 */
Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) (HWND hwnd); /* 3 */
void (*tk_PointerEvent) (HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 4 */
int (*tk_TranslateWinEvent) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result); /* 5 */
#endif /* WIN */
#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
void (*tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) (Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc); /* 0 */
void (*tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) (void); /* 1 */
void (*tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) (int tkOwnsIt); /* 2 */
void (*tkMacOSXInitMenus) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 3 */
void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 4 */
void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 5 */
void (*tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 6 */
void * (*tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) (Drawable drawable); /* 7 */
void * (*tkMacOSXGetRootControl) (Drawable drawable); /* 8 */
void (*tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) (void); /* 9 */
int (*tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) (void); /* 10 */
Tk_Window (*tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow) (void *w); /* 11 */
void * (*tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 12 */
void * (*tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 13 */
void (*reserved14)(void);
void (*reserved15)(void);
void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent_) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 16 */
#endif /* AQUA */
} TkPlatStubs;
extern const TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubsPtr;
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 | (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_HWNDToWindow) /* 3 */ #define Tk_PointerEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_PointerEvent) /* 4 */ #define Tk_TranslateWinEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_TranslateWinEvent) /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ | | | | | > > > > | | < > > | | | 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_HWNDToWindow) /* 3 */ #define Tk_PointerEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_PointerEvent) /* 4 */ #define Tk_TranslateWinEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_TranslateWinEvent) /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #define Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) /* 0 */ #define Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) /* 1 */ #define Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) /* 2 */ #define TkMacOSXInitMenus \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitMenus) /* 3 */ #define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) /* 4 */ #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMConfigureEvent) /* 5 */ #define TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) /* 6 */ #define TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) /* 7 */ #define TkMacOSXGetRootControl \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetRootControl) /* 8 */ #define Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) /* 9 */ #define Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) /* 10 */ #define Tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXGetTkWindow) /* 11 */ #define Tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXGetCGContextForDrawable) /* 12 */ #define Tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXGetNSWindowForDrawable) /* 13 */ /* Slot 14 is reserved */ /* Slot 15 is reserved */ #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent_ \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMConfigureEvent_) /* 16 */ #endif /* AQUA */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #ifdef __cplusplus |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/tkPointer.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* * tkPointer.c -- * * This file contains functions for emulating the X server pointer and * grab state machine. This file is used by the Mac and Windows platforms * to generate appropriate enter/leave events, and to update the global * grab window information. * |